JP2024019295A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of improving an interest in a game of a player.

SOLUTION: A period performance formed of a first performance for indicating whether or not, a first condition is established, and a second performance for determining a performance mode of the first performance, is repeatedly executed by period performance execution means. A first condition is established when a first requirement in which, a low probability state is set by probability setting means, and a second requirement in which, a prescribed number of determination is executed by first determination means, in a state in which a first game state is set, are satisfied. According to establishment information of the first or second requirement, a performance mode of the period performance is set by the period performance mode setting means. Therefore, it is possible to improve an interest in a game of a player.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2024,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine typified by a pachinko machine.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on winning a win (for example, a variable probability state where the probability of winning is high) is set, and the period during which the advantageous gaming state continues. There are games that indicate to the player whether or not the game will end based on the result of the performance (for example, a battle performance). In this conventional gaming machine, since the period during which an advantageous gaming state will continue can be indicated by the performance, it is possible to make the player interested in the performance performed. This was intended to increase interest.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2011-143197

However, there is a need for further improvement in interest.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve a player's interest in playing games.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a first discriminating means that performs discriminating when a predetermined discriminating condition is satisfied, and a first discriminating result by the first discriminating means is a predetermined first discriminating means. a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game when the first determination result is a first determination result; a high probability state in which the first determination result by the first determination means is likely to be the predetermined first determination result; and the high probability state. a low probability state in which the first discrimination result by the first discrimination means is less likely to be the predetermined first discrimination result; and the high probability state is set by the probability setting means. and a second discriminating means that executes discrimination when the predetermined discriminating condition is satisfied, and the probability setting means is configured such that the second discriminating result by the second discriminating means is the predetermined second discriminating means. If the determination result is a determination result, the low probability state is set. A game state setting means capable of setting a second game state that is difficult to establish, and a period performance execution means for executing a period performance for notifying a period in which the first game state is set, using the game state setting means. and the gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state when a first condition is satisfied in a state where the first gaming state is set, and the gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state when the first gaming state is set, and executes the period effect. The means repeatedly executes the period performance, which is composed of a first performance for indicating whether or not the first condition is satisfied, and a second performance for determining a performance mode of the first performance. The first condition is a first requirement that the low probability state is set by the probability setting means, and a predetermined number of determinations are performed by the first determination means in the state where the first gaming state is set. and a second requirement that is satisfied, and period presentation mode setting means for setting a presentation mode of the period presentation in response to information on the establishment of the first requirement or the second requirement. It has the following.

The gaming machine according to a second aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein the period performance mode setting means has a second performance mode setting means for setting the performance mode of the second performance.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the period performance mode setting means differs when either the first requirement or the second requirement is satisfied. This is for setting the performance mode.

The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to claim 3, further comprising a remaining period determining means for determining a remaining period until the second requirement is satisfied, and the period presentation mode setting means is configured to determine the remaining period until the second requirement is satisfied. This is to set a performance mode of the period performance corresponding to the determination result of the remaining period determination means when one requirement is satisfied.

The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the period effect execution means executes the period effect being executed in the first period when a predetermined effect switching condition is satisfied. 2 performance to the first performance, and the performance switching condition is satisfied in a case where the high probability state is set by the probability setting means and a case where the low probability state is set. They differ in ease of use.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the first discrimination means executes discrimination when the predetermined discrimination condition is satisfied, and the first discrimination result by the first discrimination means is the predetermined first discrimination result. In this case, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game, a high probability state in which the first determination result by the first determination means is more likely to become the predetermined first determination result, and a higher probability state than the high probability state. a probability setting means capable of setting a low probability state in which the first discrimination result by the discrimination means is unlikely to be the predetermined first discrimination result, and a state in which the high probability state is set by the probability setting means, The method further comprises a second discriminating means that performs discrimination when the predetermined discriminating condition is satisfied, and the probability setting means determines when the second discriminating result by the second discriminating means is the predetermined second discriminating result. The low probability state is set as the gaming state, and the gaming state includes a first gaming state in which the predetermined discriminating condition is more likely to be met, and a second gaming state in which the predetermined discriminating condition is more difficult to satisfy than the first gaming state. a game state setting means capable of setting a game state; and a period performance execution means for executing a period performance for notifying a period in which the first game state is set by the game state setting means. , the gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state when a first condition is satisfied in a state where the first gaming state is set, and the period effect execution means sets the second gaming state when the first gaming state is set. The period effect is repeatedly executed, which is composed of a first effect for indicating whether or not one condition is satisfied, and a second effect for determining the mode of effect of the first effect. The first condition is that the low probability state is set by the probability setting means, and the second condition is that the first determination means performs a predetermined number of determinations in the state where the first gaming state is set. The present invention is satisfied when both of and are satisfied, and includes a period presentation mode setting means for setting a presentation mode of the period presentation in response to information on the establishment of the first requirement or the second requirement. .

Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to the second aspect, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the following effects are achieved. That is, the period effect mode setting means has a second effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the second effect.

Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the period presentation mode setting means sets a different presentation mode when either the first requirement or the second requirement is satisfied.

Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine according to claim 3, the following effects are achieved. That is, there is a remaining period determining means for determining the remaining period until the second requirement is met, and the period presentation mode setting means is adapted to the determination result of the remaining period determining means when the first requirement is satisfied. This is to set the performance mode of the corresponding period performance.

Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the period performance execution means switches the period performance being executed from the second performance to the first performance when a predetermined performance switching condition is satisfied, and the probability setting means switches the period performance that is being executed from the second performance to the first performance. The ease with which the performance switching condition is satisfied is made different depending on whether the state is set or the low probability state is set.

Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the displacement unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of a left displacement member and a right displacement member. FIG. 6 is a rear perspective view of a left displacement member and a right displacement member. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a front view of the displacement unit in a 1st aspect. 20 is a rear view of the displacement unit as seen from the rear in FIG. 19. FIG. It is a front view of the displacement unit in a 1st aspect. 22 is a rear view of the displacement unit as seen from the rear in FIG. 21. FIG. It is a front view of the displacement unit in a 1st aspect. 24 is a rear view of the displacement unit as seen from the rear in FIG. 23. FIG. It is a front view of the displacement unit in a 2nd aspect. 26 is a rear view of the displacement unit as seen from the rear in FIG. 25. FIG. It is a front view of the displacement unit in a 3rd aspect. 28 is a rear view of the displacement unit as seen from the rear in FIG. 27. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the projection unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the projection unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the projection unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the rear base. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the front base and the irradiation unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the front base. 35 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the front base and the irradiation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVI in FIG. 34. FIG. It is a front view of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. 38 is a partial cross-sectional view of the projection plate member, gear member, and groove forming member taken along the line XXXVIII-XXXVIII in FIG. 37. FIG. (a) is a rear view of the projection unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the projection unit taken along the line XXXIXb-XXXIXb in FIG. 39(a). (a) to (c) are partially enlarged sectional views of the projection unit. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (a) is a top view of the irradiation unit, and (b) is a front view of the irradiation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XLIVb in FIG. 44(a). (a) is a rear view of the irradiation unit as seen in the direction of arrow XLVa in FIG. 44(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the irradiation unit taken along the line XLVb-XLVb in FIG. 44(b). (a) is a front view of the first block, (b) is a sectional view of the first block taken along the XLVIb-XLVIb line in FIG. 46(a), and (c) is a front view of the second block. 46(d) is a cross-sectional view of the second block taken along the line XLVId-XLVId in FIG. 46(c). It is a front view of a vertical displacement unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the vertical displacement unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the vertical displacement unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in the first position. It is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in an intermediate position. FIG. 7 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in the second position. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit in the first position. FIG. 6 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit in an intermediate position. FIG. 6 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit in the second position. (a) is a rear view of the transmission gear and the connection member in the first position, (b) is a rear view of the transmission gear and the connection member in the intermediate position, and (c) is a rear view of the transmission gear and the connection member in the second position. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the gear and the connecting member. (a) to (c) are rear views of the transmission gear and the connecting member in the first drive range. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along the line LIXa-LIXa in FIG. 54, (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 55, and (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. , is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along the line LIXc-LIXc in FIG. 56. (a) is a front view of the projection plate member, gear member, and groove forming member in the second embodiment, and (b) is a front view of the projection plate member, gear member, and groove taken along the line LXb-LXb in FIG. 60(a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a forming member. FIG. 3 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. FIG. 3 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. FIG. 3 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (a) is a front view of the projection plate member, gear member, and groove forming member in the third embodiment, and (b) is a front view of the projection plate member, gear member, and groove taken along the line LXIVb-LXIVb in FIG. 64(a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a forming member. (a) is a side view of the projection plate member, gear member, and groove forming member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 64(a), and (b) is a side view of the projection plate as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 65(c) is a sectional view of the projection plate member, gear member, and groove forming member taken along the line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. 65(a). FIG. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (a) is a top view of an irradiation unit in a fourth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the irradiation unit. (a) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of a projection unit in the vicinity of the first block, and (b) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit in the vicinity of the second block. It is a front view of the projection unit in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the front base. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the projection unit. (a) is a front view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a front view of the projection unit in the second state. (a) is a rear view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a rear view of the projection unit in the second state. (a) is a front view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a front view of the projection unit in the third state. (a) is a rear view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a rear view of the projection unit in the second state. FIG. 7 is a front view of a projection unit in a sixth embodiment. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit. FIG. 7 is a rear view of the front base in a state where the front base and the irradiation unit are assembled. (a) to (c) are rear views of the projection unit. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the display area of the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram showing an example. (a) and (b) are timing charts showing the gaming state and performance contents in the first control example. (a) is a timing chart showing the performance content of the jackpot performance 1 in the first control example, and (b) is a timing chart showing the performance content of the jackpot performance 2 in the first control example. (a) is a timing chart showing the production content of jackpot production 3 in the first control example, and (b) is a timing chart showing another example of the production content of jackpot production 1 in the first control example. It is. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the time when the additional effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example is started, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the time when the additional effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example is It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a jackpot continuation performance among the top-up performances displayed on the 3-symbol display device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the number of rounds is added among the additional effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the number of rounds is added. It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a jackpot continuation effect among the additional effects displayed on the third symbol display device in one control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the jackpot ending screen among the top-up effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the ending screen of the jackpot in the first control example. It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a jackpot is completed among the additional effects displayed on the third symbol display device in . (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during special symbol high-speed fluctuation after the end of the jackpot among the additional effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during special symbol high-speed fluctuation after the end of the jackpot. , is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a jackpot continuous effect among the additional effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during special symbol high-speed fluctuation after the end of the jackpot among the normal winning effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example; (b) This is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a jackpot is won among the normal winning effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. , is a timing chart showing the flow of the battle mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode in battle mode displayed on a 3rd pattern display device in a 1st example of control. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a pre-battle effect in the battle mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of battle reach among the battle modes displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. (a) It is a figure showing an example of the display mode of battle reach among the battle modes displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the third symbol display in the first control example. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode when a battle reach is won among the battle modes displayed on a device. (a) Of the battle modes displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, it is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the case of a draw in battle reach, and (b) It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode when a battle reach is defeated among the battle modes displayed on a 3rd symbol display device. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a battle reach revival effect among the battle modes displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. (a) to (d) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the HP display area displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. (a) Of the suggestion effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, it is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during the omen effect; It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a countdown effect among the suggestion effects displayed on the display device. It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a specific effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. (a) and (b) are timing charts showing the flow of suggestion performances executed within one variation among the suggestion performances displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. It is a timing chart showing the flow of suggestion performances executed in multiple variations among the suggestion performances displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of the expectation level suggestion effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of the expectation level suggestion effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing the flow of the expectation level suggestion effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the first random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the main controller in the first control example. It is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the second winning random number table set in the ROM. It is a figure which showed typically the regulation content of the 1st winning type selection table set to ROM of the main control device in the 1st control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, and (b) is a block diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the variation pattern table for jackpot. (c) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the (normal) variation pattern table for deviations, and (d) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the (probable) fluctuation pattern table for deviations. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of a special fluctuation pattern table among the fluctuation pattern selection tables set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example. It is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the jackpot transition setting table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the state transition table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the state transition 1 table. (c) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the state transition 2 table, and (d) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the state transition 3 table. , (e) are diagrams schematically showing the stipulated contents of the state transition 4 table, and (f) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the state transition 5 table. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the state transition 6 table among the state transition tables set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the state transition 7 table. FIG. 6 is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the table, (c) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the state transition 8 table, and (d) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the state transition 9 table. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of various counters in a first control example. ((a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the first control example. be. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the special symbol reserved ball number counter in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the reserved rank selection table in the first control example. (c) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the jackpot performance selection table. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the add-on number selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the continuous production mode selection table. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the continuation value main selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the first continuation value sub-selection table. (c) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the second continuation value sub-selection table. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the final mode selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram explaining the contents of the effect set as the final mode. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the expectation level selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the expectation level performance selection table. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams illustrating power-on images in the first control example. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surface B. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table in a first control example. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table in a first control example. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list in a first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing special symbol fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation|variation frequency subtraction process performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting prize winning process performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetching process performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passing process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flow chart showing winning information command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the win related command process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart showing a jackpot effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process during an additional production performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the additional display process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart showing the jackpot post effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the extension management process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation production setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation value setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the expectation effect setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the countdown effect setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the multiple variation effect setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows V interrupt processing. 7 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 3 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the winning related command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing a round process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 3 is a flowchart showing several command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ending command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (a) is a flowchart showing back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 3 is a flowchart showing error command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation value related command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the expectation level production related command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the countdown effect related command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display device in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which showed warning image setting processing performed by MPU in a display control device in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 1st example of control. (a) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 3 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing. 7 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 7 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the accessory effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the example of adding effect of the first control example. (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of the display mode of the accessory effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the effect addition example of the first control example, and (b) is a diagram illustrating the effect addition of the first control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode which resets the title displayed on the 3rd pattern display device in an example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the example of adding effects to the first control example; FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of FIG. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the regulation contents of the transformation pattern table in the production addition example of the first control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the regulation contents of the title system selection table in the production addition example of the first control example. It is a figure which schematically showed the content, and (c) is a figure which schematically showed the regulation content of the title selection table in the example of addition of effects of the first control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the accessory action level selection table in the example of adding effects of the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a group of effect settings in the example of adding effects of the first control example. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 2 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in the example of addition of effects of the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows frame button input monitoring and production processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the production addition example of the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the change process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus in the example of adding effects of the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the title setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the example of addition of a production|presentation of a 1st control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the second control example, and (b) is the prescribed content of the fall lottery table set in the ROM of the main control device in the second control example. (c) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the fall state transition table set in the ROM of the main controller in the second control example, and (d) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the falling state transition 1 table among the falling state transition tables set in the ROM of the main control device in the second control example, and (e) FIG. 2 is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of a fall state transition 2 table among the fall state transition tables set in the ROM of the main controller in the example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the example of adding effects to the second control example. FIG. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the continuation production mode selection 3 table in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the final mode selection 3 table in the second control example. FIG. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which shows the state determination process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a fluctuation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in another example of the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the stipulated contents of the fluctuation pattern table after a fall. FIG. It is a flow chart showing countdown effect setting processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in another example of effects. It is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/performance processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in another example of production. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the third control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the third control example. It is a figure which showed typically the regulation content of the 1st winning type selection table set to ROM of the main control device in the 3rd control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the third control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the regulation contents of the variation pattern selection table in the third control example. Among them, it is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the (probable variable) variation pattern table for jackpot, and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the (probable variable) variation pattern table for the first miss in the variation pattern selection table in the third control example. It is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the table, and (d) schematically shows the stipulated contents of the second deviation (probable variation) fluctuation pattern table among the fluctuation pattern selection tables in the third control example. FIG. 6E is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a special (probable variable) variation pattern table among the variation pattern selection tables in the third control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the fluctuation scenario setting table set in the ROM of the main controller in the third control example, and (b) to (d) are diagrams schematically showing the prescribed contents of the fluctuation scenario setting table set in the ROM of the main controller in the third control example. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of fluctuation scenarios 1 to 3 stipulated in the fluctuation scenario table. (a) to (d) are diagrams each schematically showing the stipulated contents of fluctuation scenarios 4 to 7 stipulated in the fluctuation scenario table in the third control example. (a) to (d) are diagrams each schematically showing the stipulated contents of fluctuation scenarios 8 to 11 stipulated in the fluctuation scenario table in the third control example. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the audio lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example, and (b) is a block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the first continuation value main selection table set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the third control example. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of a second continuation value main selection table set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in a third control example. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of a third continuation value main selection table set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in a third control example. It is a figure which showed typically the regulation content of the continuation production mode selection 4 table set in ROM of the audio lamp control device in the 3rd example of control. FIG. 3 is a block diagram schematically showing the electrical configuration of a display control device in a third control example. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variation frequency|count subtraction process 4 performed by MPU in a main control apparatus in a 3rd control example. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a third control example. It is a flow chart showing winning information command processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation production setting process 4 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 3rd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation value setting process 4 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 3rd example of control. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 4 executed by the MPU in the display control device in a third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation value related command process 4 performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows final mode command processing performed by MPU in a display control device in a 3rd example of control. It is a block diagram showing the composition of ROM of the main control device in another control example of the third control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the composition of the RAM of the main control device in another control example of the third control example. It is. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the first random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in another control example of the third control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the first random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in another control example of the third control example. It is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a small winning type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in another control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the fluctuation scenario A1 specified in the fluctuation scenario setting table set in the ROM of the main controller in another control example of the third control example, and (b) ) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the post-small hit fluctuation scenario stipulated in the fluctuation scenario setting table set in the ROM of the main controller in another control example of the third control example. It is a timing chart showing the flow of presentation in another example of the suggestion presentation explained in the first control example. It is a timing chart showing the flow of presentation in another example of the suggestion presentation explained in the first control example. It is a flow chart showing countdown effect setting processing 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in another example of the suggestive effect explained in the first control example. It is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/performance processing 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in another example of the suggestive performance explained in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing the second omen effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in another example of the suggestive effect explained in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variable display setting process 6 in the additional explanation of the first control example. It is a timing chart showing the flow of performance in another example of the expectation level suggestion performance explained in the first control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams schematically showing display screens in another example of the expectation level suggestion effect explained in the first control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams schematically showing display screens in another example of the expectation level suggestion effect explained in the first control example. It is a flow chart showing countdown effect setting processing 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in another example of the expectation level suggestion effect explained in the first control example. It is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/performance processing 7 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in another example of the expectation level suggestion performance explained in the first control example.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 59, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 1 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame 2 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and a pachinko machine 1 which is formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 2. The inner frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 4. A frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 4 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the front door serves as the opening/closing axis on the side where the hinges 19 are provided. 5 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are respectively unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 5c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates 8 is disposed on the back side of the front door 5, and the front side of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the glass unit 16.

On the front door 5, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface and protrudes forward, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the super reach performance. Ru.

The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door 5 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination parts 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window part 5c. In the pachinko machine 1, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, at the upper left side of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1), there is provided an indicator lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can indicate when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination part 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2)) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 5c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 1, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface formed in the center thereof for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive a ball to the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of balls during a period of being pressed, and rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by a change in electrical resistance is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes. The ball is fired with a strength (launching strength) corresponding to the player's operation, thereby driving the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and includes a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 76, 77, and a general prize winning machine. It is constructed by assembling the opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display unit 80, etc., and its peripheral portion is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It can be attached to the back side of the The base plate 60 is made of wood with thin plates pasted together, and is formed so that the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player. The general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are installed in the through holes of the game board 13. It is fixed from the front side with tapping screws, etc.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window 5c of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 77 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is installed, and at the inside position of the outer rail 77, a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 77 is installed. An arcuate inner rail 76 formed of The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and back sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is an area defined by the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 76 and 77 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. (area where the ball falls).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (top left in FIG. 2) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated.

First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed at the lower left side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming status of the pachinko machine 1. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are configured to be used depending on whether the ball has won into the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, and on the other hand, when the ball enters the second winning hole 140, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the changing probability mode, shortening time mode, or normal mode by the lighting state, or indicate whether it is in the variable mode by the lighting state. , The lighting state indicates whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a guaranteed variable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol, and the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates whether the round is in the middle of a jackpot. Displays numbers and errors. Note that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the respective LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, it is possible to indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 1 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In this pachinko machine 1, a lottery is held when a prize is won in either the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it is determined to be a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots determined here are 15R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the variation ends, but also display a symbol according to the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot. .

Here, the "15R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 and then shifts to a high probability state, and the "4R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. It is a variable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, after which the jackpot transitions to a low probability state, and the time is shortened for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of a jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (probability fluctuation).In other words, a game that is easy to transition to a special gaming state. It refers to the state of The high probability state (during probability change) in this embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, increases and the ball easily enters the second winning hole 140. "Low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of winning is not changing, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is changing. In addition, the time saving state (medium time saving) among the "low probability states" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability is the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 140 is increased. Refers to the state of the game in which it is easy to win a ball. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is in a normal state, it is in a gaming state where the probability is not changing or the time is being shortened (a state where neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the second symbol has increased).

During the probability change and time saving, not only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time during which the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second prize opening 140 is opened is changed, and it is longer than during the normal period. The time is set. When the first electric accessory 140a is in an open state (open state), the access to the second prize opening 140 is different from when the first electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (closed state). The ball is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, during the probability change or time saving period, the ball is likely to enter the second prize opening 140, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second prize opening 140, or in addition to changing the opening time, one winning The first electric accessory 140a may be opened more often than usual. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol does not change, and the time when the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 is opened and the first electric accessory At least one of the number of times 140a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the time when the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second prize opening 140 is released, and the first electric accessory 140a and the second electric accessory 82 are released with one win. It may be possible to change only the winning probability of the second symbol to be increased compared to the normal one without changing the number of times the second symbol is played.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Furthermore, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 displays a third symbol in synchronization with the variable display in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, triggered by a winning (starting prize) in either the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that displays symbols in a variable manner, and an LED that displays a second symbol in a variable manner triggered by the passage of a ball through the first through gate 66 A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided.

Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is made visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle, and lower three Two symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It looks like this. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment is different from the first symbol display device 37A, 37B that displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4). A decorative display is made in accordance with the display on the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

The second symbol display device alternately displays an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the first through gate 66. This is a variable display that lights up. In the pachinko machine 1, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the pachinko machine 1, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the "○" symbol), the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter when the gaming state is changing probability or during time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and time saving periods, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short period of time, so it is possible to perform more winning lots than during normal times. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given more chances to have the first electric accessory 140a of the second winning opening 140 in the open state. Therefore, during probability change and time saving, it is possible to make it easy for balls to enter the second winning opening 140.

In addition, during the probability change or time reduction, the second winning hole can be opened during the probability change or time reduction by other methods, such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time or number of openings of the first electric accessory 140a per win, etc. 140 and the third winning hole, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if you set the time required for the variable display of the second symbol to be shorter during the probability change or time saving period than during the normal period, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, or the winning probability may be set to be constant regardless of the gaming state. The opening time and number of openings of the first electric accessory 140a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured so that a portion of the balls flowing down the game board among the balls shot onto the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, an "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and even if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "○" is displayed. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times a ball passes through the first through gate 66 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of balls held is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and a second symbol holding lamp (not shown) is displayed. ) is also lit up. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided, corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device. This may be done using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the maximum number of balls that can be held for passing through the first through gate 66 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (e.g., eight). . Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol retention lamp.

A first prize opening 64 through which a ball can be won is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first winning port switch, the main controller 110 A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 140 in which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball enters the second winning port 140, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the second winning port switch, the main control device 110 ( (See FIG. 4), a jackpot lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 each serve as one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 140 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 140 are set to different numbers, for example, the number of balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins a prize may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second prize opening 140 may be five.

A first electric accessory 140a is attached to the second prize opening 140. This first electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second prize opening 140. There is. On the other hand, when the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball to the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 140a It becomes an open state (enlarged state) and becomes a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 140.

As mentioned above, during probability change and time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal time, and the time required for the second symbol to fluctuate is also shorter, so in the second symbol fluctuate display, "○" ” becomes easier to display, and the number of times the first electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change or time saving period, the time during which the first electric accessory 140a is opened is also longer than during normal times. Therefore, during probability change or time saving, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for balls to enter the second winning opening 140 compared to normal times.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same when the ball enters the first winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second winning port 140, whether in the low probability state or the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning hole 140 than when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning hole 64 does not have the first electric accessory 140a as in the second winning hole 140, and the ball can always be won.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning hole 140 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win in the second winning hole 140, so it is difficult to enter the second winning hole 140. Then, the player shoots the ball so that it passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize opening 64, the user has many chances to win a jackpot lottery, and becomes a jackpot. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for this.

On the other hand, during probability change or time saving, by passing the ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is likely to be in the open state, and the second winning opening 140 is likely to be in an open state. Since the ball is easy to hit, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 140 so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), and the ball passes through the first through gate 66. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R jackpot by opening the first electric accessory 140a and winning the second prize opening 140.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment allows the player to shoot balls depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 (whether it is changing probability, shortening time, or normal). You can change the way the ball is played between "left-handed" and "right-handed." Therefore, since the player can change the way he or she hits the ball, the player can enjoy the game.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning hole 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning hole (large opening) 65a is provided approximately in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 1, when a jackpot lottery conducted due to a winning in either the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140 becomes a jackpot, the jackpot stops after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The occurrence of a jackpot is indicated by lighting up the first symbol display device 37A or 37B and displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 so as to represent the symbol. Thereafter, the game state changes to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning a prize opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closure, the specific winning a prize opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. This opening/closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a reward for the game (gaming value). will be held.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the opening/closing plate forward about the lower side of the opening/closing plate. It is equipped with Normally, the specific winning hole 65a is in a closed state in which a ball cannot enter a prize or it is difficult to enter a prize. In the event of a jackpot, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily enter the special winning hole 65a, and changing the open state and the normal closed state. It operates by alternating between states.

Note that the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the gaming area, and when an LED corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined period of time when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the placement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning hole 64, for example, It may also be on the left side of the variable display unit 80.

A pasting space K1 for pasting a certificate stamp, identification label, etc. is provided at the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp etc. pasted in the pasting space K1 can be attached to a small window of the front door 5. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71. Balls flowing down the gaming area that do not win in any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 640, and 82 are guided through the first out port 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). Ru. The first out port 71 is arranged below the first winning port 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 1 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 1, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device. Execute.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 1 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing board of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening/closing the front side and a solenoid for driving electric accessories is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. Send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115. is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 481, 491, 661, and 880, respectively.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the time presentation. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

The audio lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the audio output device 226, and The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the displayed content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and controls the variation effects of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice ramp control device 113. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command to notify the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 1, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power cutoff due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control device 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and also controls the payout control device 111 to issue a payout initialization command to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, the schematic configuration of the operating unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 59. 5 is a front perspective view of the operating unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 200. Moreover, FIGS. 7 and 8 are front views of the operation unit 200.

In addition, in FIG. 7, the left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R, and protruding member 485 of the displacement unit 400, and the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 are respectively displaced to the retracted position, whereas in FIG. 8, the slide unit The left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R, and protrusion member 485 of 400 and the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 are shown respectively displaced to the extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 300 formed in a box shape, and a displacement unit 400, a projection unit 600, and a vertical displacement unit 800 are installed in the internal space of the back case 300, respectively. They are accommodated in order.

The back case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and an outer wall portion 302 that stands up from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open. An opening 301a that is rectangular in front view is formed in the center of the bottom wall 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall 301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is considered possible.

The displacement unit 400 includes a base member 410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300 and having a picture frame shape when viewed from the front, a left displacement member 420L, a right displacement member 420R and a right displacement member 420R disposed on the base member 410 so as to be displaceable. The left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the protrusion member 485 are retracted to the rear side of the projection unit 600, and the opening 301a of the rear case 300 (i.e., the third symbol display device 81) can be displaced between the projecting position projecting to the front side (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

In this case, the displacement unit 400 is provided with two drive means (first drive motor 481 and second drive motor 491) that drive the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R, and protruding member 485), By selecting the driving means to drive, the displacement mode of the displacement member can be varied (forming a plurality of types of displacement modes). Details of this structure will be described later.

The projection unit 600 includes a base member 610 having an annular shape in front view disposed in front of the displacement unit 400, a disc-shaped projection plate member 620 disposed on the inner peripheral side of the base member 610, and a projection plate member 620 disposed on the inner circumferential side of the base member 610. It includes a plurality of LEDs 651 that allow light to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the plate member 620. The projection plate member 620 is made of a light-transmitting material, so that the display on the third symbol display device 81 is visible to the player, and when light is incident from the LED 651, the incident light is reflected into a pattern or The light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in the form of a pattern. That is, a pattern or a design can be made to stand out (display) on the front of the third design display device 81.

In this case, the projection unit 600 adopts a structure that increases the efficiency of the light emitted from the LED 651 entering the projection plate member 620, and intensifies the light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 (patterns or designs). can be brought to light clearly). Further, a structure is adopted that increases workability when assembling the plurality of LEDs 651 (irradiation unit 650) to the base member 610. Details of these structures will be described later.

The vertical displacement unit 800 includes a front base 820 and a rear base 830 disposed at the upper part of the base member 610 of the projection unit 600, and a displacement member 850 whose one end is rotatably supported by both base members 820 and 830. The other end of the displacement member 850 can be displaced between a retracted position above the opening 301a of the back case 300 (i.e., the third symbol display device 81) and an extended position extending toward the front side. Yes (see Figures 7 and 8).

In this case, the vertical displacement unit 800 includes a biasing spring SP that biases the displacement member 850, and at a predetermined position between the retracted position and the extended position, the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elasticity of the biasing spring SP By balancing the recovery force, the displacement member 850 is caused to perform reciprocating displacement (approximately simple harmonic motion) around the balance position (predetermined position) due to the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP. structure is adopted. Details of this structure will be described later.

Next, the displacement unit 400 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 9 to 28. 9 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit 400, and FIG. 10 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400.

The displacement unit 400 includes a base member 410 fastened and fixed to the bottom wall 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300, and displacement members (a left displacement member 420L and a right displacement member 420L and a right displacement member 420L and member 420R) and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) drive means (lower drive mechanism 480 and upper drive mechanism 490) that apply driving force to the displacement member, and as described above, the lower drive mechanism When displacing the displacement member by driving the mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481), when displacing the displacement member by driving the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491), or when displacing the displacement member by driving the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481), When the displacement member is displaced by driving both the motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491), the displacement member is configured to be able to be displaced in different ways. The details of the structure will be explained below with reference to FIGS. 11 to 18.

First, the displacement members (left displacement member 420L and right displacement member 420R) will be explained with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. FIG. 11 is a front perspective view of the left displacement member 420L and right displacement member 420R, and FIG. 12 is a rear perspective view of the left displacement member 420L and right displacement member 420R.

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the displacement unit 400 includes a left displacement member 420L and a right displacement member 420R, which are formed as displacement members that perform effects by displacement. , the left driven member 430L and the right driven member 430R, the truck member 440, the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R are connected.

The left displacement member 420L is an elongated member disposed in a vertical position, and has a connecting shaft 421 protruding from the back surface, a connecting hole 422 drilled in the upper end, and a slider drilled in the lower end. A moving groove 423 is provided. The connecting shaft 421 is a shaft having a circular cross section, and the connecting hole 431 of the left driven member 430L is rotatably supported. That is, the upper end of the left driven member 430L is rotatably connected to the back side of the left displacement member 420L.

The length of the connecting shaft 421 is set such that the tip of the connecting shaft 421 protrudes from the back surface of the left driven member 430L. (see FIGS. 17 and 18). That is, when the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven (rotated), the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c acts on the connecting shaft 421, and the left displacement member 420L is displaced.

The connection hole 422 is a hole with a circular cross section, and one of the two connection shafts 441 of a truck member 440, which will be described later, is rotatably inserted therethrough. That is, the left displacement member 420L is connected in a state in which a relative attitude change (rotation about the axis of the connection hole 422) relative to the cart member 440L is allowed.

The sliding groove 423 is a groove extending along the longitudinal direction of the left displacement member 420L, and a drive pin 488b (see FIG. 15) of the lower left rack 488L, which will be described later, is rotatably and slidably inserted therethrough. . Therefore, when only the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven while the lower left rack 488L is stopped, or vice versa, the attitude of the left displacement member 420L relative to the base member 410 changes (rotates). can be formed.

The left driven member 430L is a member that is installed between the base member 410 and the left displacement member 420L and is driven by the displacement of the left displacement member 420L, and has a connecting hole 431 bored at one end (upper end). and a sliding pin 432 protruding from the back surface.

The connecting hole 431 is a hole with a circular cross section, and as described above, the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is rotatably inserted therethrough. The sliding pin 432 is a pin (rod-shaped body) having a circular cross section, and is rotatably and slidably inserted into a sliding groove 410a formed on the side of the base member 410. Therefore, when the left displacement member 420L is displaced, the left driven member 430L can be driven while changing its relative posture with respect to the left displacement member 420L.

The trolley member 440 rolls on a rolling surface extending in the left-right direction (width direction) on the upper part of the base member 410 (upper intermediate part 410f and upper front part 410g, see FIGS. 17 and 18). It is a member that includes two connecting shafts 441 arranged in parallel, and four rolling wheels 442 rotatably supported at both ends of each connecting shaft 441. Therefore, the upper end of the left displacement member 420L is displaced along the left-right direction (width direction) via the cart member 440 as each rolling wheel 442 of the cart member 440 rolls on the rolling surface. .

The rolling surface of the base member 410 is formed as a substantially horizontal flat surface facing upward in the vertical direction, and each rolling wheel 442 of the truck member 440 is placed on the rolling surface. That is, the left displacement member 420 is suspended and supported by the rolling surface of the base member 410 via the cart member 440.

The upper left rack 450L slides on a guide section extending along the left-right direction (width direction) on the upper part of the base member 410 (upper middle part 410f and upper front part 410g, see FIGS. 17 and 18). It is a long plate-shaped member, and is carved along the longitudinal direction on two connecting holes 451 into which the two connecting shafts 441 of the truck member 440 are rotatably inserted, and on the back surface of the upper left rack 450L. A rack gear 452 is provided.

Here, the right displacement member 420R is approximately symmetrical to the left displacement member 420L, the right driven member 430R is approximately symmetrical to the left driven member 430L, and the upper right rack 450R is approximately symmetrical to the upper left rack 450L. Since they have substantially the same configuration, the same parts are given the same reference numerals and their explanation will be omitted.

However, the upper right rack 450R has a rack gear 452 engraved on the front thereof. Further, the upper right rack 450R has a portion where the connecting hole 451 is formed offset toward the front side, and is arranged at a different position in the front-rear direction than the upper left rack 450L. Therefore, the rack gear 452 of the upper left rack 450L and the rack gear 452 of the upper right rack 450R are arranged to face each other with a predetermined distance therebetween. In this case, a pinion gear 459 rotatably supported by the base member 410 is meshed with both rack gears 452 .

Therefore, along with the displacement of the left displacement member 420L, the upper left rack 450L is displaced (slides) in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 19) along the guide portion (not shown) of the base member 410. Since the displacement of the upper left rack 450L is transmitted to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, the right displacement member 420R can be displaced.

In this embodiment, since the number of pinion gears 459 interposed between the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R is an odd number (i.e., 1), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are The directions of displacement can be opposite directions (directions toward or away from each other). However, the number of pinion gears 459 may be an even number, and the left displacement member 420L and right displacement member 420R may be displaced in the same direction.

Next, the lower drive mechanism 480 of the plurality of drive means (lower drive mechanism 480 and upper drive mechanism 490) will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16.

13 and 15 are front perspective views of the displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 14 and 16 are rear perspective views of the displacement unit 400. Note that FIGS. 13 and 14 show a state in which the back cover 412 is attached, and FIGS. 15 and 16 show a state in which the back cover 412 is removed. Moreover, illustration of the raised cover 413 is omitted in FIGS. 13 to 16.

As shown in FIGS. 13 to 16, the lower drive mechanism 480 includes a first drive motor 481, a pinion gear 482 attached to the drive shaft of the first drive motor 481, and a drive mechanism in which the pinion gear 482 is meshed. A gear 483, a drive arm 484 that forms a crank mechanism together with the drive gear 483, a protrusion member 485 driven by the drive arm 484, a rack gear 486 disposed on the back of the protrusion member 485, and the rack gear 486. It mainly includes a gear train (gears 487a to 487e) to which the leading gear 487a is meshed, and a lower left rack 488L and a lower right rack 488R which are meshed to the tail gear 487e of the gear train.

The first drive motor 481 is attached to the front of the left front cover 411L, and a pinion gear 482 is attached (fixed) to the drive shaft of the first drive motor 481 that protrudes from the back of the left front cover 411L. Ru. The drive gear 483 is rotatably supported on the back surface of the left front cover 411L, and the drive arm 484 is rotatably supported on the front surface of the base member 410.

The drive gear 483 includes an eccentric pin 483a located eccentrically from its rotation center and protruding from the back surface. The drive arm 484 has a shaft support hole 484a through which the support shaft of the base member 410 is rotatably inserted, a linear sliding groove 484b through which the eccentric pin 483a of the drive gear 483 is slidably inserted, and a shaft support hole 484a through which the support shaft of the base member 410 is rotatably inserted. It includes a drive pin 484c that protrudes from the front at the end opposite to the side where the supporting hole 484a and the sliding groove 484b are formed.

Therefore, when the drive gear 483 is rotated in the forward or reverse direction via the pinion gear 482 by the driving force of the first drive motor 481, the sliding groove 484b of the drive arm 484 is rotated from the eccentric pin 483a of the drive gear 483. When one or the other inner wall surface is acted upon, the drive arm 484 is rotated in the forward or reverse direction about the pivot hole 484a, and the drive pin 484c of the drive arm 484 is raised or lowered.

The protruding member 485 includes a linear sliding groove 485a into which the driving pin 484c of the driving arm 484 is slidably inserted, and is disposed in front of the base member 410 via the slide rail SL. The slide rail SL is a telescoping linear guide mechanism, and is arranged in a vertical position with its expansion and contraction direction along the vertical direction. Note that the slide rail SL is a base end rail disposed on the front side of the base member 410, a distal end rail disposed on the back surface of the protruding member 485, and a base end rail disposed between the base end rail and the distal end rail. It includes an intermediate rail that allows the end rail and the tip rail to be relatively displaced in the longitudinal direction.

Therefore, when the drive arm 484 is rotated and the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 485a of the protrusion member 485 is pushed up or down by the drive pin 484c of the drive arm 484, the slide rail SL is expanded or contracted, and the protrusion member 485 is moved to the base. The member 410 is raised and lowered in the vertical direction.

The rack gear 486 is carved along the ascending and descending direction of the protruding member 485, and the gear train (gears 487a to 487e) is arranged on the front and right front of the base member 410, with the leading gear 487a meshing with the rack gear 486. They are each rotatably supported between the back surface of the cover 411R. Therefore, by raising and lowering the protruding member 485, the linear motion of the rack gear 486 can be used to rotate the gear train (gears 487a to 487e).

The lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are long plate-shaped members, and include a rack gear 488a carved on the side surface along the longitudinal direction, and a drive pin 488b protruding from the front at the longitudinal end. and are provided respectively. These lower left rack 488L and lower right rack 488R are located at different positions in the vertical direction, with their rack gears 488a facing each other, and between the back surface of the base member 410 and the front surface of the back cover 412 in the left-right direction (width direction). , the left-right direction in FIG. 19).

The gear 487e at the end of the gear train is coaxially fixed to the adjacent gear 487d and protrudes to the back side through an opening 410b drilled in the base member 410, so that the gear 487e at the end of the gear train is attached to the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack. It is meshed with each rack gear 488a of rack 488R. Therefore, as described above, when the gear train (gears 487a to 487e) is rotated as the protruding member 485 moves up and down, the rotation of the gear 487a at the end causes the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R to be mutually moved. They can be linearly moved in opposite directions (towards each other or away from each other).

The drive pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are projected to the front side through the linear insertion grooves 410c formed in the base member 410, so that the left displacement member 420L can be moved as described above. and is rotatably and slidably inserted into the sliding groove 423 of the right displacement member 420R. Therefore, by linearly moving the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R, the lower end sides (sliding groove 423 side) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced.

In addition, the extending direction of the insertion groove 410c is formed substantially parallel to the rolling surface on which the rolling wheel 442 of the truck member 440 rolls. That is, the direction of linear movement of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R is approximately parallel to the direction of linear movement of the upper left rack 450L and upper right rack 450R, which will be described later.

Next, the upper drive mechanism 490 of the plurality of drive means (lower drive mechanism 480 and upper drive mechanism 490) will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18.

17 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit 400, and FIG. 18 is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit 400. In addition, in FIGS. 17 and 18, for easy understanding, the pinion gear 459 and the upper right rack 450R are illustrated between the upper intermediate portion 410f and the upper front portion 410g.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the upper drive mechanism 490 includes a second drive motor 491, a pinion gear 492 attached to the drive shaft of the second drive motor 491, and a drive mechanism in which the pinion gear 492 is meshed. It mainly includes a gear 493 and a drive arm 494 that forms a crank mechanism together with the drive gear 493.

The base member 410 has a divided structure in which the upper part (the upper side portion formed in a substantially frame shape when viewed from the front) is formed by overlapping an upper rear part 410e, an upper intermediate part 410f, and a front part 410g in order on the front side. be done.

The second drive motor 491 is attached to the front surface of the upper intermediate portion 410f, and a pinion gear is attached to the drive shaft of the second drive motor 491 that protrudes from the back surface of the projecting portion. 492 is attached (fixed). The drive gear 493 and the drive arm 494 are rotatably supported on the back surface of the upper intermediate portion 410f.

The drive gear 493 includes an eccentric pin 493a located eccentrically from its rotation center and protruding from the back surface. The drive arm 494 has a shaft support hole 494a through which the support shaft of the upper intermediate portion 410f is rotatably inserted, a linear sliding groove 494b through which the eccentric pin 493a of the drive gear 493 is slidably inserted, and A linear drive groove 494c is provided at an end opposite to the side where the shaft support hole 494a and the sliding groove 494b are formed.

Therefore, when the drive gear 493 is rotated in the forward or reverse direction via the pinion gear 492 by the driving force of the second drive motor 491, the sliding groove 494b of the drive arm 494 is rotated from the eccentric pin 493a of the drive gear 493. When one or the other inner wall surface is acted upon, the drive arm 494 is rotated in the forward or reverse direction about the pivot hole 494a, and the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494 is displaced from side to side.

As described above, the distal end of the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is slidably inserted into the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494. Therefore, by driving the drive arm 494 (rotating around the shaft support hole 494a) and causing the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c, which is displaced from side to side, to act on the connecting shaft 421, the bogie member 440 (rolling wheel 442) is covered. By rolling along the rolling surface, the upper end side of the left displacement member 420L can be displaced from side to side.

In this case, when the left displacement member 420L is displaced left and right and the trolley member 440 (rolling wheels 442) rolls on the rolling surface, the upper left rack 450L is moved to the guide portion of the base member 410 as described above. The right displacement member 420R can be displaced. Note that the rolling surfaces on which the rolling wheels 442 of the truck member 440 roll are formed in the upper intermediate portion 410f and the upper front portion 410g.

Next, the operation of the displacement unit 400 configured as described above will be explained with reference to FIGS. 19 to 28.

First, both the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) are driven to move the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R, and protrusion member 485). The first mode of displacement will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 24.

19, 21 and 23 are front views of the displacement unit 400 in the first embodiment, and FIGS. 20, 22 and 24 are rear views of the displacement unit 400 in FIGS. 19, 21 and 23. FIG.

Note that FIGS. 19 and 20 correspond to a state in which the left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R, and protruding member 485 are disposed at the retracted position, and FIGS. 23 and 24 correspond to the left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R. This corresponds to the state in which the protruding member 485 is placed in the extended position in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, when the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are disposed at the retracted position, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are disposed at the outermost position (the position where they are furthest apart from each other in the left-right direction), and A protruding member 485 is arranged at the lowest position.

When the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 and the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 are respectively driven from this state, the state shown in FIGS. 23 and 24 is reached after passing through the state shown in FIGS. 21 and 22. To the state (the extended position in the first aspect), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in a direction in which they approach each other in the left-right direction (width direction), and the protrusion member 485 is raised. In addition, in the extended position in the first aspect, the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the protrusion member 485 are in a combined state (the side surfaces of the three are in close contact with each other).

Specifically, when the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 is driven from the state shown in FIG. By pushing up the inner wall surface of the protruding member 485, the protruding member 485 is raised (see FIGS. 13 and 14).

Furthermore, when the protruding member 485 is raised, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are displaced (linearly moved) via the rack gear 486, the gear train (gears 487a to 487e), and the rack gear 488a (FIGS. 15 and 15). 16), the driving pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R act on the inner wall surfaces of the sliding grooves 423 of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R, thereby causing the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement The lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) of the member 420R is displaced (linearly moved) along the insertion groove 410c of the base member 410 in a direction in which they approach each other.

On the other hand, when the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven from the state shown in FIG. 19, the drive arm 494 is rotated, and the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494 is 421. As a result, the cart member 440 is rolled on the rolling surface, and the upper end side (carriage member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced (linearly moved) in a direction approaching the right displacement member 420R (FIGS. 17 and 17). (see 18).

Further, when the upper end side (carriage member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced, the displacement is transmitted from the upper left rack 450L to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, so that the upper end side of the left displacement member 420R is The upper end side (truck member 440) is displaced (linearly moved) in a direction approaching the left displacement member 420L (see FIGS. 11 and 12).

In this embodiment, the displacement amount of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 20) is such that the displacement amount on the lower end side is smaller than the displacement amount on the upper end side ( That is, the movable range of the drive pin 488b (extended length of the insertion groove 410c) is made shorter than the movable range of the truck member 440 (extended length of the rolling surface).

In this case, the lower end side and the upper end side of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R start displacement from the retracted position (see FIGS. 19 and 20) at the same time, and the extended position in the first mode ( The lower drive mechanism 480 and the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven so that the lower drive mechanism 480 and the upper drive mechanism 490 are reached at the same time (see FIGS. 23 and 24). That is, the displacement speed in the left-right direction on the upper end side (carriage member 440) is made faster than on the lower end side (drive pin 488b).

Thereby, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced in the left-right direction while rotating their postures, instead of being displaced in parallel in the left-right direction without rotation while maintaining the vertical posture. That is, it is impossible to displace the displacement member while rotating the posture in this manner with a configuration in which the displacement member is slid along the slide groove by the driving force of the first drive means. This is the first time that it has become possible to use a drive means for this purpose.

Furthermore, when the displacement speed in the left-right direction on the upper end side (the truck member 440) is different from that on the lower end side (the driving pin 488b), the distance between the drive pin 488b and the truck member 440 is changed. Since the moving groove 423 has an elongated hole shape that extends in the vertical direction with a length larger than the diameter of the drive pin 488b, changes in the distance between the two can be absorbed. That is, there is no need to provide a complicated mechanism, and the sliding groove 423 and the drive pin 488b can be formed to be rotatable and slidable, which reduces product cost and improves operational reliability and durability. be able to.

When the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 and the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 are respectively driven in the opposite direction from the state shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the state shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 After passing through the state shown in FIG. 19 and FIG. 20 (retracted position), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in the direction in which they are separated from each other in the left-right direction (width direction), and the protruding member 485 is lowered.

Next, only the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) is driven (that is, the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) is maintained in a non-driven state), and the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, A second mode of displacing the right displacement member 420R and the protruding member 485 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. In addition, in the description of the second aspect, FIGS. 19 and 20 are also referred to as appropriate.

FIG. 25 is a front view of the displacement unit 400 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 26 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400 in the rear view of FIG. 25. Note that FIGS. 25 and 26 correspond to a state in which the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the protruding member 485 are arranged at the extended position in the second embodiment.

Here, in the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 (disposed at the retracted position), the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is rotated by the left displacement member 420L on its upper end side (the axis of the connecting hole 422). It is placed in an orientation that allows rotation around the center. That is, the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is allowed to slide along the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494.

Therefore, when only the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 is driven from this state (the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20), as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the drive pin of the drive arm 484 484c pushes up the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 485a of the protruding member 485, the protruding member 485 is raised, and the drive pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are moved to the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member. By acting on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 423 of 420R, the lower end sides (sliding groove 423 side) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced (linearly moved) in a direction in which they approach each other. That is, in the second aspect, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be rotated about their upper ends (the axis of the connecting hole 422) as the center of rotation.

Next, only the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) is driven (that is, the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) is maintained in a non-driven state), and the displacement members (left displacement member 420L and A third mode of displacing the right displacement member 420R) will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. In addition, in the description of the third aspect, FIGS. 19 and 20 are also referred to as appropriate.

FIG. 27 is a front view of the displacement unit 400 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 28 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400 in the rear view of FIG. 27. Note that FIGS. 27 and 28 correspond to a state in which the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are arranged at the extended position in the third embodiment.

Here, the sliding grooves 423 of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are elongated holes extending in the vertical direction with a length larger than the diameter of the drive pin 488b. Member 420R is allowed to be lifted upward.

Therefore, when only the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven from the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 (disposed at the retracted position), as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the drive arm The inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c of 494 is acted on by the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L, and the upper end side (carriage member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced (linearly moved) in a direction approaching the right displacement member 420R. In addition, the displacement is transmitted from the upper left rack 450L to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, thereby displacing the upper end side (carriage member 440) of the right displacement member 420R in the direction of approaching the left displacement member 420L. (linear motion).

That is, in the third aspect, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be rotated about their lower ends (sliding groove 423 side) as rotation centers. Further, in the third aspect, only the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced, and the protrusion member 485 can be maintained in a stopped state.

Here, in the conventional game machine, a guide means (for example, a guide groove) is extended to the base member 410, and the displacement member is formed so as to be able to be displaced (guided) along the guide means. The displacement mode of the member (trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one type. Therefore, the performance based on the displacement of the displacement member becomes one pattern, making it difficult to perform a performance that surprises the player. Even if the driving force (driving speed) of the driving means (for example, a driving motor) is changed by increasing or decreasing the strength, the displacement speed of the displacement member only increases or decreases, and its displacement mode (trajectory) remains constant. Therefore, it is difficult to perform a performance that surprises the player.

In contrast, the displacement unit 400 of the present embodiment includes a lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) and an upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491), and selects (changes) the drive state thereof. As a result, the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R, and protrusion member 485) can be displaced in three types of modes (first mode, second mode, and third mode). That is, unlike conventional products in which the displacement mode of the displacement member is limited to one type, the effect does not become one pattern, but the displacement member can be displaced in at least three displacement modes, so such displacement modes can be switched. By doing so, it is possible to perform a performance that surprises the player.

In particular, in the first aspect (see FIGS. 19 to 24), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can perform displacements in which parallel movement (linear movement) is dominant, while in the second aspect In the third aspect (see FIGS. 19 and 25 to 28), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced only by rotation (rotational movement), and the movement form of the displacement can be different. can be set. As a result, the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be increased, making it easier to perform performances that surprise the player.

In this case, there are conventional products in which the center of rotation remains constant and only the direction of rotation is changed to change the displacement mode, but the second and third embodiments of this embodiment , they do not have the same center of rotation but only different directions of rotation, but the directions of rotation are different and the centers of rotation are also formed differently (in the second embodiment, the upper end side is the center of rotation, and in the third embodiment, the center of rotation is different). In this case, the lower end side is the center of rotation), the change in the displacement mode of the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R) can be increased, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to perform surprising effects.

Furthermore, in the first aspect, the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R) are displaced in a form that combines rotation and parallel movement (linear motion), but the direction of such rotation is the third aspect. The direction of rotation is the same as the direction of rotation in . Therefore, in the initial stages of the first aspect and the third aspect (for example, see FIGS. 21 and 27), the player can visually see that the displacement members are displaced in a direction in which they approach each other, and the player can distinguish between the displacement members. It can be made difficult to hit. On the other hand, in the first aspect, the protruding member 485 is raised as the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in the direction in which they approach each other, whereas in the third aspect, the protruding member 485 is stopped. can be maintained in the same condition. That is, in the initial stage when the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced toward each other, if the protrusion member 485 is raised, the displacement member is displaced to the extended position in the first mode. It is possible to make the player expect that.

In the displacement unit 400, a cart member 440, a lower left rack 488L, and a lower right rack 488R are disposed (held) on a base member 410 so as to be linearly displaceable, and the cart member 440 is provided with a left displacement member 420L and a right displacement member 420R. The upper ends (connection holes 422) are rotatably connected, and the drive pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are connected to the lower ends (sliding grooves 423) of the left displacement member 420L and right displacement member 420R. Rotatably and slidably inserted.

As a result, as described above, the structure for causing the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R to perform linear motion (first aspect) or rotational motion (second and third aspects) including a rotational component is provided. can be simplified. For example, it is conceivable to provide a curved guide groove and displace the displacement member along the guide groove, but if the displacement member is to be slid along such a curved trajectory, a complicated structure is required ( That is, if the locus is curved, not only the mechanism for guiding the members corresponding to the truck member 440, the members corresponding to the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R in a curved shape, but also the respective members 440, It becomes necessary to provide a mechanism that can continuously apply driving force to 488L and 488R).

On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is sufficient to guide the cart member 440, the lower left rack 488L, and the lower right rack 488R in the linear direction, and therefore the cart member 440 may be guided by the rolling surface as a flat surface. Since the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R can utilize a rack and pinion mechanism, their structures can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce product costs and improve durability and operational reliability.

Further, according to the displacement unit 400, the mechanism for guiding the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R is common in all of the first aspect, the second aspect, and the third aspect, and specifically, , one end side (upper end side) of each displacement member 420L, 420R is guided by the trolley member 440 rolling on a rolling surface, and the other end side (lower end side) is a lower left rack 488L and a lower right rack. 488R is guided by sliding (linear movement) between the base member 410 and the back cover 412. That is, there is no need to provide different guide mechanisms depending on each aspect, and therefore there is no need to adopt a structure for switching between different guide mechanisms. As a result, the structure can be simplified, operational reliability and durability can be improved, and product costs can be reduced.

Next, the projection unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 46.

First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 32. 29 is a front view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 30 is a rear view of the projection unit 600. 31 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the projection unit 600.

As shown in FIGS. 29 to 32, the projection unit 600 includes a base member 610 having an annular shape when viewed from the front, a disc-shaped projection plate member 620 rotatably disposed on the base member 610, and a projection plate member 620 rotatably disposed on the base member 610. A plurality of irradiation units 650 disposed surrounding the outer circumferential side of the plate member 620, a drive motor 661 for rotating the projection plate member 620, and a drive force of the drive motor 661 for transmitting the driving force to the projection plate member 620. A gear train (gears 662 to 664) is mainly provided.

The base member 610 includes an annular back base 611 and an annular front base 612 disposed in front of the back base 611, and is formed between the opposing surfaces of the back base 611 and the front base 612. The projection plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662 to 664) are housed in the inner space.

Note that the projection plate member 620 is visible to the player in an area inside the inner periphery of the front base 612 (hereinafter referred to as the "display area") when viewed from the front, and in an area outside the inner periphery of the front base 612. (That is, the area shielded by the front base 612) (hereinafter referred to as "outside the display area"), the projection plate member 620 is made invisible to the player.

The projection plate member 620 is made of a light-transmitting material and allows the player to view the display of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back side through the projection plate member 620, and also allows the player to see the display that is irradiated from the irradiation unit 650. When the light is incident from the outer peripheral surface, the incident light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in the form of a pattern or design, and is visible to the player. That is, a pattern or a design can be made to stand out (display) on the front of the third design display device 81.

A gear member 630 and a groove forming member 640 are disposed on the outer peripheral edge of the projection plate member 620 on the back side and the front side, respectively. The gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 are formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and are arranged concentrically with the projection plate member 620.

A plurality of teeth are carved along the outer peripheral surface of the gear member 630, and a gear 664 at the end of the gear train meshes with the gear member 630. The groove forming member 640 is a member for forming a circumferentially continuous guide groove 641 having a U-shaped cross section between the projection plate member 620 and a plurality of collars rotatably supported by the base member 610. C is guided by the guide groove 641, so that the projection plate member 620 is rotatably held by the base member 610. Note that detailed configurations of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 will be described later.

The irradiation unit 650 is a unit that includes a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs 651) for inputting light from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, and each LED 651 faces the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 (opposed to the outer peripheral surface). A plurality (five in this embodiment) are arranged in different postures. Specifically, in this embodiment, the extension line of the irradiation direction of each LED 651 is set to pass approximately through the center of the projection plate member 620. Note that details of the structure for attaching the irradiation unit 650 to the base member 610 will be described later.

The drive motor 661 is disposed on the back side of the back base 611, and a gear 662 at the head of the gear train is connected (fixed) to the drive shaft of the drive motor 661. Furthermore, a gear member 630 disposed on the projection plate member 620 meshes with a gear 664 at the end of the gear train. Therefore, when the drive shaft of the drive motor 661 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the gear member 630 via the gear train (gears 662 to 664), and the projection plate member 620 is rotated.

Next, a holding structure for the projection plate member 620 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 38. FIG. 33 is a front view of the rear base 611. 34 is a rear view of the front base 612 and the irradiation unit 650, and FIG. 35 is a rear view of the front base 612.

As shown in FIG. 33, the back base 611 includes an inner upright portion 611a that stands up on the inner edge of the annular plate member, and an outer upright portion 611a that stands up on the outer edge of the annular plate member. The intermediate standing portion 611b is erected from between the inner erected portion 611a and the outer erected portion 611c, and the inner groove in the area surrounded by the inner erected portion 611b and the inner erected portion 611a. 611d, an outer concave portion 611e in a region surrounded by an inner upright portion 611b and an outer upright portion 611c, and a regulating protrusion 611f protruding from an annular plate member at a predetermined interval. It is formed.

The inner upright portion 611a stands upright from the inner edge of the annular plate member on the front side (the front side in the paper of FIG. 33), and has a constant thickness in the radial direction.

The outer standing portion 611c stands upright from the outer edge of the annular plate member on the front side (the front side in the paper of FIG. 33), and has a constant thickness in the radial direction.

The intermediate erected portion 611b is erected at an intermediate position between the inner erected portion 611a and the outer erected portion 611b. Further, the intermediate standing portion 611b is formed into seven parts around the axis, and each divided end is connected to the outer standing part 611c.

The inner groove 611d is a region for arranging the outer edge of a projection plate member 620, which will be described later, inside, and surrounds the annular plate member, the inner upright portion 611a, and the intermediate upright portion 611b in three directions. It is formed by

The outer groove 611e is a region for arranging an irradiation unit 650 (to be described later) inside, and is formed by being surrounded in three directions by an annular plate member, an outer standing portion 611c, and an intermediate standing portion 611b. Ru.

The regulating protrusion 611f is a protrusion that suppresses the collar C, which is pivotally supported on the front base 612, from wobbling toward the back side, and is formed in an annular shape with an inner diameter larger than the inner diameter of a hole opened in the axis of the collar C. At the same time, it is formed to protrude from the front side. In addition, in this embodiment, the regulating protrusions 611f are formed at six locations at predetermined intervals.

As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, on the back surface of the front base 612, there are inner upright portions corresponding to the inner upright portion 611a, the intermediate upright portion 611b, the outer upright portion 611c, and the regulating protrusion 611f of the back base 611. An erected portion 612a, an intermediate erected portion 612b, an outer erected portion 612c, and a shaft portion 612f are erected. That is, in the assembled state of the base member 610, the upright end faces of the upright parts 612a to 612c of the front base 612 overlap with the upright end faces of the upright parts 611a to 611c of the rear base 611, respectively. At the same time, the tip of the shaft portion 612f is inserted into the regulating protrusion 611f.

A plurality of holding pins 612g are erected on the back surface of the front base 612 in a region between the intermediate erected portion 611b and the outer erected portion 612c. The holding pins 612g are shafts with a circular cross section for positioning and holding the irradiation unit 650, and are arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction.

As described above, the irradiation unit 650 is a unit that includes a plurality of LEDs 651 and allows the light emitted from each of the LEDs 651 to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. will be placed. That is, the projection plate member 620 is surrounded by a plurality of irradiation units 650 on its outer peripheral side.

The irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the back surface of the front base 612 in a region between the intermediate standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 612c, and the front surface of the back base 611 is superimposed on the back surface of the front base 612. As a result, it is accommodated between the opposing surfaces (internal space) of both bases 611 and 612.

FIG. 36 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the front base 612 and the irradiation unit 650 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVI in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 36, the intermediate upright portion 612b of the front base 612 has a substantially semicircular notch 612b1 cut out at the end of the upright portion. Similarly, a substantially semicircular notch 611b1 is formed on the upright end side of the intermediate upright part 611b of the back base 611 at a position that is in the same phase as the notch 612b1 (Fig. 33 reference).

That is, when the upright end surfaces of the intermediate upright portions 611b and 612b are overlapped (that is, in the assembled state of the base member 610), the notch portions 611b1 and 612b2 form an opening that is substantially circular in front view. Ru. These circular openings are formed at positions facing each LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 (positions having the same phase).

Therefore, the light emitted from each LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 passes through the circular opening formed by the cutouts 611b1 and 612b1 of the intermediate upright portions 611b and 612b, and enters the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. be done. Note that the diameter of the circular opening is set to be larger than the diameter of the light emitting part of the LED 651.

Next, the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38.

FIG. 37 is a front view of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. FIG. 38 is a partial cross-sectional view of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 taken along the line XXXVIII-XXXVIII in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 38, the boundary between the above-mentioned display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M.

As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the projection plate member 620 is formed into a circular plate-shaped body when viewed from the front. The projection plate member 620 includes a cutout portion 621 and a reflection portion 622 that diffusely reflects light in a part of the outer edge.

The cutout portion 621 is a portion to facilitate placement of the collar C on the regulating protrusion 611f of the rear base 611, and is formed by cutting out a part of the outer edge of the projection plate member 620 in a straight line in a direction perpendicular to the radial direction. be done.

The reflecting portion 622 is a portion where the inside of the projection plate member 620 is roughened by laser processing or the like, and the entire area of the projection plate member 620 when viewed from the front is processed into a shape such as a pattern or a design. As a result, when the light incident on the inside of the projection plate member 620 is irradiated onto the reflecting section 622, it is diffusely reflected by the rough surface of the reflecting section 622 and is emitted from the surface side of the game board.

As a result, the player can easily visually recognize the diffusely reflected light and the shape of the reflecting portion 622. That is, by allowing light to enter the projection plate member 620, the shape of the reflecting portion 622 can be displayed on the front side of the projection plate member 620.

The gear member 630 is made of a light-transmitting material with a lower refractive index than the projection plate member 620, is formed from a plate-shaped body having an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has an outer diameter larger than that of the projection plate member 620. It is set large and arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612). Further, the gear member 630 is disposed on the back side of the projection plate member 620 (on the back side of the paper in FIG. 37), and its axis is coaxial with the axis of the projection plate member 620.

The gear member 630 includes a tooth portion 631 carved along the outer circumferential surface, a rear surface portion 632 on the side surface on the rear side, and a rear surface portion 632 that is inclined toward the front side from the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the rear surface portion 632. and an inclined surface portion 633.

The tooth portion 631 is a tooth surface with which the gear 664 meshes as described above, and is carved on the outer peripheral surface of the gear member 630 over the entire circumference.

The inclined surface portion 633 is a surface that is continuous from an end portion 634 on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the back surface portion 632 and is inclined toward the front side. The angle of inclination of the inclined surface portion 633 toward the front side is determined by the intersection angle θ1 between the virtual line B connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the end portion 634 and the rear surface portion 632, and The intersection angle θ2 between the line C and the inclined surface portion 633 is set to be substantially the same (θ1=θ2).

The groove forming member 640 is made of a light-transmissive material with a lower refractive index than the projection plate member 620, and is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has a bent approximately L-shaped cross section. It is arranged on the projection plate member 620 side. Further, the groove forming member 640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612). Furthermore, the groove forming member 640 is arranged on the front side (upper side in FIG. 38) of the projection plate member 620, and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620.

The groove forming member 640 has a side surface 641a on one side of the inner portion bent in a substantially L-shaped cross section, an abutment surface 641b on the other side of the inner portion bent in a substantially L-shaped cross section, and a side surface on the front side. It includes a front part 642 and an inclined surface part 643 that is inclined from the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the front part 642 to the back side.

The side surface portion 641a is a surface that sandwiches the collar C between the facing side surface of the projection plate member 620 on the front side (upper side in FIG. 38), and has a constant facing interval between the front side plane of the projection plate member 620 and the axis. formed separately.

The contact surface 641b is a surface that rotatably holds the projection plate member 620 by contacting the collar C disposed between the side surface portion 641a and the projection plate member 620, and has a cross section perpendicular to the side surface portion 641a. At the same time, it is formed circularly around the axis.

Therefore, by being arranged on the projection plate member 620, the side surface portion 641a and the contact surface 641b can form a guide groove 641 for guiding the collar C. That is, the guide groove 641 is formed between the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 by assembling the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640.

The inclined surface portion 643 is a surface that is continuous from an end portion 644 on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the front portion 642 and is inclined toward the back side. In addition, the angle of inclination of the inclined surface portion 643 toward the rear side is determined by the intersection angle θ3 between the front portion 642 and the virtual line D connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the end portion 644. The intersection angle θ4 between the line E and the inclined surface portion 643 is set to be substantially the same (θ3=θ4).

Next, the projection plate member 620 and the collar C will be explained with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. 39(a) is a rear view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 39(b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the projection unit 600 taken along the line XXXIXb-XXXIXb in FIG. 39(a). 40(a) to 40(c) are partially enlarged sectional views of the projection unit 600. Note that FIGS. 40(a) to 40(c) illustrate the transition state when attaching the collar C to the shaft portion 612f of the front base 612. Further, FIGS. 39 and 40 illustrate a state in which the rear base 611 is removed from the projection unit 600.

As shown in FIGS. 39(a) and 39(b), when the collar C is disposed on the shaft portion 612f, the protruding portion C1 protruding outward in the radial direction is located on the front side of the projection plate member 620 (see FIG. 39(b) (lower side) and the side surface portion 641a of the groove forming member 640 (guide groove 641).

Furthermore, the distance L1 between the tip end surface of the protrusion C1 of the collar C and the side surface 641a of the groove forming member 640 is larger than the distance L2 between the shaft portion of the collar C and the outer peripheral surface of the groove forming member 640. is also set small (L1<L2).

Therefore, in order to make the projection plate member 620 rotatable, when the groove forming member 640 and the collar C are arranged with a predetermined gap, the projection plate member 620 is rotated in the vertical and horizontal directions by the gap. Even if the groove forming member 640 is shifted, the contact surface 641b of the groove forming member 640 can be brought into contact with the tip of the protrusion C1 of the collar C. As a result, the projection plate member 620 can be rotatably held at the tip of the protruding portion C1 of the collar C, and the projection plate member 620 can be rotated smoothly.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 40(a) to 40(c), attachment of the collar C to the shaft portion 612f of the front base 612 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 39(a) and 40(a), when the collar C is placed on the shaft portion 612f, the projection plate member 620 is placed on the front base 612.

Here, the projection plate member 620 is placed on the front base 612 by placing the groove forming member 640 inside the inner groove 612d of the front base 612. That is, the distance dimension in the radial direction of the inner groove 612d is formed to be larger than the distance dimension in the radial direction of the groove forming member 640, and by arranging the groove forming member 640 inside the inner groove 612d, the projection plate Member 620 can be positioned and placed.

Next, the projection plate member 620 is rotated to displace the cutout portion 621 of the projection plate member 620 toward the shaft portion 612f where the collar C is disposed. That is, by aligning the position of the notch portion 621 with the shaft portion 612f, the collar C can be placed on the front base 612 with the projection plate member 620 placed thereon.

Next, the arrangement of the collar C on the shaft portion 612f is such that the axis of the collar C is aligned with the axis of the shaft portion 612f, and the back side (upper side in FIG. 40(a)) is placed on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 40(a)). It is performed with the person leaning towards the In this state, the shaft of the collar C is inserted into the tip of the shaft portion 612f, and the protrusion C1 located inside the projection plate member 620 is inserted into the inside of the notch 621 and the guide groove 641.

From this state, as shown in FIG. 40(b), the opposite side is rotated toward the front side (lower side in FIG. 40(b)) about the tip of the projection C1 located inside the projection plate member 620. Thereby, the axis of the collar C can be arranged concentrically with the axis of the shaft portion 612f.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40(c), by displacing the collar C toward the front side (lower side in FIG. 40(c)), the tip surface of the protruding portion C1 of the collar C and the groove forming member 640 come into contact. It is placed in a position where the surfaces face each other. Thereafter, by rotating the projection plate member 620, the collar C can be placed inside the guide groove 641.

Here, if a groove is formed on the outer edge of a circular rotating member and a plurality of collars are to be placed inside the groove, the rotating member must be lifted (operated) in order to place the collars. There was a problem in that the collars had to be placed and both hands were used to assemble them, resulting in poor assembly efficiency.

On the other hand, in the projection unit 600, the notch 621 is formed in the projection plate member 620, so that it is not necessary to lift (operate) the projection plate member 620 when placing the collar C, as described above. do not have. Therefore, the efficiency of assembling the projection unit 600 can be improved.

The projection unit 600 can be assembled by covering the projection unit 600 assembled in this manner with the rear base 611 from the rear side.

Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43.

41(a) to 43(b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. Note that in FIG. 41(b), FIG. 42(b), and FIG. 43(b), illustration of cross-sectional lines is omitted for ease of understanding.

In addition, in FIGS. 41(b), 42(b), and 43(b), the refraction angle when the light from the light source A enters the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 is The light entering the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is illustrated in a perpendicular manner, assuming that this does not affect the invention. Furthermore, in FIGS. 41 to 43, the boundary between the above-described display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M.

As shown in FIGS. 41(a) and 41(b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light at the irradiation angle α that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 620 is directed toward the outer edge of the projection plate member 620. The light is incident from the side of the part. The light incident on the projection plate member 620 is reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by being irradiated onto the front and back side surfaces of the projection plate member 620. Thereby, the light incident on the projection plate member 620 can travel from the edge of the projection plate member 620 toward the center. Therefore, the light from the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α1 passes through the projection plate member 2620, is diffusely reflected by the reflection section 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine (upper side in FIG. 41(b)).

In this case, when the light traveling inside the projection plate member 620 is irradiated onto the front or back surface of the projection plate member 620 at a position where the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 are adjacent to each other, It is conceivable that the amount of light that enters the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 from the front or back side of the projection plate member 620 and travels inside the projection plate member 620 is reduced.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the groove forming member 640 and the gear member 630 are formed from a light-transmitting material having a refractive index lower than the refractive index of the amount of light-transmitting material of the projection plate member 620, so that the projection plate member 620 has a lower refractive index. Even when the light traveling through the member 620 is irradiated onto the front or back side of the projection plate member 620 at a position where the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 are adjacent to each other, It can be totally reflected on the back side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of light incident from the edge of the projection plate member 620 from decreasing.

That is, when light passing through a medium with a high refractive index travels to a medium with a low refractive index, if the incident angle is increased, the light will not be incident on the medium with a low refractive index and will be totally reflected. In the projection unit 600, the projection plate member 620 is formed into a plate-like member, and light is incident from the end face (edge) thereof, so that the incident angle of the light is made sufficiently large. Therefore, the light does not enter the groove forming member 640 and the gear member 630 having a low curvature from the projection plate member 620, and can be totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620. As a result, the amount of light traveling through the projection plate member 620 can be suppressed from decreasing.

Similarly, regarding the relationship between the projection plate member 620 and air, the refractive index of air is a value (refractive index 1) that is sufficiently smaller than the amount of transparent material. The light does not enter the air (atmosphere) from the projection plate member 620 and can be totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620. As a result, the amount of light traveling through the projection plate member 620 can be suppressed from decreasing.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 42(a) and 42(b), among the light irradiated from the light source A of the LED 651, the light at the irradiation angle β that irradiates the groove forming member 640 is incident on the groove forming member 640. be done.

The light incident on the groove forming member 640 can be reflected inside the groove forming member 640 and can be allowed to travel toward the axis of the projection plate member 620. In this case, at a position where the side surface of the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other (facing each other), the light that has been reflected inside the groove forming member 640 can be made to enter the projection plate member 620 side. .

That is, at a position where the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are not adjacent to each other, the groove forming member 640 is in a state adjacent to the air (atmosphere), so that the light irradiated to the side surface can be reflected. On the other hand, at the position where the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other, the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are formed of a light-transmitting material having a refractive index lower than the refractive index of the amount of light-transmitting material of the projection plate member 620. Light can be incident on the projection plate member 620.

The light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the groove forming member 640 can be totally reflected by the inner side surface of the projection plate member 620 and travel, similar to the light at the irradiation angle α. Note that the reason is the same as in the case of the irradiation angle α, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Therefore, the light from the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle β can also pass through the projection plate member 620, be diffusely reflected by the reflection section 622, and emitted to the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, the intensity (amount of light) emitted from the projection plate member 620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 620 or increasing the intensity (amount of light) of the emitted light from the LED 651. can.

That is, the light irradiated from the light source A of the LED 651 not only enters from the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, but also the light irradiated to the groove forming member 640 can enter from the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, the efficiency of collecting light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to increase the amount of light emitted from the light source A that reaches the reflecting part 622 of the projection plate member 620, so that the light reflected by the reflecting part 622 and emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 can be increased. By increasing the amount of , patterns and designs can be clearly highlighted (displayed). Furthermore, since there is no need to increase the output of the LED 651, the amount of heat generated can be reduced and the influence of heat on other members and equipment can be suppressed.

Further, since the groove forming member 640 is disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the back side of the front base 612), it is difficult to see from the player, and the appearance is accordingly reduced. Deterioration can be suppressed.

Here, the light that enters the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is smaller than the light that enters the projection plate member 620 from the light source A described above. Since the position of the groove forming member 640 is shifted from the position of the groove forming member 640, the incident angle of the light when the inner side surface of the groove forming member 640 is irradiated becomes smaller. This makes it difficult to completely reflect the light traveling inside the groove forming member 640 on the inner side surface thereof, but at least a part of the light incident on the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is reflected. The above-mentioned state (a state in which light is reflected on the inner side surface of the groove forming member 640) can be formed.

Further, since the groove forming member 640 includes the inclined surface portion 643, the amount of light that is irradiated at the irradiation angle β and reflected toward the projection plate member 620 can be increased. That is, as described above, the inclined surface portion 643 is formed so that its intersection angle θ4 is the same as the intersection angle θ3 between the front portion 642 and the virtual line D connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the end portion 644 (FIG. 38 ), after reflecting the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) toward the end portion 644, the light can be made to travel along the inclined surface portion 643, and the light at the irradiation angle β can be directed to the projection plate member. The area reflected to the 620 side can be increased. As a result, the amount of light reflected toward the projection plate member 620 can be increased.

Furthermore, since the outer diameter of the groove forming member 640 is formed larger than the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620, the irradiation angle β from the light source A can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the light emitted from the light source A can be reflected at the outer edge of the groove forming member 640 and can be easily made to enter the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, the efficiency of collecting light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased accordingly.

As shown in FIGS. 43(a) and 43(b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light at the irradiation angle γ that irradiates the gear member 630 is incident on the gear member 630.

The light incident on the gear member 630 is reflected inside the gear member 630 and is allowed to travel toward the axis of the projection plate member 620. In this case, at a position where the side surface of the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other (facing each other), the light reflected inside the gear member 630 can be made to enter the projection plate member 620.

That is, in a position where the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are not adjacent to each other, the gear member 630 is adjacent to the air (in contact with the atmosphere), so that the light irradiated to the inner side surface of the gear member 630 is reflected. be able to. On the other hand, at a position where the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other, since the gear member 630 is formed from a light-transmitting material having a refractive index lower than that of the light-transmitting material of the projection plate member 620, irradiation is prevented. The projected light can be made incident on the projection plate member 620.

The light that is incident on the projection plate member 620 from the gear member 630 is totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620, similar to the light at the irradiation angle α, and is caused to proceed toward the axis of the projection plate member 620. Note that the reason is the same as in the case of the irradiation angle α, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Therefore, the light from the light source A emitted at the irradiation angle γ passes through the projection plate member 620, is diffusely reflected by the reflection section 622, and is emitted toward the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the projection plate member 620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 620 or increasing the amount of light emitted from the LED 651.

That is, the light irradiated from the light source A of the LED 651 not only enters the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, but also the light irradiated to the gear member 630 can enter from the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Accordingly, the efficiency of collecting light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the amount of light emitted from the light source A that reaches the reflecting section 622 of the projection plate member 620, thereby reducing the amount of light reflected at the reflecting section and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member. By increasing the number of images, patterns and designs can be clearly highlighted (displayed). Furthermore, since there is no need to increase the output of the LED 651, the amount of heat generated can be reduced and the influence of heat on other members and equipment can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the gear member 630 is disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the back side of the front base 612), it is difficult to be seen by the player, and the appearance deteriorates accordingly. can be restrained from doing so.

Further, compared to the light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the light source A described above, the light incident on the gear member 630 from the light source A is smaller than the light incident on the gear member 630 when the gear member 630 is connected to the light source A in the back direction (downward in FIG. 43(a)). The incident angle when irradiating the inner side surface of the gear member 630 is made smaller as the position is shifted. This makes it difficult to completely reflect the light traveling inside the gear member 630 on its side surfaces, but at least a portion of the light incident on the gear member 630 from the light source A is reflected, resulting in the above-mentioned state. (a state in which light is reflected by the inner side surface of the gear member 630) can be formed.

Since the gear member 630 includes the inclined surface portion 633, it is possible to increase the amount of light that is irradiated at the irradiation angle γ and reflected toward the projection plate member 620 side. That is, as described above, the inclined surface portion 633 is formed so that its intersection angle θ2 is the same as the intersection angle θ1 between the virtual line B connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the end portion 634 and the back surface portion 632 (FIG. 38 ), after reflecting the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) toward the end portion 634, the light can be made to travel along the inclined surface portion 633, and the light emitted at the irradiation angle γ can be The area of light reflected toward the projection plate member 620 can be increased. As a result, the amount of light reflected toward the projection plate member 620 can be increased.

Further, since the outer diameter of the gear member 630 is formed larger than the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620, the irradiation angle β from the light source A can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the light emitted from the light source A can be reflected at the outer edge of the gear member 630 and can be easily made to enter the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, the efficiency of collecting light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased accordingly.

Next, the detailed configuration of the irradiation unit 650 and the attachment structure to the base member 610 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46.

44(a) is a top view of the irradiation unit 650, and FIG. 44(b) is a front view of the irradiation unit 650 as viewed in the direction of arrow XLIVb in FIG. 44(a). Further, FIG. 45(a) is a rear view of the irradiation unit 650 as seen in the direction of arrow XLVa in FIG. 44(a), and FIG. 45(b) is a rear view of the irradiation unit 650 as seen along the FIG. Note that FIGS. 44 and 45 illustrate a state before being attached to the base member 610 (front base 612) (that is, a state in which the substrate member 652 is not elastically deformed).

As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the irradiation unit 650 includes a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) LEDs 651, a substrate member 652 on which the plurality of LEDs 651 are mounted on the front, and a back surface of the substrate member 652. A plurality of (in this embodiment, two each) first blocks 653 and second blocks 654 are provided.

The substrate member 652 is formed from an elastically deformable material into a horizontally long belt shape when viewed from the front. As described above, the LEDs 651 are light emitting means that emit light to be incident from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, and a plurality of LEDs are arranged in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 with the irradiation surface facing the front of the substrate member 652. They are arranged at equal intervals along the left-right direction (FIG. 44(b)).

The first block 653 and the second block 654 are members interposed between the substrate member 652 and the base member 610, and the two first blocks 653 are arranged on the longitudinal center side of the substrate member 652. At the same time, second blocks 654 are arranged on both sides of the substrate member 652 in the longitudinal direction with the first blocks 653 interposed therebetween.

The first block 653 and the second block 654 are formed from a resin material in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped, and have higher rigidity (characteristic of being less likely to be elastically deformed) than the substrate member 652. Therefore, when it is attached to the base member 610 (front base 612), only the portion of the substrate member 652 located between adjacent blocks 653 and 654 can be elastically deformed. Here, the first block 653 and the second block 654 will be explained with reference to FIG. 46.

46(a) is a front view of the first block 653, and FIG. 46(b) is a sectional view of the first block 653 taken along the line XLVIb-XLVIb in FIG. 46(a). Further, FIG. 46(c) is a front view of the second block 654, and FIG. 46(d) is a sectional view of the second block 654 taken along the line XLVId-XLVId in FIG. 46(c).

The first block 653 is connected to the front side (FIG. 46(a), paper surface It is shaped like a box with an open front side.

A fastening hole h is recessed in the front end surface of the opposing side wall part 653b (standing upright from the short side of the bottom wall part 653a) among the four side wall parts 653b, and the screw S1 can be fastened thereto. It is said that Further, side wall portions 653b other than the side wall portion 653b in which the fastening hole h is recessed are connected by a connecting wall 653c, and a protrusion 653c1 is provided protruding from the front end surface of the connecting wall 653c.

The second block 654 is formed from a bottom wall portion 654a that is rectangular in front view, and a side wall portion 654b that stands upright from the four sides of the bottom wall portion 654a toward the front side (FIG. 46(c), this side of the page). It is shaped like a box with open sides). An opening 654a1, which is rectangular in front view, is formed in the bottom wall portion 654a, through which an electrical connection line can be inserted.

A fastening hole h is recessed in the front end surface of the side wall part 654b, which stands up from the short side of the bottom wall part 654a of the four side wall parts 654b, so that a screw S1 can be fastened thereto. Further, the side walls 653b standing from the long sides of the bottom wall 654a are connected to each other by a connecting wall 654c, and the connecting wall 654c has a fastening hole h recessed in its front end surface, and a screw S1 can be concluded.

In the first block 653 and the second block 654, insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 are bored at two places in each of the side wall parts 653b and 654b that stand up from the long sides of the bottom wall parts 653a and 654a (Fig. 45 (a) and FIG. 46(b)). The holding pin 612g of the front base 612 is inserted into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1. This makes it possible to position the blocks 653 and 654 with respect to the front base 612 and to hold them at these positions.

Note that the first block 653 is symmetrical with respect to a first virtual plane passing through the center in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46(a)) (i.e., a virtual plane including the axes of the two fastening holes h). , and is formed in a shape that is symmetrical with respect to a second imaginary plane that passes through the center in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 46(a)) and is perpendicular to the first imaginary plane.

Therefore, in the irradiation unit 650 in which two first blocks 653 are arranged for one substrate member 620, the first block 653 can be shared, reducing the number of parts and reducing product cost. I can do it. Furthermore, when assembling the first block 653 to the board member 620, the first block 653 does not have vertical or longitudinal directionality with respect to the board member 620, which improves workability during assembly work. can be achieved.

Similarly, the second block 654 is connected to a first virtual plane passing through the center in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46(c)) (i.e., a virtual plane including the axes of the two fastening holes h). It is formed into a symmetrical shape.

Therefore, in the irradiation unit 650 in which two second blocks 654 are arranged for one substrate member 620, the second block 654 can be shared, reducing the number of parts and reducing product cost. I can do it. Furthermore, when assembling the second block 654 to the board member 620, since the second block 654 does not have vertical directionality with respect to the board member 620, workability during assembly work can be improved. I can do it.

The explanation will be given by returning to FIGS. 44 and 45. The first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back side of the substrate member 652, with their longitudinal directions along the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652, and with a predetermined interval between adjacent blocks. Ru.

Specifically, the first block 653 and the second block 654 have their front surfaces overlapped with the back surface of the substrate member 652, and the screw S1 inserted through the insertion hole drilled in the substrate member 652 is screwed into the fastening hole h. By doing so, it is fastened and fixed to the back side of the substrate member 652. In this case, the protrusion 653c1 of the first block 653 protrudes from the insertion hole formed in the substrate member 652 to the front side.

On the board member 652, only the LED 651 is arranged (mounted) on the front side, and other electronic components and connectors are arranged (mounted) on the back side of the board member 652. In this case, as described above, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are formed in a box shape with an open front, and are arranged with the open side overlapping the back surface of the substrate member 652. That is, since both blocks 653 and 654 are provided with a recess on the side that is superimposed (arranged) on the board member 652, electronic components and connectors mounted on the board member 652 are placed in the recess (inner space). can be accommodated. Therefore, since the electronic components and connectors can be covered and protected by both blocks 653 and 654, it is possible to suppress damage to the electronic components and connectors caused by contact with surrounding displacing members (for example, the projection plate member 620). can.

Further, the circuit (pattern) formed on the substrate member 652 is formed on the back surface thereof. Therefore, since such a circuit can be covered and protected by both blocks 653 and 654, it is possible to prevent the circuit from being damaged (broken) due to contact with surrounding displacing members (for example, the projection plate member 620). can. In addition, since the portion of the substrate member 652 where both blocks 653 and 654 are not provided is elastically deformed (bent) into a curved shape convex toward the back side (see FIG. 34), the circuit can be projected accordingly. It can be spaced apart from the plate member 620. Thereby, damage to the circuit (disconnection) can be suppressed even in areas where both blocks 653 and 654 are not provided.

A method for installing (assembling) the irradiation unit 650 configured in this manner on the base member 610 will be described. First, the irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the back surface of the front base 612 in an area between the intermediate upright portion 611b and the outer upright portion 612c. In this case, while elastically deforming (bending) the substrate member 652, each of the holding pins 612g erected from the back surface of the front base 612 is inserted into each of the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of the first block 653 and the second block 654. .

As a result, both blocks 653 and 654 (i.e., the irradiation unit 650) can be held on the back surface of the front base 612, and the installation position of the irradiation unit 650 (i.e., the irradiation direction of the LED 651) can be positioned at a predetermined position (FIG. 34 reference). Thereafter, the front surface of the rear base 611 is superimposed on the rear surface of the front base 612, so that the irradiation unit 650 is accommodated between the opposing surfaces (internal space) of the bases 611 and 612. That is, the irradiation unit 650 is disposed (assembled) on the base member 610.

In this embodiment, when the irradiation unit 650 is disposed on the base member 610, the LEDs 651 are disposed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction on the outer circumferential side of the projection plate member 620, as described above. In other words, not only the circumferential spacing between the LEDs 651 in one irradiation unit 650 but also the circumferential spacing between the LEDs 651 in that one irradiation unit 650 and the irradiation unit 650 adjacent to that one irradiation unit 650 are the same as the others. be done.

Here, the projection unit 600 allows the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 651 to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, it is necessary to arrange a plurality of LEDs 651 along the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. In addition to the large number of LEDs 651, the arrangement (attachment) of each LED 651 is such that the irradiation surface (irradiation direction) of each LED 651 is adjusted to face the center of the projection plate member 620, and each LED 651 is arranged respectively. It is necessary to do so, which increases the time and effort of the installation work.

On the other hand, according to this embodiment, a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) LEDs 651 are mounted on a board member 652 that is formed to be elastically deformable, so one board member 652 (irradiation unit 650) By arranging (attaching) the LEDs 651 to the front base 612 (base member 610), the installation work of a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) LEDs 651 can be completed at once (see FIG. 34). Therefore, the effort required to arrange the LED 651 can be reduced accordingly.

In addition, by inserting the holding pins 612g of the back base 612 into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of the first block 653 and the second block 654, the board member 652 can be held in a predetermined elastically deformed posture, and the LED 651 can be held in a predetermined posture. The direction of the irradiation surface can be defined (see FIG. 34). That is, there is no need to individually adjust the irradiation surfaces of a plurality of LEDs 651 and assemble them to the back base 612, and each LED 651 can be assembled by simply inserting the holding pin 612g into the insertion holes 653b1, 654b1 of both blocks 653, 654. Since the attitude (irradiation direction) of the LED 651 can be set (adjusted), the effort required to arrange (install) the LED 651 can also be reduced from this point of view.

In this case, the irradiation unit 650 includes a first block 653 and a second block 654 that are formed to have higher rigidity than the substrate member 652, and since both blocks 653 and 654 are held by the rear base 612, vibrations etc. The posture of the substrate member 652 can be easily defined as a desired posture by suppressing the warpage or deflection of the substrate member 652 due to external force input, or by correcting the warpage or deflection of the substrate member 652 itself. As a result, the attitude of each LED 651 is suppressed from being affected by warpage or bending of the substrate member 652, and the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be easily maintained.

In particular, each LED 651 is arranged in a region of the substrate member 652 where the first block 653 or the second block 654 is arranged (that is, inside the region surrounded by the four side walls 653b and 654b in front view). will be established. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the warping and deflection of the substrate member 652 due to the input of external forces such as vibrations, or it is possible to easily correct the warpage and deflection of the substrate member 652 itself, so that the posture of the substrate member 652 can be adjusted to a desired posture. It can be easily defined. As a result, the attitude of each LED 651 can be more reliably suppressed from being affected by warping or bending of the substrate member 652, and the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction, and that orientation can be further maintained. It's easy to do.

Further, each LED 651 is mounted on the front side of the board member 652, while the first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back side of the board member 652, so that the board member 652 is The LED 651 can be brought closer to the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 while achieving the effect of stabilizing the posture.

Here, the LEDs 651 are arranged at equal intervals along the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 (left-right direction in FIGS. 44 and 45). That is, when the irradiation unit 650 is attached to the base member 610 (front base 612), the LEDs 651 can be arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction on the outer circumferential side of the projection plate member 620 (see FIG. 34). Uniformity of light incident from the outer peripheral surface can be ensured.

In this case, in the present embodiment, one of the two fastening holes h of the second block 654 is formed in the connecting wall 654c, so that the longitudinal dimension of the second block 654 is can be shortened. Further, the second block 654 is disposed on the substrate member 652 with the side wall portion 653b in which the fastening hole h is formed facing the first block 653 side. That is, the side wall portions 653b in which the fastening holes h are not formed are located at both ends of the substrate member 652 in the longitudinal direction.

As a result, the LEDs 651 are arranged at equal intervals in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652, ensuring uniformity of the light incident on the projection plate member 620, while ensuring the uniformity of the light incident on the projection plate member 620. ) can be shortened to provide a space between adjacent irradiation units 650. In this case, the shaft portion 612f can be disposed using this space, and as a result, the distance between the LED 651 and the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 can be easily brought close to each other.

On the other hand, since the first block 653 has two fastening holes h formed in the connecting wall 654c, the distance between the fastening holes h and the LED 651 can be shortened. That is, the position where the board member 652 is fastened and fixed to the first block 653 by the screw S1 can be brought close to the LED 651. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the LED 651 to be affected by the warpage or deflection of the substrate member 652 due to the input of external force such as vibration, and it is possible to easily correct the warpage or deflection of the substrate member 652 itself especially in the vicinity of the LED 651. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably suppress the attitude of each LED 651 from being affected by warping or bending of the substrate member 652, so that the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be further maintained. It's easy to do.

In this case, in the first block 653, since the distance between the two fastening holes h becomes large, there is a possibility that the restraint of the substrate member 652 between the two fastening holes h becomes weak. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a connecting wall 653c is provided between the side wall parts 653b in which the fastening hole h is formed, and a protrusion 653c1 protruding from the connecting wall 653c is inserted through a hole formed in the substrate member 652. Insert it into the hole. Therefore, due to the engagement between the protrusion 653c1 and the insertion hole, it is possible to easily suppress the warping and deflection of the board member 652 due to the input of external force such as vibration, or it is possible to easily correct the warpage and bending of the board member 652 itself. The attitude of the substrate member 652 can be easily defined to a desired attitude. As a result, it is not necessary to separately provide the screw S1, and the number of parts can be reduced, so the product cost can be reduced accordingly, and the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction. It can be made easier to maintain.

Note that both ends of the substrate member 652 in the longitudinal direction (outermost in the longitudinal direction, left end and right end in FIG. 45(b)) are free ends (that is, not restrained by the second block 654). There is a possibility that the posture of the LEDs 651 located at both ends may become unstable. On the other hand, in this embodiment, a first block 653 and a second block 654 are arranged on the back side of the substrate member 652, and the substrate member 652 is elastically deformed (bent) in the direction in which the arc center is located on the front side. ) (see FIG. 34), the elastic recovery force of the substrate member 652 can act as a force in the direction of pressing the back surface of both longitudinal ends of the substrate member 652 against the front surface of the second block 654. As a result, the posture of the LEDs 651 located at both ends of the substrate member 652 in the longitudinal direction can be stabilized.

Next, the vertical displacement unit 800 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50.

47 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800, and FIG. 48 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800. 49 is a front perspective view of the vertical displacement unit 800, and FIG. 50 is a rear perspective view of the vertical displacement unit 800.

As shown in FIGS. 47 to 50, the vertical displacement unit 800 includes a back base 830 having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a front base 820 stacked on the front side of the back base 830, and a front base 820 stacked on the back side of the back base 830. A drive motor 880 arranged, a displacement member 850 that is rotated with respect to the back base 830 and front base 820 by the drive force of the drive motor 880, and a transmission mechanism that transmits the drive force of the drive motor 880 to the displacement member 850. 860, a connecting member 870 that connects the transmission mechanism 860 and the displacement member 850, and a cover member 840 that is disposed in front of the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850 and attached to the front base 820. .

The back base 830 has an opening 831 formed in a size that allows the transmission gear 861 of the transmission mechanism 860 connected to the drive motor 880 to be inserted therethrough, and an opening 831 that protrudes at the respective axes of the transmission gears 862 and 863 of the transmission mechanism 860. It mainly includes formed shaft portions 832 and 833, and a back side regulating portion 834 that protrudes from the front side and extends in a curved shape.

A shaft portion of a drive motor 880 attached to the back side of the back base 830 is inserted through the opening 831 . Thereby, the driving force of the drive motor 880 can be transmitted to the transmission mechanism 860 disposed on the front side of the rear base 830.

Furthermore, the opening 831 is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the transmission gear 861 of the transmission mechanism 860. Thereby, when the transmission gear 861 is damaged, the transmission gear 861 can be removed from the vertical displacement unit 800 by removing the drive motor 880 from the back base 830. As a result, the number of work steps required to replace parts when the transmission gear 861 is damaged can be reduced.

The shaft portions 832 and 833 are shafts on which transmission gears 862 and 863 of a transmission mechanism 860 to be described later are supported and rotatably held, respectively, and are formed to protrude from the rear base 830 toward the front side in a cylindrical shape.

The rear side regulating portion 834 is a protrusion that restricts the displacement of the connecting member 870, which will be described later, in the rear direction (towards the back of the paper in FIG. 47), and is provided protruding from the front side of the rear base 830, and is a projection that restricts the displacement of the connecting member 870, which will be described later. It extends in a curved shape along the displacement.

The front base 820 is formed into a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front and has a slightly larger outer shape than the rear base 830. The front base 820 includes a shaft support 821 that is recessed from the front side to the back side (from the front side to the back side of the paper in FIG. 47), a side wall 822 that stands on the edge of the back side, and a side wall 822 that protrudes toward the back side. It mainly includes a protrusion 823 that protrudes from the back side, a front-side regulating part 824 that extends in a curved shape, and a bulge part 825 that protrudes from the back side.

The shaft support 821 is a shaft hole into which one end of a pin member 890 (described later) is inserted, and is recessed in the lower right side of the front base 820 when viewed from the front.

The side wall 822 is a wall portion for forming a gap between the back base 830 and the front base 820 in which a transmission mechanism 860 and a connecting member 870, which will be described later, are arranged, and the thickness of the transmitting mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction is It is erected on the upper and left and right (other than the lower end) edges of the front base 820 with larger dimensions than the above dimensions. Thereby, when the front base 820 and the back base 830 are fastened together, the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be disposed between them in a movable state.

The protrusion 823 is a protrusion that is engaged with one end side (upper side in FIG. 48) of a biasing spring SP, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape and protrudes from the back side of the front base 820.

The front-side regulating portion 824 is a protrusion that regulates the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front direction (towards the front in the paper plane of FIG. 47), and is provided protruding from the rear side of the front base 820, and also extends along the displacement of the connecting member 870. It is extended in a curved shape.

The bulging portion 825 is a protruding wall disposed laterally adjacent to a biasing spring SP, which will be described later, with a predetermined distance therebetween, and is formed to protrude from the lower end of the front base 820 toward the back side.

The transmission mechanism 860 is a gear train composed of transmission gears 861 to 863, which mesh in series, so that the driving force applied from the drive motor 880 is transmitted to the transmission gear 863 via the transmission gears 861 and 862. will be transmitted up to.

The transmission gear 863 has a tooth portion 863a that meshes with the transmission gear 862, a shaft portion 863b that is connected to the connecting member 870, a projection portion 863c that projects in an arc shape centered on the shaft, and a rotational position of the tooth portion 863a. It mainly includes a plate-shaped sensor detection plate 863d for detecting.

The tooth portion 863a is a toothing surface formed on about two-thirds of the circular side surface of the transmission gear 863, and thereby allows driving force to be transmitted from the transmission gear 862 to the transmission gear 863.

The shaft portion 863b is a shaft connected to the connecting member 870, and is protruded in a cylindrical shape toward the back side, and the shaft is arranged at a different position (eccentric position) from the rotation axis of the transmission gear 863.

The protruding portion 863c is a protrusion for suppressing the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front direction, and is formed protrudingly on the outer edge portion of the back side of the transmission gear 863, and is formed around the axis of the transmission gear 863. It is curved into a circular shape.

The sensor detection plate 863d is a plate that blocks the detection area of a position detection sensor (not shown) disposed on the front base in order to detect the rotational position of the transmission gear 863, and is formed by the teeth 863a of the transmission gear 863. It is formed to protrude radially outward on the side surface that is not covered.

The connecting member 870 is a member that transmits the driving force of the rotation of the transmitting mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850, and is curved in a substantially C-shape when viewed from the front, and has a shape extending in the front-rear direction at one end of the curved shape (upper end in FIG. 48). A gear-side connection hole 871 formed through the gear side, a displacement-side connection hole 872 formed through the other end of the curved shape (lower end in FIG. 48) in the front-rear direction, and an abutment formed to protrude upward from the outside of the curved portion. 873.

The gear side connection hole 871 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 863b. Thereby, the transmission gear 863 and the connection member 870 can be connected, and the driving force of the transmission gear 863 can be transmitted to the connection member 870.

The displacement-side connection hole 872 is a through-hole into which a shaft portion 853 of a displacement member 850 (described later) is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 853. Thereby, the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 can be connected, and the driving force of the connecting member 870 can be transmitted to the displacement member 850.

The contact portion 873 is a protrusion for regulating the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the front-rear direction, and its tip is disposed between the opposing rear side regulating portion 834 of the rear base 830 and the front side regulating portion 824 of the front base 820. be done.

In addition, the abutting portion 873 has a width dimension in the front-rear direction at the tip that is slightly smaller than the distance between the opposing rear side regulating portion 834 of the rear base 830 and the front side regulating portion 824 of the front base 820. It is formed. Therefore, when the connecting member 870 is displaced, by displacing the abutment portion 873 in the gap between the rear side regulating portion 834 and the front side regulating portion 824, the resistance when the connecting member 870 is displaced is increased. You can prevent it from happening. On the other hand, when the connecting member 870 is displaced in the front-back direction, the displacement of the connecting member 870 can be stabilized by coming into contact with the front base 820 or the back base 830.

The cover member 840 is a member that holds one end of the displacement member 850 (the right end in FIG. 47), is formed into a vertically elongated rectangle when viewed from the front, and is fastened to the front base 820 with a pin member 890 interposed therebetween. . Further, a shaft support 841 is formed in the cover member 840 and is recessed in a circular shape from the back side to the front side.

The shaft support 841 is a groove that holds (spins) the pin member 890 in a rotatable state by inserting the front end of the pin member 890, and is located at a position facing the shaft support 821 of the front base 820. is formed. Thereby, the pin member 890 is disposed between the opposing shaft support 821 of the front base 820 and the shaft support 841 of the cover member 840, so that falling off from the vertical displacement unit 800 can be suppressed.

The displacement member 850 is a member decorated on the front side, and one end (right side in FIG. 47) is formed into a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the other end (left side in FIG. 47) is formed into a circular shape when viewed from the front. The displacement member 850 is formed to include a shaft hole 851 into which the pin member 890 is inserted, a projection 852 to which the biasing spring SP is connected, and a shaft portion 853 which transmits the driving force of the connection member 870.

The shaft hole 851 is a through hole into which the pin member 890 is inserted, as described above, and is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at one end of the displacement member, and its inner diameter is larger than the outer diameter of the pin member 890. is also formed large. Therefore, in the displacement member 850, the pin member 890 is inserted into the shaft hole 851, and the pin member 890 is disposed between the facing shaft support 821 of the front base 820 and the shaft support 841 of the cover member 840. , the displacement member 850 can be arranged in front of the front base 820 in a rotatable state about the axis of the shaft hole 851.

The projection 852 is a projection to which the other end (lower end in FIG. 50) of the biasing spring SP is engaged, and is formed to protrude from the back side of the displacement member 850. Further, when the displacement member 850 is placed on the front base 820, the protrusion 852 is formed at a position that protrudes from below the protrusion 823 of the front base 820 toward the back side, and the protrusion distance is such that the protrusion distance is on the front side of the back base. is formed to a position that approximately coincides with the side surface of the Therefore, the longitudinal direction of the biasing spring SP can be made parallel to the direction of gravity. As a result, the displacement member 850 is always urged upward in the direction of gravity relative to the front base 820.

As described above, the shaft portion 853 is a shaft inserted into the displacement-side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870, and when the displacement member 850 is placed on the front base 820, it is located below the front base 820 (see FIG. 50). A protrusion is formed at the lower side) position. Therefore, the displacement member 850 and the connection member 870 can be connected, and the driving force of the displacement member 850 can be transmitted to the connection member 870.

As described above, the pin member 890 is a shaft inserted into the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850, and is formed from a rod-shaped metal body that is harder than the displacement member 850. This can suppress damage to the rotating shaft when force is applied to the rotating shaft when the displacement member 850 is displaced.

Furthermore, the resistance of the shaft portion when the displacement member 850 rotates is determined by the resistance when the pin member 890 rotates with respect to the respective shaft supports 821 and 841, and the resistance when the displacement member 850 rotates with respect to the pin member 890. Since the resistor can be divided into two parts, it is possible to prevent parts from being damaged due to an increase in the resistance at one location.

Next, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 800 configured as above will be explained with reference to FIGS. 51 to 56. FIG. 51 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the first position, FIG. 52 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the intermediate position, and FIG. 53 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the second position. It is.

FIG. 54 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the first position, FIG. 55 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the intermediate position, and FIG. 56 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the second position. It is. Note that in FIGS. 54 to 56, the rear base 830 is shown with the rear base 830 removed for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 51 and 54, when the other end of the displacement member 850 (left side in FIG. 52) is placed upward (first position), the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is placed upward, A connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is arranged above. As a result, the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 inserted into the displacement-side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870 is arranged upward, so that the displacement member 850 is placed in an upwardly suspended posture.

In addition, in the first position, a straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the shaft portion 863b connects the axis of the protrusion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the displacement side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870. The straight line is placed on the same straight line.

Therefore, in the first position, the displacement member 850 can create a state (ie, dead center) in which no force component is generated in the direction of pushing and pulling the connecting member 870 to rotate the transmission gear 863. As a result, after the displacement member 850 is placed in the first position, it is possible to suppress rattling of the displacement member 850 and improve durability.

From the state shown in FIGS. 51 and 54, when power is supplied to the drive motor 880, the drive motor 880 is rotationally driven, and each transmission gear 861, 862, 863 (transmission mechanism 860) is rotated. The shaft portion 863b is displaced downward. Therefore, the gear side connection hole 871 of the connection member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is pushed down as the shaft portion 863b is rotated. As a result, the displacement side connection hole 872 formed on the other end side of the connection member 870 (lower side in FIGS. 54 and 55) pushes down the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850, and the displacement member 850 can be rotated.

In this case, as the transmission gear 863 is rotated, the straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the shaft portion 863b, the axis of the protrusion 863c of the transmission gear 863, and the connection member 870 are displaced. The straight line connecting the side connecting holes 872 is in a state of tolerance. Therefore, the state in which the displacement member 850 does not generate a force component in the direction of pushing and pulling the connecting member 870 to rotate the transmission gear 863 (ie, the dead center) can be released. As a result, when the transmission gear 863 begins to rotate in the rotational direction that displaces the displacement member 850 (clockwise rotation in FIG. 54), the force that pulls the gear-side connection hole 871 of the connection member 780 due to the gravity of the displacement member 850 is reduced. , can be applied in the direction in which the transmission gear 863 rotates. As a result, the energy consumption of the drive motor 880 during displacement from the first position can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIGS. 52 and 55, after the displacement member 850 is displaced from the state shown in FIGS. 51 and 54 (i.e., the state located at the dead center), power is supplied to the drive motor 880. Explain what happens when you turn it off.

As shown in FIGS. 52 and 55, when the power supply to the drive motor 880 is turned off after being displaced from the first position, the axis (rotation center) of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the transmission gear 863 At a position where the direction connecting the portion 863b and the direction connecting the gear side connection hole 871 and the displacement side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870 are approximately perpendicular, the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elastic recovery of the biasing spring SP occur. It is assumed that the forces are balanced (intermediate position).

Therefore, when displacing the displacement member 850 from the first position to the second position described later, by turning off the power supply to the drive motor 880, the displacement member 850 is moved around the intermediate position (balanced position). The displacement member 850 can be caused to perform reciprocating displacement due to the acting weight and the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP. That is, the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the direction of gravity can be made into an orthogonal projection of a uniform circular motion, and the displacement speed can be varied, so that the displacement member can be caused to perform an interesting displacement.

On the other hand, if power is supplied to the drive motor 880 and a driving force is applied from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850 via the connection member 870, the displacement described above (orthogonal projection motion of uniform circular motion) is different. In this manner, the displacement member 850 can be displaced between the first position and the second position, and variations in displacement can be increased accordingly. That is, by simply turning on or off the power supply to the drive motor 880 and switching whether or not to apply the driving force from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850, variations in displacement can be increased, and the structure and control can be improved. Since there is no need for complexity, product costs can be reduced and reliability can be improved.

Furthermore, as described above, since the displacement member 850 is rotated about the shaft hole 851, the application of the driving force to the displacement member 850 from the transmission mechanism 860 is released, and the effect of gravity on the displacement member 850 is removed. When the displacement member 850 is caused to perform reciprocating displacement due to the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP, the displacement of the other end side (left side in FIG. 52) of the displacement member 850 is not limited to linear movement in the vertical direction. The displacement can also be a combination of rotational motion about the shaft hole 851 as the rotation center. As a result, the displacement member 850 can be displaced in an interesting manner.

In this case, the connecting member 870 connected to the displacement member 850 is pushed and pulled (displaced in the vertical direction) as the displacement member 850 is displaced, and rotates the transmission gear 863. Since the attitude of 863 is changed, it is possible to change the magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the rotary member among the push and pull directions. That is, when the displacement member 850 is reciprocated, the amount of resistance that the displacement member 850 receives from the transmission mechanism 860 and the connection member 870 can be changed. As a result, the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850 can be varied, and the displacement member can be caused to perform an interesting displacement.

Furthermore, as described above, when the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP are balanced (intermediate position), the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 are Since the straight line connecting the axes is approximately perpendicular to the straight line connecting the axes of the gear side connecting hole 871 and the displacement side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870, the force in the pushing and pulling direction is The magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the transmission gear 863 can be maximized at the balance position (intermediate position), and the force component can be decreased in either direction of push or pull from the balance position. . That is, when the displacement member 850 is reciprocated, the resistance that the displacement member 850 receives from the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be changed approximately symmetrically around the balanced position, so that the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850 is can be made easier to continue.

From the state shown in FIGS. 52 and 55, when power is supplied to the drive motor 880 and each transmission gear 861, 862, 863 (transmission mechanism 860) is further rotated, the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is moved further downward. is displaced. Therefore, the gear side connection hole 871 of the connection member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is further pushed down as the shaft portion 863b is rotated. As a result, the displacement side connection hole 872 formed on the other end side of the connection member 870 pushes down the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850, and the displacement member 850 can be rotated.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 56, when the other end of the displacement member 850 (left side in FIG. 53) is placed in the lowered position (second position), the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is placed downward. , a connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is disposed below. As a result, the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 inserted into the displacement-side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870 is disposed downward, so that the displacement member 850 can be pushed downward.

In addition, in the second position, a straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the protrusion 863c of the transmission gear 863, the axis of the protrusion 863c of the transmission gear 863, and the displacement side connection of the connection member 870. The straight line connecting the axes of the hole 872 is arranged at the same straight line length.

Therefore, in the second position, the displacement member 850 can create a state (ie, a dead center) in which no force component is generated in the direction of pushing and pulling the connecting member 870 to rotate the transmission gear 863. As a result, after the displacement member 850 is placed at the second position, it is possible to suppress rattling of the displacement member 850 and improve durability.

Next, referring to FIG. 57, the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 will be described. 57(a) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the first position, and FIG. 57(b) is a rear view of the transmitting gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the intermediate position. (c) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the second position. Note that in FIGS. 57(a) to 57(c), a part of the transmission gear 863 (the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 located in front of the coupling member 870) is illustrated by a broken line.

As shown in FIG. 57(a), in the first position, the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 is disposed at a position facing the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the gap in the front-rear direction of the connecting member 870 disposed between the back base 830 and the transmission gear 863 can be reduced, so that the connecting member 870 can be easily brought into contact with the back base 830 or the transmission gear 863.

Therefore, in the first position, the resistance when driving the displacement member 850 can be increased. As a result, in the first position, the displacement member 850 is preferably placed in a stopped state in order to form a retracted state in which the third symbol display device 81 is visible to the player by disposing the displacement member 850 upward. However, by increasing the resistance for driving the displacement member 850, it is possible to easily maintain the stopped state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 57(b) and 57(c), a state in which power is applied to the drive motor 880 and the transmission gear 863 is rotated beyond a certain level (the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 is In the state in which the driving range θ6 is being driven, the connecting member 870 and the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 are not opposed to each other in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated beyond a certain level, the gap in the front-rear direction of the connecting member 870 disposed between the transmitting gear 863 and the rear base 830 can be increased, so that the resistance when displacing the connecting member 870 can be increased. can be made smaller.

Therefore, when displacing the displacing member 850 from the first position to the second position, it is preferable to displace the displacing member 850 in front of the third symbol display device 81 in a short time. , the displacement member 850 can be displaced from the first position to the second position in a short time.

Further, as shown in FIG. 57(c), in the second position, the contact portion 873c of the connecting member 870 can be brought into contact with the tooth portion 863a of the transmission gear 863.

Here, when displacing a vertically displacing displaceable member downward and stopping it, the gravity of the displacing member is added to the inertia force at the time of stopping, so the problem is that the displacing member cannot be stopped quickly. was there.

On the other hand, in the vertical displacement unit 800, when the displacement member 850 is displaced to the second position, the contact portion 873c of the connecting member 870 can be brought into contact with the transmission gear 863. The force when stopping the transmission gear 863 is divided into two forces: the force that is stopped when the connecting member 870 comes into contact with the transmission gear 863, and the force that is stopped when the rotation of the transmission gear 863 (drive of the drive motor 880) is stopped. can be dispersed into As a result, the displacement member 850 that has been displaced from the first position to the second position can be quickly stopped at the second position.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 58(a) to 58(c), the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 when displaced from the first position will be described. 58(a) to 58(c) are rear views of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the first drive range θ5. Note that FIGS. 58(a) to 58(c) illustrate transition states from the first position. Further, in FIGS. 58(a) to 58(c), a part of the transmission gear 863 (the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 located in front of the coupling member 870) is illustrated by a broken line.

As shown in FIGS. 58(a) to 58(c), when the transmission gear 863 is rotated and the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is displaced through the first drive range θ5, the transmission gear 863 is rotated and the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is displaced from the first position to the second position. The portion where the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 face each other can be reduced as the position changes.

Therefore, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated from the first position, the resistance to displacing the displacement member 850 can be reduced as the displacement member 850 is displaced, so that the displacement member 850 can be smoothly displaced.

Furthermore, when displacing the displacing member 850 from the second position to the first position, the sliding resistance of the displacing member 850 can be increased while displacing the displacing member 850 to the first position, which is the retracted position. When the displacement member 850 is moved to a certain position and stopped, the displacement member 850 can be quickly brought to a stopped state.

That is, when displacing and stopping the displacement member 850, it is difficult to quickly establish a stopped state due to the inertia force that stops the operation, but since the resistance of the displacement member 850 when stopping can be increased, the stopped state can be quickly formed. can do.

On the other hand, when the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is displaced through the second drive range θ6, the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 are not disposed at opposing positions in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the resistance to displacing the displacement member 850 can be reduced. As a result, when the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 drives the second drive range θ6, the displacement member 850 can be quickly displaced, and the effect of the extending operation of the displacement member 850 can be enhanced.

In addition, in the second drive range θ6, when the driving force from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850 is released and the displacement member 850 is caused to perform reciprocating displacement about the intermediate position (balanced position), the protrusion The generation of resistance due to the portion 863c can be avoided, and the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850 can be performed smoothly.

Next, the contact portion 873, the front base 820, and the back base 830 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59(a) to 59(c). 59(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 taken along the line LIXa-LIXa in FIG. 54, and FIG. 59(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 taken along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 taken along the line LIXc-LIXc in FIG. 56.

As shown in FIGS. 59(a) and 59(b), the tip of the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 is located between the front side regulating portion 824 of the front base 820 and the back side regulating portion 834 of the rear base 830. will be placed in

That is, the front side regulating part 824 of the front base 820 and the back side regulating part 834 of the back base 830 are formed into a curved shape according to the displacement of the tip of the abutting part 873 of the connecting member 870. This restricts displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction.

Here, the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 are in a state where the shaft portion 853 is inserted into the displacement side connecting hole 872, so that the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 are tilted in the front-back direction due to the gravity of the displacement member 850 due to the gap between the shaft and the hole. As a result, there was a problem in that the displacement side connecting hole 872 or the shaft portion 853 was deformed.

On the other hand, since the vertical displacement unit 800 is prevented from tilting in the front-rear direction by the contact portion 873, the displacement member 850 can be smoothly displaced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59(c), when the displacement member 850 is displaced to the second position, the rear side regulating portion 834 of the rear base 830 is at a position facing the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870. It can be set to a state where it is not located.

Thereby, the gap between the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 and the front base 820 and the rear base 830 at the second position can be increased. As a result, the resistance when displacing the displacement member 850 from the second position to the first position can be reduced, making it easier to displace the displacement member 850 from the second position.

Further, in the vertical displacement unit 800, the contact portion 873 is located approximately on a straight line connecting the axis of the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 and the axis of the gear side connection hole of the connection member 870, and It is disposed on the opposite side to the axis of the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850 across the axis of the gear side connection hole of the connection member 870 (see FIG. 54).

Therefore, when the connecting member 870 shakes with respect to the front base 820 and the rear base 830, the abutting portion 873 of the connecting member 870 comes into contact with the front base 820 and the rear base 830, thereby preventing the shaft of the transmission gear 863. The inclination of the portion 863b and the gear-side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 870 can be easily suppressed. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 880 can be smoothly transmitted to the displacement member 850 via the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63. In the first embodiment, the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620 is set smaller than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640, but in the second embodiment, the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620 is set smaller than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640. The outer diameter dimensions are set to be the same as those of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640.

First, the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

60(a) is a front view of the projection plate member 2620, gear member 630, and groove forming member 2640 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 60(b) is a projection taken along the line LXb-LXb in FIG. 60(a). FIG. 3 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a plate member 2620, a gear member 630, and a groove forming member 2640.

As shown in FIGS. 60(a) and 60(b), a gear member 630 and a groove forming member 2640 are provided on the outer peripheral edge of the projection plate member 2620 on the back side and the front side, respectively. The projection plate member 2620 is formed into a circular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and its outer diameter is the same as the outer diameter of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640. Further, the projection plate member 2620 includes a notch portion 621 and a reflecting portion 622 that diffusely reflects light in a part of the outer edge.

The groove forming member 2640 is made of a light-transmitting material with a lower refractive index than the projection plate member 2620, and is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has a U-shaped cross section concave from the outer edge side to the inner edge side. A guide groove 2641 is provided. Further, the groove forming member 2640 is arranged on the front side (upper side in FIG. 60(b)) of the projection plate member 2620, and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 2620. Furthermore, the groove forming member 2640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612).

The guide groove 2641 is a groove that guides the collar C inward, and is formed to have a concave width larger than the axial dimension of the protrusion C1 of the collar C. Therefore, the projection plate member 2620 is rotatably held by the base member 610 by guiding the plurality of collars C rotatably supported by the base member 610 to the guide groove 2641.

Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63.

61 to 63 are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640. Note that in FIG. 61(b), FIG. 62(b), and FIG. 63(b), cross-sectional lines are omitted for ease of understanding.

Furthermore, in FIGS. 61(b), 62(b), and 63(b), light from light source A is incident on the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640, as in the first embodiment. The angle of refraction at this time is assumed to have no effect on the present invention, and the light entering the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640 from the light source A is illustrated in a state in which the light is orthogonal. Furthermore, in FIGS. 61 to 63, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M, similar to the first embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light at the irradiation angle α2 that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 2620 is directed toward the outer edge of the projection plate member 620. The light is incident from the side of the part. The light incident on the projection plate member 2620 is reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by being irradiated onto the front and back side surfaces of the projection plate member 2620. Thereby, the light incident on the projection plate member 2620 can travel from the edge of the projection plate member 2620 toward the center (axis). Therefore, the light from the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α1 passes through the projection plate member 2620, is diffusely reflected by the reflection section 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine.

Note that in this case, the projection plate member 2620 is formed to have a larger external dimension than the projection plate member 620 in the first embodiment. Thereby, the edge of the projection plate member 2620 can be placed near the LED 651 (light source A). Therefore, since the irradiation angle α2 of the second embodiment can be made larger than the irradiation angle α1 of the first embodiment, the amount of light projected onto the projection plate member 2620 can be increased accordingly. can. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the projection plate member 2620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 2620 or increasing the amount of light emitted from the LED 651.

As shown in FIGS. 62(a) and 62(b), among the light irradiated from the light source A of the LED 651, irradiation irradiates the groove forming member 640 on the front side (upper side in FIG. 62(a)) from the guide groove 641. The light at the angle β2 is incident on the front edge of the groove forming member 2640.

The light irradiated within the range of the irradiation angle β2 and incident on the groove forming member 2640 is reflected inside the groove forming member 2640 and travels toward the axis of the projection plate member 2620. In this case, similarly to the first embodiment, at a position where the side surface of the groove forming member 2640 and the projection plate member 2620 are adjacent to each other (facing each other), the light irradiated onto the inner side surface of the groove forming member 2640 is transferred to the projection plate member 2620. It can be made to enter.

As shown in FIGS. 63(a) and 63(b), the groove forming member 2640 on the back side of the guide groove 641 (lower side in FIG. 62(a)) is irradiated with light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651. The light having the irradiation angle Δ2 is incident from the edge of the groove forming member 2640 on the back side.

The light irradiated within the range of the irradiation angle Δ2 and incident on the groove forming member 2640 is irradiated onto the side surface of the guide groove 2641 of the groove forming member 2640 and is reflected. The reflected light can be made to enter the projection plate member 2620 by being irradiated onto the side surface at a position where the side surface of the groove forming member 2640 and the projection plate member 2620 are adjacent to each other (facing each other).

That is, by recessing the guide groove 2641 in the side surface of the outer edge of the groove forming member 2640, the light that enters the groove forming member 2640 from between the guide groove 2641 and the projection plate member 2620 can be directed to the side surface of the guide groove 2641. It can be reflected and made incident on the projection plate member 2620.

Therefore, by forming the guide groove 2641 in a recessed manner on the side surface of the outer edge of the groove forming member 2640, it can serve both the role of holding the color C and the role of concentrating light on the projection plate member 2620. .

Furthermore, compared to the first embodiment, the amount of light (light amount) that enters the projection plate member 2620 from the groove forming member 2640 can be increased by the addition of the irradiation angle Δ. Therefore, the intensity (light amount) of the light emitted from the projection plate member 2620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 2620 or increasing the intensity (light amount) of the light emitted from the LED 651. .

Furthermore, since the groove forming member 2640 is disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the back side of the front base 612), it is difficult for the player to see it, and the appearance is accordingly improved. Deterioration can be suppressed.

Note that among the light irradiated from the light source A of the LED 651, the light irradiating the gear member 630 is the same as that in the first embodiment, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. In the first embodiment, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 are in contact with the ground over the entire outer edge of the projection plate member 620, but the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640 in the third embodiment are , a surface floating relative to the projection plate member 3620 is formed.

First, the shapes of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 64(a) is a front view of the projection plate member 3620, gear member 3630, and groove forming member 3640 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 64(b) is a projection on the line LXIVb-LXIVb of FIG. 64(a). FIG. 6 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a plate member 3620, a gear member 3630, and a groove forming member 640.

65(a) is a side view of the projection plate member 3620, gear member 3630, and groove forming member 640 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 64(a), and FIG. 65(c) is a sectional view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 640 taken along the line LXVb-LXVb, and FIG. and a sectional view of a groove forming member 640.

As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the projection plate member 3620 in the third embodiment is formed into a circular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and a gear member 3630 and a groove forming member 3640 are provided on the outer peripheral edge of the projection plate member 3620 on the back side and the front side. placed on each side. Further, the projection plate member 3620 has an outer diameter larger than that of the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640, and a protrusion 3623 that protrudes toward the front side and the back side is formed on the outer edge thereof.

The protrusion 3623 has a substantially triangular cross section that protrudes toward the front side (upper side in FIG. 64(b)) or the rear side (lower side in FIG. 64(b)) toward the outer edge. Further, the tip of the protrusion 3623 protruding toward the front side is set on the line of an imaginary line F connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the outer edge of a groove 3645 formed in the groove forming member 3640, which will be described later. be done. On the other hand, the tip of the protrusion 3623 protruding toward the back side is set on an imaginary line G connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the outer edge of a groove 3635 formed in a gear member 3630, which will be described later. Ru.

The gear member 3630 is formed into a plate-shaped body having an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620. The gear member 3630 also has grooves 3635 recessed in the front side (upper side of FIG. 64(b)) at predetermined intervals, and screws formed through the gear member 3635 at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. A stopper hole 636 is provided.

The groove 3635 is a groove extending in the radial direction, and is formed on both sides of the circumference of each stopper hole 636. Thereby, when the gear member 3630 is placed on the projection plate member 3620, a gap can be formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 (see FIG. 64(b)).

The groove forming member 3640 is formed into a plate-shaped body having an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620. Further, the groove forming member 3640 has grooves 3645 recessed at a predetermined interval on the side surface of the back side (lower side in FIG. 64(b)) and penetratingly formed at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction. An opening 646 for screwing is provided.

The groove 3645 is a groove extending in the radial direction, and is formed at a position facing the groove 3636 formed in the gear member 3630. Thereby, when the groove forming member 3640 is arranged on the projection plate member 3620, a gap can be formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630.

In this case, the surface where the projection plate member 3620 and the groove forming member 3640 are in contact with the ground has an opening 646 into which the bolt T for fastening the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 is inserted, as shown in FIG. The surfaces overlap in the radial direction. Thereby, when a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640, it is possible to suppress the holding force from decreasing. That is, when forming a gap between the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640, it is possible to ground the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 by the diameter of the opening 646. Therefore, a holding surface for sandwiching the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 can be secured.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described.

66(a) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. Note that in FIG. 66(b), illustration of cross-sectional lines is omitted for ease of understanding.

In addition, in FIG. 66(b), similarly to the first embodiment, the refraction angle when the light from the light source A enters the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 has no effect on the present invention. The light entering the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 from the light source A is illustrated as being orthogonal. Furthermore, in FIG. 66, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M, as in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 66(a) and 66(b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light at the irradiation angle α3 that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 3620 is emitted from the outer edge of the projection plate member 3620. It is incident from the side.

The light incident on the projection plate member 3620 is totally reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by being irradiated onto the front and back side surfaces of the projection plate member 3620. Thereby, the light incident on the projection plate member 3620 can travel from the edge of the projection plate member 3620 toward the center (axis side). Therefore, the light from the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α3 passes through the projection plate member 3620, is diffusely reflected by the reflection section 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine.

In this case, in the third embodiment, a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630, so that the light incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 3620 is transmitted to the reflecting portion 622. can be easily reached. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 3620 can easily reach the reflection part 622, so the light reflected by the reflection part 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 3620 is strengthened, and the pattern It is possible to make the design stand out clearly.

On the other hand, light irradiated at an irradiation angle other than the irradiation angle α3 is incident on the groove forming member 3640 or the gear member 3630. In this case, since the groove forming member 3640, the gear member 3630, and the projection plate member are arranged with a gap as described above, the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 or the gear member 3630 is The light is not incident on the projection plate member 620 side as in the above configuration.

Therefore, by making the light from the light source other than light source A of the LED 651 projected onto the projection plate member 3620 side enter the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630, the light from the light source other than light source A is projected onto the projection plate member 3620. can be suppressed from being incident. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the display made on the reflection part 622 of the projection plate member 3620 from appearing (displayed) by light other than the LED 651.

Furthermore, as described above, the ground plane of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 is a surface that overlaps the opening 646 in the radial direction (see FIG. 65(c)). A part where no light is incident can be used as a ground plane.

That is, since the bolt T is inserted into the opening 646, when light is incident from the outside in the radial direction of the opening 646, the light is blocked by the bolt T, and the light from the LED 651 is not incident on the reflecting portion 622 side. Therefore, the light that is incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from the LED 651 can be reliably suppressed from being incident on the projection plate member 3620 side.

Furthermore, in this case, the ground plane of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 can be formed over the entire surface that overlaps the opening 646 in the radial direction, so the ground plane can be secured and the Displacement of the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 with respect to the plate member 3620 can be suppressed.

Here, if a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630, the light from the LED 651 is passed through the gap toward the axis of the projection plate member 3620. There was a risk that light would leak from the edge of the projection plate member 3620 to the center.

On the other hand, since the protrusion 3623 is formed on the edge of the projection plate member 3620 of the third embodiment, the light from the light source A of the LED 651 is transmitted between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630. The gap is not illuminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress light from leaking from the edge of the projection plate member 3620 to the center.

Furthermore, since the protrusion 3623 can increase the length of the side surface of the edge of the projection plate member 3620 in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 66(a)), the irradiation angle α3 can be increased. Therefore, the intensity (light amount) of the light emitted from the projection plate member 3620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 3620 or increasing the intensity (light amount) of the light emitted from the LED 651. .

Next, the irradiation unit 4650 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 67(a) is a top view of the irradiation unit 4650 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 67(b) is a sectional view of the irradiation unit 4650. 68(a) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit 4600 near the first block 653, and FIG. 68(b) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit 4600 near the second block 654. Note that FIG. 67(b) corresponds to FIG. 44(b). Further, FIG. 68 schematically shows a state in which the irradiation unit 4650 is disposed on the base member 610.

As shown in FIG. 67, in the irradiation unit 4650 in the fourth embodiment, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are fastened and fixed to the substrate member 620 with screws S2. In this case, the height of the head of the screw S2 (vertical dimension in FIG. 67) is set to be larger than the height of the LED 651. That is, the amount of protrusion of the screw S2 from the front of the board member 620 is made larger than the amount of protrusion of the LED 651.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 68, the height dimension of the head of the screw S2 is such that the projection plate member 620 is attached to the head of one screw S2 and the screw S2 adjacent to that one screw S2. When the outer circumferential surface contacts (circumscribes) the projection plate member 620, the dimensions are set such that the outer circumferential surface of the projection plate member 620 cannot come into contact with the LED 651 disposed between the two screws S2.

Thereby, the LED 651 can be protected by the head of the screw S2. That is, when the projection plate member 620 is rotated, for example, if it is brought close to the irradiation unit 2650 due to radial wobbling due to dimensional tolerances or assembly tolerances, the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 may be screwed. By contacting the head of S2, contact with the LED 651 can be avoided, and as a result, damage to the LED 651 can be suppressed.

In particular, in this embodiment, the projection plate member 620 is made of a resin material, whereas the screw S2 is made of a metal material, so that the LED 651 is protected when the projection plate member 620 shakes in the radial direction. It is possible to enhance the effect of Further, when the projection plate member 620 is continuously rotated while being in contact with the screw S2, the projection plate member 620 is worn out, and the projection plate member 620 may wobble in the radial direction. Also, it is possible to avoid contact with the LED 651.

In this way, by using the screw S2 to protect the LED 651, it is possible to omit the formation of the intermediate upright portions 611b and 612b. Therefore, in this case, since a complicated shape can be omitted, the shapes of the back base 611 and the front base 612 can be simplified, and the moldability in resin molding can be improved. As a result, the yield can be improved.

Further, since the LED 651 can be protected using the screw S2, the allowable amount of radial wobbling due to component dimensional tolerances and assembly tolerances can be made gentler, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in design. That is, the LED 651 and the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 can be brought closer together, and as a result, the light emitted from the LED 651 can be made to efficiently enter the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620.

Next, the projection unit 5600 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 76. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the projection plate member 620 is formed into a disk shape when viewed from the front and is rotated around the center of the circle, but in the fifth embodiment, the projection plate member 5620 is formed into a vertically elongated rectangle when viewed from the front. A case will be explained in which the case is formed as follows and is slid in one direction.

First, the overall configuration of projection unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 69 is a front view of a projection unit 5600 in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 70 is an exploded front perspective view of projection unit 5600. FIG. 71 is a rear view of the front base 5612. FIG. 72 is a rear view of projection unit 5600. Note that FIG. 72 shows a state with the back base 5611 removed.

As shown in FIGS. 69 to 72, the projection unit 5600 has a base member 5610 that is formed into a circular shape when viewed from the front and has an open center portion, and is slidably disposed in the open portion of the base member 5610. a projection plate member 5620, an irradiation unit 650 that allows light to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 5620, a drive motor 661 for slidingly displacing the projection plate member 5620, and a driving force of the drive motor 661 that is connected to the projection plate member. 5620 and a gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668).

The base member 5610 has a back base 5611 which is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front and has a horizontally long rectangular opening at the center thereof, and is disposed in front of the back base 5611 and has approximately the same external shape as the back base 5611. A projection plate member 5620, an irradiation unit 650, and a gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668) is stored.

As described above, the front base 5612 is a plate member formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and has an outer standing portion 612c standing upright at the outer edge on the back side and an opening shaped like a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front in the center. a central opening 5612h, an inner upright portion 612a erected from the rear side edge of the central opening 5612h, and a pair of left and right holding portions 5612i protruding from both upper ends of the central opening 5612h; It is formed mainly of two shaft parts 5612k that protrude from between the pair of holding parts 5612i to the back side, and a sliding protrusion 5612m that protrudes from below the central opening 5612h to the back side. Ru.

The central opening 5612h has a horizontally long rectangular shape at the center of the front base 5612 when viewed from the front. The player can visually recognize the patterns and symbols on the third symbol display device 81 provided on the back side of the projection unit 5600 through the central opening 5612h.

The holding portion 5612i is a protruding portion for holding a rod member 5625, which will be described later, and is formed to protrude from the rear side of the front base 5612 (the front side in the paper of FIG. 71) at both upper ends of the central opening 5612h. In addition, the holding portion 5612i has a concave groove 5612i1 formed on its protruding surface in a manner concave toward the front side (backward side of the paper in FIG. 71).

The groove 5612i1 is recessed from the central part of the front base 5612 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 71) to the end side, and has an arc-shaped cross section, and the inner diameter of the groove 5612i1 is equal to the outer diameter of the rod member 5625, which will be described later. formed larger than. The pair of grooves 5612i1 are formed at the same height in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 71), and the distance between the ends in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 71) is the axis of the rod member 5625. It is set larger than the direction dimension. Therefore, after the rod member 5625 is disposed on the inner circumferential surface of the groove 5612i1, a groove with a radius larger than the outer diameter of the rod member 5625 is placed at a position facing the groove 5612i1 from the back side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 71). The rod member 5625 can be placed on the front base 5612 by arranging the holding part covers 5628 with the above on both ends (see FIG. 72).

The shaft portion 5612k is a protrusion that serves as a rotation axis of a rotating member 5670, which will be described later, and is arranged above the central opening 5612h in a symmetrical position with respect to a perpendicular line passing through the center of the disk-shaped front base 5612.

The sliding protrusion 5612m is a protrusion that guides the displacement of a rack 5627, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape to protrude from the lower side of the central opening 5612h to the rear side. Furthermore, the pair of sliding protrusions 5612m are arranged at symmetrical positions with respect to a perpendicular line passing through the center of the disk-shaped front base 5612.

The projection plate member 5620 is made of a light-transmitting material, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 is visible to the player, and when the light of the LED 651 is incident, the incident light is reflected into a pattern or The light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 in the form of a pattern. That is, a pattern or a design can be made to stand out (display) on the front of the third design display device 81.

The projection plate member 5620 includes a rack 5627 extending in the left-right direction at the lower end, and a reflecting portion 622 formed inside the projection plate member 5620. The rack 5627 is disposed below the central opening of the base member 610 (the central opening 5612h of the front base 5612), and is disposed at a position where it cannot be seen from the front side of the assembled projection unit 5600. Further, the rack 5627 is formed into a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and its longitudinal dimension is set to be longer than the dimension of the projection plate member 5620 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 72). Thereby, the movable range of sliding displacement of the projection plate member 5620 can be made larger than the horizontal dimension of the projection plate member 5620.

The rack 5627 has a rack gear 5627a engraved on its lower surface that meshes with the gear 5668, and a sliding groove 5627b that penetrates in the front-rear direction at the center.

The rack gear 5627a is a gear tooth surface that displaces the rack 5627 (projection plate member 5620) in the left-right direction when the driving force of the drive motor 661 is transmitted through the gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668). It is formed over the entire lower surface side of the rack 5627.

The sliding groove 5627b is a groove for suppressing the tilting of the rack 5627 when the rack 5627 is displaced in the left-right direction by the drive of the drive motor 661, and has a long opening in the left-right direction. A pair of sliding projections 5612m of the base 5612 are inserted. As a result, when the rack 5627 is displaced relative to the rear base 5611, the direction of displacement is restricted, and the rack 5627 is slidably displaced. The detailed operation of the rack 5627 (projection plate member 5620) will be described later.

Above the back side of the projection plate member 5620, there is a cylindrical rod member 5625 extending in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 72), and a horizontally elongated rectangle in front view at a position facing the projection plate member 5620 with the rod member 5625 in between. A shaped front cover 5626 is provided.

The rod member 5625 is formed longer in the left-right direction than the length dimension in the left-right direction of the projection plate member 5620, and is also formed shorter than the outer diameter of the back base 5611, so that the rod member 5625 The projection plate member 5620 is arranged to be sandwiched therebetween.

The front cover 5626 is a plate member guided by the rod member 5625, and its length in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 72) is set to be approximately the same as the length in the left-right direction of the projection plate member 5620, It is disposed on the projection plate member 5620 with a rod member 5625 sandwiched between it and the member 5620.

The front cover 5626 is provided with a groove 5626a on the side surface facing the projection plate member 5620, which is recessed toward the front side (back side in the plane of the paper in FIG. 72) and recessed in the left-right direction. The groove portion 5626a is a groove in which the rod member 5625 is disposed, and is recessed to have a substantially U-shaped cross section, and the recess dimensions in the vertical direction and the front side are set larger than the outer diameter dimension of the rod member 5625. be done.

Thereby, the rod member 5625 can be disposed inside the groove portion 5626a. This allows the projection plate member 5620 to be slidably disposed relative to the rod member 5625 in the axial direction of the rod member 5625.

Moreover, the rod member 5625 is arranged on the back side of the front cover 5626 rather than the front side surface. That is, since the bar member 5625 does not protrude from the front surface of the front cover 5626, the front cover 5626 can be provided on the projection plate member 5620 without forming a recessed portion in the projection plate member 5620.

Here, if the bar member 5625 protrudes from the front surface of the front cover 5626, it is necessary to form a groove on the back side of the projection plate member 5620 into which the bar member 5625 is inserted. However, since the projection plate member 5620 is a member that allows the light incident therein to be emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 in the form of a pattern or design, grooves are formed in the projection plate member 5620. When the thickness dimension is partially reduced, the light incident on the inside of the projection plate member 5620 becomes difficult to travel due to the reduced thickness dimension, and the amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 is reduced. There was a problem.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 5620, the front cover 5626 with the bar member 5625 disposed therein can be placed on the projection plate member 5620. As a result, it is possible to suppress the light incident into the projection plate member 5620 from becoming difficult to travel, and to suppress the amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 from decreasing.

Furthermore, as described above, both ends of the rod member 5625 are disposed on the front base 5612 so that they cannot fall off, so the projection plate member 5620 can slide in the axial direction of the rod member 5625 with respect to the front base 5612. Retained. That is, the projection plate member 5620 is suspended from the rod member 5625 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 72).

Therefore, when driving force is applied to the drive motor 661, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 5627 via the gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668), and the rack 5627 is slid in the left and right direction. . When the rack 5627 is slid in the left-right direction, the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 can be moved in the sliding direction.

In the irradiation unit 650, the first block 653 is arranged substantially linearly along the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620, and the LED 651 disposed in front of the first block is aligned with the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620. placed in opposing positions. Thereby, the light emitted from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 can be made to enter from the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620, and the pattern or design of the reflection part 622 of the projection plate member 5620 can be highlighted.

Further, on the side surface of the front base 5612 on which the first block 653 of the irradiation unit 650 is disposed, a bulging portion 5612n that bulges out in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the back is formed on the back side (the front side in the paper of FIG. 71). The bulging portion 5612n is a portion for raising the first block 653 toward the back side, and its raised dimension is set to be larger than the plate thickness of a rotating member 5670, which will be described later. Thereby, a rotating member 5670, which will be described later, can be disposed in the gap between the second block 654 and the front base 6512.

Furthermore, a protrusion 612g is formed on the bulging portion 5612n. The first block 653 of the irradiation unit 650 is disposed in the irradiation unit 5600 by having the protrusion 612g inserted into the insertion hole 653b1 and being held between the front base 5612 and the rear base 5611.

A rotating member 5670 is attached to the front side of the second block 654 disposed at both ends of the irradiation unit 650.

The rotating member 5670 is a plate member that is bent into an L-shape when viewed from the front, and is disposed on the front base 5612 with the bent portion located at the center in the left-right direction, and has an irradiation unit on one longitudinal side. A second block 654 of 650 is attached. Furthermore, a through hole 5671 is formed in the bent portion of the rotating member 5670 in the front-rear direction.

The through hole 5671 is an opening into which the shaft portion 5612k of the front base 5612 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 5612k. Therefore, when the rotating member 5670 is disposed on the front base 5612, it can rotate with respect to the front base 5612 about the shaft portion 5612k.

Here, since the irradiation unit 650 is attached to the rotating member 5670, when the rotating member 5670 is rotated with respect to the front base 5612, the irradiating unit 650 can be displaced. That is, by displacing the rotating member 5670, the base member 652 of the irradiation unit 650 can be bent and the second block 654 can be displaced with respect to the first block 653.

The rotating member 5670 is biased by a biasing spring (not shown) interposed between the rotating member 5670 and the front base 5612 in a direction to displace the tip portion on one side downward with respect to the shaft portion 5612k. 5612. Further, a displacement regulating protrusion 5612j that protrudes toward the rear side is formed on the lower side of the shaft portion 5612k of the front base 5612 on which the rotating member 5670 is disposed.

The displacement regulating protrusion 5612j is a member that regulates the downward displacement of one end side of the rotating member 5670, and its protruding tip is located rearward (on the back base 5611 side) of the rotating member 5670 disposed on the front base 5612. The LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 attached to the rotating member 5670 is located on the front side (on the front base 5612 side). As a result, the downward displacement of one end of the rotating member 5670 is regulated by the displacement regulating projection 5612j, and the light irradiated from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 toward the projection plate member 5620 is regulated by the displacement regulating projection 5612j. 5612j can be suppressed.

Next, the operation of projection unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 76. FIG. 73(a) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 73(b) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state. FIG. 74(a) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 74(b) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state.

FIG. 75(a) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 75(b) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the third state. FIG. 76(a) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 76(b) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state. Note that FIGS. 74 and 76 illustrate a state in which the back base 5611 is removed. Further, since the displacement operation from the first state to the third state is simply a left-right reversal of the displacement operation from the first state to the second state, a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 73(a) and 74(a), in the first state in which the projection plate member 5620 is disposed approximately in the left-right center of the central opening 5612h, the rotation The member 5670 is biased by a biasing spring (not shown) so that one end thereof is displaced downward. Thereby, the second block 654 of the irradiation unit 650 disposed on the rotating member 5670 can be displaced with respect to the first block 653, and the irradiation direction of the LED 651 disposed on the front surface of the second block 654 can be changed. It can be tilted toward the projection plate member 5620 side. As a result, the light from the LED 651 disposed on the front surface of the second block 654 can be incident from the left and right sides (left and right sides in FIG. 74(a)) of the projection plate member 5620, and the projection plate member 5620 The amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 can be increased, and the patterns and designs of the projection plate member 5620 can be clearly displayed.

From the state shown in FIGS. 73(a) and 74(a), driving force is applied to the drive motor 661, and the driving force is transmitted to the rack 5627 via the gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668). When the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 is slid to the right in the front view (right direction in FIG. 73), the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 is also slid to the right (see FIGS. 73(b) and 74(b)). ). Thereby, a second state is formed in which the projection plate member 5620 is disposed on the right side in front view with respect to the central opening 5612h.

In this case, the front cover 5626 disposed on the front side of the upper end of the projection plate member 5620 comes into contact with the side surface of the other end of the L-shape in front view of the rotating member 5670 disposed in the sliding direction. Thereby, a rotational moment can be applied to the rotating member 5670 around the axis of the shaft portion 5612k serving as the rotation axis in a direction that pushes one end side upward. Therefore, since one end side of the rotating member 5670 is pushed upward, the second block 654 disposed on the rotating member 5670 is similarly displaced with respect to the first block 653, and is moved in the longitudinal direction of the first block 653 (see FIG. 74). (b) left-right direction) and the longitudinal direction of the second block 654 are displaced to a position where they are substantially on the same straight line.

As a result, as the projection plate member 5620 slides, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654 can be changed to increase the amount of light incident from the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620. can. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 5620 can be increased, and the patterns and designs of the projection plate member 5620 can be clearly displayed.

Furthermore, as the projection plate member 5620 slides, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654 can be changed, so the amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 can be reduced. It can be changed. That is, the mode of the pattern or design displayed on the projection plate member 5620 can be changed. As a result, it is possible to easily keep players interested.

Here, when the projection plate member is displaced, the amount of light on the projection plate member is kept constant by lighting an LED arranged at a different position in accordance with the displacement. Accordingly, it is necessary to control whether the LED is turned on or off, and as the displacement of the projection plate member becomes more complicated, the control of the LED becomes more complicated, resulting in a problem that the reliability of the product decreases. Furthermore, there is a problem in that the product cost increases because the LED is disposed at a different position.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the direction in which the LED 651 irradiates can be displaced as the projection plate member 5620 is displaced, so the position of the projection plate member 5620 is detected and the projection plate member 5620 is arranged at a different position. Since control such as turning on or off the LED 651 is not necessary, control of the LED 651 can be simplified, product reliability can be improved, and increase in product cost can be suppressed.

In addition, in order to irradiate light onto a displacing irradiation object (projection plate member), if a plurality of fixed irradiation objects (LEDs) are arranged around the irradiation object, the irradiation range of each irradiation object There is a problem in that a region where the amount of light is weak is created in between, and when the object to be irradiated is displaced, brightness and darkness are created, which reduces the player's interest. Here, it is possible to solve the above-mentioned problem by narrowing the arrangement interval of the irradiators, but in this case, the problem is that the product cost increases because the number of irradiators to be arranged increases. There was a point.

However, in the fifth embodiment, since the irradiation direction of the LED 651 can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the projection plate member 5620, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 can be made to follow the displacement operation of the projection plate member 5620. Therefore, the projection plate member 5620 can always project stably regardless of its displacement position. As a result, it is possible to suppress the brightness and darkness of the light caused by the displacement of the projection plate member 5620, thereby suppressing the player's interest from being lost. Furthermore, since there is no need to increase the number of LEDs 651 provided, it is possible to suppress an increase in product cost.

Furthermore, as described above, the illumination direction of the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654 can be changed by sliding the projection plate member 5620, so that the driving force of the drive motor 661 can be applied to the projection plate member 5620. It can be used both as a drive for sliding displacement and a drive for rotating the second block 654, making it unnecessary to newly provide a drive means for displacing the second block 654. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the product.

Furthermore, since the irradiation unit 650 is formed by the base member 652 and the blocks 653 and 654, which are made of an elastically deformable material, there is no need to form the second block 654 to be displaced as a separate member. Therefore, the irradiation unit 650 can be installed on the front base by connecting the wiring after arranging the irradiation unit 650 assembled as a unit on the front base 5612, so that the assembly process can be simplified.

On the other hand, when displacing from the second state to the first state, by reversing the drive of the drive motor 661, the rack 5627 is displaced to the center position in the left-right direction of the central opening 5612h. Accordingly, the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 is similarly slid and displaced to form the first state.

In this case, the rotation member 5670 on the side (the left side in FIG. 74(b)) whose one end is pushed up due to the displacement to the second state is rotated by a biasing spring (not shown) interposed between the rotation member 5670 and the front base 5612, so that the projection plate As the member 5620 slides to the center position in the left-right direction, one end of the L-shape in front view of the rotating member 5670 is pushed down and rotated about the shaft portion 5612k. Furthermore, as described above, the rotation range of the rotating member 5670 that is displaced downward is regulated by coming into contact with the displacement regulating protrusion 5612j.

As mentioned above, the displacement from the first state to the third state shown in FIGS. 7 and 8 is simply a left-right reversal of the displacement operation and displacement direction from the first state to the second state. Explanation will be omitted. Note that the third state is a state in which the projection plate member 5620 is disposed on the left side in front view with respect to the central opening 5612h (see FIGS. 75(b) and 76(b)).

Next, a projection unit 6600 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 80. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the entire central portion of the projection plate member 620 is always visible to the player, but in the sixth embodiment, the projection plate member 6620 is partially visible to the player. possible.

First, the overall configuration of projection unit 6600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 77 is a front view of a projection unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 78 is a front exploded perspective view of projection unit 6600. FIG. 79 is a rear view of the front base 6612 with the front base 6612 and the irradiation unit 650 assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the projection unit 6600 includes a base member 6610 formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and a projection plate member disposed so as to be partially visible from an opening formed in the base member 6610. 6620, an irradiation unit 650 that makes light enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 6620, a drive motor 661 for rotating the projection plate member 6620, and a driving force of the drive motor 661 that is transmitted to the projection plate member 6620. It is formed mainly of a gear train (gears 662 to 664) for

The base member 6610 includes an annular back base 611 and an annular front base 6612 disposed in front of the back base 611, and is formed between the opposing surfaces of the back base 611 and the front base 6612. The projection plate member 6620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (662 to 664) are housed in the internal space.

The front base 6612 has a shielding member 6612r that is annular in front view formed on the inner edge of the annular front base 612 of the first embodiment, and a part of the shielding member 6612r has an opening that opens in a fan shape in the front-rear direction. A portion 6612p is formed.

The opening 6612p is an opening for making the projection plate member 6620 disposed on the back side visible from the opening, and is formed in a fan shape centered on the axis of the front base 6612, which is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front. The shielding member 6612r has a length of about ⅙ of the entire circumference, and is formed on the right side when viewed from the front.

The irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the back surface of the front base 6612 in a region between the intermediate standing portion 612b and the outer standing portion 612c at the outer edge of the opening 6612p. The front surfaces of the bases 611 and 612 are placed on top of each other, so that the bases 611 and 612 are accommodated between the opposing surfaces (internal space).

The projection plate member 6620 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and its inner diameter is larger than the inner diameter of the annular front base 6612. Further, the projection plate member 6620 is arranged coaxially with the axis of the front base 6612. Therefore, when the projection unit 6600 is assembled, the inner edge of the projection plate member 6620 is arranged so as not to be visible to the player.

Furthermore, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 disposed on the projection plate member 6620 are disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, on the back side of the front base 612 (shielding member 612r). Therefore, it is difficult for players to see the player, and deterioration of the appearance can be suppressed accordingly.

The projection plate member 6620 is made of a light-transmitting material, and allows the display of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back side to be transmitted therethrough and is visible to the player through the opening 6612p of the front base 6612. At the same time, when the light irradiated from the irradiation unit 650 is incident from the outer peripheral surface, the incident light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in the form of a pattern or design, and the front base 6612 The player is allowed to visually recognize it through the opening 6612p. That is, a pattern or a design can be made to stand out (display) in the interior space of the opening 6612p of the front base 6612.

Furthermore, the projection plate member 6620 includes a reflecting section 6622 that diffusely reflects light inside thereof. The reflective portion 6622 is a portion whose interior has been roughened by laser processing or the like, and a pattern, design, etc. is formed by dividing the projection plate member 6620 into a plurality of pieces in the circumferential direction over the entire area when viewed from the front of the projection plate member 6620. Ru. In this embodiment, the shape of the pattern, design, etc. of the reflective portion 6622 is formed by dividing into six in the circumferential direction, and six types of reflective areas 6622a to 6622f, such as patterns and designs, are formed (see FIG. 80). .

Furthermore, the projection plate member 6620 has a gear member 630 and a groove forming member 640 disposed on the outer peripheral edge thereof on the back side and the front side, respectively. Thereby, similarly to the first embodiment, the driving force of the drive motor 661 is transmitted to the gear member 630 via the gear train (662 to 664), thereby making it possible to rotate the projection plate member 6620.

Next, the operation of projection unit 6600 will be described with reference to FIG. 80. 80(a) to 80(c) are rear views of the projection unit 6600. Note that FIGS. 80(a) to 80(c) illustrate transition states of the projection plate member 6620. Further, FIG. 80 shows a state in which the back base 611 is removed. Further, the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 and the reflecting portion 6622 (reflecting regions 6622a to 6622f) of the projection plate member 6620 are illustrated with chain lines.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), when the projection plate member 6620 is placed at the initial position, the projection plate member 6620 is placed inside the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 when viewed from the front (viewed from the back to the front of the page). A reflective area 6622a is arranged. Therefore, when the light from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 is incident from the outer edge of the projection plate member 6620, the pattern or design of the reflective area 6622a can be displayed inside the opening 6612p. That is, the player can visually recognize the patterns and designs appearing inside the opening 6612p.

In this case, the light from the LED 651 is also irradiated to the reflective areas 6622b and 6622f adjacent to the reflective area 6622a, but since the front base 6612 is disposed in front of the reflective areas 6622b and 6622f, the player can Displays in areas 6622b and 6622f cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, by displaying the patterns and designs of the projection plate member 6620 through the opening 6612p, the player will not be able to see the display other than the display surface, and the player's interest will be lost due to the fact that other areas can be seen. can be suppressed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 80(b) and 80(c), when a driving force is applied to the drive motor 661, the driving force is projected through the gear train (gears 662 to 664) as described above. The projection plate member 6620 is rotated by being transmitted to the plate member. By rotating the projection plate member 6620, the patterns and designs of the reflective areas 6622a to 6622f arranged inside the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 when viewed from the front are switched. Thereby, a plurality of different patterns and designs can be displayed inside the opening 6612p.

Here, if a pattern or design is printed on the front surface of the irradiated object (projection plate member 6620) and the display surface is switched by displacing the irradiated object, the visible area (opening) of the irradiated object is changed. 6612p), the switching of the pattern or symbol of the irradiated object is visible, and the player can know which display will be displayed next before finishing switching the pattern or symbol. There was a problem in that it was not possible to enjoy the displacement to the end.

In addition, even if the power of the light source (LED 651) that irradiates the irradiated object is turned off and the display surface of the irradiated object is darkened, the irradiated object may be affected by the light from other devices or fluorescent lights in the store. By being irradiated, the patterns and designs of the irradiated object became visible to the player.

In the present application, the projection plate member 6620 is formed from a light-transmitting material, and by turning off the light of the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650, the patterns and designs of the projection plate member 6620 are made difficult to see and are brought into a transparent state. be able to. Therefore, by turning off the illumination of the LED 651 when rotating the projection plate member 6620, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the switching of patterns and symbols on the projection plate member 6620. You can enjoy the displacement of 6620 to the end.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the projection plate member 6620 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is rotated about its center as the rotation axis. The space required for arranging the projection plate member 6620 can be suppressed while ensuring the number of patterns and symbols visible to the player through the opening 6612p of the projection plate member 6612.

In other words, in the case where the projection plate member 6620 is slidable, the installation space in the horizontal or vertical direction is limited, so it is difficult to secure the pattern and number of the projection plate members 6620 on the figure side. By forming the projection plate member 6620, the space required for arranging the projection plate member 6620 can be suppressed while ensuring the number of patterns and designs.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is readily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. This can be inferred.

In each of the embodiments described above, a gaming machine may be constructed by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of one or more other embodiments.

In the first and second embodiments described above, a case has been described in which a total of four first blocks 653 and four second blocks 654 are disposed on the substrate member 652 in the irradiation unit 650 of the projection unit 600, but this is not necessarily the case. The total number of first blocks 653 and second blocks 654 may be 3 or less, or 5 or more. In this case, the ratio of the first block 653 and the second block 654 is arbitrary, and it may be only the first block 653 or only the second block 654.

In the first and second embodiments described above, the case where the LED 651 is arranged on the front side of the substrate member 652 and the first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back side is explained, but it is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the LED 651, the first block 653, and the second block 654 may be arranged in front of the substrate member 652. In this case, the LED 651 is housed inside the first block 653 and the second block 654, and the light emitted from the LED 651 is projected from the opening formed in the front of the first block 653 and the second block 654. The light is made incident on the outer peripheral surface of the plate member 620.

In the first and second embodiments described above, the case where the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640 of the projection unit 600 are made of a light-transmitting material has been described, but the invention is not limited to this. 630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640 may be formed from two layers of a light-transmitting material and a non-transmitting material.

For example, the back side 632 side of the gear member 630 and the front side 642 side of the groove forming members 640, 2640 are formed of a layer of non-transparent material, and the projection plate member 620, 2620 side of the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640 is formed of a layer of non-transparent material. It may also be formed of a layer of transparent material. In this case, the layer of non-transparent material can prevent light emitted from other devices in the gaming area from entering the projection plate members 620, 2620. That is, light emitted by a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by the layer of non-transparent material.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (no light is allowed to enter the projection plate members 620, 2620, and no pattern or design is displayed on the front of the projection plate members 620, 2620), the light from other devices It can be suppressed that light is incident on the projection plate members 620, 2620 and patterns or designs are displayed on the front of the projection plate members 620, 2620.

Additionally, in this case, the layer formed from the non-transparent material is formed from a metal material or flexible material with high reflectance, or the layer formed from the non-transparent material is formed between the layer of the non-transparent material and the layer of the transparent material. It is preferable to use a metallic material or flexible material with high reflectance. This makes it easier to reflect the light incident on the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640 from the LED 651 onto the projection plate members 620, 2620. As a result, the light reflected by the reflection section 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate members 620, 2620 can be strengthened, and patterns and designs can be made to stand out clearly.

In the first and second embodiments described above, a case has been described in which the back surface portion 632 of the gear member 630 of the projection unit 600 and the front surface portion 642 of the groove forming members 640, 2640 are in contact with air (atmosphere), but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the rear view 632 and the front part 642 are attached with a sticker of a material (such as silver foil or aluminum) that has a higher reflectance than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640, or a color with a higher reflectance is attached. (For example, white printing) may be applied.

In this case, the sticker or printing can prevent light emitted from other devices in the gaming area from entering the projection plate members 620, 2620. That is, the light emitted by a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by a sticker or printing.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (no light is allowed to enter the projection plate members 620, 2620, and no pattern or design is displayed on the front of the projection plate members 620, 2620), the light from other devices It can be suppressed that light is incident on the projection plate members 620, 2620 and patterns or designs are displayed on the front of the projection plate members 620, 2620.

Furthermore, by using a sticker or printing, it is possible to more easily reflect the light incident on the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640 from the LED 651 onto the projection plate members 620, 2620. As a result, the light reflected by the reflection section 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate members 620, 2620 can be strengthened, and patterns and designs can be made to stand out clearly.

In addition, when a seal is attached, the seal may be attached in such a manner that it protrudes from the back surface 632 of the gear member 630 and the front surface 642 of the groove forming members 640, 2640 toward the outer edge side. In this case, since the light emitted from the LED 651 and spreading in a fan shape can be reflected by the protruding seal portion, the light emitted from the LED 651 can be easily focused on the projection plate members 620 and 2620.

In the third embodiment, a case has been described in which an air layer is formed between the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member 3620 and between the groove forming member 3640 and the projection plate member 3620, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, a plate member made of a non-transparent material having a higher reflectance than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 is provided between the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member 3620 and between the groove forming member 3640 and the projection plate member 3620. You may intervene.

In this case, the light incident on the projection plate member 3620 is reliably totally reflected by the plate member made of a non-transparent material with high reflectance, and can be allowed to travel from the edge of the projection plate member 3620 toward the center. can. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the intensity (amount of light) of the light irradiated at the irradiation angle α3, and to strengthen the light reflected by the reflection section 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 3620. It can make patterns and designs stand out clearly.

Furthermore, the plate member made of a non-transparent material with high reflectance can prevent light emitted from other devices in the gaming area from entering the projection plate member 3620. That is, the light emitted by a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by the plate member made of a non-transparent material with high reflectance.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (when no light is allowed to enter the projection plate member 3620 and no pattern or design is displayed on the front of the projection plate member 3620), light from other devices is reflected on the projection plate. It is possible to prevent patterns and designs from being incident on the member 3620 and being displayed on the front of the projection plate member 3620.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the means for biasing the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 is a coil spring, but it is not necessarily limited to this. It may also be a leaf spring. Note that the attachment method is exemplified by connecting the protrusion 852 and the protrusion 823, or by attaching it between the rotating shaft of the displacement member 850 and the shaft support 821 of the base member 820.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 is rotated around the shaft hole 851 formed at one end. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. 850 may slide in a guide groove formed in the front base 820. In this case, if both ends of the guide groove of the front base 820 are formed at different positions in the vertical direction (gravitational direction), the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the gravity direction can be controlled as in the first embodiment. Since the motion can be an orthogonal projection of a uniform circular motion and the displacement speed can be varied, the displacement member 850 can be caused to perform an interesting displacement.

In the first to third and sixth embodiments described above, a case has been described in which the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged at a position facing the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be arranged at a position facing the side end surface of the gear member 630, 3630 or the groove forming member 640, 2640, 3640.

In this case as well, similarly to the first to third, fifth and sixth embodiments, the light of the LED 651 is incident on the side end surface of the gear member 630, 3630 or the groove forming member 640, 2640, 3640, and the projection plate is Patterns and designs can be displayed on the surfaces of the members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620.

Also, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is placed in a position where it does not face the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630, and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 (i.e., the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is The light emitted by the LED 651 is arranged at a position different from the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630, and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 in the front-rear direction. The projection plate member 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear member 630, 3630, and the groove forming member 640, 2640, 3640 may be arranged so that the portion is incident on the side end surfaces of the projection plate member 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, and the groove forming member 640, 2640, 3640.

In this case, the light is irradiated obliquely from the irradiation surface of the LED 651 while irradiating other non-irradiation members different from the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620 with light irradiated in a direction perpendicular to the irradiation surface of the LED 651. Part of the light can be made incident on the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630, and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640. That is, the LED 651 can be used both as light for displaying patterns and designs on the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620 and as light for irradiating other objects to be illuminated.

In the first to third, fifth, and sixth embodiments described above, the case where the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 and the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620 are arranged in parallel has been described. The present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be tilted with respect to the projection plate member 620, 2620, 3620, 6620.

Specifically, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is disposed toward the back side, and the light irradiated in a direction perpendicular to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged on the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620. , 6620 may be irradiated. In this case, when a pattern or design is displayed on the surface of the projection plate member 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the light from the LED 651 leaks from the inner edge of the front base 612, 6612, which is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front. can be suppressed.

Further, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is disposed facing the front side, and the light irradiated in a direction perpendicular to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is directed to the projection plate member 620, 2620, 3620, 6620. It may also be a position where the side end face is irradiated.

Further, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is tilted toward the back side or the front side with respect to the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, and the installation position of the LED 651 is The position may be such that the side end surfaces of the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 or the side end surfaces of the gear members 630, 3630 are irradiated with light irradiated in a direction perpendicular to the irradiation surface.

In addition, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is tilted toward the back side or the front side with respect to the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, and the placement position of the LED 651 is adjusted. The position may be such that the front part 632 of the groove forming member 640, 2640, 3640 or the back part 632 of the gear member 630, 3630 is irradiated with light irradiated in a direction perpendicular to the irradiation surface of the LED 651.

In the fifth embodiment, the light emitted from the LED 651 disposed on the front surface of the second block 654 is incident on the projection plate member 5620 from the left and right side surfaces of the projection plate member 5620, so that the light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620. Although a case has been described in which the amount of emitted light is increased, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the pattern or design displayed on the projection plate member 5620 by light incident from the left and right sides of the projection plate member 5620 can be increased by increasing the amount of emitted light. The pattern or design may be different from the pattern or design displayed on the projection plate member 5620 by the light incident from the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620.

That is, by forming the projection plate member 5620 with an air layer or a non-light-transmitting material inside, and dividing the area of the reflecting portion 622 (for example, dividing it into three areas), the upper end of the projection plate member 5620 The light incident from the front side is emitted from the front side by the reflection unit 622 in the first area, and the light incident from the left side is emitted from the front side by the reflection unit 622 in the second area, and the light is emitted from the front side by the reflection unit 622 in the second area. The incident light can be emitted from the front side by the reflecting section 622 in the third region. Thereby, it is possible to form a plurality of patterns of patterns and symbols to be displayed on the projection plate member 5620, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest from being lost.

In this case, a plurality of light sources (LEDs 651) for irradiating the first to third areas are provided around the object to be irradiated (projection plate member 5620), and the first to third areas are irradiated (for example, The arranged light sources enter light from the top end and illuminate the first region, the light sources arranged on the left enter light from the left end surface and illuminate the second region, and the light sources arranged on the right enter the light from the right end. It is also possible to irradiate the third area by entering the light from the surface, but this requires the provision of a plurality of light sources, which poses a problem in that the product cost increases.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654 is rotated with respect to the first block 653 by the sliding displacement of the projection plate member 5620, so that Since the irradiation direction of the light from the LED 651 arranged in the front can be changed, it is possible to irradiate two areas: when irradiating the second or third area and when irradiating the first area. Therefore, the number of LEDs 651 to be provided can be reduced accordingly, and an increase in product cost can be suppressed.

In the fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which the direction of light irradiation of the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654 is changed in accordance with the sliding displacement of the projection plate member 5620, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the rotating member 5670 may be rotated by being connected to the shaft of a newly installed drive motor.

In this case, the rotating member 5670 can be rotated regardless of the sliding position of the projection plate member 5620 to change the direction of light irradiation from the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654. The amount of light emitted from the front can be partially increased or decreased. That is, by changing the direction of light incident on the projection plate member 5620, it is possible to change the shade of the pattern or design displayed on the projection plate member 5620.

In the first embodiment, a projection plate member 620, a plurality of irradiation units 650 that irradiate the projection plate member 620, and a gear that transmits the driving force of a drive motor 661 are arranged between the opposing surfaces of the front base 612 and the rear base 611. Although a case has been described in which the columns (gears 662 to 664) are arranged as one unit, the case is not limited to this. Two or more of the plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662 to 664) may be stacked in the front-rear direction.

In this case, by displaying patterns and designs on each projection plate member 620, the player can visually recognize the combination of the patterns and designs displayed on each projection plate member 620. As a result, by changing the rotational position of each projection plate member 620, display patterns of a plurality of patterns and symbols can be formed, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest from being lost.

In the first embodiment, the case where the projection plate member 620 is rotationally displaced has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the projection plate member 620 may be fixed and the irradiation unit 650 may be displaced. .

In the third embodiment, a case has been described in which the light from the LED 651 is not incident on the center side from the side end of the projection plate member 3620 at the position where the bolt T is disposed, but this is not necessarily the case. Instead, the bolt T may be made of a metal material (for example, iron or stainless steel), and the light projected onto the side surface of the bolt T may be reflected toward the center of the projection plate member 3620. In this case, the light emitted from the LED 651 can be easily focused on the central portion of the projection plate member 3620.

In addition, a plurality of bolts T are arranged at regular intervals to partially form areas on the surface of the projection plate member 3620 where the pattern or design is not displayed (light from the LED 651 is not incident). The display may be separated.

Furthermore, as described above, the ground plane of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 is a surface that overlaps the opening 646 in the radial direction (see FIG. 65(c)). A part where no light is incident can be used as a ground plane.

That is, since the bolt T is inserted into the opening 646, when light is incident from the outside in the radial direction of the opening 646, the light is blocked by the bolt T, and the light from the LED 651 is not incident on the reflecting portion 622 side. Therefore, the light that is incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from the LED 651 can be reliably suppressed from being incident on the projection plate member 3620 side.

In this case, by displacing the irradiation unit 650 while irradiating the light from the LED 651 disposed on the irradiation unit 650, the player can visually perceive the projection plate member 620 as being displaced (rotated). .

Note that the displacement of the irradiation unit 650 in this case may be a sliding displacement or a rotational displacement, and the irradiation direction of each LED 651 disposed in the first block 653 and the second block 654 is displaced in different directions. It may be something.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the pachinko machine 10 in each of the embodiments described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 123. In this first control example, an effect (variable effect) to show the lottery result of a special symbol executed in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, and an effect (variable effect) to show that a jackpot game is being executed. The jackpot effect) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

In this control example, as a performance during a jackpot game, when a jackpot game is executed multiple times during a predetermined period, a jackpot performance (continuous jackpot performance) that spans the multiple jackpot games is executed. It is configured as follows. Specifically, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 140, ball entry information can be stored, and when a jackpot game is executed, the stored ball entry information is stored. It is determined whether there is ball entry information that has won a jackpot in the ball information, and if it is determined that there is ball entry information that has won a jackpot, it can be used to span multiple jackpot games. A continuous jackpot performance will be performed.

With this configuration, it is possible to suggest to the player the game result after the currently executed jackpot game ends, depending on the contents of the jackpot performance executed during the jackpot game, so that the player This can create interest in the jackpot performance.

Furthermore, in this control example, the content of the jackpot performance can be varied based not only on the ball entry information stored at the timing when the jackpot game is executed, but also on the ball entry information newly stored during the jackpot game. It is configured so that it can be done. With this configuration, more ball entry information can be referred to, making it easier to execute continuous jackpot effects, and making players interested in jackpot effects.

In addition, in this control example, as a continuous jackpot performance, the content of the jackpot performance can be varied based on the number of stored ball entry information (number of reserved memories) at the time when the jackpot game is executed. ing.

In addition, in this control example, the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state (low probability, no electricity support), the gaming state (variable probability state (high probability, with electricity support), the time saving state (low probability, with electricity support), )), an effect (battle effect) is executed to show that the game state continues. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that a gaming state advantageous to the player continues.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned battle performance is divided into a performance that suggests whether or not a gaming state advantageous to the player will end (battle reach), and a performance that determines the performance mode of the battle reach (pre-battle performance). It consists of With this configuration, when a gaming state that is advantageous to the player actually ends, for example, the battle performance can be continued during a period other than when winning a normal jackpot where the gaming state shifts to the normal state after the end of the jackpot. This allows the player to continue to feel a sense of expectation that an advantageous gaming state continues, or a feeling of anxiety that makes the player think that the advantageous gaming state has ended. You can play games while holding the child.

Further, in this control example, a plurality of performances with different jackpot expectations are executed as performances to suggest that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. Thereby, it is possible to make the player's expectations for a jackpot different depending on which performance is executed. Furthermore, it is possible to display a plurality of expectation level suggestion modes that can suggest the expectation level of a jackpot in stages within one variable performance, and the expectation level suggestion mode is configured to be variable during one variable performance. .

In addition, in this control example, an expectation level variable suggestion effect is executed which is suggested to the player by summing up the amount by which a plurality of expectation level suggestion modes are varied step by step during one variable effect. ing. With this configuration, it is possible to have a player who has grasped the performance contents of the variable expectation level suggestion performance play the game while predicting which expectation level suggestion mode will be changed and to what degree, thereby improving the performance effect. can be increased.

Furthermore, in this control example, a specific performance (PUSH display performance) is used as a suggestive performance that suggests the timing at which a specific performance (for example, a PUSH display performance that causes the frame button 22 to be operated) to be executed during one variable performance. ) is configured to be executed, including a countdown effect that specifically notifies the timing of execution, and a precursor effect that alerts the user that the countdown effect will be executed. Then, during one variable performance, the start timing of the aforementioned precursor performance, the execution timing of the specific performance, and the period of the countdown performance can be determined from a plurality of values, and the precursor performance is performed based on the determined contents. The presentation mode and the countdown presentation mode are configured to be set.

With this configuration, the degree of freedom in setting the suggestion effect can be increased, and the effect of the presentation can be enhanced, compared to a configuration in which the suggestion effect is executed for a predetermined period of time.

First, with reference to FIG. 81, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in this first control example will be described. The third symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is composed of 10 types of main symbols each imitating the numbers "0" to "9". . In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example, when the lottery result by the main controller 110, which will be described later, is a jackpot, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned (for example, "777") is performed. The system is structured so that a jackpot occurs after the fluctuating display ends. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

Specifically, the main display area Dm displays three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the third symbols described above are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and a variable display is performed by periodically scrolling from top to bottom for each symbol row Z1 to Z3.

Further, a third symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line L1 in the main display area Dm. If the third symbols are stopped on the active line with a jackpot symbol combination (in this first control example, the same main symbol combination), a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

Note that the manner in which the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above-mentioned one and may be arbitrary, and may vary depending on the number of symbol rows, the direction of fluctuating display of the symbols in the symbol row, and each symbol. The number of symbols in a column can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbols variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are not limited to those mentioned above, and for example, a symbol that combines an image such as a figure or a character with a number may be configured as the third symbol. Further, the area in which the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner may be configured to be variable. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol may be changed. By making the variable display area smaller or moving the variable display area to a position where it is difficult for the player to see (for example, a corner of the display screen), it is difficult for the player to understand whether the third symbol is changing or not. You may also do so. Further, during the period in which the special symbols are varying, the variation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and may be varied again.

A small display area Dn1 is formed at the upper left of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. In this small display area Dn1, a guide display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is to be launched (game direction) is displayed (see FIG. 85(a)). That is, in this control example, the small display area Dn1 is used as the guide display area Dn1. With this configuration, the player can easily understand which area of the game board he should shoot the ball toward just by visually checking the guide display mode displayed in the guide display area Dn1. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for players to understand.

A small display area Dn2 is formed in the upper right corner of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. This small display area Dn2 is configured to be able to simply display a variable display of the third symbol. Here, the case where a variable display is executed in the small display area Dn2 means, for example, in the main display area Dm, a display effect such as an effect in which a predetermined character performs an action or an effect that prompts the user to press the frame button 22 is executed. This is the case. While the display effect is being executed, by displaying the effect in a larger main display area Dm, it is possible to provide an easier-to-understand effect. In addition, by simply displaying the variable display of the third symbol in the small display area Dn2 while the display effect is being executed, it is easy for the player to know that the variable display of the third symbol is continuing. can be made to understand.

As shown in FIG. 81(a), a sub display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. As shown in FIG. 81(b), a reserved symbol consisting of a black circle is displayed in this sub-display area Ds. As described above, if a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the first symbol display device 37 is displaying the variable display, the number of times the ball enters the ball is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds is the same as the number of reserved balls entered. In this first control example, since the maximum value of the number of reserved balls is set to 4, a maximum of 4 reserved symbols are displayed in the sub display area Ds.

Note that in this control example, the number of reserved symbols is varied in correspondence with the number of reserved balls, but the method of displaying the number of reserved balls is not limited to this. For example, the number of reserved pitches may be displayed numerically.

Furthermore, in this control example, in addition to this, the game result suggestion mode for suggesting the game result (lottery result of each symbol) to the player, and the content of the effect display being executed in the main display area Dm. A performance explanation mode for explaining, a frame button related display mode for showing the timing of operating the frame button 22 and the result of the operation, and a winning related information display mode for displaying information about the jackpot game are in the sub display area Ds. The display area ratio between the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds is set to vary depending on the content to be displayed in the sub display area Ds.

In addition, if the combination of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed is a combination that corresponds to a loss, and there are held balls, after a 1-second stop display, a fluctuating display corresponding to the lottery based on the held balls will start. . In addition, when a plurality of reserved balls exist, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest ball entered in terms of time.

On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the removal of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for one second in a state where there are no reserved balls, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) passes or a new ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 140. Then, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. It is rare that there is no ball entering either the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 140 even though the player shoots the ball continuously for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds). In many cases, when the third symbol is displayed in a stopped state for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds), it is because the player has quit playing the game and no games are being played with the pachinko machine 10 at all. caused by.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, a player who is about to select the pachinko machine 10 to start a game can easily determine whether or not a game is being played based on the presence or absence of a demonstration effect being displayed. On the other hand, if a new ball enters either the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 140 before the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the new ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 140. A variable display of the corresponding third symbol is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided in a horizontally elongated manner below the main display area Dm, and displays a ball that has not been changed among the balls that have entered the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 140 ( This is an area for displaying the number of reserved pitches, which is the number of reserved pitches. Although details will be described later, this sub-display area Ds is divided into a first display area Ds1 and a second display area Ds2 for displaying game content and production content to the player (see FIG. 102). a)). When the currently executed variation display ends and the next variation starts, the pending symbol displayed in this sub-display area Ds is the pending symbol corresponding to the next variation (front view in FIG. 81(b)). The leftmost pending symbol) is deleted, and the remaining pending symbols are shifted to the left and displayed.

Here, the symbol corresponding to the currently executed variation display (the pending symbol that was displayed on the leftmost side during the previous variation) is the currently executed symbol display area (the area where the expectation level display mode Dk1 in FIG. 102 is displayed). ) is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player which pending symbol the variable display being executed corresponds to.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 81(b), a total of nine main symbols and sub-symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In addition, at the right end and left end (outside the effective line) of the main display area Dm, three parts each of the main symbol and the sub symbol of the third symbol are displayed.

On the other hand, if the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 140 while the variable display is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the number of times the ball enters the ball enters the second ball entry port 140. are held up to a maximum of four times each, and the number of balls held is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In this control example, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the ball entering the second ball entrance 140 can be held up to four times each, but the upper limit of the number of balls held is The number of times is not limited to four, and may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). Further, the upper limit of the number of balls held for entering the first ball entrance 64 and the upper limit of the number of balls held for entering the second ball entrance 140 are not limited to the same value. The upper limit of the number of balls held for entering the first ball entrance 64 may be greater than the upper limit of the number of balls held for balls entering the second ball entrance 140, or conversely, it may be made smaller. good. In addition, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the sub-display area Ds, the number of reserved balls can be displayed numerically on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four can be displayed in a manner that differs by the number of reserved balls ( For example, it may be displayed in different colors or lighting patterns. Moreover, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps in a lit state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 82(a) and 82(b), the flow of each effect executed in this first control example will be roughly explained. FIGS. 82(a) and 82(b) are timing charts schematically showing the relationship between the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 and the performance content executed on the third symbol display device 81.

As shown in FIG. 82(a), this control example is configured so that different effects are executed depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, when the gaming state is "normal", that is, when the gaming state is a normal state that is not in a jackpot, variable probability state, or time saving state, the normal performance is executed, and the gaming state is "normal". '', the jackpot performance is executed, and if the gaming state is "probable variable or time saving", that is, if the gaming state is fixed variable or time saving, then the jackpot effect is executed, and if the gaming state is fixed variable or time saving, then the jackpot effect is executed. middle) The performance is executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to easily understand the currently set gaming state just by looking at the performance being executed, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand gaming machine. In this control example, each performance is executed in association with a gaming state, but for example, a common performance may be provided that can be executed when a plurality of gaming states are set. . This makes it possible for the player to predict the currently set gaming state by visually checking the performance being executed, and allows the player to play while hoping that the gaming state is set to be advantageous to the player. Players can play games.

Furthermore, in FIG. 82, it is explained that the production content (display content) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 differs depending on the gaming state, but the aspects included in the production content are The display mode is not limited to the display mode displayed on the display device 81, and includes, for example, the sound output mode outputted by the audio output device 226 and the light emission mode of the lamp executed by the lamp display device 227. be.

First, the performance performed during the jackpot game will be explained with reference to FIGS. 83 to 89. First, in this control example, the number of special symbol pending balls at the time when the jackpot game is executed and the content of entered ball information held and stored (for example, determining whether or not there is entering ball information that has won a hit) The content of the performance to be executed during the jackpot game is set based on the result).

Specifically, when multiple jackpot games are executed in succession, an effect that partially informs the content of the previous jackpot game (first jackpot game) (for example, a 15-round jackpot game is executed) When playing a jackpot game, the jackpot performance 1 is performed to make it appear as if multiple jackpot games are being continuously executed by continuously executing a production that announces the number of rounds for 5 rounds across multiple jackpots. , executes the production corresponding to each jackpot game, and performs the previous jackpot game between the multiple jackpot games (during the special symbol fluctuation period that takes place between the end of the previous jackpot game and the execution of the next jackpot game). By continuously displaying the ending effect of the jackpot game, it appears as if multiple jackpot games are being executed continuously. It is configured to be able to set a jackpot performance 3 that notifies that a jackpot game will be executed and performs a continuous performance for a plurality of jackpot games.

Here, with reference to FIG. 83(a), the contents of the above-mentioned jackpot performance 1 will be explained. FIG. 83(a) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of jackpot performance 1. As shown in FIG. 83(a), in this jackpot performance 1, when the jackpot game (jackpot 1) is executed, the number of reserved balls is "3" (a state in which new reserved balls can be acquired during the jackpot game) This is a jackpot performance that can be set when the reserved balls that have already been acquired include information on entering balls that have been won.

When the jackpot performance 1 is set, when the previous jackpot game (jackpot 1 ((15 rounds (R))) is executed, first, a part of the number of rounds of jackpot 1 (5 rounds (R)) is executed. )) is executed.Then, the 5R effect is continuously executed until the next jackpot game (Jackpot 2 (10 rounds (R))) ends, and the total It is set so that a jackpot game performance worth 25R is executed.

In other words, the performance contents (performance scenario) executed during one jackpot game are not set as a series of performance contents (performance scenario), but are configured to be set in units of a predetermined period (for example, 5 rounds). , a new production content (scenario) is configured to be set based on ball entry information that is held and stored at that time.

To explain specifically using FIG. 83(a), when jackpot 1 (15R) is started, 5R effect 1 (see FIG. 85(a)) is executed. When this 5R performance is started, a performance (confirmed round number notification) is executed to inform the player that the jackpot game will continue for at least 5 rounds. When the jackpot game progresses to the 4th round, a suggestion effect (see FIG. 85(b)) that suggests whether or not the next 5R effect will be executed is executed, and in the 5R, the 5R effect is executed next. A notification effect (see FIG. 86(a)) is executed to notify the result of whether or not the event occurs.

In the example shown in FIG. 83(a), the 15th round jackpot is set as the first jackpot, so the 5R effect is executed three times. Here, the 5R performance (5R performance 3) executed for the third time is the period until the start of the second jackpot to be executed next, that is, the ending period of the first jackpot and the period of the first jackpot. It is set to be executed during the variation period of the special symbol variation that is executed after the end (see FIGS. 87(a) and 88(a)). Then, at the start of the second jackpot (start of the opening period of the second jackpot), 5R effect 4 is executed.

As a result, if a new pending memory is generated during a jackpot game and the pending memory includes ball entry information corresponding to a special symbol jackpot, based on the ball entry information (for example, the number of rounds). It is now possible to set a new effect (additional round number display). Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the contents of the jackpot performance to be performed during the jackpot are set as a series of performance scenarios at the start of the jackpot, the performance to be performed during the jackpot (indication of the number of additional rounds) can be easily varied. .

Although FIG. 83(a) shows an example in which a period of five rounds is used as one performance unit during a jackpot game, it may be configured such that the performance content is set for each round. Further, it may be configured such that a discrimination management process is performed to discriminate the contents of the ball entry information for each round, and the performance contents are set for each predetermined round (for example, every 5 rounds). In addition, when new ball entry information occurs, the content of the ball entry information is determined and the information used to set the production content during the jackpot (whether or not there is a jackpot, number of rounds) is stored in the storage area. It may be configured as follows.

Thereby, it is possible to suppress a temporary increase in processing load at the timing of setting performance contents during a jackpot game (every 5th round in FIG. 83(a)).

Here, the display contents of the jackpot performance 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 85 to 88. FIG. 85(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed immediately after the jackpot effect 1 is executed, and FIG. 85(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed immediately after the jackpot effect 1 is executed. FIG. 86(a) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a performance display to indicate whether or not a new 5R performance will be continued; FIG. FIG. 86(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen in the round immediately before jackpot 1 ends, and FIG. 87(a) is It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen showing that the jackpot continues during the ending period of jackpot 1, and FIG. 87(b) is a display showing that the jackpot during the ending period of jackpot 1 ends. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the screen, and FIG. 88(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen during special symbol fluctuation after jackpot 1 ends.

As shown in FIG. 85(a), when the jackpot medium effect 1 is executed, the words "jackpot" indicating a jackpot and "777" indicating that a jackpot was won in the special symbol lottery are displayed. The third symbol that is stopped and displayed is displayed in the main display area Dm. In the small display area (guidance display area) Dn1 of the main display area Dm, the words "Right-handed hitter" are displayed to guide the user to launch the ball to the right-handed hitter area, and when viewed from the front of the main display area Dm, On the upper right side, in a round number display area Dm2 for notifying the player of the number of rounds of the jackpot game, there is a round number display mode Dm3 in progress that shows the number of rounds currently being executed, and a round number display mode Dm3 that shows the number of rounds currently being executed. A confirmed round number display mode Dm4 indicating the confirmed round number is displayed.

In this control example, as the jackpot performance 1, a 5 round (R) performance is executed which notifies the player in advance that at least 5 rounds of jackpot games will be executed, so the 5 round (R) performance shown in FIG. 85(a) is executed. , "5" is displayed as the confirmed round number display mode Dm4.

Then, when the number of rounds of the jackpot game (playing round number display mode Dm3) becomes "4", as shown in FIG. 85(b), an additional effect (Fig. 86(a))) is performed (jackpot continuous performance). In this control example, selected images Dm5 to Dm7 imitating a "treasure box" are displayed as display modes selectable by the player as a jackpot continuation effect, and selected images Dm5 to Dm8 imitating an "arrow" are displayed. are displayed corresponding to each of Dm7. By selecting one of the selected images Dm8 displayed corresponding to each of the selected images Dm5 to Dm7, the player can receive one of the three displayed "treasure chests". Select "Treasure Chest".

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in this control example, one of the three "arrows" that is the selection image Dm8 is displayed in such a manner that the display mode of one "arrow" is regularly varied. The selected images Dm5 to Dm7 corresponding to the variable display mode (variable display mode Dm9) become the selected images selected by the player, and the player can select any "arrow" as the variable display mode Dm9. In this case, by operating the frame button 22, an arbitrary selected image is selected.

Note that the method by which the player selects an arbitrary selected image is not limited to the above-described method, and other configurations may be used. For example, the configuration may be such that the selection can be made by touching the display area of any selected image among the selected images Dm5 to Dm7 displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or the player can select the selected image by touching the display area of the selected image Dm5 to Dm7. The configuration may be such that by operating the button 22, the selection image Dm8 that becomes the variable display mode Dm9 can be selected.

Furthermore, in this control example, the selected images Dm5 to Dm7 are displayed in the same display mode, but different display modes may be displayed for each selected image. In this case, if the selected image is displayed in a display mode different from normal, the configuration may be such that the next 5R effect is more likely to be executed. Thereby, it is possible to increase the expectation that the jackpot game will continue at the stage when the selected image is displayed, and it is possible to make the player willing to participate in the game.

When the number of rounds of the jackpot game reaches the fifth round with the selected image Dm5 selected, the screen shown in FIG. 86(a) is displayed. In FIG. 86(a), only the "treasure box" (selected image Dm5) selected in the jackpot continuation effect executed in the fourth round of the jackpot game is displayed, and from among the "treasure boxes", the confirmed round number is displayed. "+5" is displayed as an additional round number display mode Dm10 to be added to the mode Dm4, and an additional effect is displayed in which the value of the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 is variably displayed from "5" to "10".

With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the jackpot game will continue for at least the next five rounds. In addition, although FIG. 86(a) shows the display screen when "+5" is displayed as the additional round number display mode Dm10, in the jackpot continuous effect (see FIG. 85(b)), the selected selected image The contents of the additional round number display mode Dm10 are set to differ depending on the number of rounds. Thereby, the player can be motivated to participate in the continuous jackpot performance.

In addition, in this control example, the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 is displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the number of rounds, but the number of rounds to be displayed on the display screen out of the number of remaining rounds of the jackpot game that is set internally. Any display mode may be used as long as it is variable depending on the character, and a display mode using abstract expressions such as character motion, color, and size may be used. By using the abstract display mode as the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 in this way, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of letting the player predict the remaining number of rounds of the jackpot game.

In addition, players who have been playing games for a long time can understand the regularity of the display format using abstract expressions, so it is easier for them to understand the contents of jackpot games than other players. Satisfaction level can be increased. In addition, as for the content of the jackpot game in this case, the number of rounds of each jackpot game is displayed in the jackpot performance where the first jackpot and the second jackpot are executed continuously. It is preferable to make it possible to understand it by the regularity of the aspect.

With this configuration, it is possible to predict whether or not a gaming state advantageous to the player will be set after the end of the second jackpot game, based on the number of rounds of the second jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to provide gaming information that is more advantageous than other players to players who have been playing games for a long period of time, and it is possible to increase their motivation to continue playing games for a long period of time.

In addition, in FIG. 86(a), "+5" is displayed as the additional round number display mode Dm10 that is added to the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 while the fifth round round game is being executed, and the confirmed round number is Although an example is shown in which the value of the display mode Dm4 is variably displayed from "5" to "10", the timing at which the additional round number display mode Dm10 is displayed is at a timing other than during a round game, that is, during the 5th round. The performance content may be set so that there is an inter-round interval period between the end of the first round game and the start of the sixth round game.

Further, in the continuous jackpot performance shown in FIG. 85(b), a means for determining the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 is provided, and the operation timing is determined for a predetermined period (for example, after the operation of the frame button 22 becomes valid). 3 seconds), the additional round number display mode Dm10 is displayed during the fifth round game, and the operation timing is set within a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds after the operation of the frame button 22 becomes effective). If the number exceeds the number of rounds, or if no operation is performed, the additional round number display mode Dm10 may be displayed in the inter-round interval period after the end of the fifth round.

In this way, by varying the timing at which the additional round number display mode Dm10 is displayed based on the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 and whether or not the frame button 22 is operated, the player can participate enthusiastically in the performance. , and can enhance the production effect. It should be noted that any configuration may be used as long as the timing for displaying the additional round number display mode Dm10 is changed based on the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 or whether or not the frame button 22 is operated. A determining means may be provided to determine whether or not the player operated the frame button 22 during a specific one second period), and the timing at which the additional round number display mode Dm10 is displayed may be varied based on the determination result. . Further, only when the operation content on the frame button 22 satisfies a predetermined operation condition (for example, the frame button 22 is operated during a specific one second during the fourth round game), the additional round number display mode Dm10 The configuration may be such that the values displayed are different.

Next, we will discuss the production contents to make it appear that multiple (two) jackpot games are being executed continuously, that is, the special content from the end of the first jackpot game until the start of the second jackpot game. The content of the performance during the symbol variation period will be explained with reference to FIG. 86(b) and FIG. 87(a).

First, as shown in FIG. 86(b), based on the start of the round (14th round) before the final round of the first jackpot game, a jackpot continuous effect is executed. In FIG. 86(b), a production mode different from the jackpot continuous production shown in FIG. 85(b) is shown, and the number of selected images displayed on the display screen and the display format are different. Specifically, the number of selected images is changed from three to two, and a more gorgeous display mode than usual is set as the display mode of the selected image Dm5. In this way, by varying the performance mode of the jackpot continuation performance, it is possible to indicate the degree of expectation that the jackpot game will continue depending on the performance mode of the jackpot continuation performance that is executed. Therefore, the player pays close attention to the contents of the performance, and the effect of the performance can be enhanced.

In FIG. 86(b), in order to explain the variation of the jackpot continuous performance, a performance mode different from that shown in FIG. 85(b) is shown, but the jackpot continuous performance (14 Naturally, the same effect mode as shown in FIG. 85(b) is also set to be executed as the jackpot continuation effect executed in the first round. In this way, by using the same performance mode for the jackpot continuation effect that is executed in the middle of the first jackpot game and the jackpot continuation effect that is executed at the end of the first jackpot game, it is possible to determine at what timing the first jackpot continuation effect. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the jackpot game has ended (how many rounds the first jackpot was a jackpot).

In addition to the method of setting the jackpot continuous effect described above, for example, the current jackpot continuous effect can be executed in the final round of the jackpot game depending on the selected image ("treasure box") selected in the jackpot continuous effect. It may be configured to suggest to the player that this is a continuous jackpot performance.

When moving to the final round (15th round) with the selected image Dm5 selected in the jackpot continuous effect shown in FIG. 86(b), a display similar to the additional effect shown in FIG. 86(a) is executed. The display continues to be displayed during the ending period after the final round, as shown in FIG. 87(a). Then, when the ending period of the jackpot ends (the jackpot ends) and the special symbols start changing, the display screen shown in FIG. 88(a) is displayed.

This FIG. 88(a) is an example of a display screen during a period when the first jackpot game is over and the special symbols are changing. As shown in FIG. 88(a), even after the first jackpot game ends (after the special symbol variation starts), the display of the additional effect continues to be executed. In the small display area Dn2, a change in the third symbol corresponding to a change in the special symbol is displayed. Then, when the fluctuation of the special symbol winning the jackpot stops, a combination of symbols (for example, "777") to indicate winning the jackpot is stopped and displayed in the small display area Dn2, and an additional effect display is executed. The next jackpot game is started while maintaining the same state.

In this control example, when an additional performance is set as a performance during a jackpot, the number of rounds set for the currently running jackpot and the next jackpot (the jackpot stored in the hold ), the display mode of the additional effect can be set by adding up the number of rounds set in During the first jackpot, an additional round number display mode Dm10 including the round number set for the next jackpot can be displayed.

In addition, in the above example, the period from the final round of the jackpot until winning the next jackpot (from winning the next jackpot until the opening period of that jackpot has passed and the first round of round play is executed) Although we have shown an example of a display in which additional effects are displayed continuously during the ending period (Fig. 87(a)) and during the special symbol variation period (see FIG. 88(a)), a blessing performance may be performed to celebrate the addition of the number of rounds, or the final round (15 round) and during the ending period (see Figure 87(a)), the additional effect is completed, and during the special symbol variation period (see Figure 88(a)), the effect is to celebrate the addition of the number of rounds. Alternatively, in the final round (15th round), the jackpot continuation effect performed in the 14th round (see Fig. 86(b)) may be continuously displayed, and during the ending period (Fig. 87 88(a)) and during the special symbol variation period (see FIG. 88(a)).

When performing the above-mentioned blessing performance, the next round ( For example, it may be configured to perform a similar blessing effect also in the 6th round). As a result, while the top-up performance is being executed, it is difficult for the player to grasp how many jackpots he has won, that is, the performance mode of the top-up performance that is executed during one jackpot, and 2. The performance mode of the additional performance executed between two jackpots can be made the same (same except for an error that is difficult for the player to identify).

On the other hand, if there is no additional round number due to the additional effect, as shown in FIG. 87(b), "+0" is displayed as the additional round number display mode Dm10, and the value of the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 is "15". ", and the comment "Unfortunate jackpot ended" is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the jackpot ends.

In addition, this control example is configured so that a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) is set as the interval period between each round game (interval interval period between rounds) executed during the jackpot game, but other than that, For example, even if the number of jackpot rounds is the same, the period of the interval between rounds may be different depending on the type of jackpot won. In this case, as the inter-round interval set during one jackpot, the inter-round interval before the end of rounds that are multiples of 5 (for example, the inter-round interval set between the 5th round and the 6th round) is set to 5. A jackpot type in which the interval between other rounds is set to 2 seconds, and an interval between two rounds before the start of a round that is a multiple of 5 (for example, a round set between rounds 3 and 4) It is preferable to provide a jackpot type in which the round interval) is set to 5 seconds and the other round intervals are set to 2 seconds.

Further, when using jackpot types with different inter-round intervals as described above, it is preferable to configure the performance during the jackpot to be switched at the timing when a long inter-round interval is set. Furthermore, when executing a jackpot effect using a predetermined period (5 rounds) as one unit as in this control example, from the start of the jackpot (start of jackpot opening period or start of the first round) Since the interval until the first long interval between rounds is set (for example, the end of the third round) is less than one unit of the jackpot effect, the configuration is such that effects other than the additional effects are executed. That's good.

Furthermore, in this control example, a certain period (for example, 1 second) is set as the ending period of the jackpot regardless of the jackpot type, but the jackpot that is set also for this ending period. It may be configured to be different for each type, and the opening period of the jackpot may be configured to be different for each jackpot type that is set.

In this way, the content of the jackpot game (the number of rounds of the jackpot game) is the same, but the opening period, inter-round interval period, and ending period set for the jackpot are different depending on the set jackpot type. By configuring this and setting the jackpot effect to span multiple jackpot games, it is possible to tell the player how many times he has won the jackpot while one jackpot effect is being executed. It can be difficult to understand.

In addition, if the period from the end of the previous jackpot to winning the next jackpot is different, that is, after the end of the previous jackpot, when winning the next jackpot due to a special symbol change in the first spin. Even if the special symbol variation period executed between the jackpots is different between the case where the next jackpot is won by the special symbol variation of the third rotation, the opening period set for the jackpot, the interval period between rounds, By configuring the ending period to be different depending on the set jackpot type, a jackpot performance can be executed without giving a player a sense of discomfort.

Next, returning to FIG. 83(b), the contents of the above-mentioned jackpot performance 2 will be explained. FIG. 83(b) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of jackpot performance 2. As shown in FIG. 83(b), in this jackpot performance 2, when the jackpot game (jackpot 1) is executed, the number of reserved balls is "2" (a state in which new reserved balls can be acquired during the jackpot game) This is a jackpot performance that can be set when the already acquired reserved balls do not include information on entering balls that have won a winning ball.

When the jackpot performance 2 is set, when the previous jackpot game (jackpot 1 ((15 rounds (R))) is executed, the jackpot game performance (15R) indicating that the current jackpot is 15R. Then, the ending effect displayed during the ending period set at the final stage of the jackpot game will be played after jackpot 1 ends, and then the next jackpot (jackpot 2 (10 rounds (R))) will be played. It continues (extends) until it is executed. Then, when jackpot 2 is executed, the content of the effect is switched from the ending effect to the 10R effect.

This jackpot performance 2 allows multiple jackpot games to be executed consecutively when a newly acquired held ball during a jackpot game contains entry information corresponding to a hit. It is intended to be performed. In other words, the jackpot game performance corresponding to jackpot 1 is the normal jackpot game performance (15R performance), and the ending performance can be continued by simply changing the content of the ending performance based on the entry information of the held ball newly acquired during the jackpot game. It is possible to produce effects such that a plurality of jackpot games that are executed are executed continuously.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a performance that is continuously executed by multiple jackpot gaming machines (continuous jackpot performance) based on the reserved balls acquired during the jackpot game, so that the continuous jackpot performance can be set. It can be made easier to execute and the performance effect can be enhanced. Further, even if a normal jackpot game performance is executed, the player can play the jackpot game while expecting to move on to a continuous jackpot performance.

Here, the content of the performance displayed between two jackpots in the jackpot performance 2 (see FIG. 83(b)) will be explained with reference to FIGS. 88(b) to 89(b). FIG. 88(b) is a diagram schematically showing the ending display displayed during the ending period of the first jackpot, and FIG. 89(a) shows that the first jackpot has ended and the special symbols have started changing. FIG. 89(b) is a diagram schematically showing the display screen in a state in which the special symbol has won a jackpot. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 88(b), in the ending display displayed during the ending period of the first jackpot, the main display area Dm contains information indicating the number of rounds of this jackpot and the number of balls acquired during the jackpot. (Acquired points) will be displayed. Then, when the jackpot game ends and the special symbols start changing, the ending display continues to be displayed as shown in FIG. 89(a), and the number of rounds of the jackpot game is indicated to the player. In the round number display area Dm2 for the game, there is a running round number display mode Dm3 that shows the number of rounds currently being executed, and a confirmed round number display mode Dm4 that shows the confirmed number of rounds that are certain to be executed. will continue to be displayed in the same way. In addition, a small display area Dn2 for displaying the variation of the third symbol, a pending execution area Dn3, and a pending symbol display area Dn4 are displayed. In addition, in FIG. 89(a), the second pending symbol from the left in the pending symbol display area Dn4 (the pending symbol with 3 attached to the circle that is displayed variably one after another) wins the jackpot. It shows the state of being.

Then, when the special symbol jackpot is won (when the fluctuating display of the pending symbol with the circle marked 3 stops), the jackpot will continue in the main display area Dm (as shown in FIG. 89(b)). The comment "The jackpot is still going on" is displayed to inform you that a new jackpot has started, and the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 is displayed to show the number of rounds for the second jackpot as "10". The value is displayed variably from "15" to "25". Further, the third symbol combination "777" indicating that the player has won the jackpot is stopped and displayed in the small display area Dn2.

The content of the performance executed in the jackpot performance 2 has been described above, but a similar performance may be used for the jackpot performance 1. In other words, in the above-mentioned jackpot performance 1, since a performance using multiple rounds is executed as a continuous jackpot performance, for example, during the final round of the first jackpot, or during the ending period after the final round, the jackpot When a new reserved ball containing winning ball information is obtained, it is difficult to execute a jackpot effect that spans multiple jackpots. In such a case, by executing a performance similar to the jackpot performance 2 described above, it is possible to smoothly execute the jackpot performance so as to span a plurality of jackpots.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84(a), the contents of the above-mentioned jackpot performance 3 will be explained. FIG. 84(a) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of jackpot performance 3. As shown in FIG. 84(a), in this jackpot performance 3, when the jackpot game (jackpot 1) is executed, the number of reserved balls is "4" (a state in which it is impossible to acquire new reserved balls during the jackpot game). ), and this is a jackpot effect that can be set when the already acquired reserved balls include information on entering a ball that has won a winning ball.

When the jackpot performance 3 is set, when the previous jackpot game (jackpot 1 ((15 rounds (R))) is executed, the next jackpot game (jackpot 2 (10 rounds (R))) A jackpot game performance (25R performance) that also combines the game contents is executed.

This jackpot performance 3 is a state in which it is impossible to acquire new reserved balls during the jackpot game, that is, a state in which it is already possible to determine whether or not the jackpot will be won consecutively at the timing when jackpot 1 is executed. This is a performance performed in . When the jackpot performance 3 is executed, it is possible to quickly notify the player that they have won consecutive jackpots, giving the player a sense of security, and adding new reservations during the jackpot game. It is possible to prevent the player from excessively expecting to win successive jackpots because the above-mentioned jackpot performance 2 is executed in a state where no ball can be acquired.

As explained above, in this control example, when a jackpot is won consecutively within a predetermined period (within the reserved memory), a jackpot is created to make it appear as if multiple jackpot games are being continuously executed. It is configured to prepare a plurality of medium effects and set the medium jackpot effect to be executed based on the number of special symbol pending balls at the time when the previous jackpot game is executed and the judgment result of the entered ball information held and stored. are doing.

Furthermore, the plurality of jackpot performances have different timings for notifying the player of successive jackpot wins. Thereby, the player can enjoy the jackpot game to the end while hoping to win consecutive jackpots.

In this control example, when a jackpot game is executed in a state where there is space in the number of reserved memories for special symbols (a state in which new reservation storage is possible during a jackpot game), the system will respond to the jackpot of special symbols during the jackpot game. Even if the pending symbols are stored in a pending memory, it is possible to perform a jackpot effect to make it appear as if multiple jackpot games are being executed continuously, so that the pending symbols are stored in a pending memory at the time when a jackpot game is executed. Compared to the case where the performance during the jackpot is determined based on information, the performance during the jackpot for making it appear as if a plurality of jackpot games are being executed continuously is easier to be executed, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, as one of the multiple jackpot effects, the number of rounds to be executed in the previous jackpot game can be divided into multiple times and partially notified to the player, so the current jackpot effect is one time. It is possible to make it difficult for a player to understand whether the performance is executed in a jackpot game or across a plurality of jackpot games. Therefore, the player can play the game while expecting that the jackpot game will continue for a long time.

In addition, in this control example, during the special symbol variation period after the end of the jackpot game, as in the normal special symbol variation period, the small display area Dn2 that displays the variation of the third symbol, the pending execution area Dn3, Although a configuration is used in which the reserved symbol display area Dn4 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, other configurations may be used. For example, the conditions for executing the jackpot continuous performance during the special symbol fluctuation period are satisfied. If it is determined by that means that the conditions for the continuous jackpot performance to be executed are met, the variable display of the third symbol or the above-mentioned pending symbol will be provided even during the special symbol variation period. It is better to perform a process that does not display related information, or a process that displays the content in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to understand the content (for example, by reducing the display size or moving the display area).

With this configuration, the player can grasp the end timing of the first jackpot game and the start timing of the second jackpot game based on the display content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. can be made more difficult.

In addition, during the interval between rounds in the first jackpot game, a pseudo ending display, a pseudo fluctuation display that fluctuates a pseudo pattern imitating the third pattern, and a pseudo pattern that stops the changing pseudo pattern at a combination corresponding to the jackpot. A pseudo game execution means is provided that executes a pseudo jackpot start display after a stop display and a pseudo stop display, and a pseudo game execution means is provided that displays a pseudo jackpot start display after the pseudo stop display, and a pseudo game execution means is provided to display a pseudo jackpot start display while one jackpot game is being executed, so that it appears as if multiple jackpots are being executed. It may be configured to perform a performance. With this configuration, when the first jackpot is won, the special symbol (main symbol) displayed on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is changed to the special symbol (main symbol) corresponding to how many rounds of the jackpot game. ) can be made difficult for the player to grasp. Therefore, there is an effect that the performance effect of the jackpot performance executed on the third symbol display device 81 can be enhanced.

Next, another example of the jackpot performance 1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 84(b). FIG. 84(b) is a timing chart showing another example of the jackpot performance 1. In this other example, with respect to the content shown in FIG. 83(a), the content of the additional performance has been changed from 5R performance to 10R performance, and the winning prize at the start of the jackpot (in the winning information storage area 223a). The difference is that the presence or absence of winning information (indicating a win) is different.

Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 84(b), jackpot 1 (15R) is started when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol (the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2) is "1" and there is no winning prize. , 10R performance 1 is executed as the first additional performance. Then, while the 10R performance 1 is being executed, a new held ball containing the winning ball entry information is acquired (the number of held balls becomes "2"), and the 10R performance 1 is executed. In the jackpot continuous performance, a performance indicating that 10R performance 2 will be executed using a round number that is the sum of the round numbers corresponding to jackpot 2 is performed.

By executing such a performance, one additional performance will be executed across multiple jackpots (one additional performance will be executed during the period from 11R of jackpot 1 to 5R of jackpot 2) Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of rounds set for one jackpot. In addition, according to the example shown in FIG. 84(b), since a 10R performance is executed as an additional performance that is executed across multiple jackpots, 10R performance 1 and 10R performance 2 are executed. Later, the same 5R performance 5 as in FIG. 83(a) described above can be executed, and the data used for the additional performance can be shared.

Note that FIG. 83(a) or FIG. 84(b) shows an example of an additional effect, and the configuration is such that additional effects other than the above-mentioned contents are also executed. Specifically, in addition to the 5R performance using a period of 5 rounds and the 10R performance using a period of 10 rounds, the additional production includes a 7R performance using a period of 7 rounds, and a 7R performance using a period of 8 rounds. It is configured to be able to perform an 8R performance using a period.

By using multiple performances that correspond to different numbers of rounds as additional performances in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of rounds that will be executed during one jackpot, and to It is possible to have the player predict how long (how many rounds) the current jackpot will last and play the game with the expectation that it will continue for a long time.

In addition, the game state that is set at the time when the jackpot performance 1 executed in response to one or more jackpots ends, that is, the jackpot type (probable variable jackpot) of the last jackpot executed corresponding to the jackpot performance 1 , normal jackpot) may be configured to vary the top-up performance to be executed. For example, if it is determined that the gaming state set at the time when the jackpot performance 1 ends is a variable probability state. In order to make it easier to set up an additional effect that corresponds to a long number of rounds (for example, 10R effect) as an additional effect that is executed at the beginning of the jackpot effect 1, or when the jackpot effect 1 ends, It may be configured such that an additional performance (for example, 7R performance) is executed only when the set gaming state is a variable probability state.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player predict both the number of rounds that will be executed during the jackpot and the gaming state that will be set after the jackpot, based on the additional performance that is executed, and the performance effect can be increased.

Returning to FIG. 82, the explanation will be continued. In this control example, when the gaming state becomes a gaming state (probability variable state or time saving state) that is advantageous to the player, a specific effect (probability variable medium effect or time saving medium effect (hereinafter referred to as high probability medium effect) )) is executed. The period during which this high-accuracy medium performance is being executed is a period in which a predetermined performance (battle performance) is repeatedly executed, and based on the result of the battle performance, it is determined whether the gaming state advantageous to the player ends or not. An effect is executed to inform the player.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 90 to 97, the contents of the high-accuracy medium performance (continuous performance) will be explained in detail. FIG. 90 shows a flow of a high-certain medium performance (continuous performance) that is executed when the gaming state is in an advantageous state (variable probability state or time-saving state), and shows a high-certain medium performance that is continuously executed until a jackpot is won. It is a timing chart showing a performance (continuous performance). As shown in FIG. 90, the battle performance is configured to be repeatedly executed during the high-accuracy medium performance (continuous performance). The battle performance includes a battle reach (see FIGS. 93 to 96) in which a performance to notify whether or not an advantageous state (probability change state or time saving state) ends is executed in a period corresponding to one rotation of the special figure fluctuation; The effect for varying the display mode when the battle reach is executed is composed of a pre-battle effect (see FIGS. 91 and 92) that is executed during a period corresponding to multiple rotations of the special symbol variation.

The detailed production contents will be described later, but in Battle Reach, a production (attack production) in which your character and the opponent's character reduce each other's HP value (continuation value) is executed multiple times (3 times), and your character When the HP value (continuation value) becomes 0 (in the case of a battle reach with a defeat pattern), the conditions for ending the advantageous state (winning a jackpot that ends the advantageous state, or shortening the time when the number of changes of the special symbol is set) When the HP value (continuation value) of the opponent's character reaches "0" (in the case of a winning pattern battle reach), it indicates that you have won a jackpot where the advantageous state continues, If the HP values (continuation values) of both players do not become "0" (in the case of a draw pattern battle reach), this indicates that the high-accuracy medium performance continues.

Furthermore, in the pre-battle performance, a performance is performed that increases or decreases the HP value (continuation value) of the opponent's character at the time when the battle reach is started. This pre-battle performance is configured such that the performance mode is set based on the pre-read result of the pending symbols and the number of times the battle performance is repeated, and multiple special symbol fluctuations are performed based on the performance mode. The used HP management is executed.

FIG. 91(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when a battle performance is started as a high-accuracy medium performance (continuous performance). When the battle performance starts, first, the pre-battle performance, which is the first part of the battle performance, is executed. This pre-battle performance is performed to increase or decrease the opponent's continuation value (HP value) of the battle reach, which is the second half of the battle performance.

As shown in FIG. 91(a), when the pre-battle effect is executed, a boy character Dm11 is displayed on the left side of the center of the main display area Dm, and an opponent is displayed to select an opponent candidate for battle reach. The selection mode is displayed. In this opponent selection mode, selection sections Dm13 to Dm16 corresponding to four types of characters A to D are displayed as opponent candidates to be battle reach opponents, and one of the selection sections is selected. Note that FIG. 91(a) shows a state in which the selection portion Dm13 corresponding to the character A is selected.

Furthermore, on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, an HP display area Dm17 is displayed that shows continuous values (HP values) corresponding to each of the four types of characters A to D. This HP display area Dm17 is formed from a display part that shows the HP value with a horizontally elongated gauge and a display part (Dm18) that shows the HP value with numerical values. The value (display mode) displayed in this HP display area Dm17 is variably displayed so as to be variable (decreased) according to the attack on the opponent during the pre-battle performance.

In the pre-battle performance, when an opponent is selected, the screen shown in FIG. A display (a circle on character A) is displayed to identify the HP display corresponding to the opponent character. This allows the player to easily understand what the HP value of the currently selected opponent character is.

Further, during this pre-battle performance, only the performance that reduces the HP value of the opponent character is executed, and the HP value of the character Dm11 itself (character Dm11) does not decrease. As a result, until Battle Reach is executed, your own HP value will not decrease as a result of the effect of attacking the opponent, so we hope that the effect of attacking the opponent will be executed more frequently. You can play games while doing so. In addition, since the HP value of the character Dm11 is not displayed on the screen during the pre-battle performance, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy about his or her own HP value decreasing as a result of the performance being performed. can do.

Note that the presentation mode of the pre-battle presentation is not limited to the above-mentioned contents; it is also possible to perform a presentation that displays your own HP value and decreases your own HP value, or displays your own HP value or the opponent's HP value. You may perform an effect that increases the HP value of. In addition, it is possible to reduce the opponent's HP value to 0 in the pre-battle performance, which is the first part of the battle performance, and hit the jackpot without executing the battle reach, which is the second half of the battle performance (after the jackpot ends, it will be in a certain state, or , a jackpot in which a time-saving state is given) may be configured to be executed.

In FIG. 92(a), since an attack (main attack effect) was performed on the character ADm13 to reduce its HP by "200", the display part Dm18a corresponding to the character A in the HP display area Dm17 is changed from the main display area Dm. It is variably displayed as "800" depending on the content of the performance.

On the other hand, in the display example shown in FIG. 92(b), in addition to the effect in which the character Dm11 attacks (main attack effect), the cat character Dm20 appears and performs an additional attack (secondary attack effect). is also executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 92(b), an attack is performed on the character ADm13 to reduce its HP by "230", and the display part Dm18c corresponding to the character C in the HP display area Dm17 is It is variably displayed as "770" depending on the content of the performance.

As shown in Figure 92(b), during this pre-battle performance, the opponent may be changed midway through, and when the opponent is changed, the current opponent can be identified. The HP display area Dm18 is displayed (a circle on character A).

Here, we will briefly explain how to set the value of HP that decreases due to attack effects. In this control example, based on the lottery results of special symbols and the pre-determination results (look-ahead results) of ball entry information that is held and stored, the continuation value management means determines the battle performance results and general performance contents (HP value The reduction value (in the 100th place) and the main attack performance) are configured to be determined. Then, for the purpose of diversifying the types of performances for the performance contents (decreased HP value and main attack performance) determined by the continuous value management means, the lottery results and pre-reading results are adjusted by the performance setting means. It is configured such that detailed presentation contents (HP value reduction value (10s) and secondary attack presentation) are determined without being influenced.

Then, the continuous value (HP value) determined by the continuous value management means is stored, and the continuous value (HP value) is increased or decreased using the continuous value management means with respect to the stored continuous value (HP value). It consists of

Specifically, in FIG. 92(a) described above, the continuous value management means sets a performance (main attack performance) that reduces the continuous value (HP value) by 200, and the performance setting means reduces the continuous value (HP value). This shows an example display when content is set that does not increase or decrease the value, and the main attack performance (attack performance of character Dm11) that reduces the continuous value (HP value) of the opponent character ADm13 by 200 is executed as a pre-battle performance. There is.

On the other hand, in FIG. 92(b) described above, the continuation value management means sets a performance (main attack performance) that reduces the continuation value (HP value) by 200, and the performance setting means decreases the continuation value (HP value) by 200. This shows an example display when a reduction effect (secondary attack effect) is set. A secondary attack performance (cat character Dm20's attack performance) that reduces the continuous value (HP value) of ADm13 by 30 is executed, and in total, the continuous value (HP value) of the opponent character ADm13 is reduced by 230 as a pre-battle performance. is being executed.

With this configuration, the number of performances displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased with respect to the number of performances set by the continuation value management means. In other words, with respect to the number of performances displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to reduce the number of performances to be managed that continuously increase/decrease the continuous value (HP value). The burden of control can be reduced.

Further, when the opponent character is changed during one pre-battle performance, the HP value of the opponent character before the change is continuously displayed. Therefore, when the opponent is changed and the same opponent character is selected again, the performance can be continued from the previous HP value. In this way, by gradually reducing the HP of the opponent character who can be an opponent for Battle Reach during the pre-battle performance, and then executing Battle Reach, it is possible to frequently perform Battle Reach during high accuracy and medium performance. It is possible to perform a series of effects without causing any occurrence.

In addition, during the pre-battle performance, if the HP reduction rate of multiple opponent candidates is uneven, have the player watch the performance with the hope that the battle reach will be executed with the opponent with the lowest HP value as possible. be able to.

When the pre-battle performance, which is the first half of the battle performance, ends, a battle reach is then executed in which the player battles with a specific opponent. If the player wins this battle reach (reduces the opponent's HP to "0"), it means that the player has won a jackpot in which an advantageous gaming state is set, and if he loses (reduces his HP to "0") ), it indicates that the player has won a win in which a disadvantageous gaming state (normal state) is set. In addition, if the battle reach is executed at a time when the lottery result of the special symbol is not a hit, it will be a draw (both the player's HP and the opponent's HP will not become "0"), and the high accuracy medium performance will continue.

This Battle Reach is applied if you win a jackpot during high accuracy (variable, short time), or when certain conditions are met during high accuracy (for example, when the number of special symbols changes reaches a predetermined number, or when the battle If the result of the battle reach is a draw, the pre-battle performance will be executed again. In this case, all HP values of the opponent character are set to initial values. In other words, since the pre-battle performance is a performance that reduces the HP value of the opponent character, for example, if there is a long period in which no special symbols are won during the probability change state, during the pre-battle performance, In order to prevent the opponent character's HP from becoming 0, it is necessary to make it difficult to perform a production that reduces the opponent character's HP (attack production), which may reduce the effectiveness of the pre-battle production. there were.

In this control example, a battle reach is generated in addition to when a special symbol is won, and a "draw" is set as a result of the battle reach, and when a "draw" is achieved in the battle reach, the opponent character Since the pre-battle performance is restarted by returning the HP value to the initial value, the problem is that the performance effect of the pre-battle performance decreases if one pre-battle performance is executed for a long period of time. can be solved. Furthermore, by providing a "draw" as a result of Battle Reach, even if a performance with low expectations is executed during Battle Reach, the possibility of a "draw" remains possible.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 93(a) to 96(b), the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 displayed during battle reach will be explained. First, FIG. 93(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen immediately after a battle reach is started. Here, I will explain the content of Battle Reach. In the battle reach of this control example, attacks of oneself or the opponent are executed a total of three times, and an effect is executed in which the result is displayed according to the final HP value. There are three types of attacks: "strong attack," "medium attack," and "weak attack," each of which is set to have a different HP reduction value.

When Battle Reach starts, the words "Battle Start" and the words "First Time" indicating the number of battles in Battle Reach are displayed at the top of the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. be done. Below that, an HP gauge Dm21 indicating the value of one's own HP and an HP gauge Dm22 indicating the value of the opponent's HP are displayed. HP gauge Dm21 displays the upper limit value "1000", and HP gauge Dm22 displays "500", the value reduced in the pre-battle performance.

An accumulation gauge Dm23 is displayed below the HP gauge Dm21. This accumulation gauge Dm23 accumulates a value based on being attacked by an opponent, and when the accumulated value reaches "MAX", a reversal effect is executed and an effect of winning the battle reach is executed. By making this reversal performance possible, even if the opponent side performs an advantageous performance during the battle reach where three battles are held, it is possible to keep the expectation of a big win until the end.

A progress display area Dm24 for showing the progress of the battle reach is formed below the main display area Dm, and a history of attack effects during the battle reach is displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 93(b), the display contents when the first attack during battle reach is the player's own will be described. As shown in FIG. 93(b), in the main display area Dm, an effect is executed in which the own character (boy character) Dm11 attacks (light attack) the opponent's character Dm15, and the value of the HP gauge Dm22 changes to " It decreases from ``500'' to ``300''. Then, a "circle" indicating that the first attack in the battle was the player's own attack is displayed in the progress display area Dm24.

When the second battle performance is executed following the first battle performance shown in FIG. 93(b), the second battle performance is displayed as shown in FIG. 94(a). Here, in FIG. 94(a), a production in which the opponent's character Dm15 attacks is executed as the second production of the battle, and the value of the HP gauge Dm21 indicating the continuous value (HP value) of the own character Dm11 becomes "1000. ” to “700” and an effect is displayed in which the value of the accumulation gauge Dm23 is accumulated by half (50). Then, in the progress display area Dm24, a "cross mark" indicating that the second battle was the opponent's attack is displayed.

Next, when the effect of the third battle (the last battle) is executed, the effect of the third battle is displayed as shown in FIG. 94(b). Here, in FIG. 94(b), as the third performance of the battle, a performance is executed in which the own character (boy character) Dm11 attacks (medium attack) the opponent's character Dm15 in the main display area Dm, and the HP gauge The value of Dm22 decreases from ``300'' to ``0'', and it is reported that the current battle reach is a battle reach indicating that the player has won a jackpot in which a game state advantageous to the player is set. Then, in the small display area Dn2, "777" is displayed as a third symbol combination display to indicate that the current special symbol lottery is a jackpot.

In addition to the battle reach (win pattern) shown in FIG. 94(b), the battle reach in this control example includes a draw pattern and a defeat pattern, as described above, and the battle reach of the draw pattern is set. If so, for example, instead of the third battle effect shown in FIG. 94(b), the effect shown in FIG. 95(a) is displayed. In the display example shown in FIG. 95(a), an effect in which the opponent's character Dm15 attacks is executed as an effect for the third time in the battle. In the case of a battle reach with a draw pattern, the value of the HP gauge Dm21 of your character Dm11 does not decrease to 0 (decreases to 500), and the battle reach ends before the continuous value (HP value) of both you and your opponent reaches 0. do. In this case, a new battle effect is executed, and the pre-battle effect (see FIG. 91) is executed again.

As shown in Figure 95(a), even if the final attack (third attack) of Battle Reach is the opponent's attack, provide a draw pattern in which the own continuous value (HP value) does not decrease to 0. This can keep players looking forward to the end of Battle Reach. In addition, in FIG. 95(a), a pattern in which the opponent makes a third attack as a battle reach for a draw pattern, that is, at the time of the third attack, the player is told whether the current battle reach is a loss or a draw. In addition to this example, there is also a pattern in which the player makes the third attack as a battle reach in a draw pattern, in other words, at the time of the third attack, the player is told that the current battle reach is a victory or A performance that makes it seem like one of the patterns of a draw is also performed. In this case, when the third attack is performed, the player will not be defeated in the current battle reach, so the player can feel at ease.

Further, when a battle reach of a defeat pattern is set, for example, the effect shown in FIG. 95(b) is displayed instead of the effect for the third battle shown in FIG. 94(b). In the display example shown in FIG. 95(b), as the third battle, a production in which the opponent's character Dm15 attacks is executed, the value of the HP gauge Dm21 of the own character Dm11 decreases to 0, and the value of the HP gauge Dm21 of the own character Dm11 decreases to 0, and the value of the HP gauge Dm21 of the own character Dm11 decreases to 0 Battle Reach ends without the value being accumulated to the upper limit (MAX).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 96(a), even if the value of the HP gauge Dm21 of the own character Dm11 decreases to 0, if the value of the accumulation gauge Dm23 reaches the upper limit (MAX), the main The characters "Resurrection" are displayed in the upper center of the display area Dm, the own character Dm11 stands up, and as shown in FIG. 96(b), a resurrection effect is executed to defeat the opponent's character Dm15.

As mentioned above, the battle reach performance in this control example is such that the performance result is varied depending on the value of the accumulation gauge Dm23 in addition to the degree of decrease in the HP gauge Dm21 of the own character Dm11 and the HP gauge Dm22 of the opponent's character Dm15. Because of this structure, you can expect a big win until the end of Battle Reach.

In addition, in this first control example, the content of the pre-battle performance (performance mode) is determined based on the number of times the battle performance is repeatedly executed and the reserved storage information (ball entry information) of the special symbol at the time of setting the battle performance. It is configured to be variable. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 97, the display mode of the HP display area Dm17 is configured to be variable.

Here, the display mode of the HP display area Dm17 will be explained with reference to FIG. 97. FIGS. 97(a) to (d) show the HP display area Dm17 that is variably set based on the number of times the battle performance is repeatedly executed and the reserved memory information (entering ball information) of the special symbol at the time of setting the battle performance. It is a figure showing a display mode.

FIG. 97(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode of the HP display area Dm17, and is a schematic diagram showing the display mode of the HP display area Dm17 in a pattern in which the opponent's character is not replaced during battle performance. It is. As shown in FIG. 97(a), in the HP display area Dm17, only the same opponent's character (character ADm13) has different continuation values (HP values) (4 levels from "700" to "1000"). Displayed. When such HP display area Dm17 is displayed, the character ADm13 is always set as the opponent in the pre-battle performance, and the character ADm13 is always set as the opponent in the pre-battle performance, and the character's own attack executed in the pre-battle performance (see FIG. 92(a)) As a result, an effect is executed in which all HP values displayed in the HP display area Dm17 decrease.

By using such a display mode, a plurality of HP values are reduced at once, so it is possible to make the performance performed more flashy. In addition, even if the character ADm13 is the same, the initial value of the continuation value (HP value) is different, so it is expected that the character ADm13 with the lower continuation value (HP value) will be selected when the battle reach is developed. You can play games while doing so. Furthermore, by changing the initial value of the continuation value (HP value) for the same character ADm13, it is possible to set multiple expectations for a jackpot for the same character ADm13. Compared to the case where a different opponent character is set every time, the types of image data for displaying characters can be reduced.

Next, the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 97(b) shows a display mode in which the order in which the characters A to D are displayed is different from the display mode of the normal HP display area Dm17 (see FIG. 91). FIG. When using such a display mode, for example, in a case where the degree of selection as an opponent character during a battle performance is configured to vary depending on the position displayed in the HP display area Dm17, it is necessary to select an opponent character that is likely to be selected during a battle performance. Characters can be changed. Further, the display order of the characters A to D displayed in the HP display area Dm17 may be changed even while the battle performance is being performed.

FIG. 97(c) is a schematic diagram showing a display mode in which the opponent character is displayed, which is different from the display mode of the normal HP display area Dm17 (see FIG. 91). As shown in FIG. 97(c), in this display mode in which opponent characters E and F are displayed, the opponent character is treated as a special opponent character whose initial continuous value (HP value) is lower than that of normal opponent characters A and B. E and F are displayed for selection. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player expect to win the battle reach in the current battle performance.

Further, FIG. 97(d) is a schematic diagram showing a display mode in which the number of selectable opponent characters is reduced compared to the normal display mode of the HP display area Dm17 (see FIG. 91). By using such a display mode, in order to reduce the options for the opponent character selected in the pre-battle performance, the continuous value (HP value) of the opponent character when the battle reach develops is reduced in advance (during the pre-battle performance). You can make it easier to do so.

As explained above, in this control example, the display mode of the HP display area Dm17 is determined based on the number of times the battle effect is repeatedly executed and the reserved memory information (entering ball information) of the special symbol at the time of setting the battle effect. By configuring the settings to be variable, the variations in the battle performance are increased and the performance effect is enhanced. It may be configured to do so.

For example, if the special opponent character E described above in FIG. 97(c) is selected as a battle reach opponent, the configuration may be such that the battle reach of a defeat pattern is not executed. Thereby, in addition to the performance that reduces the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent character in the pre-battle performance, it is possible to make the player interested in the opponent character selected in the battle reach. In addition, if the opponent character E is set instead of the opponent character A in the display mode shown in FIG. Since this will no longer be performed, the player can play the game with peace of mind. In addition, if the reserved memory information (entering information) of the special symbol at the time of setting the battle production includes entry information for which the winning pattern battle reach is executed, the winning pattern battle reaching will be performed by selecting the winning pattern. It is also possible to display a display mode that includes the specific opponent character for which the action is performed.

Further, the display mode of the HP display area Dm17 may be configured to be variably set based on the operation result of the frame button 22 that can be operated by the player. In this case, until the operation of the frame button 22 is accepted, the normal display mode of the HP display area Dm17 shown in FIG. It is preferable to configure the display mode of the HP display area Dm17 to be changed, for example, to the display modes described above in FIGS. 97(a) to 97(d) based on the operation result.

Note that in the example described above with reference to FIGS. 97(a) to (d), the length of the HP gauge is configured to be a constant length even when different continuous values (HP values) are set. Therefore, for example, when decreasing the continuous value (HP value) by 100, the decrease rate of the HP value gauge will be displayed variably depending on the set continuous value (HP value). The display mode is not limited to this, and the HP gauge may be displayed with a length corresponding to a set continuous value (HP value). In addition, in order to easily understand the remaining continuous value (HP value) based on the length of the HP gauge, the display mode (for example, color) of the HP value gauge is configured to be changed depending on the length of the HP gauge. You may do so.

By configuring as explained above, even if battle effects are repeatedly performed for the player, the mode of the effect can be varied, and the player may quickly become bored with the content of the effect. It is possible to prevent it from being put away. In addition, in this control example, the presentation mode of the pre-battle presentation is based on the number of times the battle presentation is repeatedly executed and the reserved memory information (ball entry information) of the special symbol at the time of setting the battle presentation (when setting the pre-battle presentation). However, the performance mode may be set variably using other conditions. For example, the first game state (for example, a variable probability state) may be set as a game state in which a battle performance can be executed. ), and a second game state (for example, a time-saving state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state. The production mode may be set based on the result of determining whether it is the first game state or the second game state, or ball entry information that is held and stored when setting the battle production (when setting the pre-battle production) The performance mode may be set based on the determination result of whether or not there is ball entry information indicating that the gaming state shifts from the first gaming state to the second gaming state. .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 98 to 101, a description will be given of the suggestion performance, which is the performance executed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is set to the normal state. This suggestion performance indicates that a specific performance for indicating a high level of jackpot expectation will be executed in the variation performance executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in response to the variation of the special symbol. This is a performance to give a hint to the audience in advance, and it is a performance consisting of a foreshadowing performance in the first half and a countdown performance in the second half.

First, with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99, the contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the suggestion presentation will be explained. FIG. 98(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen at the time when the foreshadowing performance, which is the first half of the suggestive performance, has started, and FIG. 99 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen at the time when the countdown performance, which is the second half part, is started, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram showing an example.

As shown in FIG. 98(a), when the suggestive effect is started, the foreshadowing effect is executed in the sub-display area Ds. In the example shown in FIG. 98(a), a dynamic effect is executed in which a character Dc1 imitating a "car" advances from left to right, and the character Dc1 reaches an arrival point Dc3 where the words "Goal" are displayed. By arriving at , a production will be executed to switch to a countdown production.

Then, the character Dc1 is configured to set either a first route Dc2a indicating a straight route or a second route Dc2b indicating a meandering route as a moving route when the character Dc1 moves to the arrival point Dc3. In the example shown in FIG. 98(a), the second route Dc2b is selected, and a dynamic effect in which the character Dc1 moves along the meandering route is performed.

Here, a detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG. 100, but in this first control example, the start timing of the precursor performance, which is the first part of the suggestion performance, is configured to be selectable from a plurality of points, Since the period during which the omen effect is executed is indefinite, the path of the character Dc1 is selected according to the length of the period during which the omen period effect is executed. Thereby, when the precursor effect is executed, it is possible to visually grasp the timing at which the countdown effect is started.

In addition, in FIG. 98(a), a performance that suggests the timing at which the countdown performance will start is used as a precursor performance, but other performances may be used as a precursor performance, for example, when the countdown performance is executed. A performance that suggests to the player that a countdown performance is to be performed, a performance that suggests the period of the countdown performance, or a performance that suggests the type of specific performance that is the target of the countdown performance may be used. In other words, any performance that notifies in advance information regarding a performance that will be executed in the future as a suggestive performance may be used.

When the omen effect ends, as shown in FIG. 98(b), a comment "countdown starts" is displayed above the main display area Dm, and in the sub display area Ds, the character Dc1 arrives at the arrival point Dc3 and the countdown starts. The character "3" indicating that the period is 3 seconds is displayed in the countdown display area Dc4. Thereby, it is possible to specifically notify the player that the current countdown performance is a performance starting from "3" and the timing at which the specific performance will be executed.

Note that although the example shown in FIG. 98(b) shows a countdown effect in which the countdown period is 3 seconds, in this first control example, other countdown periods (for example, 7 seconds) are set. It also has a countdown effect, and the longer the countdown period, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. By configuring this way, during the first part of the suggestion performance, which is the precursor performance, a countdown performance with a long countdown period is executed while predicting the timing when the countdown performance will start and the current fluctuation pattern. You can make them look forward to it.

When the countdown effect shown in FIG. 98(b) ends, as shown in FIG. 99, the character "0" indicating that the countdown period has ended is displayed in the countdown display area Dc4 of the sub display area Ds, and the main display In the area Dm, an operation effect is executed in which an image imitating the frame button 22 is displayed as a specific effect.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101, a flow of setting a precursor effect and a countdown effect to be executed as the suggestion effect of the first control example will be explained. In this first control example, a suggestion effect is executed to notify the player of the timing at which a specific effect is to be executed, and in a countdown effect that is executed in the second half of the suggestion effect, the execution timing of the target specific effect is A performance (see FIG. 98(b)) that accurately (specifically) notifies the user of (See FIG. 98(a)) is executed.

Here, conventionally, in the variable performance executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a suggestion performance is predetermined for suggesting (notifying) the player that a specific performance will be executed at a predetermined timing. A configuration was used in which the program was executed for a predetermined period of time. If the period during which the suggestion effect is executed in this way is predetermined, the execution period will overlap with other effects executed in the variable effect (for example, a performance that suggests a higher winning expectation than the suggestion effect). In some cases, prohibition processing was applied to prevent the suggestive effect from being executed. Further, there is a problem in that it is not possible to perform a suggestion performance for a specific performance that is executed at a timing in which a period during which the suggestion performance is performed cannot be secured.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, if multiple pieces of suggestion effect data with different predetermined periods are prepared, the storage capacity will increase, and furthermore, the processing when setting variable effects will become complicated. A new problem arises.

Therefore, in this control example, the execution timing and end timing of the suggestion effect are set separately, so that the period during which the suggestion effect is executed can be adjusted. Specifically, the end timing of the suggestive performance (the end timing of the countdown performance, which is the second half part) is set based on the execution timing of the specific performance that is the target of the suggestive performance, and the start timing of the suggestive performance (the end timing of the countdown performance, which is the first part) The start timing of the performance can be set from multiple points.

With this configuration, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect without setting the execution period in advance. In addition, since the start timing of the suggestion performance can be set from multiple points, for example, the period during which the suggestion performance is executed based on the lottery results of special symbols can be varied (for example, if you win a jackpot, It becomes possible to set the period during which the suggestive performance is performed to be long) or to vary the start timing of the suggestive performance according to the execution timing of other performances. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom when setting up suggestive effects.

FIG. 100(a) is a timing chart showing a flow of executing a suggestive effect in a variable effect in which a variable time of 60 seconds is set. In the example shown in FIG. 100(a), the timing at which the suggestive effect can be started is set 10 seconds or 20 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and the specific effect "PUSH effect" is executed 33 seconds after the start of the change. It is set as follows. Then, a countdown period (30 to 33 seconds from the start of variation) is set so that the countdown effect (execution period: 3 seconds) ends at the timing when the specific effect is executed (33 seconds after the start of variation). Since this variation is the case when a jackpot is won, the timing at which the suggestion effect period can be set longer (timing 10 seconds after the start of the variation) is selected from among the multiple start timings to start the suggestion effect. Set as .

As a result, in the example shown in FIG. 100(a), after the precursor effect (effect period 20 seconds) is executed 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (after 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the change), the countdown effect (effect period 3 seconds) is executed. ) is executed. Then, a specific performance ("PUSH performance") is executed at the end timing of the performance period of the countdown performance. In addition, if this fluctuation has not won a jackpot, the timing at which the suggestion performance period becomes shorter (timing 20 seconds after the start of the fluctuation) is set as the start timing of the suggestion performance (start timing of the precursor performance). .

In this way, when performing a suggestion performance for a specific performance that is executed at a specific timing of a predetermined variable performance, by using a configuration in which the start timing of the suggestion performance is set based on the lottery result of the special symbol, The length of the suggestive performance period can be varied based on the lottery results of special symbols, and the player can be made aware of the length of the performance period. Therefore, the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, even if the length of the suggestion performance period is varied, the countdown performance period, which is the second half of the suggestion performance, that is, the period during which the performance that specifically (accurately) notifies the execution timing of the specific performance is , since it is configured to be set based on the execution timing of the specific effect, it is possible to suppress the effect of the suggestion effect from decreasing.

That is, when changing the length of the suggestion performance period, only the period during which the precursor performance, which is the first half of the suggestion performance, is executed is configured to be variable. As mentioned above, this precursor performance directly or indirectly suggests that a specific performance will be executed, and even if the length of the performance period is changed, it will not be executed in the second half of the suggestion performance. A player can be reliably informed of the timing at which a specific performance will be executed by the countdown performance.

Next, with reference to FIG. 100(b), the flow of the suggestion effect executed in the variable effect B, which is different from the variable effect A described above with reference to FIG. 100(a), will be explained. FIG. 100(b) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the effect executed in the variable effect B.

The variable performance B shown in FIG. 100(b) is different from the above-described variable performance A in that a plurality of specific performances that can be targets of the suggestive performance are set. The setting method of the variable effect executed in this variable effect B will be explained focusing on the points that are different from the above-mentioned variable effect A. In the variation performance B, the timing at which the suggestive performance can be started is set 10 seconds or 20 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and the timing at which the specific performance can be executed is set at 26 seconds or 30 seconds after the start of the fluctuation.

Variation effect B includes a "cut-in effect" (not shown) in which a boy character is displayed in a large size so as to cover the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81 as a specific effect that can be executed 26 seconds after the start of variation. , "PUSH effect" (see FIG. 99) can be set as a specific effect that can be executed 30 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. These two specific effects are set to have the same jackpot expectation level, and the specific effect corresponding to the set suggested effect is executed.

The variable performance shown in FIG. 100(b) is configured so that the period during which the suggestion performance is executed is set based on the lottery result of the special symbol, as in FIG. 100(a) described above. When the lottery result is a jackpot, the structure is configured so that the start timing of the suggestion effect is 10 seconds after the start of the variation, and the specific effect is a "PUSH effect" that is executed 40 seconds after the start of the variation. are doing.

More specifically, in descending order of jackpot expectation, the above-mentioned suggestion effect is the pattern with the highest jackpot expectation, and then the timing 17 seconds after the start of the fluctuation is set as the start timing of the suggestion effect, and A pattern in which "PUSH effect" is set as a specific effect, a pattern in which the timing 10 seconds after the start of variation is set as the start timing of the suggestion effect, and a pattern in which "Cut-in effect" is set as a specific effect, a timing 17 seconds after the start of variation. is set as the start timing of the suggestion performance, and "cut-in performance" is set as the specific performance, and the suggestion performance is set in accordance with the jackpot expectation level.

Furthermore, in the variable performance B shown in FIG. 100(b), the start timing of the countdown performance (length of the countdown period) is configured to be variable according to the length of the set suggestion performance period, and the most When a performance pattern with a high expectation of a jackpot is set, the start timing of the countdown performance is set to 7 seconds before the specific performance is executed, and immediately after the start of the countdown performance, the third symbol display device 81 is A countdown effect is executed in which the character "7" is displayed in the countdown display area Dc4 (see FIG. 98(b)) of the display area Ds.

Furthermore, the first control example is configured to be able to execute a suggestive effect that spans a plurality of variable effects. The flow of the suggestion effect executed across the plurality of variable effects will be explained with reference to FIG. 101. FIG. 101 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the effect when the suggestion effect is set over the variation effects corresponding to two consecutive special symbol changes.

As shown in FIG. 101, in this control example, when a new pending memory is acquired during execution of a variation effect, information (appropriateness judgment result, variation pattern, etc.) included in the newly acquired pending memory is determined in advance. (pre-reading), and is configured to be able to set the performance mode of the variable performance to be executed before the variable performance corresponding to the corresponding pending memory based on the determination result.

Specifically, the variation of variation effect C (variation time 30 seconds) is started with no pending memory, and at the timing when 15 seconds have passed from the start of variation (the remaining period of variation effect C is 15 seconds), the variation effect C (variation time 30 seconds) is started. When a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 140 and acquires a new pending memory (a pending memory corresponding to the next variable performance), based on the information contained in the new pending memory, , determines whether or not to execute the suggestion effect.

Here, when it is determined that the next variable performance is a variable performance that executes a suggestion performance, it is determined whether the remaining period of the current variable performance is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). In the example shown in FIG. 101, since the timing at which a new suspended memory is acquired is when the remaining period of variable effect C is 15 seconds, it is determined that the remaining period of the current variable effect is longer than the predetermined period, and the current The start timing of the suggestion effect is set at a predetermined timing (timing 20 seconds after the start of the variation) in the variation effect, and in the next variation effect (variation effect D), a specific effect (specific effect) to be executed 5 seconds after the start of the variation is set. A countdown performance (performance period of 3 seconds) is set for performance C).

As mentioned above, by setting the start timing of the suggestive performance and the end timing of the suggestive performance (start timing of the specific performance) across the continuously executed variable performances (variable performances C and D), the variable performance C When 20 seconds have elapsed since the start of the variation, a precursor effect, which is the first half of the suggestion effect, is executed for a period (10 seconds) until the end of the variation effect C. Then, the foreshadowing effect continues to be executed during the period (2 seconds) from the start timing of variation of variable effect D until the countdown effect is executed, and after that (2 seconds after the start of variation of variable effect D), the countdown effect is executed. After being executed for 3 seconds, bonus performance C is executed.

According to the example shown in FIG. 101, since the suggestion effect can be executed in the variable effect that is executed before the variable effect in which the specific effect is executed, the suggestion effect can be executed at the beginning of the variable effect (for example, 5 seconds after the start of the change). ) It is also possible to execute a suggestive effect with respect to a specific effect that is executed. Therefore, the degree of freedom in suggestive presentation can be further increased.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 101, if the timing at which a new pending memory is acquired is when the remaining period of variable effect C is less than a predetermined period (less than 10 seconds) (for example, the timing of additional winning B shown in FIG. In case), it is not possible to secure a period for executing the suggestion performance for the specific performance C of the variable performance D, so the configuration is such that the suggestion performance for the specific performance C is not set.

In addition, in the above example, based on the timing of additional winning (timing of acquiring new pending memory), it is determined whether or not to execute the suggestion performance for the specific performance to be executed in the next variable performance. Although this configuration is used, other configurations may also be used. For example, the timing of executing a specific performance in subsequent variable performances may be determined based on the timing of additional winnings (timing of acquiring new pending memory). It may be configured to be variable.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily set a suggestive effect that is executed across a plurality of variable effects, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in FIG. 101, as an example of a suggestive performance that is executed across a plurality of variable performances, the flow of the suggestive performance when the start condition for the next variable performance is satisfied during the execution of the variable performance has been explained. Suggestion effects spanning multiple variable effects may be executed under other conditions.

For example, if the start conditions for the next fluctuating performance are met and the start conditions for the next fluctuating performance are met, which timing within the successive fluctuating performance is set as the execution timing for the specific performance, and the current The timing for executing the suggestion effect may be set to either the remaining period of the variable effect being executed or the period during which the next variable effect will be executed.

In this case, the content of the performance to be performed in the currently running variable performance and the content of the performance to be performed during the next variable performance is determined, and the results of the determination and the lottery of special symbols corresponding to the successive variable performances are determined. It is preferable to configure the system so that the start timing of the suggestion effect is set based on the result. With this configuration, for example, if a continuous performance is set in which the currently fluctuating fluctuating performance and the next fluctuating performance are a series of performances, a suggestive performance can be created for the successive fluctuating performance. If the special effect is not executed and is set to be executed at the end timing of the currently fluctuating variable effect, that is, at the start timing of the next variable effect, the suggested effect will be executed within the next variable effect period. If there is no factor that prohibits the setting of suggestion effects in the currently fluctuating fluctuating performance and the next fluctuating performance, the remaining period of the currently fluctuating fluctuating performance, or the next fluctuation. The start timing of the suggestive performance can be set at any time during the performance period.

In addition, when the start conditions for the next (one after another) variable effect are met, it is determined whether the variable effect corresponds to a jackpot win, and the start timing of the suggestion effect is executed based on the determination result. It may be set to either the remaining period of the variable effect, or the execution period of the next (one after another) variable effect. Thereby, it is possible to easily set a suggested performance period that is longer than one variable performance period.

In addition, in this first control example, the configuration is such that the suggestive performance is performed for one specific performance, but the suggestive performance may be configured to be performed for a plurality of specific performances. In this case, it is preferable to set a precursor period in which a common precursor effect is executed and a countdown period in which a countdown effect is executed corresponding to each of a plurality of specific effects. With this configuration, it is possible to play a game while predicting how many specific performances the suggestive performance has been executed, and it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

In addition, a pseudo countdown performance (pseudo countdown performance) that does not target a specific performance may be configured to be performed while the precursor performance is being performed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing a specific performance is executed and a suggestion performance is executed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 102 to 104, an explanation will be given of the expectation level suggesting performance, which is a performance executed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is set to the normal state. This expectation level suggestion performance includes an expectation level display performance that displays a plurality of expectation level display modes that can notify the jackpot winning expectation level in stages, and a display mode of the expectation level display mode that is variable (jackpot winning expectation level). This is a performance that consists of a performance that increases the expectation level (changes the display mode to a high display mode).

First, with reference to FIG. 102(a), the expectation level display mode used for the expectation level suggestion effect of the first control example will be explained. FIG. 102(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the expectation level display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG. 102(a), in this control example, a plurality of expectation display modes Dk1 to Dk3 are displayed.

The expectation level display mode Dk1 shows the jackpot expectation level using an in-execution display that shows information corresponding to the fluctuating effect being executed, and in FIG. 102(a), "LV2 ' is displayed. Although the details will be described later, this expectation level display mode Dk1 is displayed 10 seconds after the start of the variable effect, and is displayed on the display screen earliest among the plurality of expectation level display modes Dk1 to Dk3. Ru.

The expectation display mode Dk2 shows the jackpot expectation using characters appearing during the variable performance, and in FIG. 102(a), "LV1" indicating the jackpot expectation is displayed. Although the details will be described later, this expectation level display mode Dk2 is displayed 24 seconds after the start of the variable performance.

The expectation level display mode Dk3 shows the jackpot expectation level using dialogue display that shows the contents of the variable production and progress information, and in FIG. 102(a), "LV2" indicating the jackpot expectation level is displayed. has been done. Although the details will be described later, this expectation level display mode Dk3 is displayed 36 seconds after the fluctuating effect is started.

In addition, in FIG. 102(a), each expectation level display mode is shown as a LV display that shows the level of jackpot expectation level in stages, but any mode that can notify the level of jackpot expectation level in stages may be used. In addition, a configuration may be used in which the color of each display mode, the speed of dynamic presentation, and the magnitude of the output volume and light amount are varied in stages. Further, a configuration may be used in which the presentation mode indicating the growth process or transformation process is varied in stages toward the final mode.

Furthermore, the execution display displayed in the expectation level display mode Dk1 is configured so that, for example, the display mode of the pending symbol display displayed on the first display area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds is continuously displayed. Good too. As a result, when a performance that changes the display mode of a pending symbol (pending symbol preview production) is executed while a pending symbol is being displayed, the changed display mode of the pending symbol can be continuously used as the display in progress. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the relationship between the variable display being executed and the pending symbol display.

When the expectation level suggestion effect is executed, in addition to the expectation level display effect in which the expectation level display modes Dk1 to Dk3 shown in FIG. ), an expectation level increasing (additional) effect is executed (see FIG. 102(b)).

As shown in FIG. 102(b), when the expectation level increase (additional) effect is executed, first, as an expectation level setting effect, a display having selection areas Dk4a to Dk4c in which different increase (additional) values are displayed. The mode (roulette) Dk4 is displayed in rotation, and when the roulette Dk4 stops, the increase (additional) value displayed in the selection area designated by the arrow Dk5 is set.

This increase (additional) value indicates the variable amount that changes the display mode of each expectation level display mode displayed during the expectation level suggestion performance, and if "1UP" is set as the increase (additional) value means that for any one of the expectation level display modes, an effect is executed in which the jackpot expectation level is gradually changed to a display mode that is one level higher than the currently displayed display mode. It shows.

With this configuration, by executing the expectation level increasing (additional) performance, it becomes possible to notify only the variable amount of each expectation level display mode displayed during the current expectation level suggestion performance. . Therefore, the player can enjoy the expectation level increasing (additional) effect while expecting that the expectation level of the expectation level display mode in which the display mode corresponding to the already high jackpot expectation level is displayed will further vary (increase). I can do it.

In addition, in this control example, each expectation level that changes (increases) while the current expectation level increase (additional) performance is executed is used as the increase (additional) value set in the expectation level increase (additional) performance. The configuration is such that a value that is the sum of the variable amounts of the display mode is set. As a result, for example, when "3UP" is set as the increase (additional) value, whether the display mode of one expectation level display mode is changed by three steps, or whether the display mode of each of the three expectation level display modes is variable by one step. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether or not the game will be played. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing the performance result of the expectation level suggestion performance early, and to enhance the performance effect.

next. With reference to FIG. 103(a), the content of the effect when "3UP" is set as the increase (additional) value will be explained. FIG. 103(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a case where the display mode of each expectation level display mode is varied (increased) using a set increase (additional) value.

According to the example shown in FIG. 103(a), "3UP" is set as the increase (additional), and each of the expectation level display modes Dk1 to Dk3 displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is The display is variably displayed one step at a time. Specifically, the display mode of the expectation level display mode Dk1 changes from "LV2" to "LV3", the display mode of the expectation level display mode Dk2 changes from "LV1" to "LV2", and the display mode of the expectation level display mode Dk3 changes. The display mode changes from "LV2" to "LV3".

Note that although FIG. 103(a) described above illustrates a pattern in which the display modes of all the expectation level display modes Dk1 to Dk3 are varied at the same time, the display modes of each of the expectation level display modes Dk1 to Dk3 may be changed at different timings. It may be configured to be variable. In this case, of the increase (additional) value set in the expectation increase (addition) effect, the increase (additional) is calculated by subtracting the value corresponding to the variable amount that changed the display mode of any of the expectation level display modes. ) value is displayed on the display screen as the remaining increase (additional amount). With this configuration, it is possible to specifically predict the performance result based on the remaining increase (additional) value displayed on the display screen and the expectation display mode whose display format is not changed. The effect can be increased. Furthermore, it may be configured such that the expectation level increasing (additional) effect is performed multiple times with different timings for the same expectation level display mode to vary the display mode. By doing so, it is possible to perform an unexpected performance for the player.

In addition, in this control example, each of the multiple expectation display modes Dk1 to Dk3 that are displayed at different timings in one variable performance is continuously displayed, so that the display as shown in FIG. 103(a) is achieved. Although the configuration is such that they are displayed simultaneously on the screen, it is not necessary to provide a period in which each of the expectation level display modes Dk1 to Dk3 is displayed simultaneously, and the display timing of the plurality of expectation level display modes Dk1 to Dk3 may be different. , at least some of the display timings may be set simultaneously.

Furthermore, in the expectation level increase (additional) effect, the player may be informed of the expectation level display mode for which the increase (additional) value is set (see FIG. 103(b)). In this case, as shown in FIG. 103(b), a comment "I will raise the boy's level" indicating the target expectation level display mode is displayed above the main display area Dm. By displaying this comment, the player can grasp the expected level display mode that is the target of the current expectation level suggesting performance, and can enjoy the game while predicting the progress of the future performance. It can be performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the flow of the expectation level display effect executed in this control example will be explained. FIG. 104 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the expectation level display performance. As shown in FIG. 104, in one variation pattern (super reach 60 seconds), expectation display modes Dk1 to Dk3 that show the expectation of winning a jackpot in stages are displayed at different timings. Specifically, the expectation level display mode Dk1 (expectation level 1 display) is displayed 12 seconds after the start of the change, and the expectation level display mode Dk2 (expectation level 2 display) is displayed 24 seconds after the start of the change. Aspect Dk3 (expectation level 3 display) is displayed 36 seconds after the start of the fluctuation.

Then, an expectation level increasing effect (additional expectation level display) that increases (adds on) the display mode of each expectation level display mode Dk1 to Dk3 is displayed at any timing of 5 seconds, 17 seconds, or 29 seconds from the start of the change. . Here, the expectation level increasing effect (expectation level additional display) is configured such that the expectation level display mode that is the target for increasing the expectation level differs depending on the timing at which it is displayed (executed). The target is the expectation level display mode that is displayed after the level increase effect (expectation level added display) is executed.

Specifically, if the expectation level increase effect (additional expectation level display) is displayed 5 seconds after the start of the change, all of the expectation level display modes Dk1 to Dk3 will be displayed, and the expectation level will increase 17 seconds after the start of the change. When the effect (additional display of expectation level) is displayed, the expectation level display modes Dk2 and Dk3 are targeted. A performance targeting only the display mode Dk3 is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the performance contents of the same performance mode, ie, the expectation level increasing performance, simply by changing the display timing (execution timing). In addition, since the expectation level increasing effect is executed for multiple expectation level display modes, the player can check how much the expectation level notified by the expectation level increasing effect increases the expectation level of which expectation level display mode. It is possible to make the player play the game while making them look forward to it.

Note that in this control example, as described above, the target of the expectation level increasing effect (expectation level additional display) is an expectation level display mode in which the display timing is set later, but other configurations may be used. For example, the expectation level display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the time when the expectation level increase effect (expectation level addition display) is executed may be targeted, or the above-mentioned expectation level display mode may be targeted. It is also possible to target a combination of the following. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict which expectation display mode will change (will the expectation level increase) due to the expectation level increasing performance (expectation level additional display). , it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

Furthermore, in order to enhance the performance effect of the expectation level increasing performance (expectation level additional display), a selection means that allows the player to select at least one of a plurality of expectation level display modes, and an expectation level selected by the selection means are provided. an object discriminating means for determining whether the display mode is a target for which the display mode is changed by an expectation level increasing effect (expectation level additional display); variable control means for changing the display mode by means of an expectation level increasing effect (expectation level additional display) when the object determining means determines that the display mode is to be varied by the expectation level increasing effect (expectation level additional display); Also good. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a participatory performance to the players, and it is possible to have them participate in the game with great enthusiasm.

In this case, for example, the suggestion notification indicating the expectation level display mode that is the target of the expectation level increasing effect (expectation level addition display) may be sent in a period earlier than the period in which the player selects the expectation level display mode using the selection means. It is better to provide a means for notifying suggestions to be executed. Thereby, it is possible to limit the target range selected by the selection means for the player, and it is possible to increase the probability that the expectation level increasing effect (expectation level additional display) will be executed.

Further, when the target discriminating means determines that the expectation level display mode selected by the selection means is not a target whose display mode is to be varied by an expectation level increasing effect (expectation level additional display), It is preferable that a configuration is provided in which a performance switching means is provided for executing a different performance using the increase (additional) value set in the expectation level increasing performance (expectation level additional display). As a result, the increase (additional) value already displayed on the display screen can be dissipated without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Examples of the above-mentioned different effects include, for example, effects that notify players in advance of the contents of winning information that has been held and stored, and values that players have accumulated in order to obtain benefits (e.g., gaming level and experience). It may be a performance that is advantageous to the player, such as a performance to increase the player's expectation level, or a performance that is disadvantageous to the player, such as a performance that changes the performance mode so that the expectation level of the expectation level display mode decreases (expectation level decreasing performance). It could also be a performance.

In addition, means is provided that is configured to vary the display mode of the performance switched by the performance switching means in correspondence to the increase (additional) value set in the expectation level increasing performance (expectation level additional display). Also good. Furthermore, if the player does not select an expectation level increasing mode using the selection means, a configuration may be adopted in which a non-target expectation level display mode is automatically selected, or a target expectation level display mode may be automatically selected. may be configured to be automatically selected. In addition, in the case where the target expectation display mode is automatically selected, the selection means is configured to perform an effect that is more advantageous to the player if he selects a non-target expectation display mode. That's good. This allows the player to actively select the expectation level display mode using the selection means, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

<About the electrical configuration in the first control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 125. First, details of the main control device 110 provided in the pachinko machine 10 will be explained.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 113) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

First, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 113. These counters and the like are operated by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 83, etc. used in

For the setting of the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first random number counter C1 used for selecting the jackpot type (jackpot symbol) are used. Initial value settings for the winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of a miss in the special symbol, the fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select the fluctuation pattern, and the first winning random number counter C1 A first initial value random number counter CINI1 is used. Further, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbols (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see Figure 126), and some counters are updated irregularly during main processing (see Figure 136). The updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a in which each counter value is stored for winnings to the first ball entrance 64, and each counter value for winnings to the second ball entrance 140 is stored. A special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is provided. As described above, in this control example, up to four reserved balls are provided in each of the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 140. Therefore, if a ball enters the first ball entry hole 64 during a period when a special symbol can be drawn, such as when a special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner or when a special symbol jackpot game is not in progress, each counter value will be changed to a special symbol. It is stored in the symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, and when a ball enters any of the second ball entry ports 140, each counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. After that, among the counter values stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the oldest counter value in terms of time is moved to the execution area, and the special symbol 1 or Various settings and control processes for variable display (dynamic display) of the special symbol 2 are executed.

On the other hand, if the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 140 during a period when the special symbol 1 is not drawn during the special symbol fluctuation display or during a jackpot game, and the winning entry If the number of reserved balls corresponding to the ball mouth is less than the upper limit value (four in this control example), each counter value is acquired and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball It is stored in the storage area 203b. Additionally, if the corresponding number of reserved balls is equal to or greater than the upper limit (four balls in this control example), only the prize balls (three prize balls in this example) are obtained without acquiring each counter value, etc. is treated as an invalid ball that is paid out to the player.

In this control example, the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is set to 4 for each of the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 140, but is not limited to this, and may be less than 4 (for example, 3 pieces) or more than 4 pieces (for example, 8 pieces). Moreover, the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls may be different between the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 140, or a configuration may be adopted in which no upper limit value is provided. Furthermore, a reserved ball storage area may be provided only for either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140 so that reserved balls can be stored in only one of them.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 113. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 238), and becomes 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 238 for a counter that can take values from 0 to 238). It is configured to return to . In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 238, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 238. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 136).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this control example), for example, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 140. The ball is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The random number value for the special symbol jackpot is defined in the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 106(a)) provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the value of the random number that is a jackpot defined in the first winning random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be explained with reference to FIG. 106(a). The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (judgment values) that are determined to be a win in each gaming state in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 lottery are set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 106(a), when the gaming state is a low probability gaming state, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the lottery of special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 It is determined whether or not it is "7", and if it is "7", it is determined that it is a jackpot. In addition, when the gaming state is a high probability gaming state, it is determined whether the obtained value of the first winning random number counter C1 is within the range of "5 to 9" in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 lottery. If the number is within the range of "5 to 9", it is determined that it is a jackpot.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is a random number that results in a special symbol jackpot, the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is a special symbol. This is when the pattern hits the jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is the display mode indicated by the value of the first win type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 238. As mentioned above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there is one value of the first winning random number counter C1 that will be a jackpot of the special symbol, and the random value "7" is stored in the first winning random number table as described above. 202a. In this way, the total number of random numbers is 239, and the total number of random numbers that result in a jackpot is 1, so the probability that the special symbol will be a jackpot is "1/239". On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, there are five values of the first winning random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot of the special symbol, and the random numbers "5 to 9" are as described above in the first winning random number table. 202a. In this way, the total number of random numbers is 239, and the total number of random numbers that result in a jackpot is 10, so the probability that the special symbol will be a jackpot is "1/47.8".

Returning to FIG. 113, the explanation will be continued. The value of the first winning type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 199. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, one of the jackpots A to K is selected based on the value of the first winning type counter C2 and the first winning type selection table 202c (see FIG. 107). The jackpot type will be selected.

Here, details of the first winning type selection table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 107. As shown in FIG. 107, the first winning type selection table 202c defines the jackpot type to be selected in association with each value range of the first winning type counter C2. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 107, when the corresponding symbol type is special symbol 1 (special symbol 1) and the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19", " ``Jackpot A'' is defined in correspondence. This "jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 and the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a probability variable state of special symbols, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. “Jackpot A” is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player because the number of rounds is large and the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a variable probability state that is advantageous to the player. Among the 200 counter values (random values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 20 random values for which "Jackpot A" is selected, so when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, "Jackpot A" is selected. ” is selected 10% of the time.

In addition, when the corresponding symbol type is special symbol 1 (special symbol 1) and the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "20 to 79", "jackpot B" is defined in correspondence. . This "jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10 and the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a special symbol probability variable state, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Although the number of rounds executed during a jackpot is smaller than that of "jackpot A," the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a variable probability state that is advantageous to the player, so "jackpot B" is a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player. It is. Among the 200 counter values (random values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 60 random values for which "Jackpot B" is selected, so when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, "Jackpot B" is selected. ” is selected 30% of the time.

The corresponding symbol type is special symbol 1 (special symbol 1) and the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "80 to 114", "jackpot C" is defined in association with the range. This "jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10 and the time saving state is set 100 times as the gaming state after the jackpot ends, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Out of the 200 counter values (random values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 35 random values for which "Jackpot C" is selected, so when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, "Jackpot C" is selected. ” is selected at 17.5%.

In addition, when the corresponding symbol type is special symbol 1 (special symbol 1) and the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "115 to 164", "jackpot D" is defined in association. . This "Jackpot D" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 5 and the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a special symbol probability variable state, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Among the 200 counter values (random values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 50 random values for which "Jackpot D" is selected, so when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, "Jackpot D" is selected. ” is selected 25% of the time.

Then, when the corresponding symbol type is special symbol 1 (special symbol 1) and the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "165 to 199", "jackpot E" is defined in correspondence. . This "Jackpot E" has 5 rounds, and if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a low probability state and not a time saving state (in the case of a normal state), the gaming state after the jackpot is the normal state. is set, and if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is other than the normal state (high probability state or time-saving state), this is a jackpot type in which the time-saving state is set 100 times as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot. Among the 200 counter values (random values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 35 random values for which "Jackpot E" is selected, so when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, "Jackpot E" is selected. ” is selected at 17.5%.

Next, when the corresponding symbol type is special symbol 2 (special symbol 2), as in the case of special symbol 2 described above, “Jackpot F ” to “Jackpot K” are selected. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the jackpot type (first winning type) selected when the corresponding symbol type is special figure 2 is the jackpot type selected when the corresponding symbol type is special figure 1. (first winning type), the jackpot with a round count of 15 rounds ("jackpot F") is set so that the selection ratio is high (selection ratio is 80%). As a result, if a player wins a jackpot with a special symbol, the jackpot that allows the player to win a large amount of balls in one jackpot will be higher if the player wins a jackpot with special symbol 2 than with special symbol 1. The degree of advantage for the player can be made different between the special drawing 1 lottery and the special drawing 2 lottery.

On the other hand, when the corresponding symbol type is Special Figure 2, the jackpot type (first winning type) is more disadvantageous than the jackpot type (first winning type) selected when the corresponding symbol type is Special Figure 1. may be selected. Specifically, when "Jackpot I" to "Jackpot K" are selected, 2 rounds are fewer than 5 rounds, which is the smallest number of rounds among the jackpot types selected in the case of special drawing 1. Set.

In addition, if "Jackpot H", "Jackpot J", or "Jackpot K", which are jackpot types that give a time-saving state, are selected as the gaming state after the jackpot ends, the corresponding symbol type will be changed to a special figure. In the jackpot type (first winning type) selected in case 1, the number of times (time saving number) smaller than the number of times (time saving number) (100 times) set when a time saving state is given as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot. 50 times or 25 times).

In this way, the content of the jackpot game to be executed (number of rounds) and the settings after the jackpot game are determined depending on whether the jackpot is achieved in the special drawing 1 lottery or the jackpot is achieved in the special drawing 2 drawing. By making the game states different, it is possible to make the game more complex, and it is also possible to prevent players from being given excessive benefits all the time.

Furthermore, the game state set after the jackpot is configured to be different based on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, so when playing a game aiming for a jackpot with a special symbol, it is important to be aware of the set gaming state. You will be playing games while doing so. Specifically, even in a gaming state where a jackpot lottery is held with the same probability (for example, a low probability state), the gaming state that is set after the jackpot ends is different depending on whether it is a time saving state or a normal state. In contrast, a gaming state is set in which the time saving state is more advantageous to the player. Thereby, it is possible to make the player play the game while having a strong expectation of winning the jackpot with the special symbol during the specific period (while the working hours are shortened).

In addition, in this control example, the rate at which a high probability state where the jackpot probability improves after the jackpot is set is the same in cases where a jackpot is won with special drawing 1 and a case where a jackpot is won with special drawing 2. Although the first winning type selection table 202c is defined as follows, the rate at which the high probability state is set may be varied without being limited to this. Also, by selecting the jackpot type (first winning type) based on the first winning type selection table 202c and passing the ball through a specific area during the jackpot, a variable probability state (high probability state) is given after the jackpot ends. In gaming machines that play, the jackpot game is executed when a jackpot is won on special drawing 1, and the jackpot game is executed when a jackpot is won on special drawing 2. They may be configured to have different ease of application. Thereby, the benefits given to the player can be made more different depending on the special symbol that wins the jackpot.

Furthermore, as a method of varying the benefits given to the player depending on the special symbol won in the jackpot, for example, a plurality of variable winning devices 65 (see FIG. 2) that allow balls to win during jackpot games are provided, and the system is implemented. The variable winning device 65 that allows balls to win during the jackpot game may be configured to vary depending on the jackpot. In this case, the ease with which balls enter the plurality of variable winning devices 65, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters a prize, and the termination conditions for ending one release operation (number of balls entered and time limit) It is a good idea to make them different. Thereby, the benefits given to the player can be made more different depending on the special symbol that wins the jackpot.

Returning to FIG. 113, the explanation will be continued. The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to increment by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of a miss displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after a reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. ``reach outside the front and back'' (for example, 98, 99), which stops at the reach, and ``reach outside the front and back'' (for example, in the range of 90 to 97), where the final stop symbol stops at a position other than before and after the reach symbol. Three stop (effect) patterns are selected, including a "completely off" (range of 0 to 89, for example) in which no reach occurs. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this control example), for example, and is updated at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 140. The ball is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

Note that the random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In addition, in this control example, this table is divided into one for special symbols with high probability and one for special symbols with low probability, and the range of random values set for each stop type of miss depending on the table. is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

For example, in a high probability state, a jackpot is likely to occur, so in order to prevent more reach effects than necessary from being selected, the table for high probability states has a wide random value range of 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely missed". is selected, and "completely off" is more likely to be selected. In this table, the "front/back off reach" becomes narrow to 98, 99, and the "front/back off reach" also narrows to 90-97, making it difficult for "front/back off reach" or "front/back off reach" to be selected. In addition, in a low probability state, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64, the random value range corresponding to the stop type of "completely missed" is narrow from 0 to 79. ``Completely off'' is less likely to be selected.

In this stop type selection table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front/back off" is wide, from 80 to 97, making it easier to select "reach other than front/back off". Therefore, in the low probability state, many reach displays with long production times can be performed, so the time for the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 can continue. It becomes easier to perform. Note that in the latter table as well, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "front/back off reach" is set to 98 and 99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured such that it is incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines one variation pattern from the set variation pattern table. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the fluctuation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 136) to be described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the main process. Incidentally, the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 108 and 109) that stores a random number value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is located inside.

The variation pattern selection table 202d defines a plurality of data tables for selecting variation patterns (see FIGS. 108 and 109). In this variable pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of variable pattern tables are set according to the gaming state, and for each variable pattern table, a variable pattern table is set according to the result of the validity determination. Details of each variation pattern table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109.

The second winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that sequentially increments by 1 within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this control example, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 126). (Hereinafter, referred to as a normal ball entrance (through gate) 67) is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The random number value for a normal symbol win is defined in the second win random number table 202b (see FIG. 106(b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second win random number counter C4 is If the winning random number value matches the value of the random number defined in the second winning random number table 202b, it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) has won. The details of this second winning random number table 202b will be explained with reference to FIG. 106(b).

FIG. 106(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second winning random number table 202b. In this second per symbol random number table 202b, when the probability of a normal symbol is low (during the normal state of a normal symbol), there are two random numbers that will be a hit for a normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 6". There is. Since the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second winning random number counter C4 is 240, the total number of random numbers that will be a hit is 2, so the probability that the normal symbol will be a hit is "1/120".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, when a ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 , a fluctuating display of normal symbols is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 6", it is determined that the win is won, and after the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (the second symbol ), the symbol "○" is displayed as a lighted symbol, and the electric accessory 140a attached to the second ball entrance 140 is opened for "0.2 seconds x once".

On the other hand, when the probability of the normal symbol is high (during the time saving state of the normal symbol), there are 200 random numbers for winning the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". The total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second winning random number counter C4 is 240, and the total number of random numbers that will be a win is 200, so the probability of a normal symbol winning is "1/1.2". .

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, when a ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 , a fluctuating display of normal symbols is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the win is won, and after the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (the second symbol ), a symbol "○" is displayed by lighting up, and the electric accessory 140a attached to the second ball entrance 140 is opened "twice for one second". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, compared to when the probability is low for the normal symbol, the fluctuating display time is very short from 30 seconds to 3 seconds, and furthermore, the opening period of the electric accessory 140a is shortened. Since the time is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 140. In addition, in this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, the electric accessory 140a is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits. The opening time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for "3 seconds x 3 times".

The details will be described later with reference to the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 132), but in this control example, the state of the normal symbol (low probability or high probability ), the fluctuating display time of the normal symbol is determined, and depending on the state of the regular symbol (low probability or high probability) at the time when the variation of the normal symbol stops, the award will be given if the normal symbol is won. The content of the privilege, that is, the content of the opening operation of the electric accessory 140a is configured to be determined.

In other words, if the normal symbol starts to fluctuate during the high probability of the regular symbol (during the short time state), a short fluctuation time (for example, 3 seconds) is set as the fluctuation time of the regular symbol, and during that short fluctuation, the normal symbol When the state of the symbol shifts to a low probability state (transfers from a time saving state to a normal state), even if the normal symbol indicating a hit is stopped and displayed after the end of the short fluctuation, the electric accessory 140a is a normal symbol. An opening operation (for example, "0.2 seconds x 1 time") with a low probability (during normal state) is executed.

With this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that the variation of the special symbol and the variation of the normal symbol are executed separately and independently, based on the game state that can be changed depending on the lottery result of the special symbol and the number of lottery times. When the variation time of the normal symbol and the content of the bonus at the time of winning are determined, the variation time of the normal symbol is determined based on the gaming state at the time of the drawing of the regular symbol, and the content of the benefit at the time of winning the regular symbol. can be determined based on the gaming state when the fluctuation of the normal symbol stops (when the electric accessory 140a is opened), so there is no possibility that the operation content of the normal symbol and the set gaming state are different. This can be prevented from occurring.

Note that the fluctuation control of the normal symbols is not limited to the content of this control example described above, and other controls may of course be used. For example, the fluctuation time and The content of the privilege (the content of the opening operation of the electric accessory 140a) may be set. In addition, only when the normal symbol is in a high probability state (time saving state) when the normal symbol is drawn and when the variation of the normal symbol stops (when the electric accessory 140a is opened) is the normal symbol winning bonus. (Contents of the opening operation of the electric accessory 140a) may be set as a benefit (for example, "1 second x 2 times") that is advantageous to the player, or when a normal symbol is drawn and when the normal symbol stops changing. (During the opening operation of the electric accessory 140a) are both in the low probability state (normal state) of normal symbols. *1 time") may be set.

In addition, the configuration may be such that the plurality of setting methods described above are switched and executed. For example, during the variable probability state, which is a high probability state of normal symbols, the combination that is most advantageous to the player (when drawing the normal symbols) and when the fluctuation of the normal symbol stops (when the electric accessory 140a is released) are both in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol, all combinations are set in which advantageous benefits are given to the player. , during the time saving state, which is a high probability state of normal symbols, the combination is more disadvantageous to the player than during the probability variation state (when the variation of the normal symbol stops (when the electric accessory 140a is released) is the high probability state of the normal symbol. It may be configured to set a combination in which an advantageous benefit is given to the player if With this configuration, advantages and disadvantages can be further set in the high probability state of the normal symbols, and the interest of the game can be increased.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 136).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters, etc., and the main controller 110 controls the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters, etc. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. 105(a). As shown in FIG. 105(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 includes a first winning random number table 202a, a second winning random number table 202b, and a first winning type selection table 202c as part of the fixed value data described above. , a fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, a jackpot transition setting table 202e, and a state transition table 202f are stored at least.

As described above, the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 106(a)) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first winning random number counter C1 is stored. As described above, the second winning random number table 202b (see FIG. 106(b)) is a data table in which the winning determination value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored. The first winning type selection table 202c (see FIG. 107) is a data table in which the judgment value for determining the jackpot type is stored, and as described above, the judgment value of the first winning type counter C2 is It is defined in correspondence with the type. Each of these tables has already been described in detail along with the explanation of the various counters, so the explanation thereof will be omitted here.

The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode. The details of this variation pattern selection table 202d will be explained with reference to FIG. 108 and FIG. 109.

FIG. 108(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 108(a), the variation pattern selection table 202d in the first control example is a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 used to select a variation pattern when winning a jackpot regardless of the gaming state. , the winning (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is used to select a fluctuation pattern when the gaming state is a normal state (low probability state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols) and a winning is won. , a losing (probable variable) variation pattern table 202d3 used to select a variation pattern in the case of winning in a gaming state other than the normal state (probable variable state or time saving state), and a special symbol lottery. A special fluctuation pattern table 202d4 is used to select a fluctuation pattern when a special condition is satisfied regardless of the result.

First, details of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 108(b). As shown in FIG. 108(b), the range of the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 108(b), various types of normal reach with a variation time of 30 seconds are defined in association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 50", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "50 to 179". Various types of hit super reach with a variation time of 60 seconds are defined in association with the range of , and various types of special reach with a variation time of 90 seconds are defined in association with the range of variation type counter CS1 from 180 to 198. ing. In this way, when the special symbol lottery result wins a jackpot, a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds, 60 seconds, or 90 seconds is set as the variation pattern, and a command indicating this variation pattern is issued. By transmitting the audio to the lamp control device 113, a variable performance corresponding to the variable time is executed on the third symbol display device 81.

As shown in FIG. 108(b), the variation patterns (variation time) selected in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 are 60 seconds (selection rate is approximately 55%) and 30 seconds (selection rate is approximately 25%). , 90 seconds (selection rate is approximately 20%). This is related to the provisions of the fluctuation pattern table that will be referred to when the special symbol lottery result is a loss, which will be described later, and the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) selected when the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot. Based on the percentage and the percentage of the variation time (variation pattern) selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, it is possible to suggest the degree of jackpot expectation when a specific variation time (variation pattern) is selected. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not he or she has won a jackpot based on the selected variation time (variation pattern).

In this control example, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is used regardless of the jackpot type won, but this is not limited to cases where the jackpot type is a jackpot type that indicates a probability variable jackpot, and a case where the jackpot type is a jackpot type that indicates a regular jackpot. It is also possible to use a different variation pattern table depending on the jackpot type. In this case, for example, a fluctuation pattern with a shorter fluctuation time is selected in the fluctuation pattern table used when winning a jackpot type indicating a regular jackpot than a fluctuation pattern table used when winning a jackpot type indicating a probability variable jackpot. It is recommended that the configuration be configured so that it is easy to use. As a result, the longer the variation time set in the executed variation pattern, the more advantageous the player can expect a gaming result to be, making the player interested in the variation time of the special symbol. be able to.

In addition, a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is more likely to be selected in a fluctuation pattern table used when winning a jackpot type that indicates a regular jackpot than a fluctuation pattern table used when winning a jackpot type that indicates a variable jackpot. With this, if a player wins a jackpot with a short fluctuation time, it is possible to provide a surprising gaming result to the player, and even if a short fluctuation time is selected, , can keep you looking forward to the end.

Next, details of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 will be described with reference to FIG. 108(c). As shown in FIG. 108(c), the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 includes the range of the value of the variation type counter CS1 when the stop type is "completely missed" and "common reach", and the variation pattern. are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 108(c), if the stop type is "completely off" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 98", there is a short deviation with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds. The variable time is defined in correspondence with the range of "99 to 198", and the variation time is defined in correspondence with a deviation of 10 seconds. When "completely off" is selected as the stop type, the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed without being in a ready-to-reach state.

In addition, when the stop type is "common reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149", various types of normal reach with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds are defined in association with each other, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "149 to 197". Various types of super reach with a variation time of 60 seconds are defined in association with the range ``198'', and various types of special reach with a variation time of 90 seconds are defined in association with the range of "198".

Next, with reference to FIG. 108(d), details of the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 will be described. This loss (probability variable) variation pattern table 202d3 is referred to when the special symbol lottery result is a loss and the gaming state is a probability variable state (time saving state). This deviation (probable) variation pattern table 202d3 includes the value of the variation type counter CS1 when the stop type is "completely missed" or "reach common", similar to the above-mentioned variation pattern table 202d2 for missed (normal) variation. The range and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 108(d), the stop type is "completely off", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 190", and the fluctuation time is extremely short (3 seconds). are defined in association with each other, and a short variation time of 5 seconds is defined in association with the range of "191 to 198".

In addition, the stop type is "common reach", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 190", with each type of normal reach having a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, and the value is in the range of "191 to 198". Various types of super reach with a variation time of 60 seconds are defined in association with the above. In other words, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (time saving state), it is stipulated that the variable time of 90 seconds will not be selected even if the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss. Therefore, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state (time saving state) and a variable time of 90 seconds (variable pattern) is selected, this will only occur if the special symbol jackpot is won. In this case, the third symbol display device 81 executes a special performance to celebrate the jackpot. In this way, it is possible to suppress the dissatisfaction of the player due to notification of a special symbol being missed after a long-time variation pattern is executed during a variable probability state (time saving state) which is an advantageous gaming state for the player. I can do it.

As explained above, when the probability variable state (time saving state) is set as the gaming state and the winning (probable variable) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 is used, the normal state is set as the gaming state, and the winning (normal) ) Since the fluctuation time of the special symbols is set to be shorter than when the fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is used, it is possible to draw special symbols during the variable probability state (time saving state), which is a gaming state advantageous to the player. It can be done efficiently. Although a detailed explanation has been omitted, when the game state is set to the variable rate state (time saving state), the stop type is more likely to reach when the special symbol comes off than when the normal state is set. It is set so that the percentage of failures is low. Therefore, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (time saving state), the frequency of out-of-reach occurrences decreases (because it becomes difficult to execute out-of-reach fluctuations with a long fluctuation time), so the probability variable state (time saving state), which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, It is possible to more efficiently draw special symbols during the time-saving state.

Next, details of the special variation pattern table 202d4 will be explained with reference to FIG. 109. This special variation pattern table 202d4 is a variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern for 4 rotations of special symbol variation when the gaming state after the end of the jackpot becomes a probability variation state or a time saving state, and is a variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern for 4 rotations of special symbol variation, and is a variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern for 4 rotations of the special symbol variation when the gaming state after the end of the jackpot becomes a probability variation state or a time saving state. It is referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special figure variation (see FIG. 89(a)).

As shown in FIG. 109, the special fluctuation pattern table 202d4 defines fluctuation patterns in association with the number of special symbol (special symbol) fluctuations after the end of the jackpot, the lottery result of the special symbol, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. ing. Specifically, in the first to third special symbol fluctuations after the end of the jackpot, the fluctuation time is 0.5 seconds and the result is a super short miss (super Short hit) is specified.

In the fourth special symbol fluctuation after the end of the jackpot, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, the fluctuation time is stipulated to be a very short loss of 0.5 seconds regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the special symbol is If the lottery result is a win, a super short win with a variation time of 0.5 seconds is defined when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 179", and a variation time of 32 seconds is defined in the range of "180 to 198". A special win of .5 seconds is specified.

By configuring in this way, when the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is a probability change state or a time saving state, it is possible to immediately execute a change corresponding to four rotations of the special symbol. As a result, when executing a series of jackpot effects using multiple jackpot games, such as the continuous jackpot effect described above, it is possible to shorten the fluctuation period of special symbols executed between jackpot games, and The effect can be increased.

In addition, although the details will be described later, in this control example, in a state where the variable probability state or the time saving state is set as the gaming state (during consecutive game mode), a jackpot in which the variable probability state or the time saving state is set again after the end of the jackpot. The configuration is such that when a winner is won, a variation pattern is selected using the special variation pattern table 202d4. With this configuration, the special symbol variation time can be shortened by a predetermined number of times (4 times) after the end of the jackpot only in a state where the probability variation state (time saving state) is continuously executed.

As a result, for example, if the normal state is set as the gaming state and you win a jackpot (for example, jackpot A to jackpot D) in which the probability variable state or time saving state is set after the jackpot ends, that is, the jackpot ends. Later, since there is a pending memory for special symbol 1 and there is no pending memory for special symbol 2, in a state where the symbol variation of special symbol 1 is likely to be executed, the variation pattern table 202d1 for jackpot or for loss (probable variation) A variation pattern is set with reference to the variation pattern table 202d3.

On the other hand, if you win a jackpot (for example, jackpot F to jackpot K) in which the probability variable state or time saving state is set after the jackpot ends in a state where the probability variable state (time saving state) is set, that is, after the jackpot ends, In a state where the special symbol 2 is stored and the symbol variation of the special symbol 2 is likely to be executed, the special symbol variation is set to a very short variation of 0.5 seconds.

Furthermore, as shown in the special fluctuation pattern table 202d4 in FIG. 109, in this control example, in the case of winning on the fourth rotation after the end of the jackpot, a part (approximately 10%) of the fluctuation patterns corresponding to the special winning (variation time 32.5 seconds) is selected.

With this configuration, when a jackpot is won in a state where a variation pattern is selected with reference to the special variation pattern table 202d4, what is a series of jackpot productions (continuous jackpot production) that continued from the previous jackpot game? Separately, it is possible to execute a special performance to congratulate the player on consecutive jackpot wins. Therefore, various jackpot performances can be provided to the player, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in this control example, the special fluctuation pattern table 202d4 is defined so that the special winning fluctuation (32.5 seconds) is selected in a part of the fourth time when the number of fluctuations after the jackpot ends, but this is not limited to this. Alternatively, the special winning variation (32.5 seconds) may be selected even in some of the first to third variations after the end of the jackpot. In addition, the special variation pattern table 202d4 is defined so that a variation pattern in which a variation time other than 0.5 seconds is set (for example, a variation time of 10 seconds) is selected when the special symbol lottery result is a loss. Good too. With this configuration, if a fluctuation of 0.5 seconds or more is executed before the number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot reaches 4, it is possible to make the player expect to win a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play a game while being aware of the variation time of the special symbols.

Next, details of the jackpot transition setting table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 110. This jackpot transition setting table 202e is a table for specifying the gaming state to be set after the jackpot ends, and is based on the jackpot type (jackpot A to jackpot K) selected with reference to the first jackpot type selection table 202c. , state transition statuses (state transition 1 to state transition 9) are defined in association with the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot.

This jackpot transition setting table 202e is referred to (S1213) when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1211: Yes) in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 134) described later, and the selected state transition status is As a result, the gaming state is set in accordance with the specified contents defined in a state transition table 202f, which will be described later.

To specifically explain the contents of the jackpot transition setting table 202e, if the jackpot type is "jackpot A", "jackpot B", "jackpot D", "jackpot F", "jackpot G", or "jackpot H" If the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is "normal state (ST1)", "state transition 1" is set as the state transition status, "probability variable state (with high probability time saving) (ST2)", or " In the case of "time saving state (with low probability time saving) (ST3)", "state transition 2" is set as the state transition status.

When "state transition 1" is set as the state transition status, the gaming state is set based on the contents specified in the state transition 1 table 202f1 of the state transition table 202f (see FIG. 111), which will be described later, and "state transition 1" is set as the state transition status. 2" is set, the gaming state is set based on the contents defined in the state transition 2 table 202f2.

Next, if the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is "normal state (ST1)", "state transition 3" is set as the state transition status, and "probable variable state (high probability state)" is set as the state transition status. In the case of "Probability time reduction available) (ST2)" or "Time reduction state (low probability time reduction available) (ST3)", "State transition 4" is set as the state transition status, and the jackpot type is "Jackpot E". , If the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is "normal state (ST1)", "state transition 5" is set as the state transition status, "probable variable state (with high probability time saving) (ST2)" or "time saving state" (Low probability time saving available) (ST3)", "state transition 4" is set as the state transition status.

Furthermore, if the jackpot type is "jackpot H" or "jackpot J" and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is "normal state (ST1)", "state transition 6" is set as the state transition status, and " In the case of "Probable variable state (with high probability time saving) (ST2)" or "Time saving state (with low probability time saving)" (ST3), "state transition 7" is set as the state transition status, and the jackpot type is "Jackpot K". ", and if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is "normal state (ST1)", "state transition 8" is set as the state transition status, "probability variable state (with high probability time reduction) (ST2)", Alternatively, in the case of "time saving state (with low probability time saving)" (ST3), "state transition 9" is set as the state transition status.

If any of "state transition 3" to "state transition 9" is set as the state transition status, one of the state transition 3 table 202f3 to state transition 9 table 202f9 of the state transition table 202f (see FIG. 111), which will be described later. , the gaming state is set based on the contents defined in the corresponding table.

Here, the contents of the state transition table 202f will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 111(a). This state transition table 202f is a table used to transition the state status such as the gaming state and the fluctuation pattern table based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, and is a table used to transition the state status such as the gaming state and the fluctuation pattern table based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, and is a table that is used to transition the state status such as the gaming state and the fluctuation pattern table based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol. The state status is changed based on the value of . This state transition table 202f is referenced when acquiring the specified number of times counter 203j (S1214) when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending performance in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 137) (S1211: Yes), In the variation number subtraction process (see FIG. 129), when it is determined that the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is 0 (S409: Yes), it is referenced to set the next state status (S410).

FIG. 111(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the state transition table 202f in this first control example. As shown in FIG. 111(a), the state transition table 202f in this first control example is the state transition status (“state transition 1” to “state transition 9”) set using the jackpot transition setting table 202e described above. ) (“state transition 1 table 202f1” to “state transition 9 table 202f9”).

First, details of the state transition 1 table 202f1 will be described with reference to FIG. 111(b). The state transition 1 table 202f1 is a table that is referred to when "state transition 1" is set as the state transition status, and is a table that is referred to when "state transition 1" is set as the state transition status. )” is specified. That is, in a state where the state transition 1 table 202f1 is used (a state where "state transition 1" is set), the variable probability state is continuously set until the next jackpot is won.

Next, details of the state transition 2 table 202f2 will be described with reference to FIG. 111(c). The state transition 2 table 202f2 is a table that is referred to when "state transition 2" is set as the state transition status. This state transition 2 table 202f2 includes a state status "ST2a (probable variable state)" in which "4" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j, and a state status in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j. "ST2 (probable variable state)" is defined. That is, after the jackpot ends, first, "ST2a" is set as the state status until the value of the specified number of times counter 203j becomes "0", and then "ST2" is set as the state status.

Here, when "ST2a" is set as the state status, the special variation pattern table 202d4 of the variation pattern selection table 202d is set to be used when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to preset a rule for selecting a variable pattern using the special variable pattern table 202d4 only for a specific period in a state where the same gaming state (variable probability state) is continuously set. Therefore, the processing load on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

FIG. 111(d) is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the state transition 3 table 202f3. The state transition 3 table 202f3 is a table that is referred to when "state transition 3" is set as the state transition status. This state transition 3 table 202f3 includes a state status "ST3 (time saving state)" in which "100" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j, and a state status in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j. "ST1 (normal state)" is defined. In other words, after the jackpot ends, first, "ST3" is set as the state status until the value of the specified number of times counter 203j becomes "0" (the time saving state is set until the number of changes of the special symbol reaches 100 in the time saving state) , After that, "ST1 (normal state)" is set as the state status.

FIG. 111(e) is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the state transition 4 table 202f4. The state transition 4 table 202f4 is a table that is referred to when "state transition 4" is set as the state transition status. This state transition 4 table 202f4 includes a state status "ST3a (time saving state)" in which "4" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j, and a state status in which "96" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j. "ST3 (time saving state)" and a state status "ST1 (normal state)" in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j are defined. In other words, after the jackpot ends, "ST3a" is set as the state status until the value of the specified number of times counter 203j becomes "0" (until the special symbol changes 4 times), and then until the special symbol changes 96 times. "ST3 (time saving state)" is set as the state status, and then "ST1 (normal state)" is set as the state status. Thereby, when the time saving state (100 times) is set after the end of the jackpot, it is possible to select a variation pattern by referring to the special variation pattern table 202d4 only for the first four special symbol variations to be executed.

FIG. 111(f) is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the state transition 5 table 202f5. The state transition 5 table 202f5 is a table that is referred to when "state transition 5" is set as the state transition status. This state transition 5 table 202f5 defines a state status "ST1 (normal state)" in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j. That is, after the jackpot ends, a normal state is set without setting a gaming state (probability change state, time saving state) that is advantageous to the player.

FIG. 112(a) is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the state transition 6 table 202f6. The state transition 6 table 202f6 is a table that is referred to when "state transition 6" is set as the state transition status. This state transition 6 table 202f6 includes a state status "ST3 (time saving state)" in which "50" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j, and a state status in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j. "ST1 (normal state)" is defined. In other words, after the jackpot ends, first, "ST3" is set as the state status until the value of the specified number of times counter 203j becomes "0" (the time saving state is set until the number of changes of the special symbol reaches 50 in the time saving state) , After that, "ST1 (normal state)" is set as the state status.

FIG. 112(b) is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the state transition 7 table 202f7. The state transition 7 table 202f7 is a table that is referred to when "state transition 7" is set as the state transition status. This state transition 7 table 202f7 includes a state status "ST3a (time saving state)" in which "4" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j, and a state status in which "46" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j. "ST3 (time saving state)" and a state status "ST1 (normal state)" in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j are defined. In other words, after the jackpot ends, "ST3a" is set as the state status until the value of the specified number of times counter 203j becomes "0" (until the special symbol changes 4 times), and then until the special symbol changes 46 times. "ST3 (time saving state)" is set as the state status, and then "ST1 (normal state)" is set as the state status. Thereby, when the time saving state (50 times) is set after the end of the jackpot, it is possible to select a variation pattern by referring to the special variation pattern table 202d4 only for the first four special symbol variations to be executed.

FIG. 112(c) is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the state transition 8 table 202f8. The state transition 8 table 202f8 is a table that is referred to when "state transition 8" is set as the state transition status. This state transition 8 table 202f8 includes a state status "ST3 (time saving state)" in which "25" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j, and a state status in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j. "ST1 (normal state)" is defined. In other words, after the jackpot is over, first, "ST3" is set as the state status until the value of the specified number of times counter 203j becomes "0" (the time saving state is set until the number of changes of the special symbol reaches 25 in the time saving state) , After that, "ST1 (normal state)" is set as the state status.

FIG. 112(d) is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the state transition 9 table 202f9. The state transition 9 table 202f9 is a table that is referred to when "state transition 9" is set as the state transition status. This state transition 9 table 202f9 includes a state status "ST3a (time saving state)" in which "4" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j, and a state status in which "21" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j. "ST3 (time saving state)" and a state status "ST1 (normal state)" in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j are defined. In other words, after the jackpot ends, "ST3a" is set as the state status until the value of the specified number of times counter 203j becomes "0" (until the special symbol changes 4 times), and then until the special symbol changes 21 times. "ST3 (time saving state)" is set as the state status, and then "ST1 (normal state)" is set as the state status. Thereby, when the time saving state (25 times) is set after the end of the jackpot, it is possible to select a variation pattern by referring to the special variation pattern table 202d4 only for the first four special symbol variations to be executed.

As explained above, in this first control example, when a special symbol jackpot is won, based on the jackpot type of the won jackpot and the gaming state set at the time of winning the jackpot, , the game state set after the end of the jackpot and the fluctuation pattern table used for selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot can be made different. Thereby, the content of the game can be made more complex, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this control example, the period for selecting a variation pattern using the special variation pattern table 202d4 is set to 1 to 4 rotations of the special symbol variation after the end of the jackpot, but other configurations may be used, for example. The special variation pattern table 202d4 may be configured to be used in the 11th to 14th rotation after the jackpot ends, instead of the special symbol variation executed immediately after the jackpot ends. When configured in this way, the state transition table has a state status "ST3 (time saving state)" in which "10" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j, and "4" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j. The state status “ST3a (time saving state)” is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j, the state status “ST3 (time saving state)” is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j, and “0” is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j. It is preferable that the configuration is such that "ST1 (normal state)" is defined. With this configuration, the variation pattern for the 11th to 14th rotations after the end of the jackpot can be selected using the special variation pattern table.

In this way, by using the configuration of the state transition table described above, the state status that is set starting from the end of the jackpot and the number of changes (specified number of times) of the special symbol that the state status continues to be set in association with each other. By simply doing so, the game specifications can be easily set, and the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced. Further, even when changing the game specifications, it is only necessary to change the contents of the state transition table, so the game specifications can be easily changed.

Furthermore, in this first control example, when the normal state is set as the gaming state (when ST1 is set as the state status), "0" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j, and the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is always set. Although the configuration is such that the same variation pattern table (the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 or the loss (normal) variation pattern table 202d2) is referred to, the variation pattern table that can be referenced when the gaming state is the normal state is A plurality of variation pattern tables may be provided and different variation pattern tables may be referred to in correspondence with the value of the specified number of times counter 203j. In this case, for example, when the time saving end condition is satisfied (for example, the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 50) and the game state is set to the time saving state, the gaming state shifts to the normal state. (when the value of the specified number of times counter 203j becomes "0" in the state transition 6 table 202f6), the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is set to "10" in correspondence with the state status ST1.

Then, if the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is larger than "0" in a state where the state status ST1 is set, the variation pattern may be selected by referring to the special variation (normal) pattern table. With this configuration, it is possible to select a different fluctuation pattern from the usual one immediately after the gaming state shifts from the time-saving state to the normal state, so that the player is informed that the gaming state is advantageous to the player. You can make it seem like it's still going on.

In addition, in the state where the normal state is set as the gaming state, the period in which the special variation pattern table is referred to depends on the production mode of the variation production displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the output from the audio output device 226. It is preferable that the sound mode and the light emission mode output from the lamp display device 227 have a special mode corresponding to the period. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a more special feeling to the player. Further, even if a jackpot is won during a period in which a special variable pattern table is being referred to, it is preferable to perform a special performance different from the normal performance during a jackpot. Thereby, the player can be made to feel that he or she has won a jackpot during a special period, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In this first control example, a state transition table is provided corresponding to each state transition status, but a common state transition table may be used for locations where the setting contents of the state transition table are common. With this configuration, the amount of data stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

In addition, in this first control example, a configuration is used in which the referenced fluctuation pattern table is switched by varying the state status based on the value of the specified number of times counter 203j, but the state status is may be made variable. For example, while referring to the state transition 6 table 202f6, if the state status ST3 is set and the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is "40", the special symbol lottery result is a loss, but a small amount of benefits (The privilege of opening the variable prize winning device 65 for a short period of time (for example, 3 seconds)) If you win a lottery result (so-called small win) that can be awarded, the state status is changed from ST3 to ST3b, and the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is changed. is set to "4", the state status ST3b is set, and the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is larger than "0" (in the case of "1" to "4"), the fluctuation pattern table dedicated after small winning See. The variation pattern table to be referred to may be switched. With this configuration, the dedicated variation pattern can be selected only for a predetermined period after winning the small hit (a period until the special symbol changes four times).

Note that the configuration is such that when the value of the specified number of times counter 203j becomes "0" while the state status ST3b is set, the state status ST3 is set again, and the state status ST3b is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j. By configuring to set "35" by subtracting the value counted while is set, the period during which the time saving state is set as the gaming state (the period until the special symbol changes 50 times) A dedicated variation pattern can be selected and executed for a predetermined period (a period until the special symbol changes four times) based on the small win won during the time saving state without changing the pattern.

Further, although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 129, the configuration is such that the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is subtracted when the special symbol variation is executed, but other configurations may be used. For example, if the pachinko machine 10 has the above-mentioned small win as a special symbol lottery result, it may be configured to subtract the value of the specified number of times counter 203j based on the number of times the small win has been won. In this way, by switching the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to based on the lottery result of the special symbol (based on the number of times the lottery result of the special symbol has become the predetermined lottery result) instead of the number of variations of the special symbol, you can save time. Since the variation pattern table that is referred to at a timing different from the transition of the number of variations of the special symbol in the state can be varied, it is possible to provide a surprising game to the player.

Next, details of the RAM 203 will be explained with reference to FIG. 105(b). FIG. 105(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 203 of main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 105(b), the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. , special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probability change flag 203g, time saving counter 203h, state status storage area 203i, specified number of times counter 203j, and other memory area 203z. have.

The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a first winning random number counter C1 and a first winning type counter. C2, stop type selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1 are stored respectively.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas ( Among the vacant areas (first reservation area to fourth reservation area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the area with the smaller area number stores data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time, and the data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time is stored in the first pending area. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is It is shifted (moved) to the area, and a determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution area.

Note that when data is shifted from the first pending area to the execution area, the first pending area becomes vacant. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in other holding areas (holding area 2 to holding area 4) to holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 3) with one lower area number. It will be done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for holding areas (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which winning data is stored.

In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 is acquired according to the starting winning, the original special symbol is Apart from the jackpot lottery, various information that would be obtained if the original lottery was held is predicted (estimated) from each value of each of the acquired counters C1 to C3 and CS1. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is held, the various types that would be obtained if the original lottery was held based on the data corresponding to the starting winnings (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) Predicting information will hereinafter be described as pre-reading the lottery results of special symbols. Note that the various information includes validity, stop type, fluctuation pattern, and the like.

When the pre-reading is completed, a winning information command including various information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts the win/fail, stop type, and fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and stores them in the winning information storage area of the RAM 233 as winning information. 223a.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has four reserved areas (1st reserved area to 4th reserved area) like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. In this special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) corresponding to the starting winning to the second ball entrance 140 is stored.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). A second winning random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first Among the vacant areas (area to reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similar to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, data corresponding to the winnings are stored while the winning order is maintained. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a winning lottery of normal symbols is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination is made as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not.

In addition, when data is shifted from the first pending area to the execution area, the first pending area becomes vacant, so as in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, other A shift process is performed to shift the winning data stored in the holding area of 1 to the holding area with the area number one smaller. Further, data shifting is also performed only for the reservation area in which winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d displays the variable display of the special symbol 1 on the first symbol display device 37 (on the third symbol display device 81) based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning). This is a counter that counts the number of pending pitches (the number of times of waiting) up to four times. The initial value N1 of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1 increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S504 in FIG. 130). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variable display of the special symbol 1 is executed (see S210 in FIG. 127).

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e displays a variable display of the special symbol 1 performed on the first symbol display device 37 (a variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81) based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 140. ) is a counter that counts the number of balls held (number of times on standby) up to 4 times. The value N2 of this special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, has an initial value set to zero, and when a ball enters the second ball entrance 140, it becomes special. Each time the number of reserved balls of symbol 2 increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S510 in FIG. 130). On the other hand, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol 1 is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 127).

These values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reservations N1 of the variable display in the special symbol 1) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of reservations N2 of the variable display in the special symbol 2) are The audio lamp control device 113 is notified by several commands (see S206 and S211 in FIG. 127 and S505 and S511 in FIG. 130). The held ball number command is sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d and the value of the special symbol 2 held ball number counter 203e are changed. This is a command.

The audio lamp control device 113 performs main control according to the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110 every time the values of the special symbol 1 reserved balls number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved balls number counter 203e are changed. It is possible to obtain the value of the number of reserved balls in the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 reserved in the device 110. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 of the audio lamp control device 113 is held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc. Even if the number of held pitches deviates from the actual fluctuation display, the deviation can be corrected by the next received command for the number of held pitches.

The audio lamp control device 113 manages the number of balls on hold based on the number of balls on hold command, and displays the number of balls on display for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of balls on hold each time the number of balls on hold changes. Send pitch count command. The display control device 114 displays a reserved symbol in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by this display reserved pitch number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is the number of reserved balls (standby) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. This is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of this normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. (See S804 in FIG. 133). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time a new normal symbol variable display is executed (see S705 in FIG. 132).

When the ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance 67, if the value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second winning random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S805 in FIG. 133). On the other hand, if the ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance 67 and the value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing new is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. (S803 in FIG. 133: No).

The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (special symbol high probability state), and if the value of the probability variation flag 203g is on, the pachinko machine 10 Indicates that the special symbol is in a variable state. On the other hand, if the probability change flag 203g is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of special symbols (low probability state of special symbols). This probability change flag 203g is set to OFF in the initial state, and is set to ON every time the end timing of "Jackpot A, B, D, F, G, I" (Jackpot control process (see Fig. 137) ) S1212). On the other hand, the probability change flag 203g is turned off every time the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off or the start of a jackpot is set (S218 of the special symbol change process (see FIG. 127)).

When the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 128) is executed by the MPU 201, a lottery of special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 is executed. In the special symbol variation start process, the probability variation flag 203g is referred to, and if the state is on, a special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 is drawn based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability times. On the other hand, if the probability variable flag 203g is off, the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 is drawn based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability times (see S303 and S304 in FIG. 128).

In addition, in this control example, while the variable probability state is set as the gaming state, the time saving state of the normal symbols is also set. For this reason, when a winning lottery with a normal symbol is performed, the probability change flag 203g and the value of the time saving medium counter 203h are referred to, and it is determined whether or not it is in the time saving state of the normal symbol. Specifically, if the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 1 or more, or if the probability change flag 203g is on (if it is a time saving state or a probability variable state), it is determined that the time saving state is a normal symbol. A lottery for normal symbols is performed based on a random number table for normal symbols for high probability times. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 0 and the probability variable flag 203g is off (not in the time saving state or the probability variable state), the normal symbol is selected based on the random number table per normal symbol for low probability times. A lottery is held (see S709 and S710 in FIG. 132).

The time saving medium counter 203h is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state with normal symbols. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state with normal symbols. If the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with normal symbols. The initial value of this time saving medium counter 203h is set to 0, and when a special symbol jackpot is won in the main controller 110, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set at the end of the jackpot (S1212 in FIG. 137). ). Specifically, when the jackpot type is "jackpot C", "100" is set as the value of the time saving counter 203h at the end of the jackpot, and in the case of "jackpot H, J", at the end of the jackpot. "50" is set as the value of the time saving medium counter 203h, and in the case of "Jackpot K", "25" is set as the value of the time saving medium counter 203h at the end of the jackpot.

In addition, when the jackpot type is "Jackpot E", the value of the time saving medium counter 203h set at the end of the jackpot is set to differ depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, If the gaming state is a time saving state (low probability time saving) or a variable probability state (high probability time saving), "100" is set as the value of the time saving medium counter 203h, and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state ( (low probability, no time saving), the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is not set.

Thereafter, 1 is subtracted every time the variable display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is completed until the value of the time saving counter 203h becomes 0 (S402 in FIG. 129). Further, even if the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 or more, if the jackpot is won, the value is reset to 0 (S218 in FIG. 127).

When a normal symbol winning lottery is held, the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, a normal symbol lottery is performed based on the random number table for normal symbols for high probability times. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 0 and the probability change flag 203g described later is off, a normal symbol lottery is performed based on a random number table per normal symbol for low probability times. (See S709 and S710 in FIG. 132).

The state status storage area 203i is a storage area for storing information on the current state status (ST) set by the state transition table 202f. In this state status storage area 203i, when it is determined in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 137) that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1211: Yes), that is, at the end of the jackpot, the acquired state status is stored. After that, in the variation frequency subtraction process (see FIG. 129), if the value of the specified frequency counter 203j, which is subtracted every time the special symbol changes, becomes 0 (S409: Yes), the newly set State status is stored.

The specified number of times counter 203j is a counter for measuring that the number of changes of the special symbol has reached the specified number of times. This prescribed number of times counter 203j corresponds to the acquired prescribed number of times when it is determined in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 137) that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1211: Yes), that is, at the end of the jackpot. A value is set (S1213), and thereafter, in the variation number subtraction process (see FIG. 129), it is subtracted every time the special symbol changes (S407). When the value of the specified number of times counter 203j changes from "1" to "0", a new state status is set based on the contents specified in the corresponding state transition table 202f.

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

Next, details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 119. FIG. 114(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 114(a), the ROM 222 includes a fluctuation pattern table 222a, a pending rank selection table 222b, a jackpot performance selection table 222c, an add-on number selection table 222d, a continuous performance mode selection table 222e, and a continuous performance mode selection table 222e. It has at least a value main selection table 222f, a continuation value sub-selection table 222g, a final mode selection table 222h, an expectation selection table 222i, and an expectation performance selection table 222j.

The variation pattern table 222a is referred to in order to select detailed aspects of the variation effect (fluctuating display) based on the rough aspect of the variation effect (fluctuating display) notified by the variation pattern command from the main controller 110. It's a table. A display variation pattern command is set based on the variation effect mode selected from this variation pattern table 222a (see S3812 in FIG. 147).

The rank pending selection table 222b is a table for selecting a pending rank based on the pending status of the special symbol, and a jackpot performance is determined based on the selected pending rank. Here, details of this reservation rank selection table 222b will be explained with reference to FIG. 115(b).

FIG. 115(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the reservation rank selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 115(b), this reservation rank selection table 222b shows the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2 (the number of reserved balls of special symbol) and whether there is winning information indicating a jackpot for the reserved balls of special symbol 2. A suspension rank is defined in association with the result of the determination. With this configuration, it is possible to determine the performance executed during the jackpot based on the variation result (lottery result) of the special symbol (special symbol 2) executed after the jackpot ends.

Here, in this control example, when both the reserved balls of special symbol 1 and the reserved balls of special symbol 2 exist, a process is executed to give priority to the reserved balls of special symbol 2 (see FIG. 127). ). In other words, the timing at which the reserved ball of special symbol 1 is consumed is indefinite.

Therefore, in this control example, based on the reserved balls of the special symbol 2 that fluctuate preferentially after the end of the jackpot (the reserved balls whose fluctuation order is fixed after the end of the jackpot) and the winning information included in the reserved balls of the special symbol 2. The system is configured such that a reserved rank is selected based on a jackpot effect based on a special symbol variation result (lottery result) executed after a jackpot ends.

In addition, when there are both the reserved balls of special symbol 1 and the reserved balls of special symbol 2, the reserved balls are placed in the order in which they were reserved (the order in which the balls entered the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 140). In the case of a pachinko machine 10 that uses a configuration in which balls are played (so-called, played in the order of winning), the number of balls held in the special symbol 2 is not the number of balls held, but the number of balls held in the special symbol 2 is not the number of balls held in the special pattern 2, but the number of balls held in the special symbol 2 is not limited to the number of balls held in the special symbol 2. The configuration may be such that the reserved rank is selected as the target. Thereby, it is possible to execute a jackpot performance based on the special symbol variation result (lottery result) that is executed after the jackpot ends.

Referring to FIG. 115(b), the contents of the reservation rank selection table 222b will be explained in detail. The number of reserved balls of the special symbol (special symbol 2) is "1 to 3", and a hit is indicated therein. If there is winning information, the pending rank "3" is selected, and if there is no winning information indicating a win, the pending rank "2" is selected.

In addition, if the number of reservations for the special symbol (special symbol 2) is "4" and there is winning information indicating a win among them, the reservation rank "4" is selected, and there is no winning information indicating a win. ”, the reservation rank “1” is selected. In addition, when the number of reservations of the special symbol (special symbol 2) is "0", the reservation rank "1" is selected without using the reservation rank selection table 222b.

The pending rank selected with reference to the pending rank selection table 222b is referred to in the jackpot performance selection table 222c, which will be described later. Next, the jackpot performance selection table 222c will be explained with reference to FIG. 115(c). This jackpot performance selection table 222c is a table for selecting a performance to be executed during a jackpot, and when an opening command is received in the winning-related command processing (see FIG. 142) (S3301: Yes), the jackpot performance is It is referenced when executing the setting process (see FIG. 143) (S3406).

In this jackpot performance selection table 222c, a jackpot performance is defined in association with the pending rank selected in the pending rank selection table 222b and the first performance counter 223y1. Specifically, when the pending rank is "1" and the value of the first performance counter 223y1 is in the range of "0 to 99", a "normal winning performance" is defined. This "normal winning performance" is a performance that is completed during one jackpot game (see FIG. 83(b)), and a performance corresponding to the jackpot type of the jackpot to be executed is executed.

When the rank reservation is "1" and the value of the first performance counter 223y1 is in the range of "100 to 149", "additional performance" is defined. As described above in FIG. 83(a), this "additional effect" partially displays the number of round games to be executed in one jackpot (for example, in the case of 15 rounds, This is an effect that displays the remaining number of rounds (the number of rounds that are not displayed) as the jackpot game progresses.

If an "additional effect" is executed during a jackpot, it can be made difficult for the player to understand which round of the jackpot currently being executed, and the player can be made to pay close attention to the effect during the jackpot game. . Furthermore, the "additional effect" of this first control example is such that when multiple jackpots are won in a short period of time (the winning information (pending symbols) acquired at the end of the previous jackpot includes the next jackpot) case), the number of rounds of the next jackpot is added to the number of rounds of the previous jackpot, so that the number of rounds of the next jackpot is executed over a plurality of jackpots.

With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know how many times he has won the jackpot while the "top-up performance" is being executed. Therefore, the "additional performance" allows the player to play the game while enjoying seeing how many rounds in total will be displayed.

Furthermore, in the "additional effect" of this control example, the number of rounds executed in one jackpot can be divided and displayed, and the number of rounds executed in multiple jackpots can be displayed in total. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the number of jackpots won while one "top-up performance" is being executed and the number of rounds executed for each jackpot. As a result, for example, if the number of rounds executed during one jackpot is 15 rounds, in the pachinko machine 10 where the variable probability state is always set as the game state after the jackpot ends, it is possible to win a jackpot of 15 rounds. This makes it difficult to understand, and allows the player to play the game while predicting which gaming state will be set after the jackpot ends.

In addition, when using a production that suggests a gaming state that will be set after the jackpot ends as a production that is executed during a jackpot, the display that is executed during one jackpot before the result of that production is displayed. By knowing the number of rounds to be played, it is possible to prevent a situation where the game state that is set after the end of the jackpot is specified and the performance effect is reduced.

Next, when the pending rank is "2" and the value of the first performance counter 223y1 is in the range of "0 to 49", a "normal winning performance" is defined, and the value of the first performance counter 223y1 is in the range of "0 to 49". “Additional effects” are defined in the range “50 to 149”. When the rank pending is "3" and the value of the first performance counter 223y1 is in the range of "0 to 49", a "normal winning performance" is defined, and when the value of the first performance counter 223y1 is "50 to 49", a "normal winning performance" is defined. In the range of ``99'', an ``additional effect'' is defined, and in the range where the value of the first effect counter 223y1 is ``100 to 149'', a ``continuous winning effect'' is defined.

As described above with reference to FIG. 84, this "continuous win performance" is a performance that notifies the player that he or she has won multiple jackpots at the time when the previous (first) jackpot game starts. (see FIG. 84). The "consecutive winning performance" executed here is, for example, the sum of the number of rounds for the first jackpot (for example, 15 rounds) and the number of rounds for the second jackpot (for example, 10 rounds) (for example, 25 rounds). round), the effect announced at the time when one jackpot game is started (the first round of the first jackpot is started) is executed.

By executing the "consecutive winning effect" in this way, it is possible to notify the player early that he or she has won multiple jackpots, and allows the player to play jackpot games with peace of mind while giving the player a sense of superiority. can be set.

When the pending rank is "4" and the value of the first performance counter 223y1 is in the range of "0 to 49", "normal winning performance" is defined, and in the range of "50 to 149", "Continuous winning performance" is stipulated.

As explained above, in this control example, a different performance (during jackpot performance) is executed during a jackpot based on the selected pending rank and the acquired value of the first performance counter 223y1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the effects performed during the jackpot.

Furthermore, depending on the selected jackpot performance, the timing at which the player is notified that the next jackpot is on hold is different, so for example, at the timing when the previous jackpot game ends, the next jackpot Compared to a pachinko machine that notifies you of the presence or absence of a pending symbol that will win a jackpot (presence or absence of a pending consecutive symbol), compared to a case where the presence or absence of a pending consecutive symbol is announced only at a specific timing, it is more likely that the next jackpot will be won. It is possible to execute a jackpot game while creating expectations, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, since the content and proportion of the jackpot effects selected according to the pending rank are different, it is possible to suppress players from having excessive expectations, and also to prevent players from having excessive expectations during jackpot games. It is possible to execute a performance that takes into consideration the pre-reading result of the ball that won 140, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Specifically, if the pending rank is "1", that is, if the number of pending symbols is the upper limit when winning a jackpot, and there is no winning information corresponding to the jackpot among the pending symbols, the pending rank is "1". Since the win is never executed, either the normal winning performance or the additional performance is specified to be selected, and the selection ratio is specified so that the normal winning performance is more likely to be selected. In other words, if the pending rank is "1" at the time of winning the jackpot, the "normal winning performance" that does not make the player have excessive expectations for the pending consecutive games, or this One of the "additional effects" that makes it difficult to understand which round the jackpot is a jackpot is executed.

If the pending rank is "2", that is, the number of pending symbols is not the upper limit when winning a jackpot, and there is no winning information corresponding to the jackpot among the pending symbols, unlike the pending rank "1", There is a possibility of acquiring new pending symbols during the jackpot game. Therefore, even if the pending consecutive games are not confirmed at the time of winning a jackpot, in order to cope with the case where the pending consecutive games are confirmed during the jackpot game, the "Additional The proportion of people who select "Direction" is set to be high. As a result, when a reserved symbol that wins a jackpot is obtained during a jackpot game, the player can be notified of this by means of an "additional performance."

If the pending rank is "3", that is, the number of pending symbols is not at the upper limit when winning a jackpot, and if there is winning information corresponding to the jackpot within the pending symbol, that is, the pending symbol is not at the upper limit and is within the pending limit. If a jackpot game is executed with the consecutive winnings confirmed, in addition to the above-mentioned "normal winning performance" and "additional winning performance", it is possible to notify early that the pending consecutive winnings are confirmed. If the pending rank is "4", that is, if the pending symbol is the upper limit and there is winning information corresponding to a jackpot in the pending symbol, the "regular winning effect" will be selected. It stipulates that either one of the following is selected: "Representation for winning" or "Representation for continuous winning."

In other words, among the reservation ranks "3" and "4" where consecutive games within the reservation have already been determined, the reservation rank "3" is in a state where it is possible to acquire a new reservation ball (winning information) during the jackpot game. Therefore, by making the "additional performance" selectable, it is possible to make the player think that he or she has won the next jackpot due to the reserved balls (winning information) obtained during the jackpot game.

On the other hand, in the case of reservation rank "4", it is not possible to acquire a new reservation ball (winning information) during a jackpot game, and there is no possibility of winning the next jackpot during a jackpot game. ``Performance'' is not selected and the ``continuous winning performance'' is executed. With this configuration, the result of determining whether the number of reserved balls at the time of winning the jackpot is at the upper limit and in other cases, that is, whether or not it is possible to acquire new reserved balls during the jackpot game. By differentiating the performance options to be executed during a jackpot based on this, it is possible to prevent a performance that feels unnatural from being performed with respect to the actual hold situation.

In addition, in this control example, no matter which pending rank is selected, it is specified that the "normal winning effect" is selected, so even if the "normal winning effect" is executed. Even if there is, there is still the possibility of a pending marriage. Therefore, it is possible to have the player execute the jackpot game until the end while making the player expect a series of games on hold.

Next, the additional number selection table 222d will be explained with reference to FIG. 116(a). This add-on number selection table 222d is a confirmed round number display mode Dm4 that is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 when the "add-on effect" is selected as the effect executed during a jackpot. This is a table for selecting a value (additional round number) to be added to (see FIG. 86(a)).

This additional number selection table 222d is displayed when a new round number command is received (S3304: Yes) in the win-related command processing (see FIG. 142), and when the additional effect flag 223h is set to on ( S3306: Yes) is referred to in a part of the processing during additional production (see FIG. 144) (S3506). The selected additional number is stored in an area of the display round number storage area 223g that stores a value to be added to the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 (S3506).

Then, the value displayed in the running round number display mode Dm3 (the number of jackpot rounds currently being executed) and the value displayed on the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 (the number of rounds that are confirmed to be executed) are If they are the same, the additional number stored in the display round number storage area 223g is displayed in the round number display mode Dm10 (see FIG. 86(a)).

As shown in FIG. 116(a), this additional number selection table 222d includes the number of remaining rounds of the jackpot, the presence or absence of a winning prize (whether or not the consecutive winnings within the reservation are confirmed), and the second production counter 223y2. The number of additions is defined in association with the . Specifically, when the value of the number of remaining rounds is "5", "5" is selected as the additional number regardless of whether there is a winning prize or not and the value of the second performance counter 223y2.

In this first control example, the number of rounds of all jackpots (the number of rounds of jackpots in which the jackpot effect is executed) is set to a multiple of 5 (5 rounds, 10 rounds, 15 rounds), and the remaining number of rounds is 5. This is because, in the case of a round, it is necessary to display the remaining round number in the final round number display mode Dm4 at this timing.

If the value of the number of remaining rounds is "10, 15", the winning is "yes", and the value of the second performance counter 223y2 is in the range of "0 to 49", the additional number "5" is added, and the value of "50 to 99" is The range is defined as the number of additions "10", the range of "100 to 149" is defined as the number of additions "15", the value of the number of remaining rounds is "10, 15", the winning prize is "none", and the second If the value of the production counter 223y2 is in the range of "0 to 49", the number of additions is "5", if it is in the range of "50 to 99", the number of additions is "15", and if it is in the range of "100 to 149", the number of additions is "5". 10'' is specified.

As described above, when the number of remaining rounds is the same (for example, "15"), the ratio of the selected additional number is specified to differ depending on whether or not there is a winning prize. Thereby, it becomes possible for the player to predict whether there will be consecutive games on hold based on the value added during the "additional performance", and the performance effect can be enhanced.

If the value of the number of remaining rounds is "20~", the winning is "yes", and the value of the second performance counter 223y2 is in the range of "0 to 49", the additional number "5" is in the range of "50 to 99". For the range of "100 to 149", the number of additions is "15". In addition, in this first control example, since the maximum value of the number of jackpot rounds executed in one jackpot game is set to "15 rounds", the value of the number of remaining rounds is "20 ~", The number of winnings will never be "none". Therefore, if the value of the number of remaining rounds is "20~" and the winning amount is "none", the additional number "-" is specified, and if selected, an error command is set. .

Here, if an error command is set, that is, if the remaining number of rounds to be actually executed differs from the remaining number of rounds managed by the audio lamp control device 113, the additional production will continue. If this is the case, there is a high possibility that an effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort will be executed. It is preferable to start executing an effect that displays the number of rounds set for the currently executed jackpot and the number of rounds currently executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a jackpot performance that gives the player a sense of discomfort is continuously executed.

Next, the continuous performance mode selection table 222e will be explained with reference to FIG. 116(b). FIG. 116(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous performance mode selection table 222e. This continuous performance mode selection table 222e selects the performance modes (refer to FIG. 90) that are executed during the probability change and time reduction of the pachinko machine 10 of this control example (see FIG. 90) until the battle reach (final mode) is executed. This is a table for selecting a continuous performance mode for setting the pre-battle performance performance mode), and is referred to in the continuous performance setting process (S3806) of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) (S4005 in FIG. 149). ), the continuous performance mode selected in the process of S4005 is stored in the continuous performance mode storage area 223m (S4006). Then, the performance mode of the pre-battle performance is set based on the continuous performance mode stored in the continuous performance mode storage area 223m.

As shown in FIG. 116(b), this continuous performance mode selection table 222e includes the value of a continuous performance setting counter 223q, which will be described later, and the presence or absence of a winning prize (whether or not a consecutive game on hold has been determined), Different continuous performance modes are defined in association with the value of the third performance counter 223y3.

Here, the continuous performance setting counter 223q is a counter for counting the number of times a continuous performance is set in one variable probability state or time saving state, and when the variable probability state or time saving state continues for a long period of time, the battle Used to determine whether the performance has been executed multiple times. The detailed contents of the continuous performance setting counter 223q will be described later with reference to FIG. 114(b).

To specifically explain the contents stipulated in the continuous performance mode selection table 222e, when the value of the continuous performance setting counter 223q is "1" and the pending information (winning information) is set to "Yes". Therefore, when the value of the third performance counter 223y3 is in the range of "0 to 99", the continuous performance mode "1" is defined, and when the value of the third performance counter 223y3 is in the range of "100 to 149", the continuous performance mode "2" is defined. There is.

On the other hand, if the value of the continuous performance setting counter 223q is "1" and the pending information (winning information) is "yes", the continuous performance mode "5" is set regardless of the value of the third performance counter 223y3. stipulated. A pattern that corresponds to this continuous performance mode "5" is when a jackpot is won on the first spin in which the battle performance is executed for the first time after the jackpot ends, and in order to provide a special feeling to the player. A dedicated continuous production mode is set for.

Next, if the value of the continuous performance setting counter 223q is "2 to 5" and the pending information (winning information) is "none", the value of the third performance counter 223y3 is in the range of "0 to 99". The continuous performance mode "2" is defined, and the continuous performance mode "3" is defined for the range of "100 to 149", and if the pending information (winning information) indicates that there is a win, the third performance counter 223y3 Continuous performance mode "2" is defined in the range of "0 to 99", and continuous performance mode "1" is defined in the range of "100 to 149".

Then, if the value of the continuous performance setting counter 223q is "6 or more" and the pending information (winning information) is "none", the value of the third performance counter 223y3 is in the range of "0 to 99". Mode "3" is defined, continuous performance mode "4" is defined in the range of "100 to 149", and if the pending information (winning information) is "yes", the value of the third performance counter 223y3 Continuous performance mode "4" is defined in the range of "0 to 99", and continuous performance mode "3" is defined in the range of "100 to 149".

In this control example, the performance mode of the pre-battle performance is set based on the continuous performance mode selected with reference to the continuous performance mode selection table 222e. For example, the pre-battle performance (see FIG. 91) ), the production mode related to the display mode during battle reach development, such as the type of your own character, the type and order of the opponent characters displayed for selection, the type and HP value of the opponent character actually selected, A performance mode that is not related to the display mode during the development of a battle reach, such as the type and color of the background displayed during the pre-battle performance, and an attack pattern for the opponent character, is set based on the selected continuous performance mode.

For example, if continuous performance mode "5" is selected (that is, when the first battle performance is executed and there is a pending winning prize), the player is notified that he or she will soon win a jackpot. The presentation mode for this purpose is set. Specifically, you can set the premium character that is set when there is winning information for winning a jackpot as your own or your opponent's character, or set a specific value as the initial value or progress value of the opponent character's HP value. (for example, "777" or "333"), or display all the same characters as a combination of selectable opponent characters. By performing such a display, it is possible to suggest to the player that he or she will win a jackpot using a plurality of variable periods.

Next, the contents of the continuation value main selection table 222f will be explained with reference to FIG. 117(a). FIG. 117(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuation value main selection table 222f. Here, the continuation value in this control example will be explained. In this control example, when the game state is set to a game state that is advantageous to the player (variable probability state or time saving state), a battle performance is executed as a continuous performance to show that the game state is continuing. be done.

This battle performance includes a battle reach (final mode) performance to indicate whether or not an advantageous game state will end, and a pre-battle performance that continues until the battle reach is executed. If the advantageous game state does not end as a result of the battle reach performance, the pre-battle performance is executed again.

During the pre-battle performance, the third symbol display device 81 executes a performance that reduces the opponent's HP value (continuation value) as described above with reference to FIG. Based on the continuation value decreased during this pre-battle performance, the presentation mode of the battle reach (opponent's HP (continuation value) at the start of the battle reach) is determined.

In this first control example, the continuation value to be reduced during this pre-battle performance is determined by adding up the value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f and the value selected by the continuation value sub-selection table 222g. It is configured to be calculated. By setting the continuation value to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by combining a plurality of values in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing load when increasing the variation of the continuation value.

Returning to FIG. 117(a), the explanation will be continued. In the continuation value main selection table 222f, based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the result of determining the number of remaining variations until the variation of the special symbol that wins the jackpot is executed, and the currently displayed A continuation value to be selected in association with a continuation value is defined.

That is, in the continuation value main selection table 222f, it is specified that the continuation value is selected based on the lottery result of the special symbol. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the battle reach performance is executed by taking over the opponent's HP (continuation value) that is changed during the pre-battle performance.

Note that if the contents of the continuation value main selection table 222f are set to be more complex in order to increase the variation of the continuation value increase/decrease display executed during the pre-battle performance, for example, in this control example, The continuous value is managed in units of , but it is also possible to manage the continuous value in smaller units (units of 10), or to subdivide the lottery results of special symbols and use the results of each subdivided lottery result. When defining continuation values in association with each other, there is a problem in that the processing load for selecting continuation values becomes high. However, in order to enhance the effect of the pre-battle presentation, it was necessary to increase the variation in displaying increases and decreases in the continuation value.

Therefore, in this control example, when a continuation value is selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f, the continuation value sub-selection table 222g, which is a table independent from the continuation value main selection table 222f, is used to select the continuation value main selection table 222f. The continuation value selected in the selection table 222f is configured to be further varied. Thereby, variations in the continuation value displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

Further, although details will be described later, in this first control example, the continuation value is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 based on the difference value of the continuation value selected using the continuation value main selection table 222f. The configuration is such that a performance mode of a performance (attack performance) that reduces (HP value) is set. Then, in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the continuation value selected using the continuation value main selection table 222f and the continuation value sub-selection table 222g is displayed as the continuation value after reduction (updated). It is configured as follows.

Then, the attack effect managed by the value (continuation value) selected with reference to the continuation value main selection table 222f, and the continuation value (continuation value) set with reference to the continuation value main selection table 222f and the continuation value sub-selection table 222g. The range of values to be selected in the continuation value sub-selection table 222g is set so that the difference value of the HP value) does not differ.

With this configuration, the performance mode of the performance (attack performance) that reduces the continuation value (HP value) in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f. Even if management is performed using only a rough continuation value, the performance can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Specifically, the attack performance that is set based on the difference value of the continuation value selected using the continuation value main selection table 222f is a "weak attack" if the difference value is "0 to 200" (Fig. 92 (refer to (a))), if the value is “201 to 400”, the effect corresponding to “medium attack” is executed, and if it is “401 or more”, the effect corresponding to “heavy attack (refer to Fig. 92(b))” is executed. Ru.

As a result, for example, even though the difference value of the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f is in the range of "medium attack" (for example, 300), the difference value of the continuation value displayed is "weak attack". It is possible to prevent the continuation value range based on the special symbol lottery from being different from the continuation value range actually displayed.

As shown in FIG. 117(a), the continuation value main selection table 222f includes the number of remaining fluctuations until the winning fluctuation and the previously selected continuation value (among the currently displayed continuation values, the continuation value main selection table 222f A continuation value is defined in association with the value selected in . Specifically, if the value of the residual fluctuation counter 222t is "3" and the previously selected continuation value is "1000", "800" is selected, and if it is "900", "700" is selected. A value with a difference value of "200" is selected so that the difference value is "200". Similarly, if the previously selected continuation value is "400" to "800", the value whose difference value is "200" is selected. If the last selected continuation value is "300", "200" is selected (difference value "100"), and if the last selected continuation value is "100" or "200", the difference value is " 0" is selected.

Next, when the value of the residual fluctuation counter 222t is "2", if the last selected continuation value is "300" to "700", the value whose difference value is "100" is selected, and If the selected continuation value is "100" or "200", a value with a difference value of "0" is selected. If the value of the residual variation counter 222t is "1", that is, if the next variation is a winning variation, if the last selected continuation value is "300" to "700", the difference value is "200". If the value selected last time is "200", the value whose difference value is "0" ("200") is selected, and if the value selected last time is "100", the value ("200") is selected. , the value "0" for which the difference value is "100" is selected.

As explained above, in this control example, based on the continuous value main selection table 222f, among the continuous values (HP values) displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the The continuous value displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is (HP value), that is, rather than setting the performance mode of the attack performance based on the continuous value (HP value) selected using the continuous value main selection table 222f and the continuous value sub selection table 222g, The number of patterns can be reduced, and the processing load when setting effects can be reduced.

Next, the contents of the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 and the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2 used as the continuation value sub-selection table 222g will be explained with reference to FIGS. 117(b) and (c). FIG. 117(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the first continuous value sub-selection table 222g1, and FIG. 117(c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the second continuous value sub-selection table 222g2. It is a diagram.

As mentioned above, the continuation value sub-selection table 222g is used to increase the variable pattern of continuation values during the continuation performance, and is referred to after the continuation value is selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f. This is a table that In this control example, the continuation value displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is added to the continuation value selected using the continuation value main selection table 222f and the value selected in the continuation value sub-selection table 222g. (continuation value for presentation) is set.

In this control example, it is determined whether the selected continuation value is less than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, 200) by referring to the continuation value main selection table 222f, and a different continuation value sub-selection table 222g is selected based on the determination result. If the continuation value selected by referring to the continuation value main selection table 222f is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, 200), the first continuation value secondary shown in FIG. 117(b) is The selection table 222g1 is referred to, and if it is less than a predetermined value (for example, 200), the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2 shown in FIG. 117(c) is referred to.

In the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 shown in FIG. 117(b), continuation values are defined in association with the values of the fourth performance counter 223y4. Specifically, when the value of the fourth performance counter 223y4 is in the range of "0 to 39", the continuation value "0" is selected, and in the range of "40 to 79", the continuation value "-10" is selected, In the range of "80 to 119", the continuation value "-20" is selected, and in the range of "120 to 149", the continuation value of "+20" is selected.

Thereby, the continuation value selected using the continuation value main selection table 222f is added to the continuation value selected using the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1, and the types of continuation values on the display are increased. I can do it. Specifically, when decreasing (updating) the continuation value from "1000" to "800" with reference to the continuation value main selection table 222f, the selected continuation value ("800") is changed to a predetermined value ( For example, since the number is 200) or more, the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 is referred to. When the value “+20” is selected in the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1, “820” is displayed as the continuation value (HP value) in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 ( (See FIG. 92(a)). On the other hand, if the value "-20" is selected in the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1, "780" is displayed as the continuation value (HP value).

In this way, by adding the value selected in the continuation value sub-selection table 222g to the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f, the continuation displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 Variations in values (HP values) can be increased.

Here, when the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f becomes a predetermined value (for example, 200) or less, the continuation value on the display ( HP value), the value of "+20" will be selected in the first continuous value sub-selection table 222g1 while "0" is selected as the continuous value in the continuous value main selection table 222f. However, there was a problem in that while the attack performance was to reduce the HP value of the opponent character to "0", the continuous value (HP value) on the display was "20".

Therefore, in this control example, it is determined whether the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f is less than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, 200), and if it is determined that it is less than or equal to the predetermined value, the second continuation value is It is configured to refer to the sub-selection table 222g2. In this second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2, as shown in FIG. 117(c), a range of "-20" to "0" is defined as a value to be selected.

In the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 shown in FIG. 117(b), continuation values are defined in association with the values of the fourth performance counter 223y4. Specifically, when the value of the fourth performance counter 223y4 is in the range of "0 to 39", the continuation value "0" is selected, and in the range of "40 to 99", the continuation value "-5" is selected, In the range of "100 to 149", the continuation value "-10" is selected.

Here, the differences between the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 and the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2 described above will be explained. The first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 includes a value to which the continuation value (for example, 500) selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f is added (“+20”) and a value to be subtracted (“- 10'', ``-20'') can be selected. On the other hand, the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2 has values ("-5", "-10") from which the continuation value (for example, 100) selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f is subtracted as values that can be selected. ) is selected.

With this configuration, when the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f is larger than a predetermined value (for example, 200), the range of the continuation value (HP value) to be displayed can be set to be wide. If the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f is less than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, 200), the displayed continuation value (HP value) is set within a range that does not make the player feel uncomfortable. Therefore, variations in performance can be increased within a range that does not give players a sense of discomfort.

In addition to the contents of the first control example described above, there is also a storage means for storing the value selected by the first continuous value sub-selection table 222g1, and it is determined whether the value stored in the storage means is a positive value or a negative value. a determining means for determining which of the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 and the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2 should be used to select a value, based on the determination result of the discriminating means; may be provided. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the values selected by the continuation value sub-selection table 222g from being biased toward the positive direction or the negative direction.

As described above, in this first control example, a configuration is used in which the mode of attack production is selected based on the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f, but other configurations may be used. For example, when the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f is less than a predetermined value (for example, 200), the continuation value (HP value) actually displayed on the display screen and the continuation value main selection table 222f and a calculation means for calculating the difference value between the continuation value (HP value) set based on the continuation value sub-selection table 222g, and a selection for selecting the mode of attack production based on the difference value calculated by the calculation means. A configuration using means and.

In this first control example, the audio lamp control device 113 has the continuation value sub-selection table 222g, but other configurations may be used. For example, the audio lamp control device 113 includes the continuation value main selection table 222f may be provided and the continuation value sub-selection table 222g may be provided on the display control device 114 side, or the display control device 114 may perform the process of selecting the mode of attack production. With this configuration, the audio lamp control device 113 only needs to manage the update of the continuation value using the continuation value main selection table 222f, and the processing load can be further reduced.

In addition, in this first control example, the continuation value is determined using the continuation value main selection table 222f or the continuation value sub-selection table 222g, which is executed when there is winning information corresponding to a jackpot as a result of pre-reading of pending symbols. In addition to the setting, ie, even when there is no winning information corresponding to a jackpot as a result of pre-reading of reserved symbols, a process of varying the continuation value in terms of effect is executed. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, this continuous value variable process for the performance is variable depending on the period during which the continuous performance (pre-battle performance) is continuously executed and the type of fluctuation pattern command sent from the main control device 110. The later continuation value is configured to be selected.

With this configuration, while the continuous effect (pre-battle effect) is being executed, the effect that reduces the continuation value can be executed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the content of the effect. can do.

In addition, in this first control example, as a continuous performance (pre-battle performance), the continuous values of 4 bodies (A to D) are displayed as possible opponents at the time of battle reach (see FIG. 91(a)). For example, even if the continuation value (HP) of a specific opponent is greatly reduced in the continuous performance (pre-battle performance), the continuous performance (pre-battle performance) can be continued by selecting another opponent. and can be executed.

With this configuration, when the continuous performance (pre-battle performance) is executed for a long period of time (for example, when there is no winning during the probability change), only the continuous value continues to decrease. It is possible to prevent the performance aspect of the battle reach performance from becoming poor.

In addition, in this first control example, in order to prevent the pre-battle performance from continuing for a long period of time, even if the special symbol has not been won, it is necessary to set a predetermined condition (for example, if the special symbol is 10 If the pre-battle performance continues while the fluctuation occurs more than once, and the special symbol lottery result is a 60-second out-of-flight fluctuation pattern), the battle reach is executed. If the winning result has not been won, the continuation performance (second time) is executed again, and the continuation value is initialized. As a result, when the continuous performance (pre-battle performance) is executed for a long period of time (for example, when there is no winning during the probability change), only the continuous value continues to decrease. It is possible to prevent the performance aspect of the battle reach performance from becoming poor.

Next, the final mode selection table 222h will be explained with reference to FIG. 118(a). This final mode selection table 222h is a table for selecting the production mode of the battle reach executed during the above-mentioned continuous production, and includes the judgment result of the special symbol variation in which the battle reach is executed and the fifth production. Different final modes are defined in association with the value of the counter 223y5.

Specifically, if the result of the judgment of the special symbol is a jackpot, and the player is given an advantageous gaming state (probability variable state or time saving state) after the jackpot ends, the value of the fifth performance counter 223y5 is Final aspect "1" is defined in the range of "0-49", final aspect "2" is defined in the range of "50-129", and final aspect "3" is defined in the range of "130-149".

If the judgment result of the special symbol is a jackpot and the player is not given an advantageous gaming state after the jackpot ends, the value of the fifth production counter 223y5 is in the range of "0 to 129" and the final mode is "4". However, if the final mode "5" is defined in the range of "130 to 149" and the result of the judgment of the special symbol is incorrect, the value of the fifth performance counter 223y5 is set to the final mode "5" in the range of "0 to 129". The final aspect “7” is defined in the range “130 to 149”.

In addition, in the case of a special symbol variation in which the validity judgment result of the special symbol is incorrect and the time-saving end condition is satisfied, the final mode "4" is set when the value of the fifth production counter 223y5 is in the range of "0 to 129". The final aspect "5" is defined in the range "130-149".

Here, the presentation contents of each final mode selected using the final mode selection table 222h will be explained with reference to FIG. 118(b). FIG. 118(b) is a diagram illustrating the presentation contents of each final mode selected using the final mode selection table 222h. In this control example, as described above with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96, as the final aspect of the battle performance (battle reach), a performance is executed in which either the main character or the opponent character attacks three times in total. Different attack patterns are selected depending on the selected final mode.

Specifically, in final modes "1" to "3", attack patterns are selected in which a winning battle is executed in which the main character wins, and in the case of final mode "1", all three attack opportunities are selected. The attack pattern in which the main character attacks is selected, and in the case of final mode "2", the main character attacks on the first and third attack opportunities, and the opponent character attacks on the second attack opportunity. The attack pattern to be performed is selected. In the case of final mode "3", the attack pattern (resurrection effect (see Figure 96)) in which the protagonist revives and defeats the opponent's character after the opponent's character attacks in all three attack opportunities is selected. be done.

Although a detailed explanation is omitted, the final mode selection table 222h is provided for each variation pattern (variation time) of the variation effect to be executed. For example, in a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds, the final mode selection table 222h is provided three times. It is specified that the final modes (final modes "1" and "2") that are completed with the attack are likely to be selected, and in a variation pattern with a variation time of 90 seconds, it is defined that the revival effect is likely to be selected. Here, in the revival performance executed with a variation pattern with a variation time of 90 seconds, the production data for the first three attacks is the same as the production data of the variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds (final mode "5"). are used. As a result, we aim to share the production data and reduce the data capacity, and the first half of the production where the winning battle is executed (the first half of the final mode "3") and the production where the losing battle is executed (the final mode "5"). ''), it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which the player understands the performance result during the performance.

Returning to FIG. 118, the explanation will be continued. In the final modes "4" and "5", attack patterns are selected in which a losing battle in which the main character is defeated is executed. In this defeat battle, an effect is executed in which the HP gauge Dm21 indicating the main character's continuous value (HP) eventually becomes 0 as a result of the battle reach. In the case of final mode "4", an attack pattern is selected in which the main character attacks on the first attack opportunity, and the opponent's character attacks on the second and third attack opportunities, and final mode "5" is selected. In this case, an attack pattern in which the opponent's character attacks in all three attack opportunities is selected. In this way, in the attack pattern for a losing battle set in this control example, until the last attack (third attack) is executed, other battles (victory battles, draw battles described later) Since the same performance is executed, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which the player is aware of the performance result during the performance.

In the final modes "6" and "7", attack patterns are selected in which a draw battle is executed in which neither the HP gauge Dm21 indicating the continuous value of the main character nor the HP gauge Dm22 indicating the continuous value of the opponent character becomes 0. When this draw battle is executed, the battle reach ends and the next pre-battle production is executed. In the case of final mode "6", an attack pattern is selected in which the main character attacks on the first attack opportunity, and the opponent's character attacks on the second and third attack opportunities, and final mode "7" is selected. In this case, an attack pattern in which the opponent's character attacks in all three attack opportunities is selected. In this way, in the draw battle attack pattern set in this control example, the same effect as in other battles (defeated battles) is executed as an attack pattern, so the player is not only given the attack pattern, but also It is possible to make the user pay close attention to the decrease in the HP gauge, and it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which the performance result is grasped during the performance.

In addition, in this control example, the same attack pattern as in the losing battle is selected as the attack pattern to be executed during the drawn battle, but the same attack pattern as in other battles (victory battles) is selected. It may be configured such that a performance in which an attack pattern is executed is selected. As a result, when the third battle is executed, depending on the attack pattern executed at each attack opportunity (1st to 3rd attack opportunity), the current battle reach will be either a winning battle or a draw battle (i.e. , a battle in which there is no defeat), and the player can watch the performance (battle reach) without worrying that the game state will shift to the normal state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 114(b), the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 114(b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 stores a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a status storage area 223e, a jackpot information storage area 223f, and a display round number. Area 223g, additional production flag 223h, display extension flag 223i, variation counter 223j, elapsed time counter 223k, continuous production mode storage area 223m, continuous value storage area 223n, duration counter 223p, continuation At least a performance setting counter 223q, a continuation performance flag 223r, a portent setting flag 223t, a performance counter group 223y, and other memory area 223z are provided.

The winning information storage area 223a includes one execution area, four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to special symbol 1, and four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to special symbol 2. ), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In this pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 detects a starting prize for the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140, the first winning random number counter C1 is acquired according to the starting winning. , the first winning type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1, various information obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the starting prize is drawn (win or failure, jackpot type in the case of jackpot, fluctuation pattern) ) is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is notified from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts various information notified by the winning information command (win/fail, jackpot type in the case of jackpot, fluctuation pattern) as winning information, and extracts the winning information. is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is divided into four areas (first area to Among the vacant areas of the fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). In other words, the area with the smaller area number stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning in time, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning in time.

In addition, in this first control example, the main control device 110 operates based on various information (win/fail, jackpot type in the case of jackpot, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the starting prize is drawn. Although a configuration is used in which a winning information command is set and notified to the audio lamp control device 113, other configurations may be used.

For example, when a starting winning occurs, the various information predicted corresponding to the starting winning includes various information already stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. and setting means for setting a winning information command by adding a winning information command, and when receiving a winning information command, the various information (winning information) already stored in the winning information storage area 223a and the information included in the received winning information command are set. A configuration may also be provided in which a discriminating means for discriminating whether the various information (winning information) matches or not. This makes it possible to determine whether the various information (winning information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a is appropriately stored.

In addition, in this first control example, when a new starting winning occurs, a winning information command is set and the audio lamp control device 113 is notified. The timing of the notification is not limited to the above-mentioned timing (timing when the winning information command is set). For example, by providing a storage means to temporarily store the winning information command, in addition to the timing of starting a winning, the timing of notification is not limited to the timing mentioned above (the timing when the winning information command is set). (for example, at 5-second intervals), when the gaming conditions change (for example, when the gaming state shifts from the time-saving state to the normal state, when a jackpot game starts or ends, etc.), or when special symbols start changing (or A configuration may be used in which the winning information command stored in the storage means is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 when the winning information command is stopped. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately perform an effect (so-called pre-read effect) using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a.

In this control example, setting of performance modes such as a jackpot performance, a battle performance, and an expectation level display performance is executed as a pre-read performance based on each piece of winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. In this way, by executing various performances (pre-reading performances) based on each piece of winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, players can be informed about each reserved ball before the variable display starts. It can create a sense of expectation that it will be a big hit. It is also possible to perform long-term effects using multiple variable display periods.

As shown in FIG. 115(a), the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 for counting the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 for counting the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2. It has a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 for the purpose of Update.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 is a variable display of the special symbol 1 performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is a variable display of the special symbol 1 reserved in the main controller 110. This is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of times of standby) of the variable performance up to a maximum of 4 times for each type of special symbol. Similarly, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 is a variable display of the special symbol 2 that is performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is reserved in the main controller 110. This is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of times of standby) of the variable performance of the special symbol 2 up to a maximum of 4 times for each type of special symbol.

As described above, the audio lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and updates the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. Unable to get value. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of balls on hold based on the number of balls on hold command transmitted from the main controller 110, and counts the number of balls on hold in the special symbol 1 number of reserved balls counter 223b1 and the special symbol 2 number of reserved balls counter 223b2. The number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when a starting winning is detected and the number of pending balls in the variable display is added, or in the main control device 110, a variable display in a special symbol is executed and the number of pending balls is subtracted. If so, a held ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 held ball number counter 203e after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 based on the held ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the counter corresponding to the command, either the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 (see S3208 in FIG. 140). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110.

The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 are used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the number of reserved balls command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved pitch number counter 223b1 or the special symbol 2 reserved pitch number counter 223b2, and , Sends a display reserved ball number command to the display control device 114 in order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 after storage. .

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the number of reserved balls indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 of the audio lamp control device 113, or the special symbol 2 reserved The drawing of the image is controlled so that the reserved pitch number symbols corresponding to the value of the pitch counter 223b2 are displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As mentioned above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110, and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Its value is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 also corresponds to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. It can be changed while being synchronized. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of pending balls whose variable display is pending.

The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when the special symbol 1 fluctuation pattern command or the special symbol 2 fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S3202 in FIG. 140), and the third symbol display device It is turned off when the variable display setting in 81 is made (see S3802 in FIG. 147). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 during the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 139). The information is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 controls the display control device 114 so that the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 using the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S3204 in FIG. 140), and the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. It is turned off when the system is turned off (see S3814 in FIG. 147). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type) extracted from the received stop type command.

The jackpot information storage area 223f is an area for storing information about the jackpot to be executed, and information about the jackpot to be executed this time (for example, the number of rounds, the gaming state to which the jackpot will be changed after the jackpot, etc.) is stored in the main controller. This is an area for storing information received from 110. In this control example, the mode of performance executed during the jackpot is set based on the information stored in the jackpot information storage area 223f.

The display round number storage area 223g is an area for storing information regarding the number of rounds displayed during a jackpot. In this control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 85(a), when the top-up effect is executed during a jackpot, the number of rounds in progress display mode Dm3 indicating the number of rounds in progress is internally displayed. The confirmed round number display mode Dm4 that partially confirms and displays the set number of rounds is set in the main display area of the third symbol display device 81 based on the information regarding the number of rounds stored in the display round number storage area 223g. It is configured to be displayed on Dm.

This display round number storage area 223g stores 0 as an initial value, receives the round number command among the winning related commands transmitted from the main controller 110 (S3304 in FIG. 142: Yes), and flags the additional effect flag. 223h is set to on (S3306 in FIG. 142: Yes), in the additional production processing (see FIG. 143), the stored value (number of rounds) is referred to and the internal setting is performed. The difference between the current number of rounds and the determined number of rounds is calculated, and the value of the newly determined number of rounds (number of rounds) determined based on the difference value is stored.

The number of rounds stored here is added for display so that it is displayed as the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 when the number of rounds is a predetermined number of rounds (number of rounds n) in the additional display process (see FIG. 145). It is used when setting display commands (see S3604 in FIG. 145). Then, when the additional performance ends, the stored values are initialized.

In this way, in this control example, when a new round is started, the additional effect processing (see FIG. 144) is executed, the confirmed round number stored in the display round number storage area 223g is updated, and the predetermined number When a round (a multiple of 5 in this control example) is started, display processing for updating the display mode of the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 is executed. Therefore, since the confirmed round number is always updated (every round), a condition for updating the display mode of the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 may be added, or the display of the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 may be changed based on the player's operation. By selecting whether or not to update the mode, it is possible to reliably handle the case where the display timing of the final number of rounds is changed.

Furthermore, in this control example, if an additional prize that occurs during a jackpot is a jackpot, the number of rounds is determined in advance based on the winning information corresponding to the additional prize, and the number of rounds is determined in advance based on the winning information corresponding to the additional prize. The number of displayed rounds is set based on the total number of rounds including the number of rounds information.

The add-on effect flag 223h is a flag for indicating that the add-on effect is being executed, and is set to ON when the add-on effect is selected as the jackpot effect. This additional effect flag 223h is set to ON when an additional effect is read as a jackpot effect during the jackpot effect setting process (see FIG. 143) (see S3408 in FIG. 143), and is set to ON during the jackpot effect setting process (see FIG. 143). ), when a round number command is received (S3304 in FIG. 142), the setting state is determined (S3306 in FIG. 142). Then, in the post-jackpot performance setting process (see FIG. 146), if it is determined that there is no consecutive game on hold (S3703: No in FIG. 146), it is set to OFF.

The display extension flag 223i is a flag for indicating a state in which the performance during the jackpot (the ending display of the jackpot) is extended and displayed during the special symbol fluctuation period that is executed after the end of the jackpot. This is set to on when the ending display of a jackpot is to be displayed for an extended period. If a new jackpot is won while this display extension flag 223i is set to on, that is, while the jackpot performance (jackpot ending display) is being executed, information about the jackpot (acquired ball (number of balls and number of rounds) is displayed in a display manner that continues from the information regarding the previous jackpot (number of balls acquired and number of rounds).

This display extension flag 223i is set in the post-jackpot performance setting process (see FIG. 146) when the jackpot performance executed this time is a normal winning performance and the gaming state after the jackpot is a probability change state or a time-saving state ( S3709 in FIG. 146: Yes), it is set to on (S3710 in FIG. 146). Then, when the special symbol changes four times after the display extension flag 223i is set to ON (S3904 in FIG. 148: Yes), or when the elapsed time reaches 4 seconds (S5103 in FIG. 154: Yes) , is set to off (S3905 in FIG. 148, S5104 in FIG. 154).

As described above, in this control example, the display extension flag 223i is set when either the number of changes in the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (4 times) or a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed since the display extension flag 223i was set to on. is configured to be set to off when the following is true. This means that the period in which the display extension flag 223i is set to ON is the period in which the jackpot effect will continue to be executed, and if you win a jackpot during that period, the jackpot effect will continue to be executed. This is because it is a period of continuation (continuation of the previous jackpot performance).

To explain in detail, if the only condition for setting the display extension flag 223i to OFF is that the number of changes in the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 4 times), the special symbol will be suspended at the end of the jackpot. The value of the number of balls (the sum of the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2) is less than the above-mentioned predetermined number of times (4 times), and the player stops launching the ball after the jackpot ends. If this happens, the game will be interrupted after the jackpot ends without the number of changes in the special symbol reaching the predetermined number (4 times), and there is a risk that the performance during the jackpot may continue for a long period of time. be. Furthermore, if a player stops playing in such a state, a jackpot effect will be displayed even though no one is playing, so a new player will not be able to play. There was a problem in that the players hesitated to play games on the pachinko machine 10, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 was reduced.

Therefore, in this control example, in addition to the number of changes in the special symbol, the passage of time (4 seconds) is also provided as a condition for setting the display extension flag 223i to OFF. From this, it is possible to set a limited period during which the performance during the jackpot is continuously displayed and during which the performance across a plurality of jackpots can be executed. Thereby, the player can be motivated to play the game in an attempt to win the jackpot during the limited period in which the display extension flag 223i is set to ON.

The variation counter 223j is a counter for counting the number of variations of the special symbol during the period in which the display extension flag 223i is set to ON. This variation number counter 223j is set to "5" when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) is executed with the display extension flag 223i set to on and the extension management process (see FIG. 148) is executed. is set (see S3902 in FIG. 148).

The elapsed time counter 223k counts the elapsed time during the period in which the display extension flag 223i is set to on. This elapsed time counter 223k is set to "4000 (equivalent to 4 seconds)" as a counter value when the display extension flag 223i is set to ON in the post-jackpot effect setting process (see FIG. 146). (see S3711), the counter value is decremented by "1" each time the effect update process (S3112) of the main process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 139) is executed every millisecond (see FIG. 154). (See S5102).

Then, in the performance update process (see FIG. 154), when the counter value of the elapsed time counter 223k becomes "0", the display extension flag 223i is set to OFF (see S5104 in FIG. 154). With this configuration, when the elapsed time after the end of the jackpot exceeds a predetermined time (4 seconds), the performance during the jackpot can be ended and the normal performance corresponding to each gaming state can be executed. , it is possible to make the player play the game enthusiastically in order to win a jackpot within a limited period of time.

In this control example, the counter value of the elapsed time counter 223k is set to "4000", which corresponds to 4 seconds, but the set time is not limited to this, for example, even if it is 3 seconds. Alternatively, each time the display extension flag 223i is set to on, one of a plurality of times may be selected and the period may be set. Further, the value set as the counter value of the elapsed time counter 223k is preferably set to be longer than the sum of the fluctuation periods for four rotations of the special symbol 2 executed after the end of the jackpot. By configuring in this way, the variation corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 which is preferentially consumed during the jackpot can be executed while the display extension flag 223i is set to ON.

The continuous performance mode storage area 223m is a storage area for storing the continuous performance mode selected when the continuous performance is executed. This continuous production mode storage area 223m is executed when the display extension flag 223i is set to OFF in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147), and the gaming state is determined to be the time saving state or the variable probability state. In the continuous performance setting process (see FIG. 149), the continuous performance mode selected by the continuous performance mode selection table 222e is stored until the Kiyoaki mode is selected by the final mode selection table (when the battle reach is executed). (until the end of the battle), a performance (pre-battle performance) corresponding to the continuous performance mode stored in the continuous performance mode storage area 223m is executed.

The continuous value storage area 223n is a storage area for storing the value selected by the continuous value main selection table 222f among the continuous values (HP values) that are increased or decreased during the continuous performance executed in this control example. Based on the continuation value stored in the continuation value storage area 223n, updating (increase/decrease) processing of the continuation value (HP value) during the continuation performance is executed.

In addition, in this control example, the continuation value (HP value) is roughly selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222f, and the detailed value of the continuation value (HP value) is selected based on the continuation value sub-selection table 222g. With this configuration, the increase/decrease pattern of the continuation value displayed during the continuation performance is increased, but the continuation value (HP value) within the audio lamp control device 113 is managed in the continuation value main selection table 222f. Since the configuration is configured to execute only with the continuation value selected based on the following, the type of continuation value (HP value) to be managed is different from the type of continuation value (HP value) displayed during the continuation performance. can be reduced.

The duration counter 223p is a counter for measuring the period during which the continuous production flag 223r is set to ON, and is used to prevent the final mode (battle reach) from being executed frequently in the continuous production. , is the counter used.

This duration counter 223p continues each time the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) is executed while the continuous production flag 223r is set to ON, that is, each time the variation of the special symbol is executed. In the effect setting process (see FIG. 149), 1 is added (see S4009 in FIG. 149). Then, in the continuous performance setting process (see Figure 149), if it is determined that the counter value is less than "6" (S4003 in Figure 149: No), the final mode (battle reach) is not selected. It consists of With this configuration, the selection of the final mode (battle reach) is suppressed until the duration counter value is 6 or more, that is, the special symbol variation is executed 6 times after the pre-battle production is executed. be done.

The continuous performance setting counter 223q is a counter for measuring the number of times the battle performance is repeatedly set (the number of times the continuous performance flag 223r is set to ON) while the gaming state is set to the variable probability state or the time saving state. Yes, it is set so that a different continuous performance mode is likely to be selected based on the value of the continuous performance setting counter 223q. Thereby, in the case where the continuous performance is executed for a long period of time and the battle performance is repeatedly set, it is possible to suppress the battle performance in the same mode from being executed frequently. Further, by setting a continuous performance mode that is executed only when the value of the continuous performance setting counter 223q is a specific value (for example, 1), it is possible to provide a rare and valuable performance to the player.

This continuous performance setting counter 223q is referred to when selecting a new continuous performance mode in the continuous performance setting process (see FIG. 149) (see S4005 in FIG. 149), and is incremented by 1 when the continuous performance mode is selected. (See S4007 in FIG. 149). Then, when the continuous performance ends (when the gaming state shifts to the normal state, or when a jackpot is won), the counter value is cleared to 0.

The continuous performance flag 223r is a flag to indicate that the continuous performance mode is selected (that the pre-battle performance is executed) during the execution of the continuous performance, and when the continuous performance mode is selected. Set to on. While this continuous performance flag 223r is set on, a new continuous performance mode is not selected, and the pre-battle performance is executed in the same continuous performance mode.

This continuous performance flag 223r is initially set to OFF when the continuous performance setting process (see FIG. 149) is executed, and is set to ON when the continuous performance mode is selected (see S4008 in FIG. 149). While it is set to on, the process for selecting the continuous production mode is skipped (S4004 in FIG. 149: Yes). Then, when the final mode is selected based on the final mode selection table 222h (that is, when Battle Reach is selected and the pre-battle performance ends), it is set to OFF (see S4015 in FIG. 149).

The omen setting flag 223t is a flag used when performing a countdown effect across multiple fluctuations (see FIG. 101), and is set to ON when the variable display is switched during the omen effect period. When this omen setting flag 223t is set to ON, when setting a new variable effect in the countdown effect setting process (see FIG. 152) executed in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147), The pre-fluctuation precursor performance is controlled to be executed continuously from the start of the fluctuation.

This portent setting flag 223t is set in the winning information command process (see FIG. 141), in which there is a countdown effect that has specific effect C (see FIG. 101) as prefetch information (see S3232, S3233 in FIG. 141), and the change currently being executed. When it is determined that the remaining display fluctuation period is 10 seconds or more (S3234 in FIG. 141: Yes), it is set to ON (see S3236 in FIG. 141).

Then, in the countdown effect setting process (see FIG. 152), it is referenced when setting the effect mode (see S4301 in FIG. 152), and if it is determined in the process of S4301 that the omen effect flag 233m is set to on. In the multiple variation effect setting process (see FIG. 153) that is executed, the effect mode is set and then turned off (see S4405 in FIG. 153).

The effect counter group 223y is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. This performance counter group 223y includes at least a first performance counter 223y1 to a sixth performance counter 223y6, and each counter is connected to a random number generation IC electrically connected to the audio lamp control device 113. A random number value in the range of 0 to 198 obtained from (not shown) is stored. The operating clock (operating frequency) of the IC for random number generation is an IC that can operate at an operating clock (for example, 1 MHz) that can update each production counter to a separate random value and make a determination. will be adopted. The value of the performance counter group 223y is used when executing various judgments executed by the audio lamp control device 113, such as determining whether or not continuous preview performance can be executed and the type of preview for normal press performance.

The other memory area 223z is provided with an area for storing data other than the data mentioned above and flags other than those mentioned above for setting the state, and temporarily stores other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. This is an area for storing specific information. Specifically, for example, a power-off flag is provided that is used to determine whether or not there has been a momentary power outage. This power-off flag is set to ON before a power-off command is received from the main controller 110 and the power-off process is executed. After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain period of time (100 milliseconds) has elapsed. Therefore, in the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 138), if the power off flag is on (3008: Yes in FIG. 138), a certain period of time (100 This is the case when the audio lamp control device 113 starts up before the expiration of milliseconds, that is, when there is a momentary power outage. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 has not been deleted, and unnecessary information (or information that is incomplete because only a part of the information has been deleted) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. In some cases, the information in the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (see S3009 in FIG. 138). This prevents processes from being executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so each process of the audio lamp control device 113 can operate normally.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via a bus line 240. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and is also connected to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Note that even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Since there are models with exactly the same configuration and specifications, the display control device 114 is made into a common component and costs are reduced.

Below, the MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be explained first, and then the work RAM 233 will be explained.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured so that a system reset can be applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including power restoration from a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer specified by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM like in conventional gaming machines. Instead of being stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a that can achieve a large capacity with a small area. This makes it possible to sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs and the like. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory 234a generally has a problem in that the read speed is slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is consecutively arranged in multiple pages, it is possible to read the data from the second page onward at high speed, but when reading the data from the first page, an address is specified. It takes a long time until the data is output. Furthermore, when reading data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read. As described above, since the read speed of the NAND flash memory 234a is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it will be difficult to read out the instructions constituting the control program. This may take a long time, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. and store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and data is read and written at high speed, so the MPU 231 can read instructions forming the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is canceled via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

This character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as the main storage part in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing data, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of images (characters, etc.) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory 234a has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. As a result, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a with a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the player's interest, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be made more diverse and complex.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a lot of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and also store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the third symbol display device 81 is provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without having to provide a dedicated program ROM to store control programs and fixed value data as in conventional gaming machines. Since the number of parts can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data is written) occur when data is written, and defective data blocks in which data cannot be written occur. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and performs known error correction so that data is read and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Perform data address translation.

This ROM controller 234b performs error correction on data read out from the NAND flash memory 234a that includes error bits, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the It is possible to suppress the MPU 231 from performing processing or the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids accessing the defective data block, so the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can store different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. The ROM controller 234b then performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

This buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can, for example, output the data in the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while setting data in one bank, or output data from the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside as specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. A process of transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank, and a process of transferring data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 to the other bank. The processing of reading data from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a nonvolatile memory provided as a sub-storage section in the character ROM 234, and is designed to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, this NOR type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided that stores a part of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and can be set as appropriate according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 uses hardware to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" and to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. is set, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 indicates the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects one of the programs previously set from the NOR ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , reads the instruction code of the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c, and outputs it to the MPU 231.

In this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing it in is as follows. That is, as mentioned above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from specifying the address to outputting the data when reading data from the first page. There's a problem.

When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then issues an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, a problem arises in that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. can be set to output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) used in the control program is stored in a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the program storage area of the work RAM 233. 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after canceling the system reset. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c currently used.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c again, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stores the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a. The first predetermined location is programmed to be set to a first predetermined location. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various types of processing can be executed. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the rest of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is included in the control program that is transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a.

Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a using the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a. Execute the remaining boot programs contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) are stored in the second program storage area. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from area 234a1 to program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b is executed. Furthermore, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined location within the program storage area 233a. Specifically, this second predetermined location is the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 155) that is executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 155) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined location, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. This allows the MPU 231 to read control programs from a work RAM configured with a DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

Furthermore, as described above, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time can be suppressed. I can do it.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 125), which will be described later, and which is sent from the MPU 231, and draws a frame in either a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by developing the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame that was previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame within the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). Parallel processing within.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of images is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes the V-interrupt process (see FIG. 157(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next one frame of image. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the process of drawing the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed by drawing first.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs the drawing processing and display of the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed, so it cannot start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Note that image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, while the NAND flash memory 234a generally facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). In response, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer some of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. is configured to do so. As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so that it remains resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on is completed, the image controller 237 can draw the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing an image. The time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main controller 110 or the display controller 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 transfers necessary data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing; There is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the character ROM 234, and the time required for reading out can be omitted, so it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Furthermore, by storing image data in the normal video RAM 236, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of a 132 kilobyte SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The final address (the final address of the storage source), the information on the transfer destination (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 in accordance with the various information in the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the memory is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeated until all the image data stored from the storage source first address to the storage source final address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. I can do it. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the image data transfer. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing, and as a result, it is not possible to draw the image by the required time. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

Also, since the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. It is possible to easily determine the period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and the processing can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is used as the power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In addition, the power-on variation image area 235b is displayed when a game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays a lottery result performed in the main control device 110 using a variation effect when a ball entering the mouth 140 is detected. This power-on image is an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is sent to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 155).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 121. FIG. 121 shows the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 is transferring image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While this remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image area 235a as shown in FIG. 121(a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, upon receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 executes the command as shown in FIG. 22(b). As shown in FIG. 22(c), on the display screen of the main image at power-on, there is a power-on fluctuation image with a "○" symbol at the lower right position facing the screen, and as shown in FIG. 22(c), a "○" A power-on variation image of an "x" symbol is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the symbol during the variation period. Then, based on the display variation pattern command and display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and stop type command from the main control device 110, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 is determined. The result is judged, and if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the image shown in Figure 121(b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the variable effect stops, and if it is a "special symbol miss", the image shown in Figure 121(c) is displayed. The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the variable effect stops.

The MPU 231 causes the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on until all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. be able to. In addition, since the player or the like can recognize that some kind of processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at power-on, the image that should be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 is To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. I can do it.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Furthermore, when the player starts playing the game while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 140 is detected. In this case, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 121(b) and 121(c) are alternately drawn. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. With this, it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variation effect.

In addition, at the time when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. If a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entering 1640 is detected while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device. 81 can be displayed immediately.

The MPU 231 causes the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on until all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can confirm the power-on image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Therefore, while displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. I can do it. In addition, since the player etc. can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data that should be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 is It is possible to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without having to worry about whether the image data has stopped operating until it is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. can.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 122, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. FIG. 122 is an explanatory diagram illustrating four types of back images and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 122(b) shows the back surface A corresponding to the "sandy beach stage" and the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage", respectively.

As shown in FIG. 122, the back images corresponding to each back surface A and B are prepared in the character ROM 234, which are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each of the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as "scroll images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at position a and position c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area. is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then when the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, the third symbol display device 81 displays a smooth image. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a connected manner.

When it is decided to change the back type and the stage is changed to "sandy beach stage" or "deep sea stage", the MPU 231 first sets the area between position a and position a' of the corresponding back image as the initial position of the display area. Then, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as time passes, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scrolling image, and the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches an image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, images between positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be explained. As shown in FIG. 122(a), the back surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to positions a to d are stored on the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is often played without changing the stage with the initial stage "Sandy Beach Stage" displayed, so the image data of the back A corresponding to the "Sandy Beach Stage" that is frequently displayed. By making all the data reside permanently in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load placed on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 122(b), on the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage", only the image data corresponding to a partial area of the back surface, that is, the image between position a and position b, is for permanent use. It is stored in the back image area 235c of the video RAM 235.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to have the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235; Therefore, it is necessary to use a RAM with a very large capacity, which may lead to an increase in cost.

In contrast, in this pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the back image that is displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from position a to position a' (or the range shown in FIGS. 122(a) and 122(b)). ), and the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 122(a) and 122(b)) is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Since the character ROM 234 is configured to be stored in the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, when a stage change is determined by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation, the back side of the resident video RAM 235 By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface B can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the image data can be displayed while scrolling or changing the color tone as time passes. It can be displayed. Furthermore, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored on the rear surface B, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the back side B, the range from position a to position b is scrolled from left to right using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from position a to position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be completely transferred from character ROM 234 to normal RAM 236 during this time. As a result, while scrolling the range from position a to position b, image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data, the range from position b' to position d is scrolled without delay using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Note that on the back side B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to back side images provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 120) of the normal video RAM 236. Thereby, the back image data stored in the subarea dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so the back image can be displayed reliably.

In addition, on the back side B, the image data stored in the back side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between position b' and position b. Data is stored duplicated. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from position b' on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image can be scroll-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with a smooth connection. ing.

Furthermore, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 using the image data of the normal video RAM 236 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, then, The MPU 231 uses the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display images between positions a to c that are scrolled repeatedly in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable production displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is permanently resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned nine types of main symbols (see FIG. 81(b)), which are the third symbols and are numbered from "0" to "9", is resident. Ru. As a result, when performing a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, there is no need to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Variable effects can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140, even though the first symbol display device 37 has started the variable performance, the third symbol display device It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the variable performance is not started immediately in step 81.

Further, image data corresponding to sub-symbols to which numbers are not attached are also resident in the third symbol area 235d. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with a winning start does not start even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first variable effect stopped. It will be done. As a result, when the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a sub-symbol to which no number is attached is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration performance. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols to which numbers are not attached from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character pattern area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character patterns used in various effects displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "youth" and "woman" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is permanently resident in the character pattern area 235e. Therefore, when changing the character design based on the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead changes the character design from the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading image data resident in the symbol area 235e in advance. Thereby, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error along with the error type using an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, upon receiving an error command, cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of an error, from the viewpoint of preventing players from cheating and protecting players from errors. In this pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is stored in advance in the error message image area 235f, so the display control device 114 displays error messages in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is not read out after receiving the error command. It can be displayed instantly.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in the subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

The MPU 231 transfers image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing subsequent images from the character ROM 234 to a subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of image data to a predetermined subarea where it is to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

Note that the image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list, which will be described later, in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. Thereby, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes one frame's worth of image drawn according to instructions from the MPU 231 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame's worth of image into that frame buffer. While developing the image, while the image is being developed in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame developed earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third symbol display device 81 along with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, a process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop one frame's worth of images drawn in one frame buffer. , it is possible to read out one frame's worth of image developed earlier from the other frame buffer and display the read out one frame's worth of image on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that develops one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing processing of one frame's worth of images. Every 20 milliseconds, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's image and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform display processing for one frame of images in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for one frame of images.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. configured. This work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and a stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a total value storage area 233k, and an omen effect flag 233m.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Using this, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complex performances.

The data table storage area 233b stores a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time passes for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area where transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and a transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one performance displayed by the table is stored.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored in accordance with the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in this data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated performances.

Here, details of various data tables will be explained. First, one display data table is prepared for each presentation mode of each presentation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands from the main control device 110, such as variable presentation, opening presentation, etc. , display data tables corresponding to the jackpot medium performance, round performance, ending performance, and demo performance are prepared.

The fluctuation performance is a performance that is started on the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. Note that when the display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when a fluctuating performance is started, if the stop type of the fluctuating performance is a miss, the stop symbol indicating the miss will finally be displayed, while the stop type of the fluctuating performance is jackpot A or jackpot B. In either case, the stop symbols indicating each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the type of jackpot by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable performance, and can easily determine the gaming value given according to the type of jackpot.

In this control example, the audio lamp control device 113 sends a display variation pattern command corresponding to a period of one special symbol variation (variation pattern (variation time) selected by the main controller 110) to a display stop type. Although the display controller 114 is configured to output the output together with the command and set the presentation mode corresponding to each command received by the display control device 114, other configurations may be used. For example, the audio lamp control device 113 The display control device 114 divides the display variation pattern command corresponding to the period of one special symbol variation (for example, 60 seconds) into multiple pieces (for example, the first half variation pattern (30 seconds) and the second half variation pattern (30 seconds)). By configuring in this way, the game content that occurred during the period in which the first half fluctuation pattern is being executed (for example, the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, the new ball entering A display variation pattern command corresponding to the latter half variation pattern can be set based on the information acquisition).

In addition, by using the above-described configuration, if an additional display variation pattern command is received after a display variation pattern command corresponding to one period of special symbol variation is received, the additional display variation is output. There is no need to perform processing to rewrite the presentation contents in response to pattern commands, and the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced. As described above, the audio lamp control device 113 divides the display variation pattern command corresponding to the period of one special symbol variation (for example, 60 seconds) into multiple pieces (for example, the first half variation pattern (30 seconds) and the second half). When outputting a variable pattern (30 seconds) to the display control device 114, it is preferable to output a display stop type command together with the display variable pattern command that is output first.

In addition, in this control example, a display performance command is used to execute a continuous performance (see FIG. 96) that is continuously executed when the gaming state is an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and a display performance command is used to terminate the continuous performance. The voice lamp control device 113 includes a display final mode command for executing a performance (battle reach) to inform the player whether or not the jackpot has been won, and various other commands for increasing the player's expectation that he or she has won the jackpot. When each command is received, an effect corresponding to the command is displayed.

Furthermore, even if the presentation content has already been set based on the reception of a predetermined display command, if an additional display command is subsequently received, the process will respond to the additional display command. It is configured to overwrite the content with the performance content. As a result, based on the reception of the display variation pattern command, the effects for the period corresponding to the predetermined period (special symbol variation period) have been set (created) in advance, and additional effects can be added during that period. When a display command (for example, a display command to indicate the player's operation on the frame button 22 or the acquisition of new ball entry information) is received, the display contents of the performance can be smoothly changed.

The opening performance is a performance to notify the player that the pachinko machine 10 will now move to a special gaming state and the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, will be repeatedly opened. This is an effect to notify the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending performance is a performance for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

In addition, as mentioned above, the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable performance associated with the starting winning is not started even after a predetermined period of time has passed since the first variable performance stopped. This is a presentation in which the third symbol consisting of sub-symbols without numbers "1" to "9" is displayed in a stopped state, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, players and hall personnel can recognize that no game is being played on the pachinko machine 10.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to an opening performance, a round performance, an ending performance, and a demo performance. Further, as for the variable display data table which is a display data table for variable effects, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for each variable effect pattern, 32 tables in total are prepared.

Here, details of the display data table will be explained with reference to FIG. 123. FIG. 123 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address that represents the time (in this control example, 20 milliseconds) for one frame of image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This specifies the content of an image (drawing content) for one frame in detail.

The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that makes up one frame of image, and also specifies display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency depending on the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The magnification rate is information for specifying the magnification rate for a standard display size set in advance for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnification rate. Note that if the magnification rate is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than its standard size, and if the magnification rate is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than its standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying a sprite. The translucency value is used to specify the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more transparent the image displayed on the back side of the sprite will be. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient that is used when performing overlapping processing with other sprites. The color information is information for specifying the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address include one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and the light Drawing information for each sprite is defined for each address, such as effects for expressing the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as images of young people, and characters. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined depending on the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the back image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information are changed over time. Since it is assumed to be constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is defined in the variable display data table. The type of back surface is to display either back surface A to C that corresponds to the stage selected by the player (one of "Morning Stage," "Evening Stage," or "Night Stage"), or to display back surface A to C that corresponds to the stage selected by the player. Information specifying whether a back image different from C is to be displayed is described. In addition, when specifying that a back image different from back faces A to C (such as special back faces A to C) is to be displayed, the back type also includes information specifying which back image is to be displayed. .

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed based on the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as the drawing target, Furthermore, the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame is specified over time. On the other hand, if it is specified that a back image different from back images A to C is to be displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

In this control example, we will explain the case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table, but instead, the back type and the range of the back image that corresponds to the back type It may also be possible to specify location information indicating whether the information should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Moreover, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the display database at the stage when image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) started, which is indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information includes, depending on the back surface type, information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and image drawing based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 Display) may indicate any information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) may be displayed along with the back type and position information. The information indicates the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or the information indicates the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating elapsed time but may be information indicating an address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

For the third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ), symbol type offset information is written as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Rather than directly specifying the type of the 3rd symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the 3rd symbol in the fluctuating performance is based on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance and the current fluctuating performance. This is because it changes depending on the stopped symbol, and the symbol offset information from the start of variation until a predetermined time has elapsed describes the offset information from the stopped symbol of the previous variation performance. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol is set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variable performance can be stopped with a stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable performance or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be used as the third symbol. By managing the offset information using the numbers attached to each third symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

In addition, in the symbol offset information, during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuating performance that is being performed this time, the third symbol changes rapidly. It is set to match the displayed time. While the third symbol is displayed in a high-speed fluctuating manner, the third symbol is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the current variable performance, even if the continuity of the numbers in the third symbol is interrupted, the player will not be made aware of the interruption in the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is written in "0000H" which is the first address of the display data table, and "02F0H" in the last address of the display data table (in the example of FIG. 75) contains the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is written and the address where the "End" information is written, the drawing content is made to correspond to the presentation mode that should be specified in the display data table. is listed.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and based on the drawing content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the next The image contents to be drawn are specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 125), which will be described later, is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw the image is given. Thereby, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to commands (for example, display variation pattern commands) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. .

Here, if a conventional pachinko machine is configured to start a program executed by the MPU 231 every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as the effect images become more diverse, Since the process of starting and executing programs that are becoming increasingly complex and enormous in size places a heavy burden on the processing, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 becomes limited, and there is a risk that there will be a limit to the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode in this way, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This is possible because, in the pachinko machine 10, the performance to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of a lottery performed based on the starting winnings. On the other hand, with game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on user operations, so the display content cannot be predicted, and therefore the various It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each presentation mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created one frame at a time according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of a lottery performed based on a starting prize.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be explained with reference to FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each production, and as mentioned above, the transfer data table is prepared for the display data table that is prepared for each production. Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data that is not resident in the normal video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

Note that if all the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that is to be transferred at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. are written (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 124). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, it means that there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. Null data meaning ``0002H'' in FIG. 124 is defined.

The transfer data information includes the first address (storage source first address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the first address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

Note that "0000H", which is the first address of the transfer data table, contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, similar to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 124, "02F0H") contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is described and the address where the "End" information is described, transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table is provided. is listed.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the MPU 231 selects the display data table to be used. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to , the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 125) to be described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that point is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 124, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, if the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the generated The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, if transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 transmits display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When a table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so the sprite image data used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers the image data to be transferred that should be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, it is ensured that the image data of a predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before it is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Since the transfer start timing can be instructed as shown in FIG. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is set to a main image displayed by the MPU 231 after the image data corresponding to the power-on image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM. It is set to on during the process (see FIG. 155) (see S6005 in FIG. 155). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process of the transfer setting process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image. , is set to off (see S8005 in FIG. 170(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 157(b)), and the simple image display flag 233c is When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 157(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6308 in FIG. 157(b), S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command judgment is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Processing (see FIGS. 158 to 166) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 157 to 169) are executed.

In addition, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7901 in FIG. 170(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on, Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 170(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 171) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to a performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command etc. from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the production mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the commands etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the production mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 233 to the image controller 233 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 125), which will be described later, is generated that describes the contents of the image drawing instructions for the image. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1 and writes an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 125), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instruction contents are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table.

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command etc. from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for storing. In addition to storing a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. Note that if all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no image data to be transferred.

Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 determines whether the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. If so (that is, if Null data is not written), the transfer data information is added to the drawing list (see FIG. 125), which will be described later, which describes the contents of the image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 that are generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, if transfer data information is written in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of image data to be transferred is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite is transferred. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f indicates an address at which to obtain the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is for specifying. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process (FIG. 167(b ), pointer update processing (see S7305 in FIG. 169) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by 1.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and creates a drawing list to be described later. (see FIG. 125), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that point from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and acquires the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

Furthermore, if a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the sprite is Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw one frame worth of images generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list to be instructed to 237.

Here, details of the drawing list will be explained with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 2,...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Pending ball number pattern 1, Pending ball number pattern 2,..., Error pattern ) Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of that sprite is described for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored, and its The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and made translucent according to the translucency value. , performs compositing processing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, performs tone correction processing according to the color information, and performs filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to the filter specification information. After that, various processes are applied to the display position indicated by the display position coordinates, and an obtained image is drawn. The drawn image is then developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a pending image that displays a pending pitch number pattern). image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image, and also generates detailed information for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (displayed object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from other image contents. generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of that sprite is stored is fixed, so the MPU 231 stores the image data of that sprite depending on the sprite type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 determines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite as specified in the display data table. Copy the information as is.

In addition, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites that should be placed closest to the back to the sprites that should be placed closest to the front among the images for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third design (design 1, design 2, ...), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), and the character Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (Character 1, Character 2, . . . , Pending pitch number symbol 1, Pending pitch number symbol 2, . . . , Error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes drawing processing for each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites by overwriting them in the frame buffer. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be placed furthest to the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed furthest to the front.

Furthermore, when transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 controls the transfer data information (the character in which the image data to be transferred is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 transfers an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source first address and the storage source final address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined subarea (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the performance time of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. At the same time as storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the performance time of the performance to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example).

Then, the V interrupt process (FIG. 157(b ) Each time the display setting process (see ) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7607 in FIG. 167). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Execute various processing that should be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i indicates that for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 155) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the storage status of all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction for transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 171) executed by the MPU 231. be exposed. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which a transfer instruction has been set is set to "on", which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Furthermore, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in an unstored state when the image data of that one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the storage status corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Furthermore, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and selects the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S8113 in FIG. 171). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for that image data is set (see S8114 in FIG. 171). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of that image data is stopped. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j indicates a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") that develops the image drawn by the image controller 237 from among the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the rendering target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Information on the designated drawing target buffer is then sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S8202 in FIG. 172).

Thereby, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process to expand the image drawn based on the drawing list onto the specified drawing target buffer. Further, in parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, if the value is "0", it is set to "1", and if it is "1", it is set to "0". carried out by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted. Furthermore, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. This process is performed every time the drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 157(b)) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By alternating the designations, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

The total value storage area 233k is an area for storing (memorizing) the history displayed (displayed as a total value) as a continuation value (HP value) that is variably displayed in the above-described continuation effect (see FIG. 91). Based on the difference between the value (total value) stored (stored) in the total value storage area 233k and the newly received continuation value (HP value), the display contents in the continuation effect (for example, the display contents in FIG. 92(a) The displayed reduction value Dm12, the display mode of the HP display area Dm17, and the presentation mode of the attack presentation) are determined and displayed.

In other words, in this control example, instead of storing the previously set total value on the audio lamp control device 113 side, a means (total value storage area 233k) for storing the previously set total value is provided on the display control device 114 side. The display control device 114 is configured to calculate the difference between the previous total value and the current total value, and display a display mode based on the calculation result. Thereby, the configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 can be simplified.

In addition, in this control example, means (continuation value sub-selection table 222g and S4105 to S4107 in FIG. However, the display control device 114 may be provided with means for setting this effect value. With this configuration, the configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 can be simplified, and the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be further reduced.

The omen effect flag 233m is a flag for determining whether or not the omen effect is executed across a plurality of special symbol variations. If this omen effect flag 233m is on, it means that the omen effect is executed across multiple special figure fluctuations, and if it is off, the omen effect is executed across multiple special figure variations. This means that it is not possible. The omen effect flag 233m is set to ON when an additional omen command for display transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received (see S7505 in FIG. 166). In addition, this omen effect flag 233m is referenced in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see S6501 in FIG. 159), and after setting the display data table corresponding to the omen effect to be executed across multiple special symbol variations. , is set to off (see S6503 in FIG. 159). As a result, it is possible to perform a precursor effect across a plurality of special symbol fluctuations.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, when performing a precursor effect across multiple special symbol fluctuations, the performance data of the precursor performance executed in the previous special symbol fluctuation and the point in time when the performance data was executed When setting the effect corresponding to the current special symbol change (S6502 in FIG. 159), the effect data stored in the above-mentioned memory means is referred to, and when setting the effect corresponding to the current special figure change, The foreshadowing performance executed during the special figure fluctuation is configured to be continuously displayed. Thereby, it is possible to display a precursor effect executed across a plurality of special symbol variations without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Furthermore, in this control example, the foreshadowing effect is configured to be set based on the reception of the display variation pattern command (that is, the foreshadowing effect is executed as part of the variation pattern); however, Without being limited to this, when a display command indicating the execution of a precursor effect is received, regardless of the content of the variable display, the precursor effect is displayed during the period indicated by the command, or a display indicating the stop of the precursor effect. The display may be configured to be displayed until a command is received.

<About the control process of the main controller in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 126 to 137. The processing of the MPU 201 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this control example). There are two types of interrupt processing: interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting the power outage signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.For convenience of explanation, we will first explain the timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing, and then explain the startup processing. and main processing will be explained.

FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, determines the states of the switches, and stores detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (238 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and the counter values are set to the maximum value (in this control example). 238, 199, 99, and 239), each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process is executed for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and also sets a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 (S104). A starting winning process is executed when the ball enters the entrance 64 (starting winning) (S105). In addition, details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 127 to 131.

After executing the starting winning process (S105), a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the throughput due to the passage of the ball at the normal ball entrance 67 is executed. Gate passage processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. After executing the through gate passage process, a firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process starts when the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is the process of determining whether to turn on or off. The main controller 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and is used to display the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol, etc. performed in step 81.

In this special symbol variation process (S104), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently hitting the jackpot (S201). During a special symbol jackpot, a special symbol jackpot is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81 (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and a special symbol jackpot is being displayed. This includes during a predetermined period of time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (S201: Yes), the process is immediately ended.

If the special symbol is not hitting the jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of pending times N2 of the variable display in the special symbol 2) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204).

If it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205), A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e that has been changed by the calculation is set (S206). The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed during the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 136), which will be described later, executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 held ball number counter 203e from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. These are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2, respectively.

After setting the special symbol 2 reserved ball number command through the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the areas within each area are as follows: 1st area on hold → execution area, 2nd area on hold → 1st area on hold, 3rd area on hold → 2nd area on hold, 4th area on hold → 3rd area on hold. Shift data. After shifting the data, special symbol variation start processing is executed to start variable display on the first symbol display device 37 (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 128.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (S208), and determines whether the acquired value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S209). In the process of S209, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S210). , a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d that has been changed by the calculation is set (S211). After setting the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212), and the process moves to S213.

As explained above, in this control example, when executing the process of starting the variation of the special symbol, first, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter is acquired, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter is obtained. When the value of the number counter (N2) is 0, that is, when the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2 is 0, then the value of the special symbol 1 reserved balls number counter (N1) is acquired. . With this configuration, the variation of the special symbol 2 can be executed with priority.

The process for starting the variation of the special symbol is not limited to the configuration of this control example, and may be configured to give priority to the variation of the special symbol 1, or may be configured to execute the variation of the special symbol 1 with priority. For example, without setting a priority order for the special symbols 2, the special symbols may be changed in accordance with the order in which the balls enter the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 140. . In this case, a memory area is provided to store the order in which the balls enter the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 140, and the special symbols 1 are displayed in accordance with the order (order of entry) stored in the memory area. It may be configured to acquire the value of the reserved ball number counter or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter, or it may be configured to use a common reserved ball number counter for special symbol 1 and special symbol 2. .

Furthermore, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 may be configured to vary independently and simultaneously. In this case, if it is determined that one of the special symbols is hitting the jackpot, the fluctuation of the other special symbol will be stopped (the subtraction of the fluctuation time will be stopped until one jackpot ends), or the other It is preferable to configure the system so that the variation of the special symbol is discarded (even if the variation time has not elapsed, the lottery result is rewritten as a loss and the lottery result is forcibly stopped). With this configuration, in a configuration where a plurality of special symbols are changed at the same time, if one of the special symbols becomes advantageous to the player, it is possible to play the game without worrying about changes in the other special symbols. can.

Returning to FIG. 127, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time If the period has not elapsed (S214: No), the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, if it is determined that the variable time has passed (S214: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). Setting of the stop symbols is performed in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S213), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 128. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. be exposed. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if it is a special symbol jackpot, the type of the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special The jackpot type (jackpot A to K) is determined according to the symbol 2) and the value of the first winning type counter C2.

In this control example, the winning jackpot type can be identified by changing the lighting pattern of the LED of the first symbol display device 37 according to the jackpot type (jackpot A to K). Specifically, a plurality of lighting patterns are formed by turning on or off a plurality of LEDs (for example, seven) provided in the first symbol display device 37. Note that the lighting pattern of the first symbol display device 37 may be configured to have different lighting colors. Furthermore, the first symbol display device 37 is configured to notify the outside that the special symbol is changing by blinking at least one of the plurality of LEDs, and the The lighting period that is displayed from the time the special symbol stops until the next special symbol change is executed (the lighting period to indicate the stopped state of the special symbol) is longer than the LED lighting period. It is composed of This allows the player to understand whether the special symbols are in a fluctuating state or in a stopped state.

After the process of S215 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether the special symbol is a jackpot (S216). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), an opening scenario for the specific winning hole 65a is set based on the jackpot type (S217). Thereafter, the probability change flag 203g is reset to OFF, and the value of the time saving counter 203h is reset to 0 (S218), and the start of the jackpot is set (S219). When the start of the special symbol jackpot is set by the process of S219, when the jackpot control process (S1104) of the main process (see FIG. 136) is executed, the process branches to S1201: Yes and the opening command is set. be done. As a result, a jackpot effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

When the process of S219 is finished, next, a stop command is set for notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of information regarding the stop symbol (S220), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the current lottery result is a loss (S216: No), a process of subtracting the number of fluctuations is executed (S221). Note that the process of subtracting the number of fluctuations will be described later with reference to FIG. 129. Thereafter, the process moves to S220 described above, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and is executed in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in This is a process for determining a performance pattern (variable performance pattern) of a variable performance that will be played.

In the special symbol fluctuation start process (S213), first, the first winning random number counter stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area (special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b) C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are acquired (S301).

Next, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203g in the RAM 203 is on (S302). The variable probability flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a variable probability state with a special symbol.If the variable probability flag 203g is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a variable probability state with a special symbol. If the flag 203g is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state (low probability state) with special symbols.

If the probability variation flag 203g is on (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability variation state with a special symbol, so the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the value of the high probability time Based on the 1 hit random number table, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained (S303). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 10 random numbers stored in the first winning random number table for high probability times. As mentioned above, five random numbers from "5 to 9" are set as the random numbers for a special symbol jackpot, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches these random numbers for a jackpot. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. After acquiring the special symbol lottery results, the process moves to S305.

In addition, in this embodiment, the judgment value for a jackpot is the same for the special symbol 1 lottery and the special symbol 2 lottery, but it depends on whether it is the special symbol 1 lottery or the special symbol 2 lottery. The determination value for determining a jackpot may be different. With this configuration, the random number value that is determined to be a miss in the special symbol 1 is determined to be a hit in the special symbol 2, and it is possible to suppress bias in jackpots.

In addition, in this control, the judgment value for a jackpot is set to the same number for the special symbol 1 lottery and the special symbol 2 lottery, but the special symbol 1 lottery and the special symbol 2 lottery The number of determination values for a jackpot may be varied. With this configuration, the probability of jackpot can be made different between special symbol 1 and special symbol 2, and when a lottery is executed using the special symbol with a higher probability of jackpot, it is more likely that the player will hit the jackpot. It is possible to raise expectations.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, if the probability change flag 203g is off (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability state) with special symbols, so the first winning random number obtained in the process of S301 Based on the value of the counter C1 and the first random number table for low probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained (S304). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with a random number value of 1 stored in the first winning random number table for low probability times. Only "7" is set as the random number value for a special symbol jackpot, and when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches "7", it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. After acquiring the special symbol lottery results, the process moves to S305.

In the process of S305, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result obtained by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and if it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot (S305: Yes). ), the display mode at the time of a jackpot is set based on the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 (S306). More specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random value stored in the first winning type selection table 202c, and the jackpot of two types of special symbols (jackpot A to K), the jackpot type is determined. As mentioned above, if the corresponding symbol type is special symbol 1 (special symbol 1) and the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19", jackpot A (the number of rounds is In the 15th round, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, it is determined that the gaming state after the jackpot is a jackpot type in which the probability variable state of the special symbol is set (see Figure 107), and the number of "20 to 79" is If it is within the range, it is determined to be a jackpot B (a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10 and the game state after the jackpot is set to a special symbol probability variable state regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot).

In addition, if the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "80 to 114", jackpot C (the number of rounds is 10, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot ends) If it is in the range of 115 to 164, the jackpot D (the number of rounds is 5 and the jackpot is won regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot). It is determined that the game state after the end is a jackpot type set to a special symbol probability variable state.

Furthermore, if the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "165 to 199", the jackpot E (the number of rounds is 5 and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a low probability state and is not a time saving state) (if it is a normal state), the normal state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot ends, and if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is other than the normal state (high probability state or time saving state), after the jackpot ends. It is determined that the game state is a jackpot type in which the time saving state is set 100 times (see FIG. 107).

Also, when the corresponding symbol type is special symbol 2 (special symbol 2), as in the case of special symbol 1 described above, the content specified in the first winning type selection table 202c (see FIG. 107) is determined. Then, jackpot F to jackpot K are determined.

In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A to K). In addition, the jackpot type (jackpot A to K) is set as the stop type in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of a jackpot is determined (S307). When the fluctuation pattern is determined in the process of S307, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation performance on the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays the third pattern until it stops at the jackpot symbol. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuations such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Note that the relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 108), as described above. When the process of S307 ends, the process moves to S310.

On the other hand, in the process of S305, if it is determined that the special symbol is not a jackpot (it is a miss) (S305: No), a display mode when the special symbol is a miss is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the symbol, and the special symbol reserved ball storage area (special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area Based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of 203b), the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined as whether it is a reach that is out of front and back, a reach other than out of front and back, or a reach that is not out of front and back. Set whether it is out of line.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability variable state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability times. and set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete off is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach is set other than front and back out, and "98 , 99'', the front and back off reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with a special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability times. do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete off is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", reach is set other than front and back off, and "98 , 99'', the front and back off reach is set.

Next, a variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until it stops at a missed symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, as in the process of S308, by comparing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 and the specified contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 108), normal reach, Determine the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuations such as super reach, special reach, etc. When the process of S309 ends, the process moves to S310.

In the process of S310 executed after the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, a variation pattern command is set for notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or the process of S309 ( S310). Next, a stop type command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in S306 or S308 (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the process of S1101 of the main process (see FIG. 136). be done. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as is to the display control device 114. When the process of S311 is finished, the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127).

Next, the variation number subtraction process (S221) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 129. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing this variation number subtraction process (S221). In this variation number subtraction process (S221), the time saving counter 203h and the specified number of times counter 203j are subtracted based on the end of the variation of the special symbol.

The time saving medium counter 203h is a counter that measures the remaining number of times the time saving state is set, and the number of time saving times is set when the gaming state shifts to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot. The prescribed number of times counter 203j is a counter for updating each scenario set in the state transition table 202f (see FIG. 111 and FIG. 112), and is a counter for updating each scenario set in the state transition table 202f (see FIG. 111 and FIG. 112), and updates the prescribed number of times based on the contents of the state transition table set after the end of the jackpot. is set.

When the process in FIG. 129 is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S401). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is larger than 0 (S401: Yes), that is, if the current time-saving state is present, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S402), and the time-saving counter 203h is A remaining time shortening number command indicating the value of is set (S403). The remaining time shortening number commands set here are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the process of S1101 of the main process (see FIG. 136). be done. The audio lamp control device 113 extracts the current gaming state, that is, the remaining time reduction number of the time reduction state from the remaining time reduction number command received as part of the status command, and stores it in the state storage area 223e.

When the process of S403 is finished, next, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 0 or, in other words, the value of the working time saving medium counter 203h becomes 0 as a result of subtracting 1 from the value of the working time saving medium counter 203h through the process of S402. It is determined whether the height is high (S404). In the process of S404, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S404: Yes), the gaming state is set to the normal state, a corresponding status command is set (S405), and the process moves to the process of S406. .

On the other hand, in the process of S404, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0 (1 or more) (S404: No), the process of S405 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S406. In addition, in the process of S401, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving medium counter 203h is not greater than 0 (is 0), the process related to the time-saving medium counter 203h (S402 to S405) is skipped and the process proceeds to S406. .

In the process of S406, it is determined whether the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is greater than 0 (S406). In the process of S406, if it is determined that the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is larger than 0 (S406: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S407), and the remaining value indicating the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is A variation number command is set (S408). The remaining variation number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the process of S1101 of the main process (see FIG. 136). The audio lamp control device 113 extracts the remaining number of fluctuations of each state status, that is, the remaining number of fluctuations until the gaming state or the referenced fluctuation pattern selection table is switched, from the remaining fluctuation number command received as part of the state command. , is stored in the state storage area 223e.

When the process of S408 is finished, next, it is determined whether the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is 0 or, in other words, the value of the specified number of times counter 203j becomes 0 as a result of subtracting 1 from the value of the specified number of times counter 203j by the process of S407. It is determined whether the height is high (S409). If it is determined that the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is 0 (S409: Yes), a state transition is performed according to the state transition table 202f, and a corresponding state command is set (S410).

In the process of S410, for example, the state transition 4 table 202f4 is set as the state transition table 202f, and the value "4" of the specified number of times counter 203j set for the state status ST3a is subtracted to "0", When the state status transitions from ST3a to ST3, information indicating the state status ST3 and information indicating the newly set specified number of times "96" are set as a state command.

When the process of S410 is finished, the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is set according to the set state transition table 202f (S411), and this process ends. In addition, in the process of S406, if it is determined that the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S406: No), the processes related to the specified number of times counter 203j (S407 to S411) are skipped. This process ends.

Next, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 130. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing this starting winning process (S105). This starting winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and determines whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140, When there is a starting prize, the number of reserved balls for each special symbol is added, the values of the corresponding various counters are stored in each reserved ball storage area, and from the values of the stored various counters, the number of reserved balls for each special symbol is added. Execute pre-reading processing to determine lottery results in advance.

When the starting prize winning process (S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a ball has won a prize (starting winning) in the first ball entry opening 64 (S501). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (S501: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (number of times N1 of reservation of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S502). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this first control example) (S503).

In the process of S503, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S503: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (S504). . Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d that has been changed by the calculation is set (S505).

The held ball number command set here (special figure 1 held ball number command) is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the main processing (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. In the external output process (S1101), it is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b1 of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the number of pending pitches command in the process of S505, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second win updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are set. Each value of the random number counter C4 is stored in the first area among the empty holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S506). In addition, in the process of S506, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

On the other hand, in the process of S501, if it is determined that the ball has not entered the first winning hole (ball entrance) 64 (S501: No), or in the process of S503, the special symbol 1 reserved ball When it is determined that the value (N1) of the number counter 203d is not less than 4 (it is 4) (S503: No), the start winning process regarding the special symbol 1 is skipped and the process moves to S507.

Next, in each process of S507 to S512, the same process as each process of S501 to S506 is executed for the prize (ball entered) into the second ball entry opening 140. The only difference between the processes of S507 to S512 is that the process of holding the reserved ball corresponding to the winning of the second ball entrance 140 is executed, and other processes are different from the processes of S501 to S506. Since they are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. Furthermore, when each process from S507 to S512 is completed, a prefetch process is executed (S513), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, a prefetch process (S513), which is one process in the start winning process (see FIG. 130) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing this prefetching process (S513). In this pre-reading process (S513), when there is a new prize (ball entered) in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140, the special symbol lottery result for that prize (ball entered) is determined in advance. Processing is executed to set a command for determining (pre-reading) and outputting the pre-determined (pre-reading) result to the audio lamp control device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the command set here (winning (ball winning) information command), the performance for the winning (ball hitting) information that is stored in reserve is based on the winning winning (ball hitting) information. It becomes possible to execute the special symbol variation at a time before it is executed.

In this pre-reading process (FIG. 131, S513), first, it is determined whether there is a new prize (ball entered) in the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 140 (S601). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning (ball) in the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 140 (S601: No), the process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a new winning ball in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140 (S601: Yes), from the special symbol reserved ball storage area (special symbol 1 reserved ball Storage area 203a, special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b) The value of the first winning random number counter C1 corresponding to this winning, the value of the first winning type counter C2, the value of the stop type selection counter C3, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 A value is acquired (S602).

Next, among the determination results specified in the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 106(a)), a winning determination result corresponding to the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is acquired (S603), Among the determination results defined in the first winning type selection table 202c (see FIG. 107), the winning type determination result corresponding to the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 is acquired (S604).

When the process of S604 is finished, the stop type determination result corresponding to the value of the acquired stop type selection counter C3 is acquired from among the determination results specified in the stop type table (S605), and the change pattern selection table 202d is Among the determination results specified in (see FIG. 108), the fluctuation type determination result corresponding to the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is acquired (S606).

Then, hit determination result information indicating the hit determination result, hit type information indicating the hit type determination result, stop type information indicating the stop type determination result, and fluctuation indicating the fluctuation type determination result obtained in the processing of S603 to S606 described above. A winning information command including type information is set (S607), and the process ends.

The prize winning (ball winning) information acquired in the process of S602 described above is information for indicating in advance the lottery result when a special symbol lottery is executed for a new winning prize (ball winning). Good if you have it. The lottery result may be selected in advance using various selection tables used for special symbol lottery, or the same selection table as the various selection tables described above may be provided for pre-reading processing.

In addition, in the process of S607, the winning (ball entering) information command includes gaming state information for indicating the gaming state when the special symbol variation is executed based on the winning (ball entering) information that is the target of the current pre-reading process. May be included. Here, the game status information will be explained. In this control example, the normal state, probability variable state, and time saving state can be set as the gaming states, and the special symbol lottery results (jackpot determination results, jackpot type, and fluctuation pattern) can be set as the gaming states. ) and the display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 set by the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to be different.

Furthermore, in this control example, the game state is configured to be changed based on the number of changes in the special symbol. Specifically, when the time saving state (100 times) is set as the gaming state, the gaming state changes from the time saving state to the normal state on the condition that the number of changes of the special symbol reaches 100 times in that state. will be migrated.

In this control example configured in this way, it is determined whether or not a special symbol lottery based on winnings (balls entered) that are subject to prefetch processing is executed during the time saving state, and the determination result is used as game state information. The configuration is such that the information is included in the prize winning (ball winning) information command and notified to the audio lamp control device 113. As a result, while the gaming state is in the time-saving state, the special symbol lottery (fluctuating) based on the ball that has won (entered) the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 140 is changed to the normal gaming state. Even if the special symbol lottery (variation) is executed after the transition, it is possible to set a prize winning (ball winning) information command corresponding to the gaming state when the special symbol lottery (variation) is executed. Furthermore, as the winning (ball entering) information command, only the winning information command corresponding to the gaming state when the special symbol lottery (variation) corresponding to the winning (ball entering) information command is executed is set, and the audio lamp Since the data can be output to the control device 113, the amount of data output from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

Note that the method of setting the prize winning (ball entering) information command by pre-reading processing is not limited to the content of this control example, and may be set by the audio lamp control device 113 based on the content of the received prize winning (ball entering) information command. Any configuration can be used as long as it can suppress the problem that the content of the performance (pre-reading performance) to be performed is inconsistent with the lottery (variation) result of the special symbol that is changed by the transition of the game state.

For example, when setting a winning (ball hitting) information command in the pre-reading process of the main control device 110, the winning (ball hitting) information command corresponding to a plurality of gaming states can be set, and the audio lamp control device 113 determines the gaming state when the special symbol lottery (variation) corresponding to the prize winning (ball entering) information command is executed, and setting the look-ahead effect based on the winning (ball entering) information corresponding to the determination result. It may be configured to do so. Thereby, in the pre-read processing of the main control device 110, there is no need to perform the processing of pre-reading the gaming state, so that the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

In addition, the winning (ball winning) information commands corresponding to the plurality of gaming states mentioned above include, for example, the jackpot judgment result, the first judgment result that the jackpot will be won regardless of the playing state, and the game state that is certain to change. The second determination result is that the jackpot is won only in the case of the state, and the third determination result is that the jackpot is not won regardless of the gaming state, and the sound lamp control device 113 side is made to correspond to the gaming state. Alternatively, the information indicating the value of each counter obtained in the pre-reading process may be output directly as a winning (ball hit) information command, and the voice lamp control device 113 may be configured to be able to determine the lottery result based on the received information (information indicating the value of each counter acquired by the main control device 110 in the pre-reading process).

Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and is performed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and is used to display the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device 83 and the variation display associated with the second ball entrance 140. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 140a.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S701). When a normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting, the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning symbol, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 140a attached to the second ball entrance 140 is performed. This includes during the process. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is a hit (S701: Yes), this process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S701: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol pending ball number counter 203f (the number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S703). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S704: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S704: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S705).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the areas within each area are as follows: 1st area on hold → execution area, 2nd area on hold → 1st area on hold, 3rd area on hold → 2nd area on hold, 4th area on hold → 3rd area on hold. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S707).

Next, it is determined whether the current state is a normal symbol time saving state (S708). Specifically, if the value of the time saving medium counter 203h in the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or if the probability change flag 203g is on, it is determined that the time saving state of the normal symbol is in effect, and the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 0, Moreover, if the probability change flag 203g is off, it is determined that the state is a normal state with normal symbols (not a time saving state).

In the process of S708, if it is determined that the time saving state is for normal symbols (S708: Yes), the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S707 and the second winning random number table 202b for high probability times are used. Based on this, the lottery result as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not is obtained (S709). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202b for high probability times. As mentioned above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol win, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is out of place (see 202b in FIG. 106(b)).

On the other hand, in the process of S708, if it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (S708: No), the value of the second win random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S707 and the second win for low probability Based on the random number table 202b, the lottery result as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not is obtained (S710). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202b for low probability times. As mentioned above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 6", it is determined that it is a normal symbol win, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 7 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is out of place (see 202b in FIG. 106(b)).

Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result obtained through the process of S709 or S710 is a normal symbol win (S711), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is a win (S711: Yes) , sets the display mode at the time of winning (S712). In the process of S712, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the "○" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the process proceeds to S714. .

On the other hand, in the process of S711, if it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S711: No), a display mode when the symbol is out is set (S713). In the process of S713, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the "x" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of failure is completed, the process moves to S714.

In the process of S714, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S714), and if the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S714: Yes), the variable time of the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is determined. is set to 3 seconds (S715), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S714, if it is determined that the normal state is the normal state of the symbol (S714: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S716), and this processing end. In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is high (when the time is short), the time of the variable display is very short, from 30 seconds to 3 seconds, compared to when the probability is low for normal symbols (when the time is short). Therefore, the frequency of drawing of normal symbols increases. Therefore, as the frequency of winning in the lottery of normal symbols increases, the electric accessory 140a attached to the second ball entry port 140 becomes easier to open, so that it is easier for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 140. state.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the gaming state of the normal symbol is configured such that the normal state is set when the winning is won during the jackpot of the special symbol. With this configuration, during a jackpot that is advantageous to the player, the gaming state of the normal symbols also becomes advantageous, and it is possible to prevent excessive benefits from being given to the player. In addition, the period in which the variable winning device 65 is easy to release (special symbol jackpot period) and the period in which the electric accessory 140a is easy to release (normal symbol winning period) overlap, and the variable winning device 65 is most advantageous for the player. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the open electric accessory 140a obstructs the ball from entering the device 65.

To explain the above-mentioned contents in detail, when the electric accessory 140a is provided in the first channel through which the ball flows down so that the variable winning device 65 can win, the electric accessory 140a is opened during the jackpot period. As a result, the balls flowing down the first flow path end up winning the electric accessory 140a, and there is a problem in that it becomes impossible to win enough balls into the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot period. Therefore, for example, an electric accessory 140a is placed at a lower position (downstream side) of the variable winning device 65, and the ball that flows down the first channel during the jackpot period (during the period when the variable winning device 65 is open) The above-mentioned problem can be solved by using a configuration that makes it easier for the variable winning device 65 to win a prize, but in this case, there is a problem in that the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 is restricted.

On the other hand, in this control example, the normal symbol is shifted to a low probability state (normal state) during the jackpot of the special symbol, so the electric accessory 140a becomes difficult to release during the jackpot period, which solves the above-mentioned problem. can do.

In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S717). In addition, the fluctuation time here is the time preset by the process of S715 or the process of S716 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S717, if it is determined that the variable time has not elapsed (S717: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S717, if it is determined that the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S717: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S718). In the process of S718, if the normal symbol lottery is a win and the display mode has been set in the process of S712, the "○" symbol as the second symbol will be stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is a loss and the display mode has been set by the process of S713, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is displayed in a stopped state (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S718, when the second symbol display update process (see S1107) of the main process (see FIG. 136) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 will be changed. When the process is finished, the stopped symbols (normal symbols) are stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S712 or the process of S713.

Next, when the currently running variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83, the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol win. (S719). If the current lottery result is a hit for the normal symbol (S719: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current state is in the time saving state for the normal symbol (S720), and if it is determined that it is in the time saving state (S720: Yes), sets "1 second x 2 times" as the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 140a attached to the second ball entrance 140 (S722), and moves to the process of S723. . On the other hand, in the process of S720, if it is determined that the normal state of the symbol is normal (not the time saving state) (S720: No), the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 140a attached to the second ball entrance 140 are determined. , "0.2 seconds x 1 time" is set (S721), and the process moves to S723.

In the process of S723, the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 140a is set for the time and number of openings set in the process of S721 or S722 (S723), and this process is ended. When the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 140a is set by the process of S723, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S1105) of the main process (see FIG. 136) is executed next, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 140a is set. The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 140a is continued until the opening time and the number of openings set in the process of S721 or the process of S722 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S719, if it is determined that the current lottery result is out of the normal symbols (S719: No), the process of S720 to S723 is skipped and the process ends.

Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 133. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and determines whether or not a ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, and determines whether the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4.

In the through gate passage process (S107), first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S801). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal ball entry opening (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of pending variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S802). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this first control example) (S803).

Even if the ball does not pass through the normal ball entry port 67 (S801: No), or even if the ball passes through the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is If the number is not less than 4 (S803: No), the process ends immediately. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S801: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved pitch number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S804). Then, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is set to the first of the empty holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S805), and the process ends. In addition, in the process of S805, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Through this NMI interrupt processing, information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S901), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

Note that the above NMI interrupt process is similarly executed by the payout control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 135, a startup process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when power is turned on to main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1001). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operational, a wait process (1 second in this first control example) is performed. Execute (S1002). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

After that, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1004), and if it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process moves to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is further determined whether power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005), and if it is not stored (S1005: No). , since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process also moves to S1012 in this case.

If power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S1006), and if the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S1007: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process also moves to S812 in such a case. Note that, as will be described later in the process of S1114 in FIG. 136, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1012). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and becomes ready to start payout control of game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1013, S1014).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014) is executed. In addition, in the case where power-off occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization processing (S1013, S1014) is similarly executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process moves to S1010.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), the power-off occurrence information is stored (S1005: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( (S1007: Yes), clearing the power-off occurrence information while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1008). Next, a payout return command upon power restoration is transmitted to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes ready to start payout control of game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S1010, a production permission command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 to permit the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 to execute various productions. Next, interrupts are permitted (S1011), and the process moves to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above startup processing will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main process, the main processes of the game are executed. As an overview, each process of S1101 to S1107 is executed as a periodic process of 4 msec period, and the counter update process of S1110 and S1111 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main processing, first, while executing the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 126), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral). (S1101). Specifically, it is determined whether there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and if there is winning detection information, it is sent to the payout control device 111 to correspond to the number of balls acquired. Send the prize ball command. In addition, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127) or the start winning process (see FIG. 130) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning information command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 130) is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Furthermore, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 137) are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this first control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103), and then, when the special symbol is in a jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or the variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning apparatus 65 is executed (S1104). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning hole 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning hole 65a has elapsed or whether a prescribed number of balls have entered the specific winning hole 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. This opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in this first control example, the jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling the opening and closing of the electric accessory 140a attached to the second ball entrance 140 is executed (S1105). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, when the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 140a is set by the process of S723 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 132), opening/closing control of the electric accessory 140a is started. In addition, the opening/closing control of this electric accessory 140a is continued until the opening time and number of openings set in the process of S721 or the process of S722 in the normal symbol variation process are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1106). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 128), a variation display according to the variation pattern is changed to the first symbol display. Starting at device 37. In this first control example, for example, if the currently lit LED of the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is red until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation is started, that red LED Turn off the light and turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. turns off the light and lights up the red LED.

Note that the main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed every time the main processing is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is Change the lighting color. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 128) ends, the first symbol display device 37, and the stopped symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S306 or S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 128). A stop indication (lit indication) is given on the device 37.

Next, a second symbol display update process is executed to update the display on the second symbol display device 83 (S1107). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set by the process of S715 or S716 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 132), the second symbol display device 83 Start variable display. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the "○" symbol and the "x" symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. In addition, the second symbol display update process is executed in the second symbol display device 83 when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S718 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 132). The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S712 or S713 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 132). (lit display).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: No), a power outage signal is sent from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this first control example) has elapsed since the start of the current main process. S1109) If the predetermined time has already passed (S1109: Yes), the process moves to S1101, and each process from S1101 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the current main processing (S1109: No), the The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1110, S1111).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1110). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (238, 239 in this first control example), it becomes 0. clear. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process in S1102 (S1111).

Here, since the execution time of each process from S1101 to S1107 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using this remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e. , the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S1108, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power is turned off, and the power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 134 has been executed, so the processing at power-off after S1112 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1112), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). and transmits it (S1113). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is saved (S1114), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1115), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

Note that the process in S1108 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to changes in the state of the game performed in S1101 to S1107, or at the end of one cycle of the processes in S1110 and S1111 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of a power outage is checked at the timing when each setting is completed, so when recovering from a power off state, the processing must be performed after the startup processing is completed. The process can be started from the process of S1101. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1101, as in the case where it is initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is turned off, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved. By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1101. Therefore, the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 137, the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1104). This jackpot control process (S1104) is executed during the main process (see FIG. 136), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol, it executes various effects according to the jackpot, and controls the execution of a specific prize opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening) 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether a special symbol jackpot is started (S1201). Specifically, if the process of S219 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127) is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is to be started. In the process of S1201, if a special symbol jackpot is to be started (S1201: Yes), an opening command is set (S1202), and this process ends.

The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used for voice lamp control during external output processing (S1101) of the main processing (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 201. The information is sent to the device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the opening command, it transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the opening effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1201: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1203). During a special symbol jackpot, a special symbol jackpot is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81 (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and a special symbol jackpot is being displayed. This includes during a predetermined period of time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1203, if the special symbol is not hitting the jackpot (S1203: No), the process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1203, if the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (S1203: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1204). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1204: Yes), the specific winning a prize opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened (S1205), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1206). After setting the round number command, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the audio lamp during the external output processing (S1101) of the main processing (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the audio ramp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1204, if it is determined that it is not the start time of a new round (S1204: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is satisfied (S1207). Specifically, if a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S1207, if the conditions for closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a are satisfied (S1207: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is closed (S1208), and this process ends. do. On the other hand, if the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1207: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending performance (S1209). Specifically, when a special game state in which a larger amount of prize balls is paid out than usual (all round games set as jackpots (for example, 15 rounds)) ends, the ending effect is started. It is determined that

In the process of S1209, if it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1209: Yes), an ending command is set (S1210), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used for voice lamp control during external output processing (S1101) of the main processing (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 201. The information is sent to the device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect.

In the process of S1209, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1209: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1211), and if it is not the end timing of the ending effect. If it is determined (S1211: No), the process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1211, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1211: Yes), that is, if it is determined that it is the timing that all the jackpot games have ended, based on the first winning type selection table 202c. Then, the contents of the probability change flag 203g and the time saving counter 203h are set (S1212). Through the process of S1212, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot corresponding to the won jackpot type (presence or absence of probability change state, presence or absence of time saving state, and setting of the number of time saving times) is set.

Next, with reference to the jackpot transition setting table 202e, a state transition destination is selected based on the jackpot type won this time and the gaming state at the time of winning (see FIG. 110), and a state transition corresponding to the selected state transition destination is performed. The state status and the specified number of times counter 203j are acquired based on the table 202f (S1213). For example, if "Jackpot G" is won as the jackpot type in a state where the gaming state is set to "High probability time saving (probable variable state)", "Status transition 2" is selected as the state transition destination, and the state Among the transition tables 202f (see FIG. 111(a)), the state transition 2 table 202f2 (see FIG. 111(c)) corresponding to "state transition 2" is referred to.

After that, a state specification command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 113 of the gaming state (high probability state (probability variable state), low probability state (normal state)) of the special symbol after the jackpot ends ( S1214), sets the end of the jackpot (S1215), and ends this process.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 138 to 154. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started upon power-on, and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 138, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When startup processing is executed, first, initial settings associated with power-on are executed (S3001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current startup processing may be interrupted by an instantaneous voltage drop (instantaneous power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage"), and the power-off processing in S3118 (see Figure 139). ) is started during execution (S3002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 139, upon receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110 (S3115: Yes in FIG. 139), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S3118. Before executing the power-off processing, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S3118 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S3002: No), the current startup processing was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred, and S3118 in FIG. The MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is only reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). It is something that Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S3003).

Confirmation of data destruction in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword "55AAh" has been written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S3006. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed. If data destruction in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S3003: Yes), the process moves to S3004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S3003: No), the process moves to S3008.

Note that if the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword "55AAh" will not be stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 will be lost due to the power shutoff). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S3003: Yes), and the process moves to S3004. On the other hand, the current start-up process was started after a momentary power outage occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S3118 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. When the process is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S3003: No), and the process moves to S3008.

On the other hand, in the process of S3002, if it is determined that the power-off processing flag is on (S3002: Yes), the current startup process is performed after a momentary power outage occurs, and the power-off process in S3118 is performed. The process is started when the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset during execution of the process. In such a case, since the power-off process is in the middle of execution, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S3004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S3004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S3004). The checking method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This write and check for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of the RAM 223 clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3005: Yes), a keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and RAM destruction check data is set (S3006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S3005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S3007), and an endless loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the audio output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. You may also do so.

In the process of S3008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (S3008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S3118 in FIG. 139 is executed (see S3117 in FIG. 139). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing in S3118 is executed, so the reason for reaching the processing in S3008 with the power-off flag on is that the current startup processing is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after a power outage has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S3118 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S3008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared in order to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S3009), and the process moves to S3010. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process reaches S3008 with the power-off flag turned off is because the current startup process was started after the power was completely shut off, so the process goes through S3004 to S3006 and then S3008. This is a case where the process has been started, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S3008: No), S3009, which is a process for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped and the process moves to S3010.

Note that the reason why the clearing process in S3009 is skipped is because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S3004 when the process reaches the process in S3008 from S3004 through the process in S3006. If only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and startup processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because it is possible to continue controlling the

In the process of S3010, an initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S3010). Next, interrupt permission is set (S3011), and time setting processing is executed to set reference timekeeping information (reference time) for determining the execution period (specific time zone) of the time effect (S3012). , move to main processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether 1 msec or more has passed since the main process was started or the previous process of S3101 was executed (S3101), and it is determined whether 1 msec or more has passed since the main process was started or the previous process of S3101 was executed. If not (S3101: No), the process moves to S3113 without performing the processes of S3102 to S3112. In the process of S3101, determining whether 1 ms has elapsed is because S3102 to S3112 are mainly related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in short cycles (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process in S3113 and the variable display setting process in S3114 in a short cycle. By executing the process in S3113 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent failure to receive commands sent from the main controller 110, and by executing the process in S3114 in a short cycle, commands received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on this, settings regarding variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S3101 (S3101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of S3103 to S3114 are sent to the display control device 114 (S3102 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set to match the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S3108, which will be described later (S3103), and then a power-on notification process is executed (S3104). The power-on notification process is to notify that the power has been turned on for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on. be exposed. Further, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S3105 without providing notification through the power-on notification process.

In the process of S3105, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and then a pending number display update process is executed (S3106). In the customer waiting production process, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player, settings are made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and this setting is used as a command to control the display. device 114. In the reservation number display update process, a process is performed in which a reservation lamp (not shown) is lit according to the values of the special symbol 1 reservation ball number counter 223b1 and the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223b2.

Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is executed (S3107). In this frame button input monitoring/production process, in order to enhance the production effect, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored, and when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed, a corresponding response is performed. This is a process for setting effects. Here, the contents of the frame button input monitoring/presentation processing (S3107) will be explained.

In this frame button input monitoring/presentation processing (S3107), first, it is determined whether the valid period flag indicating that the press of the frame button 22 is validly treated is set on. Here, if the validity period flag is set to on, then it is determined whether pressing of the frame button 22 is detected. If it is determined that the press of the frame button 22 has been detected, a display press command corresponding to the button press is set, and the process ends.

Note that the above-mentioned validity period flag is provided for each performance executed based on the depression of the frame button 22. For example, if the period is such that the background of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed based on the press of the frame button 22, the validity period flag (first validity period flag) is turned on to indicate that. , and if it is a period in which an operation performance that changes the variation performance mode of the third symbol based on the press of the frame button 22 is being executed (a period in which the press of the frame button 22 is effectively accepted in the operation performance), the A valid period flag (second valid period flag) to indicate this is set to on.

Furthermore, the plurality of validity period flags described above have a predetermined priority order corresponding to the benefit value given when the player presses the frame button 22, and the plurality of validity period flags are set to on. If it is, the processing based on the depression of the frame button 22 is executed based on the validity period flag with a higher priority among the plurality of validity period flags set to on.

With this configuration, if the periods during which the presses of the frame button 22 are effectively accepted overlap, for example, the period during which the background can be changed (the period when the first valid period flag is set to on) and the period when the operation effect is is executed based on the press of the frame button 22 based on the second validity period flag that is set to have a high priority when the period in which it is executed overlaps with the period in which the second validity period flag is set to ON. Since the process is executed, it is possible to perform a performance with a high bonus value for the player, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, the effect executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is similarly configured to execute an effect to indicate that the second validity period flag is set to on. Since only the performance corresponding to the validity period set with high priority is executed, the player can check the operation timing while watching the performance being executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. The user can press the frame button 22 without making a mistake. Therefore, it is possible to execute a performance that is easy for the player to understand.

Note that in this control example, as a method of setting priorities for each validity period flag, a configuration is used in which a priority is set in advance for each validity period flag, but other configurations may also be used. In the button input monitoring/presentation process (S3107), it may be configured to determine whether the validity period flag is set to on in order of priority. As a result, even if multiple validity period flags are set on at the same time, the process based on the press of the frame button 22 is executed based on the validity period flag with a high priority, so that the player It is possible to perform a performance with a high bonus value for the user, and to enhance the performance effect.

When the frame button input monitoring/production process (S3107) is finished, lamp editing process is executed (S3108), and then sound editing/output process is executed (S3109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S3109, liquid crystal presentation execution management process is executed (S3110). In the liquid crystal presentation execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S3108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing/output processing in S3109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81.

When the process of S3110 is completed, various counter update processes are executed (S3111). This various counter updating process is a process for updating various counters used in the audio lamp control device 113. Specifically, each counter value of the first performance counter 223y1 to the sixth performance counter 223y6 included in the performance counter group 223y is updated so as not to be synchronized. The first performance counter 223y1 to the sixth performance counter 223y6 are counters used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various performances, etc., respectively. The first effect counter 223y1 to the sixth effect counter 223y6 are composed of 1-byte loop counters that are updated in the range of 0 to 149, and each time the main process (see FIG. 136) is executed (1 ms The update process is executed to obtain a different value each time).

In addition, in this first control example, when selecting multiple performances based on the value of the production counter, multiple production counters with different update values are used, so when multiple productions are selected within the main process. However, for example, if multiple effects are selected in different processes within one main process, If you want to synchronize the two, you can configure the presentation mode to be selected using the same presentation counter.

In addition, in this first control example, a plurality of counters (first effect counter 223y1 to sixth effect counter 223y6) with different update patterns are used, but for example, the update value of one effect counter is used to generate a random value. The configuration may be such that the calculated value is used to select each effect. With this configuration, the number of counters included in the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced. In this case, for example, among the updated values of the production counter, the value of the first lower digit, the value of the second lower digit, the lower one digit and the lower value of the value obtained by multiplying the value of the first digit by the value of the second digit. It is preferable to calculate each value so that it has no regularity, such as a value obtained by adding the value of the second digit.

When the process of S3111 is completed, the effect update process (S3112) is executed next. This effect update process is a process for updating various effects set by the audio lamp control device 113 based on the elapsed period. In this performance update process (S3112), control is executed for a performance that is executed regardless of changes in special symbols (for example, a display extension performance that is executed after the end of the jackpot). A detailed explanation of this effect update process (S3112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 154.

In the process of S3113, a command determination process is executed to perform a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 (S3113). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 140. After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S3114). In the variation display setting process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a production corresponding to the special symbol variation (a variation production of the third symbol and other productions), the variation display setting process is based on a variation pattern command received from the main controller 110. A display variation pattern command is generated and set. As a result, the command is sent to display control device 114. Note that details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 147.

When the process of S3114 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S3115). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. In the process of S3115, if it is determined that the power-off occurrence information is stored (S3115: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S3117), and the power-off process is executed. (S3118). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S3119), and the process is then looped endlessly. In the power-off processing, the generation of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. It also erases the memory of the power-off occurrence information.

On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S3115 (S3115: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S3116), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S3116: No), the process returns to S3101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3116: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM has been destroyed and the process loops endlessly, the main process will not be executed, so the display by the third symbol display device 81 will not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the command determination process (S3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the contents of this command determination process (S3113). This command determination process (S3113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 136) and is a process for executing control according to the type of command received from the main control device 110.

In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S3201). If it is determined that a fluctuation pattern command has been received (S3201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3202), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command ( S3203), the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to in order to determine the detailed display mode of the variation pattern in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147), which will be described later. It is then used to set a display variation pattern command that notifies the display control device 114 of the start of a variation effect and the type of variation pattern.

On the other hand, in the process of S3201, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S3201: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3204). If a stop type command is received (S3204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d in the RAM 223 is set to on (S3205), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S3206), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referenced when a variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) to be described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3204, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S3204: No), then it is determined whether the held pitch count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3207). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls command has been received (S3207: Yes), the number of reserved balls counter of the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) corresponding to the received number of reserved balls command is , stores the value included in the received held pitch count command (S3208), and ends this process. Specifically, if the number of reserved balls command received this time is the number of reserved balls command corresponding to the special symbol 1, the number of reserved balls counter 203d of the special symbol 1 of the main controller 110 is calculated from the received number of reserved balls command. The value (the number of pending times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol 1) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223b1 of the audio lamp control device 113. On the other hand, if the held ball number command received this time is the held ball number command corresponding to the special symbol 2, the value of the special symbol 2 held ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 (special The number of pending balls N2) of the variable display in the symbol 2 is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 pending ball counter 223b2 of the audio lamp control device 113.

In addition, when any value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 is changed in the process of S3208, the updated counter value is notified to the display control device 114. A command for displaying the number of held pitches is set. With this command for the number of reserved balls for display, the actual number of reserved balls can be notified to the display control device 114, so that the correct number of reserved symbols can always be displayed in the reserved display area Dn4 of the third symbol display device 81. It can be displayed.

On the other hand, in the process of S3207, if it is determined that the number of reserved pitches command has not been received (S3207: No), it is determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3209). If it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S3209: Yes), winning information command processing is executed (S3210), and this processing ends.

Here, the winning information command process (S3210) will be explained with reference to FIG. 141. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information command process (S3210). This winning information command process (S3210) is a process that is executed when a winning information command is received from the main controller 110, and the information included in the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. Executes processing for storing the winning information in the area (reserved storage area corresponding to the winning information command).

Here, the information included in the winning information command is information targeted at winning balls, such as information regarding the judgment result of the special symbol, information regarding the stop type, and information regarding the fluctuation pattern, but other information may also be included. For example, winning information regarding balls that have already won prizes (for which winning information commands have been received in the past) may be included.

When the winning information command process (S3210) is executed, first, the received winning information command information (pre-read information) is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S3231). As described above, the winning information storage area 223a can store a maximum of 4 winning information commands for special symbol 1, a maximum of 4 winning information commands for special symbol 2, and a total of 8 winning information commands. The winning information commands are stored in designated storage areas according to the order in which the winning information commands are received.

Next, it is determined whether there is any variation type information (variation pattern information of reach or more) with a variation time of 60 seconds or longer as information (pre-read information) included in the winning information command received this time (S3232). In the process of S3232, if it is determined that there is no variation type information (variation pattern information of reach or more) with a variation time of 60 seconds or more (S3232: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is fluctuation type information with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds or more (fluctuation pattern information of reach or more) (S3232: Yes), then specific performance C (see FIG. 101), that is, a predetermined change from the start of fluctuation. It is determined whether there is variation type information indicating a specific performance (for example, a performance for causing the player to operate the frame button 22) to be executed within a period (for example, within 5 seconds) (S3233).

Here, if it is determined that there is a specific effect C (S3233: Yes), then it is determined whether the remaining variable time of the currently executed variable display is 10 seconds or more (S3234). In the process of S3234, based on the time (elapsed time with respect to the set variable time) managed by the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S3110) executed in the main process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 139). The remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display is determined.

In the process of S3234, if it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is 10 seconds or more (S3234: Yes), this means that a period in which a precursor effect can be added to the fluctuation display being executed has been secured, so the display addition is performed. The portent command is set (S3235), the portent setting flag 223t is set on (S3236), and this processing is ended. By executing the above-described process, it becomes possible to execute a precursory effect across a plurality of variable displays as a suggestive effect targeting the specific effect C to be executed in the next and subsequent variable displays. As a result, a specific effect that is executed at the beginning of a variable display (for example, a specific effect C that is executed 5 seconds after the start of variation (see Figure 101)), that is, a period in which a suggestive effect is executed when only one variable display is performed. Since it is possible to execute a suggestive effect using multiple variable displays even for a specific effect that is executed at a timing that cannot be secured, it is possible to increase the frequency of occurrence of the suggestive effect, and also to limit the range in which the specific effect can be set. It becomes possible to expand the display, increasing the degree of freedom in presentation regarding variable display.

In addition, in the process of S3234, if it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is less than 10 seconds (S3234: No), that is, if it is not possible to secure a period in which a suggestion effect can be added to the fluctuation display being executed, This process ends without changing the display mode of the variable display. Here, if it is not possible to secure a period in which a suggestive effect can be added to the fluctuating display being executed (S3234: No), the variation corresponding to the winning information determined to have a countdown effect in the current winning information command processing (S3210) When setting a display, a specific performance is set within a range in which the suggestive performance can be executed with only one fluctuating display (for example, a range where 15 seconds or more have passed from the start of the fluctuation), and the suggestive performance is set.

With this configuration, the timing at which the winning information is generated (the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance The appearance of the countdown performance can be varied depending on the timing when the ball enters the ball at 140, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In this control example, a specific effect set at the beginning of the fluctuating display (for example, a specific effect C (see FIG. 101) executed 5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation) is set at another period (for example, It is stipulated that the performance indicates that the expectation level of jackpot is higher than the specific performance (which is executed 20 seconds after the start of the fluctuation). In other words, it is stipulated that the variation pattern that corresponds to the jackpot winning of the special symbol is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern that allows the specific effect C to be executed.

Thereby, when the suggestive performance is executed across a plurality of fluctuation displays, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player that he will win the jackpot with the next fluctuation. Further, it is possible to encourage the player to actively reserve special symbols so that a suggestive performance that spans a plurality of variations is executed.

In addition, in this control example, as described above, multiple variable displays are straddled based on the winning information included in the received winning information command and the timing of receiving the winning information command (remaining period of the variable display being executed). Although it is determined whether or not to execute the suggestion effect, other configurations may be used. For example, the suggestion effect is determined based on the timing of receiving the winning information command (remaining period of the fluctuating display being executed). It may be configured such that it is determined whether or not to execute, and when it is determined to be executed, a foreshadowing effect is executed as a suggestive effect, and the specific effect is set at the timing of starting the next variable display. , the specific performance is set based on the operation content of the frame button 22 by the player during the period in which the precursor performance is being executed (the specific performance that is the target of the suggestion performance is set from a plurality of specific performances). Also good. With this configuration, the production of the suggestion production is based on the gaming situation (the lottery result of the next variation, the variation pattern, or the operation content of the operation means (frame button 22)) after the suggestion production has started. The mode can be set. Therefore, the degree of freedom in presentation can be increased compared to a configuration in which the presentation mode of the suggestion presentation is determined in advance and then executed.

In addition, in this control example, as an example of executing a suggestive effect across a plurality of variable displays, the variable display being executed and the variable display to be executed next time based on the winning information won during the variable display. Although the suggested effect used is explained, the present invention is not limited to this, and any structure may be used as long as the suggestive effect is executed across multiple fluctuating displays. For example, winning information won during the fluctuating display is executed one after another. In the case of a fluctuating display, the suggestion effect may be executed so as to span the fluctuating display that is currently being executed and the fluctuating display that will be executed one after the other, or it can be executed one after the other starting from the next fluctuating display. Suggestive effects may be performed across the variable display. In this case, it is determined whether the timing to execute the suggestion effect is set to the currently running variable display or the next variable display based on the timing at which the winning information command is received (remaining period of the currently running variable display). It would be good to have a means to do so.

The winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is referred to when selecting the content of various effects set by the audio lamp control device 113, and for example, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is displayed in the hold display area where the number of held balls of a special symbol is displayed. In Dn4, in order to suggest a pending display (pending symbol) corresponding to winning information indicating a jackpot, a pending change notice effect that changes the display mode of the pending display is set, or a special symbol corresponding to winning information indicating a jackpot is set. It is referred to when setting a continuous notice performance that makes people expect a big hit as a special symbol performance whose fluctuations start earlier than the above.

In addition, in this first control example, winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is referenced at the time of winning a jackpot, during a jackpot game, and at the end of a jackpot, and winning information indicating a jackpot is included in the pending state. It is configured to determine whether there is a consecutive game on hold (presence or absence of consecutive games on hold), and to set effects during a jackpot game or after the jackpot is completed based on the result of the discrimination. In addition, even in the continuous performance executed during the variable probability state, the content of the performance is selected based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a.

Although a detailed explanation is omitted, in this control example, when a performance (pre-reading performance) that refers to winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is being executed, a flag indicating that effect ( For example, if the pre-read presentation flag is set to on, and the pre-read presentation flag is set to on, when a new winning information command is received, the winning information included in the winning information command will be displayed. The configuration is such that new prefetch effects based on information are not executed. This prevents the occurrence of a problem in which a plurality of look-ahead performances are executed consecutively without any gaps, giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Note that controls other than those described above may be used to solve the above-mentioned problems; for example, a priority rank may be assigned to a plurality of pre-read effects that are set based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. The priority rank of the pre-reading effect that has been given and is currently being executed is compared with the priority rank of the pre-reading effect that can be set based on the winning information included in the new winning information command, and the pre-reading effect with a higher priority rank is selected. It may also be controlled to execute. In this case, if it is determined that the priority rank of the new look-ahead effect is higher, a look-ahead effect switching notification is executed to notify the player that the currently executed look-ahead effect will end midway. After that, execute a new look-ahead effect, or change the direction of the currently executed look-ahead effect to a shortened look-ahead effect that is earlier than the originally set end timing, and then execute a new look-ahead effect. You may do so.

In addition, the priority rank of the look-ahead performance is such that the priority rank of the look-ahead performance that corresponds to winning information indicating that the jackpot has been won is the highest, and the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot, the higher the priority rank. It is recommended to set the value so that the value is high. Due to this. When the pre-read performance being executed ends midway, the player can be made to have a sense of expectation for a big win, and can be made to pay attention to a new pre-read performance to be executed next.

Returning to FIG. 140, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S3209, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S3209: No), then it is determined whether a winning-related command has been received (S3211), and if a winning-related command has been received ( S3211: Yes), a win-related command process (S3212) is executed, and after the win-related command process is completed, this process is ended.

Here, the contents of the win-related command processing (S3212) will be explained with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the contents of the win-related command process (S3212). In the win-related command processing, first, it is determined whether an opening command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3301). Then, if it is determined that the opening command has been received (S3301: Yes), a jackpot effect setting process is executed (S3302), and then the display An opening command is set (S3303), and this processing ends. The display opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. The information is sent to the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, it starts the opening effect on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the content of the jackpot effect setting process (S3302) executed when the opening command is received (S3301: Yes) will be explained with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot effect setting process (S3302). In this jackpot performance setting process (S3302), the pending status at the time of winning the jackpot (the content of winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a and the counter value (number of pending balls) of the special symbol 2 pending ball counter 223b2) Based on this, processing for setting effects to be performed during the jackpot is executed.

Specifically, the result is the result of determining the presence or absence of winning information indicating that the special symbol has won a jackpot, and the result of determining whether the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2 has reached the upper limit (4 balls). Based on this, the performance to be performed during the jackpot is selected using the performance selection table 222c (see FIG. 115(c)) during the jackpot.

When the jackpot performance setting process (S3302) is executed, first, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is extracted (S3401), and then based on the value of the special symbol 2 reserved balls counter 223b2. The current number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls of special symbol 2) is extracted (S3402), and it is determined whether the extracted number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls of special symbol 2) is 0 (S3403).

Here, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls is not 0 (1 or more) (S3403; No), the extracted winning information and the reservation rank corresponding to the number of reserved balls are read from the reservation rank selection table 222b (S3404), The process moves to S3406, which will be described later. On the other hand, in the process of S3403, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 0, "1" is read as the reserve rank, and the process moves to S3406.

In the pending rank selection table 222b, in order to select a pending rank based on the expectation that there may be winning information of winning the jackpot again (continuous winning within the pending) within the pending state at the end of the jackpot, information is stored at the time of winning the jackpot. The result of determining whether or not the winning information that has been displayed includes jackpot winning information, and whether there is a possibility that new winning information will be stored during the jackpot (whether or not the number of reserved balls is the upper limit) The reservation rank is selected based on the result of determining whether or not. Further, when winning a jackpot, if the number of reserved balls is "0", since there is no winning information, the reserved rank "1" is set without using the reserved rank selection table 222b.

As described above, in this control example, when selecting a performance to be executed during a jackpot, the number of winning information stored in the winning information storage area, i.e., the number of pending balls, and the content of the winning information, i.e. , the suspension rank is selected based on the validity determination result. Based on the reservation rank selected here, the effect to be executed during the jackpot is selected in the process of S3406, which will be described later.

With this configuration, an effect corresponding to the number of winning information stored in the winning information storage area, that is, the number of reserved balls, and the content of the winning information, that is, the result of winning or failing is executed during a jackpot. In addition to the performance that congratulates the player on winning the jackpot, it is also possible to perform a performance that suggests the content of the game after the jackpot ends.

In addition, in this control example, the performance executed during a jackpot is configured to refer to the pending rank selected based on the content described above, but other than that, for example, the number of jackpots included in the winning information, etc. , the pending rank based on information such as the type of fluctuation pattern and the transition of the gaming state (probable variable state, time saving state, normal state) (the gaming state that can be determined when all the fluctuations of the special symbols corresponding to the pending ball are completed) may be selected.

Furthermore, in addition to the above-mentioned pending rank, the type of jackpot currently being executed, the number of times the jackpot has been won within a predetermined period (for example, the number of changes of special symbols within 50 times), and the player's advantage It is also possible to use the so-called number of successive wins, such as the number of jackpots won while a game state continues, or operation information indicating the operation details of the player's operation means. This allows more various effects to be performed during the jackpot.

In addition, in this control example, the performance during the jackpot selected based on the above-mentioned pending rank is executed using the entire main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 86(a)), The mode is not limited to this, as long as the player can understand the contents during the jackpot, and the common jackpot performance is executed using the entire main display area Dm, and a partial area of the main display area Dm. As a sub-performance executed using It may also be executed using a machine, a frame of the pachinko machine 10, an audio output device). As a result, it is possible to standardize the effect to show that the jackpot has been won (the effect to show that the jackpot is in progress) and to suggest to the player the game content after the jackpot is over based on the pending rank. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that a jackpot is in progress in an easy-to-understand manner, and to perform a performance that makes the player look forward to the jackpot after the jackpot is over.

Returning to FIG. 143, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S3406, based on the read pending rank and the value of the first performance counter 223y1, the jackpot performance is read out with reference to the jackpot performance selection table 222c (S3406). Next, it is determined whether the jackpot effect read this time is an additional effect (S3407), and if it is determined that it is an additional effect (S3407: Yes), the additional effect flag 223h is set to ON (S3408). , sets a display jackpot performance command corresponding to the read jackpot performance (S3409), and ends this process. On the other hand, in the process of S3407, if it is determined that the currently read out jackpot effect is not an additional effect (S3407: No), the process of S3408 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3409 described above.

Returning to FIG. 142, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S3301, if it is determined that an opening command has not been received (S3301: No), then it is determined whether a round number command has been received (S3304). Here, if the number of rounds command is received (S3304: Yes), the number of rounds is extracted from the received number of rounds command (S3305), and then it is determined whether the additional effect flag 223h is set to on (S3306). ).

Here, if the additional effect flag 223h is set to on (S3306: Yes), processing related to the additional effect is executed at the timing when a new round is started (that is, at the timing when the number of rounds command is received). Since it is necessary to do so, an additional effect processing is executed (S3307), and then an additional effect command for display is set (S3308), and a number of rounds command for display is set according to the number of rounds extracted this time (S3309). ), this process ends. The display additional effect command and display round number command set here are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and are stored in the command output process (see FIG. 136) of the main process executed by the MPU 221. In step S3102), the information is sent to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, it starts a new round effect on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the contents of the additional performance processing (S3307) will be explained with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the contents of the additional performance processing (S3307). This additional performance processing (S3307) is a process that is executed when an additional performance is selected as a performance during a jackpot in the above-mentioned jackpot performance setting process (see FIG. 143), and the additional performance is This is a process for selecting the display mode of the round number display mode Dm10 (see FIG. 86(a)) that is displayed when the process is being executed.

This additional production process (S3307) is a process that is executed when it is determined that a round number command has been received (S3304: Yes) in the winning related command process (see FIG. 142). In other words, during the jackpot, the above-mentioned additional performance process is executed every time a new round is started. Thereby, it is possible to select the round number display mode Dm10 corresponding to the progress of the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 and the ongoing round number display mode Dm3 already displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, in this control example, as the number of rounds to be displayed in the additional performance, the number of rounds set for the jackpot being executed (for example, 10 rounds) is included in the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. It is configured to add up the number of rounds of jackpots (for example, 15 rounds). In this control example configured in this way, by executing the additional effect processing (S3307) every time a new round is started, the newly stored winning information during a jackpot will be updated in accordance with the jackpot. Even if there is a problem, it is possible to immediately execute an additional performance that reflects the content, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

When the additional production processing (S3307) is executed, first, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the jackpot information storage area 223f, that is, the number of rounds set for the jackpot currently being executed, is read out (S3501), and the next Next, all winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is read out (S3502). Then, it is determined whether there is winning information corresponding to a jackpot among the winning information (S3503).

Here, if it is determined that there is winning information corresponding to the jackpot (S3503: Yes), the number of rounds read out by the process of S3501 (the number of rounds set for the jackpot currently being executed) and the winning information A summation process (S3508 to S3511) is executed to sum up the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot included in the sum. Note that the summing process will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no winning information corresponding to a jackpot (S3503: No), the display round number stored in the display round number storage area 223g, that is, the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. The display round number ("10" in the case of FIG. 86(a)) displayed as the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 is read out (S3504), and the winning round number read out in the process of S3501 is read out in the process of S3506. The number of displayed rounds is subtracted (S3505). Through the process of S3505, the number of rounds that is determined to be executed internally minus the number of rounds that are displayed so that the player can recognize them (determined number of rounds), that is, the number of rounds that the player The number of unrecognized rounds (number of remaining rounds) is calculated.

Next, the number of display rounds is selected with reference to the additional number selection table 222d based on the remaining number of rounds calculated in the process of S3505 and the presence or absence of winning information corresponding to the jackpot, and is stored in the display round number storage area 223g. (S3506), performs additional display processing (S3507), and ends this processing.

On the other hand, in the process of S3503, if it is determined that there is winning information corresponding to a jackpot (S3503: Yes), a summation process is executed. In this summation process, the number of rounds corresponding to the winnings stored in the winning information storage area 223a is first read (S3508), and then the number of rounds read in the process of S3501 and the number of rounds read in the process of S3508 are combined. The total number of rounds is calculated by summing up the numbers (S3509).

Next, the display round number stored in the display round number storage area 223g, that is, the display round number displayed as the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 86) In case a), "10") is read out (S3510), and the number of displayed rounds read out in the process of S3510 is subtracted from the total number of rounds added up in the process of S3509 (S3511). Through the process of S3511, the number of rounds that is determined to be executed internally minus the number of rounds that are displayed so that the player can recognize them (determined number of rounds), that is, the number of rounds that the player The number of unrecognized rounds (number of remaining rounds) is calculated. Then, after executing the process of S3506 described above, an additional display process is executed, and this process ends.

Of the processing during the additional production (S3307) explained above, the processing from S3501 to S3511 is the processing for setting the display mode of the round number display mode Dm10 during the execution of the supplementary production, and is described above. As described above, the game is configured to be executed when a new round is started (a new round game is started) during a jackpot. Thereby, the process for setting the display mode of the effect related to the number of rounds can be executed at the optimal timing.

Note that the execution timing and processing content of the process for setting the display mode to be displayed as the round number display mode Dm10 are not limited to the contents of this control example; for example, in this control example, when a new round By configuring the process to execute the additional performance process when the game starts, the process of determining winning information (processing of S3502 and S3503) and the process of setting the number of display rounds (processing of S3504 to S3506 and SS3510 to S3506) Processing) and are executed in an integrated manner, but at the timing when the winning information command is received, the winning information judgment process described above is executed in advance, the result is temporarily stored, and the stored result is used. The display round number setting process described above may also be executed.

In addition, in this control example, when the number of rounds command is received (S3304: Yes in FIG. 142), the additional effect processing is executed. It may be configured to perform intermediate processing. With this configuration, during a jackpot in which various control processes are executed, the processing during the additional production can be executed during the round game (interval period) where the amount of processing is relatively small, and the audio lamp control device 113 It is possible to suppress a temporary increase in the processing load.

In this case, if the number of rounds to be executed next is determined based on the winning information command that has already been received, and the above-mentioned process during the additional performance is executed based on the determination result. good. Furthermore, in this control example, the additional effect processing is executed every time a new round is started, but when a specific round (for example, an even number round, a multiple of 5 round) is started, It may be configured so that it is executed only during the additional performance, or a lottery may be conducted to determine whether or not to execute the process during the additional performance, and the process may be executed based on the lottery result.

In this control example, the processes in S3501 to S3511 are executed every time a new round is started, but for example, after the process in S3502, a new winning prize is A process for determining whether information has been added may be provided, and if no new winning information has been added, the processes in S3503 to S3511 may be skipped. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of processing that is executed each round.

Returning to FIG. 144, the explanation will be continued. When the process of S3506 is finished, next, an additional display process (S3507) is executed, which is a process for executing an effect display related to the number of display rounds set in the process of S3506, and this process ends. Here, the additional display processing (S3507) will be explained with reference to FIG. 145.

FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the contents of the additional display process (S3507). This additional display process (S3507) is a process for setting a command for displaying an additional effect corresponding to the number of display rounds (see S3508 in FIG. 144) determined in the additional effect processing (see FIG. 144). In this control example, when the number of rounds during the jackpot reaches the predetermined number of rounds n (the number of rounds that is a multiple of 5, i.e., 5 rounds, 10 rounds, 15 rounds), the number of displayed rounds (determined round number display mode Dm4 ), and when the number of rounds before the predetermined number of rounds n (number of rounds that is a multiple of 5) is reached (i.e., 4 rounds, 9 rounds, 14 rounds), the next round (predetermined number of rounds n ), a foreshadowing effect (see FIG. 85(b)) is executed that suggests that the displayed round number (confirmed round number display mode Dm4) will be updated.

When the additional display process (S3507) is executed, first, the current round number is set to the round number n (specifically, 5 rounds, 10 rounds) at which the round number is updated (timing to additionally display the confirmed round number). , 15 rounds) is one less than the number of rounds n-1 (4 rounds, 9 rounds, 14 rounds) (S3601). If it is determined that the current round number is n-1 (4th round, 9th round, 14th round) (S3601: Yes), a foreshadowing effect for additionally displaying the confirmed round number in the next round (Fig. 85(b) )), a corresponding display additional selection command is set (S3602), and the process ends.

In this control example, the performance mode of the above-mentioned precursor effect (see FIG. 85(b)) is set based on the display round number stored in the display round number storage area 223g. If the number of displayed rounds stored in the area 223g is 10 or more, a presentation mode in which the number of "treasure boxes" displayed during the omen effect is reduced (see Figure 86(b)), or a presentation mode in which the number of "treasure boxes" displayed during the omen effect is reduced, or A presentation mode (see FIG. 86(b)) that is a gorgeous display mode of the "treasure box" is displayed. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to have the player predict the performance content of the additional display performance at the time when the precursor performance is executed.

In addition, in this control example, the presentation mode of the omen effect is set based on the number of display rounds stored in the display round number storage area 223g, but in addition to that, for example, it is determined internally. It may be configured to set the performance mode of the omen performance based on the number of rounds (if the consecutive games on hold are determined, the number of rounds including the number of rounds set as the jackpot on hold). This allows the player to predict the number of rounds that is determined internally based on the performance mode of the precursor performance and the performance mode of the additional performance that adds on the number of displayed rounds, and is executed during the jackpot. It is possible to maintain interest in the performance.

Furthermore, in this control example, by changing the display mode of the "treasure box (selected images Dm5 to Dm7)" displayed during the precursor performance, the player can predict the future development of the additional performance executed during the jackpot. Although the configuration suggested in 1 is used, the display mode for other configurations may be changed. For example, the display of "arrow (selected image Dm8)" that selects "treasure chest (selected images Dm5 to Dm7)" The aspect (for example, color or size) may be varied, or the sound or LED lighting pattern may be varied. Further, the period during which the precursor effect is executed may be configured to be different.

On the other hand, in the process of S3601, if it is determined that the current number of rounds is not n-1 rounds (4 rounds, 9 rounds, 14 rounds) (S3601: No), then next, if the current number of rounds is n rounds ( It is determined whether it is the 5th round (5th round, 10th round, 15th round) (S3603), and if it is determined that it is the nth round (5th round, 10th round, 15th round) (S3603: Yes), the number of displayed rounds is stored. An additional display command for display corresponding to the number of display rounds stored in the area 223g is set (S3604), and this processing is ended. Also, in the process of S3603, if it is determined that the current round number is not the n-th round (S3603: No), the process ends as is.

The additional display command for display set in the process of S3604 described above is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. , and is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the additional display command for display, it displays the round number display mode Dm10 corresponding to the content of the command on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, in this control example, the display round number set in the process during additional production is displayed during a specific round (round number n) (the display mode of the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 is varied (added)). However, the display mode of the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 may be changed (added) at other timings. For example, for determining whether to additionally update the confirmed round number display mode Dm4. The lottery means may perform a lottery every time a new round starts, and set the timing to perform an effect of additionally updating the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 based on the lottery result. This makes it possible to make the timing at which the content of the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 is updated irregularly, and it is possible to make the player continue to play the jackpot game while giving him a sense of expectation.

Returning to FIG. 142, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S3306, if it is determined that the additional effect flag 223h is not on (off) (S3306: No), there is no need to execute the additional effect process (S3307), so the processes of S3307 and S3308 are executed. The process is skipped and the process of S3309 described above is executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3304, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S3304: No), then it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3310). If it is determined that an ending command has been received (S3310: Yes), an ending command for display is set (S3311), a jackpot effect setting process is executed (S3312), and this process ends. The display ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. The information is sent to the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, it starts an ending effect on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the post-jackpot performance setting process (S3312) that is executed when it is determined that the ending command has been received (S3310: Yes) will be described with reference to FIG. 146. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot post effect setting process (S3312). This post-jackpot performance setting process (S3312) is a process for continuing to execute the performance that was executed during the jackpot during the period when the special symbol changes after the jackpot ends. This is a process for setting a post-jackpot performance corresponding to the performed performance.

When the post-jackpot performance setting process (S3312) is executed, the post-jackpot performance setting process (S3312) is first read out from the information stored in the state storage area 223e (S3701), and then the additional performance flag 223h is set to ON. In other words, it is determined whether the effect executed during the current jackpot is an additional effect (S3702). If it is determined that it is an additional performance (S3702: Yes), then it is determined whether there is winning information of a jackpot in the winning information storage area 223a (whether to hold consecutive games on hold) (S3703).

In the process of S3703, if it is determined that there is winning information that won a jackpot (S3703: Yes), an additional effect post-jackpot command for display is set (S3704), and this process ends. In other words, in the process of S3703, if it is determined that there is winning information that won a jackpot (S3703: Yes), all the total number of rounds calculated in the process of S3505 of the additional effect process (S3307) in FIG. 144 will be displayed. Since this is a case where the number of rounds is not displayed, the additional performance will continue until the next jackpot is executed (until the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the winning information including the jackpot information ends). Set the display additional effect after jackpot command so that it is displayed.

The display additional effect post jackpot command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed during the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. The information is then transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the post-jackpot command for the display add-on effect, it starts a display that continuously executes the add-on effect while performing a variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (Fig. 88(a)). With this configuration, even after the jackpot ends, the performance performed during the jackpot can be continued.

In addition, in this control example, the display round number (confirmed round number display mode Dm4) is partially displayed (for example, 5 rounds) even for the number of rounds set for one jackpot (for example, 15 rounds). Therefore, from the performance contents of the top-up performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to determine whether it is a top-up performance executed during one jackpot or between multiple jackpots (the first jackpot This makes it difficult to ascertain whether it is an additional effect that is being executed during the special symbol variation period (which is executed between the end of the game and the start of the second jackpot). With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the number of jackpots won while the top-up effect is continuously being executed, or the number of rounds set for one jackpot in a way that is difficult to understand. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while making the player expect that the top-up performance will continue for a long time (the jackpot will continue for a long time).

Returning to FIG. 146, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S3703, if it is determined that there is no winning information about winning the jackpot (S3703: No), the total number of rounds calculated in the process of S3505 of the additional effect process (S3307) in FIG. 144 is the number of displayed rounds. , the additional effect flag 223h is set to OFF (S3705), the display round number storage area 223g is cleared (S3706), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3702, if it is determined that the performance executed during this jackpot is not an additional performance (S3702: No), then next, the performance executed during this jackpot is a continuous winning performance. (See FIG. 84) (S3707). Here, if it is determined that it is a continuous win performance (S3707: Yes), a continuous win performance after jackpot command for display is set (S3708), and this process is ended.

The display continuous win production jackpot command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. , and is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display continuous winning production jackpot command, it starts a display that continuously executes the continuous winning production while performing a variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. do. With this configuration, even after the jackpot ends, the performance performed during the jackpot can be continued.

In the process of S3707, if it is determined that it is not a continuous winning performance (S3707: No), that is, if a normal winning performance is executed during a jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot is changed to a probability change or time saving state. (S3709), and if it is determined that the state is variable or time saving (S3709: Yes), the display extension flag 223i is set to ON (S3710), and the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is set to "4000". settings (S3711), and ends this process.

Here, the contents executed in the processing of S3710 and S3711 will be explained. In this control example, a jackpot performance is selected with reference to the jackpot performance selection table 222c shown in FIG. 115(c). As shown in FIG. 115(c), the normal winning performance is for all pending ranks "1" to "4", that is, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a at the time of winning the jackpot. It is configured as a production that can be performed both when (reservation symbol) contains the information of winning the jackpot (in the case of consecutive winnings in the reservation) and when it does not (in the case of not consecutive winnings in the reservation). There is.

If the gaming state after the end of the jackpot in which the normal winning performance is executed is a fixed change state or a time-saving state, the display extension flag 223i is set to ON, and the ending display displayed during the jackpot is changed to the predetermined state after the end of the jackpot. It is displayed until the condition is satisfied (see FIG. 89(a)). With this configuration, the special symbol changes are executed while the jackpot ending display is displayed, and when the jackpot is won, the ending display screen displays that the jackpot has been won (Fig. 89 ( b)). Thereby, even if the performance for a normal winning is executed, it is possible to create expectations for the consecutive games on hold, and to continue to execute the performance during the jackpot when the consecutive games on hold are performed.

Furthermore, in this control example, the period in which the jackpot ending display continues even after the jackpot ends is until either the number of changes in the special symbol is 4 times or 4 seconds after the jackpot ends, whichever condition is satisfied. A period is set, and in the process of S3711, by setting the value of "4000" to the elapsed time counter 223k, the time elapsed from the end of the jackpot (after the special symbol change becomes possible) I'm trying to count it.

In this way, the period for executing the jackpot ending display is not set based on the number of changes in the special symbol (for example, 4 times), but by setting it based on the elapsed time after the jackpot ends, for example, when the jackpot ends. Even when the special symbols are not changed after the end (when there is no special symbol pending), the jackpot ending display can be executed only for a limited period of time.

In addition, in this control example, if the special symbol change is not executed after the end of the jackpot and the elapsed time from the end of the jackpot exceeds a predetermined period (4 seconds), a demo screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. is configured to be displayed.

In the process of S3709, if it is determined that the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is not a probability change or time saving state (S3709: No), the performance executed during the jackpot will be continued during the variation period of the special symbol executed after the jackpot. The value in the display round number storage area 223g is cleared (S3712), and the present process ends without executing the display process.

Returning to FIG. 142, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S3310, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S3310: No), processes corresponding to other commands are executed (S3313), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 140, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S3211, if it is determined that a winning related command has not been received (S3211: No), then it is determined whether a status command has been received (S3213), and if it is determined that a status command has been received (S3213: Yes), the current gaming state is extracted from the received command and stored in the state storage area 223e (S3214).

In addition, in the process of S3214, when the state designation command set in the process of S1214 of the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the main control device 110 described above with reference to FIG. 137 is received, the current gaming state is Separately, processing for storing the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot is executed. With this configuration, a status command indicating the current gaming status and a status specifying command indicating the gaming status (planned gaming status) to be set when a predetermined condition is met (when the jackpot ends) can be separated. and memorize it. In addition, after the jackpot ends, you will receive a status command indicating the current gaming status, but at that time, the content of the status command indicating the current gaming status and the content of the status specification command indicating the planned gaming status. It is also possible to use a configuration in which a determining means is provided to determine whether or not they match, and it is determined whether the gaming state is properly set based on the determination result of the determining means. As a result, it is possible to suppress, for example, a fraudulent act of variably setting the gaming state after the end of the jackpot to a gaming state advantageous to the player.

In the process of S3213, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (S3213: No), the process according to the received command is executed (S3216), and the process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed and the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the other command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is used for display control. A command is set to be sent to the device 114.

Through this process, commands for performing various settings on the display control device 114 can be set based on commands output from the main control device 110.

Next, with reference to FIG. 147, the variable display setting process (S3114) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S3114). This variable display setting process (S3114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable effect, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

In the fluctuation display setting process (S4014), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S3801). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S3801: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S3813. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S3801: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is set to OFF (S3802), and then in the process of S3203 of the command determination process (see FIG. 140). , the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223.

Next, it is determined whether the display extension flag 223i is set to on (S3803), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S3803: Yes), extension management processing is executed (S3804), and step S3811 is performed. Move to processing. The extension management process (S3804) is a process for managing the end timing of the extended display performance that continues (extends) and displays the ending display during the jackpot even after the jackpot ends. This extension management process (S3804) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 148.

On the other hand, in the process of S3803, if it is determined that the display extension flag 223i is not set to on (set to off) (S3803: No), then the game stored in the state storage area 223e is The information indicating the state is read out and it is determined whether the current gaming state is a variable probability state or a time saving state (S3805). If it is determined that the state is variable probability or shortened time (S3805: Yes), a continuous performance setting process is executed (S3806), and then the process moves to S3811. The continuous performance setting process (S3806) is a process for setting the performance mode of the continuous performance (battle performance) (see FIG. 91) that is executed in a variable probability or short time state. A detailed explanation of this continuous effect setting process (S3806) will be given later with reference to FIG. 149.

In the process of S3805, if it is determined that the gaming state is not a variable probability state or a time saving state (S3805: No), based on the extracted variation pattern, it is determined whether the current variation pattern is a variation pattern for executing an expectation performance. It is determined (S3807). In the process of S3807, if it is determined that the variation pattern is for executing the expectation level performance (S3807: Yes), the expectation level performance setting process is executed (S3808), and the process moves to the process of S3811. The expectation performance setting process (S3808) is a process for setting the performance mode of the performance (see FIG. 102) for suggesting the expectation that the lottery result of the current special symbol is a jackpot. A detailed explanation of this expectation effect setting process will be given later with reference to FIG. 151.

On the other hand, in the process of S3807, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern that does not perform the expectation effect (S3807: No), the current variation pattern executes the countdown effect based on the extracted variation pattern. If it is determined that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern that performs a countdown effect (S3809: Yes), a countdown effect setting process (S3810) is executed, and in S3811 Shift to processing. The countdown performance setting process (S3810) notifies the player of the timing at which a specific performance will be executed to suggest that the lottery result of the current special symbol is highly expected to be a jackpot during the variable display of the special symbol. This is a process of setting the presentation mode for the presentation (see FIG. 98). This countdown effect setting process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 152.

In the process of S3809, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern that does not perform a countdown effect (S3809: No), or if the processes of S3804, S3806, S3808, and S3810 are finished, the extracted variation Based on the pattern, the current variation display mode is determined from the variation pattern table 222a of the audio lamp control device 113 (S3811), and a corresponding display variation pattern command is set (S3812).

After completing the process of S3812, it is then determined whether the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S3813). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, off) (S3813: No), this means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variable display setting The process (S3114) is ended and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S3813: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S3814), and then, in the process of S3206 of the command determination process (see FIG. 140), The stop type in the variable performance extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S3815).

Next, in the process of S3815, it is determined whether the acquired stop type is a jackpot type indicating a jackpot (S3816), and when it is determined that it is a jackpot type (S3816: Yes), it is acquired in the jackpot information storage area 223f. The winning information (number of rounds of the jackpot, information regarding the gaming state set after the jackpot) corresponding to the jackpot type is stored (S3817), and the process moves to S3818. On the other hand, in the process of S3816, if it is determined that it is not the jackpot type (S3816: No), the process directly proceeds to S3818.

In the process of S3818, the stop type extracted in the process of S3815 is set (S3818), and a display stop type command to be sent to the display control device 114 is set based on the set stop type (S3819). ), this process ends. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the variable performance is controlled.

Next, the extension management process (S3804) executed in the variable display setting process (S3114 in FIG. 147) will be described with reference to FIG. 148. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the contents of the extension management process (S3804). In this extension management process (S3804), a process is executed to manage whether or not the termination condition regarding the number of changes of the special symbol is satisfied among the termination conditions of the jackpot ending display that is continuously displayed after the jackpot ends.

When the extension management process (S3804) is started, first, it is determined whether the value of the variation counter 223j is 0 (S3901). If it is determined that the value of the variation number counter 223j is 0 (S3901: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to set the first variation display after the display extension flag 223i is set on, the variation number counter 223j is set to "5" as the display termination condition (display extension termination condition) of the jackpot ending display (S3902), and the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3901, if it is determined that the value of the variation counter 223j is not 0 (is 1 or more) (S3901: No), that is, the second to fourth time after the display extension flag 223i is set to ON. If it is the timing to set the second variation display, the value of the variation number counter 223j is subtracted by 1 (S3903), and then it is determined whether the value of the variation number counter 223j is "1" (S3904). If it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223j is "1" (S3904: Yes), that is, it is determined that it is the timing to set the fluctuation display for the fifth rotation after the display extension flag 223i is set to on. If so, the display extension flag 223i is set to OFF (S3905) and the process ends, because one of the conditions for ending the display extension, ``up to 4 variations of special symbols'', is satisfied. do.

In the process of S3904, if it is determined that the value of the variation number counter is not "1" (it is "2" or more) (S3904: No), an extension effect command for display is set (S3906), and this process is executed. finish. With this configuration, while the jackpot ending display is extended and executed, if the number of changes in the special symbol satisfies the display extension end condition, the change corresponding to the next special symbol change will be displayed. The display extension flag 223i is set to OFF at the timing when the display is executed, and the extended performance (ending display) can be ended. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ending display from ending during the variable display of the special symbols and giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In this control example, when the probability change or time saving state is set after the jackpot ends, by using a dedicated fluctuation pattern table (special fluctuation pattern table 202d4), the , a short variation time (0.5 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol (see FIG. 109). As a result, if the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is at the upper limit (4) after the end of the jackpot, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (4 rotations) will be used as the end condition for the extended performance rather than the elapsed time (4 seconds). The termination condition based on this is satisfied first.

Therefore, during the period when the jackpot ending display is extended and executed, many special symbols are changed and the player always plays the game with the reserved balls secured in order to see a special effect (see FIG. 89(b)). Since the game can be performed, the performance of the game can be improved.

Regarding the management based on the elapsed time, which is one of the conditions for ending the extended performance, in the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 136), the performance update process (which is executed periodically (every 1 msec) S3112). A detailed explanation of this effect update process (S3112) will be given later with reference to FIG. 154.

Next, with reference to FIG. 149, the continuous effect setting process (S3806) executed in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) will be described. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous effect setting process (S3806). This continuous performance setting process (S3806) is a process for setting the performance mode of the continuous performance (battle performance) to be executed during the variable probability or time saving state. Specifically, as a continuous performance (battle performance), a final mode performance (battle reach) that notifies whether the definite change or time saving state ends or not, and the final mode performance (battle reach) are executed. The presentation mode of the presentation (pre-battle presentation) up to this point is stored in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 based on the judgment result of the special symbol, the fluctuation pattern (variation time), and the duration of the pre-battle presentation. A process of setting is executed with reference to the continuous performance mode selection table 222e, continuous value main selection table 222f, continuous value sub-selection table 222g, and final mode selection table 222h.

This control example is configured so that the above-described continuous performance (battle performance) is repeatedly executed until the probability change or time saving state ends. With this configuration, if the variable probability or time saving state continues for a long period of time, one continuous performance (battle performance) will be delayed, and each performance executed during the continuous performance (battle performance) (for example, It is possible to suppress the performance effect of the performance (performance that increases/decreases the continuation value (HP value)) from decreasing.

In addition, if the continuous performance (battle performance) is repeatedly executed, that is, if the final mode performance (battle reach) occurs at a timing where the game state does not change from the definite change or time saving state, the final mode performance (battle reach) occurs. The configuration is such that a "draw" is selected as the performance result of the Battle Reach) and the pre-battle performance starts again, but in this configuration where the continuous performance is repeatedly executed, one continuous performance period is long. If an attempt is made to suppress this, the final mode effect (battle reach with a win or loss) to indicate the transition of the game state, and the final mode effect other than the final mode effect (draw battle reach) will be frequently executed. However, there was a problem in that the player quickly became bored with the final appearance.

On the other hand, in this control example, the elapsed period (the number of changes in special symbols) since the last final mode effect (draw battle reach) was executed is measured, and the measurement result is within a predetermined period (for example, the special symbol If the number of fluctuations is less than 6 times), the final mode presentation (draw battle reach) in which there is no winner or loser is configured not to be executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the performance early due to the draw battle reach being executed frequently in a short period of time.

Furthermore, this control example is configured to suggest to the player the validity determination result of the pending special symbol, and the remaining period of the probability change or time saving state, depending on the performance mode of the draw battle reach. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in the draw battle reach, and it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the entire continuous performance.

In addition, in this control example, the number of times the continuous performance (battle performance) is repeatedly executed is measured, and the performance mode of the continuous performance (battle performance) is set based on the measurement result. As a result, when a variable probability or time saving state continues for a long period of time and a continuous performance (battle performance) is repeatedly executed, it is possible to execute a continuous performance (battle performance) with a different performance mode, and the player can quickly adjust the performance. You can prevent yourself from getting bored with it.

Here, to briefly explain the process executed in the continuous effect setting process (see S3806 in FIG. 149) of this control example, first, in this variable display, whether to execute battle reach as a continuous effect or before the battle. A process of determining whether to execute a performance (execution performance selection process) and setting a performance mode of the pre-battle performance based on the determination result of the execution performance selection process (first performance mode setting process), or , and a process for setting a battle reach performance mode (second (final) performance mode setting process) are executed.

As described above, in this control example, each time the continuous effect setting process (S3806) is executed, it is determined whether to perform the pre-battle effect or the battle reach based on the current variable display. It is possible to smoothly switch the performance from the pre-battle performance to the battle reach.

As shown in FIG. 149, when the continuous effect setting process (S3806) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current variation display is a winning variation (a variation in which the special symbol jackpot was won) (S4001). Here, if it is determined that it is not a winning variation (S4001: No), next, check whether the current variation pattern is a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds or 90 seconds (a variation pattern that allows battle reach). ) (S4002), and if it is determined that the variation pattern is 60 seconds or 90 seconds (S4002: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the duration counter 223p is 6 or more (S4003).

In the process of S4003, if it is determined that the value of the duration counter 223p is not 6 or more (less than 6) (S4003: No), it is determined whether the continuation production flag 223r is set to on (S4004). If it is determined that the continuous performance flag 223r is not on (S4004: No), that is, if the continuous performance is not being executed, the continuous performance mode is selected based on the continuous performance mode selection table 222e (S4005). , stores the selected continuous performance mode in the continuous performance mode storage area 223m (S4006), adds 1 to the value of the continuous performance setting counter 223q (S4007), and sets the continuous performance flag 223r to ON (S4008).

In the process of S4004 described above, if it is determined that the continuous performance flag 223r is not on, the first variable display is set after the fixed variable or time saving state is set as the gaming state, or the previous variable display is the final one. This is a mode presentation (battle reach), and a new continuous presentation (pre-battle presentation) is set in this variable display.

In such a case, in the process of S4005, the performance mode (performance mode) of the pre-battle performance to be executed from the current variable display is selected based on the continuous performance mode selection table 222e. Here, as shown in FIG. 116(b), the continuous performance mode selection table 222e includes the number of times the continuous performance has been repeatedly executed (the value of the continuous performance setting counter 223q), and the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. The continuous performance mode (mode 1 to mode 5) is set based on the information and the value of the third performance counter 223y3, and the selected continuous performance will continue until the next final mode performance (battle reach) is executed. A pre-battle production will be performed based on the mode.

In this control example, when the continuous performance flag 223r is set to OFF, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is pre-read, and the continuous performance mode is set based on the pre-read result. Although a configuration is used in which a process is executed to set a variation display mode based on a continuous performance mode set each time a variation of a special symbol is executed, winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is read in advance. However, any configuration other than the one used in this control example may be used as long as it executes a performance based on the preread result. For example, when the continuation performance flag 223r is set to OFF, the winning information storage area 223a is The stored winning information is read in advance, and based on the prereading results, the display mode of the variable display executed this time to the display mode of the variable display corresponding to the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is set in advance. It may be configured to do so.

On the other hand, in the process of S4004, if it is determined that the continuation effect flag 223r is set to on (S4004: Yes), or if the process of S4008 is finished, the value of the continuation period counter 223p is incremented by 1 (S4009) . Thereby, the value of the continuous performance setting counter 223q when selecting the continuous performance mode next time can be made different, and it is possible to suppress the same continuous performance mode from being selected continuously.

In addition, in this control example, the same continuous production mode is suppressed from being selected continuously, and at a specific timing (timing when the value of the continuous production setting counter 223q is 1), a specific condition (on hold) is suppressed. ) is established, in order to enable execution of a specific performance (continuation performance mode 5), a configuration is used in which the value of the continuous performance setting counter 223q is incremented by 1, but if the same continuous performance mode is repeated Other configurations may be used in order to achieve the purpose of suppressing selection.

For example, the value to which the value of the continuous performance setting counter 223q is added may be determined by lottery (eg, a lottery of values from -5 to 5). With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the regularity with which the continuous performance mode is selected, and it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

Furthermore, the configuration may be such that the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is added based on the result of the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, or the number of successive jackpots (when the gaming state shifts to the normal state). The value of the continuous performance setting counter 223q may be incremented based on the number of consecutive jackpots (without exception) or the lottery results of special symbols when the continuous performance mode is selected.

After completing the process in S4009, a continuation value setting process is executed (S4010). The details of the continuation value setting process executed in the process of S4010 will be described later with reference to FIG. 150. A display effect command corresponding to the differential continuation value set in the continuation value setting process of S4010 is set (S4011), and this process ends. In the process of S4011, a production command indicating the display content to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a pre-battle production of the continuous production is set. Specifically, the display mode corresponding to the continuous effect mode selected in the process of S4005 and the display mode corresponding to the differential continuation value set in the process of S4010 are collectively set as a display effect command. .

The display effect command set in the process of S4011 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed during the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. The information is then transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display performance command as a variable pattern command, it executes the display of the pre-battle performance on the third symbol display device 81.

The processes from S4001 to S4003 in the continuous performance setting process (S3806) described above correspond to the execution performance selection process, and the processes from S4004 to S4011 are the process for setting the performance mode of the pre-battle performance (first performance mode) settings processing).

On the other hand, in the process of S4001, if it is determined that the current variation is a winning variation (S4001: Yes), the value of the continuous performance setting counter 223q is reset (S4012), and the process moves to S4013. In addition, in the process of S4003, if it is determined that the value of the duration counter is 6 or more (S4003: Yes), that is, if the pre-battle performance continues for 6 or more special symbol fluctuations, the process proceeds to S4013. Transition.

In the process of S4013, the production mode of the battle reach (final mode) is selected based on the final mode selection table 222h (S4013), and the corresponding final mode command for display is set (S4014). The final display mode command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 during the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136). The information is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display final mode command, the display control device 114 displays a battle reach using the continuation value (HP value) displayed in the pre-battle production on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 93(a)). is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to switch the performance from the pre-battle performance to the battle reach without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

After completing the process of S4014, next, the continuous production flag 223r is set to OFF (S4015), the continuous production mode storage area 223m is cleared (S4016), and the value of the duration counter 223p is cleared to 0 (S4017). , this process ends.

As explained above, in this control example, the pre-battle effect is executed as a variable display corresponding to multiple special symbol variations executed while the fixed variable or time saving mode is set as the gaming state, and one specific It is configured to execute the final mode effect (battle reach) in response to special symbol fluctuations (special symbol winning fluctuations and losing fluctuations with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds or 90 seconds selected), but other than that, Also, for example, the final mode performance (battle reach) may be configured to be executed using a variable display corresponding to a plurality of special symbol variations. In this case, the performance mode of the final mode (Battle Reach) is displayed in each variable manner (based on the pre-reading result) based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a (results of judgment on hold and variation patterns). It is best to configure the settings so that they correspond to the following. Thereby, it is possible to smoothly execute the final mode performance (battle reach) that is executed across a plurality of special symbol variations.

In addition, when using a configuration that executes the final mode effect (battle reach) across multiple special symbol variations, all display modes displayed in the final mode effect (battle reach) are It may be configured to be set in advance for each special symbol change, or only the presentation content of battle reach, that is, the attack pattern and presentation result, may be set in advance, and the increase/decrease display control of the continuation value (HP value) can be controlled. may be configured to be set every time the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the types of final aspect effects (battle reach) that are preset based on the prefetch results.

Next, the continuation value setting process (S4010) will be explained with reference to FIG. 150. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuation value setting process (S4010). This continuation value setting process (S4010) is a process for setting the value of the continuation value (HP value in battle performance) that is variably displayed during the continuous performance. In this control example, when setting the value of this continuation value (value of continuation value after variable), the value selected based on the lottery of special symbols (value in the hundredths of the opponent's HP) and the effect It is set so that the value selected based on the lottery (the value in the tens place of the opponent's HP) is added up. Thereby, it is possible to increase the variation of displayed continuation values.

When the continuation value setting process (S4010) is executed, first, it is determined whether it is the timing to change the continuation value (S4101). Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in S4101, the fluctuation pattern extracted from the fluctuation pattern table 222a of the audio lamp control device 113 is continued based on the rough fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command from the main controller 110. Determine whether the pattern changes the value.

Note that in this control example, as described above, a configuration is used in which the timing for changing the continuation value (HP value) is determined based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the fluctuation pattern table 222a of the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, a measuring means is provided to measure the number of consecutive selections of a fluctuation pattern that does not change the continuous value, and when the number of times measured by the measuring means reaches a predetermined number (for example, 4 times), a forced If the number of times measured by the above-mentioned measurement means is a specific number (for example, once), a change restriction means that does not change the continuous value regardless of the extracted fluctuation pattern is provided. It may be provided. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid situations where the continuous value (HP value) does not change at all during the continuous performance (during the pre-battle performance) and the player gets bored with the performance (pre-battle performance), or where the continuous value is frequently changed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the (HP value) is changed and the performance contents become difficult to understand.

Further, the continuation value change timing may be set based on the result of the player's operation on the frame button 22 or the result of pre-reading the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. Further, the continuation value change timing is set based on the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the continuation value (HP value) selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f. It is also possible to vary the frequency.

If it is determined in the process of S4101 that it is not the time to change the continuation value (S4101: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is time to change the continuation value (S4101: Yes), the hundreds digit value of the continuation value is selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222f (S4102), and the selected continuation value (continuation value The continuation value selected based on the main selection table 222f) is stored in the continuation value storage area 223n (S4103). Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this control example, the performance mode of the performance (attack performance) executed when the continuation value is changed is set to the value stored in the continuation value storage area 223n, that is, the continuation value main It is configured to refer to and set the continuation value selected based on the selection table 222f.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the continuation value (value in the hundreds place) selected in the process of S4102 is 200 or more (S4104), and if it is determined that it is 200 or more (S4104: Yes), the first The effect value (tens place value) is selected based on the continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 (see FIG. 117(b)) (S4105), and if it is determined that it is less than 200 (S4104; No), the second The effect value (value in the tens place) is selected based on the continuation value sub-selection table 222g2 (see FIG. 117(c)) (S4106). A continuation value is calculated by adding up the value selected in the process of S4102 and the value selected in the process of S4103 (S4104).

Here, as shown in FIGS. 117(b) and 117(c), the first continuous value sub-selection table 222g1 and the second continuous value sub-selection table 222g2 are ) are configured differently, and the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 specifies the range of selectable effect values as "-20 to +20", and the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2 is selectable. The range of performance values is defined as "-10 to 0". That is, the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2 is configured so that a positive value (plus value) is not selected as the effect value. In the pre-battle performance, for example, if "0" is selected as the continuation value (value in the hundreds place) based on the continuation value main selection table 222f, internally (in the continuation value storage area 223n) Even though "0" is set (as the stored value), the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 due to the production value is not "0" (for example, "20"). This is a configuration for suppressing the execution of a performance that would cause a player to feel uncomfortable due to the value being displayed.

In this way, a configuration is used in which the value of the selected continuation value (value in the hundreds place) is determined based on the continuation value main selection table 222f, and the range of selectable effect values is changed based on the determination result. In normal times (continuation value is 200 or more), it is possible to change the continuation value (HP value) in either a positive or negative direction, increasing the variation of effects and increasing the continuation value. If it is less than 200, the continuation value (HP value) is varied only in the negative direction, thereby suppressing the occurrence of inconsistencies in the performance.

Then, when the process of S4105 or S4106 is finished, the continuation value (value in the hundreds place) selected in the process in S4102 and the effect value (value in the tens place) selected in either S4105 or S4106 are A continuous value (HP value) is calculated (S4107), a display summation command corresponding to the calculated continuous value (HP value) is set (S4108), and this process ends.

As explained above, in this control example, variable management of the continuous value (HP value) that is variably displayed (increased/decreased) while the continuous performance is being executed is performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The displayed continuation value (HP value), that is, the continuation value (value in the hundreds place) selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222f, and the continuation value (value in the hundreds place) selected based on the continuation value sub-selection table 222g It is configured to use only the continuation value (value in the hundreds place) selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222f, rather than the sum of the values in the tens place (value in the tens place) and the value in the tens place. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the number of patterns for variable management of the continuous value (HP value) with respect to the display pattern of the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. can reduce the processing load.

Furthermore, in this control example, even if the continuous value (HP value) is variable managed only with the continuous value (value in the hundreds place) selected based on the continuous value main selection table 222f, the continuous value (HP value) ) management content and the display content of the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are configured so that there is no difference between the management content and the content of the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. can be carried out, and the production effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in the audio lamp control device 113 of this control example, a continuation value is selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222f and the continuation value sub-selection table 222g, and information (command) indicating the selected continuation value is displayed on the display control device. 114. Then, only the continuation value selected with reference to the continuation value main selection table 222f is stored in the continuation value storage area 223n, and increase/decrease management of the continuation value is repeatedly performed based on the stored continuation value.

A detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG. 164, but in this control example, the display mode of the continuous effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, specifically, the display mode of the attack pattern to be executed. The display control device 114 is configured to set and display the variable (increase/decrease) display mode of the continuous value (HP value). That is, the display control device 114 has an area (total value storage area) that stores the summed continuation value when the display control device 114 receives a command related to the continuation value output from the audio lamp control device 113. The difference between the total value stored in the total value storage area and the total value calculated from the command regarding the continuous value received this time is calculated, and the attack pattern display mode is determined based on the calculated difference value. A variable (increase/decrease) display mode of the continuous value (HP value) is set and displayed.

With this configuration, it is possible to suitably execute the continuous performance while reducing the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113, and it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

In this control example, a continuation value sub-selection table 222g for selecting a continuation value for presentation is provided in the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to select a continuation value for presentation. However, the display control device 114 may be provided with a configuration for selecting a continuation value for presentation (for example, a continuation value sub-selection table 222g). With this configuration, the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be further reduced.

In addition, in this control example, when a continuation value is selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f, a continuation value for effect is selected with reference to the continuation value sub-selection table 222g. Other configurations may be used. For example, even if the continuation value is not selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f (for example, in the case of S4104: No in FIG. 149), the continuation value for effect ( It may also be configured such that only the value in the tens place is increased or decreased. Thereby, the increase/decrease display of the continuous value (HP value) executed during the continuous performance can be set more precisely, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In this control example, the configuration is such that only values that are smaller than the current continuation value (the continuation value stored in the continuation value storage area 223n) are selected as continuation values selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the configuration may be such that a value increased from the current continuation value is selected. In this case, if a value increased from the current continuous value is selected, the continuous effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 will be changed to the continuous value instead of the normal attack effect. It is preferable to perform a recovery effect in which (HP value) is recovered. In this way, by using a configuration that increases the continuation value (HP value) during the continuation performance, it is possible to increase the variations in the increase/decrease display of the continuation value (HP value) executed during the continuation performance, and also Even if the value (HP value) is frequently varied (increased/decreased), it is possible to prevent the continuous value (HP value) from reaching the lower limit value (for example, "0").

Note that in this control example, the character's HP is used as the continuation value that is variably displayed during the continuation performance, but in addition to that, the HP of the character is ) may be configured to suggest to the player based on a variable value whether or not it is set. The number of operations performed (times) may also be used.

Furthermore, in this control example, when the value of the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f is "0", the continuation value (HP value) to be executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is In order to prevent a value larger than "0" from being set, if the value of the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f is less than a predetermined value (for example, 200), the Although the configuration is such that a positive value is not selected as a continuation value, other configurations may be used. For example, if the value of the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f is "0", The configuration may be such that selection of the continuation value for effect (selection using the continuation value sub-selection table 222g) is not performed.

In addition, as in this control example, among the different control devices (sound lamp control device 113 and display control device 114), the first control device (sound lamp control device 113) performs the process of setting the rough production contents. In a configuration in which a predetermined effect is repeatedly displayed by executing processing for setting a specific display mode of the effect in the second control device (display control device 114), the second control device (display control device 114) The processing result of the device 114) is output to the first control device (audio lamp control device 113), and then the first control device (audio lamp control device 113) performs a process of setting the rough performance contents. When executing, it is determined whether the processing result output from the second control device (display control device 114) is within the permissible range, and if it is within the permissible range, the next production content is set as is. Execute the process, and if it is outside the allowable range, correct the information about the rough performance content that was set when setting the previous performance content, and execute the process to set the next performance content based on the correction result, If the processing result output from the second control device (display control device 114) has not been received at the timing of setting the next production content, a process is executed to postpone the timing of setting the next production content. It may be configured as follows.

With this configuration, the next performance can be set in correspondence with the performance mode that has already been displayed by the process executed by the second control device (display control device 114), and the player can The performance can be continuously performed without giving a sense of discomfort. In this case, if it is determined that the processing result output from the second control device (display control device 114) is outside the tolerance range, the processing result is within a range wider than the error range set as the tolerance range. If the determination result is within the limit range, the above-mentioned correction can be performed to continue setting the effect, and if it is outside the limit range, the above-mentioned It is better to forcibly end the performance without making any corrections.

Next, the expectation effect setting process (S3808) will be explained with reference to FIG. 151. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the contents of the expectation effect setting process (S3808). This expectation performance setting process (S3808) changes the display mode of the expectation display mode that is displayed during the special symbol fluctuation performance to determine whether or not the current special symbol fluctuation has won a jackpot. This is an effect that is suggested to the player (see FIGS. 102 and 103).

In this control example, three types of expectation level display modes Dk1 to Dk3 (see FIG. 102(a)) are displayed as the expectation level performance in response to the passage of time of special symbol fluctuations. Then, an expectation level increasing mode Dk4 for changing one of the display modes among the expectation level display modes to a display mode with a high expectation level is displayed, and any one of the expectation level display modes Dk1 to Dk3 is displayed. Execute the performance so that it changes. Further, processing for setting display timing for setting the timing at which the expectation level increase mode Dk4 is displayed is also executed.

Here, in this control example, since the above-mentioned three types of expectation level display modes Dk1 to Dk3 are configured to be displayed at different timings, the expectation level increases depending on the timing at which the expectation level increase mode Dk4 is displayed. The object of the expectation level display mode whose display mode is variable can be varied depending on the mode Dk4. As a result, even if the same expectation level increasing mode Dk4 is used, it is possible to create different effects by simply changing the timing at which the expectation level increasing mode Dk4 is displayed, reducing the storage capacity of image data. can do.

In this case, it is preferable to display only a still image (for example, a character image) with a small amount of image data in accordance with an expectation level display mode that increases the expectation level. This makes it possible to provide easy-to-understand effects with a small amount of data.

Further, in this control example, a display mode is predetermined as a reference for three types of expectation level display modes Dk1 to Dk3 according to the level of expectation level presentation mode. Thereby, it is possible to set the display modes of the three types of expectation level display modes Dk1 to Dk3 consisting of a plurality of combinations, and it is possible to reduce the processing load of display processing. In addition, since a standard display mode (standard display mode) is determined according to the level of expectation presentation mode, it is possible to prevent the degree of increase in expectation level from being biased.

In addition, the final display mode (display mode that can be displayed after the end of the expectation level performance) of the three types of expectation level display modes Dk1 to Dk3 that are set based on the fluctuation pattern, and the final display mode that is set according to the expectation level display mode level. If there is a difference between the standard display mode and the standard display mode, the expectation level increasing mode Dk4 is displayed. It is possible to perform the effect while making the user expect that the display mode of the expectation level display mode will change to a display mode showing an even higher level of expectation.

When the expectation effect setting process (S3808) is executed, first, the current expectation level is selected based on the expectation level selection table 222i (S4201), and then, the standard display mode is selected based on the expectation level effect selection table 222j. An expectation presentation mode level for setting is selected (S4202). After selecting the expectation level presentation mode level, the display mode of each expectation level display mode predetermined for the expectation level presentation mode level and the actual expectation level presentation mode (each expectation level display set based on the fluctuation pattern) are displayed. (S4203).

After completing the process of S4203, it is determined whether there is a difference (S4204), and if it is determined that there is a difference, the difference is calculated for each expectation display mode (S4205), and based on the presence or absence of the calculated difference. The display timing of the expectation level increase mode Dk4 is determined (S4206). Next, the differences for each expectation level display mode are summed up (S4207), and the display contents (display mode, display timing) of the expectation level increasing mode are determined based on the summed differences (S4208), and the expectation level performance is displayed. An expectation level production command for display is set (S4209), and a good display expectation level target mode notification command for notifying the expectation level display mode that is the target of the expectation level increasing mode is set (S4210).

To specifically explain the process of S4208 mentioned above, first, the display mode determination process of determining the display mode (for example, "3UP") corresponding to the value of the difference summed up by the process of S4207 is performed by the display mode determining means. executed. In addition, the expectation level display mode in which the difference occurs is determined by the difference determination means, multiple timings at which the expectation level display format can be set are determined based on the determination result, and among the determined multiple timings, the expectation level display format is determined. The configuration is such that one timing is selected based on the expectation level selected by referring to the expectation level selection table 222i. As a result, the difference between the display content of the expectation level display mode set in the process of S4202 and the display content of the expectation level display mode set in the process of S4203 can be compensated for by the expectation level increase effect at multiple timings. Since the expectation level increase mode Dk4 can be set by setting one timing, variations in performance can be increased without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In the example described above, the display mode of each expectation level display mode is determined first, and the content of the expectation level display mode Dk4 is set based on the value corresponding to the difference, but other configurations , the display mode of the expectation level display mode Dk4 is set based on the expectation level selected with reference to the expectation level selection table 222i, and the display content of each expectation level display mode is determined based on the setting contents. It may be configured as follows.

Next, with reference to FIG. 152, the countdown effect setting process (S3810) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the contents of the countdown effect setting process (S3810). This countdown effect setting process (S3810) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 140) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and the received variation pattern is the variation pattern for executing the countdown effect. This is a process that is executed when it is determined that this is a countdown effect that accurately informs the player of the execution timing of a specific effect as a suggestion effect to suggest to the player the execution timing of a specific effect to be executed during the variable display. Executes a process for setting a performance mode, a process for setting a performance mode for a precursor performance to suggest that a countdown performance will be performed, and a specific performance determination process for determining a specific performance that is a target of the countdown performance. do.

When the countdown effect setting process (S3810) is executed, first, it is determined whether the omen setting flag 223t is set to on (S4301). If it is determined that the omen setting flag 223t is not set to on (set to off) (S4301: No), it is possible to execute the suggestion effect among the multiple specific effects included in the current fluctuation pattern. One specific effect set to the timing is set (S4302). In other words, among the specific performances (specific performances a and b (see FIG. 100(b))) other than the specific performance (specific performance c (see FIG. 101)) that is executed at a timing when it is difficult to execute the suggestive performance, Set one.

After completing the process of S4302, it is next determined whether the current variation pattern is a winning variation pattern (S4303). If it is determined that the current variation pattern is a winning variation pattern (S4303: Yes), the start timing of the precursor effect is the precursor display a (timing 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (Fig. 100(b)). reference)) (S4304), and in the process of S4303, if it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that has not won a winning (missing) fluctuation pattern (S4303: No), as the start timing of the omen effect. The precursor display b (timing 17 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (see FIG. 100(b))) is set (S4305). That is, in this control example, the start timing of the suggestive performance that suggests the execution timing of the specific performance (the start timing of the omen performance) can be set based on the lottery result (appropriateness determination result) of the variation.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, a configuration is used in which the start timing of the suggestive effect (start timing of the omen effect) is set based on the lottery result (appropriateness determination result) of the fluctuation, but the start timing of the suggestive effect is set based on other conditions. It may be configured to set the start timing of the suggestion effect (the start timing of the omen effect), for example, by determining the result of the player's operation on the frame button 22 or the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. It is configured to set the start timing of the suggestive effect (start timing of the omen effect) based on the result (prereading result), the timing result of a timekeeping means (for example, a real-time clock), past gaming history, etc. You may do so.

In this way, multiple timings (suggestion performance start points) that can be set as the start timing of the suggestion performance (foreshadowing performance) are prepared for one fluctuation display (variation pattern), and the various conditions described above can be satisfied. By using a configuration in which one of a plurality of suggested presentation start possible points is set based on the above, the degree of freedom of the suggested presentation to be executed can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the process of S4304 or S4305, once the start timing of the omen effect (suggestive effect) is set, a countdown period is then set based on the start timing of the specific effect and the start timing of the omen effect (suggestion effect) ( S4306).

To specifically explain this process with reference to FIG. 100(b), in the process of S4302, the specific effect that is the target of the suggestive effect in the current variation display is specified as specific effect a (which is executed 30 seconds after the start of the variation). If the start timing of the precursor effect is set as the precursor display a (timing 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (see FIG. 100(b))) in the process of S4304, the countdown period is set to 7. seconds is set, and in the process of S4302, the specific effect that is the target of the suggestive effect in this fluctuating display is set to specific effect a (a specific effect that is executed 30 seconds after the start of the variation), and in the process of S4305, the specific effect that is the target of the suggestive effect is set to When the precursor display b (timing 17 seconds after the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 100(b))) is set as the start timing of , 3 seconds is set as the countdown period.

Next, the timing at which the countdown effect starts (the display timing of the countdown effect) is calculated based on the start timing of the specific effect and the set countdown period, and the timing between the start timing of the omen effect and the display timing of the countdown effect is calculated. The interval, that is, the precursor effect period during which the precursor effect is executed is calculated (S4307). Next, in the process of S4307, it is determined whether the calculated interval (harbinger performance period) is within 15 seconds (S4308). If it is within 15 seconds (S4308: Yes), the performance mode of the warning performance (harbinger performance period) is determined. If it is determined that the interval (foreshadowing performance period) is not within 15 seconds (longer than 15 seconds) (S4308: No), a long performance is set as the precursory performance mode (S4309). The mode is set (S4310).

When the process of S4309 or S4310 is finished, a display countdown effect command corresponding to the set mode (specific effect mode, countdown effect mode, omen effect mode) is set (S4311), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the omen setting flag 223t is set to on (S4301: Yes), that is, in the winning information command process (see S3210 in FIG. 141), if the omen effect has already been executed (multiple If the precursor effect is to be executed across variable displays), a multiple variable effect setting process (S4312) is executed, and then the process of S4311 described above is executed, and this process ends.

Here, the contents of the multiple variation effect setting process (S4312) will be explained with reference to FIG. 153. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the contents of the multiple variation effect setting process (S4312). In this multiple variation performance setting process (S4312), a precursor performance continuation execution process that continues to execute the precursor performance executed during the previous fluctuation display, and a countdown performance for a specific performance corresponding to the precursor performance are set. The processing to do so is executed.

When the multiple variable effect setting process (S4312) is executed, first, specific effect C (see FIG. 101) is set as a specific effect (S4401), and the countdown period is set to 3 seconds (S4402). Then, a display precursor command is set (S4403). The display precursor command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. The information is sent to the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display precursor command, it displays the precursor effect on the third symbol display device 81 at the same time as the start of the current variation (including a time difference that is indiscernible to the player). By configuring in this way, it is possible to display an omen effect continuously from the previous variable display without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the display control device 114 of this control example has means for determining whether or not a precursor effect is being displayed at the timing when the variable display ends (when the precursor setting flag 223t is turned on from the audio lamp control device 113). (a means for determining whether a command indicating that the variable display has been set has been received) and a means for determining that a foreshadowing effect is being displayed at the timing when the fluctuating display ends, a foreshadowing effect that is being executed. There is an effect data storage area that temporarily stores the data together with time data indicating the timing at which the fluctuation has ended, and when a display precursor command is received, the previous effect data stored in the effect data storage area is stored. and restart display means for restarting and displaying the display from the point at which the fluctuation display of The effect of running toward the target (see FIG. 98(a)) can be performed without interruption.

Furthermore, in this control example, since the display precursor command is configured to be output as the display variation pattern command that indicates the variation display of the special symbol, multiple variations can be straddled in response to the variation display of the special symbol. It is possible to perform display processing for the performance (continuous performance) performed in . Therefore, the process of the conventional display control device 114, that is, the performance mode for the period until the special symbol variation ends is displayed based on the content of the variation pattern command received every time the special symbol variation display is executed. Continuous effects can be executed using the process, and the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced. In addition, in such a configuration, when performing a continuous display that continues the dynamic display even during the stop period of the special symbol (symbol confirmation period (for example, 0.5 seconds)), the A continuous performance with a length equal to the calculated variation time plus the above-mentioned symbol confirmation period is set. Thereby, continuous performance can be smoothly executed even during the symbol determination period of the special symbol, that is, during the period between consecutive fluctuation patterns.

It should be noted that configurations other than this control example may be used as long as the configuration is such that the series of precursor performances can be executed without interruption when the precursor performances are executed across a plurality of fluctuations, for example, The harbinger effect is executed without setting the harbinger effect period (the end timing of the harbinger effect) in the previous variable display, and the end timing of the harbinger effect is set based on the timing at which the countdown effect is executed in the current variable display. It may be configured as follows.

Returning to FIG. 153, the explanation will be continued. After completing the process of S4403, next, a display countdown effect command is set (S4404), the omen setting flag 223t is set to OFF (S4405), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 154, the effect update process (S3112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the effect update process (S3112). This effect update process (S3112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is controlled based on the elapsed time regardless of changes in the special symbol. This is a process for setting effects.

When the effect update process (S3112) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is greater than 0 (S5101). If it is determined that the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S5101: No), that is, if the elapsed time is not being counted, the process related to elapsed time measurement is performed. The process skips to step S5108.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is greater than 0 (S5101: Yes), the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is subtracted by 1 (S5102), and then the value of the elapsed time counter 223k after the subtraction is It is determined whether it is 0 (S5103). Here, if it is determined that the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is not 0 (it is 1 or more) (S5103: No), the process directly proceeds to S5108.

In the process of S5103, if it is determined that the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is 0 (S5103: Yes), then the display extension flag 223i is set to OFF (S5104) and the special symbol is currently changing. It is determined whether there is one (S5105). In the process of S5105, if it is determined that the special symbol is not currently changing (S5105: No), a normal display effect is used to notify the display control device 114 that the extended display of the jackpot ending display is to be ended. A command is set (S5106), and the process moves to S5107.

On the other hand, in the process of S5105, if it is determined that the special symbol is currently changing (S5105: Yes), the process of S5106 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5107. By configuring this way, when an extended performance (a performance that extends and displays the ending display of the jackpot) is executed after the end of the jackpot, the time condition (4 seconds elapsed), which is one of the conditions for ending the extended performance, is executed. ) is established, and if the special symbol is not changing, the extension performance is immediately ended, and if the special symbol is changing, the display extension flag 223i is set to OFF, and the next special symbol variation is started. The extended performance will end at that time. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the situation where the extended performance suddenly ends while the special symbols are changing, which confuses the player, and also to prevent complicated performance setting processing when the extended performance ends while the special symbols are changing. Since there is no need to execute it, the processing load can be reduced.

In the process of S5108, other processes related to updating of effects are executed. Specifically, for example, processing related to presentation based on time information acquired from a real-time clock (RTC) is executed (S5108). After that, this process ends.

<About the control process of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 to 172. The processing of the MPU 231 can be roughly divided into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing that is executed for one frame from the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thereby, the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 155, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, this main processing is started according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is canceled, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" depending on its hardware configuration. , specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of processing according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs that are first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 will not know that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". This will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, a problem arises in that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in this control example, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can be used at high speed. Since this is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is canceled, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the main processing can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 made up of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 executes various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start.

Here, the boot process (S6001) will be explained with reference to FIG. 156. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81, instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a that can have a large capacity with a small area, so it can sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs, etc. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access, so if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, there is a risk that the processing performance of the display control device 114 will be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and character ROM 234 described above, the first program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is released. A predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). Thereby, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a through the process of S6101.

Furthermore, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined location in the program storage area 233a in the process of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs currently in use are transferred in predetermined amounts to the program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and among the fixed value data, the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) are stored in the data table. Transfer to storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the command to be executed after this boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 155) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 155) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is finished and the main boot process is ended.

In this way, by executing the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 155), the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all configured by DRAM. The data is transferred to the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233 and stored therein. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined location, and from then on, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. It is used to perform various processes.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read control programs and fixed value data from a work RAM configured with a DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated performances can be easily executed using the auxiliary performance section.

On the other hand, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding the NOR type ROM 234d of extremely small capacity, so it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time. I can do it.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 156, all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are included in the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a in the process of S6101. The predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S6102. It may be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further transfers the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer. 231a. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed using all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 further transfers a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then transfers a predetermined amount of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute a process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a. In addition, some of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a through this process are further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then a part of the remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute processing for setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a. Then, in step S6101, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a. After repeating the process of S6102 and S6102 multiple times, the process of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount of the boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a using the boot program.

Furthermore, in this control example, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program, which is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released, is stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, it may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to either the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. Therefore, it is possible to start controlling the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 more quickly, which becomes possible after the boot process.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 155. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I/O device, etc. are performed. Further, processing for clearing the memories in the work RAM 233, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. Note that the initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can be inspected to see whether an image of a color corresponding to the machine type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, resident video RAM 235), and information on the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image in the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can understand that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. Note that when the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. You may also write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237 to determine that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You can do it like this.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 in the process of S6003, the power-on variation image is then transferred. A transfer instruction is sent to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). This transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235). , and the start address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination.According to this transfer instruction, the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 in the process of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c is then set. is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 170(a)) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image (see S7702 in FIG. 170(a)).

In addition, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is terminated. As a result, during the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 157(b)), the simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 157(b)) and the simple display setting processing are performed so that the power-on image is drawn. (See S6309 in FIG. 157(b)) is executed.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko machine 10, since the NAND type flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer the data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying the image data on the third symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can You can check the main image. Therefore, while displaying the power-on main image on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. be able to. On the other hand, the player etc. can recognize that some initialization process is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Until the desired image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the user can wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. By using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

In addition, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on variation image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts playing the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 140 (starting winning), and the instruction to start the variable production is the main one. If a display variation pattern command is received from the control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113, the power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation production period, and a simple variation production is performed. It can be performed. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variation effect.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Since it is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, it takes time to transfer the data, so the time during which the main image continues to be displayed after the power is turned on becomes long. However, in this pachinko machine 10, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, so that immediately after the power is turned on, for example, when the power is restored, To allow a player to play a game with peace of mind even while the main image is being displayed immediately after power is turned on.

After the process in S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process in S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 157(a). FIG. 157(a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, upon receiving a command from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

This command interrupt processing extracts the received command data, sequentially stores the extracted command data in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing, which will be described later, and processing according to the commands is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 157(b). FIG. 157(b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 125) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing for the image.

As described above, execution of this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing for one frame of images is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231 . Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process has finished, so it may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be explained, and then details of each process will be explained with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 157(b), it is first determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so the normal effect image is used as the third symbol instead of the power-on image. In order to display the command on the display device 81, a command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the audio lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. If a display variation pattern command is stored, a demonstration display data table or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination processing, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processing is executed. This is because command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variable pattern command, a display stop type command, etc. are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode and stop type of the variable effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113, and create the effect image according to the mode. Drawing of the image can be controlled so that it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Note that details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 158 to 166.

In the display setting process (S6303), one frame of image to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) etc. Specifically specify the content. Further, depending on the processing situation, etc., the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and a display data table corresponding to the determined performance mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Note that details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 167 to 169.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (displayed object) to be displayed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent to the image controller 237 from the character ROM 234 for normal use based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, when a continuous preview command or rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview images used in the preview performance and the image data of the changed rear image from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Note that details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, determined in the task process (S6304), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S6305) are used. , generates a drawing list shown in FIG. 125, and transmits the drawing list together with the drawing target buffer information to the image controller 237. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Note that details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 172.

Next, updating processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. The counter updated by the process of S6307 includes, for example, a stopped symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stopped symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and updated every time the V interrupt process is executed. In the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, front/back off reach, front/back off reach, complete The stop type table and the stop type counter corresponding to (missing) are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), this means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, a simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then a simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process moves to S6304.

Next, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 158 to 166. FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 158, it is first determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination process ends and returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), a new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that a new command has been processed is set to ON (S6402), and then the command The types of all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed (S6403).

First, it is determined whether there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the variable pattern command processing (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 159(a). FIG. 159(a) is a flowchart showing variable pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command process, first, it is determined whether the precursor effect flag 233m is set to on (S6501). Here, if it is determined that the omen effect flag 233m is set to on (S6501: Yes), that is, when the omen effect is executed continuously from the previous fluctuation, the omen effect is executed from the start of the fluctuation. In order to do so, a variable display data table corresponding to the omen effect is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S6502), and the omen effect flag 233m is set to OFF (S6503).

Specifically, from the display data table set during the previous fluctuation and the time data set in the display data table, displayed period information indicating the period displayed during the previous fluctuation is obtained. A storage means for temporarily storing the extracted extraction information is provided, and in the process of S6502, the continuation of the foreshadowing performance executed during the previous special pattern variation is configured to be executed in the current special pattern variation. . Thereby, even if the foreshadowing effect is executed across a plurality of variations, the foreshadowing effect can be displayed smoothly.

In addition, in this control example, the content of the precursor performance executed during the previous fluctuation is stored, and the continuation of the stored precursor performance is executed during the current fluctuation, but other configurations may be used. For example, it is possible to divide the display data table corresponding to the precursor effect into multiple effect blocks that correspond to the passage of time, determine the effect block that was executed during the previous change, and use the previous change in the current change. It may be configured such that the effect block set next to the effect block executed during the execution is executed. Thereby, it is possible to simplify the management of the precursor performance that is executed across a plurality of fluctuations.

In addition, in this control example, as a precursor performance that is executed across a plurality of fluctuations, only the precursor performance for two variations can be executed, so the precursor performance flag 233m is set to on in the process of S6501. If it is determined that the current variation is the end variation of the harbinger, the harbinger effect flag 233m is set to off in the process of S6503. If it is configured to be executed across , a counter (for example, a sign effect counter) that can determine the period (number of changes of special symbols) during which the sign effect flag 233m is set to on. and a storage means (e.g., performance continuation number storage means) for storing the number of variations in which the executed precursor performance continues, and each time the fluctuation pattern command process is executed, the value of the precursor performance counter is stored. is updated, it is determined whether the updated value matches the value stored in the performance continuation number storage means, and when it is determined that they match, the precursor performance flag 233m may be set to OFF.

In the process of S6501, if it is determined that the precursor effect flag 233m is not on (off) (S6501: No), or when the process of S6503 is finished, next, the variable effect indicated by the display variation pattern command A variable display data table corresponding to the pattern is determined, the determined variable display data table is read from the variable effect table storage area (not shown) of the data table storage area 233b, and set in the display data table buffer 233d ( S6504).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of a fluctuation at intervals of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is not performed. When executing the command, it is unlikely that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly used for display. There is also a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variable pattern command. In preparation for such a case, in the process of S6501, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variable display data table corresponding to a variable pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a variable effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table will actually be displayed by the main controller. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying a variation effect according to the set variation display data table. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation time is actually longer than the set display data table. Even if a fluctuating performance with time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating performance according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 will issue a command for the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display on the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the changes in the 3 symbols.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6504 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6505).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6504, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6506), and the pointer is 233f is initialized to 0 (S6507). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S6508), the variable pattern command processing is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command process (see FIG. 159(a)), in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6507, the display data table buffer 233d is updated by the process of S6504. The drawing content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set variable display data table, and at the same time, the content of one frame of image to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, S6505 The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process, and the necessary sprite image data in the set variable display data table is The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in advance.

In addition, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h whose time data has been set in the process of S6503 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table is finished. If it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, in this control example, when the omen effect flag 233m is set to on (S6501: Yes), the variable display data table corresponding to the omen effect and the variable display data table corresponding to the variation pattern command, respectively. is set in the corresponding display data table buffer, and in areas where display data overlaps, display data corresponding to the precursor effect is displayed with priority. Specifically, the layer where the omen effect is executed and displayed is given priority over the layer where the normal variable effect is executed and displayed, and when the display process is executed for each layer, the omen effect is displayed. The content displayed on the presentation layer becomes visible to the player.

It should be noted that any configuration is sufficient as long as the mode corresponding to the omen effect is displayed with priority over the mode corresponding to the normal effect, and as a method other than the above example, display data for the omen effect and the received fluctuation pattern command may be displayed. The display data for the normal effect set based on the above may be determined, and only the display data to be visually recognized by the player may be set in the display data table buffer.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 158. In the process of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a display variation type command (S6406: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 159(b). FIG. 159(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, front/back off reach, front/back off reach, complete off) indicated by the display stop type command is created. (S6601), and compares the stop type table with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 157(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device The stop symbol after the variable effect displayed at 81 is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are turned off. (S6603), and ends this process.

Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation based on the data table, type information that specifies the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used as type information. , offset information from the stopped symbol (symbol offset information) set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S6304), after a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of variation, the stopped symbol set in the process of S6602 is specified from the stopped symbol discrimination flag set in S6603, and the identified stopped symbol is The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Note that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at intervals of several seconds or more, it will not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore executes the command determination process. Although it is unlikely that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly displayed as a display stop type command. There is also a possibility that it will be interpreted as a type command. In preparation for such a case, in the process of S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is changed assuming that the stop type is completely off. Decide on the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss is set by the process of S6602.

If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 will display the "special symbol" even if it is actually a "miss of the special symbol". A stop pattern corresponding to a "jackpot of a special symbol" is displayed, causing a player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has won a "jackpot of a special symbol", and there is a risk of lowering the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting a stop symbol that corresponds to a complete miss, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 will display a stop symbol that corresponds to a complete miss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 receives a "special symbol jackpot", so the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 158, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether there is a display win related command among the unprocessed commands. These display winning-related commands are commands that are referenced when a jackpot is won, and specifically include a display opening command to indicate the start of a jackpot, a display round number command, and a display ending command. Executed when a command etc. is received.

Here, details of the win-related command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 160. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the contents of the win-related command process (S6409). This win-related command processing (S6409) is to execute processing corresponding to the display opening command, display round number command, and display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

When the winning related command processing (S6409) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display (S6701), and if there is an opening command for display (S6701: Yes), the opening command processing is executed. (S6702), and this process ends. A detailed explanation of this opening command processing will be given later with reference to FIG. 161(a). On the other hand, in the process of S6701, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6701: No), then it is determined whether there is a display round number command (S6703).

In the process of S6703, if it is determined that there is a round number command for display (S6703: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6704), and this process ends. This round number command processing (S6704) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 161(b). In the process of S6703, if it is determined that there is no round number command for display (S6703: No), it is determined whether there is an ending command for display (S6705), and if there is an ending command for display (S6705: (Yes), executes ending command processing (S6706), and ends this processing. This ending command processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 162. In the process of S6705, if it is determined that there is no ending command for display (S6705: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 161(a), the opening command process (S6702) executed in the win-related command process of FIG. 160 will be explained. FIG. 161(a) is a flowchart showing the contents of opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is read from the opening effect table storage area (not shown) of the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S6801 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6801, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6804). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S6805), the opening command process ends, and this process ends.

By executing this opening command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6804, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6801, The drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the image data of the sprite required in the set opening display data table is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Furthermore, when this opening command process is executed, an opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Thereby, while the opening performance is being performed on the third symbol display device 81, image data necessary for the round performance and the ending performance can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. As mentioned above, in this pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the readout speed is slow, so that the jackpot performance (opening performance, round performance, ending performance) cannot be performed. It takes a long time for the image data used for the character ROM 234 to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 at the same time as the opening performance on the third symbol display device 81 is finished, so it indicates the first round. If the image data necessary for the round performance is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display round number command, there will be a lot of waiting between the end of the opening performance and the start of the round performance. This may cause the player to feel uneasy or anxious as to whether or not the game has stopped.

In addition, the display ending command that instructs the start of the ending effect is set at the timing when all the round effects (for example, 15 rounds, 10 rounds, 5 rounds, and 2 rounds) on the third symbol display device 81 are completed. If the image data necessary for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display ending command, the round effect will end. There is a long waiting time between when the game starts and when the ending effect starts, and there is a risk that the player may feel uneasy about whether the game has stopped or not.

Therefore, in this control example, when a display opening command is received, the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and ending effect is started from there, and until the variable display of the jackpot ends on the third symbol display device 81. , the transfer of data necessary for the round performance and ending performance is controlled to be completed. As a result, when the opening performance ends on the third symbol display device 81, the round performance can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, and all the round performances (for 16 rounds) can be started on the third symbol display device 81. , or 2 rounds), the ending effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player does not feel uneasy about whether the movement has stopped or feels uncomfortable. do not have. Therefore, the player can feel at ease.

As described above, in this control example, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is a jackpot stop type, the transfer of image data used in the opening effect is started from there, Control is performed so that the transfer of image data used in the opening performance is completed by the time the variable performance that results in a jackpot is completed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, when the fluctuating performance that results in a jackpot ends on the third symbol display device 81, the opening performance can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player may be worried that the operation has stopped. Or, it won't make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can feel at ease.

Next, the round number command processing (S6704) will be explained with reference to FIG. 161(b). FIG. 161(b) is a flowchart showing the contents of the round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the round number display process, first, the round number display data table is read from the round number effect table storage area (not shown) of the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6901). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S6902). Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6901, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6904). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S6905), the round number command processing is ended, and this processing is ended.

Next, the ending command processing (S6706) will be explained with reference to FIG. 162. FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending command processing (S6706). This ending command processing (S6706) is to execute processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing (S6706), first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is used for the ending effect in the data table storage area 233b. It is read from the table storage area (not shown) and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7001). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S7002). Then, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S7001, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S7003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S7004). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S7005), the ending command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this ending command process, it is possible to display the ending effect on the third symbol display device 81 when the special symbol jackpot ends, so that the player is aware that the jackpot has ended. can be done.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 158. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display hit-related command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), If there is an image change command (S6410: Yes), back image change command processing is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the rear image change command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 163. FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing back image change command processing (S6411). This back image change command processing (S6411) is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the back image change command processing (S6411), first, the back image change flag is set to ON (S7101). Thereby, it is possible to determine whether the rear image has been changed in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7603 in FIG. 171). Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back faces A to C and special back faces A to C corresponding to time effects), the back face corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is The image determination flag is turned on, and the rear image determination flags corresponding to other rear image types are set to OFF (S7102), the rear image change command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process (see S7603 in FIG. 171), when it is detected that the back image change flag set in S7101 is turned on, the changed image is determined from the back image discrimination flag set in S7102. Specify the back image type of. If the specified back image type is back B or back C, the image data corresponding to those back images is not resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image data is A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Note that if the changed rear image type is rear surface A, all image data is resident in the resident video RAM 235, so no image transfer is performed.

In addition, in the task process, if it is specified that any of the back faces A to C and the special back faces A to C corresponding to the time effect should be displayed according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, From the back image discrimination flag set in the process of S7102, the type of back image to be displayed at that time is specified, and furthermore, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified over time, and the range of the back image is determined. The RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data corresponding to the image data is stored and the address of that RAM are specified.

Note that since the player does not operate the frame button 22 continuously for less than 20 milliseconds, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there is no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that part of the command may change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command may be mistakenly interpreted as a rear image change command. In the process of S7102, if it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image determination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image determination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one rear image change command may be extracted and a rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 158. In the process of S6410, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and if there is an error command, it is determined. If (S6412: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the error command processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 163(b). FIG. 163(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing (S6413). This error command processing (S6413) is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing (S6413), first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred is set on (S7201). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S7202), and the error discrimination flag is set to OFF (S7202). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S7201, the type of error that has occurred is determined based on the error determination flag set in the process of S7202, and a response is taken according to the error type. Processing is executed so that a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed.

Note that if it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S7202, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by each error command are set on. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that players and hall personnel can accurately grasp the error occurrence situation.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 158. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no error command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether there is a continuation value related command (S6414), and if it is determined that there is a continuation value related command (S6414: Yes), the continuation value related command process (S6415) is executed, the process corresponding to S6401 and other unprocessed commands is executed (S6420), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the continuation value related command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 164. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the continuation value related command processing (S6415). This continuation value related command processing (S6415) is to execute processing corresponding to the continuation value related command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the continuous value related command processing (S6415), first, a continuous value display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7301), and the total value stored in the total value storage area 233k is The value (total value set when receiving the previous command) is read (S7302), and the difference from the total value indicated by the command received this time is calculated (S7303).

Then, a display data table indicating the attack pattern corresponding to the difference calculated in the process of S7303 is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7304), and the value of the command received this time is stored in the total value storage area 233k. (S7305). The total value storage area 233k is configured to be able to store the total values indicated by the commands received during the period in which the continuous performance is being executed in the order in which the commands were received. Furthermore, the configuration is such that the difference value calculated in the process of S7303 can also be stored.

As a result, for example, when the received total values consecutively satisfy a predetermined condition (for example, when one of the consecutive total values is marked with 7), or when the received total values are calculated in the process of S7303, When the number of consecutive difference values is a predetermined number (for example, 300 or more), a special attack pattern display data table can be set.

After completing the process of S7305, next, null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S7306). Then, based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S7301 and S7304, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S7307), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S7308). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S7309), the continuation value related command processing is ended, and this processing is ended.

As described above, in this control example, the audio lamp control device 113 only outputs a command indicating the total value of continuous values (HP values), and the total value set in the previous continuous value related command processing is output. , and the value of the difference thereof is determined on the display control device 114 side, and the display mode (effect mode) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed by the display control device 114 based on the discrimination result. Running. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 while diversifying the display of the continuation value (HP value) in the continuation performance (battle performance).

In this control example, the audio lamp control device 113 has means for setting a total value, and the display control device 114 has a difference calculation means for calculating the difference between the total value set last time and the total value set this time. and a means for setting a display mode (attack pattern, subtraction number display) corresponding to the difference calculated by the difference calculating means, but the structure can reduce the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113. For example, the audio lamp control device 113 may have means for setting the first continuation value (the continuation value selected using the continuation value main selection table 222f) in order to vary the continuation value (HP value). and all other means (means for setting the second continuation value (continuation value selected using the continuation value sub-selection table 222g) for varying the continuation value (HP value), the previously set total Display control device 114 (difference calculation means for calculating the difference between the value and the currently set total value, and means for setting a display mode (attack pattern, subtraction number display) corresponding to the difference calculated by the difference calculation means) Alternatively, among the above-mentioned means, only the attack pattern may be set by the audio lamp control device 113.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 158. In the process of S6414, if it is determined that there is no continuation value related command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether there is an expectation level production related command (S6416), and if it is determined that there is an expectation level production related command (S6416: Yes), the expectation level performance related command process (S6417) is executed, and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the expectation level performance related command processing (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. 165. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the expectation level production related command processing (S6417). This expectation production related command processing (S6417) is to execute processing corresponding to the expectation production related command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the expectation level performance related command processing (S6417), first, a display data table corresponding to the performance indicated by the received expectation level performance related command is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7401). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S7401 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7402).

Based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S7402, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S7403), and the pointer 233f is set. It is initialized to 0 (S7404) and returns to the command determination process.

In this control example, in the expectation effect setting process (see S3803 in FIG. 151) that is set and executed by the audio lamp control device 113, the display mode at the start of the expectation effect (see FIG. 102(a)) and , a display mode (see FIG. 103(a)) that is the production result (final display mode), a display expectation level production command for indicating, and an expectation level display mode to be notified in the expectation level production. A display expectation target mode notification command for indicating the display mode (see FIG. 103(b)) is set including information indicating the display timing.

Then, in the expectation level performance related command processing (S6417 in FIG. 165), display settings are made such that the display mode corresponding to each received command is displayed at a display timing corresponding to display timing information included in each command. Specifically, the display mode at the start of the expectation level effect (see FIG. 102(a)) is displayed in accordance with the timing at which the expectation level effect starts, and then the display mode corresponding to the expectation level increase effect is displayed. (See FIG. 102(b)) is displayed. After that, if the command indicating the current expectation level increase performance includes information for notifying the expected level display mode to be notified, the display mode will be displayed in accordance with the display timing information included in the command. Display at the right time. Thereafter, a display mode (see FIG. 103(a)) that is the effect result (final display mode) is displayed.

In addition, if the player is configured to be able to select which of the multiple expectation display modes will be the target of the expectation increase effect, the selection result (correct or A command for indicating (incorrect answer) is output from the audio lamp control device 113, and based on the content of the received command, whether or not to display the final display mode is determined. In other words, if the player's selection result is correct, each piece of information (information indicating the display mode, information indicating the display timing) included in the display expectation level production command is processed in the expectation level production related command process (S6417). If the player's selection result is incorrect after execution as set in , among the various information included in the display expectation performance command (information to indicate the display mode, information to indicate the display timing), The setting information regarding the display of the final display mode is cleared, and display processing is executed so that the final display mode is not displayed.

Returning to FIG. 158, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6416, if it is determined that there is no command related to the expectation level effect (S6416: No), then it is determined whether there is a command related to the countdown effect (S6417). In the process of S6417, if it is determined that there is a command related to the countdown effect (S6417: Yes), the process of the countdown effect related command is executed (S6419), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the countdown effect related command processing (S6419) will be explained with reference to FIG. 166. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the contents of the countdown effect related command process (S6419). This countdown effect related command processing (S6419) is to execute processing corresponding to the countdown effect related command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the countdown effect related command processing (S6419), first, it is determined whether there is an additional display precursor command (S7501), and if it is determined that there is an additional display precursor command (S7501: Yes), that is, the previous change When executing an omen effect that continued from the display, an additional omen data table corresponding to the effect indicated by the additional omen command for display is set in the display data table buffer (S7502), and the table corresponds to the display data table set in S7502. The transfer data table to be transferred is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7503).

Based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S7503, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S7504), and the pointer 233f is set. It is initialized to 0 (S7509) and returns to the command determination process.

On the other hand, in the process of S7501, if it is determined that there is no display precursor command (S7501: No), a countdown effect data table corresponding to the received display countdown effect command is determined and set in the display data table buffer. (S7506), the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S7506 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7507).

Based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S7507, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S7508), and the pointer 233f is set. It is initialized to 0 (S7509) and returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 158, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6418, if it is determined that there is no countdown effect related command (S6418: No), it is determined whether there are other display commands, and if it is determined that there are other display commands, each command is Corresponding processing is executed (S6420). Here, other display commands include, for example, a command for displaying the number of held pitches that indicates an increase or decrease in the number of held pitches, or a display that targets a specific variation across multiple variations (so-called continuous preview). There are a continuous notice command for display and a time production command for display that indicates a time production based on a measurement result by a time measurement means (so-called real-time clock) included in the audio lamp control device 113.

When the command for display number of held pitches is received, a new number of held pitches flag is set to ON. Then, by extracting the number of held balls from the received command for the number of held balls for display and updating the number of held balls counter based on the extracted number of held balls, the number of held balls displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be adjusted. Update display. Further, when a display continuous notice command is received, a new continuous notice command flag is set to ON. Then, the distribution between the back surface of the fish school and the back surface of the bubble is extracted from the display continuous notice command. Next, the continuous notice information storage area is updated based on the extracted allocation, and continuous notices corresponding to the updated contents are displayed.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after each command process is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), the processes of S6402 to S6420 are executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6420 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command is determined. Finish the process.

Note that the simple command determination process (S6308) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 157(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are selected from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute variable pattern command processing (see FIG. 159(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 159(b)), which are the processing corresponding to each command. , performs the process of discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 159(a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that are required in that case are stored in the main image at power-on area 235a and the variable image at power-on area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. In the process, null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e and the contents are cleared.

Next, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be explained with reference to FIGS. 167 to 169. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 167, it is determined whether the new command flag is on (S7601), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, off (S7601: No), It is determined that no new command has been processed in the command determination processing executed first, and the processing of S7602 and S7603 is skipped, and the process moves to processing of S7604. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7601: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S7602), the error occurrence flag is is on (S7603), and if the error occurrence flag is on (S7603: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed based on the error determination flag (S7604).

Here, the warning image setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 168. FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the contents of the warning image setting process. When the warning image setting process is executed, the warning image data is developed based on the error determination flag (S7701), the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7702), and the process returns to the display setting process. On the other hand, if the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, off (S7603: No), the process skips S7604 and proceeds to S7605.

In S7605 of FIG. 167, pointer update processing is executed (S7605). Here, the details of the pointer update process (S7605) will be described with reference to FIG. 169. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process (S7605). This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the target address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7801). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in such a way that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. In addition, as mentioned above, in the various data tables, the Start information is written at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. If the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 when it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, that value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so each Substantive data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f through the process of S7801, it is then determined whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. (S7802). As a result, if it is End information (S7782: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is written in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7803), and if it is a demonstration display data table (S7803: Yes), the display data table is Time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7804), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S7805), and this processing ends. and returns to display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7803, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demonstration display data table (S7803: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( S7806), this process ends and returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is written is Since the drawing content of is always developed, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7802, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7802: No), this process is ended and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 167, the explanation will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7606). Here, the types of sprites (displayed objects) that make up the image are specified based on the drawing content developed in the process of S7606, along with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position and Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as magnification and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the time counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7607), and it is determined whether the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7608). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7608: No), the display setting process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7608: Yes), it means that the performance time of the performance corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and stop display, so check whether the fixed display flag is on or not. (S7609).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S7609: No), the confirmed display has not been performed yet and it is time to perform the confirmed display, so in order to set the confirmed display of the third symbol, S7610~ The process of S7615 is executed. In the process of S7610, the final display data table is read from the final display effect table storage area of the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7610), and then Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This clears the contents (S7611). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7612).

When the process of S7612 is completed, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7613). Then, after setting the confirmed display flag indicating that the confirmed display performance is in progress in the on state (S7614), the contents of the stopped symbol discrimination flag are copied as they are to the previous stopped symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7615), returning to the V interrupt processing.

As a result, in a case where a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of that effect. You can set the drawing contents as follows. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table, the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display performance. And, compared to the conventional case where the display contents are changed by starting another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, there is no heavy load on the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S7615 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable performance. In other words, as mentioned above, the display of the third symbol in a fluctuating performance changes depending on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance, and in the fluctuating display data table, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating performance changes based on the data table. Until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the previous variable performance is written. In the task processing, until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop symbol of the previous variation performance is identified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in the process of S7615, and the identification The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S7609, if the confirmed display flag is on (S7609: Yes), the processes of S7616 to S7621 are executed to set the display mode of the demonstration effect. In the process of S7616, it is determined whether the demo display flag is on (S7616). If the demo display flag is off (S7616: No), the demo display data table is read out and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7617), and then Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the contents are cleared (S7618). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7619).

When the process of S7619 is completed, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7620), the demo display flag is set to ON (S7621), which indicates that a demonstration is being performed in the on state, and this process is ended and the V discount is displayed. Return to processing.

As a result, even if a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed after starting the final display of the third symbol, the display variation pattern command or display opening command indicating the start of the next variation effect will not be received. If not, the drawing content can be set so that the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171. First, FIG. 170(a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7901). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7901: Yes), all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting process is performed. is executed (S7902), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Note that details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 170(b).

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S7901, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S7901: No), all image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7903), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Note that details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 171.

Next, with reference to FIG. 170(b), the resident image transfer setting process (S7902), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 170(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7902).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S8001), and if the transfer instruction has been sent (S8001: Yes). ), and further determines whether the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S8002). In the process of S8002, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in the process of S8002 that the transfer process has not finished (S8002: No), the image transfer process is continuing in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process is finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S8002: Yes), the process moves to S8003. Also, as a result of the process in S8001, if no transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been sent to the image controller 237 (S8001: No), the process proceeds to S8003.

In the process of S8003, it is determined whether all resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S8003), and if there is any resident target image data that has not been transferred (S8003: No), the untransferred resident target image data is transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S8004), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

As a result, the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the image data to be transferred here). The start address of the area (provided in the resident video RAM 235) in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. Then, it is transferred to the designated address in the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

On the other hand, as a result of the process in S8003, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S8003: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S8005), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 157(b)), the command Since the determination process (see FIGS. 158 to 166) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 167 to 169) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is The normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 171) (see S7901: No in FIG. 170(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images that should reside in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred during the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so that it continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is made to reside in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfers the image data to the image controller 237. Image drawing processing can be performed with . As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for reading the image can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third symbols, character symbols, and error messages, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by the above method, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it will not be affected by various operations performed by the player at any timing. , it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 171, the normal image transfer setting process (S7903), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7903).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7605) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is used. The information written in the indicated address is acquired (S8101). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S8102), and if it is transfer data information (S8102: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored is determined based on the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S8103), the transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer should be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S8104), and the process proceeds to S8105.

Further, in the process of S8102, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S8102: No), the process of S8103 and S8104 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S8105. In the process of S8105, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S8105), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S8105: Yes), it is further determined whether the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S8106).

In the process of S8106, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in the process of S8106 that the transfer process has not finished (S8106: No), the image transfer process is continuing in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process is not completed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S8106: Yes), the process moves to S8107. Also, as a result of the process in S8105, if no image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S8105: No), the process proceeds to S8107.

In the process of S8107, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S8107), and if the transfer start flag is on (S8107: Yes), there is image data to start transferring, so the transfer start flag is set. is turned off (S8108), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in the process of S8103 is set as the image data to be transferred, and the process moves to the process of S8113. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S8107: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag 233w is on (S8109). If the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S8109: No), there is no image data to start transferring, and the normal image transfer setting process is ended.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S8109: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed, so after setting the back image change flag 233w to off (S8110), the Among the back image discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S8111). Furthermore, the start address (storage source first address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination ( The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S8112), and the process moves to S8113.

Note that if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is for the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is Data does not exist. Therefore, in the process of S8111, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is for the back side A, the normal image transfer process is immediately terminated.

In the process of S8113, it is determined whether the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S8113). The determination in the process of S8113 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is normal video data. If it is determined that the image data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "off," it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

As a result of the process in S8113, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S8113: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , and then ends the normal image transfer setting process. This makes it possible to prevent image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be achieved.

On the other hand, as a result of the process in S8113, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S8113: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S8114). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). This includes the start address of a subarea (provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers the image data to the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forwarded to the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

After the process of S8114, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S8115), and this normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, the storage image data discrimination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "on", and by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off."

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the process indicated by the display stop type command is executed. If it is determined that the stop type information provided is a jackpot stop type, image data used in the jackpot performance can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, if the back image is changed based on the reception of a back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, among the image data used for that back image, the back side of the resident video RAM 235 is Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, in this control example, the display data table is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. At the same time that the display data table is set, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends the image to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information written in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. I can do it.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the transfer data table so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and necessary for drawing that sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 172, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instructions set by the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list shown in FIG. 125 is generated (S8201). That is, in the process of S8201, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of that sprite is stored are identified. , the specified storage RAM type and address are associated with parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing. Then, after sorting the sprites in the order of the sprite that should be placed at the backmost side of the image for one frame to the sprite that should be placed at the front side, the details for each sprite are A drawing list is generated by describing, as drawing information (detailed information), the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. In addition, when a transfer instruction is set in the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored (the storage source start address) is added as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of that sprite is stored is fixed, so the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Once the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S8202). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and develops the images by overwriting into the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be placed furthest to the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed furthest to the front.

In addition, if the drawing list includes transfer data information, from the transfer data information, the first address (storage source first address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored are determined. ) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and sequentially reads the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 at a time when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is then used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231, and images are drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed in the frame buffer. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is being developed, the image developed from the other frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

In the drawing process, after the process in S8202, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S8203). Then, the drawing process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". It will be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. This process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 157(b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and the image 20 milliseconds after the drawing process and display process for the image for one frame are completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the image for one frame is The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for 20 minutes is read. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By specifying alternately, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

As explained above, in this first control example, in the third symbol variation display for showing the lottery result of the special symbol to the player, a specific effect (for example, a "PUSH display" for causing the player to operate the frame button 22) '') is a countdown effect that is set based on the timing when a specific effect is set as a suggestion effect to notify the timing of occurrence, and the period from the start of the suggestion effect until the start of the countdown effect. It is configured to execute the foreshadowing effect set to .

Therefore, compared to the case where a suggestive performance is executed for a predetermined period of time to notify the timing at which a specific performance will occur, it is possible to freely set the period during which the suggestive performance is executed (the period during which the precursory performance is executed). .

In this first control example, the timing to start the suggestive performance and the specific performance that is the target of the suggestive performance are configured to be selectable from among a plurality of choices. With this configuration, the period during which the suggestion effect is executed can be set in a variety of ways using various combinations.

Furthermore, it is determined whether there is a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) between the timing at which the suggestion effect is started and the timing at which the specific effect is executed, and based on the determination result, the mode of the omen effect or countdown effect is determined. It is configured to be variable. Thereby, the player can play the game while predicting the performance to be performed in the future based on the content of the performance to be performed.

In addition, the mode of the omen performance and countdown performance is configured to be variable based on the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol. Specifically, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a win, a long period (for example, 7 seconds) is easily set as the period during which the countdown effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that the current variable display corresponds to the special symbol won by the countdown effect.

It should be noted that modes other than the first control example may be used as the presentation mode set based on the lottery result of the special symbol. For example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a win, the suggestion presentation period is long. The following mode may be set. In this case, a part of the performance mode is configured to be variable depending on the period in which the suggestion performance is executed (suggestion performance period), and the length of the suggestion performance period and the lottery result of the special symbol are communicated to the player. It is sufficient to notify that it is compatible with the system in an easy-to-understand way. For example, the color of the display mode of characters etc. displayed during the suggestive performance can be changed depending on the length of the elapsed period (blue → yellow → red → rainbow color). Alternatively, the stage index (for example, degree of expectation) displayed during the suggestive presentation may be configured to be variable depending on the length of the elapsed period.

Further, each of a plurality of specific performances may be set to have a different jackpot expectation level, and the jackpot expectation level may be varied depending on the target specific performance. In this case, locations where specific effects can be executed are set up at multiple points during the variable display period, and among the multiple locations, the specific effects to be executed at the point targeted for the suggestive effect are selected by lottery with special symbols. It may be configured to be set based on the results. As a result, even after the countdown effect has started and the player knows at which timing (point during the variable display period) the countdown effect is being executed for the specific effect to be executed, the countdown effect can be displayed as a specific effect. It is possible to make it difficult to understand which production will be performed, and the user can enjoy the suggestive production until the end.

In addition, in this first control example, a performance mode to indicate the period of the precursory performance (a performance mode that suggests the execution timing of the countdown performance) is used for the performance executed as a precursory performance among the suggestion performances. In this way, in addition to the performance to indicate the performance period to the player, for example, the performance mode to suggest to the player the content of the specific performance that is the target of the current suggestion performance, and the current fluctuation display. In this case, a presentation mode (notification mode) for notifying the player that a countdown presentation will be executed may be set.

Furthermore, in this first control example, the start timing of the suggestion effect (the start timing of the omen effect) and the end timing of the suggestion effect (the end timing of the countdown effect) are configured to be set separately. Suggestive effects can be executed across multiple variable displays. Thereby, even for a specific effect set at the initial point of the variable display (for example, 5 seconds from the start of the change), the start timing of the suggestive effect can be set during the previous variable display. Thereby, the degree of freedom in setting the suggestive effect can be increased.

When using the above-mentioned technology, a suggestive effect may be set to span multiple variable displays based on the contents of multiple pieces of winning information that have already been stored, or a variable display of special symbols may be executed. A means is provided for determining a winning ball (a winning ball that will be the next fluctuation) while the remaining fluctuation period is longer than a predetermined period, and a suggestive effect is provided to span multiple fluctuation displays when the remaining fluctuation period is longer than a prescribed period. May be set. In the latter case, it is difficult to store the reserved memory (when the variation time of the special symbol is short, or when it is difficult for the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 140), and the special symbol is Even if the first pending memory (the pending memory used for the next variation) occurs during the variation, it is possible to perform a suggestive effect that straddles a plurality of variation displays. Thereby, it is possible to increase the chances of performing the suggestive performance, and it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

The fluctuation time of the special symbol is generally configured such that a long fluctuation time is likely to be selected when winning a jackpot, and correspondingly, the longer the period of the suggestion performance in which the suggestion performance is executed, the higher the jackpot expectation level will be. It is configured to be high. In the conventional pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, there is a problem in that the expectation level of jackpot for the current variable display is predicted depending on the timing at which the suggestive effect is started. In contrast, in this first control example, multiple points are provided for the timing at which the suggestion effect starts and the timing at which the suggestion effect ends, so that the suggestion effect period cannot be predicted from the timing at which the suggestion effect starts. It is composed of Further, even if the suggestive performance period is the same, the period in which the precursory performance is performed and the period in which the countdown performance is performed are configured to be variable. Further, as the specific performance targeted for the suggestive performance, any one of the specific performances with different levels of jackpot expectation can be selected.

In the first control example configured in this way, even after the suggestion effect has started, the current suggestion effect period, the target specific effect, the period of the omen effect, and the period of the countdown effect can be changed. It is possible to prevent the presentation effect from being degraded due to early prediction.

In this first control example, a countdown display in which the numbers are decreased regularly (for example, every second) is used as the performance mode executed during the countdown performance, but the timing at which the specific performance is executed is For example, the configuration may be such that a plurality of divided areas are filled regularly (for example, every second) and a specific effect is executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. You can. In this case, the number of divided areas becomes the display mode to indicate the period of the countdown effect. Also, other configurations may be used.

In this first control example, display data for a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 10 seconds) is stored in the storage area of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 as display data to be displayed during the countdown effect, and is executed this time. Based on the period information indicating the period of the countdown effect set in the suggested effect to be displayed, the corresponding display data is displayed. By having display data in this way, storage capacity can be reduced.

In addition, in this first control example, the end timing of the suggestive performance (end timing of the countdown performance) is configured to be set based on the start timing of the specific performance set for the target variable performance. It is sufficient that the end timing of the performance matches the start timing of the specific performance. For example, if the specific performance is to be executed for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds), the timing may be set based on the end timing of the specific performance. may be configured.

As described above, in this first control example, the end timing of the countdown performance is set based on the execution timing of the specific performance so that the end timing of the countdown performance executed as the suggestion performance matches the start timing of the specific performance. Then, the countdown effect period is set by calculating backwards the period (time) for executing the countdown effect from the set end timing. Thereby, it is possible to easily set a countdown effect for a predetermined period in correspondence with the execution timing of a specific effect.

In the above-described first control example, as the period for performing the suggestion performance, a precursor performance period in which the precursor performance is executed and a countdown performance period in which the countdown performance is performed are set in advance before the suggestion performance is executed. However, other methods may be used, for example, the timing at which the suggestion effect starts (timing at which the omen effect starts) and the timing at which the suggestion effect ends (timing at which the countdown effect ends, i.e., It is also possible to use a configuration in which only the timing for starting a specific performance is set in advance, and the timing for switching from a precursor performance to a countdown performance is set after the suggestion performance is executed.

In this case, for example, display control may be performed so as to switch from the omen effect to the countdown effect based on a predetermined operation being performed on the frame button 22 during the omen effect. Thereby, the player can be motivated to participate in the game in order to execute the countdown effect as soon as possible. In addition, the period during which the countdown performance can be executed is determined in advance based on the lottery result of the special symbol, and the timing when a predetermined operation is performed on the frame button 22 during the omen performance is the period during which the countdown performance can be executed. It is preferable to configure the system so that the omen effect is switched to the countdown effect only when the timing is right, and to perform the operation effect to operate the frame button 22 during the omen effect at various timings. With this configuration, the player can be motivated to participate in the operation performance performed during the precursor performance, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Further, a pseudo countdown performance (pseudo countdown performance) that does not target a specific performance may be executed during the precursor performance. By executing this pseudo countdown performance, it is possible to make the player think that the precursor performance has ended, and it is possible to make it difficult to predict the future development of the performance. In this way, by configuring the pseudo countdown effect so that it is easy to execute when a jackpot has been won, it is possible to make the user play the game while expecting that the executed countdown effect is a pseudo one. Until the countdown performance (pseudo countdown performance) ends, the viewer can keep their eyes on the performance that is being executed continuously.

In the first control example described above, the length of the precursor performance period to be executed as a suggestion performance is determined, and the performance mode of the precursor performance period is set based on the determination result. A configuration may be used in which the length of execution is not determined, and, for example, a configuration may be used in which the presentation mode of the omen presentation is set based on the timing at which the suggestion presentation is executed. In this case, since the length of the precursor performance period is not determined, it is preferable to use a performance mode executed as a precursor performance that does not give the player a sense of discomfort even if it ends at any timing, for example. It is preferable to use a dynamic display mode that is executed according to a certain rule, such as a car continuing to run on a road at a constant speed.

By using such a performance mode, even if the precursor performance is executed without determining the length of the precursor performance period, it is possible to smoothly switch to the countdown performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort. Note that even when such a presentation mode is used, the display mode (for example, color) of a part of the presentation mode (in the above example, the car) may change depending on the elapsed period of the precursory effect, as described above. Of course, it may be configured to be variable.

Further, instead of determining in advance the entire length of the precursor performance period in which the precursor performance is executed, it may be configured such that only the length of a part of the period is determined. For example, the system may be divided into a first portent presentation period in the first half and a second portent presentation period in the second half, and the length of only the second portent presentation period may be determined in advance. With this configuration, it becomes possible to execute a specific omen effect only during a predetermined period (second omen effect period) retroactive from the end timing of the omen effect (start timing of the countdown effect), which makes it possible to execute the specific omen effect more smoothly. You can switch the performance from an omen performance to a countdown performance.

As explained above, in the first control example described above, the gaming state is a gaming state (variable state (high probability, with electric support) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state (low probability, no electric support), The configuration is such that an effect (battle effect) is executed to show that a time saving state (low probability, electric support available) is set. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that a gaming state advantageous to the player continues.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned battle performance is divided into a performance that suggests whether or not a gaming state advantageous to the player will end (battle reach), and a performance that determines the performance mode of the battle reach (pre-battle performance). It consists of With this configuration, battles can be held during periods other than when a gaming state that is advantageous to the player actually ends (for example, when it is determined that the gaming state will shift to the normal state by a special symbol lottery). Since the effect can be executed continuously, the player may feel a sense of expectation that the advantageous gaming state is continuing, or a feeling of anxiety that may make the player think that the advantageous gaming state has ended. It is possible to have the player continue playing the game while holding the player.

Furthermore, during the battle performance described above, a performance is performed in which a continuation value (HP value) increases or decreases to indicate whether or not a gaming state advantageous to the player (advantageous state) will continue to be set. . This continuation value (HP value) is configured to increase or decrease based on the currently set gaming state, the special symbol lottery result, the remaining period for which the advantageous state is set, etc.

Here, if you increase the increase/decrease pattern of the above-mentioned continuous value (HP value) and execute a variety of performances, the currently set gaming state, special symbol lottery result, or advantageous state will be set. It was necessary to perform complicated management that associated the remaining period of time with the displayed continuation value (HP value). Such management increases the processing load on the pachinko machine 10, and there is a need to increase the variety of performances while reducing the processing load.

Therefore, in the first control example, the above-mentioned expected value (HP value) is set based on the currently set gaming state, the special symbol lottery result, or the remaining period in which the advantageous state is set. (Main continuation value (e.g. value in the 100s)) and a value set for the purpose of increasing production variations (Sub-continuation value (e.g. value in the 10s)) It was configured to be displayed as a continuous value (HP value).

In this way, by adding up the value actually managed and set and the value set for presentation, it is possible to increase the display patterns of presentation displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in the first control example described above, a display mode (attack pattern) corresponding to the amount of difference in the continuation value is displayed. By displaying this display mode, it is possible to visually inform the player of the extent to which the continuation value increases or decreases, so that an easy-to-understand performance can be executed.

In the first control example, the display mode (attack pattern) corresponding to the difference amount of continuous values is "weak attack" as the display mode corresponding to the small difference amount (for example, in the range of 50 to 150), and the display mode (attack pattern) corresponding to the large difference amount (for example, in the range of 50 to 150). For example, there is a display mode corresponding to "heavy attack" corresponding to the range of 350 to 550), and a "medium attack" display mode corresponding to the difference amount between them (for example, the range 151 to 349). When the set display mode (attack pattern) is executed, a different effect is executed for each display mode, and then the continuation value is updated.

In other words, by understanding the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can roughly understand the amount of decrease (difference value) in the continuous value (HP), and then use the updated continuous value to determine the amount of decrease (difference value). This will help you understand the numerical values. By displaying the information in this order, it becomes possible to inform the player of information regarding the game in stages, thereby increasing the performance effect.

In addition, in the first control example described above, in order to reduce the control load of the production, when setting the display mode (attack pattern) described above, instead of using the difference value of the total continuation value (HP), the main continuation value The display mode (attack pattern) is configured to be set based on the difference value between the values. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of patterns of continuation values (continuation value before update, continuation value after update) or difference values used when setting the display mode (attack pattern).

As mentioned above, when setting the display mode (attack pattern) based on the difference value of the continuous value (HP value) based on the difference value of the main continuous value, the continuous value on the display (third pattern The difference value of the continuation value (the sum of the main continuation value and the sub-continuation value) displayed on the display device 81 does not match the difference value of the main continuation value, and the display mode differs from the apparent range of the difference value. There was a problem where an attack pattern could be set.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, in this first control example, when the continuous value (HP) value is continuously updated multiple times, the difference value of the continuous value (HP) on the display and the main continuous value The display mode (attack pattern) that is set is configured to be the same for the difference value. With this configuration, the above-mentioned problem can be solved.

Furthermore, in the first control example, a main continuation value determining means for determining the value of the set main continuation value is provided, and a sub continuation value set for the performance is determined based on the determination result of the main continuation value determining means. The selection tables for selection are configured to be different. Specifically, if the value of the main continuation value is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, 200), a selection table that defines "-20 to +20" as the selectable range for the sub-continuation value is referred to, and the predetermined value is If the value is less than the value (for example, 200), a selection table is referred to in which "-30 to 0" is defined as a selectable range as the sub-continuation value.

With this configuration, when the main continuation value is 0, it is possible to prevent a positive value from being selected as the sub-continuation value.

In the first control example, as described above, a first effect (pre-battle effect) and a second effect (battle reach effect) are used as effects to indicate a period in which a gaming state advantageous to the player is set (advantageous period). ) is configured to execute a unit performance (battle performance) consisting of. In the first performance, a performance is performed to suggest the performance mode of the second performance, and in the second performance, a performance is performed to inform the player whether or not the advantageous period ends.

Furthermore, in the first control example, the above-described unit performance is repeatedly executed while the advantageous period is set. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the second effect multiple times during the advantageous period, so it is possible to make the player play the game during the advantageous period while maintaining a sense of tension. .

Further, by making it possible to execute a unit performance a plurality of times while the advantageous period is set, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which one unit performance continues for a long period of time. This can prevent the content of the performance from being delayed.

In addition, in this first control example, the condition for one unit performance to end (the condition for executing the second performance) is that the special symbol lottery result is a specific lottery result (the trigger for the advantageous period to end). In addition to the case where the lottery result is 0, the remaining period of the advantageous period is 0, and the case where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times are used. As a result, the second effect is configured to be executed even when the advantageous period does not end, but the second effect is configured to be executed when other conditions are met. Good too.

In addition, if the second performance for notifying whether the advantageous period ends or not is executed multiple times within a short period of time, the player will quickly get bored with the second performance, so the first control In the example, the second performance (pseudo second performance) performed for the purpose of performance is suppressed from being performed multiple times within a predetermined period. Specifically, the number of times the special symbol changes after the unit performance is executed is counted, and if the counter value is less than a predetermined number of times, the pseudo second performance is not executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the second performance early.

In the first control example described above, a plurality of expectation level presentation modes are provided to gradually indicate the expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol that is changing is a jackpot, and any one of the expectation degree presentation modes displayed as the expectation degree presentation mode is provided. It is configured so that an expectation variable (increase) performance is executed in which the performance mode is changed to a performance mode in which the expectation level of a jackpot is set higher than that of the performance mode.

At least one of the above-mentioned multiple expectation level presentation modes is configured to be displayed at different timings, and the expectation level variable (increase) presentation determines which expectation level presentation mode the expectation level is to be varied. The display is performed in a manner that is difficult for the player to understand.

In the first control example configured in this way, when the expectation level variable (increase) performance is executed, it is notified that the performance mode of any of the expectation level performance modes will be varied (increased). In this state, the player is made to watch the performance while expecting that the desired expectation performance mode (for example, the expectation performance mode where the expectation level of a jackpot is already set high) will further vary (increase). I can do it.

In the first control example, the target expectation performance mode is varied by varying the timing at which the expectation variable (increase) performance is executed. Specifically, it is configured such that the expectation level performance mode that is displayed after the expectation level variable (increase) performance is executed is targeted. This allows the player to keep an eye on the timing at which the expectation level variable (increase) effect is executed.

In addition, in the first control example, the expectation level variable (increase) performance is configured such that it is possible to vary the performance mode of a plurality of expectation level performance modes, and the variable amount to be varied for each expectation level performance mode. It is configured to display a variable amount to indicate the total value of (stages). As a result, after the expectation level variable (increase) performance is executed and the player understands that one of the expectation level performance modes will be changed, it is possible to have the player grasp the amount by which the expectation level performance mode will be changed in the current performance. can.

Furthermore, after the expectation level variable (increase) performance is executed, a notification mode is displayed that informs the player of the target for increasing the expectation level in the current performance, so the player is informed of the target expectation level performance mode. It can be easily understood.

In the first control example described above, a plurality of expectation level production modes each having a production mode capable of displaying the jackpot expectation level in stages are provided, and each expectation level production mode is configured to be able to display different stages. The system is configured to predict whether or not the current fluctuation is a jackpot by comprehensively understanding the display contents of each expectation performance mode.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to complicate the manner in which the expectation level of jackpot is indicated, and it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of making predictions. There is a problem in that the processing load for control increases. Furthermore, if the production mode that increases the expectation level is biased, specifically, among the multiple expectation production modes, only one expectation production mode can be changed to a production mode that indicates that the jackpot expectation level is high. If the remaining expectation presentation modes remain as presentation modes that indicate that the jackpot expectation level is low, players may have excessive expectations for winning a jackpot, and they may become distrustful of the presentation content. There was a problem with giving away.

On the other hand, in the first control example, in a plurality of expectation level production modes, the expectation level production mode before being varied by the expectation level variable (increase) production is configured to be set in a plurality of patterns, and the special symbol According to the expectation level set based on the lottery result, the expectation level of the expectation level performance mode set in the pattern is configured to be varied (increased). With this configuration, the multiple problems mentioned above can be solved.

<Example of adding effects to the first control example>
Next, an example of adding effects to the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 to 181. In this additional example, a performance (title granting performance) that proceeds based on the content of the operation on the frame button 22 is added to the first control example described above. This title grant performance is based on the number of times an operation performance that requires a frame button operation occurs, the number of times the frame button 22 is operated for that operation performance (valid number of operations), and the number of times the operation performance was operated during a period when the operation performance was not executed. The bonus (title) given to the player is different based on the number of times the frame button 22 is operated (the number of invalid operations).

By using such an effect, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of not only operating the frame button 22 as instructed, but also performing other operations (including non-operation), and allowing the player to start playing the game early. You can prevent yourself from getting bored with it.

Furthermore, in this additional example, the appearance frequency of the operation effect that causes the frame button 22 to be operated (for example, the effect that causes the accessory unit (displaceable member) 450 to fall) is variable based on the privilege (title) given to the player. It is configured to allow As a result, for a player who is actively operating the frame button 22, the operation effect appears frequently, and for a player who does not want to operate the frame button 22, the frequency of appearance of the operation effect is reduced. It is possible to lower it.

Furthermore, compared to the case where a technique is used in which the player selects the appearance frequency of the operation effects in advance, the appearance frequency of the operation effects can be adjusted to the player's preference based on the operation results of the operation effects executed during the game. Therefore, the operations performed by the player can be reduced.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 173 and 174, the operation performance executed in this additional example will be described. FIG. 173(a) is a schematic diagram showing a conversation effect, which is one of the operation effects executed in this additional example, and FIG. 173(b) is a schematic diagram showing the effect when the frame button 22 is operated in the conversation effect. It is a schematic diagram showing the contents.

As shown in FIG. 173(a), in this additional example, an accessory unit (displaceable member) 450 is provided so as to cover an upper part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2 for details). ). Then, the words "You can talk by pressing the button PUSH" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds to prompt the user to operate the frame button 22. Here, when the frame button 22 is operated, the characters "Hello" are displayed in the main display area Dm as if the accessory unit 450 is making a comment, as shown in FIG. 173(b). In this way, in this additional example, a conversation effect that allows the user to have a conversation with the accessory unit 450 is executed. Note that the accessory unit 450 can be moved to a position other than the position (initial position) shown in FIG. 173(b) (for example, a position lowered to cover the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81). Therefore, for example, a determining means for determining the position of the accessory and a comment display position setting means for displaying a comment in a display area corresponding to the position of the accessory determined by the determining means may be provided. . Thereby, regardless of the position of the accessory, the characters "Hello" can always be displayed in the main display area Dm as if the accessory unit 450 is making a comment.

Further, as the determination means for determining the position of the accessory unit, a means for directly detecting the position of the accessory unit 450 using a proximity sensor, a drive motor for driving the accessory unit 450, or a drive motor for driving the accessory unit 450 may be used. It is also possible to provide a detection means for detecting the driving status (for example, the number of steps) of a transmission means (such as a pulley) that transmits force, and to determine the position of the accessory based on the detection result of the detection means, or to determine the position of the accessory unit. When 450 is driven based on an action scenario, means for determining the position of the accessory based on the progress of the action scenario may be used. When using the latter configuration, it is possible to know not only the current position of the character object but also the future position of the character object based on the content of the action scenario, so the display position of the comment can be changed according to the position of the character object. Can be set in advance. Further, information regarding the display position of the comment may be stored in advance in association with the operation scenario of the accessory unit 450, or a plurality of the above-mentioned means may be combined.

At the lower right side of the main display area Dm, a level display area Dr1 for indicating the current level (setting value) and a title display area Dr2 for indicating the current title are displayed. Here, the level (set value) is a value that is added (increased) based on the gaming history (gaming period, gaming results, performance content, etc.), and in this additional example, it is a value that is added (increased) based on the gaming history (gaming period, gaming results, performance content, etc.) The levels up to are provided in stages (see FIG. 176(c)), and in FIG. 173(a), the lowest level, "Grade 3", is displayed.

The title is a privilege that is set based on the above-mentioned level (setting value) and the operation details for the frame button 22. Although a detailed explanation will be given later, a plurality of systems are set for this title, and one system is set depending on the game content (the operation content of the frame button 22). Each system has a unique privilege (title) corresponding to each level, and "Beginner" is displayed in FIG. 173(a).

In FIG. 173(b), based on the frame button 22 being operated in the state of FIG. 173(a), a comment is displayed from the accessory unit 450, and the level displayed in the level display area Dr1 is increased. ``Second grade'' is displayed, and ``Half serving'' is displayed in the title display area Dr2. Note that the comment content of the accessory unit 450 is variably set according to the level and title, and the higher the level and title, the more information that is advantageous to the player (for example, the fluctuating winning expectation and the current gaming state) This setting makes it easier to display game-related information such as game information. Thereby, the player can be motivated to play the game.

Next, the contents of the accessory drive performance, which is one of the operation performances performed in this additional example, will be explained with reference to FIG. 174(a). FIG. 174(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the accessory drive performance. As shown in FIG. 174(a), when the accessory driving effect is executed, the text "Press the button to make the accessory fall" is displayed in the main display area Dm as an effect to prompt the operation of the frame button 22. At the same time, an image imitating the frame button 22 is displayed.

Further, in the first display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, the words "If it falls, it's a chance" are displayed, indicating the detection result of the accessory drive performance. If the frame button 22 is operated and the accessory falls to a position covering the main display area Dm during the period in which this accessory driving effect is being executed (during the valid operation period of the frame button 22), the changing This suggests that there is a high possibility that the special symbol has won the jackpot. In this way, in the operation effect of operating the frame button 22, by operating the frame button 22, the player can quickly sense that he or she has won a jackpot, thereby motivating the player. The frame button 22 can be operated.

In this additional example, as described above, different benefits (titles) are given depending on whether the frame button 22 is operated voluntarily or when it is not operated, so when the operation effect is executed. In addition, the player can select whether or not to operate the frame button 22 voluntarily, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in this additional example, different benefits (titles) are granted depending on the title system set as described above, so even if you continue to play with one title system, It is configured so that not all benefits (titles) can be obtained. This makes it difficult for the player to acquire all the benefits (titles) given to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

Further, since the title system is set according to the operation contents of the frame buttons, the system is configured so that all the benefits (titles) cannot be acquired unless the operation contents of the frame buttons 22 are devised. This makes it difficult for the player to acquire all the benefits (titles) given to the player, and also provides the player with various performances that are executed based on the operation details of the frame button 22. The performance effect can be enhanced.

Here, in order to obtain various benefits (titles) as described above, it is necessary to set a different title system, so initialize the current title system (initialize the history of the operation contents of the frame button 22) However, if all the history based on the games that have been played continuously is initialized, there is a risk that the player's motivation will decrease. .

Therefore, this additional example includes a change operation that allows the player to select whether to initialize all history or delete the history to the point where a different title system can be set. FIG. 174(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen during this changing operation.

As shown in FIG. 174(b), in the main display area Dm, the characters "from the beginning" are displayed as the all deletion selection mode Dr3 indicating the selection part to be selected when initializing all the history, and the characters "from the beginning" are displayed. The characters "from the middle" are displayed as the partial deletion selection mode Dr4 indicating the selection part to be selected when deleting. Here, when the all deletion selection mode Dr3 is selected, the level (set value) displayed in the level display area Dr1 and the title displayed in the title display area Dr2 are set to initial values. This all deletion selection mode Dr3 is mainly selected when erasing the operation history of different players.

On the other hand, when the partial deletion selection mode Dr4 is selected, the display that goes back to the stage where a different title system can be set is displayed in the level display area Dr1 and the title display area Dr2. A detailed explanation will be given later, but in this control example, the same privilege (title) is granted regardless of title system as long as the level (set value) is low, and the level (set value) The configuration is such that when a person reaches a high rank, one of the plurality of title lines further branches into a plurality of title lines.

Thereby, the content that is retroactively displayed when the partial deletion selection mode Dr4 is selected can be changed depending on the level (setting value) and title at the time of selecting the partial deletion selection mode Dr4. Note that a title system may be provided that is not set unless this partial deletion selection mode Dr4 is selected. This makes it necessary not only to add (increase) the level (set value) but also to subtract (decrease) it, making it possible to provide games with a greater variety of variations.

As explained above, in this first control example, when a jackpot game is executed multiple times during a predetermined period as a performance during a jackpot game, a jackpot performance that spans the multiple jackpot games. (continuous jackpot effect) is executed, and the structure is configured so that the game result after the currently executed jackpot game ends is suggested to the player depending on the contents of the jackpot effect executed during the jackpot game. However, if a gaming machine has a special gaming state other than a jackpot game, for example, a gaming machine that has a small win game where fewer benefits can be given to the player than a jackpot game, the When a small winning game or a big winning game (hereinafter referred to as a winning game) is executed multiple times, a winning performance (continuous winning performance) that spans the multiple winning games is executed. It's okay. In this way, in the first control example described above, the content explained for winning a jackpot may be performed for game results other than a jackpot (for example, a small win), and The game results include various game results that are conventionally known.

In addition, in this first control example, as a game result after the currently executed jackpot game ends, the configuration is such that the player is advised whether or not he will win the jackpot again within a predetermined period (in the suspended memory). However, other game results may be suggested to the player by the winning performance executed during the winning game, for example, the number of winning jackpots (including small winnings) in the reserved memory, or the number of winning jackpots (including small winnings). (including small wins), the game status (probability variable state or time saving state) after the jackpot (including small win) won in the reserved memory, and multiple game results (big win, small win). If this is the case, it may be configured to suggest the type of game results and the order in which they will be played.

Furthermore, in the first control example, the content of the jackpot effect is varied based not only on the ball entry information stored at the timing when the jackpot game is executed, but also on the ball entry information newly stored during the jackpot game. It is configured so that it can be done. With this configuration, more ball entry information can be referred to, making it easier to execute continuous jackpot effects, and making players interested in jackpot effects.

In addition, in this control example, as a continuous jackpot performance, the content of the jackpot performance can be varied based on the number of ball entry information stored at the time when the jackpot game is executed. Specifically, based on the number of ball entry information stored at the time when the jackpot game is executed, multiple pieces of information are provided so that the timing of suggesting (notifying) that you will win the jackpot again within a predetermined period (within the suspended memory) is different. The system is configured so that a jackpot performance of .

Among these, in a specific jackpot performance (additional performance) that can be executed when the number of reserved balls (number of entered balls) of the special symbol is not the upper limit, new ball entered information is acquired during the jackpot game, and the entered ball information is When a player has won a jackpot, the contents of the jackpot presentation can be changed so that the player does not notice it.

In the above-mentioned specific jackpot performance, a jackpot game (multiple round games (for example, 15 round games)) executed during one jackpot is partially notified (for example, 5 rounds are notified). Since the performance is executed, while the specific jackpot performance is being executed, it is possible to inform the player of how many rounds and how many times the jackpot game has been executed in a way that is difficult for the player to understand. Therefore, depending on the number of rounds set for the jackpot game, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing in advance the gaming state after the jackpot.

In this control example, the additional display of the jackpot game based on the additional performance (additional display of the number of rounds) is configured to be executed every predetermined round (every 5 rounds). The length of the inter-round interval period in a predetermined round is set longer than the length of other inter-round interval periods. Thereby, it is possible to perform an effect that incites whether or not the jackpot will end every predetermined round (every 5 rounds). In addition, since the special symbol is configured to change a predetermined number of times (4 rotations) after the end of the jackpot in a shortened time (0.5 seconds), every predetermined round (every 5 rounds) This makes it difficult for the player to distinguish between the interval period and the special symbol variation period between jackpots.

In addition, it is preferable that the variation period of the special symbol for a predetermined period executed after the end of the jackpot is always constant regardless of whether or not a jackpot is won. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern table that selects the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol for 4 rotations after the end of the jackpot is set to 0.5 second fluctuation for the entire period if the lottery result is a loss, and if the lottery result is a jackpot, , it is preferable to specify that a 2-second variation is selected for the first rotation, a 1.5-second variation for the second rotation, a 1-second variation for the third rotation, and a 0.5-second variation for the fourth rotation. As a result, the predetermined period (the period until the special symbol changes 4 times or the period until winning the jackpot) is fixed (2 seconds) regardless of the lottery results of the special symbols for 4 rotations after the end of the jackpot. be able to. In this case, by configuring the interval period for each predetermined round (every 5 rounds) to match the above-mentioned predetermined period (2 seconds), the interval period for each predetermined round (every 5 rounds) and the time between the jackpot It is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish between the special symbol variation period and the special symbol variation period.

In addition, in the first control example, as a jackpot effect executed during a jackpot, during a jackpot game (round game execution), a normal jackpot that does not suggest winning the jackpot again within a predetermined period (in the suspended memory) It has a performance. When this normal jackpot effect is executed, the end display mode displayed in the final period during the jackpot game (ending period after the end of the round game) will be changed for a predetermined period after the jackpot (4 variations of special symbols, or 4 seconds) will be displayed continuously. If the jackpot is won again within the period in which the end display mode is continuously displayed after the end of the jackpot, a continuous winning performance is executed in which the jackpot performance is started again via the end display mode.

By configuring in this way, ball entry information corresponding to the special symbol fluctuations executed during a predetermined period (4 special symbol fluctuations or 4 seconds) after the end of the jackpot game is acquired after the end of the jackpot game, Even if the acquired ball entry information has won a jackpot, it is possible to perform a continuous winning performance. In other words, since the entry information acquired after the end of the jackpot can be included as the execution condition for the continuous jackpot effect that indicates that the jackpot is executed continuously, it is possible to increase the rate at which continuous jackpot effects are executed. , it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

In addition, in this first control example, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous jackpot effect based on whether or not there is ball entry information that will win a jackpot in the pending memory. When there is ball entry information that will win a jackpot, it is determined whether the jackpot is a jackpot that is advantageous to the player or not, and based on the determination result, it is determined whether or not to execute a consecutive jackpot effect. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not a gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, a variable probability state) is set as the gaming state after the jackpot in the pending memory is executed, and continuous play may be performed based on the determination result. It may be determined whether or not to execute a jackpot effect. Furthermore, after the current jackpot hit ends, a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player (normal state (low probability state)) is set, and then the player's gaming state after the jackpot in the pending memory is set. It may be determined whether or not an advantageous gaming state (for example, variable probability state) is set, and it may be determined whether or not to execute a continuous jackpot performance based on the result of the determination.

With this configuration, it is possible to further increase the added value to the player when consecutive jackpot effects are executed, and it is possible to allow the player to play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, as in the second control example described above, in a gaming machine having a falling lottery configuration, it is difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state when winning a jackpot. The lottery result may be notified to the player.

Specifically, a means for determining the gaming state at the time of winning the current jackpot, a means for determining the gaming state set after the end of the current jackpot, and a falling lottery to be executed before winning the next jackpot. A means for determining the lottery result of the above may be provided, and it may be determined whether or not to execute a continuous jackpot performance based on the determination result of each of the above-mentioned determination means.For example, a game when winning the current jackpot It is possible to configure the system so that the continuous jackpot effect is executed only when the state is a low probability state of the special symbol, that is, when the game state of the special symbol has fallen due to a falling lottery, or after the current jackpot ends, the high probability of the special symbol is A probability state is set, and the continuous jackpot effect is executed only when it is determined that the playing state of the special symbol will shift to a low probability state by the falling lottery before winning the next jackpot. The continuous jackpot performance is executed when the gaming state of the special symbol does not shift to a low probability state due to the lottery, and the gaming state in which the current jackpot was won is also in the high probability state of the special symbol when winning the next jackpot. It may be configured so that

In this control example, the winning information at the time when the jackpot game is executed is used as the winning information used to determine the content of the jackpot performance executed during the jackpot game, but the winning information at the time when the jackpot game is executed. The timing may be any timing after it is confirmed that the jackpot game will be executed, for example, the timing when the symbol to indicate that the jackpot game has been won is stopped, or the timing when the jackpot game is started. The timing may be a predetermined timing within a period (opening period) from the start of the jackpot game until the execution of the jackpot performance. Alternatively, the timing may be the timing when the variation of the special symbol winning the jackpot starts, or a predetermined timing within the period during which the variation is being executed.

In addition, in this control example, the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state (low probability, no electricity support), the gaming state (variable probability state (high probability, with electricity support), the time saving state (low probability, with electricity support), )), an effect (battle effect) is executed to show that the game state continues. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that a gaming state advantageous to the player continues.

<About the electrical configuration in the additional example of the first control example>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in an additional example of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 to 177. FIG. 175(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 175(a), the ROM 222 in this additional example has the following points: The contents of the variation pattern table 222a are partially changed from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example described above (see FIG. 114). The difference is that a title system selection table 222aa, a title selection table 222ab, and an accessory action level selection table 222ac are added. The other configurations are the same as the ROM 222 in the first control example.

First, with reference to FIG. 176(a), the contents of the accessory motion variation pattern table 222a added in this additional example will be explained. FIG. 176(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern table 222a (for accessories). As shown in FIG. 176(a), the fluctuation pattern table 222a (for accessory objects) includes the accessory action levels (1 to 3) selected by the accessory action level selection table 222ac, which will be described later, and the extracted fluctuation patterns ( Accessory object action frequencies (low) to (high) and (none) are defined in association with a to az). With this configuration, even if the same variation pattern is selected, the accessory movement frequency can be varied.

Next, the contents of the title system selection table 222aa will be explained with reference to FIG. 176(b). FIG. 176(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the title system selection table 222aa. In this title system selection table 222aa, a plurality of title systems (1 to 3) are defined in association with the ratio of valid operations and invalid operations of the frame button 22 and the button operation ratio at the time of execution of the operation effect.

FIG. 176(c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the title selection table 222ab. This title selection table 222ab defines titles, which are benefits given to the player, in association with the current level (setting value) ("3rd grade" to "Sennin") and the title system (1 to 3). There is. The title selected here is displayed in the title display area Dr2 (see FIG. 173(a)).

As shown in FIG. 176(c), when the level (set value) is low (3rd grade to 1st dan), the same title is set regardless of which title system is set, so if the player is currently Unable to understand the set title system. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the currently set title system from being grasped immediately after starting the game, and from performing an operation to change the title system.

Next, the contents of the accessory action level selection table 222ac will be explained with reference to FIG. 177(a). FIG. 177(c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the accessory action level selection table 222ac. The accessory action level set in the accessory action level selection table 222ac is referred to when using the variation pattern table 222a (for accessory objects) described above with reference to FIG. 176(a).

As shown in FIG. 177(a), the accessory action level selection table 222ac defines accessory action levels in association with setting values (levels) and title systems, and in particular, the accessory action levels are defined in association with setting values (levels) and title systems. Of these, only title system 3 whose set value can reach "Hermit" is configured to allow selection of accessory action level 3. In this way, by providing an accessory action level that is selected only when the level (set value) is increased while a specific title system is set, the accessory action level performed during the variable performance can be adjusted. It becomes possible to give a special feeling and enhance the performance effect.

FIG. 175(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 175(b), the RAM 223 in this modified example is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example described above (see FIG. 114) in that an effect setting group 223aa is provided. . The other configurations are the same as the RAM 223 in the first control example.

Here, the contents of the effect setting group 223aa will be explained with reference to FIG. 177(b). As shown in FIG. 177(b), the performance setting group 223aa includes an operation performance number counter 223aa1, a valid operation number counter 223aa2, an operation ratio storage area 223aa3, a title system storage area 223aa4, a set value storage area 223aa5, and an invalid operation number. A counter 223aa6, a change flag 223aa7, and an accessory action level storage area 223aa8 are stored.

The operation performance counter 223aa1 is a counter for counting the number of times an operation performance that requires the operation of the frame button 22 is executed. This operation presentation number counter 223aa1 is incremented by 1 when it is determined in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 178) that the variation pattern is to execute the operation presentation (S3851 in FIG. 178: Yes), and the frame button input It is referred to when calculating the button operation ratio in the monitoring/performance processing 2 (see FIG. 179) (S5060 in FIG. 179). Then, in the change process (see FIG. 180), when changing (erasing) the operation performance history, it is cleared (see S5103 in FIG. 180).

The valid operation number counter 223aa2 is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the operation performance. In this control example, the value of the valid operation counter 223aa2 is incremented by the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the valid period during the operation performance, and the frame button input monitoring/performance processing 2 (Fig. 179), when the frame button 22 is pressed during the valid period of the operation effect, 1 is added (see S5054 in FIG. 179), and is referenced when calculating the button operation ratio (see S5060 in FIG. 179). , is also referred to when calculating the effective operation ratio (see S5061 in FIG. 179). Then, in the change process (see FIG. 180), when changing (erasing) the operation performance history, it is cleared (see S5103 in FIG. 180).

In addition, in this additional example, the value of the valid operation number counter 223aa2 is incremented by the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the valid period during the operation performance, but for example, if the frame button 22 is repeatedly pressed. It is determined whether the operation conditions are met, such as a predetermined number of presses (e.g., 20 times) for an operation effect in which the frame button 22 is pressed multiple times with good timing, and a success rate (for example, 50%) in the case of an operation effect in which the frame button 22 is operated multiple times with good timing. However, if the determination result satisfies the operation condition, the value of the valid operation counter 223aa2 may be incremented by 1. Thereby, the value of the counter can be added fairly regardless of the content of the operation performance to be executed.

Furthermore, in this additional example, the value of one valid operation counter 223aa2 is incremented regardless of the content of the operation performance instruction for the frame button 22 (press, repeated press, timing press, long press, etc.). However, for example, a valid operation count counter 223aa2 may be provided for each instruction content of an operation performance for the frame button 22, and the value of the corresponding valid operation count counter 223aa2 may be added. With this configuration, the operation history indicating the contents of the player's operations on the frame button 22 can be classified more finely, so that the contents and frequency of the operation effects can be varied to be more suitable for the player. I can do it.

The operation ratio storage area 223aa3 stores all operations of the frame button 22 based on the value of the valid operation counter 223aa2 (value of the number of valid operations) and the value of the invalid operation counter 223aa6 (value of the number of invalid operations), which will be described later. This is an area for storing the ratio (button operation ratio) of the number of valid operations to the number of times. This operation ratio storage area 223aa3 stores the button operation ratio calculated in S5060 of the frame button input monitoring/presentation process 2 (S4007) and the effective operation ratio calculated in the process of S5061 (see S5062).

The title system storage area 223aa4 is an area for storing title systems selected using the title system selection table 222aa described above.

The setting value storage area 223aa5 is an area for storing game contents and levels (setting values) set based on changing operations.

The invalid operation count counter 223aa6 is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is operated at a timing other than the valid operation period (the valid operation period of the frame button 22 during operation performance).

The change flag 223aa7 is a flag that is set to ON when the partial deletion selection mode Dr4 is selected by a change operation. By setting this flag on, an effect is performed that suggests to the player how to operate the frame button 22 to set a different title system.

The accessory action level storage area 223aa8 is an area for storing the accessory action level selected using the accessory action level selection table 222ac described above. The appearance frequency of the accessory motion performance (operation performance) is variably set by the variation pattern table 222a (for accessory objects) with reference to the accessory motion level stored in the accessory motion level storage area 223aa8.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the additional example of the first control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in an additional example of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 to 181. Note that the same elements as those in various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. First, with reference to FIG. 178, the variable display setting process 2 in this additional example will be described.

FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 2 in this additional example. In the variable display setting process 2 in this additional example, each of S3801 to S3810 and S3812 to S3817 is the same as the variable display setting process in the first control example (see FIG. 147).

When the fluctuation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 178) is executed, the same processes as S3801 to S3810 as the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 147) in the first control example described above are executed, and then the current fluctuation pattern is It is determined whether or not it is a variation pattern that has an operation effect (S3851), and if it is determined that it is a variation pattern that has an operation effect (S3851: Yes), the value of the operation effect number counter 223aa1 is incremented by 1 (S3852). , the process moves to S3853. On the other hand, in the process of S3851, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is not a variation pattern having an operation effect (S3851: No), the process of S3852 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3853.

In the process of S3853, the current variation display mode is determined based on the extracted variation pattern and the accessory motion level (S3851). Specifically, the variation pattern table for accessory actions (FIG. 176 ( The frequency of accessory motions specified in (a) is set, and the current variable display mode (variable effect display and presence or absence of accessory motions) is determined. Among the variable display modes determined here, for the content to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is set in the process of S3812, and is set in various processes of the audio lamp control device 113. Similar to the display command, the display control device 114 is notified, and the content related to the action of the accessory is sent to the command output process (see FIG. 139) executed in the main process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 139). (see S3102), an accessory operation command to be notified to the device (other device 228 (see FIG. 4)) that drives and controls the accessory unit 450 is set. When the process of S3853 is finished, the same processes of S3812 to S3817 as in the first control example described above are executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the contents of the frame button input monitoring/presentation process 2 (S3107) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be explained. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 2 (S3107).

When frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 2 (S3107) is executed, first, it is determined whether pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected (S5051). Here, if the press is not detected (S5051: No), the process ends as is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the depression of the frame button 22 has been detected (S5051: Yes), then it is determined whether the current period is the valid period of the conversation performance (see FIG. 173) among the operation performances (S5052). If it is determined that it is the valid period of the conversation production (S5052: Yes), a display press command corresponding to the button press is set (S5053), the value of the valid operation counter is incremented by 1 (S5054), and S5060 Shift to processing.

The display press command set in the process of S5053 is configured such that the content of the command is set based on the position of the accessory unit 450, the action level of the accessory unit, and the selected title. is a display press command that sets the comment display position of the conversation performance based on the result of determining the position of the accessory unit 450, and determines the content of the comment to be displayed based on the accessory action level and the selected title. is set. The display press command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. The information is sent to the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display press command, it displays the comment in the display area corresponding to the position of the accessory unit 450 on the third symbol display device 81, so that the accessory can be displayed without making the player feel uncomfortable. An effect that appears to be having a conversation with the unit 450 can be displayed.

In addition, in this control example, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the conversation validity period of the conversation performance, a display press command is set and a comment is displayed in the display area corresponding to the position of the accessory unit 450. However, if the accessory unit 450 is configured to be movable to multiple positions covered by the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the position of the accessory unit 450 and the third symbol display device 81 are The display content displayed on the display screen may be determined, and the timing at which conversation performance (comment display) is executed based on the determination result may be made different from the timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed. In other words, the comment display area displayed corresponding to the position of the accessory unit 450 and the main part of the variable performance displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the display indicating the jackpot expectation level, If it is determined that the display areas (where the display indicating the symbol to be stopped is displayed) overlap, the above-mentioned timing is determined based on the timing at which the respective display areas do not overlap, that is, the position of the accessory unit 450 moves. The comment is displayed until the display area of the comment changes, or the variable effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 progresses and the display area of the main part changes until the timing when each display area does not overlap is reached. The display may be delayed.

With this configuration, both the variable performance displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the conversation performance, which is one of the operation performances, can be suitably executed, and the performance effect can be enhanced. I can do it. Note that without using the above-described configuration, the comment display area displayed corresponding to the position of the accessory unit 450 and the main part of the variable performance displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, If it is determined that the display area in which the display indicating the jackpot expectation degree and the display area in which the display indicating the symbol to be stopped overlaps, the conversation performance may be stopped.

On the other hand, in the process of S5052, if it is determined that it is not the valid period of the conversation performance (S5052: No), it is determined whether the current period is the valid period of the accessory motion performance among the operation performances (S5055). If it is determined that it is the valid period of the accessory action performance (S5055: Yes), a display press command corresponding to the button press is set (S5056), and the value of the valid operation counter is incremented by 1 (S5054). , the process moves to S5060.

In the process of S5055, if it is determined that it is not the valid period of the accessory action production (S5055: No), then it is determined whether it is the change valid period (S5057), and if it is the change valid period (S5057: Yes), the change process is executed (S5058), and then the process moves to S5060. The details of the change process (S5058) will be described later with reference to FIG. 180.

Here, in the process of S5057, if it is determined that the change is not within the valid period (S5057: No), the current press operation is not within the valid period of the operation effect, so the value of the invalid operation counter 223aa6 is incremented by 1. (S5059), and the process moves to S5060.

In the process of S5060, the button operation ratio is calculated based on the value of the operation performance counter 223aa1 and the value of the valid operation counter 223aa2 (S5060). Next, a valid operation ratio is calculated based on the value of the valid operation number counter 223aa2 and the value of the invalid operation number counter 223aa6 (S5061), and the calculated button operation ratio and valid operation ratio are stored in the operation ratio storage area 223aa3. (S5062). Thereafter, title setting processing is executed (S5063), and this processing ends.

Next, the contents of the change process (S5058) will be explained with reference to FIG. 180. This change process (S5058) is a process that is executed when the frame button 22 is operated during the validity period of the change operation (see FIG. 174(b)), and is a process that is executed when the frame button 22 is operated during the valid period of the change operation (see FIG. This is a process for clearing (information regarding the title system, setting value (level), button operation ratio referred to when selecting the title system, and information regarding the effective operation ratio).

When the change processing (S5058) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current operation content is an all reset (or whether the all deletion selection mode Dr3 is selected) (S5101). If it is determined that all reset is to be performed (S5101: Yes), all information in the setting value storage area 223aa5 is cleared (S5102), and the number of operation performance counters 223aa1 and the number of effective operation counters 223aa2 are cleared. All values in the invalid operation counter 223aa6 are cleared (S5103), information in the title system storage area 223aa4 is cleared (S5104), and this process ends. As a result, all information based on the player's operation is cleared, the initial value "3rd grade" is displayed in the level display area Dr1, and the initial value "Beginner" is displayed in the title display area Dr2. (See FIG. 173(a)).

On the other hand, in the process of S5101, if it is determined that it is not a complete reset (S5101: No), it is determined whether the operation content is a partial reset (whether the partial deletion selection mode Dr4 is selected) (S5105). If it is determined that it is a partial reset (S5105: Yes), the change flag 223aa7 is set to ON (S5106), the information in the setting value storage area 223aa5 is set to the first stage (S5107), and the process moves to S5103. . In the process of S5105, if it is determined that it is not a partial reset (S5105: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, the title setting process (S5063) will be explained with reference to FIG. 181. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the contents of the title setting process (S5063). When this title setting process (S5063) is executed, first, a title system is selected based on the title system selection table 222aa (S5201). Then, the selected title system is stored in the title system storage area 223aa4 (S5202), and then a set value is determined based on the value of the operation performance counter 223aa1 and stored in the set value storage area 223aa5 (S5203).

Thereafter, a display setting value command is set (S5204), a title is selected based on the title selection table 222ab (S5205), and a display title command is set (S5206). Next, it is determined whether the change flag 223aa7 is set to on (S5207), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S5207: Yes), a display operation instruction command is set (S5208), and the change flag is set to 223aa7 is set to off (S5209), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5207, if it is determined that the change flag 223aa7 is not on (off) (S5207: No), this process is directly ended.

As explained above, in the above-mentioned additional example, the production mode (for example, frequency of appearance and content of production) of the operation production, which is the production for operating the frame button 22, is changed from the operation content (operation history) of the frame button 22. ) is configured to be configurable. As a result, the desired performance mode can be set without causing the player to feel bothered, compared to the case where a changing operation for changing the frequency of operation performances to the frequency desired by the player is performed separately from the game. be able to.

In the pachinko machine 10 that changes the performance mode of the operation performance based on the operation history of the player, in order to be able to set the performance mode of the operation performance that is suitable for various types of players, the performance mode of the operation performance is changed. Although a plurality of production modes are prepared, while the same operation is repeatedly performed on the frame button 22 (for example, when an operation production is performed, the frame button 22 is always operated more than the required amount). However, there is a problem in that only the same presentation mode is set, and it is not possible to provide various operation presentations to the player.

Therefore, in the above-mentioned additional example, a different privilege (title) is provided to the player by accumulating game contents, and the type of the privilege (title) is set at least on the player's frame button 22. It is configured to vary depending on the operation content (operation history).

With this configuration, various operations are performed on the frame button 22 in order to acquire different benefits (titles). Then, the performance mode of the operation performance is variably set based on the contents of various operations performed on the frame button 22. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with various operation effects that can be variably set based on the operation details (operation history) of the frame buttons 22.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 that has a configuration in which different benefits (titles) are given by accumulating game contents, setting values (for example, levels) are variably set in stages according to the accumulation status of game contents. It is common to use a configuration that grants benefits (titles) corresponding to the set value (level) set, but when the set value (level) reaches the upper limit, more benefits (titles) can be obtained. There was a risk that the players would not be able to play the game and their desire to play would decrease. Furthermore, if the upper limit of the set value (level) is set high in order to prevent the set value (level) from reaching the upper limit, there is a problem that the storage capacity for the effects increases.

Therefore, in the above-mentioned additional example, one of the multiple systems (title systems) with different privileges (titles) to be granted is set based on the operation details (operation history) on the frame button 22. The system is configured so that a privilege (title) to be given to a player is determined based on a set value (level) and a set system. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play from decreasing because it is not possible to acquire all the benefits (titles) by simply accumulating game contents.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned addition example, since it has an erasing means for erasing past game contents, when setting a system different from the currently set system, the operation contents performed in the past (operation history) It is possible to suppress the system from being set based on the following. In addition, in this additional example, in order to suppress the system from being set based on the contents of operations executed in the past (operation history), a deletion means is used to delete the contents of past operations (operation history). , other configurations may be used; for example, by inputting that a different system setting is desired (by performing a predetermined operation on the frame button 22), and in that case, It may be configured such that a new system is not set until (a period of operation history referred to when setting a system) has elapsed.

Further, in the above-described additional example, the erasing means includes a total erasing means for erasing all past game contents and operation contents, and a partial erasing means for erasing a part of them. The partial deletion means is used when setting a system different from the currently set system, and it is used to set the past operation contents (operation history) that are referenced when setting the system, so that a different system can be set. It is configured to erase even the state. This eliminates the need to restart the game from the beginning when setting a different system, so it becomes possible for the player to voluntarily set a different system.

In addition, in this additional example, when the partial erasing means is operated, a configuration is used in which a part of the past operation contents (operation history) is erased and an initial value is set as the setting value (level). However, by operating the partial erasing means, it is only necessary to set a system different from the currently set system more easily than starting the game from the beginning (rather than operating the entire erasing means). For example, The setting value (level) may be maintained while only a part of the past operation contents (operation history) is deleted. Alternatively, the player may designate a desired system and erase part of the past operation contents (operation history) until the specified system can be set.

Here, even if the player operates the partial erasing means to set a system different from the currently set system and erases a part of the past operation contents (operation history), the operation that will be executed later Unless the frame button 22 is operated appropriately, a different system will not be set for the performance, which may cause dissatisfaction to the player. Specifically, after operating the partial erasing means, if the operation performance is completed in the same manner as before, there is a risk that the same system as the system set before operating the partial erasing means may be set. There is.

Therefore, in this additional example, a guide notification means is provided to guide the player in the operation of the frame button 22 so that a different system is set after operating the partial erasing means. By executing the operation performance based on the content notified by this guide notification means, it is possible to easily set a different system. In addition, in order to set a different system, the guidance notification means announces operation contents different from the conventional operation contents, so the guidance notification means performs the operation presentation by digesting the operation performance according to the notification contents by the guidance notification means. The contents are also variably set. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an operation performance different from that of the past, and it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

Note that the content notified to the player by the guide notification means may be content that simply prompts a different operation from the previous operation performance, or content that specifically indicates the content of the operation to be performed. Further, in addition to the notification by the guide notification device, a progress notification device may be provided to notify the player of the progress until the conditions for setting a different system are satisfied. Thereby, the player can easily understand whether the operation performance is completed so that a different system is set.

Furthermore, settings can only be made by operating the predetermined erasing means when the set system and setting value (level) meet the predetermined conditions for the system set in the addition example described above. You can also add a system. By providing such a system, for example, it is possible to set a dedicated system only when the all deletion means is operated when the set value has reached the upper limit, or when the set value is one level lower than the upper limit. , the dedicated system may be set only when the partial erasing means is operated.

Furthermore, the system that can be set may be different based on the timing of erasing by the erasing means. Specifically, when the erasing means is operated during a jackpot game or while a specific variable effect is being executed, It may also be possible to set a special system only for this purpose. In this case, it is preferable that the above-described specific variable performance is executed only when the variable performance executed based on the special symbol lottery result satisfies a predetermined condition.

With this configuration, it is possible for the player to set different systems depending on the timing of operating the erasing means, and it is possible to encourage the player to participate in the game with enthusiasm.

In the addition example described above, a configuration is used in which benefits (titles) are preset corresponding to each setting value (level) of each system, but other configurations may also be used, and benefits (titles) that have already been acquired may be used. A storage means for storing benefits (titles) may be provided, and the benefits (titles) to be granted may be set based on the benefits (titles) stored in the storage means.

In the above-mentioned additional example, content suggesting the setting conditions of the currently set system is used as the content (content of the title) of the privilege (title) given to the player. As a result, by understanding the details of the acquired benefits (titles), it is possible to predict the conditions necessary to set a different lineage.

Furthermore, when predetermined gaming conditions are met, the conditions necessary to set the desired system may be notified to the player, and among the obtainable benefits (titles), the player may be informed of the conditions necessary to set the desired system, or The number and ratio of (titles) may be notified to the players. This can increase the player's desire to participate in order to obtain all the benefits (titles).

As described above, one of the multiple systems (title systems) with different privileges (titles) to be granted is set based on the operation details (operation history) on the frame button 22, If the configuration is configured to determine the privilege (title) given to the player based on the set value (level) and the set lineage, the currently set lineage is determined based on the granted privilege (title). There has been a problem in that it is easy for players to understand this.

On the other hand, in the additional example mentioned above, no matter what lineage is set, the same benefits (titles) are granted until the set value (level) reaches a predetermined stage. It is configured as follows. As a result, until the set value (level) reaches a predetermined stage (unless the game is played for a certain period of time after the predetermined system is set), the player does not know which system is set. It can be made difficult.

In addition, the operation details (operation history) on the frame button 22 referred to in the above-mentioned additional example include, for example, operation performance number information indicating the number of times the operation performance has been executed, and the frame button for the executed operation performance. 22, information on the number of successful operations to show the number of successful operations (the number of times a predetermined operation condition has been met), and information on the number of successful operations to indicate whether or not an operation has been performed on Any information may be used as long as the information indicates the status of the player's operation of the frame button 22, such as invalid operation count information indicating the number of times the frame button 22 was operated (outside the valid period).

Furthermore, as for the content of the operation performance, in addition to the push performance that simply causes the frame button 22 to be pressed within a predetermined period of time, there is also a timing operation performance that causes the frame button 22 to be operated at a predetermined timing, and that the frame button 22 is pressed a predetermined number of times or more within a predetermined period. It is also possible to provide a continuous press operation effect in which the user is operated, and a long press operation effect in which the user continues to press the frame button 22 for a predetermined period of time or more. In this case, it is preferable to configure the content of operations (operation history) on the frame button 22 to be managed for each type of operation performance performed.

With this configuration, it is possible to determine in detail whether the player simply dislikes operating the frame button 22 or whether he dislikes predetermined operations (repeated hits, long presses, timing presses) on the frame button 22. becomes possible. Therefore, when setting an operation performance that corresponds to the operation content (operation history), it becomes possible to provide an operation performance that is more suitable for the player, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling dissatisfied.

Furthermore, in the case of a pachinko machine 10 having multiple operating means, it may be configured so that each information can be managed for each operating means, or the operation contents for all operating means can be managed in total. It may be configured. Furthermore, when an operation effect that causes different operating means to be operated depending on the jackpot expectation level is executed, information indicating the number of executions of the operation effect and the number of times the operation means is operated is managed in correspondence with the jackpot expectation level. Alternatively, the operation details (operation history) may be managed only for the operation effects executed when the jackpot is won.

In the above-mentioned additional example, it is referred to when determining the mode of operation performance (execution frequency, performance mode, etc.) and the privilege (title) to be given based on the operation content of the operation means (frame button 22) for the operation performance. However, based on the operation contents of the operation means (frame button 22), other than the operation presentation mode (execution frequency, presentation mode, etc.) , the system may be configured to set only one of the above-mentioned systems or set values (levels).

In the additional example described above, the frame button 22 is used as an operation means that can be operated by the player, and it is determined that the operation means has been operated when the player presses it. However, other configurations may be used. A lever-shaped operating means that can be determined by the player tilting left or right or front and back, or a touch that can determine that the player has touched or approached the operation. A sensor-type operating means, a wireless operating means that can determine whether it has been operated by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, etc. may be used, or a plurality of the above-mentioned operating means may be provided.

As in the additional example described above, when using a configuration in which the mode of operation performance is varied based on the player's operation details (operation history) or a predetermined privilege (title) is provided, It is best to configure the system so that you can play the game while continuing the operation details (operation history) of the game you played on the previous day. Specifically, by performing a predetermined operation (termination operation) when ending the game, you can The configuration is configured so that the player can obtain information regarding the game content and operation content (password issuing process), and by inputting output information related to the obtained information into the pachinko machine 10, the player can continue from the obtained information. It is preferable that the configuration is such that the state game can be played.

<About the second control example>
Next, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 to 188. In the above-described first control example, a gaming machine has been described in which when a special symbol jackpot is won and a variable probability state is set after the jackpot ends, the variable probability state continues until the next jackpot is won.

On the other hand, in this second control example, apart from the jackpot lottery in which the special symbol is determined to be correct or not, the probability variable state (i.e., the high probability state with a high jackpot probability) is changed to the normal state (i.e., the low probability state with a low jackpot probability). ) A game machine in which a transition lottery (hereinafter referred to as a fall lottery) is executed each time a condition for determining the validity of a special symbol is established will be described. In this way, in a gaming machine that has a falling lottery function, even if a variable probability state (high probability state) is set, there is no set period during which the high probability state will reliably continue, so special symbol fluctuations are executed. This can give the player a sense of tension.

Furthermore, in this second control example, similarly to the first control example described above, when a variable probability state is set, a high probability state where the jackpot probability is high and a time saving state in which the electric accessory 140a is easy to release. Even if you win the falling lottery and fall from a high probability state to a low probability state, the number of changes of the special symbol will be 100 times after a certain period of time (for example, after the jackpot ends, the number of changes of the special symbol will be 100 times. The configuration was configured so that a time-saving state is set until the As a result, even if you win the falling lottery immediately after the jackpot ends (for example, 3 rotations), the time saving state is set for a predetermined period (100 rotations), so if you win the falling lottery depending on the operation status of the electric accessory 140a. It is possible to prevent the player from knowing that this is the case.

In addition, although the details will be described later, the falling lottery is configured to be executed before the special symbol jackpot lottery, and when the falling lottery is won, the special symbol jackpot lottery is executed as a low probability state. be done. In other words, if you win the falling lottery after the above-mentioned predetermined period (for example, the number of special symbol fluctuations exceeds 100 after the end of the jackpot), the gaming state will be the normal state at the time the special symbol fluctuation starts. (low probability state and non-time saving state) will be set.

In this case, even if the fluctuation time of the special symbol winning the falling lottery is used to perform an effect that suggests to the player whether or not he or she has won the falling lottery, he or she will fall just by looking at the operation status of the electric accessory 140a. There was a problem in that it was easy to determine whether the lottery was successful or not. Therefore, in this second control example, if the jackpot lottery is won before the falling lottery after the above-mentioned predetermined period (for example, the number of changes of the special symbol is 100 times after the jackpot ends) is exceeded, the special The game is configured so that the game state is shifted to the normal state before the symbols begin to fluctuate.

With this configuration, the operation content of the electric accessory 140a suddenly changes to the operation content in the non-time saving state after a predetermined period of time (for example, after the end of the jackpot, the number of changes in the special symbol is 100 times). In this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether he or she has won the falling lottery or the jackpot lottery, and to keep the player's sense of anticipation until the change in the special symbol ends. can.

Furthermore, in this second control example, it is possible to set a performance mode that can suggest to the player the success or failure status of the falling lottery by using the continuous performance described in the above-mentioned first control example. With this configuration, the player will be able to pay more attention to the performance being performed, and the effect of the performance can be enhanced.

<About the electrical configuration in the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 to 184. The pachinko machine 10 in the second control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 are partially changed, and in the pachinko machine 10 provided in the audio lamp control device 113. The difference is that the contents of the ROM 222 and the contents of the RAM 223 are partially changed, and other points are the same. Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 182(a) is a block diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 182(a), the ROM 202 in this control example has the addition of a fall lottery table 202ba and a fall state transition table 202bb to the ROM 202 in the first control example, and a first winning type selection table 202c. (Refer to Figure 107), the game state after the jackpot is different in that the game state after the end of the jackpot was stipulated as ``Probable variable time saving next time'', but it is now specified as ``Probable change until winning the falling lottery, time saving until falling lottery winning or 100 times''. , otherwise the same. Identical parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The falling lottery table 202ba is a table that is referred to when determining whether or not to fall from the variable probability state to the normal state (fall lottery) in the variable probability state of the special symbol, and is a table that is referred to when executing a judgment (fall lottery) on whether or not to cause the special symbol to fall from the variable probability state to the normal state. counter value) is stored. In the special symbol probability variable state, each time when a special symbol lottery is executed, this fall lottery table 202ba is referred to, and it is determined whether or not to cause the special symbol to fall to the normal state. Here, details of this fall lottery table 202ba will be explained with reference to FIG. 182(b).

FIG. 182(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the fall lottery table 202ba. As shown in FIG. 182(b), a random number (counter value) that is determined to be a fall in the fall lottery is stored. Specifically, two random numbers (counter value ) is specified. In a state where the probability of special symbols changes, when executing a special symbol lottery, the value of a fall lottery counter (not shown) is compared with a random value (counter value) corresponding to a fall specified in the fall lottery table 202ba. , if the values match, it falls to the normal state. Note that the falling lottery counter (not shown) is constituted by a loop counter that is updated periodically (for example, every time the main process (see FIG. 136) is executed) in the range of "0 to 299". Out of the 300 random numbers (counter values) that the fall lottery counter can take, two random numbers are specified for determining a fall, so the probability of determining a fall in one fall lottery is 1/150. It is. In addition, the random numbers (the value of the first winning random number counter C1) that are determined to be a jackpot in a variable probability state are 5 from "5 to 9" (see FIG. 106(a)), and a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot in a variable probability state. Since the probability is 1/48, the probability is set so that the probability of winning the jackpot is higher than the probability of being determined to have fallen in the fall lottery during the probability change state. Therefore, once the player enters the variable probability state, it is possible to make the player expect to hit the jackpot multiple times before the state changes to the normal state, thereby increasing the player's interest in playing the game during the variable probability state. can.

The fall state transition table 202bb is a state transition table that is referred to when a fall lottery is won in a variable probability state. Note that the description of the same elements as the state transition table 202f described in the first control example will be omitted.

FIG. 182(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fall state transition table 202bb. As shown in FIG. 182(c), the falling state transition table 202bb stores a falling state transition 1 table 202bb1 and a falling state transition 2 table 202bb2. Here, the contents of the falling state transition 1 table 202bb1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 182(d).

FIG. 182(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the falling state transition 1 table 202bb1. This state transition 1 table 202bb1 for falling is different from the state transition 1 table 202f1 explained in the first control example in that a state status in the case of winning the falling lottery is added to each state status, and other than that, are the same.

Specifically, if the state status is "ST2" and the specified number of times counter is larger than 0 (maximum 100) and you win the fall lottery, the state status is set to ST3 (with low probability time reduction), and the specified number of times counter is larger than 0 (maximum 100). The value of the number counter continues unchanged. Further, when the state status is "ST2" and the specified number of times counter is 0, if the fall lottery is won, the state status is set to ST1 (low probability, no time saving).

In other words, even if the value of the specified number of times counter is set to 100 and you win the fall lottery before the value of the specified number of times counter is decremented to 0, the time will be saved until the value of the expected number of times counter is subtracted to 0. Status is given.

Next, the fall state transition 2 table 202bb2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 182(e). FIG. 182(e) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fall state transition 2 table 202bb2. This state transition 2 table 202bb2 for falling is different from the state transition 2 table 202f2 explained in the first control example in that a state status in the case of winning the falling lottery is added to each state status, and other than that are the same.

Specifically, when the state status is "ST2a" and the specified number of times counter is larger than 0 (maximum is 4), if you win the fall lottery, the state status is set to ST3a (special with low probability time saving), The value of the specified number of times counter continues as is. In addition, if the state status is "ST2" and the specified number of times counter is larger than 0 (maximum 96) and you win the fall lottery, the state status is set to ST3 (with low probability time saving) and the value of the specified number of times counter will continue as is. Further, when the state status is "ST2" and the specified number of times counter is 0, if the fall lottery is won, the state status is set to ST1 (low probability, no time saving).

In other words, even if the value of the specified number of times counter is set to 100 and you win the fall lottery before the value of the specified number of times counter is decremented to 0, the time will be saved until the value of the expected number of times counter is subtracted to 0. Status is given.

FIG. 183(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 183(a), the ROM 222 in this control example is different from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that a continuous performance mode selection 3 table 222e is provided in place of the continuous performance mode selection table 222e, and a final mode selection The difference is that a final mode selection 3 table 222h is provided instead of the table 222h, and the other points are the same. Identical parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the continuous performance mode selection 3 table 222e will be explained with reference to FIG. 184(a). FIG. 184(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the continuous performance mode selection 3 table 222e. This continuation production mode selection 3 table 222e corresponds to the value of the remaining period (residual fluctuation number) stored in the remaining period storage area 223bb, with respect to the continuation production mode selection table 222e of the first control example described above, The difference is that the response to the continuous performance mode is selected. In addition, if there is winning information indicating a jackpot win in the hold at the time of a fall lottery, it is a special situation in which the jackpot is won immediately after winning the fall lottery (a jackpot in a low probability state), so regardless of the remaining period. First, special mode B can be selected to provide a bonus effect to the player.

Next, the contents of the final mode selection 3 table 222h will be explained with reference to FIG. 184(b). Figure 184(b) is. It is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a final mode selection 3 table 222h. This final mode selection 3 table 222h is different from the final mode selection table 222h used in the first control example described above in that the final mode is different depending on the setting status of the fall flag 222ba, and other The points are the same. Identical parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 184(b), even if the win/fail determination result is a failure, if there is winning information indicating a jackpot win in the pending state, this can be indicated in the final mode of this time.

Returning to FIG. 183(b), the explanation will be continued. FIG. 183(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in this second control example. As shown in FIG. 183(b), the RAM 223 in the second control example is different from the RAM 223 in the first control example in that a fall flag 223ba and a remaining period storage area 223bb are provided, and other points are the same. be. Identical parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The fall flag 223ba is a flag for indicating that the player has won the fall lottery, and is set to ON when a status command indicating that the player has won the fall lottery is received from the main control device 110.

<About the control process executed by the main controller 110 in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 185, the control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described. This control example is different in that special symbol variation start processing 3 (S213) is used instead of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 128) of the first control example described above, and other points are the same. . Identical parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special variation start process 3 (S213) is executed, first, the processes of S301 and S302 are executed similarly to the special variation start process of the first control example (see FIG. 128), and then the value of the falling lottery counter and , the random number value (counter value) corresponding to a fall specified in the fall lottery table 202ba is compared (S351), and whether the value of the fall lottery counter matches the random number value corresponding to a fall (the lottery result corresponding to a fall) (S352).

In the process of S352, if it is determined that the lottery result corresponds to a fall (S352: Yes), the probability change flag 203g is set to OFF to change the gaming state to the normal state (S353), A status command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 113 that the gaming status has been changed to the normal status (S354).

Then, similarly to the special fluctuation start process of the first control example (see FIG. 128), after executing the processes of S303 to S307, it is determined whether the current jackpot was won after a short time period (S355). Here, if the winner is won after the short time period (S355: Yes), the short time counter 203h is reset (S356), and then S310 and S311 are carried out similarly to the special fluctuation start process of the first control example (see FIG. 128). Execute the process and end this process.

As explained above, in this second control example, when the advantageous state (probability variable state) advantageous to the player is set and the special symbol fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the special symbol lottery (jackpot Before the lottery (lottery) is executed, a fall lottery is executed to determine whether or not to shift the game state from an advantageous state to a normal state (a game state which is more disadvantageous than the advantageous state).

Furthermore, in this control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a jackpot while the electric accessory 140a is in a state where it is easy to release (variable probability state or time saving state (hereinafter referred to as high probability state of normal symbol)), It is configured to shift the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state before starting the fluctuation of the target special symbol.

According to the control process of the main controller 110 in the second control example described above, there are two termination conditions for terminating the high probability state of the normal symbol. Specifically, the first end condition is that the number of changes of the special symbol executed during the time saving state reaches a predetermined number (the number of time saving times given to the set state), and the game state is set as a definite change. When the state is set, winning the falling lottery is the second ending condition, and the high probability state of the normal symbol ends when both of the above two ending conditions are met. . In addition, regardless of whether or not the above-mentioned two termination conditions are met, if the special symbol wins the jackpot, the termination condition of the time-saving condition is satisfied.

In other words, for example, if you win a jackpot in which the game state is set to a variable state (next time) after the jackpot ends, and the number of time reductions is set to 100 times, the special symbol has changed 100 times, which is the first end described above. The above-mentioned second termination condition is that the lottery has been won. Specifically, in the above example, if you win the falling lottery at the 10th rotation of the special symbol change after the end of the jackpot, the second ending condition is met at that point, but the first ending condition is Since this is not true, the high probability state of normal symbols continues until the first ending condition is met (the special symbol changes 100 times) (until both ending conditions are met). Then, when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 100, both of the two end conditions are satisfied, and the state shifts from the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state.

On the other hand, in a state where the number of special symbol changes after the end of the jackpot exceeds 100 (state where the first end condition is met), you have not won the falling lottery (state where the second end condition is met) If not, the high probability state of the normal symbol continues until the player wins the falling lottery. Then, when winning the falling lottery (when the second end condition is satisfied), the state shifts from the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state.

In this way, by providing a plurality of (two) conditions necessary for transitioning the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state, it is possible to diversify the state transition timing of the normal symbol. In addition, if only the second ending condition described above is not met (in the example described above, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set in a state where the number of special symbol fluctuations exceeds 100) ), because it is difficult for the player to grasp when the normal symbol will transition to the low probability state (or win the falling lottery), the normal symbol will be in the high probability state for as long as possible. It is possible to play the game while making the player look forward to it.

In addition, in this second control example, the number of special symbol changes is set to 100 times as one of the conditions for transitioning from the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol to the low probability state (normal state). However, the number of times may be set to a plurality of times depending on the type of jackpot, for example, a plurality of times may be set in stages such as "1 time", "25 times", and "50 times". By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a plurality of timings at which the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol ends, in addition to the presence or absence of winning in the falling lottery. Specifically, if you win the falling lottery before the number of special symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 25, 50, 100 times) after the end of the jackpot, the number of special symbol fluctuations reaches the predetermined number (for example, 25, 50, 100 times). For example, if the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol ends when the number of times (1, 25, 50, 100 times) is reached, and 25 times is set as the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the jackpot, When the number of special symbol fluctuations exceeds 25 times and a fall lottery is won, the high probability state (time-saving state) of the normal symbol immediately ends.

Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the high probability state (time saving state) of normal symbols ends.

Furthermore, in this second control example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is used as one of the conditions for ending the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol, but other end conditions may be provided. For example, the number of times the special symbol lottery result is a lottery result in which a game that opens the variable winning device 65 for a short period of time is executed (so-called small winning win) although it is a loss (number of times the variable winning device 65 operates). Or, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is measured separately for special symbol 1 and special symbol 2, and the number of fluctuations of special symbol 1 reaches 10 times, or the total number of fluctuations of special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 reaches 100 times. You may also set what you have done as a termination condition.

<About the control process executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 186 and 187. This control example differs from the first control example described above in that command determination processing 3 (see FIG. 186) is executed instead of command determination processing (see FIG. 140), and command determination processing 3 (see FIG. 186) is executed. The difference is that a state determination process (see FIG. 187) is added as a sub-process, and the other parts are the same. Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 186. In the command determination process 3, the processes of S3201 to S3214 are executed similarly to the command determination process in the first control example described above (see FIG. 140).

When the process of S3214 is finished, next, the status determination process (S3251) is executed, and then the process of S3215 is executed, and this process ends. Here, details of the state determination process (S3251) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 187. In this state determination process (S3251), various processes on the audio lamp control device 113 side in the case of winning the falling lottery are executed.

When the state determination process (S3251) is executed, it is first determined whether a command indicating a fall has been received (S3252). This command indicating a fall is set when a fall lottery is won (S352 in FIG. 185: Yes) by the special symbol variation start process 3 (see FIG. 185) of the main controller 110 (see S354 in FIG. 185). If a command indicating a fall has not been received in the process of S3252 (S3252: No), the process ends immediately.

On the other hand, if a command indicating a fall is received (S3252: Yes), it is determined whether the current time is within the time period (S3253). Here, if it is determined that the time is within the short period (S3253: Yes), then the falling flag 223ba is set to ON (S3254), and the remaining time shortening number is calculated (S3255). Then, the calculated number of remaining time reductions is stored in the remaining period storage area 223bb (S3256).

Next, it is determined whether or not there is winning information on the jackpot in the hold (S3257), and if it is determined that there is (S3257: Yes), special condition fulfillment information is stored in the remaining period storage area 223bb (S3258). When the special condition fulfillment information is stored in the remaining period storage area 223bb, special mode B is selected when the continuous performance mode is set using the continuous performance mode selection 3 table 222e (see FIG. 184).

After completing the process of S3258, it is next determined whether a command indicating that the gaming state is the normal state has been received (S3260), and if it is determined that a command indicating the normal state has been received (S3260), the falling It is determined whether the flag 223ba is set to on (S3261). In the process of S3261, if it is determined that the falling flag 223ba is set to ON (S3261: Yes), that is, the timing is when the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state while the falling lottery has been won. If it is determined, the fall flag 223ba is set to OFF (S3262), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3260, if it is determined that the command indicating the normal state has not been received (S3260: No), or if the fall flag 223ba is not set to on in the process of S3261 (it is set to off) ) (S3261: No), this process is immediately terminated.

As explained above, in this second control example, in addition to the jackpot lottery in which the special symbol is judged to be correct, the probability change state (that is, the high probability state where the jackpot probability is high) is changed to the low probability state where the jackpot probability is low. A transition lottery (hereinafter referred to as a fall lottery) that causes a transition (fall). A gaming machine which is executed every time a condition for determining the validity of a special symbol is established will be described. In this way, in a gaming machine that has a falling lottery function, even if a variable probability state (high probability state) is set, there is no set period during which the high probability state will reliably continue, so special symbol fluctuations are executed. This can give the player a sense of tension.

Furthermore, in this second control example, similarly to the first control example described above, when a variable probability state is set, a high probability state where the jackpot probability is high and a time saving state in which the electric accessory 140a is easy to release. Even if you win the falling lottery and the high-probability state falls to the low-probability state, the number of changes of the special symbol will be changed for a specified period of time (for example, after the jackpot ends, the number of changes of the special symbol will be 100 times. The configuration was configured so that a time-saving state is set until the As a result, even if the player wins the falling lottery immediately after the jackpot ends (for example, by 3 spins), the time-saving state is set for a predetermined period, so that the player can know that he has won the falling lottery depending on the operation status of the electric accessory 140a. It is possible to prevent this from being grasped by someone else.

In addition, although the details will be described later, the falling lottery is configured to be executed before the special symbol jackpot lottery, and when the falling lottery is won, the special symbol jackpot lottery is executed as a low probability state. be done. In other words, if you win the falling lottery after the above-mentioned predetermined period (for example, the number of special symbol fluctuations exceeds 100 after the end of the jackpot), the gaming state will be the normal state at the time the special symbol fluctuation starts. (low probability state and non-time saving state) will be set.

In this case, even if the fluctuation time of the special symbol winning the falling lottery is used to perform an effect that suggests to the player whether or not he or she has won the falling lottery, he or she will fall just by looking at the operation status of the electric accessory 140a. There was a problem in that it was easy to determine whether the lottery was successful or not. Therefore, in this second control example, if the jackpot lottery is won before the falling lottery after the above-mentioned predetermined period (for example, the number of changes of the special symbol is 100 times after the jackpot ends) is exceeded, the special The game is configured so that the game state is shifted to the normal state before the symbols begin to fluctuate.

With this configuration, the operation content of the electric accessory 140a suddenly changes to the operation content in the non-time saving state after a predetermined period of time (for example, after the end of the jackpot, the number of changes in the special symbol is 100 times). In this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether he or she has won the falling lottery or the jackpot lottery, and to keep the player's sense of anticipation until the change in the special symbol ends. can.

Furthermore, in the second control example, by using the above-described continuous performance, it is possible to set a performance mode that can suggest to the player the success or failure status of the falling lottery. With this configuration, the player will be able to pay more attention to the performance being performed, and the effect of the performance can be enhanced.

In addition, in the above-mentioned second control example, if the fall lottery is won during the probability change state, and the fall timing is during the time period, the fluctuation pattern table used during the time period continues even after the fall. By using a configuration in which a variation pattern is selected using a variable pattern, it is difficult for a player to understand whether or not he or she has won a falling lottery. However, other configurations may be used. For example, as shown in FIG. Alternatively, another example may be used in which a special variation pattern table is used to select a variation pattern upon winning a fall lottery.

Here, the contents of the above-mentioned other example will be explained with reference to FIG. 188. FIG. 188(a) is a block diagram schematically showing a variation pattern selection table 202d provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the case of using the above-mentioned another example. As shown in FIG. 188(a), in the above-described another example, a post-fall variation pattern table 202d5 is added.

The contents of this post-fall variation pattern table 202d5 will be explained with reference to FIG. 188(b). FIG. 188(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the post-fall variation pattern table 202d5. As shown in FIG. 188(b), the post-fall variation pattern table 202d5 is a variation pattern table used during the four rotations of the special symbol after winning the fall lottery during the time period. The post-fall variation pattern table 202d5 is configured such that the 60-second variation pattern is likely to be selected even in the case of a miss. Therefore, immediately after winning the fall lottery, battle reach is more likely to occur. Thereby, each time a battle reach occurs, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to the performance while creating a sense of tension in the player.

In this case, depending on the presentation mode of the battle reach, it is preferable that a presentation notifying the player that he/she has not won the falling lottery is notified to the player at a predetermined rate. Specifically, depending on the selected battle reach opponent (opponent character), it may be possible to indicate whether or not the fall lottery will be won. The presence or absence of winning may be suggested, or the presence or absence of winning of the falling lottery may be indicated based on the result of battle reach (the value of remaining HP at the time of draw battle reach). As a result, at the end of the battle reach, the player will be concerned about whether or not he or she has won the jackpot, as well as whether or not he or she has won the fall lottery, which can enhance the performance effect.

Furthermore, if a jackpot is won during the period when the post-fall variation pattern table is used, it is preferable that a special performance mode is executed as a special win. As a result, the player can easily understand that the player has won the jackpot with a low probability immediately after winning the falling lottery by seeing the performance mode executed as a special win. In this case, it is preferable to set the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the special win to a variation time that cannot be set in other variation pattern tables. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player of an immediate win after falling due to the discomfort caused by the difference in the fluctuation time.

<Explanation of another example of the suggestion effect explained in the first control example>
Next, another example of the suggestion effect explained in the above-mentioned first control example will be explained. In the first control example described above, the production mode of the suggestion production consisting of the precursor production and the countdown production is controlled by the variation display setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 147) that is executed at the timing when the special figure variation starts. A configuration was used in which settings are made in the countdown effect setting process (S3810 in FIG. 152), which is a partial process. On the other hand, in this separate example, only the start timing of the suggestion effect (the start timing of the omen effect) is set in the countdown effect setting process 3 (see FIG. 189), which is executed at the timing when the special figure fluctuation starts, It is configured to set a specific performance to be the target of the current suggestion performance based on the operation of the frame button 22 executed during the precursor performance.

By configuring in this way, the start timing of the precursor performance that is the trigger for the start of the suggestion performance is set to the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, and while the precursor performance is being executed (while the suggestion performance is being executed) In addition, it becomes possible to set a specific performance that is the target of the suggestive performance. Therefore, compared to the case where a suggestive performance is performed for a predetermined specific performance, the performance mode of the suggestive performance can be freely set, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, similar to the first control example described above, as the suggestion effects, there are a precursor effect that roughly informs the timing when the specific effect will be executed, and a countdown effect that specifically informs the timing when the specific effect will be executed. Since it is configured to be executable, even if the specific performance is set after the suggestive performance is executed (during execution of the omen performance), the suggestive performance can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

<About the control process executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in another example of suggestion production>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 189 and 190, the control processing executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in this other example will be described. In this other example, in contrast to the first control example described above, countdown effect setting processing 3 (see Fig. 189) is used instead of countdown setting processing (see Fig. 152), and frame button input monitoring / effect processing (see Fig. 152) is used. The difference is that the processing content executed in S3107 of 139 is changed to the processing content of frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 3 (see FIG. 190). The other elements are the same as those in the first control example described above, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 189, countdown effect setting processing 3 (S3810) executed in this other example will be explained. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the contents of countdown effect setting process 3 (S3810). As shown in FIG. 189, when the countdown effect setting process 3 (S3810) is executed, the same processes of S4301 to S4305 as in the first control example described above are executed, and then the current variation pattern is set. Based on the variable time and the trigger for starting the suggestion effect (start timing of the omen effect), the performance mode of the omen effect is set (S4351), a display omen effect start command is set (S4352), and this processing is ended. do. On the other hand, if it is determined that the omen setting flag 223t is on in the process of S4301 (S4301: Yes), the multiple variation effect setting process is executed as in the first control example described above (S4321), and then this process is executed. finish.

As explained above, in this additional example, in the countdown effect setting process 3 (S3810) executed in the variable display setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 147) executed when the special symbol starts changing, the suggestion effect is The start timing of the precursor performance that is the trigger for starting is set. As a result, the foreshadowing effect is set without setting a specific effect that is the target of the suggestive effect.

In addition, in this additional example, the start timing of the suggestion performance (start timing of the omen performance) is configured to be varied depending on whether the current special symbol fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern that has won a jackpot. The start timing of the suggestive effect (start timing of the omen effect) may be set using other conditions. ) may be set, or multiple suggestive performance start timings (foreshadowing performance start timings) that can be set for one variation pattern may be set, and the plurality of suggestive performance start triggers (foreshadowing performance start timings) may be set. It is also possible to provide a lottery means for performing a lottery to determine the start timing of one of the suggestive performances (start timing of the omen performance), and to set the lottery result based on the lottery result of the lottery means. Furthermore, the trigger for starting the suggestive performance (timing for starting the foreshadowing performance) may be set based on the content of the operation of the frame button 22 by the player before the current change in the special symbol starts.

Furthermore, the trigger for starting the suggestive performance (start timing of the precursory performance) may be varied based on the currently set gaming state. Specifically, for example, if the currently set gaming state is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a variable probability state), the precursor A ( It is preferable to set a point where the period from the start of the fluctuation is short (see precursor pattern A shown in FIG. 100(a)). As a result, in addition to the lottery result of the fluctuation, the currently set gaming state can be suggested to the player depending on the presentation mode of the suggestion effect, so that the player becomes interested in the suggestion effect to be executed. can be set. Furthermore, as in the second control example described above, the pachinko machine 10 has a transition (fall) means that causes the game state to transition (fall) from the variable probability state that is most advantageous to the player to the time saving state without the player noticing. In this case, the effect is to suggest the game state, so it is possible to make the player more interested.

In addition, as a method for setting the start timing of the suggestive effect (start timing of the omen effect), when a variable pattern corresponding to Super Reach or Special Reach is set as a variable pattern, a predetermined timing from the start of the change (e.g. , 5 seconds later, and 10 seconds later), the trigger for starting the suggestive effect (timing for starting the omen effect) may be set.

As in this additional example, when the suggestion effect is started when the end timing of the suggestion effect (end timing of the countdown effect), that is, the start opportunity (start timing) of the specific effect that is the target of the suggestion effect has not been set. Since the production period of the relevant suggestion production is not set, there is a problem that the production mode of the precursor production cannot be set based on the set production period, as in the first control example described above. be.

In contrast, in this additional example, in the process of S4351, the performance mode of the precursor performance is set based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern to be executed this time and the start timing of the suggestion performance (start timing of the precursor performance). It is configured to do so. Specifically, if the current variation pattern is 60 seconds or more and the trigger for starting the suggestive performance (start timing of the omen performance) is omen A, the performance mode of the omen performance is a long-term omen. A long presentation mode (second route Dc2b in FIG. 98(a)) corresponding to the presentation is set, and in other cases, a short presentation mode (first path Dc2b in FIG. 98(a)) corresponding to a short-term precursory presentation is set. A route Dc1a) is set.

In this way, by roughly setting the performance mode of the precursor performance based on the period in which the suggestion performance can be performed (the period in which the performance can be performed based on the start opportunity of the suggestion performance and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation), it is possible to set the performance mode later. It is possible to set a performance mode that does not give a player a sense of discomfort for a specific performance (performance period of a suggestive performance).

Next, with reference to FIG. 190, frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 3 (S3107) executed in this other example will be described. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 3 (S3107). In this frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (S3107), the effect mode of the suggestion effect is determined based on the pressing operation of the frame button 22 that is executed while the precursor effect set in the process of FIG. 189 is being executed. The setting process is performed.

As shown in FIG. 190, when frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 3 (S3107) is executed, it is first determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5051), and if it has not been pressed (S5051: No). ), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed in the process of S5051 (S5051; Yes), then it is determined whether the current period is in the foreshadowing performance period (S5071).

In the process of S5071, if it is determined that the current time is not in the foreshadow effect period (S5071: No), processes related to other frame button operations are executed (S5078), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5071, if it is determined that the current period is in the premonitory effect period (S5071: Yes), then a specific effect corresponding to the pressed content of the frame button 22 is set (S5072).

Here, the process of S5072 will be specifically explained. In this additional example, when the omen effect is being executed (that is, when the display shown in FIG. An operation effect for making the user operate is executed. In this operation performance, based on the operation of the frame button 22, a performance is performed that changes the movement mode (moving speed and movement position) of the character Dc1 imitating a car displayed in the sub display area Ds as a precursory effect. . Then, in the sub-display area Ds that scrolls in response to the movement of the character Dc1, a specific performance suggestion mode for indicating the type of specific performance set in the current suggestion performance is displayed, and a specific performance suggestion acquired by the character Dc1 is displayed. A specific effect corresponding to the mode is set.

Here, the specific performance suggestion mode displayed in the sub-display area Ds during the precursory performance is a mode in which the player can grasp the content of the corresponding specific performance (for example, PUSH performance) (for example, the character "PUSH" is displayed). displayed in the following manner). This specific performance display mode is set based on a specific performance that can be set in the current special symbol fluctuation pattern (specific performance corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery of the special symbol), and specifically, as shown in FIG. ), specific effect display modes corresponding to the "cut-in effect" executed 26 seconds after the start of the fluctuation and the "PUSH display effect" executed 30 seconds after the start of the change are displayed. be done.

In addition, in this additional example, the mode of a specific production is associated with the timing at which the specific production is executed, but the mode of the specific production and the timing at which the specific production is executed can be set separately. It may be configured as follows. By configuring in this way, the game can determine which specific performance mode should be acquired to set the period of the suggestion performance to be longer among the plurality of specific performance display modes displayed in the operation performance executed during the precursory performance. It is possible to prevent someone from understanding the information. Therefore, even after the operation performance is finished, the entirety of the suggestion performance can be made difficult to understand, and the player can continue to enjoy the suggestion performance.

Furthermore, it may be configured to set the execution timing of a specific performance corresponding to the specific performance display mode obtained during the operation performance based on the contents of the variation pattern of the current special symbol (variation time and jackpot lottery result). good. This makes it possible for the player to select a desired specific effect, thereby encouraging the player to participate in the game with enthusiasm. Even when such a configuration is used, the timing at which the specific effect selected by the player is executed is determined based on the contents of the variation pattern of the current special symbol (variation time and jackpot lottery result) as described above. By setting this, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the performance performed while the special symbols are changing.

Returning to FIG. 190, the explanation will be continued. When the process of S5072 is finished, next, the period from the current time to the start timing of the countdown effect is calculated (S5073). In the process of S5073, the start timing of the countdown effect (3 seconds in this additional example) is calculated by counting backwards from the execution timing of the specific effect set in the process of S5072, and the period from the current time to the start timing of the countdown effect is calculated. calculate. That is, by operating the frame button 22 quickly during the operation performance executed during the precursor performance, the period calculated in the process of S5073 can be lengthened.

Next, it is determined whether the interval calculated in the process of S5073 is within 15 seconds (S5074), and if it is determined that it is within 15 seconds (S5074: Yes), the performance of the precursor performance currently being executed. The mode is set to a short production mode (S5075), and on the other hand, if it is determined that the duration is not within 15 seconds (longer than 15 seconds) (S5074: No), the production mode of the currently running omen production is set to a long production mode. mode (S5076).

In other words, in this additional example, at the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation, first, the performance mode of the omen performance is roughly set based on the contents of the current fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time, jackpot lottery result) (S4351 in FIG. 189). ), the precursor effect is executed in accordance with the set effect mode. Then, while the foreshadowing performance is being executed, at the time when the specific performance that is the target of the current suggestive performance is set, the foreshadowing performance is It is configured to vary the presentation mode.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to display a suggestive effect toward a specific effect executed during a variable display without feeling any discomfort. In addition, since it is possible to change the display mode of the omen effect based on the operation content during the operation effect, for example, it is easy to intentionally set the short effect mode as the omen effect (the remaining period of the omen effect is short). ) At the final stage of the operation performance, which is the timing, operate the frame button 22 to enjoy whether or not the long performance mode is set (whether or not the current fluctuation pattern is a long fluctuation time), or vice versa. , The frame button 22 is operated at the beginning of the operation performance, which is the timing when the long performance mode is likely to be intentionally set as the precursor performance mode (the remaining period of the precursor performance is long), and the precursor performance is executed in the long performance mode. The player can enjoy the game and perform performances according to the player's requests.

After setting the precursor effect mode in the process of S5075 or S5076, a countdown effect command for display corresponding to the set effect mode is set (S5077), the process of S5078 described above is executed, and this process ends.

As explained above, in this additional example, the start timing of the suggestion effect (the start timing of the omen effect) is determined in the countdown effect setting process 3 (see FIG. 189), which is executed at the timing when the special figure fluctuation starts. The configuration is such that the specific performance to be the target of the current suggestion performance is set based on the operation of the frame button 22 executed during the precursor performance.

By configuring in this way, the start timing of the precursor performance that is the trigger for the start of the suggestion performance is set to the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, and while the precursor performance is being executed (while the suggestion performance is being executed) In addition, it becomes possible to set a specific performance that is the target of the suggestive performance. Therefore, compared to the case where a suggestive performance is performed for a predetermined specific performance, the performance mode of the suggestive performance can be freely set, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, similar to the first control example described above, as the suggestion effects, there are a precursor effect that roughly informs the timing when the specific effect will be executed, and a countdown effect that specifically informs the timing when the specific effect will be executed. Since it is configured to be executable, even if the specific performance is set after the suggestive performance is executed (during execution of the omen performance), the suggestive performance can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

In addition, in this additional example, it is possible to change the performance mode of the precursor performance, which is a part of the suggestion performance (the performance executed in the first half), in stages, so the performance mode of the entire suggestion performance can be changed. It can be set without any discomfort. In addition, in this additional example, the performance mode of the countdown performance that is executed as a part of the suggestive performance (the performance performed in the second half) is fixed (a 3-second countdown display), but the present invention is not limited to this. The interval until the specific effect is executed at the timing when the specific effect to be executed this time is set (see S5073 in FIG. 190) is determined (see S5074 in FIG. 190), and based on the determination result, the countdown effect is produced. It may be configured to set a period (for example, 3 seconds or 7 seconds).

Each of the configurations and technical ideas explained in the first control example described above may be added to this additional example explained above, and the contents of the first control example described above and the contents of this additional example may be combined. You may provide the pachinko machine 10 which each has.

<Explanation when the various effects explained in the first control example are used in the second control example>
Next, the contents when the contents of the first control example and the contents of the second control example are combined will be explained. Specifically, the above-described first control is performed based on the lottery result of the fall lottery or the preliminary determination result of the fall lottery that is determined in advance based on the information (pre-read information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a. The contents of setting the production mode of the various productions explained in the examples will be explained.

In the first control example described above, in the jackpot performance setting process (see S3302 in FIG. 143) that sets the jackpot performance, the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2 and the entry ball information for winning the jackpot are included in the reserved balls. Based on the determination result as to whether or not there is a jackpot effect, the continuous jackpot effect can be set by referring to the jackpot effect selection table 222c. Alternatively, the jackpot performance may be set by also referring to the preliminary determination result of the falling lottery, which is determined in advance based on the information (pre-read information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a.

Specifically, a second advance determination means is provided which can determine winning information for winning a jackpot and prize information for winning a falling lottery as pre-read information by associating them with the order in which special symbol fluctuations are executed. As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information for winning the jackpot is executed after the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information for winning the falling lottery is executed, a continuous jackpot effect is set. It is best to configure it so that it does not occur. As a result, when a continuous jackpot effect is executed, the winning information stored on hold at that time will not include winning information for winning the falling lottery, so when the continuous jackpot effect is executed, additional information will be added. You can increase the value even more.

Further, when the second preliminary determination means determines that the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information for winning the jackpot is executed after the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information for winning the falling lottery is executed, the continuous It may be configured to set a jackpot performance. Thereby, it becomes possible to perform a continuous jackpot performance without performing a falling suggestion performance that suggests to the player that he has won the falling lottery. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy due to the performance suggesting a fall.

In addition, if it is determined that among the look-ahead information at the time of winning a jackpot, the winning information corresponding to the first spin after the end of the jackpot includes information indicating that you will win the falling lottery, It is preferable to configure the system so that a performance that suggests that a gaming state (variable probability state) advantageous to the player will be set after a jackpot is not executed as a performance. In other words, if the player wins the falling lottery at the start timing of the special symbol variation in the first rotation after the end of the jackpot, he will never receive the special symbol jackpot lottery in a high probability state that is advantageous to the player. In such a situation, if a performance that suggests that a gaming state (probability change state) advantageous to the player will be set after the jackpot win is executed during the jackpot, it will give the player an excessive sense of expectation. It turns out. When the above-described configuration is used, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress excessive expectations from being given to the player.

Next, in the first control example described above, a continuous effect (battle effect) is configured to be able to be executed to notify the player of a period in which a gaming state (probability change state or time saving state) advantageous to the player is continuously set. , the production mode of the continuous production (the production mode of the pre-battle production, and the production mode of the battle reach), the lottery result of this special symbol, the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a (pre-read information), and The display mode of the continuous performance (battle performance) is configured to be set based on the number of times the battle performance is repeatedly executed during one advantageous state (during a variable probability state or during a time saving state). In a gaming machine having a falling lottery configuration, the game machine also refers to the lottery result of the falling lottery, or the preliminary determination result of the falling lottery that is determined in advance based on the information (preread information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a. It is preferable that the configuration is such that the presentation mode of the continuous presentation is set.

In each of the control examples described above, the variation pattern (variation effect) is configured to be set at the timing when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed. In other words, the setting of the variation pattern (variation performance) based on the information (pre-read information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a is also configured to be executed at the start timing of variation of the special symbol. In this case, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e) is subtracted by 1 in order to start the variation of the special symbol, so the prize is won. There has been a problem in that it is not possible to set a variation pattern (variation effect) in a state where the information (pre-read information) stored in the information storage area 223a has reached the upper limit.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, a configuration is adopted in which a variation pattern (variation performance) is set by the audio lamp control device 113, and the variation pattern (variation effect) is set in common, regardless of the information (pre-read information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a. A first variation pattern setting means that sets a first variation pattern (for example, an effect that varies the third symbol) to be displayed, and a first variation pattern setting means that sets a first variation pattern (for example, an effect that varies the third symbol), and a first variation pattern setting unit that sets a first variation pattern that is It is preferable to have a second variation pattern setting means for setting a second variation pattern (for example, a suggestion effect suggesting that there is a hit in the hold), and to use the variation start timing, that is, the following configuration. That is, in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) that is executed when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process (see FIG. 140), only the first variation pattern described above is set.

Then, after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) after the variable effect is executed based on the first variable pattern, the second variable pattern setting means sets the information (pre-read information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a. ), a second variation pattern is set based on the second variation pattern, and a variation effect is executed in which information indicating the second variation pattern is added to the variation effect being executed using the first variation pattern. With this configuration, the timing of setting the variation pattern (variation performance) based on the information (pre-read information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a can be delayed from the timing of starting variation of the special symbol.

Therefore, it is possible to set a fluctuating pattern (fluctuating effect) based on the pre-read information in a state where the information (pre-read information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a has reached the upper limit, and the effect based on the pre-read information ( This makes it easier to execute pre-read effects.

Note that the second variation pattern setting means described above may set the timing at which the process for setting the second variation pattern is executed after a certain period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the start of variation of the special symbol. Alternatively, the setting timing of the second fluctuation pattern may be made to differ depending on the fluctuation pattern selected by the first fluctuation pattern setting means. With this configuration, the timing of setting the look-ahead performance can be varied depending on the variation pattern to be executed, so that the player can be motivated to store reserved balls.

Here, as the execution timing set corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern selected by the first fluctuation pattern setting means, for example, a relatively long fluctuation time (a fluctuation time of 60 seconds or more) is set as the first fluctuation pattern. If set, the setting timing of the second variation pattern is set 15 seconds after the start of variation, and if a relatively short variation time (30 seconds variation time) is set as the first variation pattern, the second variation pattern is set 15 seconds after the start of variation. It is recommended that the pattern setting timing be set 5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation.

In addition, if the variation time of the first variation pattern set by the first variation pattern setting unit is less than a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), the second variation pattern setting unit may be configured not to be executed. With this configuration, if a variable time is set that makes it difficult to execute a look-ahead effect, no look-ahead effect is added during the fluctuation, and a effect that is difficult for the player to understand is executed. This can be suppressed.

Further, as a second variation pattern (pre-reading effect) that can be set by the second variation pattern setting means, a short effect (for example, a comment display notice) that is executed in a short period of time (for example, 2 seconds), and a short effect that is executed in a short period of time (for example, 2 seconds), and a long-term effect (for example, 20 seconds), the variation time of the first variation pattern set by the first variation pattern setting means. By configuring the second fluctuation pattern setting means not to be executed when is less than a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), the fluctuation time of the first fluctuation pattern set by the first fluctuation pattern setting means is set for a predetermined period. (For example, 10 seconds) or more, the second variation pattern setting means can make it easier to execute the second variation pattern (pre-read effect).

In addition, as described above, if the configuration is such that the second fluctuation pattern setting means is not executed according to the fluctuation time of the first fluctuation pattern set by the first fluctuation pattern setting means, the winning information storage area 223a is Among the stored winning information, winning information for which a determination as to whether or not to set a second fluctuation pattern has already been performed by the second fluctuation pattern setting means and winning information for which determination has not been performed are stored in a distinguishable manner. When the second fluctuation pattern setting means is executed, it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation pattern is already set by the second fluctuation pattern setting means among the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. It is preferable that the setting determination of the second variation pattern is performed by excluding winning information for which the above determination has been performed.

In addition to the above-mentioned example, the display control device 114 sends a pre-read effect execution command indicating that the second variation pattern (pre-read effect) set by the second variation pattern setting means has been executed by the display control device 114 with a sound lamp. If the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to output to the control device 113 and cannot receive the prefetch effect execution command even though the second variation pattern (prefetch effect) has been set (the prefetch effect was not executed). case), the second variation pattern setting means may be configured to be executed again for the same winning information in the next variation.

A storage means capable of storing (suspended storage) a plurality of starting winnings of special symbols (first ball entrance 64 or second ball entrance 140), and a special symbol based on the information (winning information) stored in the storage means. Before the lottery (variation) is executed (before the special symbol lottery conditions based on the winning information stored in the storage means are established), the contents of the winning information stored in the storage means are In a gaming machine that has a pre-discrimination means (pre-reading means) that discriminates in advance, when performing a variation performance (pre-read production) based on the determination result of the pre-discrimination means, when the special symbol starts to fluctuate, There is a configuration in which a performance mode setting means is provided for setting the performance mode of the current special symbol variation based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means.

According to the gaming machine having the above-mentioned configuration, it is possible to set the performance mode based on the determination result of the advance discrimination means as the performance mode corresponding to the variation time of the special symbol, so that the performance mode to be executed is The content can suggest both the lottery result of the special symbol and the determination result of the winning information stored in the storage means, and it is possible to perform a performance that will interest the player. However, since the production mode is determined based on the discrimination results of the preliminary discrimination results when the special symbols start changing, the production mode cannot be set when the number of winning information stored in the storage means has not reached the upper limit. There was a problem that it had to be done. In other words, the timing to set the performance mode is the timing to execute the special symbol variation using the oldest winning information stored in the storage means (the winning information used for the next special symbol variation) (the timing stored in the storage means). Since the number of winning information stored in the storage means has decreased by one), it is not possible to set the performance mode when the number of winning information stored in the storage means has reached the upper limit, and the pre-determination means There has been a problem in that the frequency of execution of variable effects (pre-reading effects) based on the determination results is reduced.

Furthermore, in the above-described configuration, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol, a process of determining the content of winning information stored in the storage means and a process of setting a performance mode corresponding to the variation of the special symbol are performed. There was a problem in that processing was concentrated in a short period of time and the processing load increased.

In addition to the above-mentioned configuration, the above-mentioned pre-discrimination means executes a variable performance (pre-reading performance) based on the determination result of the pre-discrimination means based on new winning information being stored in the storage means. There is also a gaming machine that executes a discrimination based on the discrimination result and executes a performance (pre-reading performance) to show a pre-discrimination result different from the fluctuating display of special symbols.

With such a configuration, the pre-read performance can be performed at the timing when new winning information is stored in the storage means, so that the performance based on the determination result of the advance determination means can be performed smoothly. However, since the performance executed is a performance to show the discrimination result of the preliminary discrimination means, the display content overlaps with the performance showing the discrimination result of the special symbol currently being executed, which makes it difficult for the player to There was a problem that the display became difficult to understand. Furthermore, since the prefetch effect is controlled to be executed at the timing when new winning information is stored in the storage means, there is a problem in that the processing load temporarily increases.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, a configuration is adopted in which a variation pattern (variation effect) is set by the audio lamp control device 113, so that it is executed in common regardless of the information (pre-read information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a. a first variation pattern setting means for setting a first variation pattern (for example, an effect that varies the third symbol); It is preferable to have a second variation pattern setting means for setting a second variation pattern (for example, a suggestion effect suggesting that there is a hit in the hold), and to use the variation start timing, that is, the following configuration. That is, in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) that is executed when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process (see FIG. 140), only the first variation pattern described above is set.

Then, after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) after the variable effect is executed based on the first variable pattern, the second variable pattern setting means sets the information (pre-read information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a. ), a second variation pattern is set based on the second variation pattern, and a variation effect is executed in which information indicating the second variation pattern is added to the variation effect being executed using the first variation pattern. With this configuration, the timing of setting the variation pattern (variation performance) based on the information (pre-read information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a can be delayed from the timing of starting variation of the special symbol.

<Third control example>
Next, another control example of the continuous effect explained in the above-mentioned first control example will be explained. As shown in FIG. 90, the above-described first control example is configured such that the battle performance (pre-battle performance and battle reach) is repeatedly executed during high certainty (during the probability change state or time saving state). . In the control content of the first control example described above, depending on the lottery result of the special symbol, there may be a variation pattern in which a battle reach can be executed (a variation pattern in which the variation time is 60 seconds or more) or a variation pattern in which a battle reach cannot be executed. (A variation pattern in which the variation time is 5 seconds) was sometimes selected continuously. In the above-mentioned first control example, in order to prevent the player's interest in the production from decreasing, a variation pattern that allows a battle reach (an unsuccessful variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds or more) is set within a predetermined period. (For example, if multiple special symbols are selected within the interval where the special symbol changes 6 times), by configuring the system so that Battle Reach is not executed for the latter fluctuation pattern, Battle Reach will be executed unnecessarily. It is configured to solve the problem of deterioration of the production effect, but the variation patterns that can execute Battle Reach and the variation patterns that cannot execute Battle Reach are randomly selected based on the lottery results of special symbols. In the first control example, depending on the lottery result of the special symbol, a variation pattern (a variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds) in which the battle reach cannot be performed is continuously selected, and the pre-battle production The problem remained that this continued for a long period of time.

Therefore, in this third control example, a continuous performance (battle performance) is executed during a variable probability state as a gaming state, and a special symbol is used to show the lottery result of the special symbol executed during the variable probability state. As a variation pattern table used when selecting a variation pattern of variation, a variation pattern table in which a pre-battle performance is executed (is likely to be performed) and a variation pattern table in which a battle reach is executed (is likely to be carried out) are predetermined. It is configured to be used according to rules (fluctuation scenarios).

With this configuration, when selecting the variation pattern of special symbol variation, if the number of special symbol variations is the predetermined number (for example, the 14th rotation from the end of the jackpot), the battle reach will be executed without fail. , and the above-mentioned problem can be solved. Further, in the third control example, the variation scenario to be used while the variable probability state is set is selected from a plurality of variation scenarios with different contents. As a result, even if a configuration is used in which a variation pattern is selected according to a predetermined variation scenario, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

Furthermore, in this third control example, multiple types of jackpots are prepared for jackpots that provide the same value (contents of the jackpot game, game state set after the jackpot ends), and the selected jackpot type The system is configured to select a variation pattern to be executed after the end of the jackpot based on a variation scenario corresponding to the above. With this, it is possible to set a variation scenario that will be executed after the jackpot ends depending on the type of jackpot, so a fluctuation pattern that is reliably selected according to the fluctuation scenario from the special symbol fluctuation of the first rotation after the jackpot ends. be able to.

<About the electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 191 to 202. In the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example, the contents of the ROM 202 and the contents of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 are partially changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, and the voice lamp control The difference is that the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 provided in the device 113 have been partially changed, and the contents of the character ROM 234 provided in the display control device 114 have been partially changed, and in other points. are the same. Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 191(a) is a block diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 191(a), the ROM 202 in this control example is different from the ROM 202 in the first control example in that a variable scenario setting table 202ca is added and the contents of the first winning type selection table 202c are partially changed. The difference is that the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d have been partially changed, and the other points are the same. Identical parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the first winning type selection table 202c in the third control example will be explained with reference to FIG. 192. FIG. 192 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning type selection table 202c in the third control example. In addition, the detailed explanation is abbreviate|omitted about the same element as the 1st winning type selection table 202c used in the 1st control example mentioned above.

In the first winning type selection table 202c in the third control example, the jackpot types (jackpot A to jackpot K) corresponding to the contents of the jackpot game (number of rounds) and the game state set after the jackpot game is completed are further selected. Subdivided jackpot types (jackpots Aa to Aj) are defined. Specifically, among the values "0 to 19" of the first winning type counter C2 that are defined in association with "Jackpot A", the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0, 1". is defined in association with "Jackpot Aa," the range of "2, 3" is defined in association with "Jackpot Ab," and the range of "4, 5" is defined in association with "Jackpot Aa." "Ac" is defined in correspondence, "Jackpot Ad" is defined in correspondence with the range of "6, 7", and "Jackpot Ae" is defined in the range of "8, 9". In the range of "10, 11", "Jackpot Af" is defined in correspondence, and in the range of "12, 13", "Jackpot Ag" is defined in correspondence. In the range of "14, 15", "Jackpot Ah" is associated and defined, and in the range of "16, 17", "Jackpot Ai" is associated and defined, ``Jackpot Aj'' is defined in association with the range of ``18, 19''.

In other words, in this third control example, among the 200 possible counter values (random values) of the first winning type counter C2, for the 20 random values for which "Jackpot A" is selected, 10 types of random values are selected. It is specified that the jackpot types (jackpot Aa to jackpot Aj) are evenly distributed, and the proportion of each jackpot type (jackpot Aa to jackpot Aj) being selected is 1%.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this third control example, when any one of "Jackpot Aa" to "Jackpot Aj" is selected, the jackpot game (15 rounds) defined as "Jackpot A" is selected. A game) is executed, and after the jackpot game ends, a gaming state defined as "jackpot A" is set. The variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol fluctuation for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot game is configured to differ depending on the selected jackpot type (jackpot Aa to jackpot Aj). .

With this configuration, when a specific jackpot game is set, it is possible to change the variation pattern of the special symbol variation executed after the jackpot game ends, so for example, "jackpot Aa" as the jackpot type When "jackpot Aj" is selected than when "jackpot Aj" is selected, a variation pattern with a short variation time can be more easily selected as a variation pattern of special symbol variation executed after the end of a jackpot game. That is, even if the jackpot type has the same jackpot game content and the same game state, the number of changes per unit time in the special symbol fluctuation after the jackpot game ends can be made different depending on the jackpot type. A player who wants to win the next jackpot as soon as possible can be made to have a sense of expectation for the type of jackpot won until the timing when a special symbol variation is executed after the end of the jackpot game.

Similar to the above-mentioned "Jackpot A", "Jackpot B", "Jackpot D", "Jackpot G", and "Jackpot I" specified in the first winning type selection table 202c, that is, high probability after the jackpot game ends. For the jackpot types to which a state and a time-saving state (hereinafter referred to as a variable probability state) are given, it is specified that "a to j", which are subcategories of each jackpot type, are equally allocated. On the other hand, "Jackpot C", "Jackpot H", "Jackpot J", "Jackpot K", that is, a high probability state and a time-saving state are not given after the end of the jackpot game (a low-probability state and a time-saving state are given) ) For the jackpot type, subclassifications (a to j) of the jackpot type are not specified, and a common variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation executed after the jackpot game ends. It is configured as follows.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the third control example will be explained with reference to FIG. 193(a). FIG. 193(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the third control example. As shown in FIG. 193(a), in this third control example, the special variation pattern table 202d4 is deleted from the first control example, and the variation pattern table 202dc1 for jackpot (probable variation), and the variation pattern table 202dc1 for the first miss. The difference is that a (probable variable) variable pattern table 202dc2, a second (probable variable) variable pattern table 202dc3, and a special (probable variable) variable pattern table 202dc4 are added.

Here, with reference to FIG. 193(b), the jackpot (probability variable) fluctuation pattern table 202dc1 will be explained. FIG. 193(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot (probability variable) fluctuation pattern table 202dc1. This jackpot (variable probability) variation pattern table 202dc1 is a variation pattern table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the gaming state is a probability variation state and the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 193(b), the configuration is such that one of the variation patterns with a variation time of 60 seconds or 90 seconds is selected. Specifically, the range of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 from "0 to 179" is associated with a fluctuation pattern (various types of super reach) with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds, and the range of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 from "180 to 198" is defined. Variation patterns (various types of special reaches) with a variation time of 90 seconds are defined in association with the range. In this third control example, when a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds is selected, a battle reach (victory battle) in which three attacks are performed is executed by the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 94). , when the 90 second variation pattern is selected, a battle reach (victory battle) in which a resurrection effect is performed after three attacks is performed (see FIG. 96).

Next, with reference to FIG. 193(c), the first deviation (probability variable) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2 will be described. FIG. 193(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first deviation (probability variable) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2. This first loss (probability variable) variation pattern table 202dc2 is a variation pattern table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the gaming state is a probability variation state and the special symbol lottery result is a loss. There is one.

As shown in FIG. 193(c), in the first deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc2, variation patterns with short variation times (for example, 3 seconds, 5 seconds) are different from those with long variation times (for example, 60 seconds). This pattern is configured to be more easily selected than the variable pattern. Specifically, a variation pattern (short deviation a) with a variation time of 3 seconds is defined in association with a range in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 149", and a variation pattern in which the variation time is 3 seconds (short deviation a) is defined. A variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds (short deviation b) is associated with and defined in the range, and a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds (long deviation a) is defined in correspondence with "198". has been done.

In other words, in the first deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc2, out of 199 counter values (random numbers) that the variation type counter C1 can take, 198 random numbers (range of "0 to 197") are Therefore, a short deviation (short deviation a, short deviation b) which is a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is defined, and a long deviation which is a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is defined for the remaining one random value ("198"). Since the deviation (long deviation a) is specified, in most cases (approximately 99.5%) when a variation pattern is selected by referring to the first deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc2, the variation time is short. A variation pattern is selected.

In this third control example, when a variation pattern with a variation time of 3 seconds (short error a) or a variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds (short error b) is selected, the audio lamp control device 113 controls the pre-battle production (see Fig. 91, see FIG. 92) is executed, and if "short miss b" is selected, an attack effect (see FIG. 92) that increases or decreases the opponent's continuation value (HP value) is executed. In addition, if "short miss a" is selected, without executing the effect that increases or decreases the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent, for example, an effect in which your character and the opponent's character have a conversation, or An effect that switches the characters is executed. Furthermore, when "long miss a" is selected, a battle reach (draw battle) in which three attacks are performed is executed (see FIG. 94).

Next, with reference to FIG. 193(d), the contents of the second deviation (probability variable) fluctuation pattern table 202dc3 will be explained. FIG. 193(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second deviation (probability variable) fluctuation pattern table 202dc3. This second loss (probability variable) variation pattern table 202dc3 is a variation pattern table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the gaming state is a probability variation state and the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss. As shown in FIG. 193(d), one of the variation patterns with a variation time of 60 seconds or 90 seconds is selected.

Specifically, a variation pattern (long deviation a) with a variation time of 60 seconds is defined in association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 197", and "198" is associated with a variation pattern of 60 seconds. A variation pattern (long deviation b) in which the variation time is 90 seconds is defined in association with each other.

FIG. 193(e) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special (probable variable) fluctuation pattern table 202dc4. This special (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc4 is a variation pattern table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the jackpot game state is a probability variation state, and the variation time is determined regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol. The configuration is such that a variation pattern of 0.5 seconds is selected. Specifically, if the special symbol lottery result is a loss, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds (ultra short loss) corresponds to the entire range of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0 to 198"). If the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds (ultra short win) will be applied to the entire range of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0 to 198"). are defined in association with each other.

Returning to FIG. 191(a), the explanation will be continued. The fluctuation scenario setting table 202ca is a fluctuation scenario that is defined by making the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 193(a)), which is referred to when selecting a fluctuation pattern of special symbol fluctuations, in correspondence with the number of fluctuations of the special symbol. This is defined in association with the type of jackpot. This variable scenario setting table 202ca is used when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending performance, that is, the end timing of the jackpot game in the jackpot control process (see S1104 in FIG. 137) executed by the main control device 110 (see S1104 in FIG. 137). S1211: Yes), the variable scenario corresponding to the jackpot type won this time is referred to for setting a variation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type won this time, and the variation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type won this time is read out and stored in the variation scenario storage area 203ca.

Here, the contents of the fluctuation scenarios defined in the fluctuation scenario setting table 202ca will be explained with reference to FIGS. 194 to 196. FIG. 194(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation scenario setting table 202ca. As shown in FIG. 194(a), this variation scenario setting table 202ca sets each variation scenario (variation Scenario 1 to fluctuation scenario 11) are defined.

In other words, in this third control example, the variation pattern of the special symbol variation executed after the jackpot (the special symbol variation executed after the jackpot The range for selecting the variation pattern of Therefore, when winning a jackpot, in addition to the contents of the jackpot game (number of rounds) and the game state set after the jackpot game, the fluctuation pattern set after the jackpot game can also be changed, and the game It can improve your interest.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 194(a), the variable scenario set after the jackpot is different depending on the gaming state when the jackpot is won. Specifically, if the gaming state when winning a jackpot is a no time saving state (common to high probability state and low probability state of special symbols), which jackpot type (subclassification of jackpot type (a to j)) Even if is set, a common fluctuation scenario (variation scenario 1) is set, and if the gaming state when winning the jackpot is a time saving state (common to high probability state and low probability state of special symbols) , is configured to set fluctuation scenarios (variation scenarios 2 to 11) corresponding to the set jackpot type (subclassifications (a to j) of jackpot type).

By configuring this way, the number of special symbol changes per unit time will be greater if you win a jackpot (probable variable jackpot) with a time saver than if you win a jackpot (probable variable jackpot) without a time saver. It becomes possible to do so. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more aware of the gaming state when winning a jackpot, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this third control example, the variation scenario (variation scenario 1) that is set when winning a jackpot (probable variable jackpot) with no time saving is set when winning a jackpot (probable variable jackpot) with a time saving condition. The set variation scenarios (variation scenario 2 to variation scenario 11) are structured so that the number of special symbol variations per unit time is greater, but this is not limited to, for example, there is no time saving. Each variation scenario may be configured such that the number of special symbol variations per unit time is greater when a jackpot (probable variable jackpot) is won in the state. By configuring in this way, for example, in the performance mode that can be set only when winning a probability variable jackpot in a time saving state, the bonus video can be run for a long time.

In addition, among the variable scenarios (variable scenario 2 to variable scenario 11) that are set when winning a jackpot (probable variable jackpot) with a time saving condition, some of the variable scenarios will be changed to a jackpot (probable variable jackpot) without a time saving condition. It may be set so that the number of special symbol changes per unit time is smaller than the fluctuation scenario (variation scenario 1) that is set when winning, or when winning a jackpot (probable variable jackpot) without time saving. , a plurality of variation scenarios may be set based on the jackpot type (subclassifications (a to j) of the jackpot type).

Next, the contents of each variation scenario defined in the variation scenario setting table 202ca will be explained with reference to FIGS. 194(b) to 196(d). FIG. 194(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of fluctuation scenario 1. First, the contents stipulated in the fluctuation scenario will be explained with reference to FIG. 194(b). The fluctuation scenario is referred to when selecting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol to be executed after the end of the jackpot game (i.e., one special symbol fluctuation after the end of the jackpot game becomes the number of fluctuations 1) and the fluctuation pattern of that fluctuation. A variation pattern table is defined in association with the variation pattern table.

In addition, in this third control example, as described above, when winning a jackpot type in which a definite variable state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, a corresponding variable scenario is set by the variable scenario setting table 202ca, and the variable scenario The configuration is such that the variation pattern is selected in accordance with the contents specified in .

As shown in FIG. 194(b), in fluctuation scenario 1, table A (special (probable) fluctuation pattern table 202dc4) is defined as a fluctuation pattern table that is referred to when the number of fluctuations is "1 to 4", and the number of fluctuations is Table B (probability variation pattern table 202d3) is defined as a variation pattern to be referred to when the value is "5~".

As shown in FIG. 194(a), this variation scenario 1 is set when all jackpots to which jackpot types (subclassifications) are assigned are won in a state in which no time-saving state is assigned as a gaming state. be done. When the fluctuation scenario 1 is set, the special (probable variable) fluctuation pattern table 202dc4 (table A) (see FIG. 193(e)) is used during the 1st to 4th rotation of the special symbol fluctuation after the end of the jackpot, and the special symbol Regardless of the lottery result, a variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 seconds is selected.

Then, from the 5th rotation of the special symbol fluctuation after the end of the jackpot, the fluctuation pattern table 202d3 (table B) for winning (probability change) (see FIG. 108(d)) is used, and the fluctuation time is 7 seconds to 90 seconds. A variation pattern is selected based on the obtained value of variation type CS1. In addition, since variable scenario 1 is a scenario that is set when the gaming state is variable, if you win a special symbol jackpot while variable scenario 1 is set, as described above, the jackpot (Probable variation) A variation pattern is selected using the variation pattern table 202dc1.

Next, the contents of fluctuation scenario 2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 194(c). As shown in FIG. 194(c), in variation scenario 2, table A (special (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc4) corresponds to the number of variations in the range of "1 to 4", as in variation scenario 1 described above. table C (first deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc2) is defined when the number of variations is "5 to 13", and table D (second variation pattern table 202dc2) is defined when the number of variations is "14". A variable pattern table 202dc3) is defined.

Thereafter, until the number of fluctuations reaches "199", table C (first deviation (probable variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in association with nine fluctuations, and table D (second A deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc3) is defined in association with each other. In other words, during the period when the number of variations of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot is "5 to 199", after executing the special symbol variation in which the variation pattern is selected using table C 9 times, the variation pattern is selected using table D. A scenario in which the selected special symbol variation is executed is repeatedly executed.

By configuring in this way, in the battle performance that is executed during the period when the variable probability state is set as the gaming state, the special symbol variation (short miss (short miss a , a special symbol variation in which short miss b) is selected), and a special symbol variation in which a battle reach is executed (a special symbol variation in which long miss (long miss a, long miss b) is selected using table D). , can be set in advance, so it is possible to change the performance mode of the pre-battle performance for the special symbol variation in which the battle reach is executed.

Furthermore, in the third control example, when selecting a variation pattern using table C, the length deviation a (deviation variation of 60 seconds) is selected, although it is slight. As a result, when a variable scenario is set in advance, a battle reach can be executed at an unexpected timing. As a result, when Battle Reach is executed at a surprising timing (that is, when a variable time that allows Battle Reach to be executed (variable time of 60 seconds or more) is selected), the player will receive a jackpot. It is possible to make the player play the game while expecting to win.

As mentioned above, by setting a variable scenario and making it possible to preset the period during which the pre-battle production and battle reach are executed, it is possible to set the period during which the pre-battle performance and battle reach are executed for a long period of time (for example, on hold) without making players feel uncomfortable. It is possible to set the performance mode of the pre-battle performance during the period in which a number of special symbol fluctuations greater than the upper limit of memory is executed), but the same fluctuation scenario will be used every time the battle performance is executed. There is a problem in that if a performance based on the battle performance is executed, the player becomes bored with the battle performance itself.

In order to solve such a problem, in this third control example, the jackpot game content (number of rounds) and the gaming state set after the jackpot are the same jackpot type (for example, "Jackpot A") , multiple jackpot types (for example, "jackpot Aa" to "jackpot Aj") with different variable scenarios defined are provided to prevent players from easily grasping the contents of the variable scenarios during battle performance. It consists of

Thereby, it is possible to suppress the disadvantages (monotonous performance) of creating a scenario while having the advantage of creating a scenario of a fluctuating pattern (providing a long-term performance that does not give the player a sense of discomfort). In addition, since the jackpot game content (number of rounds) and the gaming state set after the jackpot are the same for the same jackpot type (for example, "jackpot A"), there are multiple variable scenarios, Even if the player understands the game content of the jackpot and the game state set after the jackpot ends, it can be made difficult to understand in which fluctuation scenario the special symbol fluctuation is being executed after the jackpot ends. . Therefore, when a battle reach is executed, it is difficult to tell whether it is a predetermined battle reach based on a variable scenario (a drawn battle) or a battle reach based on winning a jackpot (a winning or losing battle). It is possible to enhance the performance effect.

In addition, in this control example, jackpot types are defined in which "a to j" are assigned to all of "jackpot A", "jackpot B", "jackpot D", "jackpot G", and "jackpot I". However, the jackpot type prescribed for each jackpot may be different. For example, when a jackpot game corresponding to "jackpot A" is executed, a specific fluctuation scenario (for example, fluctuation scenario The configuration may be such that only 2) can be set. This allows players who have been playing games for a long time to easily understand the relationship between jackpot game details and variable scenarios. Therefore, when a battle reach is executed at a timing different from usual after a specific jackpot game (for example, a jackpot game corresponding to "jackpot A") ends, expectations for a jackpot can be increased.

Table B (probability variation pattern table 202d3) is defined in association with the range in which the number of variations of the special symbol is "200~". By configuring in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the variable probability state continues until the next jackpot as in this control example, there is no need to create infinite variable scenarios, so the data capacity of the main controller 110 can be reduced. I can do it. In addition, in this third control example, with respect to the jackpot probability of the special symbol in the variable probability state (approximately 1/48 (see Fig. 106(a)), the variation that is reached when a lottery is executed with a probability of 4 times or more The configuration is such that when the number of fluctuations exceeds 200, table B (the variation pattern table for failure (probable variation) 202d3) is executed. ) The variation pattern table 202d3) may be configured to be executed. For example, when the number of variations exceeds "500" which is reached when a lottery with a jackpot probability of 10 times or more is executed, table B is used. It may also be configured such that selection of the variation pattern that has occurred is executed.

In addition, in this third control example, when the number of fluctuations exceeds "200" which is the upper limit of the fluctuation scenario, the selection of the fluctuation pattern using table B is executed. A table may be used. For example, the selection of a variation pattern using table A may be configured to be executed until the next jackpot is won, or the variation pattern may be changed from the upper limit of the variation scenario "200". During the period when the number of times is "399", the selection of the fluctuation pattern using table A is executed, and when the number of fluctuations exceeds "400", the selection of the fluctuation pattern using table B is executed until the next jackpot is won. It may be configured so that

In addition, as mentioned above, in this third control example, the battle effect is executed based on the variation scenario for special symbol variations within the range of the number of drawings that would normally result in a jackpot. However, when the upper limit of the variation scenario (the number of variations "200") is exceeded, it is preferable to configure the third symbol display device 81 to perform a production other than the battle production. In this case, it is preferable to perform a bonus performance in which video and audio that the player cannot normally see is provided, or points that the player has collected are awarded. This makes it possible to provide special benefits to players who have not been able to win a jackpot for a long period of time. In addition, in this third control example, the above-mentioned bonus performance is executed using a variation pattern different from the variation pattern corresponding to the variation scenario set in order to smoothly execute the battle production executed during the variable probability state. Therefore, the degree of freedom in presenting special benefits can be increased.

Next, the contents of fluctuation scenario 3 will be explained with reference to FIG. 194(d). FIG. 194(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the variation scenario 3. This variation scenario 3 is configured such that the period in which a variation pattern is selected using tables C and D is different from the variation scenario 2 described above (see FIG. 194(c)). Specifically, in variation scenario 3, table A (special (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc4) is defined in association with the number of variations in the range of "1 to 4", as in variation scenario 2 described above, and the number of variations is defined in the range of "1 to 4". Table C (first deviation (probable variable) variation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in the range of "5 to 9", and table D (second deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc2) is defined when the number of variations is "10". 202dc3) is defined.

Thereafter, until the number of fluctuations reaches "190", table C (first deviation (probable variable) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in association with five fluctuations, and table D (second A deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc3) is defined in association with each other. In other words, during the period when the number of variations of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot is "5 to 190", after executing the special symbol variation in which the variation pattern is selected using table C five times, the variation pattern is selected using table D. A scenario in which the selected special symbol variation is executed is repeatedly executed.

With this configuration, the timing at which the battle reach based on the variable scenario (draw battle) is executed can be varied depending on the type of variable scenario that is set, so the battle reach based on winning the jackpot ( It is possible to make it difficult to tell whether the battle is a victory or a defeat, and the production effect can be enhanced.

Then, similar to the variation scenario 2 described above, table C (first deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in the range of the number of variations from "190 to 198", and when the number of variations is "199", Table D (second deviation (probable) variation pattern table 202dc3) is defined, and table B (deviation (probability) variation pattern table 202d3) is defined in a range where the number of variations is "200~".

In this way, the period of the pre-battle performance (period where the number of fluctuations is "190 to 198") corresponding to the last battle reach (battle reach executed when the number of fluctuations is "199") is set regardless of the jackpot type. By unifying them, it is possible to easily unify the performance contents to be executed regardless of which jackpot type is set. Therefore, it is no longer necessary to prepare a performance that indicates to the player that the battle performance has ended (a performance that differs from the usual pre-battle performance or battle reach performance) for each jackpot type, which reduces the capacity of performance data. can be reduced.

It should be noted that it is not necessary to standardize the presentation that indicates to the player that the battle presentation will end for all jackpot types (pre-battle presentation or presentation that differs from normal presentation mode for battle reach), and at least two Configure the variable scenario so that the effects that indicate to the player that the battle effects will end for the two jackpot types (effects that make the pre-battle effect or battle reach effect different from normal) are unified. For example, the capacity of performance data can be reduced.

Next, the contents of fluctuation scenario 4 will be explained with reference to FIG. 195(a). FIG. 195(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of variation scenario 4. This fluctuation scenario 4 stipulates the same contents as the fluctuation scenario 2 described above (see Figure 194(c)) for the period when the number of fluctuations is "1 to 14", and the contents stipulated after that. is configured differently from fluctuation scenario 2. In this way, by configuring multiple variable scenarios to have the same content for a predetermined period of time after the end of the jackpot, and to change the content after the predetermined period has passed, it is possible to provide players with the following information: This can make it more difficult to understand what the current fluctuation scenario is.

FIG. 195(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of fluctuation scenario 5. This fluctuation scenario 5 differs from fluctuation scenarios 2 to 4 in that the special symbol fluctuation is such that a fluctuation pattern is selected using table D after the number of fluctuations "1 to 4" in which a fluctuation pattern is selected using table A. is executed. In other words, a battle reach (draw battle) is performed without performing a pre-battle performance. With this configuration, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of discomfort in the battle performance than in the case where other variable scenarios are set. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of a jackpot for the battle reach that is executed immediately after the start of the battle performance. The other contents are the same as those of the above-mentioned fluctuation scenarios 2 to 4, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, FIG. 195(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of variation scenario 6. As shown in FIG. 195(c), this variation scenario 6 has two points: no period in which a variation pattern is selected using table A, and a special symbol variation in which a variation pattern is selected using table D. It differs from other fluctuation scenarios in that it is set continuously. The other elements are the same as those in the above-mentioned fluctuation scenarios 2 to 4, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Also, regarding the above-mentioned fluctuation scenario 6, in order to prevent players from easily understanding the fluctuation scenario, the fluctuation pattern tables defined in the fluctuation scenarios are made the same, and the fluctuation pattern tables are made to correspond to each fluctuation pattern table. A variation scenario 7 (see FIG. 195(d)) is provided in which only the number of variations is different. As a result, even if the fluctuation pattern is selected using table C after the jackpot ends (that is, when the battle effect starts immediately after the jackpot ends), the currently set fluctuation pattern will be displayed to the player. It can make it difficult to understand what the scenario is.

Next, the contents of fluctuation scenario 8 will be explained with reference to FIG. 196(a). FIG. 196(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of fluctuation scenario 8. As shown in FIG. 196(a), fluctuation scenario 8 differs from fluctuation scenarios 1 to 7 described above in that the period in which a fluctuation pattern is selected is set longer using table A. . Specifically, table A is defined in association with the number of variations of the special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot in the range of "1 to 10". With this configuration, it is possible to lengthen the period for selecting a variable pattern using table A in which a variable pattern with a variable time of 0.5 seconds is selected regardless of the special symbol lottery result. It is possible to provide a big hit in a short period of time.

Also, during the period in which this table A is associated and prescribed, the third symbol display device 81 displays a display similar to the extended display of the first control example described above, that is, an ending screen indicating the end of the jackpot game. configured to be displayed. Thereby, a series of jackpot effects can be executed for a plurality of jackpot games.

Next, variation scenario 9 will be explained with reference to FIG. 196(b). FIG. 196(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of fluctuation scenario 9. As shown in FIG. 196(b), this variation scenario 9 differs from other variation scenarios in that the first variation pattern table defined after the end of the jackpot is table B instead of table A. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the variable probability state is not set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot. After that, when the period defined by association with Table B has passed (period with the number of fluctuations "1 to 4"), a fluctuation pattern using Tables C and D will be selected like other fluctuation scenarios. Since the battle performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the selected variation pattern, it is possible to provide a surprising performance to the player.

FIG. 196(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fluctuation scenario 10. As shown in FIG. 196(c), variation scenario 10 differs from other variation scenarios in that a period for selecting a variation pattern using table D is not set. In other words, in this variation scenario 10, a variation pattern is not selected using table D during the period in which the battle performance is executed, so a predetermined battle reach (draw battle) is executed based on the variation scenario. There is nothing to be done.

In this fluctuation scenario 10, when selecting a fluctuation pattern using table C, the acquired value of fluctuation type counter CS1 is "198", and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds (long deviation a) is selected. Or, if the special symbol lottery result becomes a jackpot and a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds or 90 seconds is selected using the jackpot (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc1, the battle reach will be executed. . Therefore, when this variation scenario 10 is set, the probability of winning a jackpot when the battle reach is executed can be made higher than when other variation scenarios are set.

In addition, in this third control example, similarly to the first control example described above, the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, and a probability variable jackpot in which a probability variable state is given as a gaming state after the end of the jackpot, and a jackpot. It has a normal jackpot in which a normal state is given as a game state after the end, and in the battle reach that is executed during the battle performance, a winning battle is executed if the probability jackpot is won, and if the normal jackpot is won. If the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a draw battle is executed.

In other words, when this variation scenario 10 is set, it is possible to reduce the frequency with which draw battles are executed compared to when other variation scenarios are set. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the content of the performance when the battle reach is executed, and the performance effect can be enhanced. Note that when setting a variable scenario without using table D, such as variable scenario 10, there is a risk that the pre-battle performance will be executed for a long period of time. It is preferable to use a table (table C2) in which a variation pattern with a shorter variation time (for example, a variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 seconds to 1 second) can be selected than a variation pattern with a variation time of 3 seconds to 5 seconds. . Thereby, the period during which the pre-battle performance is continuously performed can be shortened.

Next, variation scenario 11 will be explained with reference to FIG. 196(d). FIG. 196(d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fluctuation scenario 11. As shown in FIG. 196(d), in this variation scenario 11, the first variation pattern table defined after the end of the jackpot is table C, and after a predetermined period has passed after the end of the jackpot (the special symbol changes 249 times). It is different from other fluctuation scenarios in that Table A is defined for the following changes (after the above) and that the upper limit number of fluctuation scenarios is set to "400".

According to variation scenario 11, like variation scenario 10 described above, there is no period in which a variation pattern is selected using table D, so there is a possibility that a jackpot will be won if the battle reach is executed. (the possibility that a winning or losing battle will be executed) can be increased, and the player can be made to pay attention to the content of the battle reach performance.

In addition, if the number of special symbol changes after the end of the jackpot exceeds a predetermined number (399 times), Table A is defined where the number of changes per unit time is the highest, so a definite change state is set as the gaming state. Dissatisfaction felt by players when a period of not winning a jackpot continues for a long period of time (for example, a period in which special symbol fluctuations are executed 10 times as many times as the value of the denominator of the jackpot probability) Feelings can be suppressed.

As explained above, in this third control example, multiple (10 types) variation scenarios can be set for the jackpot type in which the same jackpot is executed, and a battle reach (draw draw) based on the variation scenario is configured. Although it is difficult to understand the battle reach (win or defeat battle) based on winning the special symbol jackpot, the types of variable scenarios are not limited to these, and there are many more types. It may be configured such that a fluctuation scenario can be set.

In addition, in this third control example, a variable scenario is defined for all periods in which the battle performance is executed, and the content of the battle performance (pre-battle performance, battle reach) is configured to be able to be determined in advance. Only during a part of the period during which the battle production is performed (for example, the period from the end of the jackpot until the special symbol variation is executed 50 times, or the period for 10 special symbol variations calculated backward from the timing when the battle production ends). It may be configured to determine a fluctuation scenario.

In this third control example, a configuration is used in which a variation scenario of special symbol variation is set based on the winning jackpot type, but other elements for setting (variable) variation scenarios may also be used. For example, Although the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, if the lottery result gives the player a smaller amount of benefits than a jackpot (a so-called small win), a variable scenario can be set (variable). Alternatively, the fall lottery means used in the second control example described above may be configured to set (variable) a variable scenario when a fall is won. Furthermore, when the number of variations of the special symbol variation reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), a means is provided to perform a lottery for varying the variation scenario, and the variation scenario is set (variable) based on the lottery result. It may be configured to do so.

Next, with reference to FIG. 191(b), the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 used in the third control example will be explained. FIG. 191(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 203 of main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 191(b), the RAM 203 of the third control example is different from the RAM 203 of the first control example described above in that a variable scenario storage area 203ca is added. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The variation scenario storage area 203ca is an area for storing variation scenarios set using the variation scenario setting table 202ca. In this third control example, a special symbol variation pattern is selected based on the variation scenario stored in the variation scenario storage area 203ca. This variation scenario storage area 203ca stores a variation scenario corresponding to the winning type of jackpot when a special symbol jackpot is won, and the variation number subtraction process 4 ( (see FIG. 204) (see S452 in FIG. 204). In this way, after winning the jackpot (after the process of starting the change of the special symbol to indicate winning the jackpot), until the change of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot is executed. Since the variation scenario is stored in between, the variation pattern of the special symbol to be executed after the end of the jackpot can be reliably selected based on the variation scenario stored in the variation scenario storage area 203ca.

Next, details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 197. FIG. 197(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example. As shown in FIG. 197(a), the ROM 222 of the third control example has the continuation value main selection table 222f and the continuation value sub-selection table 222g deleted from the ROM 222 of the first control example described above. point, a fluctuation scenario storage area 222ca, a first continuation value main selection table 222cb, a second continuation value main selection table 222cc, a third continuation value main selection table 222cd, and a continuation production mode selection 2 table 222ce. They are different in that they have been added. Note that this third control example shows a modification of the continuation effect (battle effect) of the first control example described above, so that among the elements provided in the ROM 222 of the first control example described above, the continuation Descriptions of elements not related to presentation will be omitted, and other elements will be given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

The fluctuation scenario storage area 222ca is an area in which information indicating the contents of a plurality of fluctuation scenarios specified in the fluctuation scenario setting table 202ca of the main controller 110 is stored, and information that is output from the main controller 110 is stored. The fluctuation scenario is updated on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on a command for indicating the setting status of the fluctuation scenario (for example, a command for indicating the type of jackpot or a command for indicating the set fluctuation scenario). Information used for management is stored.

This fluctuation scenario storage area 222ca is stored when it is determined in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 205) of the audio lamp control device 113 that a status command including related information related to the fluctuation scenario has been received (S3271 in FIG. 205: Yes). ), the variation scenario corresponding to the received command is read out and set in the variation scenario update area 223ca (see S3272 in FIG. 205).

With this configuration, the fluctuation scenario set by the main controller 110 and the fluctuation scenario managed by the audio lamp controller 113 can be synchronized, so that the fluctuation pattern to be selected in the future by the main controller 110 can be synchronized with the fluctuation scenario set by the main controller 110. (The variation pattern selected based on the set variation scenario) can be grasped in advance on the audio lamp control device 113 side. Therefore, it is possible to easily set a long-term effect without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In other words, in the conventional gaming machine, the contents of the plural pieces of winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a are determined, and based on the determination result, specific winning information (for example, the third winning information among the winning information) is determined. For the winning information (for which the special symbol fluctuation is executed), use the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation executed before it (the special symbol fluctuation executed first and second among the winning information) for a long period of time. However, for example, if a plurality of pieces of winning information are not stored in the winning information storage area 223a, it becomes difficult to carry out long-term effects. In addition, since the maximum value within the range in which long-term performance can be executed is the period of variation of special symbol fluctuations corresponding to the maximum number of winning information that can be stored in the winning information storage area 223a, there is a problem that the performance period is limited. was there.

On the other hand, in this third control example, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is managed in a scenario, and the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol to be executed in the future can be easily determined. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom for long-term performance.

In addition, in this third control example, since the audio lamp control device 113 has the fluctuation scenario storage area 222ca, there is no need for the main control device 110 to output all the contents of the fluctuation scenario to be set. The main controller 110 only needs to output information indicating the variation scenario (for example, information indicating the type of jackpot won or identification information that allows the variation scenario to be set to be specified from among a plurality of variation scenarios). The amount of information to be output can be reduced.

In addition, although detailed explanation is omitted, in this third control example, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off (power outage), when the power supply is restored, the main controller 110 A recovery process is executed to output the gaming state stored just before the power supply is cut off (or after the power supply is cut off until the processing of the main control device 110 is stopped) from to the audio lamp control device 113. The information indicating the gaming state output in the recovery process includes at least the type of jackpot won last time and the currently set variation scenario. Includes information to indicate any of the variation scenarios, the update status of the currently set variation scenario, and the number of variations of the special symbol that has been executed since the end of the previous jackpot. It is configured so that As a result, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like during a game, the updated content of the fluctuation scenario set in the main control device 110 and the fluctuation managed by the audio lamp control device 113 will be updated after the power supply is interrupted due to a power outage etc. It is possible to easily synchronize the updated contents of the scenario.

In this case, as a recovery process, a predetermined period (for example, a special symbol changes multiple times (5 times) and the period until the fluctuation pattern table specified in the fluctuation scenario is switched) are managed by the update contents of the fluctuation scenario set in the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113. It is recommended that this period be used as a confirmation period to determine whether the update contents of the fluctuation scenario have been updated correctly. Thereby, the update management process of the fluctuation scenario can be restored more accurately. In addition, during the above-mentioned confirmation period, the fluctuation performance corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol will be performed based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 without being based on the fluctuation scenario, and to indicate that the recovery is in progress. It is recommended that the configuration be configured so that the recovery display is executed. Thereby, it is possible to display a variation performance corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed on the third symbol display device 81, so that it is possible to suppress giving the player a feeling of discomfort.

The first continuous value main selection table 222cb is a table that is referred to when updating the continuous value (HP value) when the continuous effect (battle effect) is being executed, and is a table that is referred to when performing the update process of the continuous value (HP value) when the continuous effect (battle effect) is executed. This table is referred to when the period (remaining period) is longer than a predetermined period (for example, when the number of special symbol variations until the special symbol variation corresponding to battle reach is executed is four or more times).

Here, the method for setting the continuation value in the third control example will be explained, focusing on the differences from the above-described first control example. The first control example described above is for setting the main continuation value for updating and managing continuation values in the audio lamp control device 113 and the continuation value (HP value) for presentation to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The controller sets the secondary continuation values by referring to their corresponding tables, calculates a total value by adding up the set main continuation value and secondary continuation value, and displays an information command to indicate the total value. In contrast, in this third control example, only the value of the main continuation value is set in the audio ramp control device 113, and the main continuation value set in the audio ramp control device 113 is output. The display controller 114 outputs an information command including information for the display controller 114 to the display controller 114, sets a sub-continuation value based on the information command received on the display controller 114 side, and calculates a total value.

In other words, in this third control example, when repeatedly increasing or decreasing the continuation value, the voice lamp control device 113 selects only the main continuation value, which is a value managed in order to correspond to special symbol lottery results and fluctuation scenarios. , and all other processing is executed by the display control device 114. Thereby, the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be significantly reduced.

Here, the contents of the first continuation value main selection table 222cb will be explained with reference to FIG. 198. FIG. 198 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first continuation value main selection table 222cb. The first continuation value main selection table 222cb shows the ratio at which the selected selected value (main continuation value) differs from the value (main continuation value) stored in the current continuation value (continuation value storage area 223n). It is specified that.

Note that this selection ratio is set by allocating each value to a range (for example, 0 to 199) that the value of a dedicated performance counter (not shown) can take. Further, in the first continuation value main selection table 222cb, the lower limit of selectable selection values is defined as "400". As mentioned above, the first continuation value main selection table 222cb specifies that if the value of the remaining number of times counter is 4 or more, that is, the special symbol is selected at least four times before the battle reach determined by the variation scenario is executed. Since this table is used when it is necessary to make changes, this is to prevent unnecessarily low selection values from being set and the progress of the continuous value increase/decrease performance being delayed. As a result, when the value of the remaining number of times counter 223cb becomes 3 or less, that is, when the battle reach is about to start, the effect of increasing or decreasing the continuation value can be executed without any discomfort.

To explain the contents shown in FIG. 198, if the value stored in the continuation value storage area 223n is "1000", the percentage of times when "1000" is selected as the selection value (main continuation value) is selected. is 5%, "900" is selected 50%, "800" is selected 30%, "700" is selected 10%, "600" is selected 3%. %, the percentage of "500" being selected is defined as 2%.

Here, the contents of the effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to increases and decreases in the continuation value (main continuation value) will be explained. In this third control example, an effect corresponding to an increase or decrease in the total value of the main continuation value selected by the audio lamp control device 113 and the subcontinuation value selected by the display control device 114 is executed. . The effect to be executed is configured such that the sub-continuation value is selected so that the increase/decrease range of the main continuation value is the same as the increase/decrease range of the total value, as in the first control example described above. In fact, the content of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined by the selection value (main continuation value) selected using the first continuation value main selection table 222cb.

Specifically, if the current main continuation value is "1000" and the selected value is "1000", a "check" effect will be executed, and the continuation value (HP value) on the display screen will not increase or decrease. be done. Note that when a selection value that does not reduce the main continuation value is selected in the first continuation value main selection table 222cb, a command indicating that is output to the display control device 114, and when that command is received, The display control device 114 is configured so that the sub-continuation value is not selected. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the secondary continuation value is selected even though the main continuation value does not decrease, and the continuation value (HP value) on the display increases or decreases.

Next, if the current main continuation value is "1000" and the selected value is between "900" and "500", an "attack" effect is executed to reduce the opponent's continuation value (HP value). The detailed performance mode of this "attack" performance is set by the difference value between the current main continuous value and the selected value. If the difference value is 100, it is a "light attack", if it is 200, it is a "medium attack", If the number is 300, a "strong attack" is set, if the number is 400, a "strong attack" is set, and if the number is 500, a "strongest attack" is set. With this configuration, it is possible to predict the extent of decrease in the continuous value (HP value) based on the performance content executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It can make people interested.

Similarly, when the value stored in the continuation value storage area 223n is "900", the proportion of "900" being selected as the selection value (main continuation value) is 10%, and "800" is selected as the selection value (main continuation value). is selected at 50%, "700" is selected at 30%, "600" is selected at 5%, "500" is selected at 5%, and the continuation value is When the value stored in the storage area 223n is "800", the percentage of "800" selected is 20%, and the percentage of "700" is selected as the selection value (main continuation value). is defined as 50%, the percentage of "600" selected as 20%, and the percentage of "500" selected as 10%.

Furthermore, when the value stored in the continuation value storage area 223n is "700", the proportion of "900" selected as the selection value (main continuation value) is 10%, and "700" is selected as the selected value (main continuation value). The selection rate is defined as 30%, the selection rate of "600" is 40%, the selection rate of "500" is defined as 20%, and the value stored in the continuous value storage area 223n is "600". In this case, the percentage of "800" being selected is 10%, the percentage of "600" being selected is 40%, and the percentage of "500" being selected is 40%, and the value is stored in the continuous value storage area 223n. If the stored value is "500", the percentage of "900" being selected is 10%, the percentage of "700" being selected is 10%, and the percentage of "500" being being selected is 80%. When the value stored in the continuous value storage area 223n is "400", the percentage of "900" selected is 30%, the percentage of "700" selected is 20%, and the percentage of "500" is selected. The selection rate is defined as 10%, and the selection rate of "400" is defined as 40%.

As described above, when the value stored in the continuation value storage area 223n is "700" to "400", the selected value may be higher than the current continuation value. In this case, as a performance executed on the display screen, a "recovery" performance in which the opponent's continuation value (HP value) increases is performed. By performing this recovery effect, even if the continuous value (HP value) decreases unexpectedly, the effect that increases or decreases the continuous value (HP value) can be continuously executed again.

As explained above, the first continuation value main selection table 222cb, which is used when the value of the remaining number of times counter 223cb is 4 or more, shows the rate at which the effect (weak attack) that gradually decreases the main continuation value is selected. is set higher than the rate at which other effects are selected. Thereby, even if the pre-battle performance is executed for a long period of time, the performance of increasing/decreasing the continuation value can be progressed. Furthermore, even if the proportion of "light attacks" selected is set high, the performance mode executed on the display screen can be varied in accordance with the selected sub-continuation value, similar to the first control example described above. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a variety of performance modes, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

Returning to FIG. 197, the explanation will be continued. The second continuous value main selection table 222cc is used when selecting the performance mode of the pre-battle performance when the pending hit flag 223cc is set to on, that is, when the special symbol changes several times and then becomes a jackpot. This is the table used. Next, the contents of the second continuation value main selection table 222cc will be explained with reference to FIG. 199. FIG. 199 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second continuation value main selection table 222cc. As shown in FIG. 199, the second continuous value main selection table 222cc has selectable selection values such as "777", "333", The major difference is that "300" to "0" are added. The following will mainly explain the differences from the first continuation value main selection table 222cb. Note that, among the contents specified in the second continuous value main selection table 222cc, detailed explanations are omitted for elements that are the same as those in the first continuous value main selection table 222cb, or only have different selection ratios. .

The second continuation value main selection table 222cc is configured so that "777" and "333" can be selected as the main continuation value value in order to notify in advance that there is winning information corresponding to a jackpot in the hold. There is. When "777" or "333" is selected as the selection value, a dedicated command indicating that is output to the display control device 114, and when that command is received, the display control device 114 performs sub-continuation. It is configured so that no value is selected. As a result, even though the main continuation value to indicate winning the jackpot was selected using the second continuation value main selection table 222cc, the secondary continuation value was selected, and the continuation value on the display (HP It is possible to suppress the situation where the value) increases or decreases.

In addition, in this third control example, when the main continuation value to indicate winning the jackpot is selected, the secondary continuation value is prohibited from selecting a value, so that the main continuation value is prohibited to the player. Although the configuration is configured to be able to notify the value ("777", "333"), other configurations may be used, and when a command regarding the main continuation value to indicate winning the jackpot is received. The display control device 114 is configured to select a sub-continuation value using a dedicated selection table, and when the value (sub-continuation value) selected using the dedicated selection table is "0", Only "777" or "333" may be displayed as the continuous value (HP value) on the display screen. In this case, the values that the above-mentioned dedicated selection table can take include, for example, if the main continuation value is "777", a value that adds "23" or "13", or a value that adds "7" or "17". It is better to configure the configuration so that the value to be subtracted from can be selected. With this configuration, if a value other than "0" is selected as the secondary continuation value, the last digit of the continuation value (HP value) can be set to "0". It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that "777" has been selected as the continuation value, and the added value of displaying the continuation value (HP value) on the display screen to indicate winning the jackpot. can be increased.

Furthermore, unlike the first continuous value main selection table 222cb, the second continuous value main selection table 222cc is configured so that "300" to "0" can be selected as the selection value. As a result, if the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen during the pre-battle performance becomes less than "300", the player can predict that the battle reach will be executed soon. . Although the details will be described later, in the third continuation value main selection table 222cd (the table used when the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is 3 or less), "300" to "0" are selected as selection values, and the second It is configured to be selectable at a lower selection rate than the continuation value main selection table 222cc. With this configuration, it is possible to further increase expectations for a jackpot.

In addition, in Figure 199, multiple values such as "1000 to 800" are listed as the current continuous value or selected value, but in reality, "1000", "900", and "800" are independent contents. is specified, and the content specified for each is the same, so multiple values are listed together.

In addition, in the second continuation value main selection table 222cc, when a revival effect is executed, a value of "1000 to 800" is selected as a value to be selected, regardless of the currently set main continuation value value. The percentage is set high. This is because the second continuation value main selection table 222cc is configured so that "777" and "333" can be selected as the main continuation value to indicate winning the jackpot, and the continuation value (HP value) is restored. In the pre-battle performance after winning the jackpot, by increasing the continuation value (HP value) to the range where the main continuation value to indicate winning the jackpot can be selected, the player is told that they will win the jackpot again. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that the main continuation value will be selected.

Returning to FIG. 197, the explanation will be continued. The third continuation value main selection table 222cd is used when the value of the remaining number of times counter 223cb is 3 or less, that is, when the remaining number of fluctuations until the battle reach set based on the fluctuation scenario is executed is 3 or less. This is a table used when selecting the performance mode of the pre-battle performance. Next, the third continuation value main selection table 222cd will be explained with reference to FIG. 200. FIG. 200 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the third continuation value main selection table 222cd.

As shown in FIG. 200, the third continuous value main selection table 222cd has similar content to the second continuous value main selection table 222cc shown in FIG. The point that the proportion of main continuation values (“777”, “333”) to indicate is set to “0”, the point that the proportion of “0” as the selected value is set to “0”, and the overall The difference is that the proportion of low values (“300” to “0”) being selected as selection values is lowered, and the other contents are the same except for a slight difference in the selection proportion.

Returning to FIG. 197, the explanation will be continued. The continuous performance mode selection 4 table 222ce is a table for selecting the performance mode (performance mode) of the pre-battle performance in the continuous performance. Here, with reference to FIG. 201, the contents of the continuous production mode selection 4 table 222ce will be explained. FIG. 201 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents stipulated in the continuous performance mode selection 4 table 222ce. The continuous production mode selection 4 table 222ce is different from the continuous production mode selection table 222e of the first control example described above, when the upper limit of the variation scenario is reached (the number of variations of the special symbol is 200 when the probability variation state is set). The difference is that a special effect (mode 6) is selected when the number of times exceeds the limit. Other elements are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In other words, in this third control example, a variation scenario is set for the special symbol variation after the end of the jackpot, and the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is determined using the variation pattern table defined in the set variation scenario. configured to be selected. Then, considering the data capacity of the main controller 110, the variation scenario is set up to a range where the number of variations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, the number of times the denominator of the jackpot probability is multiplied by 5), and after that is configured such that a variable pattern is selected using a specific variable pattern table (table B) until the next jackpot is won (see FIG. 194).

In this third control example configured in this way, when the number of variations of the special symbol exceeds the predetermined number of times mentioned above, it becomes difficult to execute a continuous production using the variation scenario, so the special production mode "Mode 6" is selected. When "Mode 6" is selected, the battle performance ends, and a specific pattern corresponding to the variation pattern (see FIG. 108(d)) specified in the losing (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (table B) is selected. The performance is executed. As this specific performance, for example, a performance that cannot normally be seen is performed, such as a performance in which a party is held after making peace with the opponent who was not resolved during the battle performance.

In addition, in this third control example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, which is the upper limit of the fluctuation scenario, is set to "200" or "400", and only when there is a long period of time without winning a jackpot in a variable probability state. It is configured to execute the above-mentioned specific effect and give the player a feeling of satisfaction, but in addition to that, it is also configured to perform the specific effect when winning a jackpot in a specific jackpot type (e.g. sub-category "k"). The number of variations of the special symbol, which is the upper limit of the variation scenario, may be set to "20" only in the specific variation scenario to make the above-mentioned bonus effect easily visible. As a result, if multiple jackpot types (minor categories "a" to "k") are provided for a jackpot in which the same jackpot game is executed (for example, major category "jackpot A"), the game can be executed for each minor category. It is possible to vary the benefits (ease of execution of a specific performance) given to players, and even after winning a jackpot, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of jackpot won.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be explained with reference to FIG. 197(b). FIG. 197(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this third control example. The RAM 223 of the third control example differs from the RAM 223 of the first control example in that the duration counter 223p is deleted, the fluctuation scenario update area 223ca, the remaining number of times counter 223cb, the pending hit flag 223cc, and the continuation setting flag 223cd. The difference is that . Note that this third control example describes another control example regarding the continuation effect of the first control example described above, so among the elements specified in the RAM 223, the elements that are not involved in the continuation effect are Description is omitted.

The fluctuation scenario update area 223ca is an area that is updated and managed so that the audio lamp control device 113 can grasp the fluctuation scenario set in the main control device 110 and the update status of the fluctuation scenario. This fluctuation scenario update area 223ca is updated in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 205) when it is determined that fluctuation scenario related information for indicating the fluctuation scenario set in the main controller 110 has been received (FIG. 205: S3271). : Yes), a variation scenario corresponding to the received variation scenario related information is selected from a plurality of variation scenarios stored in the variation scenario storage area 222ca, the selected variation scenario is set, and the variation display setting process ( (See FIG. 147) is executed, the progress status of the fluctuation scenario is updated. Based on the update status of the variable scenario set in the variable scenario update area 223ca, the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is set in the continuous performance setting process 4 (see FIG. 207). Then, when a jackpot is won, the set fluctuation scenario is cleared (not shown).

The remaining number of times counter 223cb is a counter for measuring the number of variations of the special symbol until the next battle reach is executed based on the variation scenario, and when the set value becomes 0, the battle reach is configured to run. This remaining number counter 223cb calculates the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until the next battle reach is executed based on the information in the fluctuation scenario update area 223ca in the continuous performance setting process 4 (see FIG. 207), and calculates the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until the next battle reach is executed. The value obtained is set as the value of the remaining number of times counter 223cb (S4052 in FIG. 207).

The value set in the remaining number of times counter 223cb is decremented by 1 (see S4057 in FIG. 207) each time the continuous effect setting process 4 (see FIG. 207) is executed, and whether the battle reach is executed as a continuous effect or the pre-battle effect is executed. Referenced when determining whether to execute. In addition, in the winning information command processing (see FIG. 206), if it is determined that there is a winning prize in the pending state (S3251 in FIG. 206: Yes), the value of the remaining number of times counter 223cb is referred to, and the value of the remaining number of winnings is handled. It is determined which special symbol variation is executed first: the special symbol variation corresponding to the battle reach that is executed when the value of the remaining number of times counter 223cb becomes 0 ( S3253 in FIG. 206). Then, when the battle reach is executed, the value is set (cleared) to 0 (S4060 in FIG. 207).

The pending winning flag 223cc is a flag for indicating whether or not winning information for winning a jackpot exists in the winning information storage area 223a, and when set to on, the winning information storage area 223a This indicates that there is winning information that will lead to a jackpot.

This pending winning flag 223cc is not always set to ON when winning information for winning a jackpot exists in the winning information storage area 223a, and special symbol fluctuations corresponding to winning information for winning a jackpot are not set. , is set to ON when it is determined that it will be executed before the value of the remaining number of times counter 223cb becomes "0" (S3253 in FIG. 206: Yes). In the continuation value setting process 4 (see FIG. 208), it is determined whether the on-hold hit flag 223cc is set to on (see S4151 in FIG. 208), and if it is determined that it is set to on (see S4151 in FIG. 208), S4151: Yes), the hundreds digit of the continuation value is executed based on the second continuation value main selection table 222cc.

The continuation setting flag 223cd is a flag for determining whether or not the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is set in a variable probability state, and when it is set to on, the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is set. This indicates that the

This continuation setting flag 223cd is determined in the continuation effect setting process 4 (see Fig. 207) when the setting status is determined (see S4051 in Fig. 207) and it is determined that it is not set to on (set to off). (S4051 in FIG. 207: No), the value of the remaining number of times counter 223cb is set, and then it is set to ON (S4053 in FIG. 207). On the other hand, in the process of S4051 in FIG. 207, if it is determined that it is set to ON (S4051 in FIG. 207: Yes), the process of setting the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is skipped. Then, when the battle reach is executed, the value of the remaining number of times counter 223cb is cleared to 0 (see S4060 in FIG. 207).

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the value of the remaining number of times counter 223cb from being reset in a state where a value has already been set in the remaining number of times counter 223cb. As a result, after setting the value of the remaining number of times counter 223cb, the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the remaining number of times counter 223cb every time the continuation effect setting process 4 (see FIG. 207) is executed (see S4057 in FIG. 207) By simply executing the above, it is possible to easily synchronize the update status of the variation scenario set in the main control device 110 and the update status of the variation scenario managed by the audio lamp control device 113.

In addition, in the process of S3254 executed in the winning information command process 4 (see FIG. 206), a value that does not correspond to the fluctuation scenario, that is, a value indicating the number of special symbol fluctuations until the winning information for winning the jackpot is executed. When the remaining number of times counter 223cb is set, subtraction based on the value can be reliably executed.

Next, details of the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 202. FIG. 202 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the electrical configuration provided in the MPU 221 of the display control device 114 in the third control example. As shown in FIG. 202, the display control device 114 of the third control example is different from the display control device 114 of the first control example described above in that a continuation value storage area 233ca is added to the work RAM 233, and a character ROM 234 is added to the display control device 114 of the third control example. The difference is that a first continuation value sub-selection table 234a3 and a second continuation value sub-selection table 234a4 are added to the NAND flash memory 234a.

The continuation value storage area 233ca is an area for storing the continuation value calculated based on the display continuation value command received from the audio lamp control device 113, and is used in the continuation value related command processing 4 (see FIG. 210). The calculated continuation value is stored (see S7305 in FIG. 210). Then, in the final mode command processing (see FIG. 211), if it is determined that the final mode to be executed this time is not a winning battle (S8305: No in FIG. 211), the stored value is referenced (see FIG. 211). (See S8306).

The first continuation value sub-selection table 234a3 and the second continuation value sub-selection table 234a4 are the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 (FIG. 117(b)) provided in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the first control example described above. ) and the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2 (see FIG. 117(c)), which is a table with the same contents as the fourth effect provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the first control example described above. The difference is that a production counter (not shown) provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 is used instead of the counter 223y4.

<About the control process of the main controller 110 in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 203 and 204, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the third control example will be described. In this control example, in contrast to the first control example described above, special symbol variation processing 4 (see FIG. 203) is used instead of special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 127), and variation number subtraction processing (see FIG. 129) is used. The difference is that the variation number subtraction process 4 (see FIG. 204) is used instead of (see FIG. 204), and the other points are the same. Identical parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 203, special symbol variation processing 4 (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the third control example will be explained. FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing the contents of special symbol variation processing 4 (S104). This special symbol variation process 4 is different from the special symbol variation process of the first control example described above (see FIG. 127) when the special symbol variation time has elapsed (S214: Yes) and the current lottery result is a jackpot. The difference is that the contents of the process executed when the determination is made (S216: Yes) are partially different, and the same process is executed for other elements. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special symbol variation process 4 is executed, first, the same processes of S201 to S216 as the above-mentioned special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127) are executed. In the process of S216, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot (S216: Yes), then the selected jackpot type is selected with reference to the first winning type selection table 202c (see FIG. 192). Based on this, a scenario for opening specific winning openings will be set. Specifically, the contents of the jackpot game to be executed this time (for example, 15 rounds), the opening period from the start of the jackpot until the start of the first round, the interval period between each round, and the last round (for example, , 15th round) and the ending period from the end of the jackpot to the end of the jackpot, a scenario is set in which a specific prize opening will be opened in this jackpot.

After completing the process of S217, next, the probability change flag 203g and the time saving counter 203h are reset (S218), the start of the jackpot is set (S219), and a status command based on the jackpot type is set (S251). Then, the process of S220, which is the same as in the first control example described above, is executed and the present process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S216, even if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (a loss) (S216: No), the process of S221, which is the same as the first control example described above, is executed, and the process of S220 is executed. Execute and end this process.

In the process of S251 described above, a status command is set that includes at least information indicating the jackpot type of the jackpot won this time. The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used for voice lamp control during external output processing (S1101) of the main processing (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 201. The information is sent to the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pending pitch count command, it extracts information regarding the type of jackpot from the status command, and responds to the variable scenario stored in the variable scenario storage area 222ca of the ROM 222 based on the extracted information. A variation scenario is selected and the selected variation scenario is stored in the variation scenario update area 223ca.

With this configuration, it is possible for the audio lamp control device 113 to grasp which variation scenario will be used to select the variation pattern of the special symbol after the jackpot ends at the timing when the jackpot game is started. . As a result, compared to the case where, for example, an information command indicating the variation pattern and a command to indicate the variation scenario set this time are output at the same time at the timing when a jackpot ends and the special symbol variation starts, the variation is more reliable. You can set effects that correspond to the scenario.

In addition, in this third control example, the status command that is set at the start of the jackpot game includes information to indicate the fluctuation scenario that is set after the jackpot ends, so it corresponds to the contents of the status command. You can also set the performance during the jackpot. Therefore, since it is possible to suggest to the player a variable scenario that will be set after the jackpot is over by the production performed during the jackpot, it is possible to make the player interested in the production carried out during the jackpot. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 204, the contents of the variation number subtraction process 4 executed in the third control example will be explained. FIG. 204 is a flowchart schematically showing the contents of the variation number subtraction process 4. The variation number subtraction process 4 is a process for updating the variation scenario stored in the variation scenario update area 223ca (S451, S452) in contrast to the variation number subtraction process (see FIG. 129) of the first control example described above. They differ in the added points, and are otherwise the same. Identical elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 204, when the variation number subtraction process 4 is executed, the processes 401 to S411 of S3709, which are the same as the variation number subtraction process of the first control example described above (see FIG. 129), are executed. Next, it is determined whether a fluctuation scenario is stored in the fluctuation scenario update area 223ca (S451), and if it is determined that a fluctuation scenario is stored (S451: Yes), the stored fluctuation scenario is updated ( S452), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S451, if it is determined that the fluctuation scenario is not stored (S451: No), the process ends without executing the process of S452.

Here, the update contents of the fluctuation scenario executed in the process of S452 will be explained in detail. First, the variation number subtraction process 4 (see S204) is executed as a subroutine of the special symbol variation process (see S203). This makes it possible to reliably update the variation scenario when it is determined that the special symbol variation has started.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 205 to 208. In this control example, in contrast to the first control example described above, command determination processing 4 (S205) is used instead of command determination processing (see FIG. 140), and command determination processing 4 (S205) is used instead of winning information command processing (see S141). , differs in that winning information command processing 4 (see FIG. 203) is used, variation number subtraction processing 4 (see FIG. 204) is used instead of variation number subtraction processing (see FIG. 129), and other points. are the same. Identical parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, when the process of FIG. 205 is executed, the same processes of S3201 to S3214 as in the first control example described above are executed. When the process of S3214 is finished, it is next determined whether the received status command includes relevant information for setting a fluctuation scenario (S3271), and whether the received status command contains relevant information for setting a fluctuation scenario is determined. If it is determined that the change scenario related information included in the received status command is present (S3271: Yes), the change scenario corresponding to the change scenario related information included in the received status command is selected from the change scenario storage area 222ca and stored in the change scenario update area 223ca (S3272). . Then, a display status command is set (S3215), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3271, if it is determined that the relevant information for setting the fluctuation scenario is not included (S3271: No), the process of S3272 is skipped, the process of S3215 is executed, and this process is continued. finish.

Next, with reference to FIG. 206, winning information command processing 4 will be explained. FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing the contents of winning information command processing 4.

When winning information command processing 4 is executed, first, the information of the received winning command is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area (S3231), and it is checked whether the winning command received this time includes information corresponding to a jackpot ( (S3251). In the process of S3251, if it is determined that it is a winning prize (S3251: Yes), a special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information received this time is created based on the location where the winning information received this time is stored in the winning information storage area. The order in which these are executed is calculated (S3252).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is larger than the variation order calculated in the process of S3252 (S3253), and if it is determined that the value of the remaining number of times counter 223cb is larger (S3253: Yes) , the value set in the remaining number of times counter 223cb, that is, the value indicating the remaining number of times until the battle reach is executed based on the contents of the set variation scenario (the number of special symbol variations), that you have won the jackpot. is variably set to a value corresponding to the remaining number of times until the battle reach is executed based on (S3254).

This makes it possible to flexibly set and determine the period until the battle reach is actually executed, so during the battle performance, the pre-battle performance that continues until the battle reach is executed. The content (increase/decrease content of the continuation value) can be set based on the remaining period until the next Battle Reach is executed. Therefore, the performance effect can be enhanced.

When the process of S3254 is finished, the pending hit flag 223cc is set on (S3255), other prefetch processes are executed (S3256), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3251, if it is determined that the winning command received this time is not a winning prize (S3251: No), the process of S3252 to S3255 is skipped, the process of S3256 is executed, and this process ends. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 207, the contents of the continuous effect setting process 4 in the third control example will be explained. FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous effect setting process 4. This continuous performance setting process 4 (S3806 in FIG. 207) is for setting the performance mode of a plurality of performances to be executed during the continuous performance. When the continuation effect setting process 4 is executed, first, it is determined whether the continuation setting flag 223cd is set to on (S4051). If it is determined that the continuation setting flag 223cd is not set to on (set to off) (S4051: Yes), then the remaining number of times counter is set based on the information stored in the variable scenario update area 223ca. The value of 223cb is set (S4052).

Here, the process of S4052 will be explained. The fluctuation scenario update area 223ca stores a fluctuation scenario corresponding to (synchronized with) the fluctuation scenario set by the main controller 110. Then, using table D, the number of variations of the special symbol until a special symbol variation in which a variation pattern is selected is calculated is calculated, and the calculated number of times is set in the remaining number counter 223cb. As a result, the value of the remaining number of times counter 223cb indicates the number of variations of the special symbol until the next battle reach is executed based on the variation scenario.

In the third control example, the value of the remaining number of times counter 223cb is determined, and the table for setting the continuation value is varied based on the determination result. This allows the continuation value to be set to be different depending on the period until the next battle reach is executed (the number of changes in the special symbol). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the continuation value decreases significantly even though the battle reach is not executed for the time being (the value of the remaining number of times counter 223cb is large).

Furthermore, in a situation where Battle Reach is about to be executed (a situation where the value of the remaining number of times counter 223cb is small), the continuation value may be greatly reduced in order to make the player expect that a winning battle will be executed in Battle Reach. can.

Furthermore, in this third control example, the number of variations of the special symbol until the special symbol variation at which the battle reach is executed is determined in advance based on the information (variation pattern information) specified in the variation scenario. Therefore, it is possible to determine the fluctuation of the special symbol in which the battle reach is executed, regardless of the number of reserved balls of the special symbol or the content of the reserved winning information. Therefore, it is possible to provide a performance that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

Although the details will be described later, among the fluctuation patterns that have been stored on hold, there are fluctuations in the special symbol fluctuations that are executed before the battle reach (draw battle) that is determined in advance using the fluctuation scenario. Variation pattern in which the special symbol lottery result is a loss when the time is 60 seconds (variation pattern selected when the value "198" of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired in the first loss (probable variation) variation pattern table (table C)) ), or if it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot and the special symbol will be executed a predetermined number of times (twice) or more before the special symbol variation is executed, that special symbol A value corresponding to the number of times the special symbol changes until is changed is set to the value of the remaining number counter 223cb. As a result, even if Battle Reach is executed without being based on a variation scenario, that is, even if Battle Reach is executed based on the lottery results of special symbols, in the special symbol fluctuations executed up to the Battle Reach (Battle Reach). (in the previous performance), the continuation value can be increased or decreased appropriately.

Returning to FIG. 207, the explanation will be continued. After completing the process of S4052, next, the continuation setting flag 223cd is set to ON (S4053). As described above, while the continuation setting flag 223cd is set to ON, the process of S4052 is not executed due to the determination process of S4051. This prevents the value of the remaining number of times counter 223cb from being set again in a state where a value has already been set in the remaining number of times counter 223cb. Therefore, the value of the remaining number counter 223cb that is not based on the fluctuation scenario (the value of the remaining number counter 223cb that is set in response to the special symbol fluctuation that becomes the jackpot when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot) is set. The value can be maintained continuously even if the

After completing the process of S4053, it is then determined whether the current variation (special symbol variation) is a winning variation corresponding to a jackpot (S4054), and if it is determined to be a winning variation (S4054: Yes), a battle is started. In order to set the presentation mode of battle reach, which is the final mode of presentation, the process moves to S4013, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a winning variation (a losing variation) (S4054: No), then it is determined whether the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is 0 (S4055).

Here, if it is determined that the value of the remaining number of times counter 223cb is 0 (S4055: Yes), that is, the current special symbol variation is a special symbol variation (table D) in which a battle reach is executed based on the variation scenario. If it is a special symbol variation in which the variation pattern is selected using a special symbol variation), the process moves to S4013, which will be described later, and if it is determined that the value of the remaining number of times counter 223cb is not 0 (is 1 or more) (S4055: No ) then determines whether the current variation pattern is a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds (S4056).

In the process of S4056, it is determined whether a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds (long deviation a) is selected using the first deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table (table C), and a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds is selected. If it is determined that it is (S4056: Yes), the process moves to S4013, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a 60 second fluctuation pattern (long deviation a) (S4056: No), the process moves to S4057.

In other words, in the above-mentioned determination processing of S4054 to S4056, it is determined whether to set the pre-battle performance as the variation performance (the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81) set in response to the current special symbol variation, or whether to set the battle reach. In S4054, it is determined whether a jackpot has been won in the special symbol lottery, and in S4055, it is determined whether a battle reach is to be set based on the special symbol variation scenario. However, in S4056, it is determined whether or not the winning result is a specific lottery result in the special symbol lottery.

If the fluctuating performance to be executed in response to this special symbol fluctuation is a pre-battle performance, the value of the remaining number of times counter 223cb is subtracted by 1 (S4057), and then, as in the first control example described above, S4004 The processes from S4008 to S4008 are executed, and then the continuation value setting process 2 is executed (S4058), and this process ends. The contents of this continuation value setting process 2 (S4058) will be described later with reference to FIG. 208.

On the other hand, if the variation performance to be executed in response to the current special symbol variation is a battle reach (if the determination is Yes in any of S4054, S4055, and S4056), the final pattern is determined based on the final mode selection table 222h. Select the mode (S4013), set the corresponding final mode command for display (S4014), set the continuation production flag 223r, continuation setting flag 223cd, and pending hit flag 223cc to off (S4059), and set the remaining number counter 223cb. The value of is set to 0 (S4060), the contents stored in the continuous performance mode storage area 223m are cleared (process 4016 of S3709), and this process is ended.

Next, the continuation value setting process 4 (S4058) executed in the continuation effect setting process 4 (see S3806 in FIG. 207) will be described with reference to FIG. 208. FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing the contents of continuation value setting process 4 (S4058). In this continuation value setting process 4 (S4058), a process is executed to determine a selection table for selecting a continuation value according to the value of the remaining number counter 223cb and the setting status of the pending hit flag 223cc. In this way, by varying the selection range of the continuation value set as the performance mode of the pre-battle performance depending on the game situation, the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed. It is possible to make players interested.

When the continuation value setting process 4 is executed, first, it is determined whether the current change is the continuation value change timing. In this third control example, in the first deviation (probable variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2 (table C), when short deviation b with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is selected, it is determined that it is the continuous value fluctuation timing. . In addition, in this third control example, as the variation patterns of the special symbols, there is a variation pattern that is determined to be the continuous value fluctuation timing (short miss b), and a variation pattern that is determined to be not the continuous value variation timing (short miss a). ), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the audio lamp control device 113 is provided with a lottery means for determining whether or not to vary the continuation value, and the continuation value is varied for the same variation pattern. It may be configured such that it is possible to set the case where it is set and the case where it is not set. Further, it may be configured such that when it is determined that the player has performed a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 (operating means), it is determined that it is the continuation value fluctuation timing. With this configuration, players can be motivated to participate in the game.

In the process of S4101, if it is determined that it is the time to change the continuation value (S4101: Yes), the process of S4151 is executed to set the performance mode for increasing/decreasing (variable) the continuation value in the current variable performance. Move to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the time to change the continuation value (S4101: No), the process is immediately terminated.

In the process of S4151, it is determined whether the pending hit flag 223cc is set to ON (S4151). Here, if it is determined that the pending winning flag 223cc is set to ON (S4151: Yes), that is, if the winning information corresponding to the special symbol winning the jackpot exists in the pending, the second The main continuous value value (hundreds digit of HP) is selected based on the continuous value main selection table 222cc (S4157), and the selected main continuous value value is a specific value (“333” or “777”). It is determined whether there is one (S4158).

In the process of S4158, if it is determined that the selected main continuation value is a specific value (S4158: Yes), display control is performed to display the selected value as it is on the third symbol display device 81. A specific continuation value command for display to which no continuation value (sub continuation value) for presentation is added is set in the device 114 (S4159), and this processing is ended. Furthermore, as described above using FIG. 206, even if there is a special symbol that will win a jackpot in the pending special symbols, the change based on the variation scenario will be delayed until the corresponding special symbol variation is executed. When a battle reach (draw battle) is executed, the pending hit flag 223cc is not set to ON, so the main continuation value is not selected using the second continuation value main selection table 222cc. Thereby, the battle reach (win or defeat battle) can be executed immediately after the battle reach (draw battle) based on the variable scenario is executed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a performance that is surprising to the player.

As mentioned above, in this third control example, specific symbols are determined based on the variation order of the special symbols that are on hold that have won the jackpot and the special symbols that are subject to a battle reach (draw battle) based on the variation scenario. Generally speaking, the main continuation value is selected according to the content corresponding to the special symbol change executed first, but other configurations may also be used. The type of jackpot to be played is determined in advance, and the determination result is a predetermined determination result (for example, a determination result corresponding to a variable jackpot in which a winning battle is executed), and a predetermined determination result (for example, a losing battle is a The selection table for selecting the value of the main continuation value may be different between the case where the judgment result corresponds to the normal winning executed and the case where the judgment result corresponds to the normal winning.

Specifically, for example, if a special symbol variation in which a battle reach (draw battle) based on a variation scenario is executed is executed earlier than a special symbol variation corresponding to a guaranteed variable jackpot that exists in the hold. , the number of variations until the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the guaranteed variable jackpot is executed is newly set to the value of the remaining number counter 223cb, and the variation scenario is set higher than the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the normal win existing in the hold. When the variation of the special symbol in which the battle reach (draw battle) based on is executed is executed first, the configuration is such that the value of the already set remaining number of times counter 223cb is not changed. In this way, by varying the main continuation value that can be selected until the battle reach is executed based on the type of jackpot to be executed (probable jackpot or normal jackpot), the pre-battle production can be improved. It becomes possible to predict the type of jackpot depending on the performance mode, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Further, it may be configured such that the continuation value finally displayed in the battle reach, which is a draw battle, is taken over as it is to set the performance mode of the next battle performance. As a result, it is possible to give relevance to the battle effects that are repeatedly executed a plurality of times, and it is possible to make the players interested in the effects that are executed over a long period of time.

On the other hand, in the process of S4151, if it is determined that the on-hold hit flag 223cc is not set on (set off) (S4151: No), then the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is 4 or more. (S4152), and if it is determined that it is 4 or more (S4152: Yes), select the main continuous value value (hundreds digit of HP) based on the first continuous value main selection table 222cb. (S4153), and the process moves to S4154.

In addition, in the process of S4152, if it is determined that the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is not 4 or more (3 or less) (S4152: No), the main continuation value is determined based on the third continuation value main selection table 222cd. Selects the value (hundreds of HP) (S4156), moves to the process of S4154, sets a display continuous value command corresponding to the value of the main continuous value selected this time (S4154), and moves to the process of S4155. Transition.

In the process of S4155, the value of the main continuation value selected in the processes of S4153, S4156, and S4159 described above is stored in the continuation value storage area 223n. Thereby, at the next time when a continuation value is to be set, it is possible to read out the value of the currently selected main continuation value and select a new continuation value. After completing the process of S4155, this process ends.

<About the control process of the display control device 114 in the third control example>
Next, the control processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 209 to 211. In this control example, in contrast to the first control example described above, command judgment processing 4 (see Fig. 209) is used instead of command judgment processing (see Fig. 158), and continuation value related command processing (see Fig. 164) is used. ) is used instead of continuation value related command processing 4 (see FIG. 210), and final mode command processing (see FIG. 211) is added; other points are the same. Identical parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this third control example, in contrast to the first control example described above, the value of the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the continuation performance (pre-battle performance, battle reach). The difference is that the display control device 114 is configured to set the display control device 114. In this way, by setting the value of the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen by the display control device 114, the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced. As described above, the main continuation value that is set based on the special symbol lottery result or the fluctuation scenario is set by the audio lamp control device 113, and the command to indicate the set main continuation value is displayed and controlled. Since it is configured to output to the device 114, more information than necessary is sent to the display control device 114 (for example, information to show the lottery results of special symbols, information to show the update status of the fluctuation scenario, etc.). There is no need to output commands to show information. Therefore, the load on the processing executed by the audio lamp control device 113 (processing for setting a continuation value, processing for setting a command to be output to the display control device 114) can be reduced.

First, the contents of command determination processing 4 will be explained with reference to FIG. 209. FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 4. In this command determination process 4, in contrast to the command determination process of the first control example described above (see FIG. 158), there is a process to be executed when there is a continuation value related command, and a process to determine whether there is a final mode command for display. The difference is that a process to determine the difference is added.

When command determination process 4 is executed, the same processes from S6401 to S6414 as the command determination process of the first control example described above (see FIG. 158) are executed, and in the process of S6414, it is determined that there is a continuation value related command. If so (S6414: Yes), continuation value related command processing 4 is executed (S6451), and the process moves to S6401. Continuation value related command processing 4 executed in the process of S6451 will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 210.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6414 that there is no continuous value related command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether there is a final mode command for display (S6452), and it is determined that there is a final mode command for display. If so (S6452: Yes), the final mode command process for display is executed (S6453), and then the process moves to S6401.

The final display mode command process executed in the process of S6453 will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 211. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6452 that there is no final mode command for display (S6452: No), after executing the process of S6420, which is the same as the command determination process of the first control example described above (see FIG. 158), The process moves to processing 6401 in S3709.

Next, with reference to FIG. 210, the contents of the continuation value related command process 4 (S6451) executed in the above-mentioned command determination process 4 (see FIG. 209) will be explained. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the contents of continuation value related command processing 4. This continuous value related command process 4 includes processing for setting and displaying a continuous value (HP value) to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 while the continuous performance is being executed, and a process for displaying the continuous performance. Processing for displaying the effects executed during the process is executed.

When the continuation value related command processing 4 is executed, first, it is determined whether the command received this time includes a specific continuation value command for display (S7351). This display specific continuation value command is used as the main continuation value to indicate a specific value (“333 ”, “777”) is selected. A detailed explanation will be given later, but in this process, if it is determined that there is a specific continuous value command for display, the main continuous value output from the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to be displayed as is on the display screen. are doing. As a result, when a specific value ("333", "777") to indicate winning a jackpot is selected as the main continuation value, the display control device 114 sets the sub-continuation value, and the main continuation value To prevent a situation in which a continuation value that is the sum of a continuation value and a sub continuation value is displayed on a display screen, and a specific value ("333", "777") for indicating winning a jackpot cannot be notified to a player. I can do it.

In the process of S7351, if it is determined that there is no specific continuous value command for display (S7351: No), that is, if a continuous value command for display is received, the continuous value (main continuous value) corresponding to the command received this time is ) is calculated (S7352), and it is determined whether the calculated continuation value (main continuation value) is 0 (S7353). In the process of S7353, if it is determined that the continuation value (main continuation value) is not 0 (it is 100 or more), the sub-continuation value is selected based on the first continuation value sub-selection table 234a3, and the process proceeds to S7356. Transition. Note that each sub-continuation value specified in the first continuation value sub-selection table 234a3 is the same as the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 (see FIG. 117(b)) of the first control example described above. , the explanation thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, in the process of S7353, if it is determined that the continuation value (main continuation value) is 0 (S7353: Yes), the secondary continuation value is selected based on the second continuation value sub-selection table 234a4, and the process of S7356 Move to. Note that each sub-continuation value specified in the second continuation value sub-selection table 234a4 is the same as the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2 (see FIG. 117(c)) of the first control example described above. , the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Then, in the process of S7356, the continuation value (main continuation value) corresponding to the received command and the sub continuation value selected in the process of S7354 or S7355 are added up (S7356). As described above, when the continuation value (main continuation value) corresponding to the received command is 0, the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is greater than 0. Since it is configured to use the second continuation value sub-selection table 234a4 in which sub-continuation values that cannot be selected as sub-continuation values (that is, a positive value cannot be selected as a sub-continuation value), the audio lamp control device Regarding the content indicated by the continuation value (main continuation value) selected in step 113 (content indicating that the opponent's continuation value (HP value) will be set to "0" and you will win the guaranteed strange jackpot in this battle performance) , it is possible to suppress a situation in which the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 becomes inconsistent (a value other than "0" is displayed).

After completing the process in S7356, the total value stored in the total value storage area 233k is read out (S7357), and the total value calculated in the process in S7356 and the total value read in the process in S7357 are The difference is calculated (S7358). Then, the attack pattern display data table corresponding to the calculated difference is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7359), the total value calculated this time is stored in the total value storage area 233k (S7360), and the processing of S7365 is performed. Move to.

On the other hand, in the process of S7351, if it is determined that there is a specific continuation value command for display (S7351: Yes), then the total value is read from the total value storage area 233k (S7361), and the continuation calculated in the process of S7352 is read out from the total value storage area 233k. The difference between the value and the total value read in the process of S7361 is calculated (S7362), and an attack pattern display data table corresponding to the calculated difference is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7359). The continuation value is stored in the total value storage area 233k (S7360), and the process moves to S7365.

After completing the process of S7360 or S7364 described above, the continuation value calculated in the process of S7352 is stored in the continuation value storage area 233ca (S7365), and then the continuation value related of the first control example described above is stored. The command processing (see FIG. 164) and the same processing in S7306 to S7309 are executed, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 211, the contents of the final mode command process (S6453) executed in the above-described command determination process 4 (see FIG. 209) will be explained. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the contents of the final mode command processing. In this final mode command processing, there is a process of setting the battle reach production mode (display mode of the continuous value (HP value)) to show the result of the continuous production (battle production), and a process to display the set production mode on the display screen. Processing for displaying is executed.

When the final aspect command processing (S6453) is executed, first, a final aspect data table corresponding to the received command is determined (S8301). The received command indicates the final mode selected based on the final mode selection table 222h (see FIG. 118(a)) in the continuous effect setting process (see S3806 in FIG. 149) executed in the audio lamp control device 113. The final mode data table corresponding to the information is read out from the character ROM 234 and determined.

Next, the total value stored in the total value storage area 233k, that is, the continuous value (HP value) currently displayed on the display screen is read out (S8302), and the initial value of the final mode data table determined in the process of S8301 is read out. Set as value data (S8303). In this way, data regarding the continuation value (HP value) that can be set to various values is additionally set for the performance data corresponding to the battle reach performance mode (attack pattern mode) of a predetermined number of patterns. By configuring this to be possible, it is possible to reduce the amount of data related to the presentation mode of battle reach.

After completing the process of S8303, the final result information included in the received command is then read (process 8304 of S3709), and it is determined whether the read final result is information indicating a victory (S8305). Here, as final result information included in the received command, information indicating the final mode selected based on the final mode selection table 222h (see FIG. 118(a)) is used to determine the final result. Alternatively, the display final mode command process may be executed by including exclusive information for indicating the final result of the battle.

In the process of S8305, if it is determined that the final result is not a victory (defeat or a draw) (S8305: No), the continuation value stored in the continuation value storage area 233ca and the total value storage area are stored. Calculate the difference with the total value that has been set (S8306), and change the subtracted value of the first own attack production data among the production data of the determined final mode data table to the subtracted value obtained by adding the calculated difference. (S8307), and the process moves to S8308.

Here, the processing contents of S8306 and S8307 mentioned above will be explained. In this third control example, the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is the main continuation value set based on the special symbol lottery result by the audio lamp control device 113. , and the sub-continuation value set for presentation in the display control device 114. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the variation of the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen while reducing the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113, and it is possible to enhance the presentation effect. However, in a battle reach where the results of a continuous performance (battle performance) are displayed, a situation may occur in which the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen becomes extremely close to "0".

In such a case, for example, even if the voice lamp control device 113 sets a main continuation value that does not cause the opponent's continuation value (HP value) to become "0" based on the lottery result of the special symbol, the display control device 114 There was a risk that the opponent's continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen would become "0" due to the secondary continuation value for effect set in . In other words, while the displayed continuous value (HP value) is large, there is an error between the main continuous value set and managed by the audio lamp control device 113 and the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen. Even if there were, there would be no negative impact on the performance, and in fact it would have a positive effect of increasing the variation of the performance. However, as the displayed continuation value (HP value) becomes smaller, the sound lamp control device An error between the main continuation value set and managed in 113 and the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen causes inconsistency in the performance results, and a performance that gives players a sense of distrust is executed. There was a problem that there was a risk that this could happen.

Therefore, in this third control example, when setting the performance mode of the final mode (battle reach) of the continuous performance (battle performance), the final result of the current continuous performance (battle performance) is determined, and the determination result is In cases other than victory, that is, when the opponent's continuation value (HP value) does not become 0, the difference between the main continuation value and the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen is calculated by the attack during battle reach. I'm trying to resolve this through directing.

This suppresses the above-mentioned problem that occurs when the result of a continuous effect (battle effect) is displayed with an error between the main continuous value and the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen. I can do it. In addition, in this third control example, in the first own attack pattern that is set as the final mode (battle reach) of the continuous performance (battle performance), the main continuous value and the continuous value (HP Since the configuration is configured to eliminate the error with the attack pattern (value), it is possible to standardize the production mode of the remaining own attack patterns (for example, the second and third attacks).

Also, if the final mode (battle reach) selected this time is set to a mode in which your own attack pattern is 0 times, the opponent's continuation value will not decrease during battle reach. Because it is a mode, even if you do not eliminate the error between the main continuous value and the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen, the error between the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen will be created. In order to prevent the problem of causing inconsistency in the results, the process of changing the attack effect data is not executed in the process of S8307.

On the other hand, in the process of S8305, if it is determined that the final result is a win (S8305: Yes), the process of S8306 and S8307 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S8308.

In the process of S8038, the final mode data table determined in the process of S8301 is read from the countdown effect table storage area (not shown) of the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8308). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S8308 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8309).

Then, based on the attack pattern display data table included in the final mode data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S8309, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S8310), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S8311). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S8312), the final mode command processing is ended, and this processing is ended.

<About another control example of the third control example>
Next, another control example of the third control example described above will be explained with reference to FIGS. 212 to 214. In the third control example described above, by setting a variation scenario based on the jackpot type and selecting a variation pattern based on the set variation scenario, the pre-battle production and , Battle Reach, and was configured to be able to be executed effectively. In addition, in order to prevent players from quickly getting bored with the continuous performance that is executed according to predetermined fluctuation scenarios, multiple fluctuation scenarios are prepared, and they differ depending on the type of jackpot. It was configured to select a variable scenario.

The third control example configured in this way has a configuration that can enhance the production effect of continuous production, but it is set in accordance with the storage capacity for storing a plurality of variation scenarios and the plurality of variation scenarios. There was a problem in that the storage capacity for storing a plurality of jackpot types increased. In particular, the main controller 110 needs to perform various processing related to games and store data within a limited storage capacity. There is a risk that this will put pressure on the player, and as a result, the interest in the game will be reduced.

On the other hand, in another control example of the third control example, even if the number of fluctuation scenarios is reduced, in order to be able to provide a continuous performance with a rich variety, the jackpot type is changed as in the third control example described above. In addition to the fluctuation scenarios set corresponding to It was configured so that pattern selection was performed.

With this configuration, even if the first variation scenario is set, the content of the continuous performance to be executed can be changed depending on the timing when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a specific lottery result. can. Further, since the performance mode during the continuous performance is set by a combination of a plurality of variable scenarios, even if the number of stored variable scenarios is reduced, it is possible to execute a continuous performance with a rich variety.

<About the electrical configuration in another control example of the third control example>
Here, the electrical configuration in this separate control example will be explained with reference to FIGS. 212 to 214. This control example differs from the third control example described above in that the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 are partially changed, and the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 are partially changed. are doing. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 212(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in another control example of the third control example. As shown in FIG. 212(a), in this control example, a small winning type selection table 202da is added and the contents of the first winning random number table 202a are partially changed compared to the third control example described above. The difference is that the contents of the variation scenario setting table 202ca have been partially changed. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The first winning random number table 202a in this separate control example has a range in which a portion of the special symbol lottery result that is a loss is determined to be a "small win." The first winning random number table 202a in this book-specific control example will be explained with reference to FIG. 213(a). FIG. 213(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents specified in the first winning random number table 202a in the main control example.

As shown in FIG. 213(a), in the third control example described above, the range of the first winning random number counter value C1 (“5 to A "small win" is defined for the range "295 to 299", which is a part of "299"). If a "small win" is won as a result of the lottery of special symbols, the player is configured to receive a benefit that is advantageous to the player, although it is smaller than the above-mentioned jackpot.

Specifically, control is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for a short period of time so that a ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a. As mentioned above, the "small win" can be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is not a jackpot, so if the "small win" is won, the game set in the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to eliminate the state from being set.

Next, the contents of the small winning type selection table 202da will be explained with reference to FIG. 213(b). FIG. 213(b) shows the contents of the small winning type selection table 202da. As shown in FIG. 213(b), in another control example of the third control example, a plurality of small winning types are set. Specifically, the obtained value of the small winning type counter value C5 that can obtain any value among the 100 counter values in total from "0" to "99" is in the range of "0 to 49". , "Small win A" are defined in association with each other, and "Small win B" is defined in association with the range of "50 to 99".

Then, if you win "Small win A", a fluctuation scenario is additionally set to execute a specific fluctuation pattern, and if you win "Small win B", a fluctuation scenario is set to execute a specific fluctuation pattern. The configuration is configured so that no additional fluctuation scenarios are set.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 214(a) and 214(b), the contents of the variation scenario setting table 202ca in the main control example will be described. FIG. 214(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the fluctuation scenario A1 stored in the fluctuation scenario setting table 202ca, and FIG. 214(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the fluctuation scenario setting table 202ca. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents stipulated in the stored post-small hit variation scenario.

In the variation scenario setting table 202ca in this separate control example, only the two variation scenarios mentioned above are stored, and when a probability variable jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, variation scenario A1 is set after the jackpot ends. , is configured to be stored in the variable scenario storage area 203ca. Further, when a small hit is won in the special symbol 2 lottery executed during the probability variable state, a post-small win variation scenario is set and stored in the variation scenario storage area 203ca. After the small hit ends, the special symbol variation pattern is selected based on the content specified in the post-small win variation scenario for the number of special symbol variations specified in the post-small win variation scenario. There is.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in this separate control example as well, the variation number subtraction process 4 (see FIG. 204) is executed as in the third control example described above, and each time a special symbol variation is executed ( In the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 203), the variation scenario set in the variation scenario storage area 203ca is configured to be updated every time it is determined that the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed. .

The fluctuation scenario storage area 203ca is configured to be able to store both the fluctuation scenario A1 and the post-small-win fluctuation scenario, and if a small win is won during the probability fluctuation state, both fluctuation scenarios are subjected to the fluctuation number subtraction process 4. (See FIG. 204). Therefore, the fluctuation scenario A1 can be updated regardless of the number of small winnings during the variable probability state, and table B can be set when the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the jackpot reaches 200. .

As shown in FIG. 214(a), in the fluctuation scenario A1, the above-mentioned table A (special (probable variable) fluctuation pattern table 202dc4) is defined in the range of "1 to 4", and the number of fluctuations is in the range "1 to 4". Table C (first deviation (probable variable) variation pattern table 202dc2) is defined for the range of "5 to 13", and table D (second deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc3) is defined for the number of variations to be "14". is defined.

Thereafter, until the number of fluctuations reaches "195", table C (first deviation (probable variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in association with nine fluctuations, and table D (second A deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc3) is defined in association with each other. In other words, during the period when the number of variations of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot is "5 to 195", after executing the special symbol variation in which the variation pattern is selected using table C 9 times, the variation pattern is selected using table D. A scenario in which the selected special symbol variation is executed is repeatedly executed.

Then, table C (first deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in the range of the number of variations from "195 to 198", and table D (second deviation (probable variation) variation) is defined in the range of variation number "199". A pattern table 202dc3) is defined. Similarly to the third control example described above, table B is defined in association with the range in which the number of fluctuations is "200~".

As shown in FIG. 214(b), the post-small win fluctuation scenario is defined by associating the above-mentioned table A (special (probable variable) fluctuation pattern table 202dc4) with the number of fluctuations in the range of "1 to 9", Table D (second deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc3) is defined for the number of variations in the range of "5 to 13", and table D (second deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc3) is defined for the variation number of "10". 202dc3) is defined. The variation scenario is configured to end when the number of variations exceeds 10 times. In addition, when the fluctuation scenario after the small hit ends, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is continuously selected in accordance with the contents stipulated in the fluctuation scenario A1 whose fluctuation scenario is updated at the same time.

As explained above, in another control example of the third control example, when a small hit is won as a lottery result of a special symbol, different fluctuation scenarios are executed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 fluctuations of the special symbol). Since it is configured to be set, it is possible to change the variation pattern table used when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol depending on the timing of winning the small hit. Therefore, it is possible to provide various patterns of continuous effects without having to prepare a plurality of variation scenarios in advance as in the third control example described above.

In addition, at the end of the variation scenario used when winning a small hit, a variation pattern table (table D) in which a battle reach is executed (easily performed) is defined, so if you win a small win, It is possible to prevent a situation where Battle Reach is not executed for a long period of time from occurring.

In addition, in this separate control example, a configuration having one fluctuation scenario (variation scenario A1) was used as the fluctuation scenario set after the end of the probability variable jackpot, but as in the third control example described above, there are multiple fluctuation scenarios. A configuration may also be used. With this configuration, it is possible to provide continuous performances of more patterns. In addition, in this separate control example, when a small win is won, the small win type (small win A) that sets a different fluctuation scenario and the small win type (small win B) that does not set a different fluctuation scenario are the same. However, the distribution ratio for each small win type can be set appropriately, and the probability of winning a small win, the battle reach in variable scenario A1. The variable pattern table (table D) at which the variable pattern table (table D) is executed (easily executed) may be set based on the specified interval and the content of the benefit (prize ball) provided when winning a small hit.

In addition, in this separate control example, a configuration is used in which the same variable winning device (variable winning device 65) is opened when winning a special symbol jackpot and when winning a small winning. The machine 10 may be provided with a second variable winning device that is opened only when a small win is won. In this case, it is better to configure the system so that the fact that the second variable prize winning device has been released is more difficult to grasp than the fact that the variable prize winning device 65 has been released. Since this can be made difficult for the player to understand, continuous performances of various patterns can be provided to the player without feeling strange. In addition, in this case, the display of the third symbol to indicate that the player has won a small win may be displayed in a display manner that is difficult for the player to grasp, such as displaying the third symbol in a reduced size at the timing when the third symbol is stopped, or It is preferable that the main display area Dm of the three-symbol display device 81 display an exciting effect that is more conspicuous than the third symbol.

In this separate control example, the first winning random number table 202a is configured so that only the special symbol 2 wins the small hit, but it may be configured so that the special symbol 1 also wins the small win. In this case, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 may have different probabilities of winning a small hit.

In another control example of the third control example explained above, as a condition for setting a fluctuation scenario (post-small hit fluctuation scenario) different from a predetermined fluctuation scenario (fluctuation scenario A1) based on the special symbol lottery result. , shows a case where the special symbol wins a small hit, but it may be configured to set a different fluctuation scenario when other conditions are met. For example, in the second control example described above. It may be configured such that a different variation scenario is set when the winning lottery is used.

<About another control example of the suggestion effect explained in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 215 and 216, another control example of the suggestion effect (see FIG. 100) described in the first control example described above will be described. In the first control example described above, the execution timing and end timing of the suggestion effect are set separately, and the period during which the suggestion effect is executed is configured to be adjustable. Specifically, the end timing of the suggestive performance (the end timing of the countdown performance, which is the second half part) is set based on the execution timing of the specific performance that is the target of the suggestive performance, and the start timing of the suggestive performance (the end timing of the countdown performance, which is the first part) The system is configured so that the start timing of the performance can be set from a plurality of points, and the suggestive performance is executed without setting the execution period in advance, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in setting the suggestive performance. In the suggestion performance of the first control example described above, the timing at which a specific performance that is the target of the suggestion performance is executed is set from a plurality of timings, and the end timing of the suggestion performance (countdown performance) is determined based on the execution timing of the suggestion performance. By setting the end timing (end timing) and the execution period of the suggestive effects, it was possible to execute various combinations of suggestive effects.

On the other hand, in this separate control example, the suggestion effect is executed without setting the end timing of the suggestion effect, and the predetermined condition (the operation content on the frame button 22) that is satisfied during the period in which the suggestion effect is being executed Based on this, a specific performance to be a target of the suggestive performance is determined, and a countdown performance is executed toward the determined specific performance. With this configuration, the performance mode of the suggestion performance can be varied depending on the operation content of the frame button 22 by the player during the execution of the suggestion performance, so that the player can be motivated to participate in the game. I can do it.

First, with reference to FIG. 215, the flow of suggestion production in the main control example will be explained. FIG. 215 is a timing chart showing the flow of the production when the production mode of the suggestion production is varied depending on the operation content of the frame button 22 during execution of the suggestion production. Note that the same elements as in the timing chart (see FIG. 100) showing the flow of the suggestion effect in the first control example described above are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 215, when the special symbol that can perform the suggestion effect starts to fluctuate, the first half of the suggestion effect, the foreshadowing display (see Figure 98(a)), is executed for 13 seconds 10 seconds after the start of the variation. be done. A button operation valid period is set for the latter 8 seconds of the display period in which this precursor is displayed, and the button operation valid period is set to effectively determine whether the frame button 22 is pressed. Depending on the content of the operation, the presentation mode (display mode, display period) of the countdown presentation, which is the second half of the suggestion presentation, is determined.

Specifically, during the valid button operation period, a comment "Press the button at the right time" is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the player operates the frame button 22 in response to the comment. The timing is determined by an operation timing determining means. The operation timing determining means is configured to be able to determine the timing of the player's operation on the frame button 22 in multiple stages, and determines whether the frame button 22 is activated at the best timing (for example, within a range of 0.2 seconds before or after the specified timing). (hereinafter referred to as button operation B), and a range that is off from the specified timing than button operation B (for example, within a range of 1 second before or after the specified timing, excluding the range of button operation B). (hereinafter referred to as button operation A), the frame button 22 is operated at other timings, or the frame button 22 is not operated (hereinafter referred to as "no button operation"). It is possible to at least distinguish between cases (referred to as

Here, if the operation timing determination means determines that the button operation is A, that is, the button operation was performed during the valid button operation period, but the operation timing was slightly different, then the operation is executed during the current variable performance. Among the specific effects to be performed, a countdown effect is set for specific effect b (cut-in display executed 26 seconds after the start of variation). Specifically, a countdown display for 3 seconds is executed as a countdown effect (the values displayed in the second display area of the display screen in FIG. 98(b) are "3", "2", "1", " A countdown effect is performed in the order of "0"). Then, at the timing when the numerical value displayed in the countdown effect reaches "0", a cut-in display that is specific effect b is displayed.

Next, when the operation timing determination means determines that the button operation is B, that is, when the button operation is performed at a good timing during the valid button operation period, the A countdown effect is set for effect a (PUSH display executed 30 seconds after the start of variation (see FIG. 99)). Specifically, a 7-second countdown display is performed as a countdown effect. Then, at the timing when the numerical value displayed in the countdown effect reaches "0", a PUSH display, which is the specific effect a, is displayed.

In addition, if the operation timing determining means determines that the button has not been pressed, that is, if the button is not pressed during the valid button operation period, or if the button is pressed at a greatly different timing, a countdown effect is performed. Without doing so, the suggestion performance ends at the timing when the omen performance ends (false suggestion performance).

As explained above, in this separate control example, similarly to the first control example described above, the execution timing and end timing of the suggestion effect are set at different timings (conditions). , determines a specific performance that is the target of the currently running suggestive performance based on a predetermined condition (result of determination of the operation content of the frame button 22) that is satisfied during the execution period of the precursory performance, which is the first half, and performs the second half of the suggestive performance. The display mode (display mode, display period) of the countdown effect is set. Thereby, the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, in this separate control example, the later the specific effects (specific effects a, specific effects b) that are executed at multiple timings are executed, the higher the expectation that the current special symbol variation will win the jackpot. It is configured to be high. Therefore, if the button is operated in a timely manner during the valid button operation period, the countdown performance will be executed for a specific performance with a high expectation of a jackpot, so that the player can feel at ease.

In other words, although FIG. 215 shows an example of a variation pattern in which specific performance a and specific performance b are executed, among the plurality of variation patterns set in this pachinko machine 10, only specific performance b is executed. Since there is also a variation pattern in which the player is out of position, if button operation A is performed in the variation pattern shown in FIG. , it is not possible to notify in advance whether or not the current variation pattern is a variation pattern in which specific performance a and specific performance b are executed together, and the performance proceeds with the player feeling uneasy. Become.

However, if the frame button 22 is operated at the right time during the valid button operation period, a countdown effect targeting the specific effect a will be executed, so the player can play the game with peace of mind without feeling anxious. can be set. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to participate in the game by operating the frame button 22 with enthusiasm.

In addition, in this separate control example, in a variation pattern in which specific production a and specific production b are executed as one variation pattern, the specific production that is the target of the suggestion production is set to a predetermined condition (which is satisfied after the suggestion production is executed). Although the configuration is configured such that the determination is made based on the operation content of the frame button 22), it may be configured such that specific renderings that are not the target of the suggestive rendering are not displayed. In addition, in a variation pattern in which only specific performance a is executed as one variation pattern, the timing at which specific performance a, which is the target of the suggestion performance, is executed is determined based on a predetermined condition that is satisfied after the suggestion performance is executed. It may be configured to do so. With this configuration, when the frame button 22 cannot be operated in a timely manner, it is difficult to predict the content of the suggestion effect that will be executed if the frame button 22 is operated in a timely manner, so that the player is motivated. The frame button 22 can be operated by the user.

In the other control example explained above, as the operation content of the frame button 22 after the suggestion effect has started, an operation effect is executed to cause the frame button 22 to be operated in a timely manner during the foreshadowing effect, which is the first half of the suggestion effect. The system is configured to determine a specific performance to be the target of the suggestive performance based on the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated during the operation performance, and to set a performance mode of the countdown performance corresponding to the determined specific performance. ing.

In this case, as an operation effect, the words "Press the button at the right time" are displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device as a display mode indicating the content of the operation effect, and an index is displayed to indicate the designated timing of the operation effect. It is preferable to display a moving display mode that moves with the passage of time, and to show the player that the timing when the moving display mode overlaps with the index display mode is the best timing. Thereby, the content of the operation performance can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Furthermore, as a result of the operation of the frame button 22 in response to the operation performance, the movement display mode is stopped and displayed at the timing when the frame button 22 is actually operated, and the error with the indicator display mode is displayed so that the player can visually recognize it. It is preferable to display the words "excellent" and "good" to notify whether the error range is within the allowable range (whether it corresponds to button operation A or button operation B). Thereby, the result of the operation performance can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

According to the example described above, in order to vary the performance mode of the suggestive performance based on the operation content of the frame button 22, the configuration determines the error between the operation timing of the frame button 22 and the designated timing specified in advance. However, other configurations may be used as long as the presentation mode of the suggestion presentation can be varied based on predetermined specified conditions and the actual operation contents. The frame button 22 may be configured to determine the number of times the frame button 22 has been operated (pressed) and change the presentation mode of the suggestion effect based on the determination result. It may be configured such that an operating means other than 22 is provided, and it is determined whether or not a specific operating means among the plurality of operating means is operated, and the performance form of the suggestion performance is varied based on the result of the determination.

In another control example shown in FIG. 215, the presentation mode of the suggestion effect (the presentation mode of the countdown presentation, which is the latter part of the suggestion presentation) is configured to be set based on the operation content of the frame button 22 during the valid button operation period. However, in order to achieve the same effect, the presentation mode of the suggestion presentation may be configured to be set based on the timing at which the pressing operation is performed during the valid button operation period. Here, a detailed explanation will be given with reference to FIG. 216.

FIG. 216(a) is a timing chart showing the flow of the performance when the performance mode of the suggestion performance is varied depending on the operation timing (press timing) of the frame button 22 during the execution of the suggestion performance. Note that the same elements as in the timing chart (see FIG. 100 or FIG. 215) showing the flow of suggestion effects in the first control example and the other control example described above are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 216, in the main control example, the button operation valid period (8 seconds) set during the precursor performance period, which is the first half of the suggestion performance, is determined to be the first half (2 seconds) or the second half (6 seconds). separated as possible. Here, the presentation mode of the suggestion presentation that is set based on the operation timing (pressing timing) of the frame button 22 during the valid button operation period will be explained with reference to FIGS. 216(b) to 216(d).

FIG. 216(b) is a timing chart showing the presentation mode of the suggestion presentation when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) within the first half (2 seconds) of the valid button operation period, and FIG. 216(c) 216(d) is a timing chart showing the presentation mode of the suggestion presentation when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) within the latter half (6 seconds) of the button operation valid period, and FIG. It is a timing chart showing a production mode of suggestion production when the frame button 22 is not operated (pressed) during the valid operation period.

First, as shown in FIG. 216(b), if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (pressed) within the first half (2 seconds) of the valid button operation period, the target of the suggestive effect is set to a specific effect a. Then, set the precursor period (8 seconds) to 1 second after the first half (2 seconds) of the button operation valid period has passed, and after the second half (6 seconds) of the button operation valid period starts. It is set as the execution period (12 seconds) of the countdown effect from 1 second to the timing when the specific effect a is started.

In this way, when the frame button 22 is operated during the first half (2 seconds) of the switching timing of the first half (2 seconds) and the second half (6 seconds) stipulated in the button operation valid period (8 seconds). By configuring the timing of switching the presentation mode of the suggestion presentation (switching from the omen presentation to the countdown presentation) to be delayed by 1 second, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated just before the end of the first half (2 seconds), Even if there is, the process of smoothly switching the performance can be executed using the period (1 second) until the performance is switched.

In this case, a button operation valid period changing process is executed to invalidate the operation of the frame button 22 for the second half (6 seconds) of the preset button operation valid period (8 seconds). Thereby, even if the countdown effect is executed during the period for which the button operation valid period is set in advance, the operation on the frame button 22 during the countdown effect can be invalidated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 216(c), if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (pressed) within the second half (6 seconds) of the valid button operation period, the target of the suggestive effect is set to a specific effect. b, and is set as the execution period (3 seconds) of the countdown effect from the timing when the button operation valid period ends to the timing when specific effect b starts. If there is no operation on the frame button 22 during the valid button operation period, as shown in FIG. A premonitory performance (13 seconds) is executed, and then the suggestion performance is ended without performing a countdown performance (false suggestion performance).

As described above with reference to FIG. 216, even if the configuration is such that the specific effect that is the target of the suggestive effect is set based on the timing of the operation of the frame button 22 during the valid button operation period, the above-mentioned The same effect as in FIG. 215 can be achieved.

In the example described with reference to FIG. 216, the button operation valid period (8 seconds) is divided into two periods (first half, second half), and a different time period (first half (first half)) is divided into two periods (first half, second half). 2 seconds) and the second half (6 seconds)), but it is sufficient if the configuration is such that the timing of the operation on the frame button 22 during the valid button operation period can be identified; for example, when the button operation is valid. The period may be divided into two or more periods (for example, divided into three), or the same time may be set for the divided periods. In addition, the button operation valid period (8 seconds) is divided into two periods (for example, period A (1 second) and period B (1 second)), and period A and period B are configured to be set alternately. You may do so. As a result, a different suggestion effect is executed even if the timing of the button operation on the frame button 22 is slightly shifted, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

As mentioned above, in the other control example of the suggestion effect explained in the first control example explained using FIGS. 215 and 216, the player's operation mode ( However, other conditions may also be set. For example, winnings (first ball entrance 64, second ball entrance) that occur during the execution of the suggestion effect are set. Even if the timing and content of occurrence of information such as the ball entering the opening 140, the ball entering the general prize opening 63, or the ball entering (passing) the through gate 67 are set as predetermined conditions. good. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player stops shooting the ball while the special symbols are changing.

In addition, in another control example of the suggestion effect explained in the first control example explained using FIGS. 215 and 216, an example is shown in which the suggestion effect is completed during one special symbol change, but for example, As shown in FIG. 101 of the first control example described above, it may be configured to execute the suggestion effect across a plurality of special symbol variations.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in another control example of the suggestive effect explained in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 217 to 219, the control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 in the main control example will be described. This separate control example differs from the first control example described above in that a countdown effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 217) is provided instead of the countdown effect setting process (see FIG. 152), and frame button input monitoring and presentation. The difference is that processing 5 (see FIG. 218) is provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the countdown effect setting process 5 will be explained with reference to FIG. 217. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing the contents of the countdown effect setting process 5. When the countdown effect setting process 5 is executed, first, it is determined whether the current fluctuation pattern is a hit (S4303), and if it is determined that it is a hit (S4303: Yes), it is determined 26 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. Effect b (cut-in) is set and specific effect a (PUSH) is set after 30 seconds (S4371), and the process moves to S4373.

On the other hand, in the process of S4303, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is not a hit (S4303: No), a specific effect b (cut-in) is set 26 seconds after the start of the variation (S4372), and the process proceeds to S4373. Transition.

In the process of S4373, a button operation valid period is set to a period of 15 seconds to 23 seconds from the start of the fluctuation (S4373), a precursor effect corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern is set (S4374), and a display precursor effect command is set. (S4375), and this process ends.

Next, the contents of frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 5 will be explained with reference to FIG. 218. FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 5. When frame button input monitoring/production processing 5 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected (S5051), and if it is determined that it has not been detected (S5051: No), this process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that it has been detected (S5051: Yes), it is determined whether the current time is within the valid period of the first omen effect (S5081), and if it is determined that it is during the valid period of the first omen effect, then (S5081: Yes), execute the process related to the frame button operation during the first omen effect (S5082 to S5088), and if it is determined that the first omen effect is not in the valid period (S5081: No), the second omen effect is executed. It is determined whether the validity period of the harbinger production is in progress (S5089), and if it is determined that the validity period of the second harbinger production is in progress (S5089: Yes), processing related to frame button operation during the second harbinger production is performed. A second precursor effect setting process is executed (S5090). On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not within the valid period of the second omen performance (S5089: No), this process is immediately ended.

Next, a description will be given of the processing related to the frame button operation (S5082 to S5088) during the first omen effect. First, the error between the timing when the frame button 22 is operated and the designated timing set for the omen effect is calculated (S5082), and it is determined whether the error is within 0.1 seconds (S5083). If the error is within 0.1 seconds (S5083: Yes), the specific effect a is set as the effect target (S5084), and the period from 23 seconds to 30 seconds from the start of the fluctuation is set as the countdown effect period (S5085). ), a display countdown effect command corresponding to the set mode is set (S5077), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the error is not within 0.1 seconds (S5083: No), then it is determined whether the error is within 0.5 seconds (S5086), and if it is within 0.5 seconds. If it is determined (S5086: Yes), the specific effect b is set as the effect mode (S5087), the period from 23 seconds to 26 seconds from the start of the fluctuation is set as the countdown effect period (S5088), and the process of S5077 described above is performed. , and end this process. In the process of S5086, if it is determined that the time is not within 0.5 seconds (S5086: No), the process directly proceeds to the process of S5077 described above, and this process ends.

Next, the second precursor performance setting process executed in the frame button input monitoring/performance process 5 (see FIG. 218) will be described with reference to FIG. 219. FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second omen effect setting process. When the second omen effect setting process is executed, first, it is determined whether the current time is the first half period, that is, whether the period in which the frame button 22 was operated is the first half period (S5091). In the process of S5091, if it is determined that it is the first half period (S5091: Yes), the specific effect a is set as the effect target (S5092), the precursor effect period is set to 8 seconds (S5093), and 18 seconds are set from the start of the fluctuation. A period from seconds to 30 seconds is set as a countdown effect period (S5094), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the first half period (S5091: No), then it is determined whether the current period is the second half period, that is, whether the period in which the frame button 22 was operated is the second half period (S5095). If it is determined that it is the second half period (S5095: yes), the specific performance b is set as the performance target (S5096), the precursor performance period is set to 13 seconds (S5097), and 23 seconds to 26 seconds from the start of the fluctuation. The period up to this point is set as a countdown performance period (S5098), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5095 that it is not the second half period (S5095: No), the foreshadow effect period is set to 13 seconds (S5099), and this process ends.

<Another example of the control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the extended display explained in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 220, another example of the extended display process set after the end of the jackpot (processing to extend and display the ending display of the jackpot even during the special symbol fluctuation period after the end of the jackpot) will be explained. In the first control example described above, when the number of changes in the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (4 times) after the extension display is executed, or when a predetermined period (4 seconds) has elapsed since the extension display was executed. A configuration is used in which it is determined that the end condition for the extended display has been met when the extension display is satisfied, and if the end condition based on the elapsed period is satisfied before the end condition based on the number of changes of the special symbol, the third symbol is A demonstration display was performed on the display device 81, and the demonstration display was continued until a special symbol variation for which a short-term variation time (0.5 seconds) was set ended.

On the other hand, in this separate example, the end condition based on the elapsed period is satisfied before the end condition based on the number of changes in the special symbol, and after the extended display ends, the short-term (0.5 second) change When a special symbol variation for which a time is set is executed, the variation performance is configured to be set based on the remaining number of variations of the special symbol variation for which a short period of time (0.5 seconds) is set. There is.

Specifically, a specific period performance is set in which a fluctuation performance for a period longer than the actual special symbol fluctuation period (0.5 seconds) is set, and for example, the remaining number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 2 times (this fluctuation ), a 2-second variation effect is set, and if the number of remaining variations of the special symbol is 3 (including this variation), a 3-second variation effect is set, and the remaining variation of the special symbol If the number of times is 4 (including the current variation), a 4-second variation effect is set.

If the next special symbol variation is executed while a variation production that is a specific period production is being executed, the remaining period of the variation production that has already been executed is the production period of the variation production that is newly executed. It is set so that the variation effect is rewritten so that.

By configuring this way, an extended display is executed after the jackpot ends, and if the special symbol fluctuations executed during a predetermined period (4 special symbol fluctuations or 4 seconds) after the jackpot wins a jackpot. However, in order to continue the performance during the jackpot without any discomfort, if a short period of time (0.5 seconds) is set for the special symbol fluctuation for a predetermined number of times after the jackpot ends, Even if the special symbol variations are not executed a predetermined number of times (4 times) within a predetermined period (4 seconds), a variation performance corresponding to the special symbol variations can be executed without giving a player a sense of discomfort.

Here, regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 in this other example, differences from the first control example described above will be explained with reference to FIG. 220. This other example differs from the first control example described above in that the content of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) is partially changed, and the other processes are the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and their explanations will be omitted.

FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 6 in this other example. When the variable display setting process 6 is executed, first, the same processes of S3801 to S3804 as the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) of the first control example described above are executed. If it is determined in the process of S3803 that the display extension flag 223i is not on (off) (S3803: No), then it is determined whether the value of the variation counter 223j is 1 or more (S3871). That is, it is determined whether a predetermined period (4 seconds) has elapsed from when the extended display is executed after the end of the jackpot until the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times (4 times).

In the process of S3871, if it is determined that the value of the variation counter 223j is not 1 or more (0), the process of S3811 to S3817, which is the same as the variation display setting process of the first control example (see FIG. 147), is performed. Execute the process and end this process. On the other hand, in the process of S3871, if it is determined that the value of the variation number counter 223j is 1 or more (S3871: Yes), then a specific period effect corresponding to the value of the variation number counter 223j is determined (S3872). , sets a specific period effect command for display (S3873), subtracts 1 from the value of the variation counter 223j (S3874), and performs S3812 to S3817, which are the same as the variation display setting process of the first control example described above (see FIG. 147). Execute the process and end this process.

As explained above, in this example, when a predetermined period (4 seconds) has elapsed between when the extended display is executed after the end of the jackpot and when the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times (4 times), , When the special symbol fluctuation is started, it is configured to execute a specific period effect corresponding to the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations (value of the fluctuation number counter), so it will be executed for a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot (4 Even if the special symbol variations are not executed a predetermined number of times (four times) within a second), a variation performance corresponding to the special symbol variations can be executed without giving a player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, when using the above-mentioned alternative configuration, the period during which the extended display is executed (the number of times the special symbol changes) may be made larger than the maximum number of pending special symbols 2 (4 pieces). Set the maximum number of special symbol variations (for example, 0.5 seconds variation 8 times) that can be executed before the elapsed period (4 seconds), which is one of the display termination conditions, to the end condition of the extended display. You may do so. Thereby, it is possible to increase the chances of continuing the performance during the jackpot, and it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

Also, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the extension display will be executed after a predetermined period (4 seconds) has elapsed between when the extended display is executed after the end of the jackpot and until the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times (4 times). If you win a jackpot with a special symbol variation, the jackpot game will start after the special symbol variation of 0.5 seconds is executed, but other configurations may be used, for example, 0.5 seconds. In addition to the second special symbol variation period, it may be configured to perform a variation effect using the opening period of the jackpot game. With this configuration, the variable effect can be executed using a period of 0.5 seconds or more, so it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect.

<About another control example of the expectation level suggestion effect explained in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 221 to 225, another control example of the expectation level suggestion effect of the first control example described above will be explained. In this separate control example, similarly to the first control example described above, the performance period in which each of the expectation level 1 display Dk1 to expectation level 3 display Dk3, which are the expectation display modes displayed in one variable performance, can be displayed. and a period in which the expectation level increase mode Dk4, which is the sum of the variable amounts that are varied during each variable performance in each expectation level display mode, are set during one variable performance (see Figure 221), and each performance period is set. It is configured such that an operation valid period for validating the operation of the frame button 22 can be set.

Furthermore, when setting a variable performance, if a performance mode that does not display any of the three expectation level display modes is selected, the display mode of reserved symbols can be changed using the points earned from the expectation level increasing mode Dk4. It consists of With this configuration, it becomes possible to use the points acquired through the expectation level increase mode Dk4 for game results other than the lottery results corresponding to the special symbol fluctuations being executed, thereby motivating players. You can let them participate in the game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 221 to 223, the content of the effect in the main control example will be explained. FIG. 221 is a timing chart showing the flow of expectation level suggestion production in the main control example. Note that the description of the same elements as the expectation level suggestion performance of the first control example described above will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 221, when a fluctuating performance in which an expectation level suggestion performance is performed, the expectation level is set for 10 seconds from the time when 15 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation to notify the expectation level increase mode Dk4 in the current fluctuating performance. A variable suggestion effect is executed (see FIG. 102(b)). Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 221(b), the display screen shown in FIG. 222(a) is displayed. Here, with reference to FIG. 222(a), the display contents displayed during the expectation level suggestion performance will be explained.

FIG. 222(a) is a diagram schematically showing a display example in a period from when the expectation level increasing mode Dk4 is announced until the expectation level increasing effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 222(a), the value obtained as the expectation level increase mode Dk4 (“3UP” in this figure) is displayed in the second sub-display area Ds2. Returning to FIG. 221, the explanation will be continued. Thereafter, when 33 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, an expectation level increasing effect is executed in which the first operation valid period of 5 seconds is set (Fig. 221(c). In this state, as shown in Fig. 222(b) The display screen shown is displayed.

Then, when the player operates the frame button 22 during the first operation validity period, as shown in FIG. 223(a), the display mode of the expectation level 1 display Dk1 is changed, and the display mode of the expectation level increase mode Dk4 is changed. The value is subtracted and displayed. In this way, by operating the frame button 22 during each operation validity period, the display mode of the corresponding expectation level display can be changed, so it is possible to make the player operate the frame button 22 voluntarily. It becomes possible. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 221, since the expectation level 1 display is displayed across multiple operation valid periods, regardless of which operation valid period the frame button 22 is operated. , the display mode may change. As a result, when the frame button 22 is operated during the first operation valid period, if the display mode of the expectation level 1 display Dk1 does not change or the amount of change is small, in other words, if the display mode of the expectation level 1 display Dk1 is small, (during one operation validity period), it is possible to prevent the player from losing hope for a big win early.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 224 and 225, the control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 in another control example of this expectation level suggestion production will be described. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing the contents of the expectation level performance setting process 7. When the expectation level production setting process 7 is executed, first, the expectation level is selected based on the expectation level selection table 222i as in the first control example described above (S4251). Then, based on the selected expectation level, points to be given in the expectation level increase mode Dk4 are set (S4252), and the effects are executed in each of the first period, second period, and third period based on the expectation level. The mode is set (S4253).

When the process of S4253 is finished, it is determined whether there is a period (vacant period) in which the production mode is not set in each period (first period, second period, third period) (S4254), and the production mode is set. If there is a period (vacant period) in which the winning information is not played (S4254: Yes), then it is determined whether there is winning information indicating a win in the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S4255). Here, if it is determined that there is winning information indicating a hit (S4255: Yes), a pending symbol variable presentation mode is set to vary the pending symbols during a period in which no presentation mode is set (vacant period). (S4256), the process moves to S4257. On the other hand, in the process of S4254, if there is no period in which the performance mode is not set (S4254: No), or if it is determined in the process of S4255 that there is no winning information indicating a win (S4255: No), the process goes to S4255. Shift to processing.

In the process of S4257, for each period in which the production mode is set, the operation valid period (first operation valid period, second operation valid period, third operation valid period) for validly determining the operation of the frame button 22 is set. is set (S4257), a display expectation level production command is set (S4258), and the present process ends.

As explained above, in the expectation level effect setting process 7 (S3808), the award points to be used in the current variable effect and the award points are determined using the expectation level selected based on the expectation level selection table 222i. It is configured to set the performance mode used. The performance mode using the granted points is determined by the presence or absence of the selected settings for each of the multiple periods (first period to third period) defined in association with the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation performance to be executed this time. The presentation mode is set based on (whether or not to set the presentation mode) and the content of the presentation mode (the type of expectation display mode to be set, the display mode).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp which performance mode will be executed in which period (first period to third period). In addition, since the number of display modes that can be changed using the value acquired as the expectation level increase mode Dk4 during the expectation level variable suggestion presentation period is also indefinite, it is acquired as the expectation level increase mode Dk4. Even if the value obtained is small (for example, 2UP), if the number of displayed expectation display modes to be executed is small, the value obtained as the expectation increase mode Dk4 for that expectation display mode can be used. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player's desire to play is reduced due to the performance result during the expectation level variable suggestion performance period.

In addition, in another control example of this expectation degree suggestion performance, as shown in FIG. 221, a configuration is used in which the expectation level variable suggestion performance period is executed once at the beginning of the variable performance, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be provided in the middle of the variable performance (for example, between the second operation valid period (see FIG. 221(d)) and the third operation valid period (see FIG. 221(e))). By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the period during which the performance is performed using the value acquired as the expectation level increasing mode Dk4 during the expectation level variable suggestion performance, so that a large value ( For example, when you win item 3), you can further increase your expectations for a jackpot. Further, the expectation level variable suggestion performance may be executed a plurality of times (for example, twice) during one variable performance.

Furthermore, in another control example of this expectation level suggestion production, if a production mode using assigned points is not set for multiple periods in which operation valid periods can be set, a display mode of reserved symbols is added as an additional production. However, other content may be used as an additional effect, for example, the value collected by the player (for example, in another example of the first control example described above). It may be configured to add an effect for adding up the accumulated value (see FIG. 176(c)) as described above, or an effect for suggesting the current gaming state.

Furthermore, even if a performance mode using assigned points is set for all of the plurality of periods for which operation validity periods can be set, a performance selection means that allows the player to select a performance to be executed. (For example, a means for displaying a selection screen for selecting a performance to be performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and selecting a performance to be performed by an operation means that can be operated by the player) Based on this, the performance to be performed may be varied.

In the expected effect setting process 7 described with reference to FIG. 224, the expectation level variable suggestion effect period is for display purposes defined as the fixed period of the variable effect (the period from 15 seconds to 25 seconds from the start of the variation shown in FIG. 221). Although the configuration is configured such that the expectation level production command is set, as an alternative configuration, for example, based on the determination result of the determination means that determines the selected expectation level with reference to the expectation level selection table 222i, The period during which the expectation level variable suggestion effect is executed can be set to multiple periods (for example, a period from 15 seconds to 25 seconds from the start of the fluctuation shown in FIG. 221, a period after the first period shown in FIG. 221 (from 40 seconds to the start of the fluctuation). Expectancy level variable suggestion performance period setting means may be provided for setting any one of the 50 second period)). Thereby, it is possible to set a plurality of timings at which the expectation level variable suggestion performance is executed, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Further, the above-mentioned expectation level variable suggestion performance period setting means is configured to set a period during which the expectation level variable suggestion performance is executed based on factors other than the expectation level selected with reference to the expectation level selection table 222i. For example, the period during which the expectation level variable suggestion performance is executed may be set based on the operation content of the player's operation of the operating means, or the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a may be set. The configuration may be such that the period during which the expectation level variable suggestion performance is executed is set based on the information included in the information.

Next, frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 7 will be explained with reference to FIG. 225. FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 7. When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 7 is executed, first, it is determined whether the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is detected (S5051), and if it is detected (S5051: Yes), then the pending variable effect setting is performed. It is determined whether the period is in progress (S5901), and if it is determined that it is in the pending variable performance setting period (S5901: Yes), a variable display command for varying the pending symbols is set (S5902), and subtraction is performed. A display command indicating later points to be awarded is set (S5903), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S5901, if it is determined that it is not in the suspended variable effect setting period (S5901: No), it is determined whether it is the first operation valid period (S5904), and it is determined that it is the first operation valid period. If so (S5904: Yes), a display variable command is set to vary the first expectation level display (expectation level 1 display) Dk1 (S5905), and a display command is set to show the points awarded after subtraction. (S5903), this process ends.

In the process of S5904, if it is determined that it is not the first operation valid period (S5904: No), it is determined whether it is the second operation valid period (S5906), and if it is determined that it is the second operation valid period, then (S5906: Yes), sets a display variable command to vary the second expectation level display (expectation level 2 display) Dk2 (S5907), and sets a display command that shows the points awarded after subtraction (S5903). , this process ends.

In the process of S5906, if it is determined that it is not the second operation valid period (S5906: No), it is determined whether it is the third operation valid period (S5908), and if it is determined that it is the third operation valid period, then (S5908: Yes), sets a display variable command to vary the third expectation level display (expectation level 3 display) Dk3 (S5909), and sets a display command that shows the points awarded after subtraction (S5903). , this process ends.

As explained above, in this separate control example, similarly to the first control example described above, the expectation level 1 display Dk1 to expectation level 3 display, which are the expectation level display modes displayed in one fluctuating effect. A performance period in which Dk3 can be displayed, and a period in which the expectation level increase mode Dk4, which is the sum of the variable amounts that are varied during the fluctuating performance of each expectation level display mode, can be displayed are set during one variable performance ( (See FIG. 221), it is configured such that an operation valid period for validating the operation of the frame button 22 can be set for each production period.

Furthermore, when setting a variable performance, if a performance mode that does not display any of the three expectation level display modes is selected, the display mode of reserved symbols can be changed using the points earned from the expectation level increasing mode Dk4. It consists of With this configuration, it becomes possible to use the points acquired through the expectation level increase mode Dk4 for game results other than the lottery results corresponding to the special symbol fluctuations being executed, thereby motivating players. You can let them participate in the game.

In addition, the points awarded in this separate control example are set so that they can all be used when the frame button 22 is operated during all operation valid periods, and the points that are not operated when the frame button 22 is not operated are the points that will end the fluctuation. It may be configured such that time remains, and the content of the title grant performance described above may be varied with respect to the grant points remaining at the end of the variation.

The phrase "at the start (at the time of execution) of a jackpot (jackpot game)" used when explaining each of the above control examples refers to when it is confirmed that the jackpot lottery of the special symbol has been won and the jackpot game has started. It is used as a concept to indicate the timing when the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot, and specifically, the timing when the special symbol is stopped (confirmed display) in a combination of symbols to indicate that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, or the timing when the special symbol is stopped (confirmed display). This concept includes the timing at which the opening period starts, the timing at which the jackpot round game starts, etc.

The phrase "at the end of the jackpot (jackpot game)" used in explaining each of the control examples above is used as a concept to indicate the timing at which the jackpot game ends. This concept includes the timing at which the final round ends, the timing at which the jackpot ending period ends, and the timing at which the first special symbol lottery is performed after the jackpot ends.

If a specific timing is not specified in each of the control examples described above for each wording used in such a concept, any of the above-mentioned timings may be adopted as appropriate.

The configurations of the pachinko machine 10 described in each of the control examples described above may be combined as appropriate. For example, the pachinko machine 10 having a fall lottery means for executing the fall lottery used in the second control example described above may be implemented. In contrast, a small winning lottery means for executing the small winning lottery used in the third control example described above may be provided.

In addition, the fall lottery means used in the second control example described above executes a lottery for shifting (falling) the jackpot probability of the special symbol from a high probability state to a low probability state, but other than that, It may be used to shift (fall) the content set for the element, for example, to shift (fall) the winning probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) from a high probability state to a low probability state. It may also be configured to perform a lottery for changing the time saving state to a normal state (falling down).

In each of the control examples described above, the frame button 22 that can be pressed by the player is used as the operation means that can be operated by the player, but a configuration different from the frame button 22 may be provided as the operation means, for example, Photographing results of lever-shaped operating means that the player can operate in the front and rear directions, touch sensor operating means that detects contact (or proximity) of the player, and photographing means that photographs the player's movements. A camera-type operating means or the like may be provided for determining the . Further, the number of operating means is not limited to one, and a plurality of operating means may be provided.

In each of the control examples described above, a configuration is used in which various performances are executed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, but a plurality of display means of the pachinko machine 10 are provided, The pachinko machine 10 may be configured to execute the various effects described above using , the player may be able to select the performance to be actually executed from two or more executable performances.

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine (so-called simultaneous variation machine) in which a plurality of types of special symbols (special symbol 1, special symbol 2) are drawn (varied) at the same time.

Note that the slot machine is a well-known slot machine in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever after inserting a coin and determining the symbol active line, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The fluctuating display of the identification information is started, and the fluctuating display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<About the concept of the invention taking the projection plate member 620 of the projection unit 600 as an example>
A light transmitting member formed in a plate shape from a light transmitting material and having a reflective portion, and a light irradiating means for irradiating light to a side end face of the light transmitting member, the light transmitting member being made of a light transmitting member, the light is incident from the side end face of the light transmitting member. In the gaming machine, the light emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member is set to a high proportion of the light emitted from the light irradiation means, in which the light emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member. A gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the output increasing means is provided outside the display area.

Here, the light transmitting member is formed into a plate shape from a light transmitting material and has a reflecting portion, and a light irradiation means for irradiating light to the side end surface of the light transmitting member, A gaming machine is known in which incident light is reflected by a reflecting portion and emitted from the front of a light transmitting member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-29735). According to this type of gaming machine, for example, by disposing a light transmitting member on the front side of the liquid crystal display device in the gaming area, under normal conditions, the display on the liquid crystal display device can be viewed by the player through the light transmitting member. On the other hand, when a predetermined gaming state is formed, the light irradiated from the light irradiation means is made to enter from the side end surface of the light transmission member, and the light traveling inside the light transmission member is reflected by the reflection part. Then, the light is emitted from the front of the light transmitting member. In this case, the reflective section is provided with a plurality of groups each consisting of a plurality of reflective surfaces, and each group forms a pattern or design. Therefore, the player can recognize the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member as a pattern or design. That is, along with the display of the liquid crystal display device, patterns and designs can be made to appear (display) on the front of the liquid crystal display device.

However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that the light reflected by the reflective portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is weak. Therefore, it becomes difficult to clearly highlight (display) patterns and designs. In this case, increasing the output of the light irradiation means not only increases cost and power consumption, but also increases the amount of heat generated, causing problems in that the heat affects other members and equipment.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the output increasing means increases the proportion of the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member among the light emitted from the light emitting means, so that the light is reflected by the reflecting part. The light emitted from the front of the transparent member can be strengthened. As a result, patterns and designs can be clearly highlighted (displayed). Furthermore, since there is no need to increase the output of the light irradiation means, the amount of heat generated can be reduced and the influence of heat on other members and equipment can be suppressed. Further, since the emission increasing means is arranged outside the display area, it is difficult to be seen by the player, and deterioration of the appearance can be suppressed accordingly.

In addition, the formation position of the reflection part of a light transmission member may be sufficient as the back surface of a light transmission member, or the inside of a light transmission member may be sufficient as it, for example.

A gaming machine A2 in the gaming machine A1, wherein the output increasing means includes an outer edge member disposed along an outer edge of at least one of the front side and the back side of the light transmitting member.

According to gaming machine A2, the output increasing means includes an outer edge member disposed along the outer edge of at least one of the front side and the back side of the light transmitting member, so that the light emitted from the light irradiating means is emitted onto the side end face of the light transmitting member. Not only the light that reaches directly, but also the light that is irradiated from the light irradiation means and reflected on the outer edge member can be made to enter from the side end face of the light transmitting member, and the amount of light that is incident on the side end face of the light transmitting member is accordingly reduced. Light collection efficiency can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the amount of light emitted from the light irradiation means that reaches the reflective part of the light transmitting member, so that the light reflected by the reflective part and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened. , it is possible to clearly highlight (display) patterns and designs. Furthermore, since there is no need to increase the output of the light irradiation means, the amount of heat generated can be reduced and the influence of heat on other members and equipment can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in this way, the output increasing means includes the outer edge member disposed along the outer edge of at least one of the front side and the back side of the light transmitting member, so that when another device in the gaming area emits light, In this case, the outer edge member blocks the light from such other devices, thereby preventing the light from entering from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, when the light irradiation means is turned off (no light is allowed to enter the light-transmitting member, and no pattern or design is displayed on the front of the light-transmitting member), light from other devices may not enter the light-transmitting member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress patterns and designs from being displayed on the front side of the light-transmitting member.

In gaming machine A2, gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the outer edge member is disposed on each of the front and back sides of the light transmitting member.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the outer edge member is disposed on the front and back sides of the light transmitting member, so that part of the light emitted from the light irradiation means is absorbed by the light transmitting member. The light that is not directly incident on the side end face and deviates to the front side of the light transmitting member and the light that deviates to the back side of the light transmitting member is reflected by the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, respectively, and is made to enter from the side end face of the light transmitting member. be able to. Therefore, the efficiency of condensing light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be further increased.

Furthermore, by providing the outer edge member on each of the front and back sides of the light-transmitting member in this way, even when light emitted by other devices in the gaming area reaches the light-transmitting member from either the front or back side, Since the light can be blocked by each of the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, it is possible to suppress the light from entering from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, when the light irradiation means is turned off (no light is allowed to enter the light-transmitting member, and no pattern or design is displayed on the front of the light-transmitting member), light from other devices may not enter the light-transmitting member. This makes it possible to more reliably suppress patterns and designs from being displayed on the front side of the light-transmitting member.

Gaming machine A4 is characterized in that in gaming machine A2 or A3, the outer edge member is arranged to protrude outward from the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A2 or A3, the outer edge member is arranged to protrude outward from the side end surface of the light transmitting member, so that the light irradiated from the light irradiation means is The light can be reflected by the protruding portion of the outer edge member (the surface connected to the side end surface of the light transmitting member), thereby making it easier for the light to enter the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the efficiency of condensing light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be further increased.

A gaming machine A5 in any one of gaming machines A2 to A4, wherein the outer edge member is formed of a material having a smaller refractive index than the light transmitting member.

According to gaming machine A5, in the effect produced by any of gaming machines A2 to A4, since the outer edge member is formed of a material having a smaller refractive index than the light transmitting member, light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is Light can be easily reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light-transmitting member can more easily reach the reflective part, which intensifies the light reflected by the reflective part and emitted from the front of the light-transmitting member, making patterns and designs clearer. It can be highlighted (displayed).

That is, for example, when the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are formed from materials having the same refractive index, light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is difficult to be reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member, It is easily transmitted to the outer edge member. The light transmitted to the outer edge member is totally reflected (or partially reflected) on the outer surface of the outer edge part (boundary with air) and then returns to the light transmitting member, but the light that returns from the outer edge member to the light transmitting member includes not only those that travel in the direction toward the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member, but also those that travel in the direction toward the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the amount of light reaching the reflecting section is reduced. On the other hand, as in game machine A4, by forming the outer edge member from a material with a smaller refractive index than the light-transmitting member, light incident from the side end surface of the light-transmitting member can be transferred between the light-transmitting member and the outer edge member. Since the light can be easily reflected (or it can be totally reflected) at the boundary with the reflective part, it is possible to ensure that the light reaches the reflective part.

A gaming machine A6, in any of the gaming machines A2 to A5, wherein the outer edge member is disposed with a predetermined gap formed between the front side or the back side of the light transmitting member.

According to gaming machine A6, in the effect produced by any of gaming machines A2 to A5, the outer edge member is disposed with a predetermined gap formed between the front side or the back side of the light transmitting member. Light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reflected at the front or back surface (boundary with air) of the light transmitting member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light-transmitting member can more easily reach the reflective part, which intensifies the light reflected by the reflective part and emitted from the front of the light-transmitting member, making patterns and designs clearer. It can be highlighted (displayed).

That is, for example, when the refractive index of the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are the same or the difference in refractive index is relatively small, if the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are in close contact with each other, the light from the side end surface of the light transmitting member The incident light is difficult to be reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member, and is easily transmitted to the outer edge member. The light transmitted to the outer edge member is totally reflected (or partially reflected) on the outer surface of the outer edge part (boundary with air) and then returns to the light transmitting member, but the light that returns from the outer edge member to the light transmitting member includes not only those that travel in the direction toward the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member, but also those that travel in the direction toward the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the amount of light reaching the reflecting section is reduced. On the other hand, as in gaming machine A5, by arranging the outer edge member with a predetermined gap formed between the front side or the back side of the light transmitting member, the light is not incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Since the light can be easily reflected (or can be totally reflected) at the front or back surface (boundary with air) of the light-transmitting member, it is possible to ensure that the light reaches the reflecting portion.

Any one of gaming machines A2 to A6 includes a rotation mechanism that rotatably supports the light transmitting member and applies a rotational driving force to the light transmitting member, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape and , a curved rack gear is carved along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface or inner peripheral surface of the annular shape, and the rotation mechanism rotates a pinion gear meshed with the curved rack gear of the outer edge member, and the pinion gear. A gaming machine A7 characterized by comprising a driving means.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A6, the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape and extends along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface of the annular shape. The rotating mechanism includes a pinion gear that meshes with the curved rack gear on the outer edge member, and a drive means for rotationally driving the pinion gear. The rotation of the pinion gear can be transmitted to the outer edge member via the curved rack gear, thereby allowing the light transmitting member to rotate together with the outer edge member. Therefore, the pattern or design displayed by the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be visually recognized by the player in a displaced (rotated) state.

In this case, the outer edge member serves both the role of condensing the light irradiated from the light irradiation means onto the side end surface of the light transmission member and the role of transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive means to the light transmission member and rotating it. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced and reliability can be improved due to the simplification of the structure.

Any one of gaming machines A2 to A7 includes a rotation mechanism that rotatably supports the light transmitting member and applies a rotational driving force to the light transmitting member, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape and A gaming machine A8, characterized in that a guide groove is recessed along the circumferential direction of the annular outer peripheral surface thereof, and the rotation mechanism includes a plurality of support wheels guided along the guide groove.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A2 to A7, the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape, and a guide groove is provided along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface of the annular shape. Since the rotation mechanism is provided with a plurality of support wheels guided along the guide groove, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is exposed due to the action of these guide grooves and the support ring. The light transmitting member can be rotatably supported in a state where light can enter from the side end surface of the transmitting member. Therefore, by rotating the light transmitting member, the player can visually recognize the pattern or design displayed by the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member in a displaced (rotated) state.

In this case, the outer edge member can serve both the role of focusing the light irradiated from the light irradiation means onto the side end surface of the light transmitting member and the role of rotatably supporting the light transmitting member together with the support ring. , the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, thereby reducing product cost and improving reliability due to the simplification of the structure.

Note that the support ring may be rotatably supported, or may be fixed in a non-rotatable manner. In this case, the supporting wheel may be guided along the guide groove in a manner in which the rotatably supported support wheel rolls or slides along the guide groove, or in a manner in which it is non-rotatably supported. An example is illustrated in which a fixed support ring slides along a guide groove.

In addition, in gaming machine A8 subordinate to gaming machine A7, the outer edge member on which the curved rack gear is engraved is placed on one of the front or back side of the light-transmitting member, and the outer edge member on which the guide groove is recessed is placed on the light-transmitting member. It is preferable to arrange them on the other side of the front side or the back side. That is, by disposing the outer edge members on the front and back sides of the light transmitting member, the light irradiated from the light irradiation means does not directly enter the side end face of the light transmitting member, and the light emitted from the light transmitting member does not directly enter the side end face of the light transmitting member. This is because the light that deviates to the side and the light that deviates to the back side can be reflected by the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, respectively, and can be made to enter from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. In addition, by disposing the outer edge member on each of the front and back sides of the light-transmitting member, light emitted by other devices in the gaming area can reach from either the front or back side of the light-transmitting member. Even in such a case, the light can be blocked by each of the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, and it is possible to suppress the light from entering from the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

In gaming machine A8, the outer edge member is formed in such a shape that its outer peripheral side faces the front or back surface of the light transmitting member at a predetermined distance, and the opposing gap between the outer edge member and the light transmitting member is the guide. A gaming machine A9 characterized by a groove.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A8, the outer edge member is formed in a shape such that its outer peripheral side faces the front or back surface of the light transmitting member at a predetermined distance, and the outer edge member and the light transmitting member Since the opposing gap between the two is used as a guide groove, the structure including the light transmitting member and the outer edge member can be downsized. That is, by having one inner wall of the guide groove on the front or back side of the light transmitting member, it is not necessary to form the outer edge member to have a U-shaped cross section, and the thickness of the outer edge member can be reduced. Therefore, the size of the above-mentioned structure can be reduced accordingly.

In addition, since the outer edge member is disposed with a predetermined gap formed between the front side or the back side of the light transmitting member, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is transferred to the front side of the light transmitting member. Or it can be made easier to reflect on the back (boundary with air). As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light-transmitting member can more easily reach the reflective part, which intensifies the light reflected by the reflective part and emitted from the front of the light-transmitting member, making patterns and designs clearer. It can be highlighted (displayed).

In any one of gaming machines A2 to A9, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is formed perpendicular to the front and back surfaces of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiating means has a direction in which light is irradiated from the irradiation surface. A gaming machine A10 characterized in that the irradiation surface is arranged to face the side end surface of the light transmitting member in a posture perpendicular to the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

According to gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects produced by any of gaming machines A2 to A9, the side end surfaces of the light transmitting member are formed perpendicular to the front and back surfaces of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiation means Since the irradiation surface is arranged to face the side end surface of the light transmitting member in such a manner that the direction of light irradiation from the surface is perpendicular to the side end surface of the light transmitting member, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is irradiated with light from the light irradiation means. It is possible to easily reflect the light incident from the front or rear surface of the light transmitting member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light-transmitting member can more easily reach the reflective part, which intensifies the light reflected by the reflective part and emitted from the front of the light-transmitting member, making patterns and designs clearer. It can be highlighted (displayed).

<About the concept of the invention using the irradiation unit 650 of the projection unit 600 as an example>
In a game machine comprising a target member to be irradiated with light, and a plurality of light emitting means distributed around the target member in a posture with each irradiation surface facing the target member, the plurality of light emitting means The present invention includes one or more substrate members on which at least two or more of the light emitting means are mounted and formed to be elastically deformable, and a base member that holds the substrate members in a predetermined elastically deformed posture. Characteristic game machine B1.

Here, a game machine is known that includes a target member to be irradiated with light and a plurality of light emitting means arranged with their irradiation surfaces facing the target member (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011 -29735). According to this gaming machine, by emitting light from the light emitting means and making it enter from the outer circumferential surface of the target member, the incident light travels inside the light transmitting member and is reflected by the reflecting part. The light can be emitted from the front of the light transmitting member. In this case, the applicant forms the target member into a disk shape from a light-transmitting material and forms a reflective part, and at the same time, attaches a plurality of light emitting means to the outer peripheral surface of the disk shape (target member) on the irradiation surface. A structure was devised (unknown at the time of filing of this application) in which the light emitting means is arranged so as to surround the target member in a posture facing toward the target member, and the light emitted from each light emitting means is incident from the outer circumferential surface of the target member.

However, it has been newly discovered that in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem in that a plurality of light emitting means must be arranged around the target member, which increases the time and effort of the arrangement work. In particular, it is necessary to arrange the plurality of light emitting means with their respective irradiation surfaces facing the outer circumferential surface of the target member (that is, in different directions), which also increases the labor and effort of the arrangement work. .

On the other hand, according to gaming machine B1, at least two or more light emitting means are mounted and one or more board members are formed to be elastically deformable, and the board members are held in a predetermined elastically deformed posture. Since the base member is provided with a base member, the work of disposing at least two or more light emitting means can be completed by disposing one substrate member on the base member. Therefore, the effort required to arrange the light emitting means can be reduced accordingly.

Further, when a substrate member is disposed on the base member, the substrate member is elastically deformed and held in a predetermined posture, so that the direction of the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be defined. That is, since it is not necessary to individually arrange a plurality of light emitting means with their irradiation surfaces facing toward the outer circumferential surface of the target member, it is also possible to reduce the labor involved in disposing the light emitting means.

A gaming machine B2, which is a gaming machine B1, includes a block body formed to have higher rigidity than the base member and disposed on the base member, and the block body is held by the base member.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, it is provided with a block body formed to have higher rigidity than the base member and disposed on the base member, and the block body is held by the base member. By suppressing warping and bending of the substrate member, it is possible to easily define the posture of the substrate member. As a result, the attitude of the light emitting means is suppressed from being affected by warping or bending of the substrate member, and the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be easily maintained.

In the gaming machine B2, the gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the light emitting means is disposed in a region of the substrate member where the block body is disposed.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B2, the light emitting means is disposed in the region of the substrate member where the block body is disposed, so that the posture of the light emitting means is adjusted to prevent warping of the substrate member. It is possible to more reliably suppress the effects of bending and bending. Therefore, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be maintained even more easily.

In gaming machine B2 or B3, a plurality of the block bodies are arranged at predetermined intervals on the base member, and the base member is held in a posture in which the base member located between the block bodies is elastically deformed. A gaming machine B4 characterized in that it is held on the body.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B2 or B3, a plurality of block bodies are arranged on the base plate member at predetermined intervals, and the base member located between the block bodies is made elastic. Since it is held on the base body in a deformed (bent) posture, the posture (orientation of the irradiation surface) of the light emitting means is stabilized compared to the case where the base member directly holds the substrate member in an elastically deformed posture. be able to.

In any of gaming machines B2 to B4, the light emitting means is disposed on the front side of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is arranged on the front side of the substrate member opposite to the target member. A gaming machine B5 characterized in that it is arranged on the back.

According to gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by any of gaming machines B2 to B4, the light emitting means is disposed on the front side of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is arranged on the opposite side of the target member. Since it is disposed on the back surface of the substrate member, the light emitting means can be brought closer to the target member while obtaining the effect of stabilizing the posture of the substrate member by the block body.

In the gaming machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed by a screw from the front side of the base plate member, and the head of the screw is protruded from the front face of the base plate member.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed from the front of the board member by screws, and the head of the screw is projected to the front of the board member. Can be protected by screw head. That is, for example, when the movable member is displaced to the front of the substrate member, the head of the screw is brought into contact with the member, thereby suppressing damage caused by contact with the light emitting means.

In the gaming machine B6, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two of the screws, and the light emitting means is disposed between the heads of the two screws.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two screws, and the light emitting means is disposed between the heads of the two screws. The light emitting means can be easily protected by the head of the screw.

Note that the two screws are preferably disposed along the displacement direction of the movable member. This is because by disposing the light emitting means between the heads of the screws disposed in this manner, the movable member can be easily brought into contact with the heads of the screws, and the light emitting means can be easily protected.

In any of the gaming machines B2 to B7, one of the base body or the block body is provided with a protrusion, and the other of the base body or the block body is provided with a fitting hole that receives and fits the protrusion. A game machine B8 characterized in that it is recessed.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B2 to B7, a protrusion is provided on one of the base body or the block body, and a fitting is provided in which the protrusion is received and fitted. Since the hole is recessed in the other of the base body or the block body, by fitting the protrusion into the fitting hole, the block body can be arranged on the base body, and the labor of the installation work can be reduced. . In particular, when a plurality of block bodies are arranged on a substrate member and arranged in an elastically deformed (bent) posture between the block bodies, one block body is positioned by fitting (temporarily fixed). ), the substrate member can be elastically deformed (bended) and the other block body can be fitted into the base member, so that the workability of the arrangement work can be improved.

In any one of gaming machines B2 to B8, the block body has a recessed portion on the side that is disposed on the substrate member, and the electronic component disposed on the substrate member is housed in the recessed portion of the block body. A gaming machine B9 is characterized in that:

According to gaming machine B9, in any of gaming machines B2 to B8, the block body is provided with a recessed portion on the surface on the side to be disposed on the substrate member, and the block body is disposed on the substrate member in the recessed portion of the block body. Since the electronic components are housed, the electronic components can be covered and protected by the block body. Therefore, for example, it is possible to avoid damage caused by the movable member coming into contact with the electronic component.

<About the concept of the invention using the vertical displacement unit 800 as an example>
A game comprising a base member, a displacement member disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable between a first position and a second position, and a driving means for displacing the displacement member by applying a driving force to the displacement member. The machine includes an elastic member that is elastically deformed as the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the displacement member moves from the first position to the second position due to the action of gravity. disposed on the base member in a form that is displaced in the direction, and in a state where the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position, A game machine C1 characterized in that the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced.

Here, a base member, a displacement member disposed on the base member and formed to be displaceable between a first position and a second position, and a driving means for displacing the displacement member by applying a driving force to the displacement member are provided. A gaming machine is known that provides an effect by displacing a displacing member (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is placed in a retracted position (e.g., one of the first position or the second position) that is invisible to the player or on the outer edge side of the game area; When the state is formed, the displacement member is displaced toward the overhanging position (the other of the first position or the second position) overhanging the game area, and the operation of the displacement member being displaced toward the overhanging position is performed as a game. A performance is performed for people to see. However, in the gaming machine described above, the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed, so it is difficult to make the displacement member perform an interesting displacement. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the displacement member includes an elastic member that is elastically deformed as the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the displacement member is moved from the first position to the second position by the action of gravity. The displacement member is disposed on the base member in a form that is displaced in the direction toward the second position, and when the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position, Since the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the reciprocating displacement (approximately, a simple harmonic) is caused by the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member, centering on this balance position (predetermined position). ) can be performed by the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the displacement member in the direction of gravity can be made into an orthogonal projection of a uniform circular motion, and the displacement speed can be varied, so that the displacement member can be caused to perform an interesting displacement.

On the other hand, if a driving force is applied to the displacement member from the driving means, the displacement member can be displaced between the first position and the second position in a manner different from the above-mentioned displacement (orthogonal projection movement of uniform circular motion). Therefore, the variations in displacement can be increased accordingly. In other words, simply by switching whether or not to apply driving force from the drive means to the displacement member, variations in displacement can be increased, and there is no need to complicate the structure or control, which reduces product cost and improves reliability. It is possible to improve the results.

In the game machine C1, the displacement member is formed such that one end side is rotatably supported by the base member and the other end side is moved up and down between the first position and the second position. Game machine C2.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, one end side is rotatably supported on the base member, and the other end side is raised and lowered between the first position and the second position. , when the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is canceled and the displacement member is caused to perform reciprocating displacement (approximately simple harmonic motion) due to the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member, such The displacement of the other end of the displacement member can be a combination of not only linear movement in the vertical direction but also rotational movement about the one end side as the center of rotation. As a result, it is possible to cause the displacement member to perform an interesting displacement.

The gaming machine C2 includes a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and the transmission means is a rotating member rotatably disposed on the base member and rotated by the driving force of the driving means. and a connecting member, one end of which is rotatably connected to a position eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating member, and the other end of which is rotatably connected to the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the transmission means includes a rotating member rotatably disposed on the base member and rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a transmission means eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating member. Since the connecting member is connected at one end to the position where the displacement member is connected and the other end is connected to the displacement member, application of the driving force from the drive means to the displacement member is released, and the action of gravity and the elastic recovery of the elastic member are prevented. When a displacement member is caused to perform a reciprocating displacement (approximately simple harmonic motion) due to a force, the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member. Since the posture of the connecting member is changed, it is possible to change the magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the rotary member of the force in the push and pull directions. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocated, the magnitude of the resistance that the displacement member receives from the transmission means can be changed, and as a result, the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member can be changed. Such a displacement member can be caused to perform interesting displacements.

In the game machine C3, at the predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the rotational center of the rotation member and the connection position of the rotation member and the connection member are The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are substantially perpendicular to each other.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, at a predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the rotation center of the rotating member and the connection position between the rotating member and the connecting member Since the direction connecting the connecting position of the rotating member and connecting member and the connecting position of the connecting member and displacement member is approximately perpendicular to the direction connecting the The magnitude of the force component can be maximized at the balance position (predetermined position), and the force component can be decreased in either direction of push or pull from the balance position. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocated, the resistance that the displacement member receives from the transmission means can be changed approximately symmetrically about the balance position, so that the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member can be easily continued.

In the gaming machine C3 or C4, one of the rotating member or the connecting member includes a protrusion that protrudes toward the other, and the predetermined position within the movable range between the first position and the second position. When the displacement member is displaced through the central range including the central range, the protruding portion is not opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, and the position is closer to the first position or the second position than the central range. A game machine C5 characterized in that when the displacement member is displaced in an outer range close to , the protruding portion faces the other of the rotating member or the connecting member so as to be able to come into contact with the other.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine C3 or C4, one of the rotating member or the connecting member is provided with a protruding part that protrudes toward the other, and between the first position and the second position. When the displacement member is displaced in the central range that includes a predetermined position within the movable range, the protruding portion is not opposed to the other rotating member or the connecting member, and When the displacement member is displaced in the outer range near the second position, the protruding portion is opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, so the application of driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released. When the displaceable member is caused to perform reciprocating displacement around the balance position (predetermined position), the reciprocating displacement of the displaceable member is smoothed by avoiding the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the protrusion in the central range. On the other hand, in the case where the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, the protruding portion is made to face the other of the rotating member or the connecting member so as to be able to come into contact with the other in the outer range, and the rotation of the member is prevented. Shakiness between the member and the connecting member can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine C5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the center range, and the center range is set to include the predetermined position and the second position. A gaming machine C6 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the central range, and the central range includes the predetermined position and the second position. Since the position of the displacement member is set within the range, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the posture of the displacement member is adjusted by using the protrusion to suppress rattling between the rotating member and the connecting member. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position by the driving force of the driving means, it is possible to avoid the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the protrusion, which acts on the displacement member. The displacement member can be smoothly displaced while also utilizing gravity.

For example, when the first position is a retracted position where the displacement member is retracted toward the outer edge of the gaming area, and the second position is an extended position where the displacement member is extended toward the center of the gaming area, In the first position (retracted position), rattling of the displacement member is suppressed to improve the appearance and durability, and the performance of other members can be suppressed from being inhibited. When displacing from the first position to the second position (extended position), it can be quickly extended (displaced) to the second position, and the production effect of the overhanging operation can be enhanced. .

The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that in the second position, the center of rotation of the rotating member, the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are located substantially in a straight line. A gaming machine C7.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C6, in the second position, the rotation center of the rotating member, the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are substantially aligned. Since it is located on a line, even if the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member, the direction of the push and pull will be toward the rotation center of the rotating member, and the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member will be It is possible to create a state in which this does not occur (ie, a dead center). Therefore, when displacing the displacement member toward the second position, it is possible to avoid the generation of resistance due to sliding of the protruding portion and to displace the displacement member smoothly (quickly). After the displacement member is placed in position, the above-mentioned dead center action suppresses rattling of the displacement member, thereby improving the appearance and durability.

In any one of gaming machines C3 to C7, the connecting member includes a contacting portion formed to be able to come into contact with the base member, and the contacting portion is configured to adjust the connection position of the displacement member and the base member and the rotation. It is characterized in that it is disposed substantially on a straight line connecting the connecting position of the member and the connecting member, and on the opposite side of the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member, with the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member interposed therebetween. Game machine C8.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C3 to C7, the connecting member is provided with an abutting part that is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the base member, and the abutting part is connected to the displacement member and the base. It is located substantially on a straight line connecting the connecting position of the members and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and on the opposite side from the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member with the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member in between. , when the displacement member shakes with respect to the base member, the abutting part of the connecting member is brought into contact with the base member, so that the rotating member and the connecting part of the connecting member (the rotating member and one end of the connecting member can rotate) It is possible to easily suppress the inclination of the rotation shaft (with respect to the shaft support hole of the part connected to the shaft). As a result, the driving force of the driving means can be smoothly transmitted to the displacement member via the transmission means.

<About the concept of the invention using the displacement unit 400 as an example>
In a game machine comprising a base member, a displacement member disposed displaceably on the base member, and a drive means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, the drive means includes a first drive means and a first drive means. and two driving means, wherein the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving means, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the second driving means. The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the displacement member is displaced in different manners.

Here, a game machine is known that includes a base member, a displacement member disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, and performs effects by displacing the displacement member. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is placed in a retracted position that is invisible to the player or on the outer edge of the gaming area, but when a predetermined gaming state is formed, the displacement member An effect is performed in which the displacement member is displaced toward the extended position, and the player is made to visually recognize the movement of the displacement member that is displaced toward the extended position.

However, conventional gaming machines have had a problem in that the effect of the performance produced by the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient. Specifically, in conventional gaming machines, the displacement mode of the displaceable member (trajectory when the displaceable member displaces with respect to the base member) is limited to one way, so the performance due to the displacement of the displaceable member is limited to one pattern. Therefore, it was difficult to perform a performance that would surprise the player. Even if the driving force of the driving means is changed by increasing or decreasing the strength, the displacement speed of the displacement member will only increase or decrease, and the displacement mode (trajectory) will remain constant, so it will not be possible to create an effect that surprises the player. It was difficult to do.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the driving means includes a first driving means and a second driving means, and in the case where the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving means, and in the case where the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving means. Since the displacement member is displaced in different manners depending on the case where the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the second driving means, the effect of the performance by the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced. In other words, unlike conventional products in which the displacement mode of the displacement member (trajectory when the displacement member is displaced relative to the base member) is limited to one pattern, the performance does not follow one pattern, and one displacement member can be moved in at least two ways. Since it can be displaced in a normal displacement manner, by switching the displacement manner, it is possible to perform a performance that surprises the player.

In the gaming machine D1, a first member is disposed so as to be slidably displaceable on the base member and is driven by the first driving means, and a first member is disposed so as to be slidably displaceable on the base member and is driven by the second driving means. a second member driven by a player, and a first portion and a second portion of the displacement member are at least rotatably connected to the first member and the second member, respectively. .

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D1, the first member is disposed so as to be slidably displaceable on the base member and is driven by the first driving means; and a second member driven by the second drive means, the first portion and the second portion of the displacement member being at least rotatably connected to the first member and the second member, respectively. When the first member is slidably displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the second portion side can be formed, while the second member is slidably displaced by the driving force of the second driving means. When the member is slidably displaced, a displacement mode can be formed in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the first portion side. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two displacement modes, by switching between these displacement modes, it is possible to perform an effect that surprises the player.

In particular, according to the gaming machine D2, the two displacement modes are not formed by having the same center of rotation and different directions of rotation, but by having different directions of rotation and different centers of rotation. Therefore, the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be increased, and it is possible to easily perform performances that surprise the player.

In the game machine D2, the first member and the second member are disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a connecting pin protrudes from either the first portion of the displacement member or the first member. A game machine D3 is rotatably and slidably inserted into a guide groove formed on the other side.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D2, the first member and the second member are disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and one of the first portion of the displacement member or the first member Since the connecting pin protruding from the second member is rotatably and slidably inserted into the guide groove formed on the other side, the first member is linearly displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, or the first member is linearly displaced by the driving force of the second driving means. Depending on whether the second member is linearly displaced, a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the second portion side and a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the first portion side are formed. can. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two displacement modes, by switching between these displacement modes, it is possible to perform an effect that surprises the player.

In this case, since the first member and the second member are disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, it is not necessary to have a complicated structure as in the case where the first member and the second member are slidable on a curved trajectory. If so, it is necessary to provide not only a mechanism for guiding the first member and the second member in a curved shape, but also a mechanism that can continuously apply a driving force to the first member and the second member that are displaced in a curved shape. For example, a rack and pinion mechanism can be used and the structure can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce product costs and improve durability and operational reliability.

A gaming machine D4 in the gaming machine D3, wherein the direction of linear displacement of the first member and the direction of linear displacement of the second member are substantially parallel.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D3, the direction of linear displacement of the first member and the direction of linear displacement of the second member are approximately parallel, so that the first driving means or the second driving means In addition to a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated by driving only one of the drive means, a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is linearly displaced (for example, transversely) by driving both the first drive means and the second drive means. Embodiments can be formed. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least three displacement modes, by switching the displacement modes, it is possible to easily perform a surprise effect for the player.

In particular, according to the game machine D4, as for the displacement mode of the displacement member, the type of displacement (rotation) is the same, but the direction of rotation and the position of the center of rotation are different, and the type of displacement itself is different. (that is, rotation and linear displacement can be formed), the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be further increased, and it is easier for the player to perform surprise effects.

In the gaming machine D4, when the first member and the second member are driven by the first driving means and the second driving means, respectively, a displacement in which the displacement speed of the first member and the displacement speed of the second member are different. A gaming machine D5 characterized by being a speed.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D4, when the first member and the second member are driven by the first driving means and the second driving means, respectively, the displacement speed of the first member and the second Since the displacement speed of the member is different from that of the displacement member, the displacement of the displacement member can include rotational motion and linear motion. That is, the displacement member can not only be displaced (linear movement) parallel to the direction of linear displacement of the first member and the second member while maintaining its posture, but also can be linearly moved while rotating its posture. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform performances that surprise the player.

Note that it is impossible to displace the displacement member in a displacement mode that combines rotational motion and linear motion with the conventional configuration in which the displacement member is slid along the slide groove by the driving force of one driving means. , as in the present invention, it has become possible for the first time to utilize two driving means.

Any of the game machines D1 to D5 includes a second displacement member disposed displaceably on the base member, and when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first drive means, the displacement While the second displacement member is displaced together with the second displacement member, when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means, the second displacement member is maintained in a stopped state. Game machine D6.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines D1 to D5, the second displacement member is disposed displaceably on the base member, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first drive means. When the displacement member is moved, the second displacement member is displaced together with the displacement member, while when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means, the second displacement member is maintained in a stopped state. , it is possible to increase the device (change) between the displacement mode by the first drive means and the displacement mode by the second drive means. Therefore, by switching the displacement mode, it is possible to easily perform a performance that surprises the player.

<About the concept of the invention using the projection unit 5600 as an example>
In a gaming machine comprising a target member to be irradiated with light and a light irradiation means for irradiating light toward the target member, at least one or both of the target member or the light irradiation means is formed to be displaceable. A gaming machine E1, wherein the manner in which the target member is irradiated by the light irradiation means is changed by the displacement of one or both of the light irradiation means.

Here, a game includes a displacement member formed to be displaceable between a first position and a second position, and a driving means for displacing the displacement member by applying a driving force to the displacement member, and performs an effect by displacement of the displacement member. A machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this gaming machine, a light irradiation means (LED) is disposed inside the displacement member, and a transparent part made of a light-transmissive material is provided on the front side of the displacement member (the surface facing the player). By irradiating the light section from the back side with the light irradiation means, the player can visually recognize that a part of the displacement member (light-transmitting section) is emitting light. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the light irradiation means irradiates the target member in a constant manner, there is a problem in that there is little change in the aspect visually recognized by the player, making it difficult to provide interest.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, at least one or both of the target member and the light irradiation means are formed to be displaceable, and the manner in which the target member is irradiated by the light irradiation means is changed by displacement of one or both of them. It is possible to change the way the player views the game. As a result, it is possible to easily keep players interested.

Examples of forms in which the light irradiation mode is changed include changes in the position of the target member irradiated by the light irradiation means, and changes in the distance from the irradiation surface of the light irradiation means to the irradiation position of the target member. For example, a form in which a combination of these forms is used, a form in which these are combined, etc.

A game machine E2 comprising a base member in the game machine E1, wherein the light irradiation means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is disposed movably on the base member.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine E1, the light irradiation means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is disposed movably on the base member, so that the electricity of the light irradiation means is This allows the wires to be kept in a fixed state, and the occurrence of disconnections can be suppressed to that extent.

The gaming machine E2 includes a shielding member having an opening and disposed on the base member, allowing the player to see a part of the target member through the opening of the shielding member, and allowing the target member to be exposed to light. It is formed in a plate shape from a transparent material and is provided with a reflecting part, and the light emitted from the light irradiation means and incident from the side end face is reflected by the reflecting part and emitted from the front of the target member. A game machine E3 featuring the following.

Here, in the reflecting section, a plurality of groups each consisting of a plurality of reflecting surfaces are arranged, and each group forms a shape of a pattern or a design. Therefore, the player can recognize the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member as a pattern or design.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, it includes a shielding member having an opening and disposed on the base member, and allows the player to see a part of the target member through the opening of the shielding member. By displacing the target member, different parts of the target member can be made visible to the player through the opening of the shielding member.

For example, a first position where a first group of a plurality of groups constituting the reflective section is visible through the opening, and a second position where the second group, which is a different group from the first group, is visible through the opening. When the target member is displaceable between the second position and the second position where the target member is visible through the opening of the shielding member, by placing the target member in the first position, the first group can displace the target member through the opening of the shielding member. While making the first pattern or pattern formed visible to the player, by displacing the target member from the first position to the second position, the pattern or pattern made visible to the player through the opening of the shielding member. , the second pattern or pattern formed by the second group can be changed.

In this case, the target member is made of a light-transmitting material, so when displacing the target member in order to change the pattern or design that the player visually recognizes, the light from the light irradiation means must not be irradiated. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the target member is displaced.

The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the target member is formed in a circular or annular shape when viewed from the front, and is rotatably disposed on the base member about the center of the circular or annular shape. Game machine E4.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E3, the target member is formed in a circular shape or an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is rotatable to the base member around the center of the circular or annular shape. Compared to the case where the target member can be slid and displaced, the target member can be arranged while ensuring the number of patterns and symbols that the player can see through the opening of the shielding member. The space required can be reduced.

In the gaming machine E2, the target member is formed from a light-transmitting material into a circular plate shape when viewed from the front and is provided with a reflective portion, and is configured to reflect light irradiated from the light irradiation means and incident from the side end surface. The light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the target member, and a plurality of the light irradiation means are distributed around the target member with the irradiation surface facing the side end surface of the target member. A game machine E5, wherein the target member is rotatably disposed on the base member about the center of the circular shape.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E6, the target member is formed from a light-transmitting material into a circular plate shape and is provided with a reflective portion, and is irradiated by the light irradiation means and is illuminated from the side end surface. The incident light is reflected by a reflecting part and emitted from the front of the target member, and a plurality of light irradiation means are distributed around the target member with the irradiation surface facing the side end face of the target member. Therefore, by rotating the target member while irradiating light from the light irradiation means, it is possible to make the pattern or design displayed by the light emitted from the front of the target member visible to the player in the rotated state. can.

In the gaming machine E5, the gaming machine E6 is characterized in that the plurality of light irradiation means are distributed in a circumferential direction at positions equidistant from the rotation center of the target member.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E5, the plurality of light irradiation means are distributed in the circumferential direction at positions equidistant from the rotation center of the target member, so that the rotational position ( It is possible to easily keep the light emitted from the front of the target member constant regardless of the phase). That is, patterns and designs displayed by light emitted from the front of the target member can be stably formed.

A gaming machine E7, which is the gaming machine E1, includes a base member, and the light irradiation means and the target member are disposed movably on the base member.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, since the light irradiation means and the target member are disposed movably on the base member, the combination of the displacements of the two allows the light irradiation means to affect the target member. It is possible to increase variations in the irradiation mode. Therefore, it is possible to further change the visual appearance of the player, and it is possible to make the game more interesting to the player.

The gaming machine E7 includes a drive means for displacing the target member by applying a driving force thereto, and the light irradiation means is brought into contact with the target member displaced by the drive force applied from the drive means. A gaming machine E8, characterized in that it is displaced together with the target member.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E7, the gaming machine E8 is provided with a driving means for displacing the target member by applying a driving force to the target member, and the light irradiation means is configured to displace the target member by applying a driving force to the target member. Since the member is displaced together with the target member by being brought into contact with the member, it can also be used as a driving means for displacing the target member, and there is no need to separately provide a driving means for displacing the light irradiation means. can.

<Features Group F> (Free setting of countdown notice)
A performance period setting means for setting one performance period among different performance periods, a specific performance execution means for executing a specific performance in a specific period set within said one performance period, and said specific performance execution means by said specific performance execution means. a notification effect execution means for executing a notification effect that notifies in advance that a specific effect will be executed; A gaming machine F1 characterized in that it has a notification effect setting means for setting an opportunity for ending the notification effect based on information.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable performance for a predetermined period of time to indicate to the player whether or not he or she has won a prize. The game is configured to be able to execute a pre-notification performance (countdown performance) that notifies the player in advance of the timing at which a specific performance (for example, a cut-in performance) will be performed among the performances executed for a predetermined period of time. There is a chance. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-198568).

In such conventional gaming machines, by notifying the player in advance of the timing at which a specific performance will be executed, it is possible to execute a variable performance while increasing the player's expectations for a jackpot. However, when it is determined that a pre-notification performance is to be performed, the period for performing the pre-notification performance (i.e., the start timing and end timing) is set, so the content of the performance becomes monotonous. There has been a problem in that players quickly become bored with the presentation. In addition, in the conventional gaming machine having the above-mentioned configuration, while the advance notification performance is being executed, the performance mode of the advance notification performance is varied (for example, a specific performance targeted for the advance notification performance is changed). ), and the production effect could not be enhanced.

According to the gaming machine F1, the start opportunity is set by the notification effect setting means based on the first information as the execution period of the notification effect for notifying that the specific effect will be executed, and the start opportunity is set based on the second information. A termination trigger is set. As a result, the period for performing the notification effect is set based on a plurality of different pieces of information, so the period for performing the notification effect can be freely set, and the effect of the presentation can be enhanced.

The gaming machine F1 includes an execution information determining means for determining execution information of the specific performance, and the notification performance setting means sets the execution information of the specific performance determined by the execution information determining means as the second information. A gaming machine F2 characterized in that it is a gaming machine F2.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the execution information for indicating that a specific performance is to be executed is used as second information to set the trigger for ending the notification performance. It is possible to set notification effects that correspond to the following. Therefore, while it is possible to freely set the period during which the notification performance is executed, it is possible to execute the notification performance corresponding to the specific performance to be performed, so there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine F2, the gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the execution information determining means determines at least a timing at which the specific performance is executed.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F2, the execution information for indicating that a specific performance is to be executed is used as second information to set the end timing of the notification performance, so that the execution timing of the specific performance is set. It is possible to set notification effects that correspond to the following. Therefore, while making it possible to freely set the period during which the notification effect is executed, it is possible to accurately notify the timing at which the specific effect is executed, which has the effect of increasing the effect of the effect.

The gaming machine F2 or F3 has a specific effect setting means for setting one specific effect among a plurality of specific effects having different execution timings as the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. The gaming machine F4 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2 or F3, for a plurality of specific performances having different execution timings, it is possible to easily set a notification performance that matches the timing at which the specific performance is executed. can. Therefore, while making it possible to freely set the period during which the notification effect is executed, it is possible to accurately notify the period during which the specific effect is executed, which has the effect of increasing the effect of the effect.

In the gaming machines F1 to F4, the notification effect setting means sets the timing for ending the notification effect based on the second information, different from the timing for setting the start opportunity for the notification effect based on the first information. A gaming machine F5 is characterized in that it sets.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the execution period of the notification effect can be set at different timings, so the period in which the notification effect is executed can be freely set. This has the effect of increasing the production effect.

In the gaming machine F5, the notification performance period setting means is configured to set a trigger for ending the notification performance based on the second information while the notification performance is being executed by the notification performance execution means. Features gaming machine F6.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F5, after the notification effect is executed, it is possible to set an end timing for the notification effect, so that after the notification effect is executed, the end timing of the notification effect can be set. The execution period will be set. Therefore, the period during which the notification effect is performed can be freely set, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, at the time the notification effect is executed, it is not set at what timing the notification effect targets a specific effect to be executed, so it is possible for the player to predict the content of the notification effect in advance. This can be reliably prevented.

In any of gaming machines F1 to F6, an operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation performance execution means that executes an operation performance for causing the operation means to be operated, and the operation executed by the operation performance execution means an operation determining means for determining that the operating means has been operated during the performance, and the notification effect setting means sets a presentation mode of the notification effect based on a determination result of the operation judgment means. A gaming machine F7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the performance period of the notification performance is set based on the operation content of the operating means during the operation performance, so that the player's participation in the performance is reduced. It has the effect of increasing motivation.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the notification effect setting means sets a first notification effect period and a second notification effect period that is set after the first notification effect period as a period in which the notification effect is executed. A gaming machine F8, wherein at least the second notification performance period is set based on the second information.

According to the gaming machine F8, in any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the second notification performance period can be set based on the second information among the periods in which the notification performance is executed, so the notification performance period can be set freely. In a gaming machine that can be set to 1, it is possible to secure a period for performing a performance based on the second information, and there is an effect that a performance that is easy to understand for a player can be executed.

In the gaming machine F8, the notification performance execution means executes a time-lapse performance that indicates over time a period until the specific performance is executed during the second notification performance period. Machine F9.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F8, it is possible to execute a timing effect during the second notification effect period, so that it is possible to notify the player of the timing at which a specific effect will be executed in an easy-to-understand manner. There is an effect that it can be done.

In the gaming machine F9, based on the notification performance period determining means for determining the performance period of the notification performance set by the notification performance setting means, and the length of the performance period determined by the notification performance period determination means, A gaming machine F10 comprising: a time-lapse effect period setting means for setting a period during which the time-lapse effect is executed.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F9, the period for executing the temporal effect is executed for a certain period of time by the elapsed effect period setting means based on the length of the effect period during which the notification effect is executed. Since the timing for executing the temporal effect is determined by subtracting a certain period from the execution timing of the specific effect, even if a different effect period is set by the effect period setting means, the start timing of the specific effect can be accurately determined. This has the effect of being able to suggest this to the player.

In any of the gaming machines F8 to F10, the notification performance setting means sets a performance mode of a first performance to be executed during the first notification performance period based on the first information, and A gaming machine F11 characterized in that it has a first performance mode variable means that changes the first performance mode when a predetermined performance variable condition is satisfied during one notification performance period.

According to the game machine F11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines F8 to F10, the performance mode of the first performance executed during the first notification performance period is established while the first performance is being executed. It is variable when possible performance variable conditions are met. Thereby, after the notification performance is executed, the performance mode of the notification performance can be changed, so that there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

A gaming machine F12 in the gaming machine F11, wherein the performance variable condition is established when the notification performance setting means sets a trigger for ending the notification performance.

According to the gaming machine F12, when the termination trigger of the notification performance is set and the performance period of the notification performance is determined, the performance mode of the first performance can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to execute the first performance corresponding to the set termination trigger, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In the gaming machine F1, an operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation performance execution means that executes an operation performance for causing the operation means to be operated, and the operation performance executed during the operation performance executed by the operation performance execution means. and an operation determination means for determining that the means has been operated, and the operation effect execution means executes the operation effect while the notification effect is being executed by the notification effect execution means. A gaming machine F13, wherein the notification effect setting means sets the second information based on a determination result by the operation determining means.

According to the gaming machine F13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the trigger for ending the notification performance is set based on the content of the operation performed during the notification performance. Therefore, the performance period of the notification performance can be varied by the player's operation, and the effect of the performance can be enhanced.

The gaming machine F13 has a specific period setting means for setting the specific period based on a determination result by the operation determining means, and the notification effect setting means indicates the specific period set by the specific period setting means. The gaming machine F14 is characterized in that the second information is information for the game.

According to the gaming machine F14, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine F13, a specific period in which a specific performance is executed is set based on the operation content for the operation performance performed during the notification performance, and the specified period is set during the set specific period. Since the performance period of the notification performance can be varied based on this, there is an effect that the notification performance corresponding to the specific performance to be executed can be executed.

In the gaming machine F14, the specific period setting means sets one predetermined period from among a plurality of predetermined periods as the specific period, and the specific performance execution means sets the specific period setting means A gaming machine F15 that executes the specific performance corresponding to the specific period.

According to the gaming machine F15, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F14, a specific performance corresponding to the specific period set by the specific period setting means is executed, so that different specific effects can be executed depending on the operation content of the operating means. I can do it. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

In the gaming machine F15, the notification effect setting means sets a first notification effect period and a second notification effect period that is set after the first notification effect period as the period during which the notification effect is executed. The operation performance execution means executes the operation performance during the first notification performance period, and sets the length of the second notification performance period to correspond to the specific period set by the specific period setting unit. It has a performance period variable means for changing the performance period. The gaming machine F16 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine F16, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F15, an operation performance is executed during the first notification performance period in the notification performance set from the first notification performance period and the second notification performance period, The length of the notification performance is varied by varying the length of the second notification performance period based on the operation content of the operating means during the operation performance. Therefore, when the length of the notification performance is varied, it is possible to secure a period during which the operation performance is performed, so that it is possible to perform a performance that makes it easy for the player to operate the operation means.

<Characteristics Group G> (Variation of HP display)
A determining means for executing a determination based on performance information, a variable performance executing means for executing a variable performance that varies a performance value based on a determination result by the determining means, and the variable performance is executed by the performance executing means. a first performance value determining means for determining a first performance value for varying the performance value; and when the first performance value is determined by the first performance value determining means, the performance value A gaming machine G1 characterized in that it has a second performance value determining means for determining a second performance value different from the first performance value that can be varied.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable performance for a predetermined period of time to indicate to the player whether or not he or she has won a jackpot. Then, as a variable performance, a game machine executes a performance (battle performance) in which the own character and the enemy character compete against each other, and notifies the result of whether or not the jackpot has been won based on the value of each physical strength point at the end of the performance. be. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-9075).

In such conventional gaming machines, a performance that reduces the physical strength points of the own character or the enemy character is performed multiple times during a battle performance, and the decreased physical strength points are used to incite and identify the player as to whether or not he or she has won a jackpot. By notifying the player in advance of the timing at which the performance will be executed, the fluctuating performance can be executed while increasing the player's expectations for a jackpot. Furthermore, by setting in detail the physical strength points that will be reduced during the battle performance, the number of performance patterns for the battle performance is increased and the player is prevented from becoming bored with the battle performance. However, conventional gaming machines are configured to manage detailed physical fitness points displayed on the display screen and set the next physical fitness point based on the managed physical fitness points, so physical fitness points decrease. There is a problem in that the amount of processing required for management becomes enormous. Note that it is possible to simplify the management of physical strength point reduction by reducing the patterns that reduce physical strength points during battle performances, but in this case, the performance patterns of battle performances will be reduced, and players will be forced to The problem was that people got tired of it.

According to the gaming machine G1, since the performance value is determined based on values determined by a plurality of determining means, it is easier to increase variations in the performance value than when the performance value is determined by one determination means. The effect is that it can be done.

In the gaming machine G1, there is provided a performance state setting means capable of setting a specific performance state in which the variable performance is continuously executed, and when the specific performance state is set by the performance state setting means, the performance value is set. It has a performance value updating means that continuously and variably updates the performance value, and a first performance value storage means that can store the first performance value determined by the first performance value determining means, the performance value updating means , a gaming machine G2 characterized in that the performance value is variably updated based on the first performance value stored in the first performance value storage means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1, when the performance value determined based on the first performance value and the second performance value is variably updated, the performance value is not the summed performance value, but the first performance value. Since only one performance value is stored and the performance value is variably updated based on the first performance value, the performance value that is actually displayed (the performance value that is the sum of the first performance value and the second performance value) With respect to the display pattern, it is possible to reduce the pattern of values (first effect values) that are variably updated by the effect value updating means, and there is an effect that the processing load can be reduced.

In the gaming machine G2, a performance mode setting means for setting a performance mode based on a variable amount of the performance value variably updated by the performance value updating means, and a performance for displaying the performance mode set by the performance mode setting means. A gaming machine G3 characterized in that it has a mode display means.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine G2, a performance mode based on the variable amount of the performance value variably updated by the performance update means is displayed, so that by looking at the performance mode to be executed, This has the effect of being able to inform the player of the variable amount of performance value in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the gaming machine G3, the first performance value is a part of the performance value, and the second performance value is composed of a value different from the first performance value, and the first performance value and the A gaming machine G4 characterized in that it has a performance value summing means for calculating the performance value by adding it up with a second performance value.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G3, the first performance value, which is a part of the performance value, and the second performance value, which is different from the first performance value, are added up by the performance value summing means. Since the performance value is determined, there is an effect that the performance value can be made more diverse.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, a benefit is granted based on a determination means that performs determination when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, and that the result of determination by the determination means is a specific determination result. A gaming machine G5 comprising: a privilege granting means, wherein the first effect value is determined by the first effect value determining means when the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G1 to G4, the first effect value is determined when the discrimination by the discriminating means is performed, and the effect value is variable, so the change situation of the effect value and the It is possible to perform the performance so that there is a correlation with the determination result of the determination means. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the changing situation of the performance value, and there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In any of gaming machines G1 to G5, the second performance value determining means determines the second performance value based on the first performance value determining means determining the first performance value. Game machine G6 featuring the following.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the second performance value is determined when the first performance value is determined, so that the first performance value and the second performance value are determined. The performance value that is the sum of the values is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the variable amount of the performance value that has been changed due to the execution of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of prediction.

A gaming machine G7 in gaming machine G5 or G6, characterized in that the first performance value determining means causes the first performance value to vary by a variable amount based on a result of determination by the determining means.

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G5 or G6, the variable amount of the performance value can be varied based on the determination result of the determining means, so the variable amount of the performance value can be changed for the player. This has the effect of making it possible to draw attention to the viewer's attention, thereby increasing the production effect.

In the gaming machine G7, the first effect value determining means facilitates determining the first effect value so that the variable amount becomes large when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result. Game machine G8 is characterized by certain things.

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G7, the larger the variable amount of the performance value, the easier it is to give a benefit, so it is possible to make the player pay close attention to the variable amount of the performance value. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines G1 to G8, the second performance value determined by the second performance value determining means is selected as a first range or a second range different from the first range. and determined value determining means for determining whether the first effect value determined by the first effect value determining means is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, The means determines the second effect value by selecting one selection range from among the plurality of selection ranges stored in the selection range storage means based on the determination result of the determination value determination means. Game machine G9 featuring the following.

According to the gaming machine G9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G8, the selection range in which the second performance value is selected can be varied based on whether the first performance value is greater than or equal to a predetermined value. can be set. Therefore, there is an effect that variations in performance values can be easily increased.

In the gaming machine G9, the selection range storage means stores a first selection range in which a range in which the first performance value can be increased or decreased is stored as the second performance value, and a range in which the first performance value can be decreased. and a second selection range in which is stored, and the second effect value determining means determines that the first effect value is less than a predetermined value as a result of determination by the determined value determining means. The gaming machine G10 is characterized in that the second selection range is selected and the second performance value is set.

According to the gaming machine G10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G9, when the first performance value is less than a predetermined value, a second performance value that decreases the first performance value is selected, so that the first performance value is reduced. It is possible to suppress the effect value obtained by adding up the value and the second effect value from becoming larger than the first effect value. As a result, for example, when a lower limit value (for example, 0) is determined as the first effect value, it is possible to prevent a value larger than the lower limit value from being determined as the effect value, giving the player a sense of discomfort. This has the effect that it is possible to suppress execution of effects that would otherwise cause the user to lose control.

<Characteristics H group> (Notification of advantageous period of falling lottery machine)
A first determining means that performs a determination when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, and a bonus game execution that executes a bonus game when a first determination result by the first determination means is a predetermined first determination result. a high probability state in which the first discrimination result by the first discrimination means is more likely to be the predetermined first discrimination result; and a state in which the first discrimination result by the first discrimination means is more likely to be the predetermined first discrimination result than the high probability state. When the predetermined discrimination condition is satisfied in a state in which the high probability state is set by the probability setting means and the probability setting means that can set a low probability state that is unlikely to result in the first discrimination result, It has a second discrimination means for performing discrimination, and the probability setting means sets the low probability state when the second discrimination result by the second discrimination means is a predetermined second discrimination result. gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state in which the predetermined discrimination condition is more likely to be satisfied and a second gaming state in which the predetermined discrimination condition is more difficult to satisfy than the first gaming state; and a period effect execution means for executing a period effect for notifying the period in which the first game state is set by the game state setting means, wherein the game state setting means comprises: In a state where the first gaming state is set, the second gaming state is set when a first condition is satisfied, and the period effect execution means determines whether or not the first condition is satisfied. The period effect is repeatedly executed, which is composed of a first effect to show the performance and a second effect to determine the mode of effect of the first effect, and the first condition is set by the probability setting means. Established when both the first requirement that the low probability game is set and the second requirement that the first determination means performs a predetermined number of determinations in the state where the first gaming state is set are satisfied. A gaming machine H1, characterized in that the gaming machine H1 is characterized in that it has a period performance mode setting means for setting a performance mode of the period performance in response to information on the establishment of the first requirement or the second requirement.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the gaming state is set to an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a variable probability state where the probability of winning a winning is high) based on the fact that the player has won a winning. 2. Description of the Related Art There is a gaming machine that indicates to a player whether or not a period in which a gaming state continues ends based on the result of a performance (for example, a battle performance). (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2011-143197).

In such conventional gaming machines, if a win is won in which the advantageous gaming state continues, the result of a winning pattern in which the own character wins is displayed, and if the winning pattern is won in which the advantageous gaming state ends, the result of the winning pattern is displayed. The battle performance is now displayed so that the performance result of a defeat pattern in which the player loses is displayed, and if there is no winning (if the advantageous gaming state is still set), the performance result of a draw pattern with no win or loss is displayed. Since this is executed, it is possible to make the players pay close attention to the content of the battle performance, and it is possible to enhance the performance effect. However, if a game is played for a long period of time without winning in an advantageous gaming state, a battle effect in which the result of a draw pattern is displayed becomes more likely to be executed, and the player's response to the battle effect becomes more likely to be executed. There was a problem that the level of expectations for Furthermore, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines are configured so that if a specific variable pattern is drawn as a result of the lottery without winning, a battle effect of a draw pattern is executed. When specific variable patterns are drawn consecutively, there is a problem in that battle effects of draw patterns are executed continuously, further lowering the player's expectations for the battle effects.

According to the gaming machine H1, of the period effects executed in the state in which the first gaming state is set, the performance mode of the second performance is set in accordance with the establishment information of the first requirement and the second requirement. Based on the performance mode of the second performance, it is possible to predict whether the first requirement and the second requirement are met. As a result, even if the period performance is repeatedly executed, the player can predict the game state based on the performance mode of the newly executed second performance. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress early boredom with period effects.

A gaming machine H2 characterized in that in the gaming machine H1, the period performance mode setting means includes a first performance mode setting means for setting a performance mode of the first performance.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1, the performance mode of the first performance for indicating whether or not the first condition is satisfied is the effect of the first requirement or the performance mode of the first performance, in addition to the performance result of the second performance. Since it is set based on whether or not the second condition is met, it is possible to predict whether the first condition is met or not and the situation until the first condition is met, depending on the performance mode of the first performance. I can do it. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the performance mode of the first performance, and there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

A gaming machine H3 in the gaming machine H1 or H2, wherein the period performance mode setting means has a second performance mode setting means for setting the performance mode of the second performance.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H1 or H2, the performance mode of the second performance for determining the performance mode of the first performance is based on whether or not the first requirement or the second requirement is met. Therefore, it is possible to predict the situation until the first condition is satisfied depending on the performance mode of the second performance. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay attention to the performance mode of the second performance, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the period performance mode setting means sets a different performance mode when either the first requirement or the second requirement is satisfied. Characteristic gaming machine H4.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the production mode of the period production is changed due to the fulfillment of any one of the plurality of requirements for satisfying the first condition. Variable. Therefore, it is possible to predict the period until the first condition is satisfied depending on the performance mode of the period performance. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay attention to the performance mode of the period performance, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine H4 has a remaining period determining means for determining the remaining period until the second requirement is satisfied, and the period performance mode setting means is configured to determine the remaining period determining means when the first requirement is satisfied. A gaming machine H5, characterized in that a presentation mode of the period presentation corresponding to the determination result is set.

According to the gaming machine H5, the performance mode of the period performance is set based on the remaining period until the first condition is satisfied. Thereby, the remaining period until the first condition is satisfied can be suggested depending on the performance mode of the period performance. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the players to play the game while giving them a sense of crisis, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the period performance execution means switches the period performance being executed from the second performance to the first performance when a predetermined performance switching condition is satisfied; It is characterized in that the ease with which the performance switching condition is satisfied is made different between when the high probability state is set by the probability setting means and when the low probability state is set. Game machine H6.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, a high probability state is set by the probability setting means and a low probability state is set by the probability setting means. Since the frequency at which one effect is executed can be varied, the currently set probability state can be predicted based on the frequency at which the first effect is executed, and the interest of the game can be improved. There is an effect.

A gaming machine H7 characterized in that the gaming machine H6 has a condition setting means that makes it easier to satisfy the production switching condition for a predetermined period after the first requirement is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H6, the first effect can be easily executed for a predetermined period after the probability setting means sets the low probability state. Therefore, it is possible for the player to predict the currently set probability state based on the frequency with which the first performance is executed, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In any of gaming machines H1 to H7, the period effect execution means executes the first effect when the first discrimination result by the first discrimination means is the predetermined first discrimination result. The gaming machine H8 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H7, the first effect is executed even when the discrimination result of the first discrimination means is a discrimination result that a bonus game is executed. Therefore, when the first performance is executed, the player watches the performance while being aware of both whether or not he has won the bonus game and whether or not the first condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the performance being executed, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Any one of the gaming machines H1 to H8 has a number measuring means for measuring the number of times the period effect is executed while the first gaming state is continuously set by the gaming state setting means. The gaming machine H9 is characterized in that the second performance mode setting means sets the second performance mode based on the number of executions of the period performance measured by the number of times measurement means.

According to the gaming machine H9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H8, when the period effect is repeatedly executed, the second effect mode is set based on the number of times the period effect is repeated. When the gaming state is continuously set for a long period of time, it is possible to prevent the same performance mode from being repeatedly set as the second performance mode. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting bored with the game early.

In any of the gaming machines H6 to H9, there is provided a performance period determining means for determining a performance period after the first performance is executed by the period performance execution means, and in a state where the predetermined performance switching condition is satisfied, the If the performance period determined by the performance period determining means is within a predetermined period, the first performance is restricted from being executed by the period performance execution means. Characteristic gaming machine H10.

According to the gaming machine H10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H6 to H9, even if the performance switching condition is satisfied, it is determined that the performance period after the first performance is executed is within the predetermined period. If so, execution of the first performance is regulated by the performance regulation means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first performance from being performed frequently, and therefore it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the execution of the first performance.

In the gaming machine H10, the first performance executed when the first discrimination result by the first discrimination means is the predetermined first discrimination result is not regulated by the performance regulation means. Features gaming machine H11.

According to the gaming machine H11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H10, the first performance executed when the bonus game is executed is executed regardless of the determination result of the performance period determining means, so that the bonus game is There is an effect that it is possible to suppress deterioration of the production effect when executed. Further, when the first performance is performed again within a predetermined performance period after the previous first performance was performed, the expectation level that the bonus game will be executed can be increased, and the performance effect can be enhanced. There is an effect.

<Characteristic Group J> (Target performance varies depending on the notification timing of the expectation level increase performance)
Expectation degree display control means capable of displaying on a display means a plurality of expectation degree display modes capable of suggesting expectation degrees in stages to indicate that a predetermined condition has been met; display mode changing means for changing the expectation level display mode in stages; variable information setting means for setting variable information to be varied by the display mode changing means; and at least one expectation level display mode among the plurality of expectation level display modes. variable suggestion effect execution means for executing a variable suggestion effect suggesting that the degree of degree display mode is variable; A gaming machine J1, characterized in that the display mode is displayed on the display means at different timings, and has an execution timing setting means for setting the timing for executing the variable suggestion performance.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable performance for a predetermined period of time to indicate to the player whether or not he or she has won a jackpot. Then, as the display mode of the character displayed on the display screen in the performance that is executed for a predetermined period, there are multiple display modes corresponding to the expectation level of the jackpot, and the level of jackpot expectation of the current variable performance is displayed. There is a gaming machine that notifies the player based on the display mode of the character. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-248305).

In such conventional gaming machines, the degree of expectation of a jackpot can be shown to the player by the display mode of the characters displayed during the variable performance, so it is possible to make the player interested in the content of the variable performance that is executed. It is possible to enhance the performance effect. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, among the plurality of display modes, multiple types of expectation display modes are provided in which display modes corresponding to the expectation level of a jackpot are displayed, and the display modes of each expectation display mode are combined. Since it is possible to suggest the jackpot expectation level to the player by making a judgment based on the It was possible to make the player pay attention to the content, and it was possible to enhance the presentation effect. In addition, the gaming machine having the above-mentioned configuration is configured to be able to execute a suggestion effect for suggesting the display mode of the expectation level display mode, and to suggest which display mode will be displayed as the expectation level display mode. There is also a gaming machine that is configured to perform an expectation level display mode advance suggestion effect that allows the player to predict in which display mode the expectation level display mode will be displayed as a variable effect. Furthermore, there is also a gaming machine that changes the display mode of the expectation degree display mode from the display mode that is once displayed on the display screen.

However, in a gaming machine that has multiple types of expectation level display modes, if an expectation level display mode advance suggestion performance corresponding to a specific expectation level display mode is executed, expectations that are not subject to the expectation level display mode advance suggestion performance. This implicitly negates the fact that the degree display mode is variable, which poses a problem in that the presentation effect is reduced.

According to the gaming machine J1, the variable suggestion effect that suggests that one of the expectation level display modes is to be changed among the plurality of expectation level display modes displayed on the display means at different timings is executed by the variable suggestion effect execution means. executed. Since the execution timing of the variable suggestion performance is set by the execution timing setting means, the execution timing of the variable suggestion performance can be made different. This has the effect that even if the same presentation mode is used as the variable suggestion presentation, the expectation display mode to be suggested by the variable suggestion presentation can be made different.

In the gaming machine J1, a discriminating means that performs discrimination when a predetermined discriminating condition is satisfied; and a privilege granting means that awards a privilege based on the fact that the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means is a specific discrimination result; A gaming machine J2, characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1, when a privilege is given, the expectation level display mode can be made easier to indicate a high expectation level, so that the player can easily display the expectation level display mode. I'll have to keep an eye on the content. Therefore, there is an effect that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the gaming machine J3 is characterized in that the variable suggestion performance notifies variable information of an expectation display mode that is varied in stages.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1 or J2, it is possible to notify the variable information of the target expectation level display mode by the variable suggestion performance, so that the variable suggestion performance can be provided to the player. This has the effect of attracting attention and enhancing the production effect.

In the gaming machine J3, the variable suggestion effect is one in which a plurality of variable amounts are displayed, including at least a variable amount for indicating the extent to which the expectation level display mode is actually varied. J4.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J3, a plurality of variable amounts are displayed as variable suggestion effects, so that among the plurality of variable amounts displayed to the player, the larger variable amount is displayed. It is possible to make the player play the game with expectations that the amount will be the actual variable amount, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

Any of the gaming machines J1 to J4 has a target notification means for notifying an expectation display mode that is a target of the variable suggestion performance executed by the variable suggestion performance execution means before the variable suggestion performance ends. A gaming machine J5 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, by notifying the player in advance of the target of the variable suggestion performance that will be executed this time, the variable suggestion effect that is executed for the player is This has the effect of making it possible to enjoy the suggestive presentation with peace of mind.

In any of gaming machines J2 to J5, an expectation type setting means for setting an expectation type based on the determination result of the determination means; and an expectation type setting means for setting an expectation type based on the expectation type setting means. , an expectation level setting means for setting an expectation level for each of the plurality of expectation level display modes, and the expectation level display control means includes the plurality of expectation level display modes set by the expectation level setting means. An expectation level display mode for indicating at least a part of the expectation level of the expectation level is displayed in advance, and the variable suggestion effect is set by the expectation level setting means that is already displayed. The gaming machine J6 is characterized in that the variable amount indicates a difference between the expected level and the expected level.

According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J2 to J5, an effect is performed that suggests the difference between the already displayed expectation level and the preset expectation level as a variable amount. Therefore, even if the amount of variable displayed as a variable suggestion effect is small, if the variable suggestion effect is executed for an expectation display mode in which a high expectation level is already displayed, a benefit will not be granted. It is possible to increase the possibility that Therefore, not only the performance contents of the variable suggestion performance but also the display mode of the current expectation level display mode are selected by lottery, which has the effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine J2, there is an operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation performance execution means that executes an operation performance for causing the operation means to be operated, and an operation performance execution means that executes the operation performance during the operation performance executed by the operation performance execution means. operation determining means for determining that the means has been operated, and the display mode changing means varies the expectation level display mode in response to a determination result by the operation determining means. Characteristic game machine J8.

According to the gaming machine J8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J2, the display mode of the expectation level is changed in response to the operation on the operating means, so that the player can be motivated to operate the operating means. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine J8, a determining means that performs a determination when a predetermined determination condition is met; a bonus game execution means that executes a bonus game when the result of the determination by the determining means is a predetermined determination result; an acquisition means for acquiring ball entry information when a predetermined acquisition condition is met, and a predetermined number of pieces of information acquired by the acquisition means that are stored up to a predetermined number until the predetermined determination condition is met. a possible storage means, a preliminary determination means for performing preliminary determination based on the ball entering information stored in the storage means, and a number of ball entering information indicating the number of the ball entering information stored in the storage means. In a gaming machine having a means for displaying the number of ball entering information to be displayed, when a predetermined additional condition is satisfied, the number of entering ball information displayed by the number displaying means for ball entering information corresponding to the determination result by the operation determining means. A game machine J9 characterized in that it has an additional effect execution means for executing an additional effect that changes a display mode for indicating the number of ball input information.

According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J8, the display mode for indicating the number of ball entry information can also be varied by additional effects performed in response to operations on the operating means. This has the effect that the player can be motivated to operate the operating means.

The gaming machine J9 has performance condition determining means for determining whether the expectation level display mode displayed by the expectation level display control means satisfies a predetermined performance condition, and the performance condition determining means satisfies the performance condition. The gaming machine J10 is characterized in that the additional condition is satisfied when it is determined that the game is not played.

According to the gaming machine J10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J9, an additional performance is executed when the expectation level display mode displayed on the display means does not satisfy a predetermined performance condition. This has the effect of creating relevance and enhancing the production effect.

In the gaming machine J10, the performance condition determining means determines that the performance condition is not satisfied when the expectation level display mode is not displayed a predetermined number of times by the expectation level display control means. Game machine J11.

According to the gaming machine J11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J10, by executing additional performances, the number of performances to be executed can be supplemented, so that the desire to play is reduced due to the small number of performances to be executed. This has the effect of suppressing the decrease.

<Characteristic K group> (Jackpot performance with consecutive holds)
A discriminating means that executes a discrimination when a predetermined discriminating condition is met, a privilege game executing means that executes a privilege game when a result of discrimination by the discriminating means is a predetermined discrimination result, and a predetermined acquisition condition. an acquisition means for acquiring ball entry information when the determination condition is satisfied, and a storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of ball entry information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number until the predetermined determination condition is satisfied. , and a pre-determination means for performing pre-determination based on the ball entry information stored in the storage means, wherein the pre-determination means satisfies at least a pre-determination condition during the bonus game. The above-mentioned preliminary determination is carried out when the above-mentioned preliminary determination means performs the above-mentioned preliminary determination, and the present invention is characterized in that it has a performance mode setting means for setting a performance mode during the bonus game in accordance with the determination result of the above-mentioned preliminary determination means. Game machine K1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is provided a holding means that can acquire ball entry information based on a ball entering a starting slot and hold the ball entry information until a lottery condition is met, and a holding means that can hold the ball entry information until a lottery condition is satisfied. a lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery based on the entry information when the lottery result is a winning result of the lottery means, and an execution means for executing a winning game that is advantageous to the player when the lottery result of the lottery means is a winning result. There are gaming machines. The system has an advance determination means for determining in advance the entry information held in the reservation means before the lottery is performed by the lottery means, and the advance determination means determines that there is a hit in the reservation at the end of the winning game. There is a gaming machine that, when it is determined, continues to display the display mode (number of rounds) during the winning game. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2014-30737).

In such a conventional gaming machine, if the player wins again while on hold, a special effect can be executed during the second-time game, giving the player a sense of satisfaction. However, the configuration is such that the winning information that is withheld at the end of the jackpot is determined, and during the first-time game, the effect set at the time of winning is only executed, so for example, if you win during the first-time game, There is a problem in that even if winning information is withheld, it is not possible to change the performance for the first-time game, and the performance effect cannot be enhanced.

In addition, although the configuration is configured so that the effects are continuous for multiple winning games, only the effect that allows the player to easily identify the break between the first-seen game and the second-seen game is executed. There was a problem in that it was easy to predict how many winning games would be executed during performances that were performed continuously during winning games.

According to the gaming machine K1, since the performance mode during the bonus game is set based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means executed during the bonus game, compared to the case where the performance mode during the bonus game is set in advance. This has the effect of reducing the processing load when setting the performance mode corresponding to the preliminary determination result.

In the gaming machine K1, the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means is one in which a plurality of small bonus games are executed, and the prior determination condition is satisfied when the small bonus game is executed. Game machine K2 is characterized by being a game machine.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1, the pre-determination condition is satisfied when a small bonus game is executed, and the performance mode during the bonus game is set, so that the execution status of the small bonus game It is possible to set the performance mode of the bonus game according to the player. Therefore, even if the performance mode of the bonus game is set during the bonus game, there is an effect that the bonus game can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

The gaming machine K2 includes a bonus game selection means for selecting one bonus game among the plurality of bonus games in which a different number of small bonus games are executed as the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution unit. Game machine K3 is characterized by being a game machine.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K2, one bonus game is selected from a plurality of bonus games in which a different number of small bonus games are executed, so that the content of the bonus game does not change. It has the effect of being able to provide variety and improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine K3, the advance determination means includes, when the result of the advance determination is a predetermined advance determination result, the storage means includes the ball landing information for executing the bonus game. The performance mode setting means sets the performance mode during the bonus game in accordance with the number of small bonus games to be executed in the bonus game that is determined in advance by the advance determination means. A game machine K4 is characterized in that it is a gaming machine that

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K3, the performance mode during the bonus game is set according to the number of small bonus games determined by the advance determination means, so that the player is not distracted during the bonus game. This has the effect of making it possible to draw attention to the presentation mode.

In the gaming machine K3 or K4, an execution number storage means for storing the number of minor bonus games of the bonus games selected by the bonus game selection means, and a number of the minor bonus games stored in the execution number storage means. the number of minor bonus games notifying means for notifying at least a part of them, the number of minor bonus games stored in the execution number storage means, and the minor bonus being reported by the number of minor bonus games notifying means. a first difference determining means for determining the difference between the number of games and a notification for setting the number of the minor bonus games to be notified by the minor bonus game number notification device based on the determination result of the first difference determining device; A gaming machine K5 characterized by having a number setting means.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K3 or K4, by partially reporting the number of small bonus games (round games) to be executed during the bonus game (big win), one bonus game can be played. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of small bonus games to be executed during a game, and even while the bonus games are being executed, the player can play the game while expecting more small bonus games to be executed. It has the effect of being able to

A gaming machine K5, characterized in that it has an adding means for adding the number of the small bonus games to be executed in the bonus game pre-determined by the pre-determination means to the execution number storage means. Machine K6.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K5, if the advance determination means determines in advance that a bonus game will be executed during a bonus game (jackpot), in the bonus game determined in advance. The number of small bonus games to be executed is stored in the execution number storage means by the addition means. As a result, when bonus games are executed multiple times at short intervals, the number of small bonus games that are announced while the previous bonus game is being executed is reduced to the number of small bonus games that are announced during the execution of the previous bonus game. It can be set by taking into account the number of Therefore, by looking at the number of small bonus games notified during the bonus game by the small bonus game number notification means, it is possible to predict whether the next bonus game will be executed or not, and one bonus game is completed. This has the effect of creating a sense of anticipation for the subsequent game.

The gaming machine K5 or K6 has an update determining means for determining whether to update the number of minor bonus games notified by the minor bonus game number reporting device when the minor bonus game is executed. Game machine K7 is characterized by certain things.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K5 or K6, the update determining means determines whether to update the number of small bonus games notified by the small bonus game number reporting means, so that the number of notifications is Even if the number of small bonus games is set by the setting means, the number of small bonus games may not be updated. Therefore, even if the number of small bonus games notified by the small bonus game number notification means is not updated when a new small bonus game is executed, the next time a small bonus game is executed, It is possible to leave the possibility that the number of small bonus games notified by the small bonus game number reporting means will be updated, and it is possible to have the player play games while expecting that more small bonus games will be executed. effective.

In the gaming machine K7, if the determination result by the first difference determining means satisfies the first condition, forced updating means updates the number of minor bonus games notified by the minor bonus game number reporting device. A gaming machine K8 characterized in that it has.

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K7, when the determination result by the first difference determining means satisfies the first condition, the forced update means notifies the small bonus game number reporting means. By forcibly updating the number of small bonus games available, it is possible to set a period during which the player can play the bonus games with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine K7 or K8, a number of executed small bonus games notifying means for notifying the number of the small bonus games that have already been executed, and a number of the small bonus games being notified by the number of small bonus games notifying means; a second difference determining means for determining the difference between the number of minor bonus games reported by the number of executed minor bonus games reporting means, and a case where the determination result by the second difference determining device satisfies the second condition; A gaming machine K9 characterized in that it has a forced updating means for updating the number of the small bonus games notified by the small bonus game number notification means.

According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K7 or K8, if the determination result by the second difference determining means satisfies the second condition, the forced update means notifies the small bonus game number reporting means. To prevent the number of executed small bonus games from becoming larger than the number of small bonus games notified by a small bonus game number reporting means, in order to forcibly update the number of small bonus games that have been played. It has the effect of being able to

In any of the gaming machines K5 to K9, the small bonus game number notification means performs the preliminary determination of the ball landing information acquired by the acquisition means during a specific period out of the period in which the bonus game is being executed. The gaming machine K10 is characterized in that, when the result is the predetermined predetermined result, notification of a specific number of small bonus games is executed.

According to the gaming machine K10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K5 to K9, ball entry information acquired within a specific period during the period during which the bonus game is being executed is used as a result of advance determination to determine whether the bonus game is being played. If the player has won, a specific number of small bonus games is notified by the small bonus game number notification means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the fun of acquiring ball entry information during the bonus game.

In any of the gaming machines K5 to K10, the number of small bonus games stored in the execution number storage means and the number of small bonus games notified by the executed small bonus games number reporting means. a third difference discriminating means for discriminating the difference; and when the determination result of the third difference discriminating means satisfies a third condition in a state where the first privilege game has ended, the first privilege game has ended; The gaming machine K11 is characterized in that it has a performance continuation means that continues the performance executed during the bonus game until a specific condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine K11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K5 to K10, if the determination result by the third difference determining means satisfies the third condition, the performance continuation means executes the bonus game during the bonus game. The effect will continue to be displayed. This has the effect that when the advance determination means determines that the bonus game will be executed, the effect that will be executed during the bonus game can be continuously displayed after the first bonus game ends. be.

In the gaming machine K11, the gaming machine K12 is characterized in that the specific condition is not satisfied at least until the next bonus game is executed.

According to the gaming machine K12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K11, the performance continuation means executes during the bonus game during the period from the end of the first bonus game until the second bonus game is executed. It is possible to reliably execute the performance. Therefore, since it is possible to execute a series of performances for multiple bonus games, it is possible to have the player play the games while expecting that more small bonus games will be executed while the performance is being executed. effective.

In any one of the gaming machines K5 to K12, a storage number determining means for determining the number of ball hitting information stored in the storage means when the determination result by the determining means is a predetermined determination result; performance mode storage means for storing a plurality of performance modes executed during a bonus game, and the performance mode storage means stores performance mode storage means based on the number of the ball entry means determined by the memory number determination means. A gaming machine K13 characterized in that it has a bonus game performance mode selection means for selecting one performance mode from the plurality of performance modes.

According to the gaming machine K13, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K5 to K12, if a predetermined determination result is obtained, the performance mode during the bonus game is determined based on the number of ball entry information stored in the storage means. is selected, it is possible to provide various effects to the player during the bonus game. Therefore, there is an effect that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine K13, the performance mode storage means stores information about the plurality of performance modes at the time when the bonus game is started, indicating that the result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means is the predetermined preliminary determination result. The gaming machine K14 is characterized in that it stores at least a first performance mode that can be notified to the player and a second performance mode that can be notified to the player after the bonus game ends.

According to the gaming machine K14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K13, it is notified that the result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determining means is a predetermined preliminary determination result, based on the performance mode selected by the bonus game performance mode selection means. Since the timing of the display can be varied, the performance effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristics L group> (Change performance frequency based on game history)
A determining means that executes a determination when a determination condition is satisfied, a performance execution means that performs a performance to show the determination result of the determination means, and a performance that shows the specific determination result by the performance execution means. a benefit granting means for granting a benefit that is advantageous to the player when executed; a storage means for storing corresponding game information as history information when a specific condition is met; A gaming machine L1 is characterized in that it has a determining means for determining whether to execute a specific performance among the performances based on the history information.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable performance for a predetermined period of time to indicate to the player whether or not he or she has won a prize. As a variable performance that is executed for a predetermined period of time, there is a gaming machine that executes an operation performance in which the performance mode is variable based on the operation result of an operation means that can be operated by a player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-249877).

In such a conventional gaming machine, since the performance mode is varied based on the content of the player's operation on the operating means, the player can be motivated to participate in the game. However, there has been a problem in that if the operation performance is frequently performed for a player who does not operate the operating means voluntarily, the player's desire to play decreases.

According to the gaming machine L1, since the execution of the specific performance is determined based on the history information, the execution frequency of the specific performance can be varied depending on the progress of the game, etc., and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine L1 includes an effect selection table storage means in which a plurality of effect selection tables are set such that selection rates of the specific effects are set to be different, and the determining means selects the effect corresponding to the history information. A gaming machine L2 is characterized in that it determines a table.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L1, the selection rate of a specific effect can be switched by selecting the corresponding effect selection table, so the selection rate of a specific effect can be varied with easy control. It has the effect of being able to

The gaming machine L1 or L2 includes an operating means operated by a player and an operation determining means capable of determining whether a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means, and as one of the effects, the above-mentioned An operation performance that changes the performance mode when the predetermined operation is determined by the operation determination means is set, and the specific condition is that at least one of the predetermined operations is determined by the operation determination means. A gaming machine L3 is characterized in that it is set to the following conditions.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L1 or L2, operating the operating means in the operation production not only changes the performance mode but also makes it easier to satisfy a specific condition, so history information This has the effect of being able to vary the execution rate of a specific performance.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, at least a storage means capable of storing the history information, a setting means capable of setting an accumulated value up to a predetermined value based on the accumulation result by the storage means, and the setting means. a selection means for selecting an accumulation benefit system corresponding to the accumulated value to be set from among a plurality of accumulation privilege systems; and an accumulation benefit granting means for imparting an accumulation benefit corresponding to the accumulation benefit system selected by the selection means. and, when the new accumulation value is set by the setting means, the accumulation benefit granting means grants a new accumulation benefit corresponding to the accumulation value privilege selected by the selection means. The gaming machine is characterized in that the selection means selects one accumulated benefit system from a plurality of accumulated privilege systems based on the history information stored in the storage means. F4.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, an accumulated privilege system is selected based on the accumulated history information, and an accumulated privilege corresponding to the accumulated privilege system is provided. Thereby, both the setting of the frequency at which the specific performance is performed and the granting of accumulated benefits are performed based on the history information. Therefore, there is an effect that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine L4, the gaming machine L5 is characterized in that the accumulated privileges awarded by the accumulated privilege granting means are different for each of the accumulated privilege systems selected by the selection means.

According to the game machine L5, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine L4, the accumulated benefits granted depending on the accumulated benefit system can be varied, so it is fun to acquire various accumulated benefits while changing the operation contents of the operating means. can be provided to players. Furthermore, by varying the operation contents of the operating means, it is possible to vary the frequency of presentations, which has the effect of providing players with new enjoyment in the presentations that are performed.

The gaming machine L5 is characterized by having a history information erasing means for erasing the history information stored in the storage means to a state where the selection means can select a different accumulation privilege system. Game machine L6.

According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L5, history information can be deleted to the point where different accumulated reward systems can be selected, so compared to the case where all history information is deleted, the following It is possible to make it easier to select the accumulated benefit system. Therefore, there is an effect that the motivation to acquire other accumulated benefits can be increased.

In addition, based on the history information being partially erased by the history information erasing means, the accumulated value set by the setting means will also be varied (decreased). This has the effect of being able to suppress a situation in which the production effect deteriorates due to reaching the specified value.

A gaming machine L7, which is any one of the gaming machines L4 to L6, and includes a guide means for guiding the game content to cause the selection means to select a specific accumulated benefit system.

According to the gaming machine L7, a specific accumulated benefit system can be selected by playing a game based on the game content guided by the guide means in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L4 to L6. Therefore, various accumulated benefits can be given to the players, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine L7 is characterized in that the guidance means guides game content for selecting a specific accumulation benefit system by varying the performance mode of the operation performance.

According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L7, the performance mode of the operation performance is varied by the guide means, so that different accumulation benefit systems can be selected simply by operating the operation means according to the performance mode of the operation performance. will be done. Therefore, it is possible to provide various benefits to the players, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine L8, the guide means selects one of the following as a presentation mode of the operation presentation: a notification presentation mode that notifies the operation device to perform the predetermined operation, and a non-information presentation mode that does not notify. A gaming machine L9 is characterized in that it guides the game content using a button.

According to the game machine L9, as the operation performance, it is possible to execute a performance mode in which a predetermined operation is easily performed on the operating means and a performance mode in which it is difficult to perform a predetermined operation on the operating means. Just by operating it, you will be able to select different accumulation benefit systems. Therefore, it is possible to provide various benefits to the players, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

Any one of the gaming machines L4 to L9 has a system selection means that allows the player to select the specific accumulated privilege system corresponding to the game content guided by the guide means from among the plurality of accumulated privilege systems. A gaming machine L10 characterized in that it is a gaming machine L10.

According to the gaming machine L10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L4 to L9, it is possible to notify the game content so that the accumulated bonus system desired by the player is selected, thereby further enhancing the production effect. It has the effect of being able to

In any of gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B9, C1 to C8, D1 to D6 and E1 to E8, F1 to F16, G1 to G10, H1 to H11, J1 to J11, K1 to K14, L1 to L10, The gaming machine K1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B9, C1 to C8, D1 to D6 and E1 to E8, F1 to F16, G1 to G10, H1 to H11, J1 to J11, K1 to K14, L1 to L10, The gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning hole) placed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is given. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

In any of gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B9, C1 to C8, D1 to D6 and E1 to E8, F1 to F16, G1 to G10, H1 to H11, J1 to J11, K1 to K14, L1 to L10, The gaming machine K3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
S305 First discrimination means S352 Second discrimination means S353 Probability setting means S1104 Bonus game execution means S1212 Game state setting means S3806 Period performance execution means S3255 Remaining period determination means S4005 Period performance mode setting means (second performance mode setting means)

In any of gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B9, C1 to C8, D1 to D6 and E1 to E8, F1 to F16, G1 to G10, H1 to H11, J1 to J11, K1 to K14, L1 to L10, The gaming machine K3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on winning a win (for example, a variable probability state where the probability of winning is high) is set, and the period during which the advantageous gaming state continues. There are games that indicate to the player whether or not the game will end based on the result of the performance (for example, a battle performance). In this conventional gaming machine, since the period during which an advantageous gaming state will continue can be indicated by the performance, it is possible to make the player interested in the performance performed. This was intended to increase interest (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-143197).
However, there is a need for further improvement in interest.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the player's interest in playing games.
<Means>
In order to achieve this objective, the gaming machine of Technical Idea 1 includes a first determining means that performs determination when a predetermined determination condition is established, and a first determination result by the first determining means that is determined by a predetermined first determination condition. a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game when the first determination result is a first determination result; a high probability state in which the first determination result by the first determination means is likely to be the predetermined first determination result; and the high probability state. a low probability state in which the first discrimination result by the first discrimination means is less likely to be the predetermined first discrimination result; and the high probability state is set by the probability setting means. and a second discriminating means that executes discrimination when the predetermined discriminating condition is satisfied, and the probability setting means is configured such that the second discriminating result by the second discriminating means is the predetermined second discriminating means. If the determination result is a determination result, the low probability state is set. A game state setting means capable of setting a second game state that is difficult to establish, and a period performance execution means for executing a period performance for notifying a period in which the first game state is set, using the game state setting means. and the gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state when a first condition is satisfied in a state where the first gaming state is set, and the gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state when the first gaming state is set, and executes the period effect. The means repeatedly executes the period performance, which is composed of a first performance for indicating whether or not the first condition is satisfied, and a second performance for determining a performance mode of the first performance. The first condition is a first requirement that the low probability state is set by the probability setting means, and a predetermined number of determinations are performed by the first determination means in the state where the first gaming state is set. and a second requirement that is satisfied, and period presentation mode setting means for setting a presentation mode of the period presentation in response to information on the establishment of the first requirement or the second requirement. It has the following.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, in which the period effect mode setting means has a second effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the second effect.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, in which the period performance mode setting means is configured to perform a period production mode setting means when either the first requirement or the second requirement is satisfied. This is to set different performance modes.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, which has a remaining period determining means for determining the remaining period until the second requirement is satisfied, and the period effect mode setting means When the first requirement is met, a performance mode of the period performance is set corresponding to the determination result of the remaining period determination means.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 to 4, in which the period effect execution means executes the period effect being executed when a predetermined effect switching condition is satisfied. The second performance is switched to the first performance, and the performance switching condition is changed depending on whether the high probability state is set by the probability setting means or the low probability state is set. They differ in the ease with which they are established.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, when a predetermined discrimination condition is satisfied, the first discrimination means executes discrimination, and the first discrimination result by the first discrimination means is a predetermined first discrimination result. In some cases, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game, a high probability state in which the first determination result by the first determination means is more likely to become the predetermined first determination result, and a higher probability state than the high probability state. a low probability state in which the first discrimination result by the first discrimination means is unlikely to be the predetermined first discrimination result, and a probability setting means that can set the high probability state by the probability setting means; , further comprising a second discriminating means for performing discrimination when the predetermined discriminating condition is satisfied, and the probability setting means is configured such that the second discriminating result by the second discriminating means is the predetermined second discriminating result. In this case, the low probability state is set, and the gaming states include a first gaming state in which the predetermined discriminating condition is more likely to be met, and a second gaming state in which the predetermined discriminating condition is more difficult to satisfy than the first gaming state. A game state setting means capable of setting a second game state, and a period performance execution means for executing a period performance for notifying a period in which the first game state is set by the game state setting means. The gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state when the first condition is satisfied in the state where the first gaming state is set, and the period effect execution means sets the second gaming state when the first gaming state is set. The period performance is repeatedly executed, and is composed of a first performance for indicating whether or not the first condition is satisfied, and a second performance for determining the performance mode of the first performance. The first condition includes a first requirement that the low probability state is set by the probability setting means, and a second requirement that the first determination means performs a predetermined number of determinations in the state where the first gaming state is set. The present invention is satisfied when both of the requirements and are satisfied, and includes a period presentation mode setting means for setting a presentation mode of the period presentation in response to information on the establishment of the first requirement or the second requirement. be.
Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the period effect mode setting means has a second effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the second effect.
Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the period presentation mode setting means sets a different presentation mode when either the first requirement or the second requirement is satisfied.
Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, the following effects are achieved. That is, there is a remaining period determining means for determining the remaining period until the second requirement is met, and the period presentation mode setting means is adapted to the determination result of the remaining period determining means when the first requirement is satisfied. This is to set the performance mode of the corresponding period performance.
Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 to 4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the period performance execution means switches the period performance being executed from the second performance to the first performance when a predetermined performance switching condition is satisfied, and the probability setting means switches the period performance that is being executed from the second performance to the first performance. The ease with which the performance switching condition is satisfied is made different depending on whether the state is set or the low probability state is set.
Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Claims (5)

a first determining means that performs a determination when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied;
a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game when the first determination result by the first determination means is a predetermined first determination result;
a high probability state in which the first discrimination result by the first discrimination means is more likely to be the predetermined first discrimination result; and a first discrimination result by the first discrimination means than the high probability state is the predetermined first discrimination result. a probability setting means that can set a low probability state that is unlikely to result;
a second discriminating means that performs discriminating when the predetermined discriminating condition is satisfied in a state in which the high probability state is set by the probability setting means;
The probability setting means sets the low probability state when the second discrimination result by the second discrimination means is a predetermined second discrimination result,
A gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state in which the predetermined discrimination condition is more likely to be met and a second gaming state in which the predetermined discrimination condition is more difficult to satisfy than the first gaming state;
A gaming machine comprising: period effect execution means for executing a period effect for notifying the period in which the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means,
The gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state when a first condition is satisfied in a state where the first gaming state is set,
The period performance execution means executes the period performance, which is composed of a first performance for indicating whether or not the first condition is satisfied, and a second performance for determining a performance mode of the first performance. It is executed repeatedly,
The first condition includes a first requirement that the low probability state is set by the probability setting means, and a first requirement that the first determination means performs a predetermined number of determinations in the state where the first gaming state is set. It is established when both of the following two requirements are satisfied,
A gaming machine characterized in that it has a period performance mode setting means for setting a performance mode of the period performance in response to information on the establishment of the first requirement or the second requirement. 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the period effect mode setting means includes a second effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the second effect. 3. The period presentation mode setting means sets a different presentation mode when either the first requirement or the second requirement is satisfied. Game machine. comprising a remaining period determining means for determining the remaining period until the second requirement is satisfied;
4. The period presentation mode setting means sets the presentation mode of the period presentation corresponding to the determination result of the remaining period determination means when the first requirement is satisfied. Game machine. The period performance execution means switches the period performance being executed from the second performance to the first performance when a predetermined performance switching condition is satisfied,
It is characterized in that the ease with which the performance switching condition is satisfied is made different between when the high probability state is set by the probability setting means and when the low probability state is set. A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4.

Images